PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

GOVERNMENT OF KERALA

Kerala Public Works Department Manual

Revised Edition 2012
(Revised as per G.O.(P)No.13/2012/PWD dated 01.02.2012)

1
PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2
PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

3
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

PREFACE

The PWD Manual is the basic document which outlines the functioning of the State
Public Works Department. The existing Manual was originally prepared in the year 1972 and
since then the structure and functioning methodology of the department have undergone major
changes.
To keep pace with the contemporary requirements, Government of Kerala felt the need to
update the PWD Manual incorporating the development in the administrative and engineering fields
to enhance skills and efficiency of the department. With this objective Government have constituted
a Sub-committee vide GO (MS) No.34/2005/PWD dated 04-07-2005 for reviewing the preliminary
draft of the Manual prepared as part of institutional strengthening of PWD. The PWD Manual has
been revised considering the relevant Government Orders and Departmental Circulars and
incorporating the innovative reforms and best practices in construction technology.
The revised Manual has three parts in separate volumes (1) the Administrative Provisions
(2) Work Methodology (3) Appendixes. It also lays down elaborate explanation and procedure
of the PWD Code.
The revised Manual should be followed by the entire officers of the Department
involved in Investigation, Design, Planning, Estimating, Bidding (Tendering), Execution and
Maintenance of all types of works generally carried out by the various wings of PWD. The
relevant codes shall also be revised.

MANOJ JOSHI IAS

Thiruvananthapuram Secretary to Government
01.02.2012 Public Works Department

4
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

CONTENTS

Sl. No SECTION TITLE SECTION Nos.

1. Introduction Organizational Setup 101-114

114
Part-I – Administrative Provisions
2. Duties and Responsibilities & Powers 201-215
215
3. Human Resources and Training 301-313
313
4. IT & MIS 401-408
408
5. FMS 501-503
503
6. Planning Policy 601
7. Planning, Budgeting & Funding 701-715
715
8. Geographical Information System (GIS) 801-812
812
9. Road Maintenance System (RMMS) 901-909
909
10. Safety 1001-1013
1013
11. Environmental Management 1101-1108
1108
12. Social Impact Management 1201-1205
1205
Part – II – Work Methodology
13. Project Preparation 1301-1302
1302
14. Investigation 1401-1408
1408
15. Design 1501
16. Estimate 1601
17. Schedule of Rates 1701
18. Sanctions 1801
19. Registration of Contractors 1901-1902
1902
20. Bids (Tenders) and arrangement of contracts 2001-2019
2019
21. Contract Management 2101-2119
2119
22. Execution of works 2201-2218
2218
23. Design, Execution and Maintenance of Electrical works 2301-2309
2309
24. Quality Control 2401-2405
2405
25. Asset Management 2501
26. Maintenance of Roads 2601-2608
2608
27. Maintenance of Bridges 2701-2706
2706
28. Maintenance of Buildings 2801-2811
2811
29. Maintenance of Movable Assets 2901-2919
2919
Part-III
30. Appendices

5
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Section 100
101. Introduction and Organizational Setup

101.1 General
The PWD is the statutory authority for designing, planning, monitoring, constructing and
undertaking maintenance of public works of the State Government, such as buildings, roads, etc,
irrespective of the source of funds for the same. The Department also takes up works on PPP and Turn
Key basis with financial support from outside agencies including International agencies.
102 Organizational set up
Each wing of the department is under the administrative control of a Chief Engineer, such as
Roads and Bridges, Buildings and National Highways, there shall be one or more Circle under the
control of Superintending Engineers under each Chief Engineer. Each circle consists of a number of
Divisions under the control of Executive Engineers. The Divisions are divided into subdivisions under
the control of Assistant Executive Engineers and the Subdivisions in turn are divided into a number of
Sections under charge of Assistant Engineers. Chief Engineer (Administration and Designs) shall control
the administration of the department, design, research, investigation, quality control and management,
environment and social management & IT. There is a Design, Research, Investigation and Quality
control Wing under the control of Chief Engineer (Administration & Designs) having Superintending
Engineer’s and other supporting staff. There is also an Architectural wing under the administrative and
technical control of a Chief Architect for preparing Architectural drawings for PWD. A Deputy Chief
Architect and other officers assist the Chief Architect.
Pattern of organization set forth above shall be modified, as and when decided by the
Government consequent on the formation of projects for special purposes or on other grounds.
102.1 Head Quarters (Chief Engineer’s Office)
The Chief Engineer is the administrative and professional head of each branch of the department
and he is in control of and is responsible for its efficient functioning. He is also the technical advisor to
Government on all matters relating to his branch. The Chief Engineer (A&D) shall be Ex-Officio
Additional Secretary to Government. A Deputy Chief Engineer in the rank of Superintending Engineer
and other technical and non-technical officers assist the Chief Engineer. The office organization shall
include a technical wing and an administrative wing under the control of a Deputy Chief Engineer and
financial wing under the control of a Financial Officer with sufficient complement of subordinate
technical and ministerial staff. In addition to the above, the Chief Engineer who controls Buildings shall
have an electrical wing under the control of a Superintending Engineer (Electrical) and an Electronics
wing under the control of an Executive Engineer (Electronics). The office organization shall include an
Environment and Social Cell also.
102.2 Circle Office
The Administrative unit of the department is the circle under the control of a Superintending
Engineer who is responsible to the Chief Engineer for the administration and general professional
control of public works within his circle. The Superintending Engineer has also powers of sanctioning
estimates and entering into contracts within the limits of powers delegated to him. The Superintending
Engineer shall be assisted by Deputy Superintending Engineer and other officers and support staff in the
management of the office and control of the technical branch. There will also be generally a Financial
Assistant to assist him in financial matters and an Administrative Assistant with supporting staff for
administration.
102.3 Division Office
The main executive unit of the department is the division under the control of an Executive Engineer
(divisional officer), who controls the work of all the subdivisions under his jurisdiction. The Executive
Engineer is responsible for the proper execution of all works in his Division and also in guiding and
controlling the subordinate officers in regard to investigation, designs, estimates etc. He has also powers of
sanctioning estimates and entering into contracts within the limits of powers delegated to him. As disbursing
officer of the Department, all payments for works, supplies and services shall be made by the Executive
Engineer in the Division or through the Sub Divisions and Sections under him. The Executive Engineer shall
render the prescribed accounts to the Accountant General. The Division Office shall have three branches, viz.
Technical Branch, Accounts Branch and Establishment Branch. The Technical Branch shall be under an
Assistant Engineer (Works), Accounts Branch under a Divisional Accountant and Establishment Branch
under a Senior Superintendent in offices where such an officer is posted or by the Junior Superintendent with
necessary technical and non-technical staff. The Deputy

6
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Executive Engineer shall have control over the three branches and shall submit all files to Executive
Engineer. He shall also hold charge of the office in the absence of the Executive Engineer.
102.4 Sub Division Office
The work of sections is controlled by a sub-division under the control of an Assistant Executive
Engineer who is vested with powers, within his delegation, to sanction estimates, enter into contracts and
make payments. The Assistant Executive Engineer has also to guide subordinate officers in the matter of
investigation and preparation of estimates, and take all steps necessary to ensure that all works under
charge of the subdivision are properly executed. He has to maintain and render accounts as prescribed in
the rules and orders in force. Assistant Executive Engineer shall be subdivision officer of the department
between Taluk & District level.
102.5 Section office
The lowest executive unit of the organizational set up is the section office under the control of
an Assistant Engineer whose jurisdiction may be territorial or functional. In the case of territorial
sections, all the works of the particular branch within the area of jurisdiction of the section will be under
the control of the Section Officer or Assistant Engineer. In the case of sections other than territorial
sections, the Section Officer or Assistant Engineer will be under the control of specific works or specific
functions. For carrying out, executive and supervisory functions the section will have the required
number of Overseers, and other staff like Drivers, Operators, etc. For assisting him in the ministerial
work there will be a clerk attached to his office. Where the section is under the control of departmental
execution of works, required staff shall be deployed. In addition to executive functions, the Assistant
Engineer has to maintain the primary records of all transactions relating to works, supplies and services
under his control and renders accounts to his superior authorities as per rules. Assistant Engineer shall be
Taluk level officer of the department.
103 Functional Set Up
1*
The work of the Department is carried out mainly through five wings, viz. Roads & Bridges,
Buildings, National Highways, Projects and Administration & Design Wing, with an organisational set
up covering the entire State. General matters, which are common to more than one branch such as
Establishment, Vigilance etc., are handled by Chief Engineer Administration & Designs, with
headquarters at Thiruvananthapuram.
There shall be a planning and monitoring cell, which is under the control of an Executive
Engineer, in each wing. One or more Assistant Executive Engineers and Assistant Engineers shall assist
the Executive Engineer. This wing shall be in synchronisation with National Informatics Centre to
monitor the planning and progress of development schemes.
The concerned Chief Engineer heads each wing of the department. The Chief Engineer
(Administration & Designs) is the authority for all administrative matters of the department. For
technical matters, the concerned Chief Engineer is the final authority and he can render advice to Govt.
as and when called for. However, Chief Engineer’s Committee headed by the Chief Engineer
(Administration & Design) shall decide technical matters common to two or more wings. The
Government makes policy decisions
103.1 Administration
Chief Engineer (Administration & Designs) shall deal with matters common to all branches. The
Chief Engineer under the control of administration shall deal with matters involving interpretation or
modification of existing rules and procedures. He shall issue, revise or modify circulars pertaining to all
branches in consultation with the Chief Engineers concerned or as decided in the Chief Engineers
Committee.
103.1.1 Establishment
Chief Engineer (Administration & Designs) shall be controlling all Establishment matters of the
department and shall be assisted by a Deputy Chief Engineer Administration and a Senior
Administrative Officer. The Deputy Chief Engineer Administration and the Senior Administrative
Officer shall be supported by an Administrative Assistant (General) and an Administrative Assistant
(Ministerial) respectively with necessary complement of subordinate staff. They shall consult the
concerned Chief Engineers if required whenever establishment matters relating to other branches are
involved. Besides, there shall be an Administrative Assistant (Treasury) under the control of the Chief
Engineer (A&D) and an Administrative Assistant (PF) under the control of the Chief Engineer
Administration & Designs with necessary complement of subordinate staff.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1*. Seven wings. Separate wing for the Road maintenance is created under Chief Engineer (Road
Maintenance) vide GO (Ms) No. 39/2017/PWD dated 29.06.2017 and Roads & Bridges wing is divided
into two as Roads wing under Chief Engineer (Roads) and Bridges wing under Chief Engineer (Bridges)
vide GO(Ms) No. 8/2018/PWD dated 27.03.2018.
7
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

103.1.2 Human Resources Development, Planning & Public Relations

The HRD Cell shall be headed by the Executive Engineer under the direct control of Chief
Engineer (A&D). They are also responsible for the revision of Schedule of Rates and the Data Book.

103.1.3 Vigilance
The Deputy Chief Engineer, (Vigilance), shall assist Chief Engineer Administration & Designs
to process the annual confidential reports of officers for promotion, conduct enquiries regarding
allegations raised against any departmental staff, and randomly inspect offices and works for conformity
with rules. An Executive Engineer, Assistant Executive Engineer, Administrative Assistant and Senior
Superintendent of Vigilance wing and subordinate staff shall assist him in these activities.
The DCE (Vigilance) may also inspect important works after completion, as also during
progress for ensuring (a) conformity to specifications (b) execution is as per accepted schedule.
104 Roads & Bridges 1*
Roads & Bridges deals with planning, project preparation, construction and maintenance and
arrangement of works of all State Highways, Major District Roads and bridges of the department. It has
its headquarters at Thiruvananthapuram and is under the control of a Chief Engineer of the Public Works
Department assisted by Deputy Chief Engineer, a Senior Finance Officer supported by technical and
other ministerial support staff.
104.1 Planning
There shall be a planning section under an Executive Engineer (Planning). The planning section
in the Chief Engineer’s office is responsible for preparation of the Budget proposals, collection and
processing of progress reports in coordination with the Circle and Division offices.
104.2 Road Safety
A Director in the rank of Superintending Engineer shall head the Road Safety Cell of the
department. He shall be supported by Assistant Executive Engineers and Assistant Engineers with
required support staff. It shall be the responsibility of the Road Safety Cell to co ordinate the road safety
activities implemented by the PWD. However the implementation of road safety works shall be done
through the regular Division offices. Director, Road Safety Cell shall liaise and correspond with Road
Safety Authority at Govt. level.
104.3 IT Cell
Public Works Department shall have an IT Cell to coordinate the installation and maintenance of
infrastructure facilities for computer hardware and software, and support systems like RMMS, GIS and
FMS as well as to provide web connectivity through the PWD web Portal. An Executive Engineer
supported by required Engineers and other support staff heads the IT cell. It shall also provide necessary
training to all staff in consultation with the HRD Cell under Administration Wing. The Executive
Engineer (IT) shall be the Nodal Officer for the implementation of IT in the department. The functions
of the Cell shall include the following.
1. Initiate steps to
a. Develop the PWD web portal.
b. Evolve PWD-specific IT strategic plan.
c. Prepare an IT enabled efficiency improvement framework including networking and applications
for PWD operations.
d. Implement GIS & RMMS in road management.
2. Day-to-day system administration, content management and operation of the PWD portal.
3. Overseeing and monitoring the implementation of Financial Management System (FMS) in PWD.
4. Co-coordinating and facilitating training activities related to the above.
5. Co-coordinating and facilitating IT services and outsourcing activities of the department.
6. Identifying the best-of-class practices followed within and outside the country so that such measures
as appropriate could be incorporated in PWD.
7. Any other function related to IT.
The expenditure on purchase and maintenance of necessary hardware, software and accessories
and all related costs shall be met from the fund allocated in the budget exclusively for IT activities.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1*. Separate wing for the Road maintenance is created under Chief Engineer (Road Maintenance) vide
GO (Ms) No. 39/2017/PWD dated 29.06.2017 and Roads and Bridges wing is divided into two as Roads
wing under Chief Engineer (Roads) and Bridges wing under Chief Engineer (Bridges) vide GO(Ms) No.
8/2018/PWD dated 27.03.2018.

8
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

104.4 GIS and RMMS cell

There shall be a GIS and RMMS Cell in the Chief Engineer’s office under the overall control of
the Executive Engineer (IT) supported by technical and non-technical staff. (Details regarding their
functions are enumerated in section 900 for GIS and section 1000 for RMMS).

104.5 Works funded by NABARD

The Nabard Cell in the Chief Engineer’s (A&D) office, headed by an Assistant Executive
Engineer, is responsible for obtaining project report from subordinate offices and scrutiny of the same
for onward submission to Government /Nabard. Assistant Engineers support the Assistant Executive
Engineer with necessary support staff. The Cell shall be responsible for monitoring the progress of all
NABARD works and submit the monthly report to the Chief Engineer.

The Senior Finance Officer, Roads and Bridges shall collect the expenditure details from the
concerned Divisions in the prescribed proforma consolidate and forward the details to the finance
department for reimbursement.
104.6 Construction and Maintenance of Roads and Bridges
The construction and maintenance works shall be tendered, and agreement executed by the
Superintending Engineers, Executive Engineers, Assistant Executive Engineers and Assistant Engineers
concerned, as per the delegation of powers.
104.7 Quality Control Cell
There shall be a Quality Control Cell at state, zonal & district level under the Chief Engineer
(Administration & Designs). There shall be Quality Control Cells at zonal level headed by Executive
Engineer and at district level controlled by Assistant Executive Engineer. There shall be Assistant
Executive Engineer and Assistant Engineer to support Executive Engineer at zonal level and two
Assistant Engineers and supporting staffs for district level Cell. Each district shall be equipped full-
fledged laboratory with essential quality testing equipments. The mandatory tests stipulated in the
MoRTH and National Building Code for material and workmanship and shall be carried out as referred
in the chapter for quality control (2401). This Cell also acts as Quality Assurance Cell at the time of
preparation of DPR for works requiring pre-qualification of contractor.
104.8 Environment and Social Cell
An Executive Engineer shall head the Environment and Social cell, and will be assisted by an
Assistant Executive Engineer (Environment)/ Environmentalist and an Assistant Executive Engineer
(Social), Sociologist and other support staff. The Environmental and Social Cell shall necessarily vet all
major projects costing above Rs. 15crores for which detailed project report shall be prepared by the
Project Preparation Unit (PPU). The cell will provide advice on all aspects of the environment
requirements included in the Manual and also be responsible for monitoring the effectiveness of the
implementation. The cell shall also conduct random environment inspection/audit during and after
execution of the project.
105 Buildings Wing
The buildings wing shall deal with planning, project preparation, construction, maintenance and
arrangement of works including water supply, electrification and electronic works of public buildings. It
shall have its headquarters at Thiruvananthapuram and is under the control of a Chief Engineer assisted
by Deputy Chief Engineer and a Senior Finance Officer supported by technical and non-technical staff.
105.1 Planning
An Executive Engineer shall control the Planning Cell assisted by adequate technical staff. The
cell is responsible for the preparation of the Budget proposals, collection and processing of progress
reports in coordination with subordinate offices.
105.2 Construction and Maintenance of Buildings
The construction and maintenance of buildings works shall be tendered, and agreement executed
by Superintending Engineers, Executive Engineers, Assistant Executive Engineers and Assistant
Engineers as per delegation of powers.
The following special offices shall function under the Chief Engineer (Buildings).
Judicial Circle at Ernakulam headed by a Superintending Engineer, who shall be responsible for the
administration and general technical control of judicial building works within the state. The
Superintending Engineer shall be supported by Deputy Superintending Engineer, and other technical and
non-technical staff.
Kerala Legislature Complex Construction Division under the Building South Circle in
Thiruvananthapuram is exclusively for the works related to legislature complex and shall be headed by
an Executive Engineer. He shall be supported by Deputy Executive Engineer, Divisional Accountant
with necessary technical and non-technical subordinate staff. There shall be adequate number of

9
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Subdivisions and Sections exclusively for the works of the legislature complex. There shall be an
Electronic Subdivision attached to this division.
There shall be a Special Building Division in Thiruvananthapuram under the Superintending Engineer
(Buildings South Circle), for the construction of major buildings. The construction and maintenance
works of Kerala Houses outside the state shall be under this Division. There shall be adequate Sub
divisions and Sections under this Division.
105.3 Electrical Works
There shall be a Superintending Engineer (Electrical) in the office of the Chief Engineer,
Buildings and shall assist the Chief Engineer on all matters concerning electrical works including
preparation of specifications, data, etc for the whole state. There shall be a Deputy Executive Engineer
(Electrical) and other technical and non-technical staff for assisting in Superintending Engineer
(Electrical). There shall be Division offices at different places in the state, each under the control of an
Executive Engineer assisted by Assistant Executive Engineer (Electrical) and other technical and non-
technical staff.
In the case of Irrigation Projects the electrical works shall be carried out through Electrical wing
of P.W.D. Wherever necessary, the services of the Executive Engineer, Electrical Division shall also be
availed for advice on matters connected with electrification and other electrical works with the approval
of the Chief Engineer, Buildings. However urgent petty electrical works for the functioning of an office,
the same may be carried out by the Admn. department using their own funds.
105.4 Electronics Wing
Electronics wing of PWD shall carry out the maintenance and operations of the sound system in
the Legislative Assembly and arrange for the installation and maintenance of public address systems for
all government functions and functions connected with the visit of VIP’s and VVIP’s. Installation and
maintenance of all audiovisual equipments of government departments, installation and maintenance of
intercom systems in government offices, TV sets in government buildings, rendering training facilities in
electronic, equipments etc. shall be attended to by this wing. The Electronics wing shall also carryout the
works connected with the installation, net working, repairs and maintenance of computers and auxiliary
items in connection with computerization. The prevailing rules for audio visual equipments shall be
made applicable to the computerization as well. The Electronics wing shall also assist the installation
and maintenance of infrastructural facilities for computer hardware and software, and support systems
like GIS, FMS and RMMS.
There shall be one Executive Engineer (Electronics) attached to the office of the Chief Engineer,
Buildings and Sub divisions and Section offices at different places in the state with adequate
complement of subordinate staff.
106 Architectural Wing
There shall be an Architectural wing headed by a Chief Architect. The Chief Architect is
responsible for the preparation and finalization of all architectural drawings for buildings and similar
works to be executed by the Public Works Department, in consultation with the Chief Engineer
(Buildings) and concerned departments. Though primarily intended for the Buildings branch, the
assistance of this wing shall be availed of for architectural designs in the other branches such as bridges
highway structures land scaping and urban beautification etc. The Chief Architect shall be responsible
for scheme of landscaping, layout, interior fittings, decorations etc. in the most economical manner.
A Deputy Chief Architect and other sufficient technical and non-technical staff shall assist the
Chief Architect
107 National Highway Wing
National Highway wing shall deal with planning, project preparation, construction and
maintenance and arrangement of works of all National Highways and it’s bridges. It has its headquarters
at Thiruvananthapuram and shall be under the control of a Chief Engineer of the Public Works
Department assisted by Deputy Chief Engineer and a Finance Officer supported by technical and non-
technical subordinate staff.
107.1 Public Private Participation Unit (PPPU)
There shall be a PPPU under the Chief Engineer, NH to deal with the PPP arrangements headed
by Superintending Engineer supported by Executive Engineer, Assistant Executive Engineers, Assistant
Engineers and with the assistance of Transport Economist from the panel of experts in Chief Engineer
(A&D) office.
108 Projects
Externally aided projects and specialized projects shall be under the Chief Engineer (projects).
Necessary technical and other staff, as per the requirement, supports the Chief Engineer. Functions of
the Chief Engineer shall be decided as per the requirement of the project.

10
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

109 Design Research Investigations and Quality Control

Design, Research, Investigation and Quality control shall be headed by the Chief Engineer
(A&D) and deal with design of buildings, bridges and other structures referred to it. In the design wing
Directors in the grade of Superintending Engineer assist the Chief Engineer. The Chief Engineer (A&D)
shall be assisted by an establishment wing in his office in all establishment matters.
109.1 Kerala Highway Research Institute (KHRI)
The Kerala Highway Research Institute at Thiruvananthapuram carries out research & quality
control works and gives advice and guidance for advanced construction works undertaken by the
department. The Institute shall be under the overall control of the Chief Engineer (A&D).

The Director (Research) assisted by Deputy Directors and Assistant Directors heads the
institute. There are five divisions viz., Administration, Publication & Planning, Soil Mechanics and
Foundation, Concrete, Traffic and Flexible Pavement, each headed by a Deputy Director and assisted by
Assistant Directors.
Administration, Publication & Planning Division is responsible for the preparation and
publication of research reports prepared by other Divisions and general administration of the Institute.
109.2 KHRI Laboratory
The KHRI Laboratory shall provide guidance in setting up the local laboratories, both in respect
of equipping them and training the personnel. These laboratories shall carry out confirmatory tests of
samples collected by the Assistant Executive Engineer (Quality Assurance)/Quality Assurance Units
during routine inspections of various works at the site. Besides, calibration of equipment of field
laboratory shall be another task assigned to KHRI Laboratory.
Soil Mechanics and Foundation Division shall be responsible for testing of soil samples, giving
technical advice on the type of foundations for various structures, roads and embankments and remedial
measures for failure due to foundation problems.
Concrete Division shall be responsible for testing of concrete cubes, cement mortar bricks etc.
The Division shall be also responsible for preparation of lists on availability of various types of
construction materials with name of places where they are available.
Traffic Division shall be responsible for conducting traffic studies in National Highways, State
Highways, and Major District Roads & Other District Roads. The division shall also be responsible for
conducting studies at accident-prone locations and suggesting remedial measures to eliminate possibility
of accidents.
Flexible Pavement Division shall conduct studies on different types of road pavements. This
division shall do experimental research work on various aspects in pavement design. This division shall
also conduct research studies on pavements of roads subjected to traffic and construction problems. This
institute shall cater to all the training requirements of PWD.
109.3 Quality Management Cell
There shall be a Quality Management Cell under the Director (Research) for monitoring the
implementation of quality procedures in PWD. Testing of all State Government works shall be done at
KHRI. It also conducts test for other departments and agencies on their request, by levying prescribed
fees. All the necessary equipments and facilities for conducting all types of tests are available at KHRI
and shall certify for quality of works.
109.4 Research
KHRI has necessary facility to take up all kinds of fundamental and applied research works. The
Institute shall also take up research work on behalf of other public bodies subject to such terms as may
be prescribed by the Chief Engineer (A&D). An advisory body of experts in different discipline of
engineering shall be guiding the research and training needs. These experts shall be drawn from various
centers of excellence. The Chief Engineer (A&D) in consultation with Govt. shall select these experts.
109.5 Project Preparation Unit
There shall be Project Preparation Unit under Director KHRI. The PPU shall prepare Detailed
Project Report (DPR) of works costing more than 15crores. This limit shall stand modified to the extend
proportional to the enhancement of schedule of rates as fixed by the Chief Engineer (A&D).
109.6 Library
All codes for reference, technical books and publications etc. for department shall be made
available in a properly catalogued library formed in KHRI and Design Wing under Chief Engineer
(A&D).

11
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

110 Financial Management System (FMS)

For the implementation of FMS, the setup shall be as follows.
Chief Engineers Office Circle Office Division Office Sub Division Office
Sr. Finance Officer Financial Assistant Divisional Accountant Head Clerk
Asst Exe. Engineer (Planning) Asst Exe. Engineer Asst Engineer (Works) Drafts man
(Planning)
Junior Superintendent Junior Superintendent Clerk (Budget Section) Clerk
LD/UD Clerk Clerk (Budget Section)

111 Repairs of Vehicles and Machineries

The repairs and maintenances of all the vehicles and machineries shall be attended to in consultation and
with the approval, wherever necessary, of the Irrigation Department. The concerned Divisions shall conduct
fuel consumption testing, estimates for repair and maintenance, work supervision for department vehicles,
inspection of and issue of fitness certificate for road construction equipments of contractors, work
supervision for repair and maintenance of road construction equipments, road roller, refrigerators, chiller
plants HVAC, Air conditioner set etc. They also conduct valuation of vehicles (also for confiscated
vehicles), recommendation for condemnation etc. There shall be a mechanical subdivision with
Assistant Executive Engineer and Assistant Engineer under the control of legislature complex building
division for all its mechanical related works, erection, commissioning and repair of HVAC chiller
plants, Lifts, etc. The Assistant Executive Engineer and two Assistant Engineers in the mechanical
subdivision Alappuzha are attached to National Highway Division Alappuzha for operation,
maintenance and repairs of equipments under National Highway wing, testing of fuel consumption,
maintenance and repairs of vehicles of National Highway wing, inspection and issue of fitness
certificate for road construction equipments of contractors of NH.
111.1 Workshops
For all departmental requirements, Government approved workshops may be approached. For
major Projects, separate workshops may be established as part of the Project work at suitable places.
These are generally of a temporary nature and the workshops may be closed after the project work is
completed or retained in a reduced scale as a service workshop for the operation and maintenance of the
completed project. The staff pattern shall be dependent on the size and character of the workshop.
112 Stores
There shall be stores for electrical and electronic materials attached to the concerned electrical
Division and electronics wing. These stores shall be under the administrative control of the Executive
Engineer of the concerned wing. The actual custody of the stores shall be with the Assistant Executive
Engineer of the concerned wing of the PWD who shall operate the stores and keep accounts of
transactions. The procurement of stores is arranged by the Chief Engineer (Buildings) with the assistance
of the Superintending Engineer (Electrical) for electrical items and Executive Engineer (Electronics) for
electronic items in his office.
113 Liaison Officer, High court
There shall be a liaison office headed by an Assistant Executive Engineer in the Advocate
General’s Office at Ernakulam for attending to the cases in the High Court of Kerala.
113.1 Liaison Officers in other departments
There are Liaison Officers in the rank of Executive Engineer of PWD in other departments to
coordinate the construction activities of PWD for these departments viz. Directorate of Public
Instructions, Directorate of Health Service, Police Department, Directorate of Collegiate Education,
Directorate of Industries and Commerce Department etc.
114. Designers, Architects and Finance Specialist
If necessary the Chief Engineer (A&D) shall hire the services of experts of Designers,
Architecture and Finance or any other specialists required by the department at the state level to advise
the Chief Engineer (A&D) in finalizing the plans and designs of buildings and bridges and to advise on
PPP projects from the panel of experts. The selection of experts for the panel shall be done by the Chief
Engineer (A&D). The expenses for employing the experts shall be charged to the Project/work.

12
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

GOVERNMENT OF KERALA

Kerala Public Works Department Manual

Revised Edition 2012

PART – I

ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS

Section 200

201. Duties and Responsibilities

13
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

The duties and responsibilities of the officers of the department are given below. As regards
other officers, they shall continue carrying out such duties and hold such responsibilities, as at present,
based on existing rules, orders of superior officers and or conventions until they are modified.
The officers shall also be responsible for the duties and responsibilities assigned to the
subordinate officers reporting to him in the office.
In addition, the following shall be considered as part of the duties of every officer of the department.
1. Every officer shall, if called upon by his superior officers, carry out as a temporary measure, in
addition to his duties and responsibilities, those of another officer who is on leave or otherwise not
available.
2. Every officer shall also carry out any duties as assigned to him by his superior officers.
3. If an officer has to be absent from his post on leave or for other reasons, he, or his superior officer
shall make necessary arrangement, for the conduct of the work in the absence of the officer.
4. Every officer shall bestow adequate care on the protection of Government property entrusted to his
charge.
5. Every officer shall carry out such work as he may be called upon to do from time to time by
Government or the superior officers.
6. Every officer must safeguard the interest of the State particularly, in emergencies and unforeseen
circumstances.
7. Every officer shall co-operate with other officers of the department and officers of other departments
wherever necessary for the proper conduct of Government business.
8. PWD Officers who control works shall see that the provisions of the safety code and protection
arrangements are strictly adhered to. Inspecting officers shall take necessary action in this regard.
9. All Engineers are responsible for ensuring that the environmental requirements warranted in the
Manual are met in their respective job functions.
10. Wherever necessary, adequate fencing or other means of isolating weak spots in structures under use
shall be provided until the weakness is removed. In addition warning notices shall also be displayed.
11. In respect of structures under maintenance of the PWD, vulnerable portions shall be inspected and if
any weakness is noticed steps shall be taken urgently to strengthen or replace the weak portions of
the structure. Chief Engineers shall issue appropriate detailed instructions in this regard applicable to
various types of structures like roads, buildings, bridges, under passes, flyovers and culverts etc.
12. PWD Officers shall see that sufficient environment protection arrangements are strictly observed in
the office premises as well as at work sites. Inspecting officers shall take necessary action in this
regard.
13. Every officer in charge of project preparation and execution shall see that minimum destruction is
caused to individuals or community in terms of loss of physical assets, access and livelihood.
14. In the case of accidents, the responsibilities of each officer shall be as detailed in Section 1000
15. If there is obstruction in the discharge of duties of any officer by an outsider, it will be proper for the
officer to have the obstruction removed either directly or with the help of the police.
16. Every officer shall guide and control the work of his subordinates. If there is any disobedience,
malingering, insolence, etc on the part of the subordinates, it is open to the controlling officer to
initiate disciplinary proceedings against them after reporting the matter to the higher authority.
202 Duties and responsibilities Common to Specific Posts
202.1 Chief Engineer
It shall be the responsibility of Chief Engineer to ensure that the functions relating to his wing are
carried out efficiently. For this purpose he shall among other things arrange to:
1. ensure that policies of government in regard to development programmes are implemented in a
timely manner.
2. plan, organise and co-ordinate works based on budget allocations.
3. advise government on all technical matters under his control through the Chief Engineer
Administration & Designs or those referred by the government.
4. give timely instructions and guidance to subordinate officers on various matters.
5. issue approval for publishing the information on the website (WINGS) relating to his wing.
6. inspect major work sites and works which require his guidance or instruction, record the
comments in the work spot order book and circulate the inspection note to all concerned for
follow up action
7. have a proper assessment of the requirements of essential items of stores and to have them
procured, stocked and distributed according to necessity.
8. allot funds under various heads as per budget allocation to the various divisions.
9. ensure that works being tendered has sufficient fund allocation.
10. exercise administrative, financial and technical powers delegated to him.

14
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

11. see that the rules regarding accounting and financial control at various levels are properly
enforced
12. prepare details for answering legislative assembly questions, submissions and budget speech for
the Government.
13. have a system of monitoring the progress of work and the appropriate corrective steps wherever
required.
14. Before the commencement of a financial year, the Chief Engineers shall prepare a programme
on all ongoing works and submit to Government.
15. The Chief Engineer shall, without waiting for any notice or call from Public Accounts
Committee/Committee on Public Undertakings, submit explanatory notes on paragraphs and
reviews included in Audit Reports, C & A G Reports indicating the action taken or proposed to
be taken. This may be done within a period of two months of publication/presentation of reports
in the Legislature.
16. submit monthly statements showing progress of clearance of audit objections to the
Administrative Department of the Secretariat and take necessary steps to clear such objections
before the close of the Financial year
17. designate a senior officer for ensuring prompt attention to audit objections and inspection reports
18. periodically review and monitor the quality control system.
19. accord sanction for investigation estimates according to powers delegated
20. review progress of works in half yearly conferences. His observations shall be recorded in the
minutes, which shall be forwarded to all subordinate officers
21. allocate the maintenance fund to each Division at the start of every financial year by setting
apart a portion of it as reserve for carrying out emergency works.
22. scrutinize the details furnished in the budget estimates submitted by the Divisional /Circle
Officers and furnish proposals to government.
23. approve the proposal for departmental execution and issue orders fixing the ceiling cost.
24. report to Government on old curiosities, relics, coins, minerals and any other item of
archaeological importance found on excavation any ancient masonry or other old work of
interest be opened up, or any religious edifice or relic be involved in removal or destruction in
the execution of a work
25. participate in meetings of Government tender committee, Chief Engineers’ committee and Chief
Engineers’ tender committee.
In addition to the above, the Chief Engineer will also carry out such other functions assigned to him by
government by virtue of any Act or Rules.
202.2 Chief Engineer Administration & Designs (CE(A&D))
In addition to the duties and responsibilities prescribed under 202.1, the Chief Engineer
(Administration & Design) shall be responsible for the efficient and effective functioning of the
department and responsible for the administration of PWD in following.
1. Convene Chief Engineers’ committee.
2. finalize structural design.
3. Vetting of environmental and social safe guards in all major projects.
4. co-ordinate function of all wings of PWD such as Roads, Bridges, Buildings, National Highways
and Projects and liaison with government in all matters.
5. CE(A&D) shall be responsible for all administrative and establishment matters of all employees
of PWD.
6. Periodical updating of schedule of rate, plinth area rate and standard data book.
7. CE(A&D) shall be responsible to all matters relating to HRD cell, KHRI, Vigilance cell,
Structural design, quality control, environmental, legal & social management, NABARD cell,
PPU & PPP / BOT arrangements.
8. CE(A&D) shall ensure that all the inputs and infrastructure facilities are provided to all the
offices under the PWD to carry out the entrusted duties.
In addition to the above, the Chief Engineer (Administration & Design) shall also carry out such
other functions assigned to him by government by virtue of any Act or Rules.
202.3 Deputy Chief Engineer
Superintending Engineers posted in the Chief Engineer’s office shall be designated as Deputy Chief
Engineer and shall assist Chief Engineer in all official matters.
202.4 Superintending Engineer
The Superintending Engineer shall be controlling a circle and has to exercise administrative and
technical control over the various Divisions under his jurisdiction in order to ensure efficient functioning
of the departmental activities in that circle. His responsibilities shall include:
15
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

1. Issue of appropriate instructions in regard to investigation for new works wherever necessary.
2. Giving guidance in the matter of design to be followed for major works or works of a complicated
nature.
3. Obtain the DPR of original works from the Executive Engineer and process the DPR within his
powers and submit to the Chief Engineer if exceeding his powers of sanction.
4. Scrutinizing estimates and revised estimates, supplemental estimate requiring sanctions of
authorities higher than the Executive Engineer and sanctioning them or seeking sanction thereof in
accordance with the delegation of powers after verifying through site inspection the correctness
and adequacy of the proposal.
5. Inviting tenders through the PWD Website/print media and arranging contracts of works, supplies
etc, in accordance with rules and the delegation of powers and for all prequalification works
6. Periodically inspecting all important works and also the works, which require his guidance in the
matter of execution; Inspections shall be purposeful and shall cover examination of quality,
progress, difficulties in execution etc. To record the comments in the work spot order book and
circulate the inspection note to all concerned for follow up action
7. Checking expenditure against budget grant as a subordinate controlling officer and taking timely
steps to move for re-appropriations, surrender of funds or supplemental grant as may be necessary.
8. Ensuring that sanctioned staff is made available in the various offices etc. under his jurisdiction by
recruitment, promotion, transfer or otherwise as per rules.
9. Inspecting the Division offices under his jurisdiction annually with a view to ensure that the work
of the Divisions is carried out efficiently. The inspection shall cover various aspects of the
questionnaire given as Appendix 200A and the same forwarded to concerned Chief Engineer.
10. Controlling the matters connected with the establishment under his jurisdiction such as leave,
transfers and postings, promotions, disciplinary action etc.
11. Collecting, scrutinizing and coordinating all necessary information for the preparation of budget
estimates of the circle under his jurisdiction.
12. Giving technical advice or opinion on matters within his jurisdiction referred to him by
Government, other heads of department etc.
13. Directing relief and protection measures to be taken with the resources available under his jurisdiction
in the event of unforeseen calamities like flood, fire, earthquake etc. In the event of such work being
organized by other departments, cooperating with such work to the extent necessary.
14. He shall hold quarterly conference with Executive Engineers under his control to review the
progress of various works record and circulate the minutes and report to the Chief Engineer,
15. Suggesting measures for improving the technical and administrative efficiency of the department
taking into account the technical development, which has taken place and other relevant matters.
16. Monitoring the follow-up action for ensuring timely response of State Government to a audit para,
draft paras and there shall be a system for discussions with the Principal Audit Officer
17. Forward the cases to be placed before the Government Pleader/Arbitration Committees with
relevant proforma details and sufficient number of copies of notes etc. to the Government.
18. To conduct an independent quality assurance and technical audit of works
19. To suggest remedial action required to rectify the defects mentioned in the Inspection Report of
Quality Control Cell.
20. To initiate action against contractors doing inferior quality works based on the report of the
Quality Control team.
21. To conduct technical audit in files in respect of all Divisions under the circle every year and also
check the bills finalized during the last year.
22. To review functioning of the field testing laboratories and suggest remedial measures for
improving the standard of their performance.
23. To recommend and submit the workable rate for the entire work for departmental execution
202.5 Senior Sociologist/ Social Development Specialist
1. To advise PWD on all social issues and provide expert opinion on resettlement and the rehabilitation.
2. Screen all initial SIA checklist and identify area of planning and other intervention.
3. Prepare TORs for preparation of detailed Social Impact Assessment (SIA) and Resettlement
Action Plan(RAP)
4. Assets evaluation and selection of firms/agencies for preparation of RAP.
5 Monitor progress of SIA and RAP and clear projects requiring statutory social clearance.
6 Organise and conduct training programmes for field officers.
7 Advise field officers on matters relating to Land Acquisition, Resettlement and Rehabilitation
8 Evaluate SIA and Implementation of RAP.
9 Manage state level data base, update and prepare quarterly and annual reports.

16
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

10 Participate in inter disciplinary teams that may be constituted by PWD for implementation of
projects within or outside the state as and when required.
202.6 Executive Engineer
The Executive Engineer shall be responsible for the proper execution of all works under his charge. For
this purpose he shall take timely action for the following:
1) Ensure that the project reports are prepared and sanctioned in time.
2) To inspect the sites during scrutiny of estimates for verification of the correctness of the
estimates and adequacy of the provisions and give instructions wherever required.
3) To move and obtain possession of land required for the execution.
4) Invite tenders as per rules and to make contract arrangements.
5) To forecast and take steps to procure required materials and tools and plant for departmental
work and for meeting departmental obligation in contract work.
6) To provide adequate staff as per the operational needs of the Division. To supervise and manage
these staff to ensure that they carry out the duties adequately and in a professional manner
7) To inspect works during execution and give instructions wherever required.
8) To arrange periodical payments and watch expenditure.
9) To deal with such other matters as may be found necessary for proper execution.
10) To test check 10% of value of all works beyond the TS power of Assistant Executive Engineer
and to maintain a register for such check measurements.
11) To submit annual proposals for development or new construction, maintenance or repair works
under his jurisdiction with all necessary information based on the Budget Manual
12) To review progress of works in monthly conferences. His observations shall be recorded in the
minutes, which shall be forwarded to all subordinate officers
13) To consolidate progress report of works in his division to the Chief Engineer and Superintending
Engineer before 15th of every month
14) To inspect sites where poor soil conditions exists and decide the number, location and minimum
depth of bore holes to be taken.
15) To inspect and approve the foundation of works in which agreements are executed by an officer
higher than the rank of an Assistant Executive Engineer
16) To prioritise the works in his jurisdiction at the start of the financial year
17) To prepare the list of items to be stocked for the project with the approval of the concerned
Chief Engineer
18) To plan in accordance with the schedule of work and to fix the time frame of the project, in
respect of contracts entered into by him and Superintending Engineer
19) To approve materials, mix design, job mix formulae, etc.
20) To check and submit the workable rate for the departmental execution
21) To record the comments in the work spot order book and circulate the inspection note to all
concerned for follow up action
22) To keep on record & update from time to time the basic documents of property right of the Govt.
/Department i.e., land plans & land records including land given on lease to private parties or
corporations and Govt. level approved lease proposals & lease agreements signed by Assistant
Engineer.
23) To check the logbook of the equipments, machineries, plants and vehicles.
24) To report to the Chief Engineer on old curiosities, relics, coins, minerals and any other item of
archeological importance found on excavation of any ancient masonry or other old work of
interest be opened up, or any religious edifice or relic be involved in removal or destruction in
the execution of a work
25) To submit initial social assessment checklist along with all proposals for works to be
reviewed by the social cell (preliminary project report).
26) To obtain clearance from social cell for all categories of A and B where ever land acquisition
and displacement of people is involved, prior to execution of works.
27) To facilitate preparation of Land Acquisition Plan in co-ordination with Revenue Department.
28) To approve Social Impact Assessment (SIA) reports Land Acquisition Plan and Rehabilitation
and Resettlement Plan and submit to HQ for review by Social Cell under Chief Engineer
(R&B) along with detailed design report.
29) Executive Engineer should ensure that no tendering of works is done before getting
encumbrance free land for a project.
30) To prepare the annual requirements of instruments based on the shortage arising either from
inadequate supply originally or from some of the available instruments being in disorder in
Divisions, Subdivisions and Sections

17
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

31) To propose the disposal of the plants at the place or where it is transferred and to conduct
auction as per sanction received from competent authority
32) To inspect major buildings /structures periodically under his charge
33) To hire vehicles, if department vehicles are not provided, with the approval of concerned Chief
Engineer
34) To issue permit for displaying boards in government property as per rules.
35) He shall be responsible for the proper maintenance and upkeep of all structures under the
maintenance charge of the Division. In particular, he shall see that.
a. The structures are systematically and carefully inspected by himself or through his
subordinates’ particularly vulnerable portions thereof.
b. Timely action is taken to carry out essential works to prevent deterioration.
c. Regular maintenance works are carried out at the appropriate time.
36) As the disbursing officer of the Department in regard to works, supplies and services under his
charge, he has to exercise proper control over the expenditure on these items in accordance with
the rules and orders in force and render proper accounts for the same to the Accountant General
in the prescribed manner. His responsibility in this regard is detailed in the Kerala Public Works
Account Code.
37) The Executive Engineer shall exercise administrative control over the entire establishment of his
Division and regulate the establishment expenditure in accordance with rules and orders in force.
He shall also conduct periodical inspections of the Subdivision offices under his control at least
once in a year with a view to see that the administration of the subdivision is carried on properly
in accordance with rules and/or special instructions.
38) As an ex-officio member of the District Development Council, the Executive Engineer shall
keep the council informed about the progress of works and other activities of his Division and
also give technical advice on matters connected with works if called upon. He shall keep the
Superintending Engineer informed of the decision of the council in regard to matters concerning
his Division.
39) In the case of Executive Engineer controlling project and in other special cases, the control of
some stores may vest with the Executive Engineer. He shall then exercise all the controls
required in the matter of procurement, stocking, issuing and accounting of stores as a Divisional
Officer under the control of stores.
40) The Executive Engineer is responsible for the collection, remittance and accounting of P. W. D.
Revenue realisable through the Division. He has to maintain proper Division Cash Book
statements and furnish quarterly statements to the Accountant General. He shall exercise proper
control to see that the dues to Government are collected and remitted in time and leakages are
prevented.
41) In case of emergencies such as serious natural calamities the Executive Engineer shall liaison
with the District Collector and other authorities in protecting the life and property underthreat or
damaged within the limit of his jurisdiction.
42) Test check of design, and estimate etc., sanctioned by Assistant Executive Engineer.
43) Ensure quality and environmental aspects of all works
44) Ensure that the MIS is regularly updated and forwarded to HRD Cell in the Chief Office on a
monthly basis
45) Adopt the relevant quality control measures to ensure the desired quality of work.
46) Ensure proper quality of work as per specifications and for achieving designed life of the structure
47) Ensure that approved materials are used in the work.
48) Wherever necessary the Executive Engineer shall approve the sources or Samples for respective
materials.
49) Ensure that all mandatory tests have been performed at the stage of each running bill, before
payments. Executive Engineer shall verify and ensure availability of the required test
equipments for field tests as well as an updated copy of specifications and copies of accepted
schedule at sites of works.
50) Forward copy of all agreements executed by him and higher authorities to the Executive
Engineer Quality Control.
51) Prepare list of selected contractors for limited tender.
202.7 Deputy Superintending Engineer
Executive Engineer posted in the Circle office shall be designated as Deputy Superintending
Engineer and shall assist the Superintending Engineer in all official matters and he shall be the drawing
and disbursing officer for the pay and allowances in the Circle office and shall be controlling officer of
all other staff in the absence of Superintending Engineer.

18
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

202.8 Assistant Executive Engineer

1. An Assistant Executive Engineer controlling a Subdivision is responsible for the proper execution of
all works in the Subdivision. This shall include the following
i.Arrangement of contracts within his powers following the prescribed rules.
ii.Forecasting the requirements of important materials to be supplied departmentally and make
arrangements to procure them according to prescribed rules.
iii.Forecast requirements of various tools and plants for departmental
execution. iv.Check and approve setting out of works.
v.Inspect and approve foundations of structures with open type foundations, except massive
structures as per design..
vi.Conduct soil tests and other tests wherever necessary as per general or special
instructions. vii.Personally supervise all works under his jurisdiction.
viii.Give suitable guidance to subordinates in regard to works under construction.
ix.Watch and take steps to see that progress as per schedule is maintained.
x.Administer the contract to ensure that the terms and conditions are adhered to.
xi.To check measure all concealed item of work and in addition 50% value of item of each work
which are not concealed, and measured by Assistant Engineer (High value items in descending
order). He shall also super check 50% value of each concealed item of work check measured by
Assistant Engineer and 10% value of item of each work check measured by Assistant Engineer
which are not concealed.
xii.Scrutinise, pass bills and make payments as per rules.
xiii.Obtain timely orders regarding deviations from and additions or deletions to the works as per
sanctioned estimates if found necessary during execution and take follow up action by
submission of Revised Estimate, Deviation Statement etc,
xiv.Ensure before the start of the work, initial levels and details of material collection reports are
furnished to Chief Technical Examiner’s office
xv.Ensure quality of works and compliance with environmental regulations
xvi. Ensure compliance with the formalities of R&R policy and LA Act. Prepare all necessary
social reports.
xvii Adopt the relevant Quality Control measures to ensure the desired quality of work.
xviii Ensure proper quality of work as per approved specifications and for achieving designed life of
the structure
xix Furnish details of mandatory tests verified by him along with running account bill.
xx Assistant Executive Engineer should be present in all major RCC works.
2. The Assistant Executive Engineer shall also be responsible for conducting proper investigation and
scrutinising plans and estimates for new works in accordance with general and special instructions in
this regard. This shall include:
i.Giving suitable directions to subordinates regarding information to be co1lected and nature and
extent of survey work to be done.
ii.Checking site surveys, levels, nature of soil, sub soil, result of borings and all field data.
iii.Verification of the correctness of plans and adequacy of provisions in estimates by site inspection.
3. The Assistant Executive Engineer shall also be responsible for the proper maintenance of structures
under his charge and this shall include:
i.Periodically inspecting all the building/ structures, particularly the vulnerable parts in accordance
with general or special instructions in this regard.
ii.Initiating timely action for special repairs where these are needed to prevent deterioration of
structures under maintenance.
iii.Making arrangements for the execution of maintenance works according to predetermined time
table to suit the conditions.
iv.Wherever any operations are involved as for instance in ferry service or sluice gates etc., ensuring
that the operations to be carried out are in accordance with the designed scheme.
4. The Assistant Executive Engineer shall be responsible for the administrative control of the
subordinates in his Subdivision and this shall include the following:
i.See that subordinate staff and labourers are posted in the concerned Sections and if any
vacancies exist, take action for the same being filled up while at the same time make interim
arrangements for carrying on the work.
ii.Periodically examine the adequacy or excess otherwise of subordinate executive staff and labour
and take action for posting additional staff or for transfer of surplus staff according to
circumstances.
iii.Oversee the work of the subordinate staff and see that lapses in regard to proper discharge of
duties by any such personnel are dealt with promptly according to rules.
19
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

iv.See that the subordinate staff and labour are paid their wages/ salary promptly.
v.Periodically examine whether Government materials, Tools and Plants etc., under control of his
subdivision are properly looked after and where necessary take steps to correct inadequacies. .
5. Maintaining accounts as per rules and rendering the required accounts to the Accountant General
and other authorities as per rules.
6. To check and approve bench marks
7. To consolidate and forward progress report in the prescribed form for budgeted works and for other
works to the Executive Engineer before 7th of every month
8. Approve formwork for all works.
9. To plan execution in accordance with the schedule of work and to fix the time frame of the project,
in respect of contracts entered into by him
10. To check the reinforcement bars placed before concreting works
11. To scrutinize and submit the workable rate for the entire work for departmental execution
12. To record the comments in the work spot order book and circulate the inspection note to all
concerned for follow up action
13. To maintain and update periodically the basic documents of properties of Govt. / Department i.e.,
land plans & land records including land given on lease to any agency or Corporations
14. To check periodically the log book of the equipments, machineries, plants and vehicles
15. To prepare initial Social Assessment checklist and inventory of private and public properties on
the land needed for the departments and prepare LA and R&R Plan as per the PWD R&R Policy
for approval by Executive Engineer.
16. To exercise the administrative control of stores.
17. To approve all foundations for which agreement is executed by the Assistant Executive Engineer.
18. To furnish details to PPU for preparing DPR.
19. To furnish details for structural designs / architectural drawings to the respectively.
20. Submit copy of all agreements executed by him to Executive Engineer (QC).
21. Details of works arranged during VVIP visit and details of works arranged on quotation basis
waiving tender call to be furnished to Chief Technical Examiner as directed in GOs / Circular issued
from time to time.
202.9. Deputy Executive Engineer
Assistant Executive Engineer posted in the Division shall be designated as Deputy Executive Engineer
and shall be the controlling officer of all staff in the absence of the Executive Engineer.
202.10 Assistant Engineer
An Assistant Engineer posted in control of a Section is responsible for the proper execution of all works
in his Section or under his charge. This shall include:
1 While setting out works check whether the works proposed are well within the land under the
ownership of PWD.
2 Setting out works/ checking the same to see that works are carried out according to approved plans.
3 Forecasting and reporting the requirements of materials, tools and plant etc. required for works
sufficiently early so that they could be arranged for and got supplied in time.
4 Taking and recording measurements and assisting in check measurements.
5 Scrutinising contractor's bills and recording accounts of materials, if any, issued for works.
6 Supervising the progress of works and taking steps to remove bottlenecks, if any.
7 Ensuring, in the case of contract works, that all the conditions of contract are properly observed and
taking appropriate action if any of these are violated.
8 Keeping close watch of departmental works and taking necessary steps for ensuring the effective
execution of all works.
9 The upkeep and maintenance of structures under his charge.
10 Survey, Investigation and collection of all field data necessary for construction of new works or
alterations and additions to existing works or maintenance of existing structures which fall within his
jurisdiction.
11 Preparing preliminary as well as detailed estimates and reports for new works and maintenance
works and ensuring its correctness and adequacy.
12 Seeing that subordinate field staff are posted in the required places and that these persons are well
acquainted with their duties.
13 Controlling and overseeing the work of subordinate staff.
14 The safe custody and rendering proper account (as per rules) of cash, materials, scientific
instruments, tools and plant etc. entrusted to him or which pass through the section accounts.
15 Making arrangements for claiming and disbursing pay and allowances etc., for all subordinate staff
and laborers as per rules.
16 Arranging urgent necessary action in case of an emergency to protect life and Government property.
20
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

17 Furnishing information required in so far as they relate to his Section, to answer interpellations in the
Assembly, Parliament etc.
18 Making on the spot enquiries and submitting reports on matters referred to the Assistant Engineer by
superior officers.
19 Making timely arrangements for disposal of unserviceable or surplus materials, tools and plant,
scientific instruments etc.
20 Preparing and, submitting valuation report of buildings and structures, as required.
21 Adopting the relevant quality control measures to ensure that the quality of work is as per approved
specifications so as to achieve designed life of the structure.
22 Responsible for carrying out field-tests correctly and timely communication of test results to
authorities.
23 Incorporate details of mandatory tests done with every running account bill
24 To carry out investigation work.
25 To obtain the opinions of the officers of the concerned Department in regard to choice of site and
features required for the work excluding technical details
26 To implement/ communicate to the contractor in writing the instructions and orders issued through
the work spot order book by the higher officers
27 To forward progress report in the prescribed form for all works on or before the third day of every
month
28 To approve all foundations for which agreement is executed by the Assistant Engineer
29 To plan execution in accordance with the schedule of work and to fix the time frame of the project,
in respect of contracts entered into by him
30 To ensure taking possession of land for works after the disbursement of compensation and
assistances as per the R&R policy of PWD.
31 To handover the site to the contractor or the authorised agent within ten days after executing the
agreement
32 To measure and record the reinforcement bars placed prior to casting concrete
33 To check the quality of works and to see that the specifications are properly followed
34 To recommend application for extension of time of completion requested by the contractor
35 To submit the completion certificate along with drawings to the higher officers for approval
36 To take over the completed structure/work from the contractor after ensuring that all debris, balance
materials, temporary construction etc., are removed and site cleaned up.
37 To hand over the completed works along with a set of completion drawings to the concerned officer
of the other department/ agency
38 To prepare and submit the workable rate for the entire work for departmental execution
39 To arrange for removal/ demolition of inferior quality work if contractor fails to do so and charging
the expenses to the contractor.
40 To keep on record the basic documents of property right of the Govt. /Department ie, land plans &
land records including land given on lease to private agencies or corporations and update it from
time to time
41 To sign lease agreements
42 To fix rent as per the guidelines prescribed and to furnish in the specified proforma as per delegation
of powers.
43 To inspect all buildings /structures periodically under his charge
44 To check frequently the logbook written by the operator-in-charge of the equipments
45 Responsible for the verification, receipt, custody and issue of the stock materials and maintenance of
initial accounts of all store transactions
46 To accord technical sanction for works within the powers of sanction of Assistant Engineer.
47. To check measure all concealed item of work and a minimum 50% value of item of each work which are
not concealed for works of TS power of Assistant Engineer. To verify all the measurement recorded by
the contractor. Assistant Engineer is fully responsible for all the measurements recorded .
48. Taking and recording measurements of works up to TS powers of Superintending Engineer and
assisting in check measurements / super check measurements.
49. To intimate stage of works to EE/ AEE(QC).
50. To obtain quality certificate from EE(QC) before submitting work bill.
51. To prepare detailed programme of execution for projects in consultation with the contractor and
ensure its achievements.
52. Petty repairs and maintenance costing up to Rs. 50000/- shall be arranged by the Assistant Engineers
directly engaging labour under proper administrative sanction and technical sanction. Payment shall
be made through HR claim.

21
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

202.11 Assistant Engineer (Works)

Assistant Engineer posted in the Division shall be designated as Assistant Engineer (Works) to
assist higher officers.
202.12 Third Grade Overseer
1. When a Third Grade Overseer or other technical subordinate is posted for supervision of works
carried out on contract, he must exercise proper care over the execution of the works and in
particular attend to the following:
i)Assist the Assistant Engineer for collection of all field data for preparing layout, designs and
preliminary estimates.
ii) Prepare detailed drawings based on field data and approved designs.
iii) Prepare detailed estimates as per approved designs, after obtaining instructions on provisions and
rates from the Assistant Engineer.
iv) To see that the plans and specifications are followed in the execution of each item of work.
Assist in setting out and in checking setting out of the structure.
v) Check the quality of materials on arrival at site, and to see that the materials comply with the
specifications while in use.
vi) To watch the proportion of ingredients in mortars, concrete and bituminous premix, and ensure
that they are as per standards specified for the particular item of work concerned.
vii) Check and see that the workmanship in the execution of work is good. Ensure that quality is
maintained. Ensure the proper curing for cement works .The work of cement concrete / cement
concrete with skin reinforcement shall be done under his direct supervision and ensure quality of all
items of works measured by him.
In particular he shall be responsible for ensuring quality of certain items of work, which shall be
done only under his direct supervision. These include earthwork filling for various purposes, rubble
and brick masonry, plastering, road works, and formwork for R.C.C. and foundations of structures
and usage of departmental materials as per specification.
viii) Ensure that proper care and protection is taken to avoid accidents or danger to workmen and
third parties or to adjacent properties as per the safety code.
ix) Monitor that the contractor faithfully observes the general conditions of contract.
x) In the event of violation of any of the items (iv) to (ix) above, report the matter in writing to the
Assistant Engineer immediately and abide by his orders.
xi) Maintain a work spot order book as per rules.
xii) Take charge of unserviceable dismantled materials obtained during the execution of the work
and arrange for their disposal as ordered by higher officers.
xiii) Ensure that all safety provisions as per chapter 6 of Section II are complied with
xiv) Ensure that all materials at work site are kept in a safe manner.
xv) Keep in safe custody all scientific and mathematical instruments and tools & plant issued for a
work.
xvi) Report the progress achieved at all stages of a work, and shortfall if any, with reasons.
xvii) Report completion of fixing of formwork.
xviii) Supervise reinforcement work as directed by Assistant Engineer and report its completion.
xix) Report requirements of tools & plant required for a work in time and keep a watch over the
proper use of tools and plant, if any, issued to contractors.
xx) Carry out any instruction received from higher offices from time to time regarding proper
execution of a work.
xxi) Assist in taking levels and marking of level of structures during execution.
xxii) Plot the cross section (cs) and longitudinal section (ls) sheets and compute quantity of earth
work.
xxiii) Assist the Assistant Engineer in preparing bills and making payments.
xxiv) Prepare draft letters and reports and put up for the approval of the Assistant Engineer and
assist the Assistant Engineer in office works.
xxv) Furnish details on petitions after proper investigations, sanctions for road cuttings and other
similar matters, with detailed site plans, wherever necessary.
xxvi) Bring to the notice of Assistant Engineer, encroachments on PWD roads/ Government land.
xxvii) To watch avenue trees and improvement in acquired land and report in writing any attempt of
damage or removal.
xxviii) Take measurements; prepare plans and detailed calculations for fixing fair rent and valuation
of buildings and collection of details of structures for verifying stability, as directed by the Assistant
Engineer.

22
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

xxix) Take and record measurements of work up to TS power of Assistant Engineer and assisting in
check measurements by Assistant Engineer and super check measurement by Assistant Executive
Engineer.
xxx) Carry out any work assigned to him by his superior officers.
xxxi) To affix signature on all documents and records prepared by Third Grade Overseer.
2. When a Third grade Overseer or other technical subordinate is posted to supervise execution of
works through departmental execution of works, his duties shall also include the following: -
i) Rendering assistance to the Assistant Engineer or higher officers in setting out the works and
taking measurements.
ii) Sending timely intimation to the Assistant Engineer on the requirements of materials, tools plant
etc., so that there is no interruption or slackness due to lack of these items.
iii) Receiving, temporarily storing, accounting and issuing departmental materials required for
execution of the work.
iv) Receiving, temporarily storing and issuing departmental Tools & Plant to the labourer as and
when required and returning them to the store or such other place as directed by the Assistant
Engineer, when the tools &plant are no longer required.
v) Mustering the labour twice every day and keeping the labour roll as per rules.
vi) Allotting work to individual workmen or groups of workmen in such a manner, to ensure
efficient performance of the work.
vii) Taking such protective measures as are necessary to ensure safety of workmen and third parties,
as also properties likely to be affected by the execution of the work.
viii) Keeping a close watch of the performance of the work and if necessary rearranging work and or
regrouping workers to improve performance.
ix) Maintaining a record of the out turn of work every day, including issues of departmental materials, if
any, and periods of working of departmental machinery, if any. All this information shall be noted down
in a work spot order book and duplicate and triplicate copies of the same sent as daily reports.
x) Assisting the Assistant Engineer or other departmental officers in disbursing wages to the
workmen after identifying them.
3. When a Third Grade Overseer or other technical officer is posted in charge of the maintenance of
roads, bridges, or buildings or other structures, then his duties will also include:
i) Making systematic examination of the various structures under his charge and report the condition
and maintenance requirements to the Assistant Engineer.
ii) Where urgent steps are to be taken either for protection of property, life or restoring
communications, as for instance prevention of breaches in roads, cutting and removing fallen trees
from roads etc., these shall be arranged then and there and the fact reported to the Assistant Engineer
on the same day. Departmental labourer shall as far as possible be employed for such purposes
subject to availability.
iii) Supervising maintenance works and keeping accounts of materials used, departmental tools &
plant etc.
iv) Controlling the work done by Watchmen, Ferrymen, Lascars and other such persons who are to
work under the Overseer’s direction.
v) Carrying out supervisory and other duties on original or maintenance works done on roads,
buildings or other structures under his control.
4. An Overseer Grade III, if posted in general charge of investigation and quality control work, shall in
addition to the duties of Overseers detailed above be responsible for
i) Investigation of works entrusted to him. This includes assisting in taking levels, site survey and all
other measurements at site.
ii) Conducting soil investigation at locations identified by higher officers.
iii) Recording the SPT values and details of samples taken at each depth, during subsoil exploration
and ensuring its accuracy.
iv) Issuing necessary instructions to plant operators, during soil investigation
v) They shall be responsible for the correctness of the survey work, levelling or any other fieldwork
or collection of data entrusted to their charge.
202.13 First & Second Grade Overseers
I Grade or II Grade Overseer when posted in a section shall in addition to the duties entrusted to a
III grade Overseer:
1. Assist in checking the detailed estimates for works and submit notes for issuing technical sanction or
forwarding to higher offices.
2. Assist the Assistant Engineer in inviting tender, prepare tender schedule, acceptance of tender,
executing agreement for works, passing bills and making payments and submitting notes for issuing
orders.
23
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

3. Record in Measurement Books, all measurements of works within the T.S. Powers of Assistant
Engineer.
4. Assist in preparing and disbursing wages of Casual Labour Roll
5. Prepare bills of works, for which he is authorised to take measurements.
6. Keep in safe custody, scientific, and mathematical instruments, tools & plant including machinery,
pipes and accessories, spare parts of tools & plant, furniture registers, and work files of the section
office and Measurement Books and Field Books issued to him and handover the above while on
transfer, as directed by the Assistant Engineer.
7. Maintain files and registers relating to departmental Plant, MAS account, improvements in
government land and other items.
8. Co-ordinate the work of subordinate Overseers.
9. Assist the Assistant Engineer to conduct joint inspection with revenue staff for verification of
improvements and submit verification report for taking possession of acquired land.
10. Assist the superior officers in field work and submit the documents, reports etc to the higher officer
under due authentication by affixing signature.
202.14 Tracer
A Tracer (in the cadre of third grade Overseer) in any PWD office shall carryout the following duties.
Prepare tracing of drawings.
Carryout any other work that may be specifically assigned to him by superior officers.
202.15 First & Second Grade Draughtsman
I & II Grade Draughtsman in PWD office shall carryout the following duties.
1. Prepare drawings based on instructions given to him by the Assistant Engineer (Works) / Assistant
Director and higher officers.
2. Prepare tracing of drawings.
3. Plot survey work based on field data furnished to him and mark contours in survey drawings.
4. Check plotted sections and surveys received from subordinate officers with field book entries
including checking reduction of levels.
5. Calculate quantities of various items of work involved from the designs and drawings of structures
and prepare detailed estimate.
6. Prepare data for items of work based on schedule of rates, and information received from field
regarding leads and lifts involved etc.
7. Check contractor's bills with regard to the estimates received from subordinate offices.
8. Verify issue of materials against requirement as per data in contractor's bill.
9. Prepare indents for departmental materials, Tools and Plant etc.
10. Prepare tender schedules and agreements.
11. Tabulate tenders.
12. Prepare draft letters and reports.
13. Carryout any other work that may be specifically assigned to him by Assistant Engineer (Works) and
other superior officers.
202.16 Blue Printer
1. To take copies of drawings, documents as directed by superior officers.
203 Duties of various branches in the Chief Engineers, Circle, Division, and Sub Division offices
Each PWD office shall have technical, financial and establishment personnel. Each branch shall
have the following duties.
203.1 Technical Branch
The Technical branch in a PWD office shall be responsible for taking action on the following,
1. Approval of structural designs.
2. Scrutiny of estimates: Any modification in the provisions in an estimate received from the
subordinate office shall be made only after the specific orders of the head of the office. Scrutiny of
estimate and issuing a copy of approved abstract of estimate, data and detailed estimate to lower
level office for execution.
3. Scrutiny of estimates: Any modification in the provisions in an estimate received from the
subordinate office shall be made only after the specific orders of the head of the office.
4. Issuing Administrative and Technical Sanction for estimates.
Scrutiny / sanctioning of revised estimate and issuing a corrected copy of revised estimate to lower
level office for execution.
5. Preparation of tender schedule, tabulation of tenders.
6. Submission of tenders to higher authorities.
7. Scrutiny of tenders.
8. Preparation of agreement documents.
9. Maintenance of files for items of work entrusted to technical branch and work files
24
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

10. Scrutiny of bills - This shall include checking of issue of departmental materials, extra items, revised
estimates, level calculation etc.
11. Checking of initial and final level calculations.
12. The Technical Branch shall do processing of survey report-verification of rates alone.
13. Scrutiny of maintenance estimate for Tools &Plant.
14. Maintenance of various registers relating to work, agreement and Tools & Plant.
15. Progress report and inspection notes of works.
16. Correspondence on all technical matters and works (except those relating to work bills)
17. Take over proposal of roads coming under local self-government
18. Issue of indents for bitumen, maintaining Indent Register.
19. Scrutiny of consolidated indent if any.
20. Any other work entrusted by the head of office.

1. Preparing monthly accounts and forwarding the same to Accountant General.

2. Preparing cheque for payment on passed bills.
3. Preparation of works budget.
4. Preparation of performance budget and revised budget.
5. Preparation of schedule of settlement with treasuries and maintaining proper registers.
6. Follow up action on audit notes of Accountant General relating to works.
7. Maintenance of audit files relating to works. (The work file and audit file shall be kept
separately. The Technical Branch shall maintain the work file).
8. Scrutiny of bills and closing of work bills after audit. This shall include checking arithmetical
calculations in Measurement Book, checking MAS account, Write Back Order (W.B.O),
Work Abstract, checking quantities with schedule provisions etc.,
9. Maintenance of relevant registers such as MAS account, Survey Report, Cash Book, Work
Abstract, Contractor's Ledger etc.
10. Processing of Survey reports.
11. Correspondence on finance matters.
12. Any other work entrusted by the Head of the Office.
203.3 Establishment Branch
Establishment Branch is responsible for the following.
1. Transfers and postings.
2. All establishment matters including leave, salaries, medical reimbursement etc.
3. Disbursing salary and allowances of staff.
4. Scrutiny of TA Bills
5. Preparation of establishment budget and revised budget.
6. Preparation of pension papers/sanctioning of pension.
7. Maintain the accounts of contingency funds.
8. Maintaining Service Books of all employees
9. Registration of contractors
10. Maintaining of all relevant registers.
11. Follow up action on audit notes of Accountant General.
12. General correspondence on establishment matters.
13. Receipt of tapals and putting up to Deputy Chief Engineer in Chief Engineers’ office /
Deputy Superintending Engineer in Circle office/Deputy Executive Engineer in Executive
Engineer’s office and Assistant Executive Engineer in Sub Division office.
14. Maintain inward and despatch registers
15. Any other work entrusted by the Head of the Office. The Head of Office shall obtain remarks
of the Financial Assistant/ Financial Officer for the items mentioned in G.O. (P) No.
388/92/Fin dated 6.5.1992
The head of concerned branches shall forward files of works entrusted to them to the Deputy
Chief Engineer in Chief Engineer’s Office, Deputy Superintending Engineer in the Circle,
Deputy Executive Engineer in Division office.
However the files relating to the following items within the responsibility of the technical
branch shall be routed through the Divisional Accountant in Division Office and Finance
Assistant in Circle Office and Senior Finance Officer/Finance Officer in Chief Engineer’s

i. Administrative Sanction
ii Audit of work bills, vouchers etc.

25
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

16. Agreement for works executed in Division and Circle offices shall be handed over to the
Divisional Accountant for safe custody
The head of department/office will obtain the remarks/view of the financial assistant/ senior
finance officer on the following subjects before decisions are taken
1. Proposal and allocation of funds for schemes
2. Creation and upgradation of posts
3. Public Accounts Committee/Estimate Committee and Subject Committee.
4. Purchase of tools and plant, machinery and equipments or other stock and stores
except petty items.
5. Repair and maintenance of vehicle, machine other assets:
6. Sanction of investigation estimates.
7. Administrative sanction of schemes/works.
8. Acceptance/recommendation of tender. quotation for purchase/works.
9. Execution of agreements and powers of attorneys
10. Acceptance and release of securities and release of retention of money.
11. Risk and cost termination of the contracts and imposing fines of contractors.
12. Registration, renewal and black listing of contractors.
13. Vigilance and other court cases involving financial aspects including arbitration
cases.
14. Settlement of centrally sponsored scheme claims and adjustment of inter
departmental State accounts
15. Sanction of survey reports and sale by auction.
203.4 Nodal Officer
Every Office in the Department shall have a Nodal Officer for furnishing answers in the prescribed time
to Legislative Assembly Interpellations.
The Nodal Officers shall be Deputy Chief Engineer in Chief Engineer’s office, Dy. SE in Circle office,
Dy. EE in Division Office, Assistant Executive Engineer in Sub Division Office and Assistant Engineer
in Section Office.
204 Administration Wing
204.1 Chief Engineer Administration & Designs
In addition to the duties as per section 202.1, he shall also have the following administration duties:
1. Post adequate and suitable staff at the appropriate places as per proposal of concerned Chief
Engineer and to take steps to correct deficiencies and imbalances if any.
2. Conduct Chief Engineers’ committee meeting periodically.
3. To allot non gazetted officers to divisions / circles for reposting.
4. He shall be a member of Departmental Promotion Committee.
5. Initiate appropriate disciplinary action against deterrent member of staff based on the findings of
the Vigilance Officer, with immediate report to Government.
6. Approve seniority list of various categories of PWD staff every year.
7. Submit proposal to revise Schedule of Rates.
8. Approval to periodical updating of standard data book

1. Overall charge of Designs done departmentally using various methods including modern
software’s (purchased or hired) or through outsourcing.
2. Preparing a priority list for checking and approval of the designs, after consultation with other
Chief Engineers.
3. To issue approval to detailed structural designs and detailed structural drawings for the
construction of Government buildings, bridges and other structures.
4. To oversee environmental and quality control activities of all PWD works.
5. Inspect major works for guidance on design aspects.
6. Issuing administrative sanction to investigation estimates for which investigations are to be
conducted under the direct supervision of the Director Research, Investigation and Quality
Control.
7. To ensure management of local issues in all PWD works.
8. Approving sanction to investigation, investigation reports, preliminary project report and
detailed project report prepared by PPU.
9. Issuing necessary Instructions to field officers on the design aspects of structures, if requested by
them.
10. Select panel of experts in consultation with the Government.
11. Arranging purchase of books and periodicals for reference.
26
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

12. Arranging refresher courses and computer training for engineers of the various wings of the
department.
13. Arranging training for newly recruited engineers of the department, within the first two years of
service.
14. Identification of engineering colleges for deputing faculty members for senior students for
quality monitoring of major works.
15. Identification of personal to facilitate research in KHRI.
16. To manage the computer cell.

In addition to the duties as per section 202.3, he shall be responsible for the following
1. To assist Chief Engineer (A&D) to dispose all establishment matters including transferring,
postings of non-gazetted technical staff.
2. Review of progress of preparing provisional seniority list of all category of employees.
3. Management of Personal Information System of the entire staff, etc in consultation with Chief
Engineer (A&D).
4. To assist Chief Engineer (A&D) to conduct yearly employee satisfaction surveys, workload
assessments.
5. Submit yearly proposals for variations in cadre strength based on the workload assessment in
consultation with Chief Engineer (A&D).
6. To assist Chief Engineer (A&D) to prepare and publish provisional seniority list of each
category periodically in the web.
7. Assist the Chief Engineer (A&D) for declaration of probation and in preparing details for
Departmental Promotion Committee.
8. Conduct enquiries himself on cases of complaint if directed by the Chief Engineer
Administration & Designs.
9. Assist the Chief Engineer in the preparation of press releases after observing norms.
10. To address Govt. on routine matters and communicate with Govt. on matters approved by Chief
Engineer.
11. Shall be responsible in all matters relating to IT Cell, planning monitoring and budgeting.
204.2.1 Executive Engineer, Human Resources Development & Planning
He shall generally assist the Chief Engineer (A&D), on administrative matters and the specific
duties related to this position are detailed below:
1. Deputing officers for various training programmes of the departments.
2. Prepare proposals for updating schedule of rates, plinth area rate , standard bidding document
and standard data book and other assignments required.
3. If necessary, give advice to the officers conducting the enquiries about the correct manner
in which the enquiries shall proceed.
4. Implement a Personnel Information System (PIS) including all employees of the Department.
5. Circulate notes and instructions regarding matters related to personnel management on
approval by the Chief Engineer, Administration.
6. Forward proposals for restructuring the organisational set up of the department as and
when required.
7. Keep watch on the progress of action taken against complaints in liaison with the Vigilance Wing.
8. Monitor the follow up action in processing of police verification report of new recruits.
9. Arrange induction training to all new recruits.
10. Monitor the issue of employee identity cards including timely replacement.
11. Review the draft programme for training staff in India/abroad and obtain approval from
the competent authority.
12. Prepare a training budget for PWD and obtain approval/allotment from competent authority.
13. Review and finalise the training calendar for each year in advance and obtain approval from
the competent authority.
14. Coordinate all training programmes for the personnel in the department.
15. Review the evaluation report on all training programmes conducted by PWD and issue
necessary guidelines/instructions for better performance.
16. Evaluate the performance of trainers engaged by PWD and ensure that competent persons
are handling the training sessions.
17. Coordinate with the nodal officers in each office and prepare notes for press releases
in consultation with them.
18. Interact with personnel in the department to find out and resolve any hurdles that hinder his
job performance.
27
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

19. Recommend rewards to employees in appreciation of their good performances.

20. To organize training / workshops to familiarise new materials / technology/ measures to
engineers of the departments.
204.2.2 Assistant Executive Engineer, Human Resources Development
He shall assist the Executive Engineer, Human Resources Development & Planning and the
specific duties related to this position are detailed below:
1. Prepare notes and instructions regarding matters related to personnel management for circulation.
2. Maintain the Personnel Information System (PIS) of the employees of the department.
3. Participate in the training programmes provided by the Enquiry Division.
4. Prepare schedule for providing induction training to new recruits.
5. Make a draft programme for training staff in India/abroad.
6. Organise training programmes for all categories of personnel in the department.
7. Prepare evaluation report on all training programmes conducted by PWD after analyzing
the evaluation forms.
8. Make necessary arrangements to the issue of employee identity cards including
timely replacement.
9. Ensure that Management Information System (MIS) is maintained in all districts and the
reports reach the Headquarters on a monthly/quarterly/yearly basis.
10. Carry out the duties and assignment s given by the Executive Engineer, Human
Resources Development & Planning on a regular basis.
204.2.3 Assistant Engineer, Human Resources Development
In addition to duties as specified in clause section 202.10 he shall assist the Assistant Executive
Engineer, Human Resources Development on the specific duties detailed under section 204.2.2
204.2.4 Assistant Executive Engineer, Policy Guidelines
He shall assist the Executive Engineer, HRD & Planning. In addition to duties as specified in
clause 202.8, he shall be responsible for the development, monitoring and review of PWD policies
and guidelines, including the Code and Manual and all Standards.
He shall also be responsible for the following.
1. Co-ordinating the periodical revision of the PWD Code and Manual, ensuring compliance with
the Code and Manual.
2. Monitoring of the implementation and review of the Road Sector Policy.
3. Assist the Executive Engineer, HRD & Planning and the Committee of Chief Engineers to identify
other needed PWD policies, and assist in the development and implementation of those policies.
4. In consultation with the various Chief Engineers identify the guidelines and standards needed for their
Wing and co-ordinate the development and implementation of such Guidelines and Standards.
5. Preparing and maintaining a database of relevant Indian and International Standards relevant to PWD
operations
6. Laisoning with the Assistant Executive Engineer, Legal and Social experts, to ensure appropriate
legal input and review of all policies in their drafting stages.
7. Assist the Executive Engineer, HRD & Planning, as required on all other Policy Guideline issues.
8. Any other duties assigned to him by the superior officers.
204.2.5 Assistant Executive Engineer (Planning), Administration
He shall assist the Executive Engineer, HRD & Planning, and his duties, in addition to the duties as per
clause 202.8, are detailed below:
1. Assist preparation of annual Administration Reports.
2. Any other duties assigned to him by the superior officers.
204.2.6 Assistant Engineer (Planning), Administration
In addition to duties as per section 202.10, he shall be responsible for the following:
1. Assist preparation of annual Administration reports.
2. Any other duties assigned to him by the superior officers.
204.3 Deputy Chief Engineer (Vigilance)
The Deputy Chief Engineer (Vigilance) shall, in the capacity as vigilance officer have the authority to
inspect, if necessary, all the Works of the Public Works Department and shall be responsible for the
following, in addition to the duties as per section 202.3
1. Conduct enquiries regarding allegations against any P.W.D staff (ministerial and technical) and
submit his findings and proposals to the Chief Engineer (Administration & Designs).
2. Initiate disciplinary action suo moto and submit the report to the Chief Engineer Administration &
Designs. Conduct enquiry on complaints from the Vigilance, Anti Corruption Bureau, Govt.

28
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Officers, members of Legislative Assembly, general public etc. and submit the report to the
Government/ Chief Engineer (Administration & Design).
3. Conduct departmental enquiries and if necessary frame charges against the delinquent employee(s)
involved.
4. Conduct random inspection of PWD offices to ascertain whether all the records are maintained as
per PWD Manual.
5. Collect annual Confidential Reports of officers in PWD and keep under safe custody after
verification.
6. Forward Confidential Reports on request by DCE, Administration, for declaration of probation and
for producing before the Departmental Promotion Committee.
7. Collect the landed property statement of all PWD officers and keep it under safe custody.
In addition to the duties as per section 202.6 he shall be responsible for the following:
1. Assisting the Deputy Chief Engineer (Vigilance) in conducting enquiries regarding allegations
against any PWD staff (ministerial and technical).
2. Random inspection of PWD offices in the state, and submitting the reports to the DCE.
3. Any other duties assigned to him by the superior officer.
204.3.2 Assistant Executive Engineer (Vigilance)
In addition to the duties as per section 202.8, he shall assist the Executive Engineer (Vigilance) in
conducting enquiries against any P.W.D staff, inspection of PWD offices in the districts and submitting the
reports to the Executive Engineer (Vigilance).
204.4 Assistant Executive Engineer, NABARD Cell
In addition to the duties as specified in section 202.8, he shall have the following duties.
1. Overall charge of NABARD assisted road,bridge and building projects and their implementation
through territorial Roads and Bridges Division.
2. Co-ordinating with NABARD relating to financial assistance from NABARD.
3. Preparing annual plan of NABARD assisted road bridge and buildings projects for the state.
4. To examine proposals for construction of road bridge and buildings from the general public, MLAs,
MPs etc. to utilise NABARD assistance road and bridge projects.
5. Preparing draft proposals for NABARD assisted projects, collecting drafts of Pre Feasibility
Report(PFR), Feasibility Report(FR) and Detailed Project Report(DPR) and preparing revised drafts
of the same in accordance with field requirements.
6. Ensuring that the details (environmental, re-settlement, feasibility etc.) required for Feasibility
Report and Detailed Project Report are obtained.
7. Review of activities of NABARD assisted PWD Road Bridge and building projects and preparation
of periodical reports.
8. Preparing technical reports, briefing papers etc for senior engineers.
9. Any other duties assigned to him by the superior officers.
204.4.1 Assistant Engineer, NABARD Cell
In addition to duties as specified in section 202.10, he shall assist the Assistant Executive Engineer,
NABARD Cell.
1*
204.5 Director, Building Design &Computer Cell
He shall be responsible /accountable to the Chief Engineer (A&D) in all official matters, with particular
reference to the following:
1. Checking the designs prepared in his offices and recommends the same for approval by Chief
Engineer (A&D).
2. If necessary, inspect the work, and give instructions to the subordinate officers.
3. Fixing the time schedule for completing a design work, including the maximum time granted to each
officer to complete the work within his responsibility.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1* As per GO (MS) No. 24/2017 dated 10.04.2017, Design wing and Investigation & Quality
Control Wing of Public Works Department has been strengthened by the formation of seven design
units (Project Preparation Unit, Structural Design Unit, Bridge Design Unit, Highway Design Unit,
Geotechnical Engineering Unit, Environmental Engineering Unit and Map Design Unit) and at the
Chief Design Office by reconstituting the existing three units (Building Design, Bridge Design and
Project Preparation Units) and by the setting up of two Regional Design Offices at Ernakulam &
Kozhikode. Regional Investigation & Quality Control Lab at Thiruvananthapuram is formed in
addition to the existing Regional Investigation & Quality Control Laboratories at Ernakulam and
Kozhikode. In addition Investigation units in all the three Regional Investigation & Quality Control
Labs are also formed and Assistant Executive Engineers and Assistant Engineers in District Quality
Control Labs are redesignated as Material Engineer and Assistant Material Engineer
29
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

4. Arranging monthly conference of engineers of the in the first week of' every month to review the
progress achieved in the designs based on time schedule fixed, analyse the reasons for short fall and
report them to the Chief Engineer (A&D).
5. Arranging technical discussion led by eminent engineers once in every month.
6. Exercising administrative and financial powers delegated to him
7. Issue necessary directions to Deputy Director Computer Cell regarding the procurement, maintenance,
conducting training and updating of computer hard ware & software.
8. Assisting the Chief Engineer in any matter entrusted to him.
204.5.1 Joint Director, Building Design
He shall be responsible for the following, as instructed by the superior officers:
1. Finalize the key plan of buildings based on the architectural drawings approved by Chief Architect.
2. Arranging a preliminary discussion with the concerned officers.
3. Issue directions to Assistant Director and Deputy Director in design of structures and checking of
drawings.
4. Review the design calculations of structures prepared by DRIQ Board including detailed checking of
critical sections.
5. Review of drawings prepared in DRIQ Board including detailed checking of critical sections.
6. If the details for the preparation of a design are insufficient or are lacking, the same shall be called
from the concerned officers under intimation to the Chief Engineer.
7. Inspecting site of works if necessary and issuing instructions to concerned officers regarding data to
be collected.
8. Distributing design works among the various Assistant Directors and give them instructions from time
to time regarding the design.
9. Calling for additional data if required.
10. Assisting his superior officers in any matter entrusted to him.
204.5.2 Deputy Director, Building Design
He shall be responsible for the following, as instructed by the superior officers:
1. Issue directions to Assistant Director for design of structures, checking the design calculations and
drawings prepared in DRIQ Board effecting modifications, if necessary.
2. Assisting superior officers in checking designs of structures referred by the competent authority.
3. Carrying out field inspections, if necessary, with concurrence of his superior officers and collecting
additional data required for design.
4. Assisting his superior officers in any matter entrusted to him.

204.5.3 Assistant Director, Building Design

He shall be responsible for the following, as instructed by the superior officers:
1. Preparing designs for various structures based on field data received and the preliminary discussion
held with the field officers and instructions from superior officers.
2. Preparing design calculations and structural drawings conforming to the codal provisions.
3. Assisting his superior officers in preparing designs of structures referred to the design wing by
competent Authority.
4. Scrutinising structural drawings prepared by Draughtsman.
5. Preparing notes on technical matters referred to him.
6. Assisting his superior officers in any matter entrusted to him.
st nd
204.5.4 1 & 2 Grade Draughtsman (Building Design)
1. Prepare drawings based on instructions given to him by the Assistant Director and other higher officers.
2. To carry out duties assigned to him by superior officers.
rd
204.5.5 Record keeper /3 Grade Draughtsman (Building Design)
1. To arrange and keep original drawings.
2. To carry out duties assigned to him by superior officers.
204.5.6 Blue printer / Printing assistant (Building Design)
1. To take copies of drawings by blue printing or with wide format plan photocopier.
2. To carry out duties assigned to him by superior officers.
204.5.7 Deputy Director, Computer Cell
He shall be responsible for the following, as instructed by the superior officers:
1. Installation and maintenance of computers in DRIQ Board.
2. Procurement & supply of required consumables.
3. Exercise proper control over the expenditure on the above items as per the rules and orders in force
and maintain proper accounts for the same.

30
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

4. Assist the Chief Engineer (A&D) in issuing Administrative Sanctions for Estimates for the
procurement and maintenance of hardware and software installations.
5. Initiate action to prepare Administrative report.
6. Assisting his superior officers in any matter entrusted to him.
204.5.8. Assistant Director, Computer Cell
He shall be responsible for the following, as instructed by the superior officers:
1. Preparing estimates for the procurement and maintenance of hardware and software installations.
2. Keeping all the installations, software’s and their licenses updated.
3. Initiate actions for purchase or hire of modern software for enhancing the performance of the
Engineers.
4. Arranging necessary awareness program in association with software vendors.
5. Preparation of Administrative Report.
6. Any other job assigned by superior officer.
st nd
204.5.9 1 & 2 Grade Draughtsman (Computer Cell)
1. To carry out duties assigned to him by superior officers.
204.5.10 System Programmer (Computer Cell)
1. To carry out duties assigned to him by superior officers.
204.6 Director, Bridges & PPU
He shall be responsible /accountable to the Chief Engineer (A&D) in all official matters, with particular
reference to the following:
1. Checking the designs prepared in his office or submitted from various PWD offices and recommends
the same for approval by Chief Engineer (A&D).
2. If necessary, inspect the work, and give instructions to the subordinate officers.
3. Fixing the time schedule for completing a design work, including the maximum time granted to each
officer to complete the work within his responsibility.
4. Arranging monthly conference of engineers of the Engineers in the first week of' every month to
review the progress achieved in the designs based on time schedule fixed, analyse the reasons for short
fall and report them to the Chief Engineer (A&D).
5. Arranging technical discussion led by eminent engineers once in every month.
6. Exercising administrative and financial powers delegated to him
7. Approve designs of structures referred to Chief Engineer (A&D) by Superintending Engineer or
Executive Engineer.
8. Verify details taken during investigation and adequacy of the provisions of PPR and DPR.
9. Coordinate the activities of the Project Preparation Unit for Roads, Buildings, Bridges and National
Highways.
10. Assist the Chief Engineer in other matters entrusted to him.
204.6.1 Joint Director, Bridges Design
He shall be responsible for the following, as instructed by the superior officers:
1. Receiving the project proposal from the Director (design) and distributing the same to Deputy
Directors and Assistant Directors after a general viability check.
2. Issue necessary directions as and when required to the Assistant Director and Deputy Director in their
work
3. If the design data received are insufficient / incorrect, additional details/ clarifications etc. shall be
called for from the officers concerned under intimation to the superior officers.
4. Review the design calculations and drawings received from Deputy Directors and giving directions for
corrections/revisions if found necessary
5. Inspecting site of works if necessary and issuing instructions regarding technical matters to the officers
concerned before/during construction.
6. Assisting the superior officers in any matter entrusted.
204.6.2. Deputy Director, Bridges Design
1. The officer shall be responsible for the following
2. Receiving the project proposals from the Joint Director and distributing it to the Assistant Directors
concerned.
3. Carrying out detailed discussions regarding the preparations of a proposal based on the received
details.
4. Checking the designs and drawings submitted by the Assistant Directors in detail and issue
instructions regarding corrections/revision if found necessary.
5. Carrying out field inspections, if necessary, with concurrence of the superior officers.
6. Assisting the superior officers in any matter entrusted.
204.6.3. Assistant Director, Bridges Design
The officer shall be responsible for the following
31
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

1. Examining thoroughly the details received from the superior officers before preparing design. In the
process if any details are found missing or inadequate the matter shall be put to the notice of superior
officers for acquiring the same.
2. Preparing designs conforming to the codal provisions, based on field data received and entrusting the
draughtsmen for preparing the drawings.
3. Scrutinising drawings prepared by Draughtsman and issue instructions for correction/ revision.
4. Carrying out field inspections if necessary, with the concurrence of the superior officers.
5. Assisting superior officers in any matters entrusted.
st nd
204.6.4 1 & 2 Grade Draughtsman (Bridges Design)
1. Prepare drawings based on instructions given to him by the Assistant Director and other higher officers.
2. To carry out duties assigned to him by superior officers.
rd
204.6.5 Record keeper /3 Grade Draughtsman (Bridges Design)
1. To arrange and keep original drawings.
2. To carry out duties assigned to him by superior officers.
204.6.6 Blue printer / Printing assistant (Bridges Design)
1. To take copies of drawings by blue printing or with wide format plan photocopier.
2. To carry out duties assigned to him by superior officers.
204.6.7 Joint Director, Project Preparation Unit
He shall be responsible for the following, as instructed by the superior officers:
1. Review of investigation works, investigation reports, SIA reports and feasibility of projects entrusted.
2. Review of interim report and DPR for the projects entrusted.
3. Issue proper guidance to all the activities to subordinate officers.
4. Any other duty assigned by the superior officers.
204.6.8 Deputy Director, Project Preparation Unit
He shall be responsible for the following, as instructed by the superior officers:
1. Check the preliminary and detailed investigation, Resettlement Action Plan (RAP) and Land
Acquisition Plan (LA).
2. Check the feasibility report.
3. Check the interim report.
4. Check the Detailed Project Report.
5. Any other duties assigned by the superior officers.
204.6.9 Assistant Director, Project Preparation Unit
1. Organize preliminary investigation for preparing feasibility report.
2. Preparing feasibility and interim reports for the projects entrusted.
3. Organize detailed investigation and local impact study for preparing Detailed Project Report.
4. Preparing DPR for projects entrusted.
5. Any other duties assigned by the superior officers.
st nd
204.6.10 1 & 2 Grade Draughtsman (Project Preparation Unit)
1. Prepare drawings based on instructions given to him by the Assistant Director and other higher officers.
2. To carry out duties assigned to him by superior officers.
204.7 Director Research, Investigation & Quality Control
He shall be responsible for overall checking of the various tests, studies and research conducted in the
Kerala Highway Research Institute.
He shall be responsible / accountable to the Chief Engineer in all official matters, with particular
reference to the following:
1. Check the quality aspects of the works in the department.
2. To ensure that the quality levels of works specified are being achieved during execution of works and
to report to the Chief Engineer (A&D).
3. Liaise with the divisions to ensure that the required quality is enforced in all works.
4. Issuing inspection notes of a site to the subordinate officers under intimation to concerned Chief
Engineer.
5. Submitting quarterly progress report of the tests and research studies conducted by the Kerala
Highway Research Institute to the Chief Engineer, (A&D).
6. Reviewing the progress of works undertaken by the KHRI every three months.
7. Assisting the Chief Engineer (A&D) in other matter entrusted to him.
8. Inspecting various sites, where investigations are in progress and issuing necessary instructions.
9. Assist the concerned Chief Engineer in issuing Administrative Sanction for investigation estimates.
10. Inspecting the sites, where investigation is in progress and issue necessary directions to the field
officers.
11. Authorise the conduct of investigation works.
12. Ensure the collection of all necessary data required for the design.
32
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

13. Initiate actions for applied research

14. Assist the Chief Engineer in other matters entrusted to him.
204.7.1 Joint Director, Quality Management
He shall be responsible for the following, as instructed by the superior officers:
1. Assist the Director, Research & Quality Control, to implement, review and maintain the quality
systems of works and propose additions whenever necessary, in the Standard Bidding Documents.
2. Co-ordinating the implementation of systems as per Quality Manuals.
3. Co-ordinate with the HRD Cell for the training on quality aspects for engineers and contractors.
4. Assisting the Director, Research & Quality Control, and the Committee of Chief Engineers to identify
& formulate quality management documents and procedures for their branches, and co-ordinate the
development and implementation of such quality management documents.
5. Liaise with the quality control units to ensure proper co-ordination and monitoring progress reports
received from those units.
6. Review of the conditions related to the quality aspects in the Standard Bidding Documents for
contracts and proposes alterations, if required.
7. Assist the Director, Research & Quality Control, as and when required.
8. Any other duties assigned by the superior officers.
204.7.2 Deputy Director, Quality Management
He shall be responsible for the following, as instructed by the superior officers:
1. Assisting the Joint Director, Quality Management, to implement, review and maintain the quality
systems of works and propose additions whenever necessary, in the Standard Bidding Documents.
2. Co-ordinating the implementation of systems as per Quality Manuals.
3. Co-ordinate with the HRD Cell for the training on quality aspects for engineers and contractors.
4. Assisting the Joint Director, Quality Management, and the Committee of Chief Engineers to identify
& formulate quality management documents and procedures for their branches, and co-ordinate the
development and implementation of such quality management documents.
5. Liaise with the quality control units to ensure proper co-ordination and monitoring progress reports
received from those units.
6. Review of the conditions related to the quality aspects in the Standard Bidding Documents for
contracts and propose alterations, if required.
7. Assist the Joint Director, Quality Management, as and when required.
8. Any other duties assigned by the superior officers.
204.7.3 Joint Director (KHRI)
He shall be responsible for the following, as instructed by the superior officers:
1. As the disbursing officer of the department in regard to works, supplies and services under his charge
he has to exercise proper control over the expenditure on these items in accordance with the rules and
orders in force and render proper accounts for the same to the Accountant General in the prescribed
manner. His responsibility in this regard is detailed in the KPWA Code.
2. Coordinate training of PWD officers in association with the HRD Cell.
3. Periodically publishing Technical Magazine comprising of research papers, training program, case
studies etc.
4. Directing the subordinate officers for the conduct of various material tests conducting various surveys,
purchase of technical periodicals for library, procurement of necessary softwares, etc.
5. He shall have overall control of all the testing and studies conducted by the institute.
6. Inspect various sites where tests and studies are in progress and issue instructions to subordinate
officers.
7. Prepare inspection notes and communicate to field officers.
8. Submit monthly progress report of works undertaken by the Institute to the Director.
9. Prepare a program of research works intended to be taken up each year and submit it to the Director
and Chief Engineer before 30th April every year.
10. Exercise administrative and financial powers delegated to him.
11. Assist the Chief Engineer in issuing Administrative Sanction for investigation estimates.
12. Arrange research-oriented studies, seminars and workshops.
13. Attend IRC meetings.
14. Participate in technical seminars and training conducted by other organizations.
15. Any other duties assigned by the superior officers.
204.7.4 Deputy Director (KHRI)
He shall be responsible for the following, as instructed by the superior officers:
1. Coordinate and arranging training of PWD officers with HRD Cell.
2. Directing the Assistant Directors for conduct of various tests & studies and issuing necessary
instruction s to his subordinate officers.
33
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

3. Co-ordinate purchase of technical periodicals for the library, conducting various surveys, etc. as
directed by the Joint Director
4. Assisting the Joint Director in publishing Technical Magazine
5. Checking the readings and test results recorded by the subordinate staff and verifying the register of
test results.
6. Submitting reports on the test results and studies to the Joint Director, after conducting independent
tests, if necessary.
7. Controlling the work of subordinate technical staff attached to his division.
8. Corresponding with subordinate officers for furnishing additional data or other routine matters.
9. Arranging research oriented tests and studies
10. He shall exercise administrative and financial powers delegated to him
11. Forecasting the requirements of important materials, Tools and Plant and making arrangements to
procure them according to prescribed rules.
12. Conducting material tests where ever necessary, as per general or special instructions.
13. Assist field officers in ensuring Quality Control.
14. Monitoring the progress of works in their respective Divisions.
15. Scrutinising and checking bills for making payments.
16. Periodically checking the prescribed accounts and furnishing the details to Joint Director as per rules
and instructions.
17. Giving suitable directions to subordinate officers regarding information to be co1lected and nature of
work to be done.
18. Checking survey works, levels, nature of soil, sub soil, result of borings and all field data of works
undertaken by the Institute.
19. Administrative control of the subordinates officers, ensure adequacy of staff and labour, make
interim arrangements for carrying out the work.
20. Periodically examine whether Government materials, Tools & Plants etc., are properly looked after
and take steps to correct inadequacies.
21. Placing orders for supply of articles in accordance with rules and processing all orders so that all the
requisite procedures are completed in time for receipt of articles.
22. Passing and payment of bills connected with stores transactions in accordance with rules.
23. Taking timely action to prevent deterioration of any of the items stocked in the stores and arranging
disposal of unserviceable articles as per rules.
24. Maintaining accounts as per rules and rendering the required details to the Joint Director.
25. Ensure quality of works in compliance with environmental regulations.
26. Assisting the Joint Director in other matters entrusted to him.
204.7.5 Assistant Director (KHRI)
1. Directly supervising all tests and studies entrusted to him.
2. Issuing necessary instruction to subordinate technical staff.
3. Checking the readings and test results recorded by the subordinate staff and maintaining the register of
test results.
4. Prepare report, on tests and studies after holding discussion with the Deputy Director and Joint
Director.
5. Assisting the Joint Director in Publishing Technical Magazine
6. Controlling the work of subordinate technical staff entrusted with the tests and studies.
7. The proper conduct of all works assigned to him.
8. Recording measurements and assisting in check measurements.
9. Watching the progress of works and taking steps to remove bottlenecks if any.
10. Ensuring the accuracy of instruments like testing equipments, weighing balances, tapes etc., by
frequent checks and adjustments.
11. Maintaining and submitting proper accounts for the receipts, issues and balances of different articles
as per rule.
12. Inspecting the different stores to detect articles that are deteriorated likely to get deteriorated and
arrange the disposal of the same as per rule.
13. Assist in arranging research oriented tests and studies.
14. He shall be the custodian of all Tools & Plants under his section.
15. Any other duties entrusted to him by the superior officer.
204.7.6 Research Assistant (KHRI)
He shall be responsible for the following, as instructed by the superior officers: The First Grade
Overseer posted as a Research Assistant (Kerala Highway Research Institute) shall, in addition to the
duties as per section 203.12, whichever is applicable, be responsible for :
1. Conducting tests and field studies as per directions issued by superior officer.
34
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2. Making necessary arrangements for conducting field studies and tests.

3. Conveying the equipment required for field test or study to the site.
4. Recording properly all readings taken during the tests and studies in a register.
5. Bringing to notice of his superior officers, any difficulty or assistance required during a test or study.
6. Maintaining files and preparing draft letters and notes as directed by his superior officers.
7. Keeping in safe custody all the registers and files relating to works dealt by him.
8. Preparing required drawings relating to studies conducted.
9. Keeping in safe custody all testing equipments and its accessories during the conduct of work.
10. Assisting in preparing and checking detailed estimates for works and submit notes for issuing
Technical Sanction, for forwarding to higher offices.
11. Assisting in inviting tender, preparing tender schedule, tender acceptance, executing agreement for
works, passing bills and making payments and submitting notes for issuing orders.
12. Co-ordinate the work of subordinate overseers.
13. Assisting the superior officers in all matters entrusted to him.
204.7.7 Other Technical / Administrative Subordinates
Other Technical Subordinates posted in the Kerala Highway Research Institute shall have the following
duties, as instructed by the superior officers
1. Assist the First Grade Overseer and superior officers in conducting tests and studies.
2. Prepare necessary drawings required.
3. Assist in office work.
4. Assist the First Grade Overseer in conveying the equipments to site.
5. Keep under safe custody all equipments and accessories entrusted to him at a site or office by the first
grade overseer or superior officers.
6. Any other duties assigned by the superior officers.
204.8 Director, Road Safety Cell
1. He shall be controlling Central Road Safety Cell and in addition to duties as per section 202.6 he
shall
2. Coordinate the activities of the Cell
3. Maintain and implement road safety policy and procedures

4. Conduct road safety audit

5. Inspect the road signs and markings and ensure that these are adequate and properly placed and
conform to the standards.
6. Direct the field officers regarding road safety measures.
7. Coordinate with other agencies like traffic police, trauma care centers and motor vehicles
department
204.8.1 Assistant Executive Engineer, Road Safety Cell
In addition to the general responsibilities of Assistant Executive Engineer, as per section 202.8, he shall
also be responsible for:
1. Managing the collection of accident data, speed data and other related data and the analysis and
preparation of reports.
2. Identification of accident black spot and design remedial measures for accident prevention.
3. Coordinate with Road Safety Authority, PWD Divisions and the Police regarding road safety
measures.
4. Preparation of Bill of Quantities and contract documents in respect of works under Road Safety
Cell, if required.
5. Plan and conduct road safety audits
6. Preparing Road Safety Manuals, annual road safety engineering programs including
modifications.
7. Provide training to the PWD officers on road safety matters in co-ordination with HRD Cell.
8. Assisting in procuring consultancy services on road safety issues.
9. Assisting in maintaining an accident database in the Division.
10. Assisting in developing an asset management system of traffic control devices.
11. Preparation of annual budgets for road safety activities.
12. Checking reports on progress of road safety works in the Divisions.
13. Arrange seminars/workshops on road safety engineering and awareness.
14. Any other duties assigned to him by the superior officer.
204.8.2 Assistant Engineer, Road Safety Cell
He shall assist the Assistant Executive Engineer, Road Safety Cell, in all activities as per section
202.10

35
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

204.9 Executive Engineer, IT

In addition to duties as specified in section 202.6 he shall supervise the works of Assistant Executive
Engineers under the control of IT initiatives, ISAP and NABARD, FMS and WINGS. He shall also be
responsible for the following.
1. The administration and upkeep of all PWD RMMS and GIS throughout the State to ensure that
their operations support the Government of Kerala’s aim of providing smooth, safe and cost
effective roads.
2. Set the administrative controls and level of access approvals to the RMMS and GIS for all staff
of the PWD.
3. Prepare supporting information, including GIS mapping showing easily identifiable options for
the Chief Engineer to support approval for the annual road maintenance program and contract
procurement.
4. Prepare GIS outputs or queries as considered necessary or as requested by the Chief Engineer
(A&D).
204.9.1 Assistant Executive Engineer, IT
In addition to the duties as specified in section 202.8, he shall also have the following duties
1. Be the overall charge of WINGS and FMS.
2. Arrange publishing of tender notice for all PWD works.
3. Collect government orders, circulars etc. for publishing in the Intranet /Extranet as per norms.
4. Publish specification on details to ensure the efficient use of road cutting protocol.
5. Coordinate with all the other IT initiatives.
6. Assist to provide IT facilities to all PWD offices in the state.
7. Issue of user ID for departmental officials and other authorized personnel for accessing
Intranet/ Extranet of PWD portal.
8. Arrange publication of details pertaining to the RTI Act received from State Information Officers.
9. Any other duties assigned by his superior officers.
204.9.2 Assistant Engineer, IT
In addition to duties as specified in section 202.10, he shall assist the Assistant Executive Engineer,
IT.
204.9.3 Assistant Executive Engineer, RMMS
In addition to duties as specified in section 202.8, he shall assist the Executive Engineer, IT, for the
following.
1. The administration and upkeep of RMMS throughout the State to ensure prepare adequate road
maintenance budget to meet the required level of service for the road user.
2. Ensure that PWD offices in each district, conducts road condition survey on time.
3. Co-ordinate with the Assistant Executive Engineer, GIS, in checking the accuracy of the road
data received from the districts.
4. Train all staff in the proper understanding and use of the Road Maintenance Management
System in co-ordination with HRD Cell.
5. Preparation of the Annual Maintenance Program for the entire PWD road network and propose
distribution of funds for routine maintenance activities.
6. Collect information from the field offices on major disasters like flood damages, collapse
of bridges etc. and furnish reports to higher authorities.
7. Co-ordinate with the Assistant Executive Engineer, RMMS, in each district, to set procedures
and timings to ensure that the annual road maintenance program is prepared to meet the
required budget schedule;
8. Recommend changes to maintenance procedures and techniques for more effective and
cost effective maintenance.
9. Any other duties assigned by his superior officers.
204.9.4 Assistant Engineer, RMMS
In addition to duties as specified in section 202.10, he shall assist the Assistant Executive Engineer,
RMMS, in all the activities.
204.9.5 Assistant Executive Engineer, GIS
In addition to duties as specified in section 202.8, he shall assist the Executive Engineer, IT, for :
1. The GIS operations within PWD.
2. Giving directions to Assistant Engineers of the GIS unit.
3. Coordinate the GIS operations with the other Assistant Executive Engineers for RMMS, FMS /
WINGS.
4. Coordination with HRD Cell for GIS training.
5. Any other duties assigned by his superior officers.
36
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

204.9.6 Assistant Engineer, Central GIS Unit

In addition to duties as specified in section 202.10, he shall assist the Assistant Executive Engineer, GIS,
for the following.
1. To prepare and monitor actual work plans of the GIS unit and to ensure the timely execution of
standard procedures.
2. To supervise and monitor the technical activities like data integration, performance analysis and
map preparation.
3. To update the database of GIS and to keep the overall data quality for a sustainable operation of
the GIS.
4. Collaborate and harmonize the technical aspects with other IT activities such as RMMS, FMS and
WINGS.
5. Perform all technical working steps as per operation manual.
6. Any other duties assigned by his superior officers.
204.9.7 Technicians/ Overseer, Central GIS Unit /
RMMS The duties of technicians shall be the following.
1. Supervise technical operations.
2. Under the control of actual technical performances, such as integration of spatial and attribute
data, retrieval and analysis of data, code assignment, preparation and taking print outs of maps
etc.
3. Specific tasks assigned, based on their preferences and specifications.
4. Interact with other IT operations, especially with the operators of the RMMS database.
5. Any other duties assigned by his superior officers.
204.10 Executive Engineer (Legal & Social)
1. He shall assist the Deputy Chief Engineer (Planning and Monitoring) and in addition to the
duties as per section 202.6 shall be responsible to:
2. Provide legal representation for the department in the Courts of Law and to take follow up action
in legal cases involving Department, monitor progress of the ongoing litigations and prepare
monthly progress reports.
3. Prepare legal documents relating to land acquisition, employees’ service matters and contracts.
4. Advise the field officers in legal matters particularly in respect of land acquisition cases.
5. Prepare instructions/notices & circulars explaining changes to legal issues that affect PWD.
6. Develop, maintain and update a database on legal clauses, litigation, and judgements etc. that are
relevant to the Department.
7. Arrange training of junior officers/Assistant Engineers in legal matters, which are most relevant
to PWD on a regular basis at the PWD Training Centre.
8. To provide expert opinion to the authorities for settlement of legal claims put forward by the
officers and employees.
9. To act as a defending lawyer on behalf of PWD at time of arbitration.
10. To assist PWD in all related matters.
204.10.1 Assistant Executive Engineer (Legal and Social)
He shall assist the Executive Engineer (Legal & Social) In addition to the duties as per section 202.8, he
shall:
1. Develop the detailed criteria and guidelines to be employed by PWD to enforce the Highway
Protection Act
2. Co-ordinate with PWD offices, police, and other departments as necessary, to implement
enforcement of the Highway Protection Act;
3. Act as the PWD co-ordinator for the Working Group set up to manage the utility authority
access to PWD Right of Way;
4. Liaise with the Assistant Executive Engineer (Policy Guidelines) to ensure appropriate legal
input and suggest modification of PWD policies
5. Prepare drafts on engineering aspects related to land acquisition, rehabilitation and re-settlement.
6. Assist the Executive Engineer (Legal & Social) in the following issues:
(i) Develop, maintain and update a database on judgements, litigation, legal clauses etc
(ii) Legal matter of field offices, particularly in land acquisition cases and Highway Act.
(iii) In arbitration matters.
205 Chief Architect
The Chief Architect shall be responsible for the efficient functioning of the Architectural wing of the
PWD. His responsibility shall include:
1. Advise Chief Engineer, Buildings, on selection of site and approval of master plans and layouts and
approve Architectural concepts of projects above Rs.500 lakhs.

37
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2. Issuing instructions and guidance to subordinates for the preparation of master plans, layouts,
preparation of plans, sections, elevations and interior layout of building to suit the requirements,
preparation of detailed drawings and specifications of various components of buildings.
3. Advise and recommend for approval of the plans, sections elevations etc., of buildings after
verification.
4. Finalising type designs for various types of buildings commonly in use, for revising existing type
designs from time to time.
5. Suggesting detailed specifications for items generally involved in building construction which are
not included in the detailed standard specifications of the department.
6. Inspection of major building works during construction, if requested and giving instructions to field
officers regarding various features of the work under intimation to the Chief Engineer, Buildings.
7. Distributing the work in his branch to various subordinate officers, giving guidance to them in the
manner in which work has to be done and controlling their work.
8. Approving of service drawings for building utilities such as electrical, water supply, sewerage, fire,
rainwater harvesting etc.
9. To attend duties specifically assigned by Govt. from time to time.
205.1 Deputy Chief Architect
The Deputy Chief Architect shall assist the Chief Architect in all matters and shall have concurrent
responsibilities as that of the Chief Architect and approve Architectural concepts of projects above
Rs.200 - 500 lakhs
205.1.2 Senior Architect
He shall be responsible for the following, as instructed by the superior officers:
1. Directing the preparation of master plans, layouts, preparation of plans, sections, elevations interior
layout of building to suit the requirements, preparation of detailed drawings and specifications of
various components of buildings and approve Architectural concepts of drawings upto Rs. 200 lakhs,
Supervise and guide Architectural concepts of projects between 200 lakhs and 500 lakhs.
2. Scrutiny of plans, sections, elevations etc. of buildings
3. Preparation of type designs for various buildings commonly in use, and revising existing type
designs from time to time.
4. Preparation of working drawings and detailed specifications for items generally involved in building
construction, which are not included in the detailed standard specifications of the department
5. Working out designs of components, which are vulnerable.
6. Inspection of building works during construction if required with the consent of the Chief Architect
in co-ordination with the field engineers of PWD
7. Giving directions and guidance to subordinate officers in the manner in which work has to be done,
and controlling their work.
8. Assisting his superior officers in all matters entrusted to him.
9. Review of service drawings for building utilities such as electrical, water supply, sewerage, fire,
rainwater harvesting etc.
205.1.3 Deputy Architect / Technical Assistant (Architect) / Land Scape Architect He
shall be responsible for the following, as instructed by the superior officers:
1. He shall be responsible for assisting the senior architect in the preparation of master plans, detailed
working drawings, specifications etc. with regard to any project assigned to him.
2. Assisting the senior architect in the preparation of Architectural Designs of building projects and
preparation of detailed working drawings.
3. The scrutiny of architectural drawings keeping in view of the structural stability of various
component parts.
4. Working out designs of various components, which are vulnerable due to restricted size on account
of architectural or other considerations.
5. Guiding and controlling the work of subordinate staff.
6. Assisting his superior officers in all matters entrusted to him..
7. Checking of service drawings for building utilities such as electrical, water supply, sewerage, fire,
rainwater harvesting etc.

1. The preparation of detailed working drawings and scrutiny of the drawings prepared by the
Draughtsman.
2. Preparation of specifications of special items based on instruction from Senior Architect or Deputy
Architect.
3. Assisting his superior officers in all matters entrusted to him.
38
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

4. Scrutinizing of the service drawings for building utilities such as electrical, water supply, sewage,
fire safety, rain water harvesting etc.
5. Assisting his superior officers in all matters entrusted to him.
205.1.5 Architectural Draughtsman (Grade I & II)

1. Preparation of drawings based on instructions given to him by higher Officers.

2. Preparation of tracings of drawings.
3. Plotting survey work, reducing and plotting level sections etc. based on field data furnished to him
marking contours in survey drawings.
4. Checking plotted sections and surveys received from field offices with field book.
5. Preparing of service drawings for building utilities such as electrical, water supply, sewerage, fire
safety, rainwater harvesting etc.
6. Assisting his superior officers in all matters entrusted to him.
205.1.6 Artist
He shall carry out any work that may be specifically assigned to him by his superior officer.
205.1.7 Modeler
He shall carry out any work that may be specifically assigned to him by his Superior Officers.
205.1.8 Tracer
1. Assisting his superior officers in all matters entrusted to him.
2. Preparation of drawings based on instructions given to him by higher Officers.
3. Preparation of tracings of drawings.
4. Plotting survey work, reducing and plotting level sections etc. based on field data furnished to him
marking contours in survey drawings
205.1.9. Blue printer.
1. Shall carry out any work that may be specifically assigned to him by his Superior Officers.
2. Taking ammonia prints/blue prints of the drawings and fold it in prescribed manner

206 Buildings Wing

206.1 Chief Engineer, Buildings
In addition to the duties as per section 202.1, he shall also have the following duties
1. Accord TS to all the building works under his control as per delegation of powers
2. Submission of utilization certificate to the Government in the case of Centrally Sponsored Schemes.
3. Submit annual administration report of buildings to Government.
4. To attend to the duties specifically assigned by the Government from time to time.
5. Shall be responsible for planning, monitoring and budgeting.

The Superintending engineer posted in Chief Engineers office is designated as Deputy Chief Engineer
(buildings) and he shall assist Chief engineer in all official matters.

In addition to the duties as per section 202.6 he shall assist Deputy Chief Engineer, planning and
monitoring, in the following:
1. Coordinating with State Planning Department and other departments within the government.
2. Preparing annual plan, 5-years development plan and 20 year Master Plan for entire State.
3. Review of PWD activities and preparation of annual Administration reports
4. Review of proposals for foreign aided projects/aid-worthy projects.
5. Review drafts of Pre Feasibility Report (PFR), Feasibility Report (FR) and Detailed Project Report
(DPR) in accordance with field requirements, increased work load and adjustment of price escalation
etc.
6. Preparing technical reports, briefing superior officers regarding progress of works lapses, remedial
measures etc.
7. Issue directions for the revision of Schedule of rates and revision of standard data book
8. Maintaining a database of various Indian and International codes for use in the department in
coordination with the Assistant Executive Engineer (Policy Guidelines).
9. Collect progress report of all works including externally aided works and finance commission works
and consolidate the progress report in every month.
10. All other duties assigned by the Deputy Chief Engineer.
206.1.3 Assistant Executive Engineer (Planning), Buildings
In addition to the duties as per section 202.8, he shall assist the Executive Engineer (Planning –
Buildings) in the following:
1. Coordinating with state planning department and other departments within the government.
2. Review of activities and preparation of annual Administration reports
39
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

3. Prepare drafts of Pre feasibility report (PFR), Feasibility Report(FR) and Detailed Project
Report(DPR)
4. Preparing annual plan, 5-years development plan and 20 year Master Plan for entire state.
5. Preparing draft proposals for foreign aided projects/aid-worthy projects.
6. Prepare revised drafts of Pre Feasibility Report (PFR), Feasibility Report (FR) and Detailed Project
Report (DPR) in accordance with field requirements, increased work and adjustment of price
escalation etc.
7. Preparing technical reports, briefing superior officers regarding progress of works lapses, remedial
measures etc.
8. To examine proposals for buildings from the general public, MLAs , MPs etc.
9. Ensure that the details (environmental, re-settlement, feasibility etc.) required for Feasibility Report
and Detailed Project Report are obtained.
10. The revision of Schedule of Rates and revision of standard data book.
11. Review of items to ensure uniformity and review of adequacy of budget provisions..
12. Review of performance consistency of contractors throughout the State.
13. Review of proposals from divisions for allotment of maintenance funds under different
subheads considering defined program and budgetary constraints.
14. Any other duties assigned to him by the superior officer.
206.1.4 Assistant Engineer (Planning), Buildings
In addition to the duties as per section 202.10, he shall:
1. Assist the Assistant Executive Engineer (Planning), Buildings, in all the activities
2. Initiate in the preparation of annual administration report.
3. Any other duties assigned to him by the superior officer.
206.2 Superintending Engineer (Judicial Circle)
In addition to duties as per section 202.4, he shall be responsible for:
1. All the works for the judiciary Department.
2. Attend meetings related to construction activities of Judiciary department.
206.3 Superintending Engineer (Buildings)
In addition to duties as per section 202.4 he shall be responsible for the following:
1. Approval of rent as per delegation of powers
2. Valuation of buildings as per delegation of powers
3. Attend meetings relating to building construction activities of various Government Departments.
206.3.1 Executive Engineer, Buildings
In addition to duties as per section 202.6, he shall be responsible for the following:
1. To fix rates for cement, steel, etc. for departmental purchase.
2. Issue of Rent certificate, Non availability certificate, stability certificate etc.
3. Payment of property tax.
4. The source for various construction materials shall be fixed after an inspection of quarries and in
consultation with other Executive Engineers of the department in the District. The source so fixed
shall be communicated to Chief Engineer A&D once in every 5 years.
5. Make payment to Electronic Works.
6. Issue of salary to the PWD staff deployed to concerned LSGD division.
7. To approve rent calculations as per the guidelines prescribed and to furnish details in the specific
proforma and issue of rent certificate as per delegation of powers.
8. Issue of non availability certificate of buildings.
st th
9. Submit SoR revision proposals on line to the Chief Engineer A&D between 1 and 15 February
every year.
10. Ensure the cleanliness of Rest House/ TB’s/ IB’s, i f necessary by outsourcing.
11. Any other duties assigned to him by the superior officer.
12. To fix market rate of materials, labour in a Taluk / District in every quarter of a year.
206.3.2 Assistant Executive Engineer, Buildings
In addition to duties as per section 202.9, he shall be responsible for the following.
1. Maintaining standard measurement books as prescribed in rules with regard to items of works
regularly required to be done.
2. Verifying information about source and availability of principal construction materials and certifying
the conveyance involved.
3. Issue of rent certificate as per delegation of powers.
4. Supervision and check measurement of works under his jurisdiction.
5. Arrange periodical maintenance of buildings and allied works.
6. To verify the final layout of walls, columns and beams of structures.

40
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

7. Submit rent calculation beyond his powers for approval direct to the sanctioning authority without
routing through proper channel.
8. Ensure the cleanliness of Rest House/ TB’s/ IB’s, i f necessary by outsourcing.
9. Any other duties assigned to him by the superior officer.
206.3.3 Assistant Engineer / Buildings
In addition to the duties as per section 202.9, an Assistant Engineer, under the control of a Buildings
Section, shall be responsible for the following:
1. The inspection and issue of Fitness Certificate to school buildings, theatres etc., situated within his
jurisdiction.
2. Inspection and furnishing of details necessary for issue of stability certificates of buildings when
called upon.
3. Inspection, preparation of plans and collecting required data for the working out of fair rent of
buildings when called upon to do so.
4. Inspection and report of the stage of progress of buildings built with financial aid from the
Government.
5. To transfer building, including inventory and the electrical installations to the
occupying/concerned department
6. Maintenance and upkeep of PWD Rest Houses, Quarters etc.
7. To prepare rent calculations as per the guidelines prescribed and to furnish details in the specific
proforma and issue of rent certificate as per delegation of powers.
8. To issue fitness certificate of temporary structures including stage.
9. Ensure the cleanliness of Rest House/ TB’s/ IB’s, i f necessary by outsourcing.
10. To issue sweeping area certificate as per norms.
11. Any other duties assigned to him by the superior officer.
206.3.4 Executive Engineer, Special Buildings
In addition to duties as per section 202.6 he shall be responsible for all works of Kerala House at Delhi,
Bombay, Kanyakumari, works outside the state, all major building works in Thiruvananthapuram and
any other special works allotted by the Chief Engineer.
206.3.5 Assistant Executive Engineer, Special Buildings
In addition to duties as per section 202.8 he shall be responsible for the following
1. Maintaining standard measurement books as prescribed in rules with regard to items of works
regularly required to be done.
2. Supervision and check measurement of major buildings.

In addition to duties as per section 202.10, an Assistant Engineer under the control of special Buildings
Section, shall be responsible for the following
1. Maintaining standard measurement books as prescribed in rules with regard to items of works
regularly required to be done.
2. Supervision and measurement of major building works.
3. Arrange periodical maintenance of buildings
206.3.7 Executive Engineer, Legislative Complex
In addition to duties as per section 202.6, he shall be responsible for all construction and maintenance
works of Legislative Complex, Thiruvananthapuram.
206. 3.8 Assistant Executive Engineer, Legislative complex
In addition to duties as per section 202.8 he shall be responsible for all construction and maintenance
works of Legislative complex, Thiruvananthapuram
206.3.9 Assistant Engineer (Legislative complex)
In addition to duties as per section 202.10 he shall be responsible for all construction and maintenance
works of Legislative complex, Thiruvananthapuram.
207 Electrical Wing
207.1 Superintending Engineer, Electrical
1. Assist the Chief Engineer (Buildings) in all matters relating to Electrical works.
2. Inspection of major installations and works, which require his advice and assistance.
3. Issuing inspection notes immediately after inspection.
4. Sanctioning of all estimates and arranging all electrical works within the powers.
5. Scrutinise and accord TS within his powers of sanction to all estimates.
6. Overall control of the work of subordinate officers.
7. Giving sanction for arrangements related VVIP/ VIP visits and Government functions, as per
delegation of powers.
8. Exercising overall control over the establishment of the electrical wing.
9. Exercising administrative and financial powers delegated to him.
41
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

10. Suggesting and implementing technical innovation in the execution of electrical works.
11. Recommending schedule of rates for different items of works involved for approval of Chief
Engineer every year.
12. Examining the quality of different makes of electrical materials and preparing list of approved
makes for use in electrical works for the guidance of subordinate officers. If different catalogue
numbers/sub sections are available for the same brand, the particular catalogue number/sub
section shall be mentioned.
13. Recommending specification for materials and works involved in electrification works for
approval by the Chief Engineer.
14. Issuing departmental approval for electrical materials.
15. Issuing Electrical Contractor License / Registration (all categories) and fixing rules and
regulations.
16. Examining relevant documents and notes and issuing order on routine matters subject to any
general or specific instruction of the Chief Engineer.
17. Examining relevant documents and notes and recommending actions in cases requiring Chief
Engineer’s attention.
18. To approve and finalise an electrical design and drawings.
19. Conduct inspection for approval to workshops / factories where electrical panel, materials are
manufactured.
20. To implement energy conservation methods.
21. To participate in all State level meeting where electrical matters are involved.

207.2 Executive engineer Electrical-Design

1. He shall possess a degree in Electrical engineering and his duties shall include
2. Scrutinizing of all electrical design and drawing and submitting to Superintending
Engineer electrical for approval
3. Conducting site inspection and discussion with officials of user department , assessing the
requirements, incorporating any omissions ,taking into consideration the future load for
finalizing the design and drawings and submitting to superintending Engineer electrical
4. Overall administrative and technical control of the electrical lab
5. Conducting necessary test with support of sub-ordinate technical staff to determine the quality
of various electrical materials
6. Conducting/supervising necessary tests within /outside the lab if such facility is not available
in the lab for giving approval to electrical materials
7. Issuing certificates for the materials tested
8. Recommending quality control measures in electrical works and conducting inspection to
work sites if necessary
9. Preparing inspection notes and submitting to Superintending Engineer electrical
10. Conduct training to the officials of PWD electrical wing
11. Keeping in safe custody the samples of electrical materials approved by the superintending
engineer electrical till the next renewal and producing when necessary. He shall compare the
samples in case of dispute and conduct random checking whether the supplied materials are
in conformity with the standards and samples produced
12. shall be responsible for any other matters concerning electrical design, drawing, quality
control and testing assigned to him by the Superintending Engineer electrical

In addition to the duties as per 202.6 whichever is applicable, he shall be responsible for
1. Preparation of specification of materials and items involved in electrification works for
recommending to superintending Engineer electrical and keeping the specifications upto date
2. Verifying the quality of different make of materials
3. Assist the Superintending Engineer in conducting inspections for issue of
approvals/registration of contractors if required and preparing inspection notes
4. Inspecting at least 5 major works in every district subject to a minimum of 50 works in a year.
5. Inspection of electrical installations, at least 2 major installations in every sub division in a
year and preparing inspection notes
6. Sanctioning of all estimates and arranging all electrical works within the powers
7. Issuing instructions for preparation of annual Indents for materials, Tools and Plants etc
8. Making payment to Electrical and Electronics works
9. Arranging the issue of timely reminders on technical reference remaining un answered
from subordinate officers

42
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

10. Representing the department in conferences and meetings concerning electrical works or
those which the superintending engineer electrical is unable to be present and taking follow
up action after informing the Superintending /Chief engineer
11. Exercising overall technical and administrative control of the sub divisions
12. Distributing the works in the office among the staff working under him and giving them
timely instructions
13. Taking initiative in suggesting technical improvements and energy conservation measures
to Superintending Engineer electrical
14. Any other duties assigned to him by the superior officers
207.2.2 Assistant Executive Engineer, Electrical
In addition to relevant duties included under 202.8 whichever is applicable he shall be responsible for
the following.
1. Checking estimates submitted by the Assistant Engineer.
2. Inspection and holding discussions with concerned officials before finalising the estimates.
3. Inspecting works during execution, exercising quality control, check measuring works, scrutinising
bills etc.
4. Forwarding Bills for payments to the concerned Electrical/ Buildings division.
5. To check the arrangements of works related to VIP visits and Governmental functions.
6. Following the instructions received from higher officers from time to time regarding proper
execution of the work.
7. Carrying out any other duties that may be specifically assigned to him by superior officers.
8. To represent the department in district wise meeting and conferences concerning electrical matters.
207.2.3 Assistant Engineer, Electrical
The general responsibilities defined for the Assistant Engineer (Civil) as per section 202.10, whichever is
applicable will apply to the Assistant Engineer (Electrical) also. In addition, he shall be responsible for:
1. Guiding and controlling of the work of the electrical staff attached to the section.
2. Arranging rectification of defects reported to him by the field staff and restoring supply.
3. Guiding in proper maintenance of installations and safety measures.
4. Periodical testing of installations, noting the test readings and making timely action for rectification
of defect, when the test readings are not within the safe limits.
5. Preparing and giving instruction for the preparation of estimates for electrification works and
verifying the adequacy in conformity with standards & norms.
6. Inspecting works in progress and giving necessary instructions
7. Arrangement of works related to VVIP visits and Governmental functions.
8. Taking measurements of all works and preparation of bills.
9. Carrying out any and other duties that may be assigned to him by his superior officers.
10. To check measure measurement recorded by the Overseer.
207.2.4 First Grade Overseer, Electrical
His duties shall include:
1. To supervise and record measurement in M. Book all underground works like cable laying,
earthing, concealed pipe etc and work within the TS powers of Assistant Engineer.
2. Inspection and verification of inventory register and ensuring that it is maintained properly and
entries are made up to date.
3. Overall supervision of the work in the section
4. Arranging shift duty of the staff and allocation of work to subordinates.
5. Maintenance of stores, Tools & Plant.
6. Maintaining MS Accounts.
7. Security of the inventory Register maintained by Second Grade Overseer .
8. Marking of points of works, supervision of works and taking required follow-up action.
9. Periodical inspection of installations.
10. Preparation of Tender Schedule, Tender Documents etc.
11. Collecting details for the preparation of estimates.
12. Keeping watch over the progress of works and reporting to the Assistant Engineer, Electrical,
about the same.
13. Checking the quality of materials on arrival at site and at the time of usage on work to see that
they comply with specifications.
14. Checking the quality of work under execution and checking whether the work is executed as
per agreement condition.
15. In the event of violation of any of the items referred as (11) and (12) above, reporting the matter
to Assistant Engineer, Electrical, in writing, then and there.

43
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

16. Maintaining work spot order book as per rules and keeping an account of the daily usage
of departmental materials on the work.
17. Taking charge of unserviceable or dismantled materials obtained during the execution of work
and arranging for their disposal as ordered by higher officers.
18. Keeping account of Tools & Plant, if any, issued to Contractor.
19. Attending shift duty including holidays when posted in generating station/substation.
20. Any other duties that may be assigned to him by his superior officers.
207.2.5 Second Grade Overseer, Electrical
1. Inspecting the electrical installations.
2. Collecting details for the preparation of estimates.
3. Preparing estimate for electrical works.
4. Preparing, updating and maintaining inventory register.
5. Attending shift duty including holidays when posted in Generating station/Substation.
6. Any other duties that may be assigned to him by his superior officers.
207.2.6 / Third Grade Overseer / Lineman,
Electrical His duties shall include:
1. Attending to petty repairs such as changing switches, holders, flex wire etc
2. Rectification of defects of OH line
3. Attending to fuse calls, tracing out and locating faults
4. Reporting within 24 hours to the overseer/ Assistant Engineer, the defects in the
installation inspected by him
5. Maintaining a diary of works attended
6. Attending works of urgent nature for immediate restoration of supply
7. Collecting details for the preparation of estimates
8. when posted in work site, checking the workmanship and quality
9. Attending shift duty including holidays as assigned by the superiors
10. Assist the FGO/SGO in execution of works and preparation of bills
11. Attending the duty during VIP visits, government functions etc as directed by the
Assistant Engineer
12. Any other duties assigned by the superior officers
208 Electronics
208.1 Executive Engineer, Electronics
The Executive Engineer, Electronics, shall be the Technical advisor to the Chief Engineer, Buildings, in
the matter of all electronics works. He shall also be responsible for:
1. The technical control of all works connected with the Electronics Wing subject to the overall control
of the Chief Engineer, Buildings.
2. The arrangements for VIP visits and other Governmental functions.
3. Examining relevant documents and notes in respect of Electronic works and issuing orders on
routine matters subject to any general or special instructions of the Chief Engineer.
4. Suggesting technical improvements in the execution and maintenance of Electronic and IT related
works.
5. Inspection of all works under the Electronics Subdivisions like installation of EPABX (Electronic
Private Automatic Branch Exchange), Computer & Accessories, LAN (Local Area Network)/ WAN
(Wide Area Network), P. A. (Public Address) System, Internal Telephone system, Community
listening centre, servicing stations under the various Sections maintained by the Department and
sound equipment in buildings.
6. The periodical inspection of all major and important works.
7. The reviewing of stock materials for Electronics Works and arranging supply of requirements
wherever necessary.
8. Scrutinise and recommend the estimates to the Chief Engineer, for according TS.
9. Reviewing monthly progress reports regarding works and issue of directions wherever necessary.
10. Any other work not mentioned in the above, relating to the Electronics Wing, assigned by the Chief
Engineer or Deputy Chief Engineer.
208.1.2 Assistant Executive Engineer, Electronics
In addition to the duties as per section 202.8, which ever is applicable, he shall be responsible for :
1. Checking estimates for electronic works and conducting site inspections wherever necessary for
finalising the estimates.
2. Maintaining and repairing of IT Equipments related to GIS, RMMS, FMS, WINGS.
3. Inspection of works during execution and giving guidance and instructions to subordinates.
4. Maintaining and procuring stores attached to the Subdivision including distribution of requirements
for replenishing buffer stocks.
44
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

5. Verification of buffer stocks, dismantled materials etc., in the sections under him.
6. Inspection of Community Listening Centres, Servicing Stations, Public Address Installations, other
electronic equipments, works and installations like EPABX (Electronic Private Automatic Branch
Exchange),Computer & Accessories, LAN (Local Area Network)/ WAN (Wide Area Network)
under his jurisdiction.
7. Issuing certificates of un serviceability of Community Listening Sets or other equipments according
to rules.
8. Forwarding Bills for payments to the concerned division.
9. Any other duties that may be specifically assigned to him by his superior officers.
208.1.3 Assistant Engineer, Electronics
In addition to the duties as per section 202.10, whichever is applicable, he shall be responsible for :
1. Preparation of estimates relating to electronic works and execution of works.
2. Maintaining and repairing of IT equipments related to GIS, RMMS, FMS, WINGS.
3. Supervise the works during execution and submission of bills.
4. Guiding and controlling the installations, Servicing Stations, Public Address Installations.
5. Guiding and controlling the staff of his section.
6. Inspection of Community Listening Centres and other equipment and installations, according to
instructions.
7. Distribution of works among the staff and taking up works himself whenever necessary.
8. Maintenance of buffer stock and tools and plant including procurement of spares and equipments.
9. Preparation and prompt submission of periodicals and MS Accounts.
10. Recommendation of unserviceable radios, audiovisual equipments and accessories for disposal.
11. Assisting the Assistant Executive Engineer in the collection of dues from Panchayats/ other
departments / institutions.
12. Assisting in the preparation of estimates for procurement of IT equipments
(GIS,RMMS,FMS,WINGS) and spare parts
13. Any other duties assigned to him by his superior officer.
14. Co-ordinate e-governance activities of the department at the district level.
208.1.4 Engineering Assistant
He shall be responsible for the following:
1. Preparation of drawings, supervision of works and taking required for follow up action.
2. Supervision in the installation LAN, EPABX, Public Address System, WAN, Video Conferencing
System and other electrical communication systems.
3. Provide support to PWD officers for the smooth implementation of e-governance activities.
4. Maintaining and repairing of computers, printers, and other IT related equipments.
5. Preparation of tender schedules, tender documents etc
6. Keeping watch over the progress of works and reporting to the Assistant Engineer (Electronics)
7. Checking the quality of materials on arrival at site and up to the time of usage to see they comply
with this specifications.
8. Checking the quality of work under execution and checking whether the work is executed as
per agreement condition.
9. Taking charge of unserviceable or dismantled materials obtained during execution of woks
and arranging for disposal as ordered by higher officers.
10. Installation and repair of radio sets and other electronic equipments
11. Assisting the Assistant Engineer in the preparation of records, periodicals, office work, collecting
details from field and preparation of estimates and execution of works.
12. Any other duty specifically assigned to him by his superior officers.
1*
209 Roads and Bridges wing
1
209.1 Chief Engineer, (R&B) *

In addition to the duties as per section 202.1 he shall also have the following duties:
1. Give approval of alignment of roads .
2. Accord Technical Sanction to all road works under his control as per delegation of powers.
3. Sanction investigation estimate for all road works as per delegation of powers.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1* Separate wing for the Road maintenance is created under Chief Engineer (Road Maintenance) vide
GO (Ms) No. 39/2017/PWD dated 29.06.2017 and Roads and Bridges wing is divided into two as Roads
wing under Chief Engineer (Roads) and Bridges wing under Chief Engineer (Bridges) vide GO(Ms) No.
8/2018/PWD dated 27.03.2018. It is decided to establish Seven Division Offices each for two districts &

45
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

two Circle Offices for Bridges wing and Sub Division Offices in each district & Seven Division Offices
each for two districts for the Maintenance wing as per GO (Rt) No. 1519/2018/PWD dated 25.09.2018.
4. To obtain approval of Government for separate estimate for land acquisition and shifting utility
services, in case of project
5. Submission of annual administration report to government.
6. allocate the maintenance fund to each Division at the start of the every financial year based
on RMMS.
7. Shall ensure that DPR is prepared for all sanctioned projects and arrangement of the project.
209.2 Deputy Chief Engineer, Roads & Bridges
Superintending engineer posted in Chief engineers office shall be designated as Deputy
Chief Engineer(Roads)and shall be accountable to the chief engineer in all official matters.
209.2.1 Executive Engineer (Planning - Roads & Bridges)
In addition to the duties as per section 202.6 he shall assist the Deputy Chief Engineer in the following:
1. Review of annual plan, 5-years development plan and 20 year Master Plan for entire state.
2. Review of proposals for externally aided projects.
3. Review of PWD activities and preparation of annual administration report
4. Review of revised draft of Pre Feasibility Report (PFR), Feasibility Report (FR) and Detailed
Project Report (DPR) in accordance with field requirements, increased work and cost escalation
etc.
He shall also be responsible for the Administration and implementation of the RMMS throughout the
State by setting a suitable road maintenance program.
Set procedures and timings to ensure that road condition data is collected in a systematic and sustainable
program;

1. Liaise with and direct Executive Engineer in each Division to ensure maintenance activities are
undertaken and actioned as required to meet set Government policy and strategies;
2. Set time table and schedules for Division staff for undertaking of regular audits to ensure that the
budget and funds as proposed are spent as intended and that the works represent best value for
expenditure;
3. Co-ordinate and compile the annual State road maintenance budget requirements for budget
submission;
4. Assist the Chief Engineer to finalise and submit the required budget and supporting
documentation to Government for approval;
5. Recommend changes to maintenance procedures and techniques for more effective and cost
effective maintenance;
6. Prepare reports for reclassification and upgradation of roads for approval by Chief Engineer
7. Report to the Chief Engineer any problems with the annual maintenance program and whether
the road maintenance budget is adequate to achieve the set level of service:
8. Overall charge of Road Policy, strategies, its implementation
9. Coordinating with state planning department and other departments within the government.
10. Review of PWD activities and preparation of annual Administration reports
11. Maintaining a database of various Indian and international codes for use in the department in
coordination with the Assistant Executive Engineer, Policy Guidelines.
12. Collect progress report of budgetary works, non budgetary works, external financially aided
works, NABARD assisted works and Tsunami works and consolidate the progress report in
every month.
209.2.2 Assistant Executive Engineer, Planning (Roads & Bridges)
In addition to the duties as per section 202.8, he shall assist the Executive Engineer, Planning (Roads
& Bridges) in the following activities
1. Prepare annual plan, 5-years development plan and 20 year Master Plan for entire state.
2. Prepare of proposals for externally aided projects.
3. Review of PWD activities and preparation of annual administration report
4. Prepare revised draft of Pre Feasibility Report (PFR), Feasibility Report (FR) and Detailed
Project, Report (DPR) in accordance with field requirements, increased work and cost escalation
etc.
5. Preparing technical reports, briefing papers etc for senior engineers.
6. Examine and investigate proposals for roads and bridges from the general public, MLAs , MPs
and others.
7. Assist in preparation of reports for reclassification and upgradation of roads for approval by
Chief Engineer

46
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

8. Ensure whether the reports (environmental, re-settlement, feasibility etc.) required for Feasibility
Report and Detailed Project Report are obtained.
9. Review of data to verify uniformity and adequacy of budgets and consistency of contractor
performance throughout the State; undertake regular audits.
10. Assist in review of proposals from divisions for allotment of maintenance funds under different
subheads in consideration of defined programme and budgetary constraints.
11. Any other duties assigned to him by the superior officer.
209.2.3 Assistant Engineer, Planning (Roads & Bridges)
In addition to the duties as per section 202.10 he shall assist the Assistant Executive Engineer, Planning
(Roads & Bridges) in all activities. He shall also assist in the preparation of the administration report.
209.3 Superintending Engineer, (R&B)
In addition to duties as per section 202.4, he shall be responsible for the following:
1. Periodical inspection of sites and review the progress
2. Verification of maintenance registers, road charts, etc.
3. To approve the plugging / seating of well foundation of bridges.
4. Forecast of requirements of bitumen and steps taken to procure them through the division.
5. Review of road traffic statistics and recommendations for reclassification and up gradation of roads.
6. To implement Restoration Protocol.
7. Accord Technical Sanction as per delegation of powers for road, which are under his control.
8. Propose adequate provisions in budget proposal for data collection activities for RMMS/ RBMMS
9. To approve the design of structures within his TS powers.

209.3.1 Executive Engineer, Roads

In addition to duties as per section 202.6, he shall be responsible for the following
1. As the Highway Authority, take suitable steps to evict encroachments as per provisions of Highway
protection Act.
2. Requisition for land acquisition
3. Furnish the details of monthly progress achieved in the eviction of encroachments as per Highway
Protection Act.
4. Arrange departmental supply of bitumen for works as per requirement.
5. Reimbursement of actual cost of items purchased by contractor for works as per delegation of powers.
6. Ensure compliance to road cutting protocol by co-ordinating with utility agencies and
publish the road cutting programme in the web site.
7. Implement the actions proposed by the Road Safety Cell.
8. Ensure that the entire land required for the work has been taken over and is in possession of the
department free of encumbrance prior to arrangement of work.
9. Direct the field officers on the implementation of routine maintenance works in accordance with the
PWD Road Maintenance Manual.
10. To approve the design of structures within his TS powers.
11. To prepare and approve the annual maintenance programme based on RMMS for the next financial
year and to forward the same before end of November as per delegation of powers.
12. To inform the District Collector to take over the land already acquired but no longer required for
PWD with the consent of the Chief Engineer.
13. To renter all necessary assistance by him or by his subordinate staff to the executive engineer
general in the origination of project.

In addition to the duties as specified in section 202.8, he shall have the following specific duties
1. Assist the Executive Engineer in the implementation of Highway Protection Act.
2. Supervision and check measurement of road works.
3. Implement the Road Safety works as approved from the Central Road Safety Cell.
4. To inspect the toll collection centers and ensure that the toll collection as per regulation.
5. To check the design of structures and drawing for all culverts and minor bridges having single
effective span upto 15 metres, within the TS power of Executive Engineer,
6. To assist the Executive Engineer in identifying the land acquired earlier but no longer required.
7. To evict all encroachments with the help of Revenue and Police authorities invoking powers under
Land Conservation Act.
209.3.3 Assistant Engineer, Roads
In addition to the duties as specified in section 202.10, he shall have the following specific duties
1. To assist in eviction of encroachment by implementation of Highway Protection Act and Land
Conservation Act.

47
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2. Emergency works like removal of fallen trees, earth slips, diverting water from road surfaces etc.
shall be and immediately report to the higher authorities.
3
3. Whenever earthwork quantity exceeds 300 m , levels shall invariably be taken.
4. To design and prepare the drawing for all culverts and minor bridges having single effective span
within the TS powers of Executive Engineer.
5. To maintain registers for all the roads and culverts under his charge in the required proforma.
6. Supervise toll collections within his jurisdiction.
7. Conduct traffic census in co-ordination with RMMS unit.
209.3.4 Executive Engineer, Bridges
In addition to duties as specified in section 202.6, he shall be responsible for the following:
1. Conduct periodic inspection of all bridges under his jurisdiction and furnish inspection reports to the
Road Maintenance Unit.
2. Arrange maintenance of all bridges and approaches for a length of 50 m on either side..
3. Coordinate with utility agencies to implement Restoration Protocol.
4. Approve design of structures within his TS powers.
5. Approve the founding level of bridges.
6. Approve the staging & scaffolding of major RCC components.
7. Approve method of Pre-stressing and ensure that the design load is applied in the case of all Pre-
stressed Concrete masonry.
8. To renter all necessary assistance by him or by his subordinate staff to the executive engineer
general in the origination of project
209.3.5 Assistant Executive Engineer, Bridges
In addition to the duties as specified in section 202.8, he shall have the following duties.
1. Supervision and check measurement of bridge works.
2. Arrange maintenance of bridges and approaches for a length of 50m on either side.
3. To conduct periodic inspection of all bridges.
4. Assist the Executive Engineer to coordinate with utility agencies to implement restoration protocol.
5. Supervise concrete pouring of all RCC works.
6. Arrange to prepare design of structures.
7. Recommend the founding level of bridges.
8. Recommend the method of pre stressing and supervise the Pre-stressing procedure.
9. Any other duties assigned by the superior officers.
209.3.6 Assistant Engineer, Bridges
In addition to the duties as specified in section 202.10, he shall have the following duties:
1. Vegetation removal from the structures.
2. Before preparing an estimate for a Bridge work the Assistant Engineer concerned shall personally
verify the necessity and adequacy of the various provisions as per approved design.
3. Whenever earthwork quantity exceeds 300 cubic m. levels shall be invariably taken.
4. Conduct periodic inspection of all bridges.
5. Initiate action to coordinate all works.
6. Prepare/Obtain design of structures.
7. Furnish details for finalising the founding level.
8. Adhere to the approved method of pre stressing
9. Scrutinise and forward the staging and scaffolding details obtained from the contractor for approval.
10. Supervise concrete pouring of all concrete works.
11. Any other duties assigned by the superior officers.
210 National Highways Wing
210.1 Chief Engineer, National Highways
In addition to the duties as per section 202.1, he shall also have the following duties:
1. Initiate actions to get the proposals included in the annual plan.
2. To initiate actions to get the proposals approved from MoRTH.
3. To accord TS to works as per delegation of powers.
4. To allot funds under various heads to the divisions based on the allocation from MoRTH.
5. Submit proposals to MoRTH for declaration as NH.
210.1.1 Deputy Chief Engineer, National Highways
He shall have the duties as per section 202.3
210.2 Superintending Engineer, National Highways
In addition to duties as per section 202.4, he shall be responsible for the following
1. Accord TS to works as per delegation of powers.
2. To approve the plugging/ seating of well foundations of bridges
3. Periodical inspection of sites and review the progress of works.
48
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

4. Recommend the proposals to MoRTH.

210.2.1 Executive Engineer, National Highways
In addition to duties as per section 202.6, he shall be responsible for the following
1. Issue of TS to works as per delegation of powers.
2. Monitor and review of all works within his jurisdiction.
3. Ensure eviction of encroachments on the National Highway.
4. Ensure prevention of encroachments on the National Highway.
5. Coordinate with other utility agencies for implementation of restoration protocol for road cutting
6. To move for land acquisition after the proposal has been sanctioned by MoRTH.
7. Any other duties assigned by the superior officers
8. To renter all necessary assistance by him or by his subordinate staff to the executive engineer
general in the origination of project.
210.2.2 Assistant Executive Engineer, National highways
In addition to duties as per section 202.8, he shall be responsible for the following
1. Supervision and check measurement of works under National Highways.
2. Implement the road safety works.
3. Verify that the toll collections within his jurisdiction are as per regulations in force.
4. To assist in ensuring eviction of encroachments on the National Highway.
5. To submit proposal for land acquisition.
210.2.3 Assistant Engineer, National highways
His duties shall be as per section 202.10
210.2.4 Assistant Executive Engineer, Quality control
In addition to duties as per section 202.8, he shall be responsible for the following.
1. Ensure adherence to quality as per the IRC standards.
2. Submit fortnightly Quality inspection reports of works to Superintending Engineer and
concerned divisions.
3. Any other duties assigned by the superior officers.
210.2.5 Assistant Engineer, Quality control
In addition to duties as per section 202.10, he shall assist the Assistant Executive Engineer, Quality
Control, in all related activities as per IRC standards.
211 Projects
211.1 Chief Engineer, Projects
In addition to the duties as per section 202.1, he shall also have the following duties:
1. Manage any specialised projects as per agreement.
2. Assign duties to his subordinate officers to manage Land Acquisition, Social Impacts, Quality Control,
Environment, Safety and service procurement as per requirements.
3. Liaison with the external funding agencies for sanctions and payments.
4. Finalise Bid Documents for the project.
211.2 Superintending Engineer, Projects
In addition to the duties as per section 202.4, he shall also have the following duties:
1. Issuing direction and guidance of works as per agreement.
2. Sanctioning bills and recommending for payment.
3. Reviewing Bid Documents for the project.
211.2.1 Executive Engineer, Projects
In addition to the duties as per section 202.6, he shall also have the following duties:
1. Overall supervision of works as per the agreement of KSTP.
2. Timely transmission of bills and recommending for payment.
3. Scrutinizing preparation of Bid Documents for the project.
211.2.2 Assistant Executive Engineer, Projects
In addition to the duties as per section 202.8, he shall also have the following duties:
1. Supervision of works as per the agreement.
2. Timely checking of bills and recommending for payment.
3. Assisting in preparation of Bid Documents for the project.
211.2.3 Assistant Engineer, Projects
In addition to the duties as per section 202.10, he shall also have the following duties:
1. Supervision of works as per the agreement.
2. Timely verifying bills and recommending for payment.
3. Assisting in preparation of Bid Documents for the project.
212 Ministerial
212.1 Administrative Officer

49
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

He shall be under the direct control of Chief Engineer Administration & Designs Administration, and
shall be responsible for all administrative matters in general. He shall also be responsible for the
following:
1. The establishment matters including transfer and posting of all non-gazetted ministerial staff of PWD.
2. To record opinion about members of the staff in their Confidential Reports, prepare the confidential
reports of the Superintendents and Administrative Assistants and submit them direct to the Chief
Engineer, Administration & Design.
3. To sanction destruction of old records of the headquarters unit as laid down in the Manual of Office
Procedure.
4. To dispose off papers of routine nature.
5. To address Government on routine matters and to communicate with Government on all matters on
the lines of the Chief Engineer's orders.
6. To address the Accountant General direct in all matters except in cases where the provisions of the
concerned Acts or Rules there under require that the orders and instruments have to be signed by the
Chief Engineer himself.
7. To organise and distribute work in the headquarters unit in respect of staff whom he in competent to
appoint.
8. To conduct fortnightly review of the "Register of Establishment Audit objections" and to conduct
monthly inspection of the "Register of Draft Para".
9. To conduct administrative inspection of all offices in the P.W.D. and forward reports with review
thereof to the respective Chief Engineer.
10. To sanction TA bills for December and previous months preferred after March of the succeeding years
11. To sanction pension to all officers, whom he is competent to appoint.
12. To sanction reimbursement of medical expenses subject to rules.
13.To countersign TA bills of non-gazetted officers below the rank of Administrative Officer.
14.To exercise the powers of the Chief Engineer regarding temporary withdrawals from Provident Fund
Deposits of subordinates in the Department.
15.To correspond with Public Service Commission, Accountant General and other Heads of
Departments and Institutions in routine matters such as making interim correspondence, sending
reminders, furnishing information etc.
16.To exercise the powers of the Chief Engineer in the matters of loans, Cycle advance, advance for the
purchase of motor car/cycles, mosquito nets etc. according to rules.
212.2 Administrative Assistants
The Administrative Assistant shall assist the Chief Engineer (Administration & Design)/ Superintending
Engineer in managing establishment matters. He is also responsible for:
1. Guiding and controlling the work of all ministerial staff in the office to ensure that business
rules/Manual of Office Procedure are properly observed.
2. Reviewing the work of the section heads under his control to see that they carry out the work
systematically and promptly.
3. Ensuring prompt action being taken on important and urgent matters and where necessary bringing
such cases personally to the notice of the Chief Engineer/Deputy Chief Engineer/Superintending
Engineer/ Administrative Officer.
4. Examining relevant documents and notes and issuing orders of purely routine matters subject to
general or special instructions of Chief Engineer/Deputy Chief Engineer/ Superintending Engineer/
Administrative Officer.
5. Making temporary arrangements for carrying out the work on subordinate ministerial or Class IV
officers who may be absent, on leave etc.
6. Maintaining order and discipline in the office, in accordance with instructions of Chief
Engineer/Deputy Chief Engineer/ Superintending Engineer/ Administrative Officer.
7. Seeing that registers, books, accounts etc. as per prescribed rules are maintained and kept up-to-date
and to checking accuracy of postings at intervals.
8. The safe custody of documents and other valuables entrusted to his care.
9. Scrutinizing files, notes etc. on matters requiring orders of higher authority and putting up such cases
promptly with his own remarks.
10. Yearly preparation of list for each categories of staff for transfers and postings according to
transfer norms
11. Preparing monthly list of vacant posts in each categories for filling up vacancies by promotion or
by posting through PSC or posting through employment exchange
12. Ensuring safe custody of office furniture and maintenance of accounts, thereof.
13. Exercising supervisory control over the custodians of typewriter, Furniture, stationery and other
valuables in Chief Engineers Office and circle office.
50
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

14. Carrying out any other duties specifically assigned to him by superior officers.
212.3 Administrative Assistant (Treasury)
In addition to the duties as per section 212.2, whichever is applicable, he shall be responsible for :
1. Ensuring timely preparation, encashment and disbursement of pay and allowances of all non gazetted
staff and auditing of salary bill / TA bills etc prepared by gazetted officers for its encashment and
disbursal in the Chief Engineer’s office.
2. He shall be under the control of timely preparation, encashment and disbursement of contingent bills.
3. To maintain proper accounts for all the transactions and submit monthly accounts to the
Accountant General.
212.4 Administrative Assistant (Vigilance)
He shall be assisting Chief Engineer, Administration/ Deputy Chief Engineer, Vigilance.
In addition to the duties as per section 212.2, whichever is applicable, he shall be responsible for:
1. Processing enquiries regarding allegations raised against any PWD staff, complaints received from the
Vigilance Commission, Anti Corruption Bureau, Govt. Officers, and members of Legislative Assembly
etc.
2. Assisting verification of records and to see that they are maintained as per PWD Code and Manual.
3. Collection of yearly confidential reports and processing of Confidential Report as directed by Chief
Engineer, Administration/ Deputy Chief Engineer, Vigilance.
4. Any other duties assigned to him by the superior officer.
212.5 Senior Superintendents
Senior Superintendent shall be the head of Establishment Branch in accordance with the
procedure prescribed in the Manual of Office Procedure and shall assist in the administrative
control of the ministerial staff working in that section.
Their responsibility shall include
1. The marking of the papers received in the Establishment Branch to the concerned clerks and
ensuring that the papers are duly delivered to the clerks concerned.
2. The scrutiny of the papers and files attended to by the clerks in their section.
3. Putting up notes on matters requiring orders of superior authorities.
4. The scrutiny of personal registers and such other register needed for the prompt business transactions
of office in the manner detailed in the Manual of Office procedure and KPWA Code.
5. Receiving tapals and putting up to Deputy Executive Engineer /Executive Engineer /Deputy Chief
Engineer.
6. Making alternate arrangements to distribute the works due to the temporary absence of a subordinate
employee with the approval of head of office.
7. Ensuring prompt action being taken on urgent matters.
8. Ensuring the orderly arrangements of files, registers etc., by the clerks to enable any file being traced
out without much difficulty.
9. Periodically reviewing the old files and records with a view to close them as per rules laid down in the
manual of office procedure.
10. Controlling the work of Class IV staff.
11. Carrying out any other duties specially assigned to them by superior officers.
212.6 Junior Superintendents
Junior Superintendent shall be the head of Establishment Branch, if there is no post of Senior
Superintendent in an office. Their responsibilities as head of the Establishment Branch shall be the same
as that of Senior Superintendent. Their duties shall include
1. Safe custody of chequebooks and preparing cheques on passed bills.
2. Ensuring the safe custody of cash and other valuables and documents entrusted to their care by head
of office, proper remittance of cash to the treasury, and maintenance of cashbook and other accounts
in the proper form as per rules.
3. The scrutiny of personal registers and such other registers needed for the prompt business
transactions of office in the manner detailed in the Manual of Office Procedure and KPWA Code.
4. Scrutinising contractor’s bills. This shall include checking arithmetical calculation, checking MAS
account, WBO's, Works Abstract, Contractors’ Ledger and Checking quantities with schedule
provisions.
5. Assisting the Deputy Executive Engineer, in preparation of works budget, and establishment budget
performance budget, Revised budget and re-appropriation of funds.
6. Bringing to the notice of the Deputy Executive Engineer /Executive Engineer, power of attorney
relating to a work.
7. Maintenance of registers relating to MAS account, Survey Report, Work Abstract and contractors
Ledger.

51
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

8. Scrutinising survey reports.

9. Overseeing the preparation of monthly accounts.
10. Preparation of schedule of settlement with treasuries.
11. Initiating action on audit notes of Accountant General.
12. Any other work entrusted by his superior officers.
212.7 Head Clerk
He shall be responsible for:
i. The distribution and scrutiny of the work of each Clerk
ii. The scrutiny of bills and files attended to by the Clerks, submission of returns on the due
dates, maintenance of accounts etc.
iii. Ensuring that cash deposits other than cash, and other valuables are kept in safe custody and the
cash book and other records as prescribed in the rules are properly maintained.
iv. Disbursing salaries and allowances to the staff
v. The Head Clerks shall also carryout any other work assigned to them by their superior officers.
A Head Clerk when posted in a Sub Division shall in addition to the above be responsible for:
vi. Receiving tappals and putting up to the Assistant Engineer (Works), if such an officer is posted or
to the Assistant Executive Engineer.
vii. Safe custody of power of attorney/bank guarantee relating to a work and bringing to the notice of
the Assistant Executive Engineer while passing bills.
viii. Preparing cheques on passed bills.
ix. Safe custody of furniture of sub division office.
x. Assisting the Assistant Engineer (Works) and the Assistant Executive Engineer in maintaining
order and discipline in office.
xi. Handing over cash and all other items in his custody on transfer as directed by the Assistant
Executive Engineer.
xii. Assisting the Assistant Executive Engineer and Assistant Engineer (Works) in all matters entrusted to
him.
212.8 Upper Division Clerks & Lower Division, Clerical Attender
Clerks shall carryout any or all the ministerial duties involved in the business transactions of the office to
which they are attached as prescribed in the Manual of Office Procedure. The actual scope of their work in
any office will be decided by the head of the ministerial section with the approval of the head of office or
subordinate officer entrusted with the responsibility. Clerks (LD clerks and UD Clerks) in the PWD
Office will also function as accountants.
The responsibilities of clerks shall, include:
i. Maintaining files and registers up-to-date.
ii. Safe custody of registers, files, papers, documents, books or any other valuables entrusted to their care.
iii. Putting up papers including correspondence files, connected files, notes etc., for orders of
competent authority without delay.
iv. Bringing to the notice of the superior officer matters that need special attention.
v. Taking prompt action on unanswered references by issue of timely reminders, putting up draft,
Demi Official letters etc.
vi. Carrying out the accounting work in the office such as checking bills, posting of accounts,
maintaining various account registers, compiling returns etc., as prescribed in KPWA Code and other
Codes, when posted in the accounts branch.
vii. Handling and safe custody of cash, timely remittance of cash to Treasury, maintenance and
rendering of prescribed account etc., as per rules.
viii. Carrying out any other duties of a ministerial nature assigned to them by superior officers.
Clerk when posted in a section office shall be responsible for:
i. Receiving tappals and assisting the Assistant Engineer in all matters entrusted to him.
ii. Maintaining inward and despatch registers.
iii. Putting up audit notes for passing bills within powers of the section officer.
iv. Safe custody of agreements executed for works, deposits other than cash and imprest cash allotted to
Assistant Engineer.
v. Safe custody of power of attorney/bank guarantee relating to a work and bringing to the notice of
the Assistant Engineer while passing bills.
vi. Safe custody of cash received in section office and timely remittance to the treasury.
vii. Keeping under lock & key, field books and measurement books issued to the section office and
maintaining movement register.
viii. Receiving all cheques issued to the Assistant Engineer
ix. Disbursing salaries, allowance, advance etc. relating to the staff of section office.
x. Assisting the section officer in maintaining imprest and other accounts..
52
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

xi. Handing over files, registers, cash, service books and other valuable items in his custody while
on transfer as per directions of the Assistant Engineer.
xii. Preparing draft letters on all matters and putting up for approval of the Assistant Engineer.
xiii. Posting entries in Service book and keeping the same.
212.9 Confidential Assistant
Duties as per Manual of Office Procedure
212.10 Typist
Duties as per Manual of Office Procedure
212.11 Clerk/Typist
Duties as per Manual of Office Procedure
212.12 Fair Copy Superintendent
Duties as per Manual of Office Procedure
212.13 Driver
Their duties will include:
1. Drive the vehicles carefully within the prescribed speed limits observing all the traffic regulations.
2. Keep the vehicles in road worthy condition. This will include washing and cleaning of vehicles.
3. Check water levels in radiator and battery, oil level in crankcase, fuel level in fuel tank and tyre
pressures every day before the vehicle is taken out.
4. Once a fortnight check oil level in gearbox and brake fluid.
5. Report any mechanical fault or damage immediately to controlling officer or the officer in-charge.
Attend to routine maintenance as prescribed such as topping up of oil, filling radiator, cleaning of oil and
fuel filters, inflating tyres, applying grease where required, etc.
7. When the vehicle is taken out for servicing point out any items needing special attention and be
available at the servicing station or work- shop to see that servicing is done properly.
8. When the vehicle is taken for maintenance or for special repairs, assist in the completion of the repairs
or carry out such other jobs as are ordered to be done by the officer in charge of the vehicle.
9. In case of accidents the driver shall report the matter to the nearest police station and the officer in charge
of the vehicle and abide by instructions of the police in regard to further movement of the vehicle.
10. Be in charge of the tools and spares of the vehicle entrusted to him.
11. Keep account of materials like fuel, lubricating oil etc. entrusted to his care.
12. Maintain log books as prescribed.
13. Take order from the officer in charge of the vehicle in regard to trips to be made, passengers or
materials to be carried etc.
14. Intimate in advance the date of renewal of tax, insurance, pollution test, fuel tests etc.
15. They will also carry out any other duties that may be specifically assigned to him by their superior
officers.
212.14. Peon:
Duties as per Manual of Office Procedure
213 Finance Wing
213.1 Senior Finance Officer/ Financial Assistant
The Financial Officer/Financial Assistant is to assist the Chief Engineer (Administration &
Design)/Chief Engineer/ Superintending Engineer in exercising financial control in the working of the
department/circle. His responsibilities shall include.
1 Preparation/scrutiny/finalisation of Budget Estimates for annual plans, 5 year plan and 20 year master
plan in accordance with rules in force and orders of the Chief Engineer/ Superintending Engineer. Give
remarks on matters mentioned in G.O. (P) No. 388/92/Fin dated 6.5.1992 to the respective Head of
Offices.
2 They shall be assigned the work relating to
a) Distribution, resumption and relocation of funds with the approval of the Head of the
Department/Offices.
b) Reconciliation of departmental accounts with the figures booked in the Accountant General
Office.
c) Control over departmental revenue and expenditure with includes:
(a)Watching the progress of departmental revenue and expenditure and issuing instruction to
the The subordinate any likelyhood of excess is anticipated.
b) Reporting to heads of Department deviations from rules relating to expenditure noticed on the
part of subordinate officers..
(c) Initiating and dealing with proposals relating to re-appropriations, re-allotments,
supplementary Grand and surrender of savings and
(d)Scrutinizing expenditure statement relating to plan scheme.

53
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

(4) Scrutiny of proposals involving enhancement, refund and abandonment of revenue and write
off, remission of dues liabilities etc.
(5)Deal with inspection reports, audit paras and objections.
(6) Conduct annual inspection of offices with the prior approval of the Head of department/Office and
submission of notes of such inspection of the perusal and orders of Heads of Office/Department.
(7)Issue of instructions to departmental officers regarding
(i) Maintenance of accounts and observance of account rules and
(ii) Correct accounting of stores and observance of store rules.
(8)To arrange the proper maintenance of accounts and connected registers on the loans sanctioned or
disbursed except routine loans to Government servants and to watch the prompt recovery of such
loans.
3. All files involving financial aspects will be marked to the financial assistants/Finance Officers for
their opinion/advice by Head of Departments/Officer or by any mid-level officer who deals with cases.
4 The Head of Department/Offices will normally be guided to the opinion/advice of the Financial
Assistants/Finance Officers in the matter involving financial commitment and in case where the advice
of Finance Assistant/Finance Officers is not accepted specific reason justifying such as a step will be
recorded in the files.
5 The financial Assistants/Finance Officers will also scrutinizing files on:
(1) Verification of claims for pension and other retirement benefits.
(2) Fixation of pay and allied benefit sanctioned on the basic pay Revision Orders.
(3) Proposal involving relaxation of economy orders.
(4) Grants/Loans sanctioned by the Department and conduct test audit the accounts of the
institutions in receipt of grant aid or loans from Government and furnish utilization certificate.
213.1.1 Divisional Accountants
The Divisional Accountant’s main function shall be to assist the Executive Engineer in exercising
financial control over the transactions of the Division and in maintaining accounts of the transactions
correctly in accordance with rules in force.
The Divisional Accountant is the head of Accounts Branch of the division office. The main duties
and responsibilities of the Divisional Accountants are detailed in paras 4.1& 4.2.1 to 4.2.15 and also in
some of the subsequent paragraphs of the KPWA code. His duties shall include:
1. Proper distribution of work in Accounts Branch with the approval of Executive Engineer.
2. Marking of papers received in the Accounts Branch to the concerned clerks in the section.
3. Preparation of budget annual plans, 5-year plan and 20 year master plan, making proposals for re
appropriations etc. under instructions from the Executive Engineer.
4. Scrutiny of all papers involving or relating to financial transactions.
5. Scrutinising contractors bill and putting up notes on financial aspects.
6. Bringing to the notice of the Executive Engineer, power of attorney related to a work, while passing
bills.
7. Safe custody of agreements and power of attorney for works and to see that registers for the same
are maintained.
8. Putting up notes on matters dealt by him for orders of Executive Engineer.
9. Controlling the work of subordinates entrusted with the safe custody of cash, valuables, documents
etc.
10. Making temporary arrangements for carrying out the work of the Accounts Branch by suitably
distributing the work attended to by a clerk or other subordinate absent, on leave etc.
11. Ensuring prompt action being taken on urgent financial matters.
12. Assist the Executive Engineer in ensuring financial discipline particularly in incurring expenditure
within the allotment.
13. Carrying out any other duty assigned to him by the Executive Engineer.
14. When a Divisional Accountant is posted in Stores, he shall, in addition to the above,
i. Assist the Stores Officer and Custodian of Stores by maintaining the proper accounts
of transactions.
ii. Responsible for I.A.P.W.D. adjustments in the District Stores.
iii. Responsible for proper accounting and adjustments of firm invoices of maintenance of C.S.S.A.
claims.
iv. Carrying out any other duties specially assigned to them by superior officers.
214 Miscellaneous
214.1 Stewards, Butlers, Caretakers, Managers or other staff under the control of Rest Houses,
Tourist Bungalows etc.
Other staff in direct charge of Rest Houses, Camp Sheds, Tourist Bungalows etc. of the PWD, by
whatsoever designation they are called, shall attend to the following duties:-
54
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

1. Keep the rooms and premises in a clean and tidy condition. See that rooms are swept at least
once every day and also keep the rooms and bathrooms cleaned immediately after the occupant
vacates..
2. See that the furniture provided in each room is kept in its proper place and kept daily dusted.
3. See that the bath room and lavatory fittings in every room are functioning satisfactorily, and if
any defect is noticed, set right the same locally if it can be arranged and if not report to the
Assistant Engineer for urgent action.
4. See that the electrical equipments are kept in good order, fused bulbs replaced etc.
5. In the case of rest houses not provided with running water, see that water required is made
available in the bath rooms for occupants.
6. See that bed linen, crockery, cutlery etc. are kept in clean and usable condition.
7. Provide sufficient linen for the use of occupants of each room according to prescribed standards.
8. Where gardens exist see that the garden is watered, trimmed and kept clear of rubbish.
9. Maintain the occupation register and see that every occupant fills up the required columns on
arrival and before leaving.
10. Collect the rent due from the occupants and send the collections together with copy of the
occupation register to the concerned officer every 15 days or at such intervals as prescribed.
11. Where reservations are ordered by the Collector / Executive Engineer see that the rooms are kept
so reserved without being allowed to be occupied. In case there is no reservation by the
Collector / Executive Engineer the rooms are to be made available to guests on first come first
serve basis with the prior approval of concerned Assistant Executive Engineer/Assistant
Engineer. This however is subject to any other reservation made by the Executive Engineer
under the control of the bungalow.
12. Keep account of furniture, linen, crockery and cutlery and any other item entrusted to his charge
and make periodical checks to see that they are all available.
13. Arrange the washing of linen, bedclothes etc., and keep account of item so arranged to be washed.
14. Where the rest house is provided with catering arrangements, arrange supply of good food as
prescribed to the occupants at the approved schedule of rates. This schedule of rates shall also be
exhibited in public.
15. Control the work of such subordinates in the rest house as are placed under his charge and report
to superior officers cases requiring sanction of appointment of substitutes, institution of
disciplinary proceedings etc.
16. See that unnecessary fans, lights & Air Conditioners are switched off at the appropriate time and
the use of water and electricity economically controlled without any inconvenience to occupants.
17. Bring to the notice of the Assistant Engineer in charge, all repairs and maintenance required for
buildings and installations, without delay.
18. They shall also carry out any other duties that may be specifically assigned to them by their
superior officers.
214.2 Drivers of Road Rollers
Their duties shall include: -
1. Drive the road rollers with care and safety observing traffic regulations to the site where rolling work
is to be done.
2. Keep the roller in working condition and report to the superior officers defects if any for necessary
repair work being arranged.
3. Make a routine check of all the points needing daily inspection such as fuel level in the case of Diesel
Engines, water level in the boiler in the case of steam engines, lubricating oil levels and such other
features as may be prescribed either generally or for the particular equipment.
4. Carry out the rolling work in the prescribed manner making as many passes as are necessary and are
directed to be done.
5. Attend to routine maintenance as prescribed such as topping up of oil applying grease, where required
etc.
6. Whenever the rollers are left at roadside after the day's work it is his duty to see that the danger light
is put in front of the roller. This is to avert the chances of other vehicles colliding against the roller.
7. When the roller is taken for maintenance or for special repairs, assist in the completion of the repairs
or carry out such other jobs as are ordered to be done by the officer under the control of the roller.
8. Be under the control of the tools and spares of the roller entrusted to him.
9. Keep account of materials like fuel, lubricating oil etc. entrusted to his care.
10. Maintain log books as prescribed.
11. Intimate in advance the date of renewal of tax, insurance, pollution test, fuel tests etc.
12. They shall also carry out any other duties that may be specifically assigned to them by their
superior officer.
55
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

215 Mechanical Wing,

215.1 Assistant Executive Engineer, Mechanical sub-division [Thiruvanathapurum/Mavelikkara/
Chalakkudy/ Kozhikkode/ Kannur]
In addition to the duties as per section 202.8 whichever is applicable he shall be responsible for:
1. Testing and issuing fuel consumption certificates of vehicles.
2. Preparation of estimates for repair and maintenance works and issuing essentiality certificates for
vehicles of all Government departments and quasi-government institutions.
3. Supervision of works and scrutiny of bills for repairs and maintenance.
4. Maintenance and repairs of all construction equipments of PWD like road rollers, compressors, tar
boilers, hot mix plants, etc.
5. Supervision of works for repair and maintenance of refrigerators, HVAC chiller plants, air
conditioner set etc.
6. Valuation of vehicles including confiscated vehicles
7. Recommendation for condemnation of vehicles/machineries.
8. Attending the Condemnation Board meetings of Fire Force vehicles.
215.1.1 Assistant Engineer, Mechanical
In addition to the duties as per section 202.10 whichever is applicable he shall assist the concerned
Assistant Executive Engineer in all matters.
215.1.2 Assistant Executive Engineer, Mechanical subdivision (Kerala Legislature Complex
Construction (KLC) Division, Thiruvananthapuram)
In addition to the duties as per section 202.8 whichever is applicable he shall be responsible for
the following:
1. Mechanical related works in the Legislative Complex
2. Erection, commissioning and repair of HVAC chiller plants, lifts, etc.
215.1.3 Assistant Engineer, Mechanical subdivision (Kerala Legislature Complex Construction
(KLC) Division,, Thiruvananthapuram)
In addition to the duties as per section 202.10 whichever is applicable he shall assist the Assistant
Executive Engineer in all matters.
215.1.4 Assistant Executive Engineer (Mechanical - NH, mechanical subdivision Alappuzha,
attached to National Highway Division Alappuzha)
In addition to the duties as per section 202.8 whichever is applicable he shall also be responsible for
the following:
1. For the operation, maintenance and repairs of equipments under National Highway wing of the entire
state.
2. Testing of fuel consumption of vehicles of National Highway wing of the entire state
3. Maintenance and repairs of vehicles of National Highway wing of the entire state
4. Attending the Inspection Committee for the issue of fitness certificate for road construction
equipments of contractors of NH.
215.1.5 Assistant Engineer (Mechanical, NH section- Thrissur, Alappuzha)
In addition to the duties as per section 202.10 whichever is applicable he shall assist the
Assistant Executive Engineer in all matters.
216 State Public Information Officer
He shall be responsible to provide information to persons requesting for the same under the Right to
Information Act (RTI), 2005. He shall obtain the required information requested from the custodian of
information of the office as contemplated under Section 5 of RTI Act, 2005.
216.1 State Assistant Public Information Officer
He shall receive the application from persons requesting for information vide RTI Act and transfer the
same to the State Public Information Officer. Also he may receive application under this Act and
forward to the State Public Information Officer or senior officer in the Department, as stipulated in
Section 5 of RTI Act, 2005.
217 Powers
The powers delegated to the various officers of the department in regard to administration,
technical and financial matters are given in appendix (200B). In addition to the above, the following
powers must be considered as inherent in the exercise of the duties of each job
Delegated powers shall be used wisely and carefully. It cannot and shall not be a weapon for
implementing of work in piece meal evading sanctions from higher authorities. No work may be started
before a proper estimate for it has been prepared and sanctioned by the competent authority, unless it is so
started strictly in accordance with a special order of Government or some specific codal provisions or
departmental rules. The nature and date of sanction shall be clearly recorded in the bills relating to the work.
It is the responsibility of the implementing officer and officer who is passing the bills for the work, to see that
the respective work is executed under written orders of competent authority. They shall also check and ensure
56
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

that an Administrative Sanction and Technical Sanction shall precede a tender from competent authority and
sufficient funds are provided in the budget for the respective work. In the case of work which is taken up
without satisfying these basic conditions all the executing officers and officers
responsible for passing the bills for the work shall be personally held responsible and strict action shall
be taken against them. Any loss caused to Government on account of such irresponsible execution of
work shall be recovered from those officers who are responsible for execution and passing the bills for
the respective work.

SECTION 300
301 Human Resources and Training
The Public Works Department of Kerala employs over 10,000 persons directly and gives
employment to over 80,000 persons indirectly. Being a service department, the officers and staff of
PWD shall be morally committed to the society and shall uphold the values of the department. This shall
be reflected always in the quality of works, integrity and demeanour.
302 HR and Training Cell
This cell shall be under the overall control of the Chief Engineer Administration & Designs who is
assisted by the Deputy Chief Engineer Administration & Designs and other officers and staff.
303 Code of Conduct
PWD is committed to a workforce of officers and staff both technical and non-technical that
displays the highest standards of integrity and fairness in all aspects of work that enhance departmental
and stakeholder trust and confidence. Developing PWD values of innovation, honesty, integrity, respect
for people, accountability, teamwork, sharing of knowledge all provide a sound framework from which
PWD can build a safe, professional environment for all its employees.
304 Recruitment Process
The requirement in terms of personnel for the effective functioning of the department shall be assessed
and reported as per clause 309 “norms for workload assessment” to the Kerala Public Service
Commission. The Kerala Public Service Commission carries out all recruitment. . The KPSC has
prescribed norms for selection based on the age, qualification, screening tests and interview.
304.1 Induction Process
Each employee in the PWD shall be aware of the obligations and the standards of behaviour that
are expected from him. He shall read, understand and comply with the provisions of the Kerala Service
Rules, PWD Manual, PWD account code, Manual of Office Procedures and other relevant rules and
orders issued from time to time by the competent authority.
An induction programme for orienting the new employees to their new work environment and
role shall be conducted; this includes everything from understanding technical role required by the
employee, to PWD rules and procedures. An employee handbook shall also be provided for awareness.
305 PIS and ID cards
The personal information of all members of staff shall be entered in to the Personnel Information
System (PIS) of the department. Forms duly filled up shall be submitted to HR / Administration office at
Head Office or at the circle offices and after updating, the photo identity shall be issued.
All members of staff shall possess the ID card at all times while on duty and shall be displayed/
produced on demand. This card should be surrendered in the event of discharge/retirement from service.
306 Probation periods
All newly recruited employees shall be placed on probation and the probation shall be declared as
per the relevant provisions of Kerala State and Subordinate Service Rules KSSR.
306.1 Departmental test
Before the declaration of probation, employees, both technical and non-technical, should pass the
obligatory tests prescribed for them. The promotion to higher post for each category shall be given only
after passing the required departmental tests prescribed for them.
307 Rules
Officers in the respective services are governed by the rules of recruitment, seniority,
promotions, etc., applicable to the particular service. Special statutory rules have been issued for certain
services and in respect of other services until statutory rules are prescribed, recruitment, seniority,
promotion, etc., will be based on executive orders of Government or any other authority delegated by
Government to issue such orders

57
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

The following rules generally govern the norms of leave, pay, retirement, disciplinary action etc.
• The Kerala Service Rules, Volume I, (Parts I & II),
• The Kerala Service Rules, Volume II, (Part III),
• Special rules of PWD.
• Government Orders issued from time to time on the recommendations of the Pay Revision
Commission.
• Government Orders on the revision of pension and other related benefits issued from time to time
• KS&SSR KCS (CC&A) Rules, Kerala Govt. Servants Conduct Rules.
308 Transfers
Transfers and posting of officers in PWD shall be done as per the norms of the
government/department issued from time to time. The persons who have undergone training in a field
from the department may be given preference in the respective field at the time of transfers and posting.
309 Norms for work load.
The quantum of work handled by the officers in Department may vary from time to time and it is
necessary that suitable norms shall be fixed, so that the staff strength of the Department be augmented,
reduced or arranged according to requirements. In case of specialised works, new posts/ units shall be
created. The HR cell shall assess all such requirements and submit proposals for creation/ deployment/
abolishment of post to the Chief Engineer (Administration & Design).
The government will fix, from time to time, such norms for the various units under the Public Works
Department based on the suggestions from the Chief Engineer (Administration & Design).
310 Promotions
Promotions to the posts of AEE and above in the technical cadre and those of A.A in
Administrative side shall be done based on the select lists prepared by the Higher Departmental
Promotion Committee (DPC-Higher) and the notification issued by Govt. The preparation of select list
and other relevant steps for promotion to higher post will be done by the Govt. as per the provisions in
the Kerala State Subordinate Service Rules. Promotion to the posts Assistant Engineer , Sr.
Superintendant and equivalent posts shall be done by the Chief Engineer (A&D) based on the select list
prepared by the DPC. Promotion to the non gazetted posts shall be done by the Chief Engineer (A&D)
based on list prepared by Departmental Promotion Committee(DPC-Lower).
At the end of each calendar year, employees who are eligible for promotion to Gazetted posts
shall submit the proforma for preparing their annual confidential reports along with a report of self
appraisal to the Superior Officer.
311 Disciplinary Actions/ Misconduct
Non-compliance to any of the existing rules shall attract disciplinary actions. Disciplinary
proceedings shall be initiated and finalised as per the provisions in the Manual for Disciplinary
Proceedings.
312 Cessations and Retirement
Retirement from Government service is at the prescribed age decided by the government. The
appointing authority can only accept the resignation of a Government servant after settling the liabilities
in respect of the service or post in question.
313 Miscellaneous
313.1 Dress Code
All officers must present themselves in neat and clean attire. Those officers who are required to
wear a uniform at work must ensure that this is kept neat and clean.
313.2 Outside employment
No officer will undertake any work for another private or public body or accept fee, without the
prior sanction of the Government.
313.3 Confidentiality
All information made available to employees in the course of their employment with the
department is to remain highly confidential. An officer shall not issue or make any public statement
concerning the public works department’s operations or release information on any operational matter.
Employees should also act in accordance to the ‘Right to Information Act -2005’ which is “An
Act to provide for setting out the practical regime of right to information for citizens to secure access to
information under the control of public authorities, in order to promote transparency and accountability

58
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

in the working of every public authority, the constitution of a Central Information Commission and State
Information Commissions and for matters connected therewith or incidental thereto.”

313.4 Training
Training is an investment made on the human resource of the organization to provide and tone the
competencies, required to do an existing job well and also to perform for future needs. Targeted and
monitored training can set up an environment of good morale and productivity and contributes in
creating a powerhouse of competencies for the public works department.
The department is committed to provide officers with the required training and development so as
to enable to perform their work more effectively and develop their skills in line with departmental
requirements. Other Human Resource Systems shall support and synergise the training efforts.
Being a technical organization, the focus on skills training shall be based on the day-to-day
developments in the field of construction engineering. Training shall be under the control of Human
Resources Cell within the Administration wing.
Training shall focus on induction, refreshers training for present employees and specialisation for
employees whose responsibilities or duties change through advancement or Departmental transfer
The Deputy Chief Engineer controlling the HR cell will decide the needs of the training under
which the personnel have to be undergone. The person thus deputed will help and benefit the Public
Works Department as a whole.
313.4.1 Training Functions of HR Cell
o Documenting the key training inputs needed, covering all functions and all categories of staff to upgrade
the capability and skills levels to meet the department’s objectives in a cost effective manner.
o Formulation of training courses as per the above need.
o Coordinating and finalizing training schedules for the
staff. o Publishing annual training calendar
o Engagement of permanent and temporary faculty for the training courses, as
required. o Implementing training.
o Training feedback- this feedback, along with changes in individual performance needs to be tracked,
recorded and reviewed for modification in future programmes.
o Periodic review of training course
313.4.2 Training
Learning, practicing and continuous improvement are the keys for perfecting the skills and the
skills and the skills are to be imparted through training from time to time. Graduate fresh from college
requires to be thought the departmental procedures. When a person is transferred from one department to
a new department he again needs to be given similar training. When a person is posted for a special job
he needs to be trained in the job suitably. Certain jobs require some special training involving acquisition
of specific skills. During the service period refresher training is essential to brush up and update the
knowledge periodically. Though one is expected to try to acquire higher skills with his own initiatives,
the organization for its own benefit should have a system of imparting regular training to its work force.
It should also be ensured that all the staff gets opportunity to get the training and at the same time it
should also be ensured that the training is not intentionally avoided by the staff. A few training
programmes can be had from specialized institutes and through attending work shop and seminars.
313.4.3 Orientation Training
Newly appointed staff and staff transferred to roads wing from other wings should be given a training to
acquaint themselves about the job requirements. They should be given classroom training on the subject
for about two weeks and then they should be attached to some senior staff for getting on the job training
for two weeks.
Thereafter he may be posted to the job proper.
In the orientation course following aspects should be covered.
a) Surveying and investigation
b) Drawings
c) Road engineering
d) Structural components
e) Drainage
f) Bridge engineering
g) Record keeping
59
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

h) Rules and regulations

i) Testing of materials
j) Maintenance
k) Technical Circulars

l) Do’s and don’ts etc

313.4.4 Special Training
When a person has to undertake a specific project and the job requires certain special training in
addition to the orientation training, he should be inducted to special training. This type of training is
intended to give in – depth knowledge of the subjec t and increase the capabilities of the person. This
training should also include hands on experience and visits to relevant works. The training may comprise
following
a) Flexible pavement design, construction, asphalt mix designing
b) Bridges, fly-over and sub way structures
c) Rigd-pavement design, construction, Concrete technology and mix design
d) New materials PMB, CRMB, FRC, FLY ash
e) SWD construction and maintenance
f) Pavement management system
g) Legal matters and Arbitration
These trainings may be for short duration of three to six days accompanied by visits to relevant works
and job experience. Few of these trainings should also be arranged for senior level officers. However for
them the duration may be restricted to 2-3 days only.
313.4.5 Refresher Courses
Refresher courses for the field staff brushes their knowledge on the subject periodically and keep
them abreast of recent developments in the field. Such courses should be conducted on regular basis and
the duration may be about a week or less. Refresher courses may cover the subject in general and latest
techniques, machinery, new materials and state of art technology. Every engineering officer at the level
of AE and above should attend a refresher course at every five years interval
313.4.6 Resource Development And monitoring
It is expected that every person in the organization should be trained for the job he handles.
However, it is generally, experienced that certain persons are inducted for most of the trainings, while
certain persons are excluded from the training or they themselves avoid the trainings. In order to ensure
that everybody is covered in the training programme a certain monitoring system should be introduced.
This system should take in to account the job requirement and trainings under gone, trainings required
etc. and should also be able generate list of persons for training or avoidance of training certain persons
should be curbed by monitoring. In this regard Railway’s monitoring system for training programmes
may be referred. At the time of giving promotions due consideration should be given to this aspect.
Suitable entry should be made in the confidential report of the employee. At the end of the training some
examination should be conducted to assess the knowledge gained by trainee. Candidate failing in the
examination should be asked to again under go training.
Training should cover all the staff right from Ministry, Jr Engineer to Senior, officers in the Department.
Though orientation training may not be necessary for very senior level officers, special training
comprising of modem methods, management skills, legal matters etc. should be arranged for them.

313.4.7 Courses arranged by other organizations

Organizations like NICMAR,IIT, ESC,IAHE, CRRI, IR-rasta etc. arrange special courses for
junior and senior level officers. Sufficient number of candidates may be deputed to such courses ( annual
training calendar is published by these organizations). These organizations also conduct tailor made
courses as per the requirements of the client.
Institution of Engineers (IE) , Indian Roads Congress (IRC), Indian National Group of International
Association of Bridge and Structural Engineers ( ING-IABSE) etc. organize work shops on various road
related subjects. Jr. and Sr. officers should be deputed to such work shops.
313.4.8 Seminars
IRC, ING-IABSE, IE, IIBE etc. hold annual seminars at different places. During the seminar
papers are presented and discussed on road related subjects, knowledge is exchanged and state of art on
the subject is revealed. A good mix of Sr. and Jr. Level delegates can get greatly benefited through such
seminars. During such seminars visits to some important on going engineering works and technical
exhibitions are also arranged and the delegates can avail these facilities. Similar visits can also be
arranged by PWD to the similar works of other organizations.
313.4.9 General
60
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Most of the faculty members are drafted from in-house and retired staff of PWD. It would be
desirable that outside faculty members from institutions like IIT, other organizations, professionals and
experts in the field are also associated and their expertise is also made use of to get upto date knowledge

in the respective fields. It is suggested that the in-house faculty members should also be given training
by sending them to other institutions.
Persons given a specialized training should generally be posted to the job for which he is trained
and his knowledge should be used for the benefit of the organization. A person should generally be
allowed to work in the same department for a sufficiently long period to gain experience and be useful to
the organization. There should also be some incentive for gaining special qualifications (e.g.post graduate
degree or diploma) and special skills to the staff.
In general the training schedule may be as follows:
Type of training Duration Periodicity Participation Level
1) Orientation Two At the time of entry and New New Entrant, Jr and
Weeks posting to the Department Medium
2) Special 3 to 6 days When posted to a Project Sp. Jr, Medium and Sr.
Programme undertaken
3) Refresher 3 to 4 days Every 5 years Jr. and Medium
4) Courses arranged in 3 to 7 days Specialization Desired New Medium and Sr.
other institutions developments and Updating the
knowledge
5) Workshops and 2 to 3 days Interaction with other organizations, Jr, Medium and Sr.
Seminars State of art in the World
The detailed syllabus may be got drafted through a committee of consultant’s and the respective
faculty members can furnish lecture notes to be got printed in a bound volume and supplied to the trainee.
313.5 Road safety
Periodic training on Road Safety shall be given to the concerned field officers. This shall be
coordinated with the Central Road Safety cell and the HR cell.
313.6 Environment
Periodic training on environment aspects shall be given to the field officers and also to all PWD
officials. The basic environment awareness training will be integrated with the other mainstream
programme. In addition stand-alone environmental training shall be conducted on a need basis. This
shall be coordinated with the Environment Cell and HR cell.
313.7 Social
Periodic training shall be given on Social Impact Management with emphasis on latest methods
and developments in social management and issues on quality of life etc.
313.8 Quality
Periodic training on quality control shall be given to the field officers. This shall be coordinated
with the Quality Assurance Cell and the HR cell.
All Assistant Engineers shall be given periodic training in the KHRI laboratory to familiarize
with the various tests.
313.9 Training for Management Information System (MIS)
Managing the transition and change from the current systems and process to those with leverage
on technology and induction of IT/IS would require significant focus on training in Change Management
and enhance the skill levels of the human resources available with the Department.
Training shall be done in-house at training centres that is fully equipped with PCs, required peripherals,
and connectivity and with LCD Projector.
The three levels of training shall be:
Basic training Other specialized training Training for systems
• Use of Personal Computers • Functional core team training • GIS
• Common office automation • Technical core team training • FMS
utilities MS OFFICE (word • Methodology and tools training • RMMS
processing, spreadsheets, • Knowledge transfer workshops Others (AutoCAD, STAAD,
presentation systems) Tally, NISA………..)
• Internet and email
61
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

• Groupware and workflow

• Use of WINGS

313.10 GIS
Periodic training on GIS shall be given to the concerned field officers. This shall be coordinated
with the IT Cell (GIS) and the HR cell.
313.11 RMMS
Periodic training on RMMS shall be given to the concerned field officers. This shall be
coordinated with the IT Cell (RMMS) and the HR cell.
313.12 FMS
Periodic training on FMS shall be given to the concerned officers. This shall be coordinated with
the IT Cell and the HR cell.
313.13 Project Preparation
Periodic training on Project Preparation shall be given to the Assistant Engineers and Assistant
Executive Engineers. This shall be coordinated with the PPU and the HR cell.
313.14 Preparation of Budget
Periodic training on preparation of budget shall be given to the Engineers in the Planning Wing.
This shall be coordinated with the HR cell.
313.15 Specialisation in concerned Wing
In order to enhance the competencies of the Department, considering recent trends, personnel
with specialised qualifications including doctorates in different fields are required in PWD. Facilities for
up gradation of qualifications of the Engineers shall be permitted under the Quality Improvement
Programme of the Department subject to the general orders and policies of Govt. Those with specialised
qualifications and Doctoral qualifications utilising their specialisations in P.W.D. shall be encouraged.
313.16 Budget for Training
The HR cell of PWD shall be in overall charge of all training within PWD. They shall prepare a
training schedule for next calendar year. Budget proposal shall be prepared and incorporated in the
budget. The budget for specialised training on specific systems shall be included in the concerned wing.
313.17 Monitoring and reporting
The HR Cell of PWD shall maintain record of all the training conducted and the list of attendees.

SECTION 400
Information Technology and Management Information System
401 General
The chapter deals with the use of Information Technology and Information Systems
for enhancing the operational efficiency and building the capacity and capability of PWD.
PWD is currently using the following IT systems.
a. Web based Information and Governance System (WINGS)
b. GIS based Road Information System (RIMS)
c. Road Maintenance Management System (RMMS)
d. Financial Management system (FMS)
402. Organisation
The use of IT/MIS greatly influences the working environment of the entire organization. The
systems, processes and technology have an impact on all the personnel within the Department and those
who have an interaction with the Department. As the IT/MIS systems and processes are driven by the
operational functions of the Organization, the IT & MIS Project Organization should be broad-based to
implement the functional needs of all the operational and support departments.
403. Current Set up

62
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Executive Engineer supervises the IT cell in PWD under the control of Chief Engineer
Administration & Designs with the assistance of other officers and supporting staff.
The IT Cell shall be the nodal agency within the Department for all IT/MIS initiatives and would also
provide the implementation level support to the respective IT systems. The Executive Engineer shall be
the nodal officer of IT cell. Electronics wing shall provide all technical support and function as the
working arm of IT cell in all districts.

404 Functions
Key activities of IT cell are
1. Leveraging the tools of IT to promote productivity, communication, transparency, knowledge
management and informed decision making in all wings; thus contributing to an image of a pro-
active, efficient and customer-caring department of Government.
2. Steering the formulation of a dynamic IT strategy and program for the department; and the direction,
monitoring and controlling of its implementation
3. Directing the acquisition of appropriate technology platforms, software applications, GIS systems,
video and teleconferencing systems, LANs, WANs, and other resources related to the program,
including their upkeep, maintenance, expansion, upgradation and renewal.
4. Sourcing the IT related human resources of the department, through in-house sources, to the extent
available and through human resource outsourcing as required.
5. Directing IT training and skill upgrading in coordination with the respective wings with a view to
creating and maintaining adequate human resources in Information Technology in the Department.
6. Be responsible for data/information integrity and security, back up, disaster recovery, redundancies,
prevention of unauthorized access and implementation of appropriate access protocols and policies.
7. Instituting a web portal management board for overseeing the functioning of the PWD web portal.
8. Evangelizing the process of organizational transformation, promoting and imbibing best of class
systems and procedures in the department
404.1 Web based Information and Governance System (WINGS)
WINGS is the main information-sharing platform of Public Works Department. Important news
and events related to PWD shall be published in the website. Also important government orders, notices
and circulars shall be published in the website. Employee related information like transfer and promotion
orders shall be published as soon as it is issued. Chief Engineer (Administration & Design) shall form a
departmental editorial board for creating contents for publishing in the web site
WINGS, the PWD web portal is segregated for use of public, contractors and the PWD
officials with functions restricted to each category and transparency in terms of information as relevant
to the activities of PWD.
404.2 Grievance Redressal through WINGS
In WINGS there is a facility for receiving grievance from public. Grievance received through
WINGS shall be treated with importance of a tapal and concerned Chief Engineer shall take immediate
necessary action thereon. Action taken shall also be intimated to the concerned person.
404.3 E-mail through WINGS
All head of offices up to Division level shall be issued an office email id. Head of office shall
make necessary arrangements for regular checking of emails. Important communication may be sent
through email with a hard copy filed in the office with send date and time. Official communication
received through official email shall be treated as tapal and action taken accordingly.
404.4 Integrated Computerized MIS
The integrated computerized MIS would streamline and improve efficiency of the existing
organization and facilitate better planning and management of the departmental resources through
decisions that emerge from timely flow of information at all decision making levels.
• Comprehensive data capturing through distributed data acquisition at the Divisional / Sub-Divisional
level
• Dissemination of processed information to all categories of users
RMMS, GIS, FMS and traffic information, quality control system, road safety and accident information
system, HR cell, shall all contribute to the MIS
The Detailed function of the FMS is detailed in section 500. GIS and RMMS functions are given
in sections 800 and 900 respectively.
405 Duties
63
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

The duties of all the PWD officers regarding the IT systems and MIS are given in section 200.
406. Maintenance
Maintenance and upkeep of all the IT initiatives ranging from telecommunications/ network
management to application development and data center management and processing of PWD shall be
through the IT Cell/Electronics wing either through AMC or utilising the services of the Consultants in
the relevant field.

Considering the security, measures for network security including Firewalls Intrusion Detection System;
antivirus/anti vandal software to protect the servers and desktops is important and hence regularly
monitored.
407 Monitoring and Reporting
The Chief Engineer (Administration & Design) shall at his discretion invite external consultants
from Government/Professional organizations to review the major IT/IS initiatives for their conformance
to quality, industrial standards and best practices especially if there is no expertise within the PWD.
Currently activities relating to system operation and management, back up and maintenance, end-user
support is outsourced to qualified technical agencies. The IT cell would oversee the activities of the
outsource.
408 Applications using IT
PWD shall prepare an IT strategy and shall get the approval of administrative department. The
department may develop new applications based on the so framed IT strategy. The Chief Engineer
(Administration & Design) shall consult Chief Engineers in developing a PWD specific IT strategy.
Every three years, the strategy document may be revised according to the progress achieved. General
approach would be to develop centralized databases and distributed access through web technology.
PWD shall also make use of developments in Open Source to create system, which is free of perpetual
licensing wherever possible.

SECTION 500
Financial Management System (FMS)
501 General
As part of Institutional Strengthening Action Plan (ISAP), various e-governance initiatives are
proposed in Public Works Department. Financial Management System (FMS) aims at automation of
procedures right from budgeting to payment and encompass automation of PWD Accounts.

501.1 Organizations
To spearhead the implementation activities and to derive maximum benefit from the proposed
system, there is a Central FMS unit in Chief Engineer (Administration & Design)'s office, Circle FMS
unit under Superintending Engineer and Divisional FMS unit under Executive Engineer. Senior Finance
Officer will lead the change process and ensure successful implementation in all the lower level offices
The organization Setup for implementation of FMS is detailed in section 100.
502 Functions of FMS
The functions of the newly formed units are described below
1. The FMS units will closely work with IT Cell and will give all support for implementation in
their respective offices.
2. Impart necessary training to the units.
3. The FMS units will acquire necessary knowhow on FMS for the successful implementation.
4. The FMS units will put up necessary proposals to the head of office for stream lining all finance
related activities in their respective office to accommodate FMS in the existing procedures.
5. The FMS units will ensure that, FMS is implemented in their office and generates all financial
reports to CE's office, AG's office and Government.
6. The respective head of office will identify the personnel who are to be nominated to the FMS unit
and will issue orders with name from time to time
503 Central Office

64
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Demand for grant for Public works Department and detailed estimates (Vol-I and Vol-II) shall
be entered into the system as soon as the annual budget is passed. The various heads of account operated
by PWD are given under Appendix 500A
All Administrative sanctions with list of works for both plan and non-plan shall be entered into
FMS /WINGS system as per Appendix 500B & 500C. All works will get a project ID, as and when it is
entered in the Project Management module of WINGS. When the work is added through WINGS the
project ID will be generated. All offices shall note down the Project ID of each work and the project ID
shall be an integral part of all work related registers, reports and communications. This will be used for
payment of bills and financial monitoring through FMS. WINGS will use FMS data for project

monitoring and tendering.

The central FMS unit will make sure that all new plan and non plan works are available in the FMS for
further processing.
All contractors entered into contract with PWD shall have a contractor ID.
Division Bill register from every Division shall be updated to FMS system
Central FMS unit will prepare all necessary financial reports using this system.
503.1 Circle/ Division FMS unit
503.1.1 Issue of ID to contractors
FMS Unit in Circles and Divisions will issue contractor ID through WINGS as soon as contracts
are entered into with PWD.
503.1.1.1 Bill Register: unit will enter necessary details of bill register in to FMS
503.1.1.2 TS Register: All Circles and Divisions will use automated TS register in FMS
503.1.1.3 Agreement Register
All Divisions and Circles will use automated agreement register in FMS
503.1.1.4 Monthly Accounts
FMS units will prepare monthly accounts through FMS
503.2 Monitoring and Reporting
Finance Officer shall be in the control of monitoring and reporting the progress. The introduction
of FMS implies the adoption of a completely new instrument for the organization and its integration into
daily working procedures thorough organizational changes, work habits and patterns. Progress and
benefits shall be monitored and corrective measures undertaken. Suitable indicators for assessing the
overall success and status of the FMS implementation shall be developed for evaluation.
503.3 Maintenance
IT Cell shall ensuring smooth operation of infrastructure and related hardware for FMS operation,
and the software maintenance and update shall be arranged through annual contracts
503.4 Training
Central FMS unit will conduct regular training to the officers in the Circles and Division units
There are several activities, which should be executed at regular intervals in order to keep a certain level
of know-how and to maintain the communication between the different FMS Units:
503.5 Long term
The maintenance and data updating is an ongoing process and may require revision of FMS and IT
related database in future.

SECTION 600
601 Planning and Policy
601.1 Introduction
This section focuses on the various policies of the Government in regard to planning of works,
budgeting and reporting.
The FMS, GIS and RMMS are tools that shall assist the PWD in all the above activities.
Compliance to the various norms regarding Quality, Safety, Environment and Social shall be considered
from planning stage onwards.

65
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Section 700, details the planning funding and budgeting procedures, section 800 is on GIS
and section 900 on RMMS. Section 1000 deals with the safety aspects section 1100 on Environment
management and section 1200 Social Impact Management.

SECTION 700
701. Planning, Budgeting and Funding
The Department has to prepare and submit to Government every year at the appropriate time a
detailed account statement of anticipated receipts and expenditure under the different heads for the

succeeding year in the form of Budget proposal. After the budget is sanctioned, the receipts and
expenditure have to be watched and controlled and timely steps taken to regularize unavoidable
variations from budget provision through re-appropriations, moving for supplemental grant, surrender of
surplus funds etc. The method of preparation of the budget, the procedure to be followed in controlling
the expenditure and correcting unavoidable variations are detailed in the Budget Manual. The following
instructions shall be considered supplemental to the instructions in the Budget Manual and applicable to
the Public Works Department.
702 Planning
702.1 Typical planning cycle
1. Review and analysis of current performance against last year/current year targets.
2. Work out further opportunities.
3. Decide on key objectives for the coming year and move or re-establish longer-term planning.
4. Identify and refine the resource requirements based on this review and build a budget.
5. Define the new financial year's targets.
6. Review it regularly on a monthly basis by monitoring performance, reviewing progress and
achieving objectives.

702.1.1 5 Year Plan

Based on the long-term plan, 5 year plans for roads sector and building construction shall be prepared
with details of implementation by the PWD.
702.1.2 Annual Plan
Annual plans shall be based on the above 5 year plan and shall include programs schedule for
maintenance works, continuing works and new works. External aided projects, centrally sponsored
schemes, NABARD assisted schemes, finance commission works and other externally assisted works
shall be included in the annual plan.

702.2 Budgeting
A budget is a plan to control finances, enables to make confident financial decisions and meet
objectives and ensure sufficient money for future projects. It also improves decision-making by
foreseeing financial problems before they occur. Creating, monitoring and managing a budget is key to
successful implementation of projects by rendering allocation of resources where they are needed.
The annual budget proposal shall be based on the annual plan. Priority shall always be given for the
continuing works for its completion on time. Second priority shall be accorded to the periodic
maintenance activities on existing structures (Buildings, Roads, and Bridges) and thirdly for completion
of delayed/ pending works. The new works shall be planned only after ascertaining the availability of
necessary fund flow to the scheme.
To make budgets effective, periodical review and revisions shall be done. This shall aid as an indicator
of the revenues and expenditure linked to each activity, morover it shall provide for the economic,
efficient and effective use of resources required to deliver services and ensure that planning processes
are integrated with governments overall strategic and financial planning, budget preparation and
reporting processes and in accordance with applicable legislation, regulations and policies.
702.2.1 Key steps in drawing up a budget
The budget shall be realistic by use of historical information, i.e. the current annual plan and previous
year’s administration reports. It shall be based on a on a month-by-month programme and shall include
• Fixed costs - items such as rent, establishment charges, salaries etc.

66
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

• Variable costs – electricity, water supply, petrol, fuel payments to works including maintenance
of equipments, vehicles and purchase of stationary and other consumables, training costs, books
and periodicals etc.
• Capital costs - purchases of equipment, computers, vehicles and cost of works.
The government’s overall strategic plan is presented to the Legislative Assembly before budget and the
department must prepare proposals that:
• are consistent with the government's strategic plan;
• describe the ministry's core business goals, objectives, strategies, performance measures and
targets;
• address the upcoming fiscal years

702.2.2 Preparation and Submission of Budget

The details to be furnished when submitting budget are given in the Budget Manual. All necessary
information shall be furnished in the budget estimates submitted by the respective Executive Engineers and
other Divisional Officers and the Superintending Engineer and the Chief Engineer concerned shall scrutinize
these. They shall then be consolidated including establishment and all other expenditure in the various offices.
The Chief Engineers under the control of Buildings , Roads and Bridges branches of the P. W. D. are the
Estimating Officers of the Department and they have to collect the budget estimates of all the different
branches viz. Roads, Bridges, Projects, Administration, Buildings, electrical, electronic etc.
702. Selection of new works
Buildings: List of new works of buildings under the administrative control of the P. W. D. shall be
prepared each year by concerned Executive Engineer and submitted to Chief Engineer (Building) This
list shall be sent to Chief Engineer with recommendations of the Superintending Engineer well ahead of
the date when budget proposals are to be sent to the Chief Engineer.
In the case of buildings for other departments of the state, the list of new building works to be
carried out by the P. W. D. during the concerned budget year shall be prepared and finalized by the
departments concerned. This shall then be incorporated in their Part II proposals after consulting the
concerned Executive Engineer of the P. W. D. regarding cost and other details. In the case of works
where only investigation and preparation of preliminary estimate are completed, the amount as per
preliminary estimate can be noted in the column 'estimate amount'. In other cases, where preliminary
estimates are yet to be prepared, the District Officer or head of the Department concerned shall furnish
sufficiently in advance- the requirements, site proposed etc. to the Executive Engineer concerned in the
district, who will assess the rough cost of the work and intimate the same to the concerned department
for incorporation in the list of new works. The heads of Departments are required to send these proposals
direct to the concerned Administrative Department of the Secretariat with copies of the proposals to the
Chief Engineer, Buildings.

704. Roads and Bridges.

The new works to be included under this head may be broadly divided into-
(i) Improvement, or upgrading of existing roads
(ii) Strengthening or construction of existing bridges and culverts.
(iii) Construction of new roads
(iv) Construction of new bridges and culverts.
The Highway Authority (Executive Engineer) may propose scheme for the above works under (i) to
(iv) as per Highway Protection Act Clause 7.
When Panchayat or other local bodies pass resolution to hand over roads to PWD, the concerned
Executive Engineer shall submit proposal for such take over as per provisions in the ‘Kerala Panchayati
Raj Act’. This is required to ensure that the designated road is in conformity with the standard category
road.
705. National Highways. For all original works the department shall prepare and submit
proposals through the CE (NH) to the Ministry of Transport, Government of India.
In the case of CRF works under National Highways, the selection of new works is drawn up by the
Ministry of Transport (Roads wing) of the Government of India on the advice of the State Government.
A list of works to be taken up in a year is then communicated by the Government of India to the State
Government well in advance so that the State Government may conduct detailed investigation and
forward estimates to Government of India in due course.
706. Repairs and maintenance
67
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Expenditure on repairs and maintenance of buildings, roads, bridges, and miscellaneous public
improvements are to be classified under respective heads.
The requirements of the Road safety Cell; GIS and RMMS, environment, quality, research,
investigation, training and IT shall also be assessed by the Chief Engineer Administration & Designs
in the head quarters and Executive Engineer in Divisions and incorporated in the budget proposal.
The RMMS cell in the centre shall collect the road maintenance requirement for the entire state
from respective divisions and the total fund requirements shall be incorporated in the annual budget as a
planned item.

66 | P a g e

68
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

706.1 Heads of account

The major heads of account operated by PWD is given as Appendix 500A (section 500)
706.2 Budget Allocation
Funds for plan schemes included under the various major heads will have to be provided based
on the annual plan allotment for the respective schemes. The annual plan allotment for each of the plan
schemes are fixed by the Planning Commission in consultation with the State Government.
In the case of non-plan expenditure such as expenditure under repairs and maintenance or on
works which do not pertain to developmental activities, etc., the total allotment under various major,
minor or objective heads will be indicated by Government and the total provision under such major,
minor or group heads shall be kept within such allotment when framing budget proposals.
The concerned Chief Engineer keeping the following principles in view, shall make having
ascertained the total amount available under any major, minor or group head, the distribution of funds to
various works.
(a) Sufficient amount shall be provided for works already commenced to enable the same being
completed as early as possible. Careful study of the progress which can be achieved during the year shall
be made after taking into account availability of land, materials, tools and plant, delays if any due to
seasonal conditions or other reasons etc. and the budget provision to be made shall be based on such
study by the Executive Engineer.
(b) In respect of new works these shall be listed in the order of priority and the provision of funds for
each shall be determined taking into account the progress which can be expected during the year after
allowing for delays if any which may occur for getting possession of land, arranging contracts, making
available required materials, tools and plant etc. If the total funds required for new works after making
provision for each on the lines set out above is found to be more than the total amount available for
distribution, then a few works with lesser priority shall be eliminated. It is not advisable to provide for a
large number of works with insufficient funds for each.
Provision of funds for repairs of the various categories of public works shall be made based on the
principles detailed in the respective chapters on maintenance as indicated below:
(a) Buildings – Section 2900.
(b) Roads and Bridges- section 2700 and 2800 respectively
(c) In other case according to needs based on past experience.
The method of working out funds required under establishment is detailed in Budget Manual. The
system of charging the expenditure on work establishment to individual works has now been abolished
and the work establishment personnel are also taken over into regular establishment.
The provision in the budget under tools and plant covers-
(a) Purchase of new tools and plant, and (b) Repairs and carriage of existing tools and plant. Provision for
(a) is generally made on a L. S. basis for the items to be procured during the year as detailed in chapter 5
of Section V, Asset Management –Movable Assets. Pro vision for (b) is also made as a lump sum.
There is a minor head 95 provided under major head 3054-80-799 to cover suspense transactions relating
to miscellaneous public works advances. All transactions recorded under this head are ultimately
removed either by payment or by recovery in cash or by adjustment to the works concerned. The
transactions therefore consist of both debits and credits and the latter are adjusted as reduction of
expenditure. Although the net financial effect of the transactions may be either zero or a small amount
representing the difference between total expenditure and total credits, it is necessary for budget
purposes to forecast the likely total expenditure to be incurred during the year without taking into
account the credits and provide for the same under this head. This forecasting shall be done based on
previous year's experience allowing for necessary variations anticipated.
The budget shall be made public through website after budget speech by the Chief Engineer
(Administration & Design).
707. Preparation and Submission of Performance Budget
In addition to the Financial Budget referred to above it is also necessary to prepare and submit a
performance budget in respect of the activities of the various branches of the department. This method of
budgeting shall enable a department to set out in the budget document the objectives of the department
during a year, the programs and activities by which these objectives are proposed to be realized, the
expenditure to be incurred on each of these programs and activities during the year, indicating the broad

69
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

physical achievements that is possible. This is a useful management tool both for the Legislature and the
departments in programming and evaluating the performance of the departments.
Performance Budget for this year and for next year shall be filled up in the prescribed form.
Guidelines for filling up the proforma sub activity-wise and object-wise are given therein.
The Executive Engineers of the Divisions shall fill up the proforma and submit to the Chief
Engineer and then to the Secretary to Government, Finance Department by 1st December every year under
intimation to concerned Chief Engineer.
The Chief Engineers shall submit the proposals for next year's budget in the proforma
considering the previous years Performance Budget. At the time of finalizing the budget, the Finance
Department will consult the Chief Engineer about revising the physical achievements proposed in the
proposals with reference to the final allocation that would be made in the budget against each activity.
The Chief Engineers shall issue supplemental instructions, if necessary, on the above subject.
707.1 Control of Expenditure
The Chief Engineer is the chief controlling officer of the major budget heads solely operated by
the P. W. D. Each Chief Engineer will function as the chief controlling officer for the major budget
heads or portions of major budget heads with which his wing has to deal.
The Superintending Engineers under the control of Circles are subordinate controlling officers to
control the expenditure under the budget items dealt by them.
Executive Engineers under the control of Divisions and other Divisional Officers of the P.W.D.
are disbursing officers. It is the duty of the concerned Chief Engineer to ensure that resources are
collected, allocated and expenditures are disbursed in an efficient, effective and economic manner. He
shall hold subordinate officers accountable for spending public money both in terms of outcomes
achieved and value for money
The chief controlling officers, the subordinate controlling officers and disbursing officers have to
exercise proper control over expenditure in the manner detailed in the Budget Manual. Expenditure has
to be watched in terms of each unit of appropriation and steps taken to regularize unavoidable variations
as soon as such variation is anticipated. The unit of appropriation so far as budget of the P. W. D. is
concerned will be:
a. For works or items for which specific provisions are made in the budget-each such work or item.
b. For works or groups of works for which L.S. provision is made- each unit in to which the L.S. is
distributed by the chief or subordinate controlling officer. Thus the budget provision for project
involving several works may be a L. S. When this is distributed among various works pertaining
to the project the expenditure has to be watched against the amount so distributed to each such
work.
c. For repairs and maintenance when specific provision is made for a particular item or structure. -
each such item of maintenance.
d. For repairs and maintenance when the amount is provided as a L. S. -each unit in to which the L.
S. is divided by the chief or subordinate controlling officer.
e. For Tools and Plant -each unit in to which the Chief or Subordinate Controlling Officer
distributes the L.S.
f. T. A. contingencies and other expenses for which L. S. provision is made - Each unit in to which
the L. S is divided by the chief or subordinate controlling officer.
g. Suspense. The provision in the budget is to be treated as the unit of appropriation.
h. Grant in aid--each unit in to which Government distributes the L. S.
In addition to watching and controlling expenditure against budget grant it is also necessary to
watch whether the physical target arrived at for each work is being achieved. The performance budget is
useful for effecting this check and Chief Engineer, Superintending Engineer and Executive Engineers
shall periodically review the actual progress of each work against the physical targets fixed for the year
in the performance budget. Even in cases where there is no performance budget prepared, during the
periodical financial review by the Chief Engineer, Superintending Engineer and Executive Engineers the
physical progress of each work shall be reviewed and steps taken to remove difficulties in achieving the
desired progress. The financial review will also bring to light cases where variations from budget grant
are likely so that timely steps can be taken to regularize the same.
Variations are to be regularized through surrender of surplus funds, or by re appropriations or
supplemental grant as the case may be. The procedure for the above is detailed in the budget manual.

70
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

708. Construction and maintenance of National Highways.

The procedure regarding budgeting and control of expenditure for National Highways is as follows.
Provision for works to be executed in a year is made in the Central Budget under 5054 Capital
Outlay on Roads and Bridges, 01-National Highways (Sub-major Head), 01.337 minor head, 01 works
under roads wing, 01.02 other scheme and 01.02.53 major works. The Ministry then communicates
budget provision and work-war allotment for original works to the State Government at the beginning of
each year. Budget proposals showing revised Budget Estimates for the year and Budget Estimates for the
next year are to be furnished to Government of India by the State Government by the 15th September
every year. Revised allotment is sanctioned based on this.
The power to reappropriate/ modifies allotted funds vests with Government of India. The final
requirements of funds are then furnished to Government of India by the end of February, based on which
they communicate the final allotment. Expenditure on works is to be strictly limited to the final
allotment. Reasons for variations have to be explained in the appropriation accounts furnished to
Government of India at the beginning of the succeeding year.
In cases of L A. for National Highway works, the owners of the land may move the Courts for
enhanced compensation. If and when the courts award higher compensation, the state Government,
which acquires the land on behalf of Government of India becomes a party to the dispute and the excess
expenditure incurred in satisfaction of Court decree is a “Charged items'' as far as the State Government
is concerned. The expenditure is therefore initially to be met by the State Government. Such amounts are
ultimately reimbursed by the Central Government from their voted grant during the same year.
Government of India keeps regular control over expenditure on National Highway. To facilitate this, the
State Government forwards the monthly statements of expenditure to Government of India by the middle
of each succeeding month. For maintenance and repairs of National Highways also, the Government of
India prescribe norms and the State execute works on an agency basis as in the case of Original Works.
Lump sum allotment for the various kinds of repairs, viz. normal maintenance and repair works, periodic
renewals and special flood damage repair works for each year are sanctioned by Government of India
separately for each category. For normal maintenance and repairs and periodic renewals abstract
estimates are forwarded to the Ministry of Transport on the first of April every year and for special and
flood damage repairs they are sent by first June and 15th October respectively. Maintenance and repairs
works are done in the cyclic order of priority within the allotment sanctioned from time to time.
709. Funding
709.1 Departmental Revenues
The P.W.D. is responsible for the collection and accounting of certain items of revenue. The main
items of revenue are given below:-
a. Rents. -rents for residential and non-residential buildings and quarters under the control of the P. W.
D. including rents of furniture, amounts arising from lease of stalls, fees realised for the use of
rooms in rest houses, etc. are credited to the concerned head.
b. Sale proceeds of usufructs of trees belonging to Government along the sides of roads and on PWD
land or lease amounts thereof are credited under the concerned head.
c. Recoveries of expenditure: Recoveries on account of damage caused by occupants to buildings and
furniture, tools and plant charges from contractors, refund of unspent balance of grant, contribution
from local bodies or private parties in respect of works, as specified in Article 428 (a) of the
K.P.W.A. Code, sale proceeds of old tools and plant, etc. are creditable to the concerned head.
d. Fee collected by mechanical wing for testing of vehicle for fuel efficiency, preparation of repair
estimates, supervision of work etc.
e. Hire charges for machineries and equipments
f. Fines and confiscations, etc.
g. Miscellaneous: The receipts credited to concerned head are lease rent and sale proceeds of avenue
trees, wood, glass, fruits, vegetables, dead stock, waste paper an other items, rents from land etc.
It is the duty of the Executive Engineers and officers subordinate to them to arrange realization of
revenue to be collected by them in time and also take all necessary steps to prevent leakage of revenue.
General principles regarding collection of revenue and its accounting procedure are detailed in para 269
to 300 of Public Works Account Code.

71
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

710. Procedure for payments from the Central Road Fund. A specific percent of the extra duty of
customs and of excise levied on motor spirit shall be used for the purposes of road development and
apportioned to the state governments. The conditions to be satisfied are:
1. State has to comply with the Central Government recommendations for regulation and control of
motor vehicles.
2. The Central Government may resume the whole or part of any sums which it may at that time hold
for expenditure in that State for delay without reasonable cause the application of any portion of
the Road Fund allocated or re-allocated as the case may be for expenditure within the State
3. All sums resumed by the Central Government from the account of any State Government as
aforesaid shall be re-allocated between the credit accounts of State Governments and the reserve
with the Central Government in the ratio of the main allocation for the financial year preceding the
year in which the re-allocation is made provided that the sum so calculated as the share of the State
from whose account the resumption has been made shall be credited to the reserve with the Central
Government.
4. Special additions to the Road Fund for financing particular projects may be accepted from sources
other than that already mentioned in Central Road Fund rules, shall be kept in a special reserve and
utilized for such projects.
5. The balance to the credit of the Road Fund or of any allocation thereof shall not lapse at the end
the financial year.
6. No expenditure shall be incurred from any portion of the Road Fund save as 'hereinafter provided.
7. The Central reserve with the Central Government shall be applied first to defraying the cost of
administering the Road Fund and thereafter upon such schemes for research and intelligence and
upon such special enquiries connected with roads and upon special grants-in-aid for such objects
connected with road as the Central Government may approve.
8. The sums allocated for expenditure in the States may, subject to the previous approval of the
Central Government, to each proposal made, be expended upon any of the following objects,
namely: -
(i) on the construction of new roads and bridges, of any sort;
(ii) on the reconstruction or substantial improvement of existing roads and bridges.
(iii) in special cases, on the maintenance of roads and bridges, constructed, reconstructed, or
substantially improved from the Road Fund or from loans approved or sanctioned by the Central
Government;
(iv) to meet charges, including the cost of establishment, connected with the preparation of schemes of
road development or with the administration of State Roads of communications;
(v) to meet charges including the cost of establishment connected with control of motor transport, and
(vi) on the interest and amortization of loans approved or sanctioned before the date of this resolution by the
Central Government and spent, or to be spent on the construction, reconstruction or substantial
improvement or roads and bridges.
9. In considering proposals for the construction, reconstruction or improvement of roads and bridges
from the road fund the Central Government shall have regard to the present urgent need for
improving the efficiency and reducing the cost of transport by road or agricultural produce to
markets and railways.
10. Provided that the amounts in the Special Reserve shall be applied only to the purposes for which
they are earmarked.
710.1. The orders of the Government of India regarding the procedure for payment from the Fund is
given in Appendix 700A.
711. Kerala Road Fund Board (KRFB)
As per the provisions of Kerala Road Fund Act, 2001, the Kerala Road Fund Board has been
constituted for approving all participation agreements and allocate from the Road Fund
subsidies/annuities/other assistance to private participants
As per Notification No. 22098/H1/02/PWD. Dated, 30th May 2003 the Kerala Road Fund Board rules
are framed.
The Road Fund shall consist of: -
(a) all moneys received from the Central Road Fund established under the Central Road Fund Act,
2000
(b) the contribution made by the State Government
(c) all fees, fines and other amount collected by the Government as per the provisions of the Kerala
Highway Protection Act, 1999

72
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

(d) all payments made by the concessionaire as per the concession agreement;
(e) all amount standing to the credit of the Bridges Fund established under section 12 of the Kerala
Tolls Act, 1976
(f) the user fees collected by the Government agency or the statutory body under the Kerala Road
Fund act Act
(g) grants or loans or advances made by the Government of India or any institution
(h) grants or loans or advances made by the Government
(i) all returns on investments made by the Road Fund Board directly or through a Government agency
or statutory body
(j) any amount borrowed by the Road Fund Board
(k) any other amount authorised for credit to the Fund under the provisions of Road Fund Act or rules
made there under or any other law for the time being in force.
(l) All fees collected for issue of NOC for Petrol pumps, advertisements, road cutting permit fees.
(m) Recovery of Centage Charges
(n) funds for deposit work
(o) fee for Registration (or renewal) of contractors
(p) fee for sale of tender
(q) fee for fitness certificate of buildings
(r) fee for valuation of buildings
(s) test fees collected by KHRI
(t) The Government shall contribute to the Fund every year an amount equal to ten per cent of the tax
collected by them in the previous year under the provisions of the Kerala Motor Vehicles Taxation
Act, 1976, and the said amount shall be charged on the Consolidated Fund of the State.
712. Centage charges
All state government works shall be done by PWD. However centage charges as per section
1701.4 shall be levied and remitted to KRFB
713. Externally Aided projects
The funds allotted through the budget by the State Government are insufficient for the
requirement of the department for their proper functioning. Hence finanical assisstance from the external
funding agencies like NABARD, ADB, WB etc are sought by the state government to cater to the
requirement. P.W.D. has also obtained such loans for carrying out necessary roads and bridge works. In
the case of works where expenditure is reimbursed, the prescribed proforma duly filled up shall be
forwarded to the Finance Department for onward transmission to the funding agency.The expenditure
incured for the purchase of quality control equipments, for setting of labs, purchase of tools and plants
and other expenses for the work shall also reimbursed if the same is included in the Administrative
sanction of the work.
714. Administration Report
The Chief Engineer (Administration & Design) shall publish annual administration reports.
The report shall be based on the budget allocations of the concerned wing. It shall also include records of
transactions, accounts and financial statements in accordance with government accounting policies,
department service plans that identify goals, objectives, and performance measures. The administration report
of each wing shall also include the expenditures including establishment charges incurred from the Head of
account of the concerned wing. The details and names of investigation works, architectural drawings and
structural designs done during the year shall be incorporated in the administration report of the concerned
wing.
The report must disclose information concerning commitment on major project, describe the
progress of each project and include project expenditure plan information.
It shall briefly describe-
• the objectives of the project;
• the costs and benefits of the projects;
• the ongoing risks associated with those costs and benefits
• the use of any public/ private partnership arrangement in delivering the project
. The salient points to be included in the Administration report are shown in Appendix
2.5 715. Award of excellence:
Every year the PWD shall award persons/ offices for meritorious service to the department and
society. Similarly contractors shall also be suitably rewarded for exceptional performances. For this

73
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

purpose a committee headed by the Chief Engineer Administration & Designs with all Chief
Engineers and one or two experts shall be constituted every year with the approval of government. The
committee shall fix the norms, procedure and criteria. The committee then shall invite applications from
the Engineers/Contractors through proper channel by the first week of January and declaration shall be
st
made before 31 of March.

Section 800
801. Geographical Information System (GIS)
801.1. General
GIS is a computer system capable of capturing, storing, analyzing, and displaying
geographically referenced information.
PWD GIS has mapped all roads in Kerala State including bridges, junctions, culverts and other
objects of interest. It provides a complete and accurate map of the road network in Kerala.
PWD GIS is a tool for planning preliminary alignment ; and development of the road network to
improve connectivity and to assist with better decision-making.
An important use of GIS is to enable PWD to develop efficient maintenance strategies for roads
and bridges. PWD GIS is the spatial database for the road maintenance management system (RMMS).
GIS plots can show roughness, potholes and other criteria, which indicate the road, condition and thus
help PWD to arrive at logical decisions. Further, PWD can prepare and monitor annual work plans and
maintenance programs.
802. GIS Operation in PWD
The GIS operations in PWD are carried out at two levels, the central GIS unit at Chief Engineer
Administration & Designs office.

802.1. Functions of Central GIS unit

• Overall database maintenance and responsibility for changes to the GIS database
• Data integration
• Preparation of subsets for each Local GIS Unit in Circles and Divisions
• Analysis and presentations for general management
• Compile, convert and integrate new data layers
• Coordinate spatial data collection for road network and bridge maintenance
• Integrate GPS coordinates into geographical database for regular update
• Prepare and provide digital updates of GIS for Local GIS Units
• Prepare and maintain metadata documentation
• Maintain link to databases for RMMS, GeoKAMS, FMS and WINGS
• Perform analysis and prepare printouts for Chief Engineer
• Perform and present ad hoc analysis
• Maintain contact to Local GIS Units
• Carry out GIS introduction as training for new staff of GIS Units
• Prepare and organize regular meetings
• Prepare and organize eventual contact to other departments, institutions, private sector
• Prepare and organize review workshop
• Coordinate and organize future expansion of the GIS
• Monitor progress of GIS implementation
• Provide large sized map printouts to Circles, Divisions, Sub-Divisions and Sections
• Prepare analysis and printouts for respective Circle / Division
• Prepare documentation and analysis results for Central and Circle Level
• Maintenance of the Geographical Database − Field c ollection of data for database maintenance
• Coordinate GPS field data collection of new roads and bridges for regular maintenance
• Inform Central GIS Unit about changes in road network for re-classification
• Maintain contact to Sub-Divisions and Sections
• Participate in regular meetings
• Provide map printouts to Sub-Divisions and Sections

74
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

802.2. Supporting role

The function of Sub-Divisions and Sections is mainly to provide the basis of the attribute database
through data collection. They shall also verify the various outputs and keep these maps as reference.
802.3. Data Collection and compilation
The source of all data in PWD is the Section, where it is collected and compiled. The Sub-
divisions hold a key function for data compilation since data will be aggregated here. Data validation,
computing and data references shall be checked at each level. The key function for GIS and road
maintenance management is at the Division level. The data will be assembled and the first analysis is
done in order to prepare yearly maintenance programs.
802.4. Data Processing
The table 900.1 gives an overview about the general functions in data processing of the different levels.
Table 900.1 General functions of geographical data processing in PWD administrative levels.
PWD Administrative Major Function in Bottom-up Data Processing / Collection
Level
Sections Data collection and surveying
Sub-Division Collection from Sections, first data assembling
Division Collection from Sub-Divisions, assembling, first analysis and validation
(results in maintenance programs and project proposals)
Circle Collection from Divisions, scrutinizing and eventually proposal for
modifications
Note: no assembling of data
Central Collection from Divisions and Circles, analysis and validation (results in
budget allocation) Update and maintenance of core database.
803. Information Retrieval
The central unit shall perform all the analysis and output generation functions of GIS including
mapping for the Chief office, circle offices and division offices.
The GIS database shall be disabled for changes by the general Divisions but shall have an analytical tool
for performing analytical functions and first ‘planning level’ for maintenance activities.
804. Duties of the PWD GIS Units
The tasks covered by the different GIS Units are basically two fields:
1. Maintenance of the Geographical Database
2. Analytical operations, presentation and communication of information derived from GIS
805. Database Maintenance Procedures
In order to assure sustainability of the GIS initiative, it is crucial to maintain the geographical
database and update it regularly. The regular maintenance of the spatial database for PWD refers to the
following data:
Alignment of roads
Classification of roads
Location of bridges / cross drainage (CD) structures
Maintenance and update of registers
805.1 Update of new road alignments:
The major change in the GIS database will be caused by the construction of new roads or
eventually the conversion of roads into PWD roads or which have not been captured accidentally. In
case of conversion into PWD road, the alignment of those roads has to be captured like a new road.
About 10 to 20 km of new road is constructed yearly in every Division. These new alignments
have to be included in the database as update of the road network. Ideally, the respective collection of
data shall be done through the use of the Global Positioning System (GPS). Since the maximum
accuracy level of the geographical database is at ± 6m because of the ground resolution of satellite
images, a differential correction (DGPS, Differential GPS) of GPS coordinates would not be required,
instead, simple hand-held GPS receivers shall be used for the primary data collection for new road
alignment. Handheld GPS receivers provide accuracy of about 5-10 m.
The Divisions, i.e. by the GIS Officers of the respective Division, shall coordinate the field surveys for
the GPS measurements. The GPS data have then to be forwarded in digital format on CD to the central GIS
unit in Trivandrum for integration into the GIS database. The updated version of the GIS database

75
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

will be returned to the respective Divisions. The updating of the road network shall be carried out
once a year.
805.2. Re-classification of roads
The classification of roads may change because of the conversions. Since the road network
in the geographical database contains all roads, regardless of their classification, a new alignment
would usually not be necessary but only a simple reclassification in the GIS. If roads are being
converted, the local GIS units shall report this to the central GIS by indicating the road on
respective map sheets.

806. Location of Bridges / CD structures

Bridges and cross drainage structures (CD) have to be added in the geographical database in
case of new constructions. The procedure in updating bridges is also based on GPS technology. The
local GIS unit in divisions needs to coordinate the GPS field surveys and forward the GPS
coordinates to the Central GIS Unit for database update. The time for the submission of coordinates
for the bridge and CD update shall be similar to road network updates so that all annual updates are
done at once.
Table 900.2 Sequence and responsibilities of maintenance activities
Steps Activity Responsible
Road alignment Road classification Location of bridges and
CD structures
1. Prepare print-out of Section Prepare print-out of Section / Prepare print-out of Section Local GIS
/ Sub-Division with new Sub-Division and mark / Sub-Division and mark Unit
road and mark manually manually alignment of location of bridge / CD
approximate alignment converted road structure
2. Carry-out GPS field survey In case that road is not Carry-out GPS field survey To be
to capture geographical captured in database, carry out to capture geographical coordinated
coordinates of road GPS field survey coordinates of bridge / CD by local GIS
structure Unit
3. Forward GPS coordinates to Forward map with marked Forward GPS coordinates to Local GIS
Central GIS Unit converted road or GPS Central GIS Unit Unit
coordinates to Central GIS
Unit
4. Integrate coordinates of Re-classify road or integrate Integrate coordinates of new Central GIS
new road into geographical coordinates of converted road bridge / CD structure into Unit
database into geographical database geographical database
5. Segmentation of new road Segmentation of converted Assignment of unique ID to Central GIS
and assignment of unique road and assignment of unique new bridge / CD structure Unit
ID to segments ID to segments
6. Forward of print-out for Forward of print-out for final Forward of print-out for Central &
final approval by Section, approval by Section, Sub- final approval by Section, local GIS
Sub-Division, Division Division, Division Sub-Division, Division Unit
807. Maintenance and updating of registers
The GIS local units shall maintain registers for roads, bridges and junction in formats given
in table 900.3 and regularly update it with regards to spatial data.
808. Analytical Operations
The Central GIS Unit and the Local GIS Units shall perform analysis.
The Divisions shall prepare annual maintenance plans, based on various analyses and forward it to
the Chief Engineer through circle offices. Maps shall be integrated in reports as attachments. The
analytical operations on Circle level will have the purpose to scrutinize the plan documents from the
Divisions. Analytical operations by the Central GIS Unit are supporting overall management
decisions, mainly in terms of budget allocations (for road maintenance). The operations will be
carried out on behalf and for the Chief Engineer. The Divisions shall prepare a set of thematic maps,
to be forwarded for the Sub-Divisions. The Sections through the Sub-Divisions shall verify
information derived from the database.
Table 900.3 gives an overview about the operational standard tasks of the different levels.
Performing and Presenting Analysis Results Presentation of Spatial References *
Central Perform analysis and document on A3 sized maps and in Provide large sized division and circle maps
Office report format to Chief Engineer to every Division and Circle Office
Circle Perform analysis for scrutinizing documents from Divisions
76
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Office and forward to CE as A3 maps and in report format

Division Prepare thematic maps for verification by Sub-Divisions / Prepare reference maps for Sub-Divisions
Sections and Sections on A3 sheets
Perform analysis for maintenance planning and forward to
Chief Engineer in reports and as A3 sized maps
Sub- Data gathering
Division Verification of analysis
Section Data gathering
Verification of analysis
*(Topographic Maps with emphasize on road and bridges)
809. Regulations for Exchange of Spatial Data and Dissemination of Spatial Information
The information derived from the GIS shall be disseminated as hardcopies in the form of
map sheets and reports. The different information from the GIS to be distributed among PWD could
be categorized into spatial references and analysis results.
809.1. Spatial References:
Spatial references are topographic maps, showing roads, bridges, CD structures, villages,
water bodies and administrative boundaries. Every office shall have a map as general reference of
their respective area. The Central GIS Unit shall provide large size maps (A0 format) of every
Circle and Division to the respective offices. The Divisions shall supply respective maps of Sub-
Divisions and Sections on A3 size. The Central GIS Unit and the Local GIS Units upon special
request could prepare other maps. These maps shall be displayed in respective offices.
809.2. Analysis results:
Analytical operations by the Central GIS Unit will be carried out on behalf and for the
Chief Engineer. Outputs shall be as A3 as well as A4. For presentation purposes, maps could be
printed on large sized paper. The results of analytical operations on Circle level shall be in form of
A3 sized maps. The Divisions based on various analyses will generate maps on A4 paper. These
maps shall be integrated in various reports as attachments.
810. Monitoring of GIS Operations
The introduction of GIS technology implies the adoption of a completely new instrument for the
organization and its integration into daily working procedures thorough organizational changes, work
habits and patterns. Progress and benefits shall be monitored and corrective measures undertaken.
Suitable indicators for assessing the overall success and status of the GIS implementation are given in
Table 900.4
In addition to the regular maintenance activities, it shall be the task of the Central and Local
GIS Units to keep track and record consistently the following data:
Table 900.4 Monitoring Plan for overall impact of GIS.
Records for Impact Monitoring To be recorded To be To be
by Division recorded by recorded by
Unit Circle Unit Central
Unit
Events of data update and results of quality control
Request for maps, their contents (title) and the inquirer
Instances when maps were presented in meetings, conferences etc.
on central level to support important instances (such as budget
allocation), contents of the presented maps and weather there was
positive, negative or non influence11
Events of training, training type and contents, list of participants,
trainer kind of position
Number of positions in GIS units which had to be refilled,
kind of position
The various attributed data that form the GIS system shall be documented regularly and when
changes occur. This shall be the responsibility of central GIS Cell.
811. Training, Support and Internal Communication
There are several activities which shall be executed at regular intervals in order to keep a
certain level of know-how and to maintain the communication between the different GIS Units:

77
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

• All GIS Units shall meet at least once in a year with the purpose of exchanging ideas, reporting
about experiences and problems, maintaining standards and procedures and getting feedback from
the Chief Engineers. The meeting shall be set, organized and facilitated by the Central GIS Unit.
• Annually, the Central GIS Unit shall give a presentation on the complete database for all Divisions and
Circles provide a one day refresher-course about GIS technology and introduce about latest development
in general as well as within PWD in so far it is relevant to GIS operations.
• All GIS Officers shall attend an external profess ional training on GIS issues for about one week, once
in two years. This training shall be tailored for the needs and shall include need-related aspects such as
refreshing the general know-how on geographical information technology, latest trends and specific
aspects, for instance advanced spatial analysis procedures, marketing strategies, data security aspects etc.
Universities, other government organisations, private institutes or consultants could provide the external
training.
Besides these regular activities, there are occasional activities which may come up or which
supports the overall performance of GIS operations:
• In case of personnel transfer and open positions in GIS Units, the Central GIS Unit shall provide and
introduction course for the replacement to assure smooth performances in the different offices
• From time to time, one or two representatives of the Central GIS Unit shall visit selected Local GIS
Units for individual support. Such visits could be scheduled so that all offices have been visited once
within two years.
• In order to expose the PWD staff to other systems and best practices and for the exchange of experiences, it
would be recommended to organize visits to other organizations such as other government institutions where
GIS is implemented (inside or outside the State) or to special organizations in the field of geographical
information technology like the National Remote Sensing Center.
812. GIS in Use
812.1. Proximity Analysis:
The road network is the basis for the overall development of any region. Hence, it is a crucial
parameter, well monitored for any planning studies. The proximity or nearness of any settlement or
habitation to any existing road network can be measured using the GIS tools and automation can be
developed for this kind of query up to a certain extent. This information is very useful in exploring the
marketing network and other business activities.
812.2. Demographic Analysis:
The information on census is very important and crucial in planning and monitoring the
schemes and plans for any service oriented organization. A direct relationship between road network and
village level once established, census data of the revenue village level can be attached as attributes to the
GIS database. This database would be very helpful in understanding the rural - urban phenomenon and
enables analysis like service area selection etc. This information would be useful for developing the core
networks, which is being followed in the government schemes.
812.3. Shortest Route Identifier:
This tool is a typical travel tool to identify the optimal route from one specific point to another
one, based on criteria such as travel distance, riding quality of road, traffic volume etc.
For PWD, the tool could be helpful to identify most frequented roads for planning purposes.
Table 900.2 relates to the identified needs for PWD to the above-described tools and their technical
functions.
Reference docs
Field Data Collection using GPS-Guidelines
Data Interchange format/ protocol
Installation of RIMS – procedure/ manual
Interlinks: Attribute data / table values from: RMMS, FMS, GeoKAMS, WINGS

78
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

SECTION 900
901. Road Maintenance Management System (RMMS)
901.1 General
The main objectives of establishing the computerized Road Maintenance Management System
(RMMS) are to optimize the use of limited resources available for maintenance works; to have a
systematic approach and planning of road maintenance work program and to reduce the entire transport
costs through proper and timely maintenance works. Maintenance management is a method of
controlling resources to accomplish a predetermined level of service through planning, budgeting,
scheduling, reporting and evaluating. Planning consists of defining maintenance activities, compiling a
road inventory and condition survey details, establishing priorities, establishing quality, quantity,
performance standards and compiling cost data.
902. RMMS in PWD
The road maintenance
aintenance system of PWD shall have the database of all Roads and Bridges under
the control of R& B wing of PWD. The RMMS includes road data such as footpath, drains, kerbs,
medians etc., road inventory, and pavement condition, traffic and works history. It I also includes a
module, which will identify homogeneous road sections and create a file of details for use with HDM-4,
HDM
which will be used as the principal tool for strategic, programme, and project analysis of maintenance.
PWD has a central RMMS cell su supported
pported by Local RMMS units at the Divisions.
Institutional arrangements for implementing the RMMS.
Figure
Chief Engineer A&D

RMMS HQ Cell

RMMS Decision Support Data Management and

Data Collection
System Updating

Superintending Engineer
N, S, C Circles

Circle RMMS Cell Data Management and

Data Collection
RMMS Decision Support Updating
System

Executive Engineer
RMMS Unit
Division Level

Implementation of Maintenance Data Management and

Data Collection
Contracts Updating

Asst. Executive Engineer

Assistant Engineer
Sub-Division / Section Level

Supervision of Maintenance Supervision of Data Collection

Contracts Contracts
1

79
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

902.1. Functions of RMMS

The various functions that are supported by RMMS are:
a) The development of an annual road maintenance program that meets the needs of the road user;
b) Develop strategies to enable the level of service required by the road user to be achieved;
c) Support the preparation of an adequate annual road maintenance budget
d) Annual upkeep of the Standard Schedules of Unit Rates and data;
e) Ensure adequate spread of funding allocation to ensure preservation of roads, bridges and related
infrastructure and safety of the road user;
f) Identify emergency works required to existing roads, bridges and related infrastructure items to
make them safe and keep the road traffic worthy;
g) Making recommendations for minor road improvements and upgrading that may preserve the assets,
reduce maintenance costs, improve traffic flow, improve road safety, reduce flooding, etc.;
h) Preparation of monthly maintenance reports;
i) Preparation of reports regarding needs of the network and effectiveness and adequacy of the
maintenance budget.
902.2. Central RMMS Cell
The RMMS cell in the Chief Engineer Administration & Designs office is under the control of
the Executive Engineer IT and assisted by Assistant Executive Engineer, Assistant Engineer and
supporting staff.
This cell will be responsible for running and maintaining the RMMS program in all aspects. Only this
cell can enter data onto the RIS database. All the other RMMS Cells/Units will only be able to enter data
onto a secondary file which, once the data has been verified at all intervening levels, will be the
responsibility of the RMMS in PWD Head Quarters to update the original database. This shall ensure the
integrity of the database and prevent any manipulation of the stored data that might adversely affect or
influence the decision making process.
The following are functions of Central RMMS cell
1. Preparation of the Annual Routine Maintenance Program for the entire PWD road network;
2. Assist the preparation of annual road maintenance budget and program
3. Co-ordinate with the Division Offices, to set procedures and timings to ensure that the annual road
maintenance program is prepared to meet the required budget schedule;
4. Compile all information prepared by each District and check for adequacy of the annual or multi-
year road maintenance program
5. Review of the proposals from field offices for allotment of maintenance funds under different sub-
heads in consideration of the defined program and budgetary constraints.
6. Set up an effective MIS for both HQ and district offices to allow the recording and tracing of all data
collection, contract procurement information, contract progress and payments, contractor performance
and overall adequacy of maintenance;
7. Ensure that each district maintain the MIS and forward all information to HQ on a monthly basis to
suit PWD reporting procedures;
8. Review of data to verify uniformity and adequacy of budgets and consistency of contractor
performance throughout the State; undertake regular audits.
9. Collect information from field offices regarding major disasters e.g flood damage, bridge/road
collapses etc. in order to provide reports on the cost of damages for information and necessary action to
PWD and Government.
10. Issue directions approved by Chief Engineer Administration & Designs regarding changes to
maintenance procedures and techniques for more effective and cost effective maintenance;
11. Train all staff in the latest maintenance techniques and the proper understanding of road maintenance;
12. Direct the field officers on the implementation of routine maintenance works in accordance with the
PWD Road Maintenance Manual, standard documents etc.
902.2.1. Local unit
At Circle level the RMMS Cells will have full use of the software, which can be used in the
development of the maintenance strategy. These units will also be able to compare the effects of
allocating some of the budget to various items such as construction / rehabilitation of new roads.

80
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

At the Division level the RMMS Units will be able to view RIS database of the part of road network
for which they are responsible.
There shall be an Assistant Executive Engineer supported by Draughtsman in the general divisions
under the control of the Executive Engineer with the following functions
1. The administration and upkeep of RMMS throughout the State to ensure that PWD receives a
suitable and adequate road maintenance budget to meet the required level of service set by the road user.
2. Ensure the conduct of road condition survey on time to meet the required budget submission;
3. Together with the AEE(GIS) check data received from the district offices for accuracy and
consistency and note in particular any changes or queries;
4. Report to the RMMS Central Unit any problems with the annual maintenance programme.
5. Recommend changes to maintenance procedures and techniques for more effective and cost effective
maintenance;
6. Assist in the preparation of the Annual Routine Maintenance Programme for the entire PWD road
network and proposed distribution of funds for routine maintenance activities.
7. Collect information from the field offices regarding major disasters e.g. flood damage, bridge
collapses etc. in order to provide reports on the cost of damages for information and necessary action to
RMMS Central unit
902.3 Data Collection and Validation
The Divisions will be responsible for ensuring that the data is collected in accordance with the
instructions.
Each Division will need to have a record of their road network with full network details
including traffic counts. One of their tasks will be to enter the data collected in their Divisions onto
specially prepared files, which will be transmitted, to the appropriate RMMS Cell in the Circle for
verification by them before onward transmission to the RMMS Central Cell for updating the database.
The following details shall be regularly updated:
903. Road Network
Details 903.1 Road Inventory
The Divisions will be responsible for ensuring that inventory details of all roads added to the
network are collected and transmitted to the Circle RMMS Cell for verification and onward transmission
to the RMMS Central Cell for entry onto the RIS database. Any changes in inventory must also be sent
to the Circle RMMS Cell for verification and onward transmission to the RMMS Central Cell, and this
includes details of recently completed road maintenance works.
903.2. Road Condition Details
The RMMS Central Cell will be responsible for instigating all road condition surveys. They will
contact the RMMS Cells in the three Circles who will be responsible for collection and validation.
There is a need for those engaged in road condition surveys to meet together on an annual basis to ensure
that a uniform standard system is adopted for recording the condition of the roads throughout the State.
The timing of the surveys will be subject to the approval of the Chief Engineer Administration &
Designs but will normally take place on an annual basis after the monsoon season.
903.3. Structures – Inventory and Condition Details of Culverts and Bridges
The Divisions will be responsible for reporting changes in the inventory to the RMMS Cell in the
Circle for verification and onward transmission to the RMMS Central Cell for entry onto the database.
Collection of the condition details will follow a similar pattern to that for road condition surveys.
904. Performance Monitoring
It will be the responsibility of the Divisions to send details of all road maintenance activity to the
RMMS in the Circle for verification and onward transmission to the RMMS Central Cell.
905. Traffic Information System
Instructions regarding the collection of traffic data will be issued by the RMMS Central Cell to
the RMMS Cells in the Circles in a similar way to that for the road condition surveys.

79 | P a g e

81
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Concerned Divisional Engineer in contact with the weighbridge operators shall forward axle load details
to the RMMS Central Cell on a regular basis. Independent surveys to obtain specific axle loadings to
corroborate the information provided by the weighbridges shall be conducted.
The traffic data, coupled with economic forecasts will be used to determine vehicle growth rates that are
a basic requirement of HDM-4. The RMMS Central Cell will have the ultimate responsibility for
ensuring that vehicle growth rates are determined.
905.1. Vehicle Operating Costs
These will need to be updated on an annual basis to ensure that they reflect the actual situation.
This task will be the responsibility of the RMMS Central Cell.
906. Maintenance Intervention Costs
These costs will be generated and updated based on either recent or current maintenance
intervention contracts. The Divisions will be responsible for submitting this data to the RMMS/HQ
Circle via the RMMS Cells in the Circles. The RMMS Central Cell will be responsible to analysing the
contracts to determine the required maintenance intervention costs. Different maintenance interventions
may be used and these must be added to this group of data along with the relevant costs.
907. Reporting
At the start of each financial year a new State version of the RMMS Database will be released
for all users. This will contain all the recently collected condition data and Ordnance and Inventory
revisions. Central unit users will be able to obtain new versions via the network but in the short term
CDs will have to be issued to the divisions.
Details of the completed maintenance work to be sent to the RMMS Cell in the Circle for
verification and onward transmission to the RMMS Central Cell for updating the records.
Maintenance intervention costs on a sq. metre basis shall be returned to the RMMS Cell in the Circle for
verification and onward transmission to the RMMS Central Cell where they will be used to determine
future maintenance costs.
908. Specific use
908.1. Prioritization and budget proposal
This is the stage at which the RMMS/HDM-4 program is used to develop the strategy to be adopted
by the PWD with regard to road maintenance during the next financial year. It gives required data for the
necessity of each item of work to be incorporated in the preparation of the maintenance estimate.
For each maintenance intervention selected the program will produce a prioritized list of roads.
Priority being given to that road which is in greatest need of maintenance based on such factors as
current condition and future estimated traffic volumes. Different maintenance interventions will result in
a different prioritized list of roads.
The task of the Chief Engineer and the Superintending Engineers from Circles is to determine
the optimum intervention strategy for each road and the required budget for same.
908.2. Scenario generation
The maintenance interventions adopted for each road may be different and hence there is no
need to treat all the roads in the same manner. However there is a need to determine the optimum
intervention and the length of road to be so treated. There will be an economic length of road below,
which the costs per kilometre will raise. For example the costs/ kilometre to carry out the same
maintenance intervention are likely to be more for a 0.5 km length than for say a 3.0 km length.
908.3. Constrained budget allocation
In accordance with State requirements the PWD will submit their budgets for road maintenance.
The State will review the budget request and in turn produce an approved list of roads for maintenance,
which will form the PWD budget for the following year. The same process covers both Plan and Non-
Plan works.
909. Input into project planning and design

82
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

In the case of major up-gradations and strengthening projects, the detailed planning and design
stages shall require assistance from the RMMS database.

Section 1000
1001. SAFETY
1002. General. This chapter details the safety measures to be followed in various construction and
maintenance operations. The aim is to provide and maintain a working environment that is safe and
effectively minimises risks to the health of its employees, contractor, equipments and members of
the general public.
PWD shall ensure safety by
• placing the health and safety of all people ahead of the provisions of service.
• adequately training staff in the safe performance of jobs and in the basic areas of accident prevention.
• following all specific rules of the Department consistent with PWD’s health and safety objectives.
• Taking corrective action for every incident with the potential to cause harm, whether such harm
eventuates or not, and also in the case of every accident.
• Insisting on arrangements for the safe use, handling, storage and transport of equipment and
substances.
• Insisting on adequate facilities and protective clothing & equipment to protect the health and safety
of all employees
The practice of safety involves shared responsibilities and a team approach by all employees.
Everyone associated with PWD shall be responsible for their own health and safety, and the safety of
others affected by the actions of their work. Necessary provisions for safety shall be foreseen and
incorporated in the estimates during project preparation stage itself.
1003. Safety Equipment
PWD shall insist on provision of protective clothing and equipment where hazards cannot otherwise
be prevented or suitably controlled, and when complete protection is essential. First Aid facilities shall
be made available at all offices and worksites, for the treatment of employees (including contractors) and
visitors who are injured or become ill.
1004. Accidents
Working in the construction industry can sometimes be dangerous. Work-related accidents can cause
serious injuries, while most of these accidents are preventable. Accidents are mainly classified into 4 types,
viz. fatal accident, grievous injury accidents, minor injury accidents and non-injury accidents as per IRC 53
Road Accident Forms A-1 and 4. The following procedure shall be adopted in case of accidents.
1004.1. Major Accident:
An accident will be considered a major one, if it involves loss of life (fatality), serious injury to any
person(grievous injury), non-injury accidents involving loss of property likely to cost Rs. 50 lakh or
more or would cause serious disruption of normal life in the area affected, such as by interruption to
main lines of communication etc. In case a major accident involving structures under construction or
under maintenance by P. W. D. occurs, the following procedure shall be followed.
ii. The Overseer or Subordinate under the controlshall inform the Assistant Engineer, Assistant
Executive Engineer and Executive Engineer of the accidents by the quickest possible means. The
Police Inspector having jurisdiction over the area shall also be informed in cases of death or serious
injury to person and where criminal activity is suspected.
iii. The Assistant Engineer and Assistant Executive Engineer concerned shall, on receipt of such
information proceed to the spot within the shortest time possible and organise or assist in rescue

83
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

operations. The Assistant Executive Engineer or in his absence the Assistant Engineer shall
immediately inform through suitable means (telegram/ fax/ email) for official recording the
Executive Engineer, the Collector of the District, the Superintending Engineer and Chief Engineer
briefly giving details of the accident. Where the accident involves electrocution, the Electrical
Inspector shall also be informed.
iv. The Executive Engineer on receipt of such information shall send an email or fax message to the,
Chief Engineer Administration & Designs and who shall report to Secretary to Government,
Public Works Department giving brief details of the accident. He shall also proceed to the spot
within 24 hour, of the accident or in as short a time as possible and hold a preliminary enquiry on the
cause of the accident etc. and submit a detailed report to the Superintending Engineer and the Chief
Engineer within 3 days of the completion of the enquiry. This enquiry shall be independent of any
Police enquiry in the matter.

v. The Superintending Engineer shall, on receipt of information, inspect the site within 3 days or as
short a time as possible and ascertain by personal enquiry the causes of the accident, the adequacy of
relief measures, and also find out best means of restoring normal activities in the affected area. His
report shall be sent to Chief Engineer independently of the Executive Engineer's report within 3 days
after his inspection.
vi. The Chief Engineer shall inspect the site within a week of the occurrence of fatal accidents or as
early as possible and make such personal enquiries as he feels necessary in order to furnish a full
report of the accident to the Chief Engineer Administration & Designs and he in turn submit
report to Government, detailing the causes, the action taken thereafter and action to be taken to
restore normalcy in the area. In addition, this report shall contain information as to whether there is
prima facie negligence or dereliction of duty on the part of any Government servant and if so, make
recommendations regarding disciplinary proceedings to be taken against the delinquents.
1004.2. Minor Accidents
Minor injury accidents and non-injury accidents involving loss of property likely to cost less than
Rs. 50 lakh shall be Minor accidents. First aid shall be provided immediately to affect persons and
medical aid sought in case of minor injury accidents. All accidents shall be reported to superior officers.
In case of damage to property the value shall be assessed and reported.
1005. Job Hazard Analyses
A job hazard analysis is a technique that focuses on job tasks as a way to identify hazards before
they occur. It focuses on the relationship between the worker, the task, the tools, and the work
environment. After an uncontrolled hazard is identified, steps shall be taken to eliminate or reduce them
to an acceptable risk level.
Many workers are injured and killed at the workplace which can be prevented by looking at
workplace operations, establishing proper job procedures, and ensuring that all employees are trained
properly. The best way to determine and establish proper work procedures is to conduct a job hazard
analysis.
Job Hazard Analyses (JHAs) shall be a part of major projects that entail:
• jobs with a high frequency of accidents or near misses which pose a significant threat to health and
safety;
• jobs that have already produced fatalities, disabling injuries, illnesses or environmental harm;
• jobs that have the potential to cause serious injury, harm, or damage, even if they have never
produced an injury or illness;
• jobs involving two or more workers who must perform specific tasks simultaneously;
• newly established jobs whose hazards may not be evident because of lack of experience;
• jobs that have undergone a change in procedure, equipment or materials;
• jobs whose operation may have been affected by new regulations or standards; and

84
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

• Infrequently-performed jobs where workers may be at greater risk when undertaking non-routine jobs.
1005.1. Safe Job Procedures shall ensure a safer or healthier way of performing the job.
Basic stages in developing Safe Job Procedures are:
• Identifying/selecting the job to be analyzed
• Breaking the job down into a sequence of basic steps
• Identifying potential hazards in each step
• Determining preventive measures to overcome these hazards
This shall include:
• Regulatory requirements
• Personal Protective Equipment like
Safety glasses (e.g. for use during welding, blasting or other activities that could result in
eye damage).
Ear protection (e.g. ear plugs or ear
muffs). Safety shoes/boots.
Gloves.
Hats shall be provided to reduce impacts of sun and
heat. Shirts shall be worn at all times.
Reflective equipment, materials and clothing shall be provided for road workers, particularly
if work is continuing at night.
Safety signs and safety induction measures.

First Aid Kit available on site, first aid person trained on site or knowledge of access to
doctor/hospital.
• Training requirements
• Responsibilities of each person involved in the job and publishing the names of the persons and
organizations to be contacted in the event of an emergency
• A specific sequence of steps to follow to complete the work safely
• Permits required
• Awareness of emergency procedures,
• Publishing the location of the emergency responsive equipment and ensuring the equipment is
well located, visible and properly maintained.
A well-documented safe job procedure shall form the basis for initial job training and as a
briefing guide for infrequently performed jobs. It may be used as a standard for safety
inspections or observations and it will assist in completing comprehensive accident
investigations. Whenever an incident occurs, the Safe Job Procedure shall be thoroughly
reviewed by the worker and supervisor to ensure that no important step is missing and that the
Job Procedures meet current regulations.
1006. Road Safety
An accident is a rare multi-factor event always preceded by a situation in which one or more
road users having failed to cope with their environment, resulting in vehicle collision, vehicle to rider or
vehicle to property collision. It could be due to road users have failed to cope with their environment.
Therefore Engineers can make the road user to cope with, by improving road and travel environments.
However, prevention and reduction in accident rate can be achieved only with education and
enforcement programmes along with engineering measures.
1006.1. Central Road Safety Cell (CRSC)
Under the Chief Engineer Administration & Designs a Central Road Safety Cell has been
established. The Cell is primarily to coordinate the road safety activities of the PWD including
undertaking of road safety audits at various stages; identification of black spots, the improvement of the
accident sites in a phased manner, establishing Road Safety Cells at a district level and interdepartmental

85
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

co-operation, coordination and collaboration with all stakeholders of road safety and with the Kerala
State Road Safety Authority.
The following road safety activities shall be the prime responsibility of the central road safety cell of
PWD,
• Prioritised Blackspot Improvement Program
• Road Safety Audit of existing roads
• Mass Action schemes
• Engineering measures for vulnerable road users
• Audit of upcoming project roads
• Training and Establishing Road Safety Cells at district level
• Interdepartmental coordination, cooperation and collaboration.
• Accident report compilation with GeoKAMS output, analysis, and preparation of annual
accident report
• Implementation and Review of Road Safety Action Plan
• Development of Road Safety Strategy and Program
1006.2. Road Safety in Divisions
The road safety activity of PWD divisions shall be carried out by the Executive Engineer assisted
by his subordinates under the guidance of Central Road Safety Cell. They shall also support the District
Road safety wing under the control of District collector.

The Divisional offices of road safety shall report all road accidents in their jurisdiction to Central
Road Safety Cell propose safety engineering measures for such locations; identify accident blackspots;
design and prioritise the schemes; and implement/improve such schemes under overall supervision of
Central Road Safety Cell. Also to coordinate the road safety activities of the PWD at district level,
prevention and eviction of encroachments on roads, action to make the roads safe by timely maintenance
and interdepartmental coordination with all stakeholders of road safety. The Executive Engineer shall
review and monitor the progress of road safety works of concerned divisions and report will be
submitted to the CRSC on a monthly basis.

1006.3. Road safety engineering

A systematic, data-led process for devising and implementing road design and traffic
management that effectively prevent and reduce road accidents.
1006.4. Road safety audit of new schemes (Accident Prevention)
Road safety audit is a systematic method of checking the safety aspects of new road schemes before
they are built. The process of road safety audit shall include commissioning audit, initiating audit and
provision of brief, undertaking audit, design and BOQs, responding to audit, and finalising actions.
Various aspects to consider when undertaking audits and the checklist are the following:
1. Planning
2. Cross section
3. Alignment
4. Roadside communities
5. Junctions: general.
6. Junctions: Additional check for roundabout.
7. Junctions: Additional check for signal controlled junctions
8. Special road users
9. Signs, Markings and lightings, and
10. Roadside hazard
Road safety audit shall be conducted as per the road safety audit manual published by the Kerala PWD
and available at the website: www.keralapwd.gov.in/intranet/eknowledge/document/auditmanual.pdf
1006.5. Road safety assessment of existing roads (Accident Reduction)

86
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

The audit procedure shall be used on existing roads. Regular audit of existing roads enables
hazard to be identified before an accident occur and to remedy those situations that are causing
accidents. This involves the regular assessment of accident data and driving speeds on project roads and
regular reassessment of road functions. Following measure shall be strictly followed.
• Advertisement hoarding shall not be allowed at or within 100m of any road junction, bridge or
another crossing, within 10m of the edge of carriageway.(as prescribed in the IRC-46-1972)
• Road boundary shall be demarcated and all encroachments shall be evicted.
• Stacking of materials in the Clear Zone (5m from the edge of pavement on rural roads and 3m
on urban roads) roadway shall not be permitted
• Speed breakers for control of vehicular speeds on minor roads shall be done as per IRC 99
1006.6. Black spot Improvement Programmes
A junction, a bend or short length (300-500m) at which accident are clustered, shall be called as a
Blackspot and following standard process shall be carried out to improve all such spots.
1) Identify accident site
2) Preliminary accident analysis
3) Site visit
4) Final Diagnosis
5) Develop countermeasures
6) Detailed design
7) BOQ
8) Economic Evaluation
9) Prioritisation and program
10) Implementation
11) Monitoring and Evaluation
Black spot improvement programme shall be implemented in a phased manner and the details of all
above mentioned process shall be carried out as per the accident site manual published by the Kerala
PWD and available at the website:
www.keralapwd.gov.in/intranet/eknowledge/document/accidentsitemanual.pdf
1007. Signs and Markings Programmes
1007.1. Signs
Signs shall be installed based on IRC-67-2001 and shall be carried out as per the supplementary
technical advice for IRC-67 published by the Kerala PWD and available at the website:
www.keralapwd.gov.in/intranet/eknowledge/
In installation of signs priority shall be given to gateway sign, junction signings, bend signs, school
signs, regulatory and prohibit signs and hazard markers and hump warning and informatory signs.
1007.2. Markings
Markings shall be applied based on IRC-35-1997. In markings on a road, priority shall be given
to centre line, edge line (where adequate width is available), junction marking with appropriate traffic
control for junction, pedestrian crossing markings, hump and rumble strip marking and hazard markings.
1008. Specification for road safety items.
The specification on road safety works shall be carried out as per specification section 800 of
MoRTH specifications for road and bridge works and items not included shall be carried out as per Road
Safety Cell’s specifications for traffic signs and other safety-related works published by the Kerala PWD
and available at the website:
www.keralapwd.gov.in/intranet/eknowledge/document/road safety spec .pdf.
Where no technical specifications have been mentioned in the IRC Codes and Standards, only approved
and agreed CRSC guidelines (as developed based on International Standards and proven research) are to
be followed such as Chevron sign, Retro-reflective Sheeting, RRPM Signs, Solar RRPM, Marking
materials, Crash barriers, and raised humps.

87
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

1009. Safety Measures at Road Construction works.

All road works, no matter how small, must be properly signed. It shall warn, inform and direct
all road users at all time about the approaching hazards.
Details of guidelines like components of construction zone, traffic control devices and traffic
management practices shall be as per IRC-SP-55-2001.
1009.1. Mandatory Provision
A separate estimate provision shall be included for road safety works in all estimates of
contracts. In major projects exclusive road safety provision shall be included and for minor works, 5%
contract value shall be set apart for road safety items.
1010. Safety of Buildings / Structures
The Assistant Engineer under the control of buildings/ structures shall inspect all buildings/ structures
twice a year and record certificates to the effect that the building/ structure is not unsafe for use.
All buildings/ structures are required to be inspected once a year by the Assistant Executive
Engineer under the control to ensure that the building/ structure are safe for use.
In case of electrical and other installations the Assistant Engineer (Electrical) under the control
of buildings/ structures shall inspect the same twice a year and record certificates to the effect that
electrical and other installations are safe for use. The Assistant Executive Engineer (Electrical) shall also
inspect the same once a year to that effect.
In the event of any such deficiencies found in the building/structure necessary report shall be
made to higher authorities and immediate steps taken to get the same inspected by the Executive
Engineer and further action taken to rectify the defects.
The Executive Engineer shall also inspect important buildings/structures once a year. He shall
bring to the notice of his Superintending Engineer, cases where he has reasons to doubt the structural
soundness of any building/ structure and the latter will take promot action, as he considers necessary.
When any deficiency is found in the important buildings like Raj Bhavan, Ministers Bungalows,
Legislative complex, High Court buildings and houses of other V.I.Ps, report about unsafe conditions
shall be sent to the Chief Engineer, with his recommendations and proposal for repairs or disposal of the
building. As a follow up action, if it is decided to demolish any such unsafe buildings it shall be disposed
of without land by auction under the powers vested in competent authority.
1011. Safety of Bridges
The safety and integrity of bridges shall be ensured through proper design guidelines and regular
inspection and review. The responsibility for bridge safety shall be vested with the Executive Engineer,

Bridges Division supported by Assistant Executive Engineer, Assistant Engineer and subordinate staff.
He shall provide technical review, comments and recommendations on design and construction services,
widths, load capacities and operational requirements for bridge repairs, replacements and upgradation.
He shall maintain a bridge inventory database of all bridges within his jurisdiction, set priorities for
maintenance, repair, and replacement needs and prepare budget proposals. Maintenance of bridge shall
include railings and signs as well. He shall also implement and administer the bridge safety and
inspection programs through the development of policies and guidelines. Bridge inspection reports shall
be prepared as per procedures detailed in the Chapter on Bridge Maintenance.

1012. Disaster management

Human life may get affected due to disasters like landslide, flood, tsunami, earthquake,
cyclone, tornado, building collapse, external aggression, terrorist insurgencies etc.
The District Collector shall be under the control of emergency measures. PWD Executive
Engineers, in liaison with the District Collector, shall be in the forefront of salvage measures and shall
get into action on a war footing basis.

88
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Executive Engineer Buildings, shall arrange for necessary refugee camps, with water supply and
sanitary facilities. The Executive Engineer Roads/ NH shall restore transport facilities by clearing
blockages and rectify damages to roads. The Executive Engineer shall inspect safety of bridges and
where these are found to be unsafe, shall arrange for temporary bridges/ crossings.
In the eventuality of such disasters, top priority shall be given to rehabilitation/ reconstruction
activities. All necessary materials, labour etc. shall be arranged through local contractors and equipments/
vehicles hired. This shall be well coordinated with other agencies through the District Collector.
Funds for each department shall be based on the assessment by revenue authorities, which shall
be subsequently allotted.
1013. Safe Environment Practices
Sustainable development shall be ensured through safe environmental practices. All construction
activities cause disturbance to the environment in one-way or the other. Care shall be taken to minimise
such effects as per the provisions of various acts and rules detailed in sections 1200 and 1300
The PWD offices shall be maintained spotlessly clean and in safe environment. The premises
shall be provided with gardens and trees. Waste disposal shall be done regularly without affecting
environment. Burning of wastes shall be done through incinerators as far as possible, if not in an open
area enclosed by fence and under adequate fire safety measures.

SECTION 1100
1101. Environmental Management
1102. Introduction
This chapter describes the various environmental issues associated with the activities of PWD
and provides details of the environmental management measures that shall be followed. There shall be
an Environmental and Social Management Unit (E&SMU) in the office of Chief Engineer
Administration & Designs and at the General Divisions level
The objective of environmental management is to enhance the positive environmental impacts
and abate/mitigate negative environmental impacts of construction activities and related works. Good
environmental management also ensures compliance with all applicable National, State and Local
Environmental legislations.
This chapter provides the following information:
Description of environmental issues relevant to PWD activities
List of applicable legislations at the national, state and local level
Institutional settings pertaining to legislation
Environmental clearance requirements
For regular works, the process to integrate environmental management measures with implementation. For
certain other works requiring further environmental studies prior to implementation, the process for
conducting the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) and developing the
Environmental Management Plan (EMP).
Environmental training & capacity-building
Environmental communication and consultation.

This chapter is supported with Appendices that provide guidance on various environmental management
activities.
1103. Environmental issues in roads, bridges, buildings and others
Sustainable development with thrust on environmental protection has become the corner stone of
the policies, programmes, procedures and practices governing the development of industrial and
infrastructure projects in India. PWD is committed to prevent or mitigate environmental degradation and
to promote the integration of the environmental concerns in the development projects. The
environmental issues to be considered in all stages of the project are described here.

89
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

1103.1. Land
Projects involving land disturbance, removal of vegetation and reshaping of topography make the
soil vulnerable to erosion, dust generation and generation of waste materials. The mitigation measures
shall be included in the planning and design stage to ensure its effective implementation during the project
execution. These include:
Compensatory planting.
Ensure surface is reinstated, smooth and free of encumbrances.
Minimize waste from construction and reuse of waste material wherever possible.
Solid waste shall be placed to minimize intrusion into the carriageway in consultation with local self
government authorities.
Collect similar types of construction waste into common piles and dispose suitably.
Put general litter and waste into special purpose bins or remove to covered designated area and ensure it
is contained.

1103.2 Air
Air pollution occurs when the air contains pollutants like gases, dust, fumes or odour in harmful
amounts that affect the health or comfort of humans and animals or which could cause damage to plants
and materials.
The sources of the air pollution in the infrastructure projects include, but not limited to;
Site clearance, transportation of men and materials, construction of temporary accommodations, stock
yards, installation of construction plants during the pre- construction stage,
Operation of construction plants such as hot mix plant, concrete batching plant, crusher and wet mix
macadam (WMM) plant,
Excavation of foundation, roadway and borrow areas,
Operation of machinery and vehicles,
Construction of roadway, buildings and bridges,
Stock piles of materials
With the proper assessment of the degree of pollution from each source, required mitigation
measures and preventive measures can be delineated for the protection of air quality from further
degradation and keep the ambient air pollution levels of the project area within limits stipulated in
National Ambient Air Quality Standards. Some of the measures for the prevention and mitigation of the
air pollution due to the project are:
Selection of project location or preferred alignment and design
Fitting required air pollution control equipment for the machinery, plants and vehicles
With proper periodical maintenance and servicing of the pollution control equipment and the machinery,
plant and vehicles
Limited tree cutting, and planting of more trees
Watering of the access roads and approach roads or provide seal coat
Watering of the materials before loading into the plants for reduction of dust
generation Limit the extent of disturbed areas and restore the disturbed areas
1103.3. Water
Water pollution is "the loss of any of the actual or potential beneficial uses of water caused by
any change in its composition due to human activity".
Source of the water pollution and impacts on the water environment include but not limited to:
Loss of water resources such as relocation of wells, hand pumps, tube wells, loss/ filling part of water
bodies and change in the flow pattern of water.
Pollution of streams due to increase of sediment laden runoff,
Pollution of water sources from the oil spills, disposal of bituminous materials, stockyard of diesel,
engine oil, chemicals, bitumen, emulsion etc.,
Disposal of wastewater generated from the temporary living facilities,

Wastewater generated from the operation of plants, cleaning of machinery and

equipment, Wash water from the workshop and washing bay.

90
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

With the proper characterization and quantification of waste water from each source, required
treatment facilities can be designed and implemented for the control of water pollution. Some of the
mitigation measures for the prevention and/ mitigation of the water pollution are:
Controlling the generation of sediment, oil and grease, excess nutrients, organic matter, litter, debris and any
form of waste (particularly petroleum and chemical wastes) from a construction and disallowing these
substances into the waterways, storm water systems or underground water tables. Such materials shall be
captured before they reach drains and waterways by following methods: (i) Cover stockpiles or spray water to
suppress dust, (ii) Store all chemicals, fuels and other hazardous liquids and solids according to manufacturers
specifications within a bunded and covered area or land depression away from waterways,
(iii) Dispose of empty drums and as soon as possible appropriately or through a licensed contractor or to
a licensed disposal centre and (iv) Water quality management e.g. using sandbags to filter water and
remove sediment and control litter;
Limiting the areas of disturbed land,
Progressively clearing the site in accordance with construction needs and rehabilitate as soon as
possible, Protect drainage lines with sediment basins and silt fences,
Construction of proper sanitation facilities for the disposal of the wastewater generated from the kitchen
and toilets.
Construction of proper wastewater treatment facilities for the wastewater generated from the workshops,
concrete batching plants, hot mix plants and wet mix macadam (WMM) plants. Wash out ready-mix
concrete agitators and concrete handling equipment at such facilities. Such treatment plants shall be
considered while planning major infrastructure projects and the treated water shall be recycled and
reused for gardening or irrigation.
Rainwater harvesting shall be done as per Clause 5.5.12 of Part 9 Section I of National Building Code
and the collected water shall be used for gardening, flushing, firefighting or washing purposes.
1103.4 Noise and Vibration
Noise pollution is unwanted human-created sound that disrupts the environment. The dominant
form of noise pollution in the infrastructure projects is from vehicles, machinery, equipment,
construction plants, construction works and vehicles plying on the road.
The noise pollution from the project activities can be reduced with the proper planning and
design of the noise control measures and proper work planning. Some of the noise control measures for
the reduction of the noise from the project are as follows:
Use of quiet equipments, machinery, plant and vehicles available in the market
Proper maintenance of equipment, machinery, plant and vehicles
Installation of machinery with correct foundations to reduce to vibration
Enclosing the noisy equipment
Providing noise attenuation screens, wherever required
Proper planning of the working hours (noise generating activities scheduled for the middle of the day)
1103.5 Flora and fauna
Construction of road, bridges, buildings and other structures may impact flora and fauna. The degree
of the impact varies based on the location, scope and size of the project. Some of the impacts that occur
are:
Cutting of trees
Damage to the aquatic life
Damage to the fauna
Damage to national parks, wild life sanctuaries and reserve forests
Impacts on National Parks
Damage to Biosphere Reserves
Damage to the mangroves
With assessment of the nature and scale of impacts on flora and fauna, required preventive or
mitigation measures can be addressed during the planning and design stage. The damage to the
biological environment can be prevented or reduced with the implementation of preventive or mitigation
measures designed during the planning and design stage. Some of the common mitigation measures are:

91
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Saving the trees as far as possible with proper design and alignment changes and selection of location
of the project
With proper work planning during execution for the reduction of disturbance to the aquatic
life Providing proper animal crossings, water crossings, fencing and traffic control measures
Planting tree saplings by (i) providing temporary protective barrier around existing trees for
protection during construction works, and (ii) not placing equipment or excavate within 2 metres of
a tree.
1103.6. Cultural Environment
There may be some impacts on the cultural environment due to the infrastructure project during
the pre construction and construction stages. The impact varies from loss of the part of the property to
the total property.
The negative impact on the cultural environment can be prevented by changing the location of the
project and/mitigated by the relocating or modifying the affected structure. An important aspect here is
the timely and open communication with the property owners and community by: Speaking to the local
representatives.
Placing a sign in a prominent position.
Providing a newsletter to affected people.
1104. Environmental Regulations (National, State and Local)
The various prevailing environmental acts and rules relevant to the PWD activities are listed
here. This includes National Acts & Rules administered by the Ministry of Environment & Forests, other
National legislation that are relevant and State Acts & Rules.
1104.1. National Level Acts
The following National Legislations are in force in Kerala
The Environmental (Protection) Act, 1986 and the Environmental Impact Assessment Notification,
2006 The Water and Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act The Public Liability Insurance Act,
1991
National Environment Tribunal Act, 1995
The National Environment Appellate Authority Act, 1997
The Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980
The Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972
The Biological Diversity Act, 2002
Declaring Coastal Stretches as Coastal Regulation Zone (CRZ) and Regulating Activities in the
CRZ. The Motor Vehicles Act, 1988
The Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Sites and Remains Act, 1958
The Building and Other Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Service) Act 1996 In
Appendix 1200.1, a brief description of these Acts as well as their implementing agency has been provided.
1104.2. Other National legislations to be followed
In addition to the above detailed legislations, the rules and conditions of the following Acts/
Legislations have to be followed
Explosives Act, 1884 and Explosive Rules, 1983:
Petroleum Act, 1934 and Petroleum Rules, 2002:
The Mines and Minerals (Regulations and Development) Act, 1957 and rules there under.
In Appendix1100.1, a brief description of these Acts & Rules as well as their implementing agency has
been provided.
1104.3. State level Legislation and other Acts
The additional legislations, which are to be followed in Kerala, are as follows:
Kerala Forest Act and its amendments
Kerala Forest Rules
Kerala Private Forests (Vesting and Assignment) Act
Kerala Forest (Vesting & Management of Ecologically Fragile Lands) Act & Rules.
Government Order – Kerala Forest (Vesting & Managem ent of Ecologically Fragile Lands) Rules –
Constitution of Tribunal
Kerala Preservation of Trees Act

92
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Kerala Forest Produce Transit Rules

Kerala Restriction on Cutting and Destruction of Valuable Trees Rules.
Forest Settlement Rules
Kerala Captive Elephants (Management and Maintenance)
Kerala Coastal Zone Management Authority
In the particular context of the various PWD activities, the provisions of these legislations should be
kept in mind for their relevance in the context of each works / projects that are being proposed for
implementation.

1105. Organizations implementing environmental regulations

Strict enforcement of the environmental regulations, legislation, policy guidelines may impact
the project, as many Government agencies are responsible for issuing of permissions and monitoring of
implementation of compliances to the conditions of the permissions issued. The following agencies
would play important roles in the case of projects.
1105.1. Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF)
MoEF is the nodal agency in the administrative structure of the Central Government, for the
planning, promotion, co-ordination and overseeing the implementation of environmental and forestry
programmes. The principal activities undertaken by Ministry of Environment & Forests, consist of
conservation and survey of flora, fauna, forests and wildlife, prevention & control of pollution,
afforestation and regeneration of degraded areas and protection of environment, in the framework of
legislations.
MoEF has set up regional offices. The regional office for the State of Kerala is located at
Bangalore in the neighboring state of Karnataka. This office is responsible for collection and furnishing
of information relating to EIA of projects, pollution control measures, methodology and status, legal and
enforcement measures and environmental protection in special conservation areas such as national parks,
sanctuaries, wetlands, and mangroves.
1105.2. Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB)
CPCB is a statutory authority attached to the MoEF and located in New Delhi. The main functions
include the following:
Advise the Central Government on any matter concerning prevention and control of water and air
pollution,
Plan and execute a nation-wide programme for the prevention, control or abatement of water and air
pollution;
Co-ordinate the activities of the State Board and resolve disputes among
them; Provide technical assistance and guidance to the State Boards;
Plan and organise training of persons engaged in programme on the prevention, control or abatement of
water and air pollution;
Organise through mass media, a comprehensive mass awareness programme on the prevention, control
or abatement of water and air pollution;
Collect, compile and publish technical and statistical data relating to water and air
pollution; Lay down, modify or annul emissions and air / water quality standards, Prepare
Manuals, Codes and guidelines, and
Disseminate information.
1105.3. Kerala State Pollution Control Board (KSPCB)
Established in 1974 (renamed to its present name in 1984), KSPCB is entrusted with the
implementation of the Water Act, Water Cess Act, Air Act, Public Liability Insurance Act, Environment
(Protection) Act and various rules and notifications under the same.
Working under the Department of Health & Family Welfare of the Government of Kerala,
KSPCB has its head office at Thiruvananthapuram, regional offices at Ernakulam and Kozhikode,
district offices at Thiruvananthapuram, Kollam, Pathanamthitta, Alappuzha, Kottayam, Thrissur,
Palakkad, Malappuram and Kannur. KSPCB also has a central laboratory at Ernakulam and there are
laboratories attached to all the field offices.
1105.4. State Department of Science, Technology & Environment

93
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

In relation to environmental matters, this State Department performs the functions similar to the
MoEF at the state level. MoEF has delegated certain functions to the State DoE to oversee. For instance,
establishing and ensuring adherence to the State Coastal Zone Management Plan (CZMP), which is in line
with the CRZ Notification, 1991, is a function of the State DoE. The DoE houses the Coastal Zone
Management Authority, which provides the CRZ clearance after verifying that it is in line with the CZMP.
1105.5 Kerala State Forest Department
The Kerala State Forest Department is responsible for the protection and managing the notified
forests and associated wildlife within the state. The Department is headed by a Principal Chief Conservator of
Forests, and is supported by Chief Conservator of Forests responsible for its various functions. For general
administration there are Forest Circles headed by Conservators, under their jurisdiction forest Divisions
controlled by Divisional Forest Officers. Each Division is further sub divided by basic units – Forest Ranges
manned by Forest Rangers reporting to the Divisional Forest Officers.
1106. Environmental and other related clearances
Various environmental, labour and other departmental permissions may be required for the
PWD activities prior to implementation. An indicative list of clearances and the responsible department
/ board are included in the following table.

S. No Clearance Department/ Board

1. Environmental Clearance MoEF/ State Department of Science, Technology &
Environment / State Pollution Control Board
2. Forestry Clearance Central/ State Forest Department
3. Consent For Establishment and Consent for Kerala State Pollution Control Board
Operation of Construction Plants
4. Permission for withdrawal of ground water Central Ground Water Board/ Authority
from the regulatory zones
5. Permission for taking surface water Irrigation Department
6. Labour licence State Labour Department
7. License for Setting up of Diesel Pumps Department of Explosives
8. Registration of Workers Kerala State Construction Workers Welfare Board
9. Permission for opening of new quarries for Department of Mining and Geology
aggregates
10. PUC Certificate for Vehicles and Machinery Road Transport Department

11. Permission for setting up of labour camps Local Health Departments and Local Body

Based on the works / projects being done, PWD needs to ensure that the necessary clearances are
obtained prior to implementation and the clearance conditions are complied with during implementation.
1106.1 Regular works / projects – Standard EMP
In the regular works / projects of the PWD, the environmental issues need to be properly and
effectively managed. In principle, PWD needs to ensure the following in all its regular works / projects:
Avoid or minimize tree cutting as far as possible; if tree cutting is unavoidable, make plans for
compensatory plantation,
Protect the state eco-sensitive areas such as national parks, wildlife sanctuaries, reserve forests and
coastal zones,
Reduce litter, sediment and pollutants entering waterways and the land,
Reduce noise, vibration and air emissions,
Minimise waste and dispose of it appropriately,
Use resources efficiently and reduce energy & material consumption,
Provide the safety of workers, road users and those in the neighbourhood,
Provide safe, clean and hygiene labour camps, if these are required,
Keep people affected by the construction activities regularly informed.
To operationalise these activities, a standard EMP (Appendix 1100.2) shall form a part of the PWD
standard bid documents / contract agreements and shall be adhered to by the contractor who executes

94
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

the work. PWD shall strive to ensure that the contractor’s activities deliver quality construction without
compromising on environmental performance. The standard EMP applies to the activities in
construction site and ancillary activities such as the transportation of materials, sourcing of material and
borrow areas. The contractor is responsible for ensuring all sub-contractors and any other people
working on the project are aware of environmental issues and are in compliance to the EMP
requirements.
In addition to the standard EMP, there are additional guidance documents such as (i) Guidance on
Oxbow lands – Appendix 1100.3, (ii) Guidance on qua rry and borrow area management – Appendix
1100.4, (iii) Guidance on Landscaping & Tree Species – Appendix 1100.5 and (iv) Guidance for Public
Consultations – Appendix 1100.6. Wherever applicabl e, the PWD shall ensure that these guidance
documents are used and measures are in practice. PWD shall provide cross-references to these guidance
documents in the standard bid documents / contract agreements as required.
In the context of the regular works / projects, PWD shall review the standard EMP and other
guidance documents in order to determine whether additional Bill-of-Quantities (BOQ) items are
necessary to achieve good environmental performance. If required, PWD shall ensure that these
additional BOQ items are included in the standard bid documents / contract agreements.
Documentary evidence shall be available to demonstrate compliance with the standard EMP. This
can include periodic progress reports, file notes, audit reports, photographs, and minutes of meetings or
video. The contractor shall retain them in safekeeping for perusal by the PWD.
Failure to reasonably satisfy and comply with the standard EMP requirements may result in the
contractor receiving partial payment against the contract claims and also a noting in the contractor’s
performance certificate.
1107. Conducting Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) & preparing
Environmental Management Plans (EMP) where required
For certain works / projects, separate environmental impact assessments have to be conducted.
This may be due to the MoEF requirements or funding agency – such as the World Bank or Asian
Development Bank – requirements. This may also be d ue to the possible impacts on eco-sensitive areas
or due to the large scale environmental impacts across the state. In all such cases, separate
environmental impact assessments (EIAs) will be conducted and relevant environmental management
plans (EMPs) will be prepared.

EIA is an accepted planning tool, which is integral to project decision-making. The objective of
EIA is to foresee the potential environmental problems that would arise out of a proposed development
and address them in the project's planning and design stage. EIA integrates the environmental concerns
of the project activities right at the time of initiating for preparing the feasibility report. With this
process, the environmental concerns and mitigation measures can be integrated in project development.
The stages in a typical EIA are as follows:

Screening Screening is done to see whether a project requires environmental clearance as per the
statutory notifications.
Scoping Scoping is a process of detailing the terms of reference of EIA.
Baseline Data Baseline data describes the existing environmental status of the identified study area. The
Collection site-specific primary data shall be monitored for the identified parameters and
supplemented by secondary data if available.
Impact Impact prediction is a way of ‘mapping’ the environ mental consequences of the
Prediction significant aspects of the project and its alternatives. Environmental impact can never be
predicted with absolute certainty and there is all the more reason to consider all possible
factors and take all possible precautions for reducing the degree of uncertainty
Assessment of Possible alternatives shall be identified and environmental attributes compared.
Alternatives, Alternatives shall cover both project location and process technologies. Alternatives shall
Delineation of consider ‘no project’ option also. Alternatives s hall then be ranked for selection of the
Mitigation best environmental option for optimum economic benefits to the community at large.
Measures and Once alternatives have been reviewed, a mitigation plan shall be drawn up for the

95
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental selected option and is supplemented with an EMP for the implementation. The EMP is a
Impact crucial input to monitoring the clearance conditions and therefore details of monitoring
Assessment shall be included in the EMP.
Report An EIA report shall provide clear information to the decision-maker on the different
environmental scenarios without the project, with the project and with project
alternatives. Uncertainties shall be clearly reflected in the EIA report.
Public Hearing Law requires that the public must be informed and consulted on a proposed development
after the completion of EIA report.
Decision Decision- making process involve consultation between the project proponent (assisted
Making by a consultant) and the impact assessment authority (assisted by an expert group if
necessary)
Monitoring of Monitoring shall be done during both construction and operation phases of a project.
the Clearance
Conditions

Conducting EIAs and preparing EMPs are studies that are done by external consultants on
behalf of the PWD. Taking into account the particular context of these works / projects, the PWD shall
prepare terms of reference for conducting the EIAs and preparing the EMPs. PWD shall refer to the EIA
Notification 2006 for information on various aspects of conducting EIAs, its knowledge of the state and
the dimensions of the proposed works / projects in preparing the terms of reference. The external
consultants will be selected using the Government procurement procedures. Once mobilized, the
external consultants conduct the studies and prepare reports that are to be reviewed and accepted by the
PWD. Based on the report outcomes, the project planning and design shall be changed so that the
environmental impacts are minimized.
EMP is a project specific plan with the following contents:
Table of preventive, mitigation and compensation measures (collectively referred as “management
measures”) for all identified significant impacts a t the pre-construction, construction and operational
stages of the project; Guidance for preparing the management measures is included in Appendix 1100.7.
Organizational arrangements, training and capacity-building initiatives required to implement the
management measures, and
Work program, time schedule and budgetary estimates.
An EMP may include construction safety management plans for high-risk events or events with
potential for significant environmental damage such as fires, fuel spills or explosions.
In preparing the EMP, the PWD shall advise the consultants to refer to the Guidance for preparing
project-specific EMPs (Appendix 1100.7) for major projects. This includes a typical table of
management measures that need to be considered. In addition to the Guidance on preparing project-
specific EMPs, there are other guidance documents such as (i) Guidance on Oxbow lands – Appendix
1100.3, (ii) Guidance on quarry and borrow area management – App endix 1100.4, (iii) Guidance on
Landscaping & Tree Species – Appendix 1100.5 and (iv) Guidance fo r Public Consultations –
Appendix 1100.6. PWD shall provide cross-references to these guidance documents in the project-
specific EMPs and standard bid documents / contract agreements as required.
In the context of these works / projects, PWD – wit h support from the external consultants - shall
necessarily review the project-specific EMP in order to determine whether additional BOQ items are
necessary to achieve good environmental performance. If these are required, then PWD shall make sure
that BOQ items are included in the bid / contract documents.
Like other civil works, the project-specific EMP shall form a part of the contract agreement and shall
be implemented by the contractor. Supervision of project-specific EMP implementation can be carried
out by the PWD or given to Supervision Consultants (SC) based on the PWD capacity and the scale of
the project. The contractor has to prepare his schedule for the physical implementation of the project-
specific EMP and take periodic consent of the supervision authority as stipulated in the project-specific
EMP. PWD has to ensure that the contractor obtains the necessary environmental clearances and also
adheres to the project-specific EMP requirements through the pre-construction and construction stages.

96
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

After the construction stage is completed, the project-specific EMP will include activities during
the operational phase. PWD shall ensure that these activities and ensure that the project-specific EMP
is complied throughout the project cycle.
1108. Environmental management training & capacity-building
PWD will ensure that the induction and refresher training programmes cover environmental
management as well. PWD’s Environmental Cell shall develop, establish and maintain training modules
on a variety of environmental subjects that will include the following:
General awareness module on environmental issues in construction of roads, bridges and buildings;
Skill training on effective environmental planning and designing of roads. This will include issues such
as avoidance of eco-sensitive areas, minimizing tree-cutting through proper choice of alignment,
arranging for compensatory plantation,
Skill training on good environmental practices in construction camp management. This will include top
soil storage, hot mix plant operation, WMM plant operation, and concrete batching plant operation,
diesel dispensing station operation, labour camp management, workshop maintenance, waste
management, and general housekeeping.
Skill training on good environmental practices in quarry and borrow management.
Skill training on managing tree cutting, transplantation, compensatory tree plantation and
their maintenance, landscaping and oxbow land development.
Skill training on environmental management tools such as EIA, EMP, public / stakeholder consultations
and environmental auditing.
Awareness training on environmental laws and their relevance to PWD activities.
PWD shall also identify staff within the Department who have the background or aptitude or interest
or flair for environmental management issues, and develop them as trainers on environmental
management issues. PWD shall organize specific train-the-trainer programmes for them, and also equip
them with the required skills & facilities to effectively conduct training for other PWD staff.

PWD shall also periodically send its staff to training programmes on environmental management
nationally and internationally.

SECTION 1200
1201. Social Impact Management
1202. Social Impact Assessment
Social impacts of development projects will have both positive and negative effects on
individuals, households and the local community in particular and the society in general. Social impacts
of development projects vary depending on the size and type of projects settings and the characteristics
of the community affected. These may include potential changes to population, lifestyle, cultural
traditions, community dynamics, and quality of life and well-being. Involuntary displacement induced
by development projects has extreme social impacts, which in many cases warrant detailed and specific
study leading to resettlement.
PWD recognizes the need to assess the potential social impacts of the projects and is committed
towards responsible management of the same. These guidelines have been developed to assist Public
Works Department officers in the management of social issues in planning and execution of its project.
The purpose of these guidelines is to
• Demonstrate and explain the process used in PWD to manage and protect the social values
• Provide guidance to PWD in managing social issues throughout the life cycle of the project
• Ensure transparency, predictability and accountability in its confirmation of social considerations.
These guidelines are applicable to all PWD projects and programmes related to the planning, design,
construction and maintenance of road and buildings.
1202.1. Social issues and counter measures
Rehabilitation of roads as such may not cause significant adverse impacts but their upgrading
(which involves widening of existing roads, construction of new roads/bypasses, realignments and
junction improvement etc.) would entail acquisition of land and structures as well as adverse impacts on

97
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

other assets, causing disruption of livelihood. Besides, it is likely that some Common Property
Resources (CPRs) such as religious structures, passenger shelters at bus stops; hand pumps etc. may
also be adversely affected.
Close examination of the social impacts of a project during the planning phase can enable such
impacts to be avoided or minimised and suitable counter measures included in the project design. The
extent of Social Impact Assessment necessary for the project will depend upon the type and size of the
project and the size of the nature and scale of the potential impacts.
An R&R policy has been developed for PWD projects which is provided in annexure 1302A

Issues Measures When to

Address
Acquisition of land and assets resulting in Conduct Social Impact Assessment of
families being displaced or loss of affected community (ies) – access to
livelihood causing discomfort. Stirring houses, business, and farmlands
agitations and results in road blocks by affected and consider options for
locals. This gives negative impression of relocation, improvement, P D
the project to local community, mistrust compensation.
and lack of confidence arises which
delays the project due to numerous
reasons
Assess community facilities affected
P D
e.g., bus stop, playfield, water points
Develop time bound resettlement and
P D
rehabilitation action plan
Minimize disruption to social
P D C
economic interaction
Maximize potential benefit of
P D C
development project
Severance of access roads to private or Access roads are retained or approved
D C
community properties,

PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Destruction of social and cultural sites Conduct survey of sites of social or
which have sentimental attachment or cultural significance
P D
historical significance to the local
community
Design project to minimize impact on
D C
sites of social/cultural significance
Ensure constructionworksare
managed to minimize/avoid impacts D C
on identified sites
Development of cultural heritage sites
D C
for promoting tourism
Loss of well being and amenity from Construction planning to manage and
construction activities, prolonged delays minimize identified impacts
D C
to construction or lack of information
provided
Public meetings, information bulletins
etc to keep community informed of
P D C
construction program and identify and
address any issues arising

98
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Efficient construction practices D C

P- Planning Stage, D- Design, C-Construction,

1202.2. Social screening and scoping process (Categorization)

A project may be categorized into three; based on the impacted population. This exercise shall
be carried out for all projects at project investigation stage. The social screening format is provided as
Annexure 1202B
S-1: Projects are those that will affect 200 PAPs or more or if PAPs are physically displaced and
will require a detailed Social Impact Assessment Report that would include a Resettlement Action Plan.
These documents are to be submitted for approval by concerned EE and clearance by the Social Cell and
the authority concerned for administrative /technical sanction.
S-2: Projects are those in which no PAP is physically displaced or less than 200 PAPs are
affected. In this case a Social Management Plan (SMP) is required that would include an abbreviated
resettlement plan
S-3: Projects, on the other hand will not have any households affected at all i.e, they can be
classified as ‘socially benign’. However, submissio n of a Social Status Report is required.
All clearances for Technical sanctions would be accorded by social cell for all S-1 and S-2
categories after field verification/ audit of compliance with PWD R&R policy. Projects of Category-S-2
will require the same process and procedures of Category-S-1 but does not require administrative
sanction. R&R policy is applicable to all project affected and entitled persons/families and
establishments or institutions irrespective of the number of persons or families affected or displaced. The
major difference is that Category S-1 projects, because of the manpower requirement may engage
consultants to carry out the SIA and RAP. Similarly, for the implementation of the RAP of local NGOs
with expertise may be engaged.
Impact Datasheet and Budget Formats to be attached with investigation report and
Design Report is provided as Annexure 1202C and 1202D.

1202.3. SIA Process and contents

Social impacts can be defined as the consequences to people of any proposed action that changes
the way they live, work, relate to one another, organize themselves and function as individuals and
members of society. This definition includes social-psychological changes, trauma and stress changes in
people’s values, attitudes and perceptions of themselves and their community and environment, over-
crowding, infrastructure pressure, and poverty.
Social Impact Assessment (SIA) is a methodology to study the social effects of infrastructure
projects and other development interventions using special tools to determine the social outputs,
outcomes, or impact of an intervention program. SIA is concerned with the human consequences of
development proposals, identifying all significant social impacts that arise in this context, giving
particular attention to the mitigation of adverse or unintended aspects. All stakeholders can anticipate
benefits of the social impacts assessment:
1. Reduced impact on communities or individuals – iden tification of mitigation measures is an
integral element of SIA.
2. Enhanced benefits to those affected – SIA preparati on also helps identify measures such as job
training packages;
3. Avoiding delays and obstruction – a well prepared S IA demonstrates that social impacts are
taken seriously and helps to gain development approval;
4. Lowered costs – addressing social impacts and mitigation measures at an early stage helps to
avoid costly errors and remedial actions imposed at a later stage by regulatory agencies;
5. Better community and stakeholder relationships – ex perience has shown that SIA can help to
allay fear and concern and build a basis of trust and cooperation necessary for the proponent to
successfully introduce and operate the project; and
6. Improved proposals – an SIA provides information that adds value to existing projects and helps
to design future ones.
1203. Activities comprising Social Impact Assessment

99
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

SIA comprises most of the following activities. It:

identifies interested and affected peoples;
facilitates and coordinates the participation of stakeholders;
documents and analyses the local historical setting of the planned intervention so as to be able
to interpret responses to the intervention, and to assess cumulative impacts;
collects baseline data (social profiling) to allow evaluation and audit of the impact assessment
process and the planned intervention itself;
gives a rich picture of the local cultural context, and develops an understanding of local
community values, particularly how they relate to the planned intervention;
identifies and describes the activities which are likely to cause impacts (scoping);
predicts (or analyses) likely impacts and how different stakeholders are likely to
respond; assists evaluating and selecting alternatives (including a no development
option);
assists in site selection;
recommends mitigation measures;
assists in the valuation process and provides suggestions about compensation (non-financial as
well as financial);
describes potential conflicts between stakeholders and advises on resolution
processes; develops coping strategies for dealing with residual or non-mitigatable
impacts;
contributes to skill development and capacity building in the community;
advises on appropriate institutional and coordination arrangements for all
parties; assists in devising and implementing monitoring and management
programs.

1203.1. Key elements of the full SIA process

1203.1.1. Scoping
Scoping identifies the type of the social impacts that are likely to be expected and clarifies the
issues relevant to the project including the frames of reference; major issues; key variables to be
considered; the geographical area of most importance and other areas of likely impact; the units of
analysis and methods of measuring or determining impact; interested parties or stakeholders (including
those who have vested interests in the project or the affected community, and other groups who will
suffer any impacts from the development); and identification of community leaders and spokespersons
from the stakeholder groups. Undertaking a literature review to identify previous studies of a similar
nature to the proposed intrusion is an important step in the scoping process which should be commenced
as early as possible. Scoping is largely conceptual process undertaken by the SIA task force with
assistance from discussions with interested parties.
1203.1.2 Profiling
Profiling, sometimes considered to be part of the scoping process, involves gathering
information about the community in the pre-impact state to be provided initial estimates for input into
prediction models, and to provide baseline information with which to compare changes when they occur.
Some of this data may already exist in the form of secondary data such as census and other government
and community records, local histories, maps, newspapers and telephone directories. Otherwise, a social
survey may be required to collect this essentially quantitative data. Interviewing long term residents is
also a valuable source of information.
Attempt should be made to consider the nature of changes that are inherent in the cultural setting
and likely to effect change on the community independent of the current development project. The likely
impact of other development projects in the proximity of the current development and any cumulative
impacts should be considered.
1203.1.3 Public consultation and participation
The SIA task force would use a variety of community involvement strategies such as public
meetings and community workshops to hold public discussion of the type and nature of development in
the analysis of specific development alternatives. Undesirable alternatives are discarded, and greater

100
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

imagination can be applied to the range of possibilities available. The meetings would also determine
whether the community should support the particular project being considered. The project would still
require government approval.
1203.1.4 Mitigation, Monitoring and Management
The SIA task force by its involvement in the implementation planning of the development can
make concrete suggestions that mitigate impacts and maximize the potential benefits accruing to the
development. The actual mitigation and enhancement strategies will depend on the nature of the
development and the nature of the impacts. The major task of the SIA task force is to identify the
elements of the development that can be modified in order to reduce impacts. The impact itself is the
result of a stimulus (the aspect of the development causing the impact) and a response (the way in which
the community responds). It is possible to change or modify the nature of the community response, or its
ability to adapt to new inputs, so that potential negative impacts can become positive or beneficial
features of the development (Branch et al, 1984).
It is in mitigation that SIA is most useful, and where the science of SIA is most developed.
There are a range of possible mitigation strategies that are applicable to almost all developments, or that
are adaptable to suit the individual needs of the specific development proposal.
1203.1.5 Audit
Audit refers a review of the whole procedure of SIA as it was applied to the specific project. It is
important to review predictions and in many cases predictions could be different to outcome because
SIA has been successful in its role of mitigation and monitoring. Care needs to be placed on the
interpretation of predictions at the assessment stage, and during any audit.
1203.1.6 Engagement of consultants
SIA is an inherently local activity. External consultants should be employed, but the success of
SIA rests on a thorough understanding of the local culture and the way the culture responds to specific
intrusions. It is vital that local expertise be used in the conduct of the SIA, and that information about
each project be developed so that the lessons learnt from one SIA process can be applied to others as
well. For projects in S-1 category external consultants may be engaged for preparation of SIA.
Engagement of external consultants can also be done for conduction Audits. Services of local NGOs can
also be hired for implementation of Resettlement Action Plan and Land Acquisition Plan.
1204. Selection of' Site for Acquisition
The work requiring the land to be acquired should have been administratively sanctioned and
funds must have been provided. Unless otherwise ordered by the Government or Chief Engineer
Administration & Designs the Officer competent to issue T.S. for the work concerned shall be the
authority to make selection of site. When the P.W.D undertakes construction of buildings or other
structures for other Departments, Local bodies etc., the responsibility for selection of site shall vest with
the concerned Department or Authority, who may consult the officer of the P.W.D competent to issue
T.S. for the work regarding the technical suitability of the site before finalising the site. The officer who
selects the land is bound to see that the interest of government, the public and of private/ individuals
likely to be affected are duly considered.
With regard to ascertaining the suitability it may be necessary to conduct some preliminary
examinations, inspections or tests at site. These should be done with the consent of the owner, if he is
willing, before moving for acquisition. The help of the officers of the Revenue Department may be
sought in this regard. If, however, there is objection to these preliminary works being done, and if prima
facie, the site appears suitable and necessary the Assistant Executive Engineer may move for land
acquisition. In such cases, as soon as the notification under section 3(1) is published the necessary
surveys and tests should be done.
1205. Unforeseen impacts
Any additional impacts identified during project execution shall be dealt with in accordance with
the R&R policies. The check list of social impact shall be filled in and reported for calculation of
entitlement and disbursement.

101
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

GOVERNMENT OF KERALA

Kerala Public Works Department Manual

Revised Edition 2012

PART – II

WORK METHODOLOGY

102
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

1301. Project Preparation

1302. Introduction
All works in PWD are classified into original works and repairs & maintenance. A project report
is required for all works except emergencies, repairs and maintenance. For maintenance and repair
works, the Executive Engineer shall submit proposals for the same to the Chief Engineer through the
Superintending Engineer for consideration and approval.

Section 1400
1401. INVESTIGATION
1402. General. It is most important that every work shall be properly investigated and all relevant data
collected and correlated before finalizing the design and estimate for the work. Wrong choice of site or
designs based on incorrect or insufficient data can result in considerable avoidable expenditure and
delays. Hence maximum attention shall be given to investigation and furnishing of full and correct field
data required. Modern equipments shall be used as far as possible.
Investigation may often have to be carried out in two phases; viz. preliminary investigation and
detailed investigation. In the preliminary investigation phase, various alternative sites or alignments etc.
shall be examined and a comparative study of the merits of the different alternatives possible to serve the
purpose intended shall be made. Based on such study, the final choice of the site or alignment as well as
broad features of the proposals shall be made. The financial implication of each proposal shall be looked
into and the most economical one shall be finally recommended without sacrificing the technical
feasibility. In the detailed investigation phase, all the data required for designing the work at the site or
along the alignment finally chosen should be collected.
The Executive Engineer concerned shall decide whether the investigation shall be done by the
department or entrusted to any other agencies considering the special nature and urgency of the work.
The Assistant Engineer will be responsible to conduct the preliminary investigations through the
department investigation wing or through empanelled agencies with the approval of Executive Engineer
i.e., he will indicate the various alternatives to be considered, and the preliminary data to be collected to
enable a final choice, of site or alternate alignment. On the basis of the preliminary investigation, the
Assistant Engineer must send a report to the Executive Engineer/ authority competent to issue technical
sanction for the work, through Assistant Executive Engineer concerned, giving the comparative merits of
the different alternatives studied and his own recommendations. The authority competent to approve the
proposal shall then make a final choice of the alternatives examined, or if additional data is required, he
shall call for the same. The economic aspect shall be looked into before the final selection. After the
final choice is made, detailed investigation shall be conducted. The Design Engineer responsible for
designing the work shall also inspect the site to acquaint himself with all the site conditions if found
necessary. Wherever shifting of utility services is required the concerned department may be informed
well in advance so as to enable them to take further steps for shifting the same.
In the case of works for the use of other Departments of the State, the Executive Engineer or the
Assistant Engineer must keep the local officers of the respective Departments informed of the
investigation work being done. The opinions of the officers of the concerned Department may also be
taken into account in regard to choice of site and features required for the work. The onus for technical
details however shall be vested with the P.W.D.
The benchmarks and survey reference points shall be carefully selected and properly
established so that there is no likelihood of these being missed when the work is taken up for
execution. Wherever possible, the benchmarks may be connected to the nearest permanent Mean Sea
Level (M. S. L.) Bench Mark.
Funds for investigation shall be separately provided in the budget every year as lump sum
provision. This provision shall be utilised for expenses in connection with the investigation. The
competent authority shall approve the investigation estimate as per delegation of powers. If sub soil
exploration is found necessary, this shall be mentioned in the proposal submitted for approval.

103
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

1403. Preparation of investigation reports

Based on the site investigation conducted the Assistant Engineer shall prepare and submit the
investigation report in accordance with the provisions contained in the relevant codes and practices
(IRC/IBC etc) and the same shall be submitted to the next higher authority for further necessary action
and approval by the competent authority.
1404. Investigation for Road works
1404.1. Investigations, Design and Construction of new Pavements
The different classes of roads under PWD are National Highways (NH), State Highways (SH),
and Major District Roads (MDR). Other District Roads and Village Roads in the State are currently
under the control of LSGD.
1404.1.1 Investigations
The following Investigations are to be carried out during the planning stage, before the design and
preparation of estimates and tender documents for the construction of new road pavements, both for new
roads and for widening of existing carriageway. For more details refer (1) IRC:SP:19-2001, manual for
Survey, Investigation and Preparation of Road Projects, First Revision (2) IRC: 37-2001 Guidelines for
Design of Flexible Pavements, Second Revision (3) IRC:58-2002, Guidelines for Plain jointed Rigid
pavements for Highways, Second Revision (Indian Roads Congress Publications)
i) Topographic surveys and investigations for surface and sub-surface drainage requirements for
the new road pavements.
ii) Soil Survey, material surveys and laboratory tests (wet sieve analysis, liquid limit, plastic limit,
IS Heavy/Modified Proctor compaction test, soaked CBR test on soil and specified tests on
aggregates to be used in GSB and GB layers) to assess their properties and decision on the
choice of different pavement materials/layers, their availability and location of borrow
pits/quarries.
iii) Traffic studies, particularly classified traffic volume of all heavy vehicles.
iv) Axle load studies on heavy vehicles and evaluation wheel load distribution and design value of
cumulative standard axle loads by conducting relevant studies on 20 percent sample or by
making use of available/secondary data and assumed values of vehicle damage factors.
1404.1.2 Design and Drawings
i) Study of various underground utilities present, if any and possible future requirements.
ii) Design of sub-surface and surface drainage system.
iii) Decision on type of pavement to be adopted on the entire road and on some identified stretches
depending on site condition, problems pertaining to traffic and utility lines and cost
considerations.
iv) Design of total thickness requirement of selected type of pavement and the thickness and other
details of the pavement layers (for flexible/ICBP/CC pavement) for the particular road
stretch under consideration or a selected group of roads of identical features/characteristics.
In the case of CC pavement, the details of transverse contraction and expansion/construction
joints and longitudinal joints are also to be designed.
v) Suggesting the specifications to be adopted and special materials/conditions/instructions such as
compaction standards to be followed, equipment/machinery to be used, etc.
vi) Preparation of working drawings for each road showing all the details including drainage system,
cross drainage structures and the details of pavement layers, their levels etc.
1404.1.3 Preparation of Estimates and Tender details
The estimates, tender details and tender documents with all conditions of contract are to be prepared
in conformity with the design and drawings prepared as above.
1404.2 Investigation for the Design, Estimation and Construction of Flexible Pavement Overlay on
Existing Flexible Road Pavements
1404.2.1 Investigations
The following investigations are to be carried out during the planning stage, before the design,
preparation of estimates and tender documents for the strengthening of existing road
pavements/construction of overlay over existing road pavements. Refer IRC:81-1997. Tentative
Guidelines for strengthening of Flexible Road Pavements Using Benkelman Beam Deflection
Technique, First Revision (Indian Roads Congress Publication).
i) Basic data on existing road, such as (a) road length (b) width of carriageway,
shoulders/foot path, road side drains and if these vary at different stretches the details of
the same (c) assessment of the present condition of the drainage system including the

104
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

necessary maintenance works (d) history of the road construction and maintenance
works undertaken in the past.
ii) Topographic Survey and collection of data to obtain the details of surface and sub-surface
drainage system for the existing road, including the reduced levels of longitudinal road side
drains and cross drains up to the location for disposal of water from the road surface.
iii) Collection of details of the existing pavement layers by cutting open at least one trench
across the pavement for at least half the pavement width, from one edge up to the centre line
of the pavement, at a typical location. The trench may be about 0.3m in width and up to
depth of 0.2 below the top of sub grade level. The details to be noted are : (a) type of each
pavement layer and the thickness value (b) the condition of the existing bituminous surface
course/courses – such as whether partially or fully cracked or damaged or stripping of
bitumen has taken place, etc. (c) assessment of subgrade soil type, determination of field dry
density (d) collection of about 30 kg of soil sample for testing
(e) laboratory tests such as wet sieve analysis, liquid limit, plastic limit, IS Heavy
compaction test and soaked CBR test.
iv) Additional tests, if required on the samples of bituminous mixes from surface course
(such as bitumen extraction, bitumen content and aggregate gradation in the mix).
v) Traffic data, particularly classified traffic data of HCV (2-axle, 3-axle-rigid base, 3- and
multi axle –articulated vehicles), LCV and bus traf fic.
vi) Axle load distribution studies on classified heavy vehicles (as above)
vii) Pavement condition studies, such as : (a) pavement surface condition, indicating
details/percentage cracked area, pot holes, rutting, undulations and longitudinal profile,
cross slope, etc (b) Unevenness/Roughness index measurement by standard Bump
integrator or any other reliable method.
i) Location of various utility/service lines such as underground drainage system, water
supply pipes and various other utility services including electricity, telephone, cable
system, etc and making provision for shifting /relocation of all/some of the service lines
to edges of the road land and also ducting system to avoid road cutting across the road in
future.
viii) Measurement topographical details/longitudinal levels along the pavement as well as
longitudinal side drains and measurement of cross section levels at suitable intervals to
prepare longitudinal and cross section drawings and to work out the quantity of materials
required for profile correction.
ix) Decision regarding improvement of the subsurface / pavement drainage system for the
existing road including widened portion, if any.
x) Structural evaluation of flexible pavement by Benkelman Beam Deflection studies ad
per IRC: 81-1997.
1404.2.2 Design and drawing
i) Design of pavement overlay thickness as per IRC: 81-1997
ii) Design of overlay thickness and decision on the choice of overlay type and thickness of the
layers.
iii) Preparation of working drawings for each road showing all the details of the work to be carried
out, including treatment at existing man holes etc.

i) Preparation of estimates as per the details of design and special materials, layers etc,
ii) Preparation of estimates by considering (a) patching of pot-holes (b) patching of isolated cracked
areas (c) cutting open and refilling badly filled up trenches which continue to settle down, leading
to repeated formation of depressions or ruts-the existing pavement layer over the badly filled up
trenches to be cut and removed including 300 mm depth of sub grade soil and refilled using
cohesion-less and compacted using plate vibrator in two to three layers, and relaying of the other
pavement layers similar to the existing pavement layers and (d) profile correction of existing
pavement surface, as separate items.
iii) Preparation of tender details and special conditions in conformity with the design and estimates.
1404.2.4 Bituminous Road construction
a. The compaction of embankment/fill and sub grade adopted are as per Standard Proctor
Compaction. This has to be upgraded to IS heavy compaction as per MoRTH
specification. In fact, compaction in any granular/stabilised layer must refer to IS heavy
compaction as specified in IRC/MoRTH specifications.

105
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

b. In case of stabilization, in each case mix is to be designed separately and strictly
followed.
c. Coarse grade sub base materials as per MoRTH specification only should be used as per
wet sieve analysis.
d. For base course only WBM has been specified. For high density traffic corridors WMM or
CRM etc are more appropriate for performance and constructability. IRC/MoRTH specifies
100mm for WBM-1 (G-1) and 75 mm for WBM-II (G-II) and WBM-III (G-III).
e. The specifications for materials e.g. aggregates and bitumen are lower (less strict for
quality) than those recommended by MoRTH. For example, the water absorption,
combined flakiness and elongation index, stripping value etc are much lower in case of
aggregate, and similarly for bitumen quality.
f. Priming and tack coat specifications are very elemental without much clarity; priming
even allowing cut-back bitumen which is not allowed now except exceptional cases.
Moreover, they are specified with excessive bitumen content per unit area in comparison
with MoRTH specifications. Further, the use of pressure distributor is to be specified.
g. Seal Coat type A and B are specified.
h. DBM, SDBC, OGPC, MSS surface dressing etc are commonly used.
1404.2.5 Materials and Equipments
1404.2.5.1 Materials
The quality of materials leads to quality construction. Similarly the appropriate
equipments are required for construction of road layer as per the specifications.
i. Selection of materials shall be strictly as per IRC/MoRTH guidelines/requirements for the
specific construction specifications.
ii. There should be acceptance criteria for the materials also rather than only the quality control
of construction specification. Materials should be rejected if not found to meet acceptance
criteria.
iii. Manufacturer’s certificate shall not be considered in lieu of the tests. While contractor shall
test at the site laboratory, the District level laboratory also should test samples randomly.
iv. Use of alternate materials for various pavement layers are to be specified with details of their
construction methods etc. For example, use of fly ash and slag in embankment/fill, subgrade
and drainage layer, the demolished cement concrete for GSB layer, etc are to be promoted.
1404.2.5.2 Shoulders
Shoulder gives adequate side support to the pavement and also drains off surface water
from the carriageway to the road side drain. Where side footpath is not constructed, normally a
shoulder exists which needs appropriate construction and maintenance for proper functioning of
the road.
i. Shoulder is invariably neglected and remains without outward slope for efficient draining
of surface water. This is of utmost importance in Mumbai where the rainfall is heavy.
ii. The construction of shoulder is required to be done in layers each matching the thickness
of adjoining pavement layer using selected earth/granular material. Only after a layer of
pavement, shoulder shall be laid and compacted for same matching thickness; next
corresponding layers in pavement shall be taken up, and then the shoulder. This
procedure shall be followed upto the surface course.
iii. The material, density and compaction shall be as per the specification of sub grade, where
it is earthen shoulder; and the required cross-fall should be maintained.
iv. Paved shoulders should have the specification consisting of sub base, base and surfacing
courses and conforming to the relevant specifications of corresponding items for
pavement layers.
1404.2.6 Qualification of bidders
1404.2.6.1 Any contractor registered in the appropriate class in PWD can bid for the works up to
Superintending Engineers Powers of TS. Broadly there are two methods for works above TS
Powers of Superintending Engineers (1) Prequalification and (2) Post Qualification.
1404.2.6.2 Pre-Qualification
In this method initially a notice is published to invite intending bidders to express their interest in
bidding for the particular work. They are asked to furnish information on several points on the basis
of which screening is to be done. Tender forms are issued only to those contractors who pass the
selection criteria. In this system, the number and identify of tenderers who can bid gets frozen at the
outset. Thereafter, the bids of all the bidders have to be opened and the work awarded straightaway to
the lowest responsive bidder since every bidder is already screened. Sometimes, this system is not
favored because it consumes a lot of time because of two notice periods once

106
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

for pre-qualification and then again for the bid proper and also each bidder knows who the other
bidders are. It is also seen sometimes that an unworthy entity finds a place in the prequalified
list. Proponents of the system, however, say that bidders chosen being entities of great stature
there is no fear of a cartel being formed.
1404.2.6.3 Post Qualification
In this system the qualification criteria are set and put in the bid documents. The bidders are
asked to supply detailed information on these criteria. The bids will be opened and bid of the
lowest quoted bidder will be evaluated on the basis of such information. The employer will
evaluate and compare only Bids determined to be substantially responsive. A substantially
responsive bid is one which confirms to all terms, conditions, and specification of the bidding
documents. The employer will award the contract to the Bidder whose bid has been substantially
responsive to the bidding documents and who has offered lowest evaluated bid price.
In this system no bidder knows in advance as to who the other bidders are since any one can put
in a bid at the last minute. However, the downside is that every bidder has to incur expenditure
and effort to prepare a detailed bid whether he is going to qualify or not.
1404.2.6.4 Qualification Criteria
Refer SBD for works costing above TS Powers of Superintending Engineers.
1404.3. Road Alignment Considerations
The location or layout of the centreline of the road on the ground is called alignment. The
alignment of road shall be decided only after conducting proper surveys and investigation. The
horizontal alignment includes straight paths, horizontal deviations and curves. Changes in gradient and
vertical curves are covered under vertical alignment of road.
In general, new roads will have to follow the existing cart tracks and other such existing
alignments. The provisions of IRC SP 19 and IRC SP 48 shall be followed.
The ideal alignment between two points shall satisfy the requirement as given under:
i. Short: It is desirable to have a short (or shortest) alignment between two terminal stations. A
straight alignment would be shortest, though there may be several practical considerations, which
would require deviations from the shortest path.
ii. Easy: The alignment shall be such that it is easy to construct and maintain the road with minimum
subsequent problems. Also, the alignment shall be easy for the operation of vehicle with easy
gradients and curves.
iii. Safe: The alignment shall be safe enough for construction and maintenance from the viewpoint of
stability of natural hill slopes, embankment and cut slope and foundation of embankment. Also, it
shall be safe for the traffic operation in terms of safe geometric features.
iv. Economical: The road alignment would be considered economical only if the total cost including
initial cost, maintenance cost and operational costs, is the lowest.
v. Sound: The alignment shall be on the firm ground and shall not be susceptible to large settlement,
deformation, landslide, etc.
vi. Aesthetics: While selecting the alignment, the aesthetics of the area shall be borne in mind.
vii. Environment: The alignment shall be decided giving consideration to environment protection,
particularly in echo sensitive hill, forest areas and coastal zone areas. Tree cutting shall be avoided
as far as possible while finalising the road alignment. Further details regarding environment aspect
are provided in section 1100 (Appendix).
viii. Social: Land acquisition and displacement shall be kept minimum

1404.4.4. Factors Controlling Alignment

The various factors, which control the road alignment, may be listed as:
a) Obligatory points: These are control points governing the alignment of the roads. These control
points may be divided broadly into two categories:
Points through which the alignment is to pass
Points which the, alignment shall avoid.
Obligatory points through which the road alignment has to pass may cause the alignment to
often deviate from the shortest path. The various examples of this category may be a bridge site,
intermediate town, a mountainous pass or a quarry.
b) Traffic: In most of the cases, the people use certain routes traditionally. These may either be due to
convenience, social connection with other areas, etc. The proposed alignment shall keep in view this
traffic flow pattern. At the same time one shall also have a fair judgement of future trends in mind.

107
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

c) Geometric designs: Geometric design factors, such as, gradient, radius of curve and sight distance
would also govern the final alignment of the road. As far as possible, steep gradient shall be avoided and
limited to the ruling or design gradient. Thus, it may be necessary to change the alignment in view of the
design, speed and maximum allowable super-elevation. It may be necessary to make adjustments in the
horizontal alignment of roads keeping in view the minimum radius of curve.
The absolute minimum sight distance, which shall invariably be available in every section of the road, is
the safe stopping distance for the fast moving vehicles. Also, there shall be enough distance visible
ahead for safe overtaking operations of vehicles. Hence, the alignment shall be finalised in such a way
that the obstructions to visibility do not cause restrictions to the sight distance requirements.
d) Economy: The alignment finalised based on the above factors shall also be economical. Avoiding
high banking, deep cutting, major crossing and balancing of the cuts and fills can decrease initial cost of
construction. At the same time, care shall be taken to see that it is not likely to involve costly
maintenance and operational expenses. The vehicle operating costs may be given due consideration
while designing the alignment.
e) Drainage and Other considerations:
Various other factors that may govern the alignment are drainage considerations, hydrological
factors, social obligations, etc. The vertical alignment (particularly the gradient and change of grade) is
often guided by drainage considerations. The sub-surface water level, seepage flow and high flood level
are also the factors to be kept in view.
f) Special Consideration for Hill Roads
For selection of road alignment in hilly area, reference may be made to Hill Roads Manual (IRC:
SP: 48). In hill roads, additional care has to be taken for ecological considerations, such as:
(i) Stability against geological disturbances
(ii) Land degradation and soil erosion
(iii) Destruction and denudation of forest
(iv) Interruption and disturbance to drainage system
(v) Aesthetic considerations
(vi) Siltation of water reservoirs
1404.5. Surveys
Final location of the alignment is based on ground verification, and therefore, the engineering
surveys are to be carried out. The surveys may be completed in four stages as below:
(i) Reconnaissance
(ii) Preliminary Survey
(iii) Determination of Final Centre Line
(iv) Final Location and Detailed Survey
To facilitate the survey team in the tentative selection of alternative alignments for subsequent
detailed ground reconnaissance, it will be advisable to make use of modem techniques like, aerial
survey, photogrammetry and remote sensing.
1404.5.1. Reconnaissance Survey:
Keeping in view the obligatory points the next step will be to undertake reconnaissance survey
in the following sequence:
Study of topographical survey sheets, revenue maps, geological and meteorological maps, and
aerial photographs or GIS maps where available
Preliminary aerial survey/ satellite imagery reconnaissance (as against Aerial Photographs), where
practicable and feasible.
Ground reconnaissance
Final reconnaissance of inaccessible and difficult stretches
1404.5.2. Preliminary survey:
The preliminary survey is a relatively large scale instrument survey conducted for the purpose of
collecting all the physical information which affects the proposed location of a new highway or
improvements to an existing highway preliminary surveys include census surveys, traffic surveys, soil
and material surveys, topographic surveys and drainage studies.

108
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

The main objectives of the preliminary survey are:

(i) To survey the various alternative alignments proposed after the reconnaissance and to collect all
the necessary details of topography, drainage and soil.
(ii) To compare the different proposals in view of the requirements of a good alignment.
(iii) To estimate the quantity of earthwork, materials and other construction aspects and to work out
the tentative costs of alternate alignments.
(iv) To finalise the best alignment from all considerations.
The survey procedure and map preparation is explained in IRC SP 19.
1404.5.3. Determination of final centre line:
Making use of the maps from preliminary survey showing the longitudinal profile, cross-sections
and contours, a few alternative alignments for the final centre line of the road are drawn and studied and
the best one satisfying the engineering, aesthetic, environmental, social and economic requirements is
selected. Horizontal curves are designed and the final centre line is marked on the map. The vertical
curves are designed and the profile is then determined.
1404.5.4. Final location and detailed survey:
The alignment finalised after the preliminary surveys is to be translated on the ground by
establishing the centre line. The line to be established in the field shall follow as closely as practicable
the line finalised after the preliminary survey and conforming to the major and minor control points
established and the geometric design standards. However, modifications in the final location may be
made in the field if necessary.
1404.5.5 Preparation of investigation report
For preliminary project report and DPR preparation of road projects of National Highways, State
Highways and MDR, provisions and guidelines contained in IRC SP 19 and other IRC codes, shall be
followed. Preparation of social impact assessment using the instrument and check list given in Annexure
1202C.
1405. Investigation for Bridges
The investigation for bridges shall be done as per the IRC SP 54 and IRC Codes named in
Section (Appendices).1512, Bridges on State Highways, Major District Roads and Other District Roads,
shall be designed at the design wing as far as possible.
1405.1. Selection of sites
Adequate efforts made in selection of a good site for locating a bridge will be amply rewarded in
the form of reduced cost of the project and trouble free performance of the bridge. The cardinal
principles to be kept in view at the time of selection of a particular bridge site including river training
works are to provide a suitable crossing consistent with safety and economy and acceptable detour from
the existing road alignment.
1405.1.1. Factors deciding site selection:
The site of a bridge shall be carefully selected after considering the following points: -
1405.1.2. Presence of high and stable banks:
The presence of high non-erodable banks generally offers an ideal site, which reduces the cost
of approach embankments and their protection works.
1405.1.3. Narrowness of the channel and large average depth compared to maximum depth:
This ensures large average depth of flow compared to maximum depth of flow and reduced
waterway, which greatly reduces the overall cost of the bridge structure.
1405.1.4. Presence of good founding strata at shallow depth:
A site, which requires a shallow foundation, shall be preferred to one, which may require a
deep foundation.

109
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

1405.1.5. Straight reach of the river u/s and d/s of the proposed site:
The course of river or stream over which the bridge is constructed shall have a straight reach
for at least 100 metres on either side of the proposed crossing. Straightness of the reach both u/s and d/s
ensures uniform distribution of discharge/velocity. Curvature in the stream especially on the u/s leads to
obliquity and concentration of the flow on the convex side leading to higher scour, and consequent cost
of foundation and protection works. If the bank on the convex side is erodable, it may lead to heavy
recurring expenditure in protecting the abutments and the embankment on that side.
1405.1.6. Possibility of right angled crossing:
Right angled crossing offers minimum possible bridge length and reduces chances of obliquity
of flow with respect to the substructure.
1405.1.7. Possibility of good approach alignment:
Curves except gentle one are preferably to be avoided on approaches and bridge proper from visibility
and safety considerations. The approaches on both sides shall have a minimum straight reach of 15m for
major bridges and 10m for minor bridges. Also steep gradients shall be avoided on approaches.
1405.1.8. Where existing two-lane highway is proposed for widening to four-lane:
The additional two-lane bridge shall be sited as close to the existing bridge as possible. However,
in case of bridges having well foundations, distance sufficient for generation of passive resistance of soil
shall be provided.
Although it may not be feasible to satisfy all desirable attributes simultaneously, the selected site
shall represent the most desirable mix of the attributes consistent with overall economy, including the
cost of approaches. Sometimes more than one site may have to be examined at the preliminary stage and
comparisons made regarding cost and relative advantages and disadvantages. Based on such study, the
final choice of site shall be made.
1406. Investigation for Major and Minor Bridges
Investigation for Major and Minor Bridges shall be done as per the provisions in IRC SP 54
1406.1. Sub-surface investigation:
The objective of sub-surface exploration is to determine the suitability of the soil or rock,
for the foundation of bridges. The sub-surface investigation for bridges is carried out in two
stages, namely, preliminary and detailed. Sometimes, it may require additional/confirmatory
exploration during construction stage.
Guidance may be taken from the following:
(i) IS1892 – Code of Practice for Site Investigation fo r Foundations may be utilized for guidance
regarding investigation and collection of data.
(ii) Test on soils shall be conducted in accordance with relevant parts of IS: 2720 – Methods of Test for
Soils. The tests on undisturbed samples to be conducted as far as possible at simulated field
conditions to get realistic values.
(iii) IS: 1498 – Classification and Identification of soi ls for general engineering purposes.
1406.2. Preliminary Investigation:
Preliminary investigation shall include the study of existing geological information, previous site
reports, geological maps, etc. and surface geological examination. These will help to narrow down the
number of sites under consideration and also to locate the most desirable location for detailed sub-
surface investigation. If the bridge site is pre-determined due to other reasons, the preliminary
investigation is not necessary and shall straight away conduct the detailed investigation.
1406.3. Detailed Investigation:
Based on data obtained after preliminary investigations, the bridge site, the type of structure with span
arrangement and the location and type of foundations, the programme of detailed investigations, etc. shall be
tentatively decided in consultation with the Chief Engineer. If preliminary investigation is not conducted, the
Assistant Engineer shall decide a suitable interval, not greater than 20 metres along the alignment for taking
trial pits/bore holes. The exploration shall cover the entire length of the bridge and

110
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

also at either end a distance of zone of influence, i.e., about twice the depth below bed of the last main
foundation to assess the effect of the approach embankment on the end foundations. Generally, the sub-
surface investigations shall extend to a depth below the anticipated founding level equal to about one
and a half times the width of the foundation. However, where such investigations end in any unsuitable
or questionable foundation material, the exploration shall be extended to a sufficient depth into firm and
stable soils or rock.
1406.4. Preparation and Submission of Investigation Report
The abstract of the investigation details and design data shall be prepared as per the provisions in section
1403 and IRC SP 13 and IRC SP 54. The competent authority shall forward the report to the Chief Engineer
Administration & Designs after verifying and making suitable modifications required, if any.
1407. Investigation for Buildings
1407.1. General
In areas which have already been developed, advantage shall be taken of existing local
knowledge, records of trail pits, bore holes, etc, in the vicinity, and the behaviour of existing structures,
particularly those of similar nature to those proposed. If the existing information is not sufficient or
inconclusive, the site shall be explored in detail so as to obtain knowledge of the type, uniformity,
consistency, thickness, sequence and dip of strata and of the ground water conditions.
1407.2. Selection of site;
The Chief Architect & Chief Engineer (Buildings) shall approve the site for any Government
building.
Wherever master plans for town or country development have been prepared or are under
preparation the District Town Planner or the Development Authority having jurisdiction over the area
may also be consulted before finalising the selection of site.
In selecting a site the following desirable features shall be kept in view.
(a) The neighbourhood must be suitable for the purpose for which the building is to be constructed.
(b) The site must be easily accessible from the main roads and important institutions.
(c) As far as possible other buildings of no consequence in the locality shall such that the building
constructed in it is not hide the site.
(d) The site must be fairly level or gently undulating without steep slopes, rock out-crops,
abandoned laterite or rock quarry pits etc.
(e) The site must not be subjected to water logging and shall be capable of easy drainage.
(f) The subsoil shall be hard enough to provide good foundation at reasonable depth.
(g) It shall be possible to locate sources of drinking water for use of the occupants either at the site
or within reasonable distance there from:
(h) The site shall have good ventilation. At the same time it shall not be exposed to heavy wind
without any protection.
(i) The site shall not contain places of worship, graveyards, monuments, or any other structure or
feature of religious or sentimental value whose demolition may cause offence to any section of
the population.
(j) For building in the vicinity of airports aviation clearance may be sought.
(k) The site shall have minimum displacement of residences and livelihood
If more than one site is available, the relative merits of the several sites shall be examined
before a final choice is made.
1408. Investigation and field data to be furnished
Wherever available, previous investigation reports may be utilised as also the local knowledge.
Reference may be made to geological and agricultural soil maps if available. Where these are
inconclusive, site exploration may be required. Refer IS 4453: 1980 code for site exploration.
There shall be an index map showing the site in relation to the nearest public road, railway line
and important institutions in the neighbourhood. The index plan may be a tracing from the village map
or town map or a good sketch containing the information required.
A detailed site map may be prepared showing the boundaries and ground features as well as
structures if any, trees of more than one metre girth, abandoned laterite quarries wells etc. It shall also

111
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

show portions of adjacent property, and structures if any, abutting or close to the site. Spot levels shall
be taken throughout the site so that contours at 1-metre intervals can be plotted. The existing natural
drainage courses within the property if any as well as outside shall be marked. The approach road to the
site up to where it joins any public road shall also be surveyed and marked. A few cross sections shall
also be taken at convenient intervals. The survey may be done with a plane table or chain in small areas,
and with theodolite triangulation or suitable electronics devices in larger plots. A reference line shall be
established at a suitable place in the plot. It shall be permanently fixed by means of concrete blocks at its
extremities. One or two permanent B. Ms. shall be established. The reference line and the B. Ms. shall
be marked in the site survey. The north point shall also be marked. The site survey shall be of a scale not
smaller that 1 cm = 10 m. The preliminary investigation details are forwarded to the architectural wing
for preparing layout.
A report containing information on the nature of soil and subsoil and the bearing capacity etc. shall be
submitted. The location of the trial pits and boreholes shall be marked in the site survey. It is desirable
that the Executive Engineer inspects sites where foundations are poor and indicates the number and
location and minimum depth of bore holes to be taken. It is necessary that the samples of soil obtained
from boreholes are taken and sent for examination. Where undisturbed samples are required, other
approved laboratory may be consulted. Where test piles are done to ascertain the bearing capacity, the
results shall be included the investigation data. The investigation report must also include details on the
following:
i. The subsoil water level during rainy season and dry season shall be observed and recorded.
ii. Maximum flood level expected in the locality.
iii. Direction of prevailing wind during different season.
iv. Source of water supply for construction as well as for use when the building is occupied.
v. If there is electric supply in the vicinity, the distance of the nearest point from which power supply
has to be tapped.
vi. The source from where the principal construction materials like stones, bricks, metal, lime etc. are
to be procured.
vii. Distance of building/ bridge from water front/ beach so as to be in conformity with the CRZ
regulations
viii. Present condition of existing buildings/ bridges in the vicinity with respect to corrosion induced
distress.
The investigation report is also forwarded to the design wing for detailed design.

Sections 1500
1501. STRUCTURAL DESIGN
1501.1. Layout and Structural Designs:
The competent authority as prescribed in the delegation of powers shall approve the design of any kind
of structure before the detailed estimate is prepared. The Assistant Engineer/Assistant Executive
Engineer and the Executive Engineer shall personally inspect the site and see that the proposed design
can be implemented on ground.
The Chief Engineer Administration & Designs may, if required, entrust the design to an
empanelled consultant as he deems it fit to the context. If the Chief Engineer Administration & Designs
feels that proof checking is required, he may do so either through Designs Wing or through another
approved agency. Detailed design in all such cases shall be accepted by the Chief Engineer
Administration & Designs and communicated to the authority that has referred the design. The priority
for the design work shall be fixed by the concerned Chief Engineer and communicated to the Chief
Engineer (Administration & Design).
For details regarding design methodology refer Appendix – 1500.

Section 1600
1601. ESTIMATES
1601.1. Types of Estimates
All proposals for expenditure on works and on tools and plant in the PWD should be presented in the
form of one or other of the following estimate, for scrutiny by the authority competent to sanction the
1*
same. The estimate shall be prepared using software developed by the department. The software shall
contain provision for quantity survey, data preparation with schedule of rates and local market rate,
provisions for online submission and approval of estimates and other features required. The software
shall be updated as and when required.
112
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

(a) Preliminary Estimate

(b) Detailed Estimate
(c) Recast Estimate
(d) Working Estimate
(f) Supplementary Estimate
(g) Revised Estimate
1601.1.1. Preliminary Estimate.
2*
Preliminary estimate shall be submitted for works costing up to Rs. 2.00 crore , beyond which
detailed estimate shall be submitted in order to accord administrative sanction for all works, except those
mentioned in section 1801.1.1. All plan and non plan works shall be initiated only through a preliminary
estimate. This is prepared to form a reasonably accurate idea of the probable expenditure and also the
essential features of the proposal, at a stage where the necessity or the general desirability of the works
proposed has not been decided upon by the competent authority.
Preliminary estimates for works shall be prepared by the Assistant Engineer based on site
inspection with the help of Overseer and based on Schedule of rates in force. The Assistant Engineer
shall verify the provisions and ensure that they are adequate and as per appendix 1600A before
forwarding it to his superior officer for issuing administrative sanction. In the case of buildings,
Electrical wing shall prepare Rough cost estimate for electric works and forward the same to the
concerned Executive Engineer of buildings wing for incorporating the same in the preliminary estimate.
The preliminary estimate must contain a report, giving information on all aspects of the work for
satisfactory completion, with specifications, and justification for the work. It must also include the
details of site conditions, with site plan and layout drawings.
In the case of buildings, the concerned Administrative Department may also be consulted.
Where the help of the Architect is necessary he may be approached through the Chief Engineer
Administration & Designs .Above all the preliminary estimate must be accompanied by a certificate
from the Assistant Engineer stating that “ I, the undersigned hereby c ertify that this preliminary estimate
has been prepared by me after site inspection and the provisions included are essentially required and
adequate for the proper completion of work”.
Examples of preliminary estimates in respect of a road, a bridge and a building work are
illustrated in Appendix 1600B.
The preliminary project report (PPR) for Administrative sanction should contain the
following:
1. Docket Sheet as per Appendix 1600C
2 Site plan (also a District index map)
3 Typical plans/ cross sections (standard drawings of proposed work)
4 Preliminary Estimate (as per Appendix 1600A)
5 Land Availability/ certificate
6 Certificates signed by AE (as mentioned above)
In the case of works exceeding TS powers of Superintending Engineer detailed estimate is
required for which competent authority shall approve an investigation estimate.

1601.1.2. Detailed Estimate

Detailed estimate as per a Appendix 1600D shall be submitted in order to accord Technical
1*
sanction for all works This shall be prepared after detailed investigation of the site by the concerned
authority assisted by subordinate officers and on the basis of detailed designs and specifications for the
work including source of supply and cost of different materials, cost of labour, hire charges of tools and
plant, if any etc. Proper care shall be bestowed on the preparation of a detailed estimate so that it reflects
as faithfully as possible the cost of work as can the foreseen at that time.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1*. From 2015 September onwards the cost estimate of all public works executed by all Engineering
Department are being prepared and submitted through Software, Project Information and Cost
Estimation (PRICE) developed by National Informatics Centre according to GO (P) No. 375/2015/Fin
dated 24.08.2015.

2*. Rs. 50 Lakhs (GO (P) no. 8/2018/Fin dated 15.01.2018).

113
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Detailed estimates for works shall be prepared by the Assistant Engineer based on approved
layout and designs and on the schedule of rates in force. Actual conveyance shall be adopted for all
estimates. Detailed checking of the estimate shall be done only in the office of TS Issuing Authority.
Intermediate officers shall record their views and suggestion in the docket sheet accompanying the
estimate. All estimates received in an office shall be forwarded to the higher offices within seven days, if
the estimate amount exceeds the power of sanction. Subordinate technical staff shall obtain written orders of
the head of office before effecting corrections other than arithmetical errors in the detailed estimate.
The detailed estimate for a work consists of seven parts, viz.-
i) A docket sheet covering the estimates as per Appendix 1600C
ii) A report containing the following particulars:-
a) The justification for the work.
b) The location of the work or works concerned and the available approaches to the same.
c) Salient features of the proposal.
d) The total cost. (in the prescribed format)
e) If, after completion any operating cost is likely to be involved, the approximate cost of
operation.
f) The extent of land acquisition and problems if any connected with such acquisition.
g) The approximate time required for completion.
h) Any special problems regarding execution of the work.
i) The economic aspects of the scheme, i.e., the cost as compared with benefits derived.
j) A detailed realistic programme chart for execution
k) A certificate signed by an Assistant Engineer as stated above.
iii) Plans and designs of Works
iv) Details of quantities of different items of work involved based on the design and drawings.
Normally every item included in the estimate shall conform to the relevant clauses of standard
specification for road and bridge works of MoRTH published by Indian Roads Congress in the roads and
bridges and to the National Building Code in the case of buildings. Where items, which are not covered
by standard specification are involved, the description of the item shall be full and clear.
v) A data sheet showing the 'estimated unit rate for the different items of work.
a) For road and bridge works:- the estimate shall be prepared as per the Standard Data Book
for the analysis of rates (MoRTH) published by IRC. (available software can be utilised)
b) For buildings: - The estimate shall be prepared as per relevant IS codes, National Building
Code 2005 and the Kerala Municipal Building Rules.
c) Work done through contract agency, the data shall make a provision for contractor's profit at
10% of the net cost of the items less cost of departmental materials, if any, supplied. If items
not included in the schedule of rates are included in an estimate, the data for unit rate shall be
worked out based on the market rate for the item or its components. The market rate shall be
ascertained by making local enquiries in the most suitable manner found expedient
d) The district average conveyance shall be adopted for preparing estimates of all works.
vi) An abstract giving the description of the different items involved and the total quantities, the unit
rate and the cost of each item. To the total of the several items as per this abstract 2.5% is added to
cover the cost of contingencies. This abstract shall also give the total quantities of materials to be
arranged for as departmental supply.
vii) Costing towards mitigation of environmental damages shall also be included either as a part of
civil work (5- 7 % of cost of work) or as a separate item of BOQ

As far as possible lump sum rules (LS) shall be avoided in a detailed estimate except for petty
items the total of which shall not exceed 5% of the estimate. L. S. provision is also permissible in case of
items whose details cannot be foreseen at the time of preparation of the detailed estimate or where it is
proposed to work out the details later on. In such cases working estimates shall be prepared against these
lump sum provisions as soon as the details can be known, before the L. S. are operated on. Such working
estimates will be treated as part of the detailed estimate.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1*. As per GO (P) No. 8/2018/Fin dated 15.01.2018 structural designs and drawings shall be carried out
before preparation of detailed estimates for Administrative Sanction for works costing more than Rs. 2
Crores. The detailed estimates shall be prepared only after detailed investigation. The details of the
Officer who prepared the DPR shall invariably be mentioned in the docket sheet of DPR.

114
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

1601.1.3. Working Estimate

A working estimate is intended to give the details of the works and the cost thereof, which are to
be carried out against a L. S. provision made in an estimate. Normally therefore, the working estimate
shall not exceed the amount of L. S. provision in the estimate for the main work. If however, it is not
possible to limit the cost of the works included in the working estimate to the L. S. provision, care shall
be taken when sanctioning the working estimate that the overall excess is within the powers of the
authority sanctioning the working estimate.
Working estimates shall be prepared with the same care as in the case of detailed estimate. It
shall be as realistic as possible. If the works as per the working estimate are to be entrusted to the
contractor for the main work' then the rates to be included in the working estimate shall be his quoted
rates for agreed-items and rates worked out as per his agreement for allied and extra items. In cases
where a different agency can be entrusted with the works as per the working estimate, the rates to be
adopted shall be based on the schedule of rates prevalent at the time of preparation of the working
estimate and on the market rates where there is no schedule item.
In respect of projects, working estimates shall be sanctioned by subordinate officers only after
consultation with the authority under the control of the project, to whom a copy of the sanctioned
working estimate shall also be sent. The authority under the control of the project shall maintain a
register of all working estimates sanctioned against each particular sub head of the project estimate, to
see that the provisions in the sanctioned project estimate are not exceeded. Each working estimate shall
be treated as a detailed estimate for exercising the powers of sanction.
1601.1.4 Recast Estimate
It may sometimes happen that after the estimate for a work has been technically sanctioned but
before it is taken up for execution some changes are found necessary in the estimate for the work. In
such cases a fresh estimate may by prepared and got sanctioned in cancellation of the originally
sanctioned estimate. This fresh estimate is called a recast estimate and is dealt with as if it is an original
estimate. If however, before a recast estimate is prepared some expenditure has been incurred in an
originally sanctioned estimate, then this procedure cannot be followed and instead a revised estimate
shall be prepared and got sanctioned.
1601.1.5. Supplementary Estimate
Any development or extension of a work though necessary while the work is in progress which
is not fairly contingent on the work as first sanctioned must be converted by a supplementary estimate.
In effect this supplementary estimate is an original estimate for the additional works consequent on the
development or extension of a project or work under execution. Administrative sanction shall therefore
be obtained for the supplementary estimate from the same authority, which sanctioned the original
estimate even if the cost can be met from savings in the original estimate. The competent authority in
this case is the authority that is empowered to accord administrative sanction to the work as a whole, i.e.,
including original and supplementary estimates.
The following particulars shall be invariably furnished when submitting supplementary estimates for
sanction.
a) A full report of the circumstances justifying the need for the supplementary estimate.
b) The amount of the original estimate and the amount of supplementary estimates already
sanctioned, if any, and the amount of the supplementary estimate for which sanction is sought.
Each supplementary estimate to any original estimate shall be numbered consecutively as first
supplementary estimate, second supplementary estimate and so on for easy identification.
c) The supplementary estimate shall be prepared in the same manner as an original work and all
details and drawings furnished.
When a supplementary estimate is sanctioned the original estimate amount stands enhanced to the
extent of the amount of the supplementary estimate.
1601.1.6. Revised Estimate
A revised estimate must be prepared and got sanctioned:
(a) When there are deletions, additions or alterations to the scope of the work as originally
sanctioned needing revised administrative sanction.
(b) When there are major structural alterations from the design as originally sanctioned.
(c) When the cost of a work is likely to exceed by more than 5% of T.S amount.
115
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

The revised estimate shall not be kept waiting till the work is completed or reaches an advanced
stage of completion but shall be prepared and got sanctioned as soon as any of the above two conditions
are anticipated during, the course of execution of work
A revised estimate will consist of-
i. A variation statement in form No. Appendix 1600E indicating briefly the nature and reasons for
the main variation and the financial effect of the variations.
ii. A comparative statement (in Form No. D. B. 4)-Appendix 1600F giving the quantities, rates and
amount of the items as per original estimate and as per the revised estimate with the reasons for the
variation of each item. It is not necessary that the comparative statement shall repeat such items of
the original estimate, which are not affected by the revision, but these items shall be grouped
together under the several heads as per the estimate and noted as unaffected. The affected items
shall be shown in detail in the comparative statement.
iii. The basis for sanction of revised estimate shall be T.S amount.

1601.2. Estimate of National Highways

National Highways are the responsibility of the Government of India and the State P.W.D. Acts
as the agent of the Government of India for investigation, construction and maintenance of National
Highways. Agency charges fixed from time to time will be added in the estimate to cover the cost of
establishment.
For original works chargeable to National Highways, the designs shall be sent for technical
scrutiny and comments, to the Government of India, Ministry of Road Transport and Highways
(MoRTH). After it is cleared technically, the executing agency shall prepare a detailed estimate but
forward only the general abstract of cost along with detailed information to the central government for
accord of administrative approval. The executing agency shall accord technical approval and financial
sanction to the detailed estimate already prepared within 3 months from the date of according
administrative approval by the central government and shall commence execution of works within one
year from the date of according administrative approval failing which the Administrative approval
accorded by the central government shall stand cancelled automatically and executing agency shall
approach central government for fresh administrative approval for the said work.
For any original works on National Highways, detailed estimate of the cost of execution of work
shall be forwarded by the executive agency to central government for obtaining technical approval and
financial sanction. The Chief Engineer, National Highways in the state will be competent to accord
technical sanction based on technical approval received.
When an estimate for NH original work sanctioned by the Ministry needs revision and the amount of
the revised estimate exceeds the original estimate by more than 5%, sanction of Government of India shall be
obtained for the revised estimate. Regarding estimate for maintenance of National Highways it is necessary to
give particulars of the year's requirements under this head to the Ministry of Transport before the
commencement of the financial year. On receipt of sanction from the Ministry, detailed estimate for
individual portions of works as approved by Government of India may be prepared and sanctioned by the
officers of the P.W.D. subject to the normal limits of powers of Technical Sanction.
1601.3 Works in Raj Bhavan
The expenditure of works in Raj Bhavan is a charged one, ie, the expenditure that could be
included in the consolidated fund without the vote of the legislature. The limit of expenditure is as
prescribed in the third schedule to the State Re-organisation (Governor's allowance and privileges) Order
1975 as amended from time to time. The Controller, Governor’s household, who will also allot the
required funds, shall accord administrative approval for the estimate of all new works in Raj Bhavan.
The competent officer of the P.W.D will accord technical sanction for all works. No centage
charges will be levied for the same.
L.S. amount will be provided in annual budget for the maintenance of Raj Bhavan and this will
be operated by the Chief Engineer in consultation with the Secretary to the Governor.
1601.4. Deposit Works
In the case of deposit works for private parties before plans and estimates are prepared and made
available to the party, centage at 2.5 % shall be, got deposited. To start with an approximate figure of
cost may be assumed for the estimate and the 2.5 % centage realised based on this approximate figure
subject to adjustments after estimate is prepared. In case the work is carried out by the P. W. D., the
estimate shall include a total centage of 12.5 % including the 2.5 % for preparation of plan and estimate.

116
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Technical Sanction, for the estimate may be given by the officers of the P. W. D. subject to the limit of
their powers after.
(a) The party accepts the Estimate
(b) Deposits the estimate amount (including centage)
(c) Undertakes to make additional deposit to the extent necessary in the case the estimate amount
is exceeded during actual execution.
In the case of works undertaken for local bodies and quasi government organisations and
Government of India works it is not necessary to insist on 2.5 % prior to preparation of estimate
provided the concerned local body or quasi government organisation agree to pay the percentage after
the estimate is finalised. It is, however, necessary to insist on fulfilment of conditions (a), (b) & (c)
above before the estimate is technically sanctioned and work arranged except in the case of local self
governments where no percentage is leviable for the preparation of estimates by the P. W. D.
The P. W. D. shall carry out all civil works for every Department of Government but this
requires provision of funds for the concerned work in the P. W. D. budget. It may, sometimes, happen,
that another department of Government requires the P. W. D. to carry out some works provided in that
Department's budget. Such works when carried out by P. W. D. are to be treated as deposit works and
any centage shall not be added to the estimate. The rough cost estimate shall then be sent to the
concerned department for administrative sanction and funds.
1601.5 Annual Maintenance and Repairs Estimate
A separate estimate shall be prepared annually for all anticipated ordinary repairs of each building
or road/ bridge work or group of such works during the working year. No administrative sanction is
required for maintenance and repair works.
(a) The original Typical Maintenance Estimates (TME) and the changing TME due to modifications
in the plan of buildings shall be approved by the Chief Engineer (Buildings)
(b) Subsequent change in TME due to schedule revision shall be approved by the Executive
Engineer (Buildings)
The Chief Engineer/Executive Engineer shall accord approval subject to availability of funds and
necessity. Estimates for maintenance work are dealt with in Section 2500, Asset Management and
Sections 2600 to 2800.
SECTION 1700
1701. SCHEDULE OF RATES

1*
PWD schedule of rates shall be followed by all the government departments/ Quazi government
organisations while preparing the estimate for works funded by the State Government. All estimates
st
shall be prepared based on actual conveyance. SoR shall be updated every year with effect from 1
April. For this purpose there shall be a Committee consisting of senior level officers of PWD, KWA,
KSEB etc constituted by Government. The Chief Engineer (A&D) will be the convener of the
Committee. The Committee will finalize the SoR for approval of Government. The Chief Engineer
th
(A&D) shall publish in the Web Site before 15 March.
st
The source for various construction materials shall be fixed by the Chief Engineer A&D on 1 April
once in every 5 years based on the proposals submitted by the Executive Engineers Buildings of each
district for periodical revision of Schedule of Rate.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1*. CPWD data & SOR and National Building Code Guidelines were adopted in State Government
Departments with effect from 1st October 2013 as per GO (P) No. 36/2013/PWD dated 17.04.2013.
Estimates for Government of India schemes are being prepared on the basis of CPWD SOR and
procedures with built in escalation cost. (Delhi Schedule of Rates (DSR) with cost index is being adopted
in PWD. Hire charges published by MoRTH for MoRTH Specifications and market rates for items which
are not included in DSR are being adopted without cost index. The carriage of material provided in the
Delhi Analysis of Rates is being adopted for all works as per Circular No. CE/Admn/PLA/1014/05 dated
03.10.2013 of Chief Engineer PWD Design & Administration)

117
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

1701.1 Data Book

MORTH data as per IRC Guide lines for roads and CPW D data and National Building Code for
buildings shall be adopted.
1702. Plinth Area Rate
*
The plinth area rates`1 shall also be revised by the Chief Engineer A&D every year along with
revision of SoR.
1703. Local Market Rate
The Executive Engineer Buildings of each district shall fix local market rates for materials and
2* st st
labour twice every year. The rates shall be fixed as on 1 April and 1 October every year. These rates
shall be followed by Executive Engineers of all wings for preparing local market rate justification
estimate for tender approval. The justification estimate shall also include 10% contractors profit and 5%
overhead charges. The justification estimate shall be submitted to the tendering authority directly by the
Assistant Engineer before the date of opening of tenders.
SECTION 1800
1801. SANCTIONS
1801.1. Sanctions Required.
The estimate for an original work requires the following sanctions before it is taken up for execution.
(a) Administrative sanction
(b) Technical sanction
(c) Financial sanction
1801.1.1. Administrative Sanction 4*
This is the sanction accorded by the Administrative Department concerned or Government
authorising the P W. D. to take up a particular work at a particular cost and in a particular location.
The Executive Engineer shall forward the preliminary estimates and related documents to the
Chief Engineer with a copy to Superintending Engineer for his comments. The Superintending Engineer
shall forward his comments if any within seven days of receipt failing which; it is deemed to be correct
and approved by him. After the preliminary estimate and sketch plans are received, the concerned
department or government will decide whether further steps shall be taken to execute the work and if so,
the appropriate authority vested with power of Administrative Sanction will issue the Administrative
sanction.
In some cases provisions for certain works required by other departments of the State are made
in the P.W.D. budget even before formal Administrative Sanction has been accorded. The Executive
Engineer in whose jurisdiction the work is located shall then take the initiative in contacting the District
Officer of the concerned department for the necessary information regarding requirements, location etc.
The Executive Engineer shall then prepare a preliminary estimate with sketch plan and forward to the
Administrative Department if it is within his powers of technical sanction or to the Superintending
Engineer if it is beyond his powers of sanction. The Superintending Engineer shall forward it to the
Administrative department if it is within his powers of sanction and if it is beyond his powers he shall
forward it to the Chief Engineer. The Chief Engineer shall forward the preliminary estimate to the
Administrative Department for sanction.
Where the work concerned is a project beyond the power of sanction of Chief Engineer,
Administrative Sanction is to be accorded on the basis of the project report and project estimate and; not
on the basis of preliminary estimate and sketch plan. To enable the project estimate being prepared an
investigation estimate is usually sanctioned at first and the expenditure incurred on investigation etc.
charged to this estimate. When the project estimate is prepared this shall include the cost of investigation
also.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1*. See Section 1701
2*. Local Market Rate of materials for every quarter shall be prepared considering the actual cost of material
excluding contractor’s profit, overheads but including conveyance, loading and unloading, octroi, royalty, sales tax
(VAT 3*etc. and labour for each District depending upon the topography and availability of materials and
accessibility of area. A copy of Local Market Rates shall also be forwarded invariably to the Chief Technical
Examiner, Finance (Inspection- Technical Wing) Department as per Circular No. 96/2014/Fin dated 31.10.2014 of
Finance(Ind& PW.B) Department.
3*. Government of India has decided to roll out the Goods and Service Tax (GST) with effect from 01.07.2017
onwards (GO (Rt) No. 5259/2017/Fin dated 30.06.2017).
118
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

If a work for which Administrative Sanction is given is not taken up within 5 years'1* then the
sanction automatically lapses. Even during the period of currency of the Administrative Sanction viz. 5
years, if at any time detailed estimate is prepared the cost is found to exceed the amount of
Administrative Sanction by more than 15% then fresh Administrative Sanction shall be obtained. This is
not applicable if the excess is due to revision of schedule of rates alone.
1801.1.1Administrative Sanction is not required in respect of the following estimates.
a. Working Estimates.
b. Revised estimates in cases where the excess involved is within the powers of sanction of the P.
W. D. Officers.
c. Estimates for ordinary repairs and maintenance
d. Investigation estimates
1801.1.2 Technical Sanction.
In all cases, the competent authority in the P. W. D. on the basis of detailed project report
accords technical sanction. It implies that the competent technical authority is satisfied about the
suitability of the work to meet the requirement, its structural soundness and about the quantities,
specifications and rates of the different items of work, which will be involved in completing the work.
Before according T.S for major projects exceeding Rs. 15 crores, the Environment Cell shall review the
projects to ensure compliance to environmental regulations before being accorded Technical Sanction.
The TS issuing authority shall take into consideration the views and comments recorded in the
docket sheets by the intermediate officers and effect changes if required before issuing TS.
Before according Technical Sanction to a work relating to another Department, the plans shall be
got countersigned by the head of the concerned department or such Officer who may be delegated with
power for this purpose. In respect of minor works costing within the TS powers of Executive Engineer
such countersignature is not necessary, provided the sketch plan has been approved along with the
Administrative Sanction and no substantial variation has been made from the sketch plan.
Technical Sanction shall be issued only based on the Administrative Sanction for the work and
the amount of Technical Sanction for any work shall not exceed the amount of Administrative Sanction
by more than 15%.2* Before Administrative Sanction is issued availability of funds shall be ensured for
execution of the work either through budget provision or through diversion from other works under the
prescribed rules for such diversion or by deposit in the case of deposit works.
The following are the usual sources of funds for execution of works.
(a) By a specific provision for the work in the Budget for the year.
(b) By diversion of savings in the budget allotments for other work- subject to the rules regarding such
diversion. (See paras 82-86 of the Budget Manual.)
(c) By obtaining a supplementary grant for the work.
(d) By withdrawal of the required amount from the contingency fund with the sanction of Government
to be later regularised through Supplementary Grant.
(e) By funds being placed at the disposal of the P.W.D. for the specific work from out of budget
allotments of another department.
(f) By obtaining deposits from the parties or authorities on whose behalf the work is to be done by the
P.W.D. (Applicable to Deposit works).
(g) Kerala Road Fund Board
(h) NABARD, other agencies
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1* As per GO (P) No. 375/2015/Fin dated 24.08.2015 the validity of all Administrative Sanction (AS) shall not
exceed two years. During this period, Administrative Department can issue revised sanction provided the revised
estimate is necessitated due to changes in the approved cost index alone and not due to any extra item other than
those contemplated in the original estimate. All Administrative Sanctions exceeding Rs.50 lakhs shall be issued only
through PRICE Software, based on the prevailing Schedule of Rates.
2* The Technical Sanction (TS) shall not exceed 10% of the AS and in case if it exceeds this limit, then revised AS
has to be issued as per GO (P) No. 375/2015/Fin dated 24.08.2015. When there are deletions, additions, or
alteration to the scope of work as originally sanctioned, revised AS and revised TS shall be obtained from the
competent authorities even if the revised cost of the work is within 10% over AS amount, before executing
supplementary agreement as per GO (P) No.184/2016/Fin dated 20.12.2016. Due to major structural alterations, if
the cost increases within 10% above AS amount, revised estimate sanction and revised TS shall be issued by
competent authorities. No revised AS is required in such cases.
119
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

The detailed project report for all original works should necessarily contain the preparatory
documents such as the environmental impact assessment report and / or the environmental management
plan and/ or the special environmental conditions to the contract. The environment cell should vet these
and provide a note prior to according the Technical Sanction. This note should confirm the project’s
adherence to the environmental requirement of the code and manual.

Technical Sanction for an estimate is issued in the approved form only.

Technical Sanction powers of all officers will be revised periodically, considering the rise in prices
of various commodities used.

1801.1.3. Technical Sanction Register

In every office where technical sanctions are accorded, a register in the approved form shall be
maintained as under 1800 A. Each estimate sanctioned in a financial year shall be numbered
consecutively and entered in the register.
Technical sanctions given to working estimates need only be noted against the sanction given for the
main work originally and need not be given a separate number and noted in the register. When technical
sanction is issued for a revised estimate and a fresh number is given for this estimate then the fact that
the original estimates stands cancelled shall be noted against the original sanction. Correspondingly,
there shall be one entry in revised sanction quoting the original estimate. When the supplementary
estimate is sanctioned, the original technical sanction shall be cancelled and fresh technical sanction
issued including the supplementary estimate. The respective divisional offices and the central PWD
offices must also maintain the electronic form of the Register.
Original works chargeable to Central Road Fund, State Roads of economic Importance, Interstate
Road, and West Coast Road are financed partly or wholly by Government of India. Estimate for original
works in these cases require prior approval of the Ministry of Transport, Government of India before
Technical Sanction is accorded by State P.W.D. Officers.
1801.1.4 An estimate becomes operative for execution by PWD only when funds are available. While
issuing Technical Sanction, the availability of funds will be examined and the source of funds noted in
the sanctions. The following are the usual sources of funds for execution of works.
• By a specific provision for the work in the Budget for the year.
• By diversion of savings in the budget allotments for other work subject to the rules regarding
such diversion.
• By obtaining a supplementary grant for the work.
• By withdrawal of the required amount from the contingency fund with sanction of Government
and getting it regularized through Supplementary Grant.
• By funds being placed at the disposal of the PWD for the specific work from out of budget
allotments of another department.
• By obtaining deposits from the parties or authorities on whose behalf the work is to be done by
the PWD.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Section 1900
(Amended as per latest Government Orders –refer pages 123-129)*
1901. Registration of Contractors
Rules for Registration of contractors executing works in the Kerala PWD
1. (a) Only persons who have registered themselves as contractor under these rules are entitled to
submit tenders for works. The term 'works' includes (i) civil works and (ii) water supply and
sanitary installation works.(b) Civil Works & Water Supply & Sanitary Installation Works.- A
contractor who is in the register of any Circle / Division / Subdivision in the Kerala P.W.D., can
tender for these works in all the Circles / Divisions / Subdivisions in the State. Temporary
special Divisions or Special Subdivisions are not authorised to register contractors or renew
their registration.
2. For the purpose of registration, the contractors will be classified into four separate categories on
the basis of their financial resources, professional experience and records, as follows.-
(i) A Category.-Those who are entitled to tender for all works in any office
(ii) B Category. -Those who are entitled to tender for all works upto Rs. 55 lakhs in any office.
(iii) C Category.- Those who are entitled to tender for works upto Rs. 15 lakhs in any office.
(iv) D Category.-Those who are entitled to tender for works upto Rs. 6 lakhs in any office.
120
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

3. Registering Authority
Category Registering Authority
A&B Category Superintending Engineers of Circles
C Category Executive Engineers of all Divisions
D Category Assistant Executive Engineers of all Sub Division

(a) The application for registration as contractor should be supported by a solvency

certificate issued by the Revenue Department or a bank guarantee by a bank approved by
Government (a Nationalised or Schedule Bank) under the Bank Guarantee Scheme as
follows.
Category Rupees
A 50,000
B 25,000
C 7,500
D No solvency certificate and Bank Guarntee
Note:-The guarantee of the banks approved by Government (Scheduled Banks) under the
Bank Guarantee Scheme will be accepted.
(b) Limits for various categories of contractors for taking up work
Category For all works For Electrical works
A Category contractors All works All works
B Category Contractors Works up to Rs. 55 lakhs Upto Rs. 4,50,000
C Category Contractors Upto Rs. 15 lakhs Upto Rs. 75,000
D Category Contractors Upto Rs. 6 lakhs
(c) Application for registration as a contractor should be supported by details about his
financial stability and also his previous experience in works. Contractors for Water Supply and
Sanitary Installation works should produce the plumbing licence issued by the competent
authority along with the application for registration.
4. (a) The Registering authority then scrutinise the applications for registration. He will then
satisfy himself as to the financial capacity of the applicant and also his ability to take up and
carry out the works in a particular category. He can, if so needed, direct the contractor to
produce before him satisfactory evidence towards this. If he is satisfied that the applicant can be
registered as a contractor, he will be intimated of the fact (in Form II) and will be asked to remit
a registration fee at the following rates :
Category (Class) Fees(Rs)
A 2000
B 1000
C 600
D 200

The applicant will be registered as a contractor after remittance of this fee. The registration fee
is not refundable. If for any reason, the contractor is not found fit for being registered, he will be
intimated so. But this must only be a bare intimation of the fact that he is not being included in
the list of registered contractors.
(b) If any application for registration as a contractor is rejected, the registering authority should
record in writing his reasons for denying registration. He should also intimate confidentially his
reasons for denial to any application for registration to his next superior authority.
(c) No appeal will lie against this decision.
5. After registration of a person as contractor a registration card will be issued to him under the seal and
signature of the registering officer in Form III. This card should be referred to in all the tenders
submitted by him and be produced by the contractor, if and when called for by any officer of the
P.W.D. If the original registration card is lost the authority competent to issue the original
registration card may, on request made by the Contractor, after enquiring the bonafides and after
obtaining an indemnity bond executed from the contractor, issue a duplicate registration card after
levying a fine of Rs. 25 from the contractor along with the application for the duplicate card.
6. (a) The registration issued is valid only for two financial years. [GO(P)No.96/PW dated 23/03/1971].
Registration cards are to be renewed every two years. Application for renewal in the prescribed
application form are to be submitted before 1st January together with bank guarantee solvency
121
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

certificate. This may, however, be extended up to 31st January, after realising a fine of Rs. 150 for
such late application [GO(P)No.84/97/PWD&T dated 19/08/1997].
Following fees shall be remitted for renewal of registration.
Category (Class) Fees(Rs)
A 1000
B 500
C 300
D 100
(b) The registering authority can renew the registration or refuse to do so at his
discretion following directions for registration as in para 4. He may refuse renewal for
the following reasons:
(i) Not being satisfied of the financial stability of the applicant.
(ii) Failure to execute satisfactorily a previous contract.
(iii) Poor quality of works executed..
(iv) Failure to put up schedule of progress of works or works taken up by the applicant previously.
(v) Or any other matter which, in the opinion of the registering authority, is undesirable.
1. A contractor who fails to get his registration renewed for an year can apply afresh the next
year for registration only as a new contractor.
2. The registering authority shall, before 1st March, issue the renewal card or intimate the fact
of having refused the request for renewal.
3. A list of applications for registration and renewal shall be maintained by each registering
authority in Form VII. The reasons for refusal should be clearly specified in the register. The
register will be confidential record in the custody of the registering authority. But it will be
open to inspection by his superior officer and by Audit.
4. In case a, contractor desires to be enlisted simultaneously as a registered contractor for
executing non-electrical works also he may make the required deposit in the appropriate
category either for electrical work or non-electrical works where the deposit is the highest.
5. Application of the Rules.-These rules will not apply for the registration of L.C.C. Societies,
B.S.S. and other workers' bodies which are governed by separate Government Orders and also in
respect of works which are executed under the famine relief and flood relief rules.
(b) A confidential report regarding the performance of the contractor shall be obtained from two officers
of public works department not below the rank of Executive Engineer for the renewal of registration.
The report should be based on the quality of work, workmanship, quality of materials used, timely
completion, no. of works executed and other such factors which deserve consideration for renewal of
registration. Renewal of registration should be denied for those contractors who do not have executed
any work in the period during which the registration was in force.
Rules for Registration of Electrical Contractors in the Kerala P. W. D
1. For the purpose of registration, the electrical contractors will be classified into four separate
categories on the basis of their financial resources, professional experience and record as follows:-
(i) A Category-Those who are qualified to tender for works upto any amount.
(ii) B Category-Those who are qualified to tender for works upto Rs. 75,000
(iii) C Category-Those who are qualified to tender for works upto Rs. 30,000
(iv) D Category-Those who are qualified to tender for works upto Rs. 5,000.
2. Enlistment of electrical contractors of all categories will be made by the Superintending
Engineer of the concerned B & R Circle. Application for registration will be made in the
prescribed form and should be supported by a solvency certificate by the Revenue Department
or a Bank Guarantee by a bank approved by Government except in the case of electrical
contractors coming under the 'D' Category. The amounts upto which suchcertificate or Bank
Guarantee should be insisted will be as follows:
A Category- Rs. 50,000
B Category - Rs. 25,000
C Category - Rs.12,000
D Category-No solvency Certificate or Bank Guarantee.
Note.-The guarantee of the banks approved by Government (Scheduled Banks) under
the Guarantee Scheme will be accepted.
3. In the case of 'D' Category of contractors, the cost of Works for which they can tender can be
fixed as the financial powers vested with the Assistant Engineers of the Electrical Wing as
this category of contractor need not produce any solvency certificate. The last sub para of

122
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Rule 4 (a) (b), Rule 5, Rule 6 (a) and (b), Rule 7, 8 & 9 under Appendix 1 will apply in
respect of registration as electrical contractors in the P. W. D.
4. The contractors should possess a valid contractor's licence issued by the competent authority, viz.,
the Licensing Board under the Chief Electrical Inspector as per the Indian Electricity Rules.
5. The Electrical contractors taking up works under A Category under these rules should have an
office capable of submitting bills regularly or works done provided for in the contract. This
office should have sufficient technical personnel for submitting tenders in an intelligent manner
and for supervision of works.
6. The contractor desiring enlistment in the 'A' category should have executed at least 5 works
individually costing more than Rs. 25,000 satisfactorily. Those who desire to enlist as
contractors in the 'B' category, should have executed at leastfive works individually costing
more than Rs. 10,000 satisfactorily and those enlisting in 'C' category at least five works
individually costing more than Rs. 2,500.
7. Any contractor who desires to be enlisted simultaneously in any category in electrical works
also may make the required deposit in the appropriate category either for non-electrical works
or for electrical works where the deposit is highest.

1*Section 1900- Revised as per new Government orders

1901. Registration of Contractors
Rules for Registration of Contractors executing works in the Kerala PWD
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1* As per GO (Ms) No. 59/2013/PWD dated 17.07.2013 this section is amended as under 1902.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Only persons who have registered themselves as contractor under these rules are entitled to submit tenders for
works in PWD. The tern “works” includes (i) Civil works and (ii) Electrical works.
1902.1. A contractor who is in the register of any Circle/ Division/ Subdivision of Kerala P.W.D. can tender
for works in the limits prescribed under these rules.
1902.2. Temporary/ Special Divisions or Special Subdivisions are not authorized to register contractors or
renew their registration
1903. For the purpose of registration, contractors will be classified into separate categories on the basis of their
professional experience, financial resources and limits fixed for bidding.
1903.1. Civil contractors
(i) A Category- Those who are entitled to tender for all works in any office irrespective of the
estimate PAC.
(ii) B Category- Those who are entitled to tender for all works uptoRs. 250 lakhs in any office.
(iii) C Category- Those who are entitled to tender for all works uptoRs. 50 lakhs 2* in all offices.
(iv) D Category- Those who are entitled to tender for all works uptoRs. 6 lakhs 2* in all offices.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2* C Category Contractors and D Category Contractors are entitled to tender for works upto Rs.100 Lakhs
and Rs 25 Lakhs respectively as per GO (Ms) No. 5/2016/PWD dated 03.02.2016.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1903.2. Electrical contractors
(i) A Category- Those who are qualified to tender for all works in any office irrespective of the
estimate PAC.
(ii) B Category- Those who are qualified to tender for works uptoRs. 25 lakhs in all offices.
(iii) C Category- Those who are qualified to tender for works uptoRs. 5 lakhs in all offices.

1904. Registering Authority

1904.1. Civil contractors
A&B Category - Superintending Engineers of Circles
C Category - Executive Engineers of Divisions
D Category - Assistant Executive Engineers of Subdivisions
1904.2. Electrical contractors
A Category - Superintending Engineer, Electrical
B Category - Executive Engineers of Divisions
123
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

C Category - Assistant Executive Engineers of Subdivisions

1905. Qualification
1905.1. An individual or firm desirous of registering as a contractor in the Public Works Department shall
have the qualification/ experience as detailed below.
1905.2. Civil contractors
1905.2. 1. A Category
(i) Should possess a valid B category registration of the state PWD for a minimum period of two years.
Should have carried out works costing Rs. 5 crores after taking a B class license.
(ii) Firms registered with Government of India and other state Government departments in their highest
class of registration and who have carried out at least three works each costing more than Rs 5 crores
in Government of India and state Government departments in the last five years from the date of
application shall directly be registered as an A category contractor.
(iii) Should have an office with facilities for e tendering.

1905.2. 2. B Category
(i) Should possess a valid C category registration of the state PWD for a minimum period of two years
and should have carried out works costing Rs. 2.5 crores after taking a C category registration.
(ii) Civil Engineering degree holders who have involved themselves as a contractor or a site engineer for a
single civil engineering work costing Rs 1.25 crores or works costing a total amount of Rs.2.5 crores
within the last three years preceding the date of application shall be registered directly as a B category
contractor.
(iii) Should have an office with facilities for e tendering.

1905.2. 3. C Category
(i) The applicant shall have experience as a contractor or a site supervisor for a single civil engineering
work costing Rs 25 lakhs or works costing a total amount of Rs.50 lakhs, each not below Rs 10 lakhs
within the last three years preceding the date of application.
(ii) Should have an office with facilities for e tendering.

1905.2. 4. D Category
(i) The applicant shall have experience as a contractor or supervisor in civil construction/ maintenance
work costing Rs 4 during a period of three years proceeding the date of application.

1905.3. Electrical contractors

1905.3. 1. A Category
(i) Applicant should possess a valid B class license for a minimum period of two years and should have
carried out works costing upto Rs. 50 Lakhs after taking B class license.
(ii) Should have an office with facilities for e tendering.
(iii) Applicant shall have an electrical engineering degree holder and an electrical engineering diploma
holder with five years experience as supervisors.
(iv) Applicant possessing license equivalent to A category from Government of India and other state
government department satisfying other stipulations like certification from the licensing board shall be
registered directly as A category contractor.
(v) 1905.3. 2. B Category
(i) Applicant should possess minimum two years experience and should have carried out at least five
works costing Rs. 2 Lakhs each. Applicant should possess equipments required for electrical works
stipulated from time to time.
(ii) A person possessing HT license from the Kerala State Licensing Board shall be registered directly as a
B category contractor. He shall have a supervisor with qualification of diploma in electrical
engineering.

1905.3. 3. C Category
(i) Applicant should possess minimum one -year experience and should have carried out at least three
works costing Rs. 1 Lakh each as per PWD standards and specifications.

124
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

1906. Financial capability

1906.1. An individual or firm desirous of registering directly as a contractor in the Public Works Department
to any category shall produce Solvency Certificate from a nationalized/ scheduled bank to prove his financial
capability for investing money upto the limits detailed below. A Capability Certificate issued by a
nationalized/ scheduled bank for the same limits shall be produced for up gradation of category of registration
or renewal of registration.
1906.1. 1. Civil
A category - Rs 100 Lakhs
B category - Rs 50 Lakhs
C category - Rs 10 Lakhs
D category - Rs 1.2 Lakhs
1906.1. 2. Electrical
A category - Rs 30 Lakhs
B category - Rs 5 Lakhs
C category - Rs 1 Lakhs
1907. Certificate of experience
(i) A firm/individual who desires to get directly enlisted as a civil/ electrical contractor in PWD in the
classes allowed by these rules shall first apply in the format in Appendix 1900A for obtaining
necessary experience certificate. He shall submit relevant records including architectural drawings,
structural designs wherever applicable, contract documents, measurements/bills to prove his claim for
experience. The experience stated by the applicant shall be certified by an officer not below the rank
of an Executive Engineer for A and B category registration, Assistant Executive Engineer for C
category registration and Assistant Engineer for D category registration. The above mentioned officers
can authorise their subordinates to make local enquiries/ scrutinize records to verify the claim of
applicant regarding experience.
(ii) Contractors who apply for upgrading their category of registration shall produce experience certificate
in the form given in Appendix 1900H. This certificate will be issued by Executive Engineer for
upgradation to A category and Assistant Executive Engineer for upgradation to B category.

1908. Application for registration/upgradation of category

1908.1. Application for registration as a contractor/ upgradation of category shall be made in the format in
Appendix 1900B to the registering authority supported by the following.
(i) Certificate of experience as detailed under sub rule 1907.
(ii) Document to prove financial stability as detailed under sub rule 1906.
(iii) Copy of acknowledgement of incometax return filed during the previous year.
(iv) Copy of pan card.
(v) Document to prove name and address furnished in the application form.
(vi) Document to prove date of birth (as in case of individual).
(vii) Attested copy of Deeds/ Articles of association in case of private/ public limited company or
undivided Hindu family individual or a registered partnership firm.

1908.2. Registering authority shall then scrutinize the application for registration. He shall satisfy himself as to
the financial capacity of the applicant and also his ability to take up and carry out the works in a particular
category. He can, if needed, direct the contractor to produce before him satisfactory evidence towards this. If
he is satisfied that the applicant can be registered as a contractor, he shall be intimated of the fact in the form in
Appendix 1900 B1 and shall be asked to remit a registration fee at the following rates. The same fee has to be
remitted by a registered contractor for upgrading his registration.
(a) Civil contractors
A class – Rs 5000 3*
B class – Rs 3000 3*
C class – Rs 2000 3*
D class – Rs 1000 3*

125
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

(b) Electrical contractors

A class – Rs 2500 3*
B class – Rs 1500 3*
C class – Rs 1000 3*
1908.3. The applicant is also required to remit the following security deposit to the registering authority.
a) Civil contractors
A category – Rs 2 Lakhs
B category – Rs 1 Lakh
C category – Rs 50,000
D category – Rs 25,000
b) Electrical contractors
A category – Rs 1 Lakh
B category – Rs 50,000
C category – Rs 25,000
Security deposit shall be remitted as deposit pledged in favour of Registering Authority from a scheduled/
nationalized bank/Post Office or National Savings Certificate/Kisan Vikas Patra for A, B and C category of
civil contractors and A and B category of electrical contractors. It shall be in the form of deposit pledged in
favour of the registering authority / solvency issued by the Tahsildar concerned for the D category of civil
contractors and C category of electrical contractors.
1908.4. The applicant shall be registered as a contractor after remittance of the registration fee and the security
deposit. The registration fee is not refundable. But the security deposit will be refunded at the time of
surrendering the registration. Refund amount shall be the deposit amount less any amount due to government
from the contractor on account of default or any other reason.
1908.5. If for any reason, the contractor is not found fit for being registered, he shall be intimated so with
reasons thereof. No appeal will lie against this decision.
1908.6. After registration of a person as a contractor a registration card shall be issued to him under the seal
and signature of the registering officer in the form in Appendix 1900 C. This card should be referred to in all
the tenders submitted by him and be produced by the contractor, if and when called for by any officer of the
P.W.D. If the original registration card is lost, the authority competent to issue the original registration card
may, on request made by the Contractor, after enquiring the bonafides and after obtaining an indemnity bond
executed from the contractor, issue a duplicate registration card after levying a fine of Rs. 500 from the
contractor along with the application for the duplicate card.
1908.7. The registration issued is valid only for three financial years. Registration cards are to be renewed
every three years.
1908.8. An individual/ firm can hold only valid contract registration at a time.
1909. Contractors Work Register
1909.1. It is the duty of a registered contractor to maintain the contractors work register in Appendix 1900 D
by ensuring that entries are made at the proper time by the Agreement Authority/ Payment Authority. He shall
keep the register updated and under safe custody and produce it before the Registering/ Payment Authority as
and when called for.
1909.2. The Registering Authority shall keep a record of the entries made in the Contractors Work register in
his office in the format under Appendix 1900 E. The responsibility for maintaining the register shall rest with
the head of Establishment Branch in Circle and Division. In the Sub Division the register shall be maintained
by the Head Clerk.
1909.3. If a contractor reports loss of his Contractors Work Register and request for compiling a duplicate
register, the Registering Authority shall sanction the same subject to the following conditions.
a) It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to get the details entered from each where he has
executed agreement.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3*
All charges related to Government service is increased with effect from 01.04.2018 by 5% vide GO (P) No.
44/2018/Fin dated 17.03.2018.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

126
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

b) He shall be responsible for any omissions.

c) He shall pay Rs. 10000 as fine in addition to the following fee for the entry of details of each work.
This amount shall be remitted on receipt of sanction from the Registering Authority.
A category – Rs 2000 3* per entry
B category – Rs 1500 3* per entry
C category – Rs 1000 3* per entry
D category – Rs 500 3* per entry
1910. Renewal of registration
Application for renewal in the prescribed application form in Appendix 1900 G are to be submitted before 1st
January. This may, however be extended upto 31st January, after realizing a fine of Rs. 2500 for civil
contractors and Rs. 1500 for electrical contractors for such late application.
1910.1. The following documents shall accompany the application for renewal of registration.
(i) Extract of updated Contractor Work Register for the past three years from the date of application
attested by the contractor.
(ii) Acknowledgement of income tax return last filed.
(iii) Valid security deposit/ solvency as detailed under 1908.
(iv) Financial capability certificate issued by a nationalized/ scheduled bank as detailed under sub rule
1906.
(v) Certificate from the concerned Tendering Authority to prove that contractor has quoted for five
works under any department using the PWD license.

1910.2. Following fee shall be remitted by for civil/ electrical contractors for renewal of registration.
A category – Rs 3000 3*
B category – Rs 2000 3*
C category – Rs 1500 3*
D category – Rs 1000 3*
1910.3. The registering authority shall scrutinize the applications the registration or refuse to do so at his
discretion following the directions for registration as in Para 1908.2. He shall refuse renewal in the following
cases.
(i) Not being satisfied of the financial stability of the applicant.
(ii) Failure to execute satisfactorily a previous contract.
(iii) Poor quality of works executed.
(iv) Failure to achieve agreed schedule of progress of work.
(v) Failure to carry out atleast one work during the period/ Failure to quote for atleast five works using his
registration in PWD.
(vi) Contract for a work has been terminated during the above period.
(vii) Any other matter which, in the opinion of the registering authority, is undesirable.

1910.4. If renewal of license is refused for reasons covered under items (i) to (vi) under item 1910.3, the
license shall not be renewed and the contractor shall be barred from applying for fresh license for a period of
two years. He will be allowed to complete the works for which he has executed agreement.
1910.5. A contractor who fails to get his registration renewed in time can apply afresh the next year for
registration only as a new contractor.
1910.6. The registering authority shall, before 1st March, issue the renewal card or intimate the fact of having
refused the request for renewal.
1911. Details of registration and renewal done every year shall be maintained by each Registering Authority in
Form in Appendix 1900J. The reasons for refusal of registration/ renewal, if any shall be clearly specified in
the register. The register shall be kept under the safe custody of the head of Establishment Branch in the office
of the Registering Authority.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3*
All charges related to Government service is increased with effect from 01.04.2018 by 5% vide GO (P) No.
44/2018/Fin dated 17.03.2018.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
127
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

1912. Performance certificate shall be issued to a contractor at the end of a financial year in the format in
Appendix 1900F, if such a request is received by the Registering Authority in writing.
1913. Application of the Rules
These rules will not apply for the registration of L.C.C.Societies, B.S.S., Kerala State Construction
Corporation and other worker’s bodies, which are governed by separate Government Orders.
1914. Demotion to lower class
1914.1. The registering authority may, by order demote a contractor to immediate lower class if he
(i) Fails to execute a contract or executes it unsatisfactorily or is proved to be responsible for
constructional defects revealed even after the expiry of the defects liability period.
(ii) Has no longer adequate equipments, technical personnel or financial constraints.
(iii) Violates any important condition of contract.
(iv) Is responsible for any other matter, which would justify his demotion to the lower class taking into
account, the merit of the case.

1915. Suspension of business

Suspension of business may be ordered for an indefinite period, where pending full enquiry into the
allegations, the competent authority is of the view that it is not desirable that business with the contractor
should continue. Such an order may be passed if the competent authority is prima- facie of the view that the
contractor is guilty of an offence involving moral turpitude in relation to business dealings which, if
established would result in his removal/ blacklisting.
1916. Removal from approved list
The Registering Authority may remove a contractor from the approved list, if the contractor
(i) Fails to execute a contract or executes it unsatisfactorily or is proved to be responsible for
constructional defects revealed even after the expiry of the defects liability period.
(ii) Has no longer adequate equipments, technical personnel or financial constraints.
(iii) Violates any important condition of contract.
(iv) Fails to furnish acknowledgement of latest income tax return filed.
(v) Fails to abide by the conditions of registration or is found to have given false particulars at the time of
registration.
(vi) Is declared or is in the process of being declared a bankrupt, insolvent, wound up, dissolved or
partitioned.
(vii) Persistently violates the provisions of Labour Regulations and Rules.

A contractor who is removed from the approved list shall be barred from quoting for new works till his license
is restored.
1917. Blacklisting
A contractor may be blacklisted by the Registering Authority for the following reasons
(i) Where there is sufficient and strong justification for believing that the contractor or his employee has
been guilty of malpractices such as bribery, corruption, fraud including substitution of or interpolation
of tenders, pilfering or unauthorized use or disposal of government materials issued for specific works
etc.,
(ii) Where the contractor continuously refuses to pay Government dues without sufficient reason and
where the Registering Authority is satisfied that no reasonable dispute attracting reference to
arbitration or court of law exists for the contractor’s action.
(iii) Where the contractor or his partner or his representative has been convicted by a court of law for
offences involving moral turpitude in relation to business dealings.
(iv) Where security considerations including suspected disloyalty the state or warrant.
(v) Where the contractor or his partner or his agent is found to have abetted or induced public servants to
indulge in corrupt practices.
(vi) Where the documents regarding experience submitted to obtain experience certificate are found to be
false at a later date.

128
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

A show cause notice should be issued before inflicting this punishment. Once a contractor is blacklisted, all
agreements entered into by him shall be terminated at his risk and cost.
1918. Restoration
The question of upgrading a demoted contractor, lifting ban on business, restoring the registration and
withdrawal of blacklisting shall be considered at the appropriate time on the merits of each case by the
authority who passed the original orders. Copies of orders revoking the blacklisting shall be furnished to the
Chief Engineer and Government.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Section 2000

2001. Bids (Tenders) And Arrangement Of Contracts

Works in the public works department are executed by any one of the following methods.
i) Departmentally: This method is adopted in case where no contractor is available or where for
other reasons, it is found more suitable
ii) Piece work contract: Under this method the Piece-worker merely agrees to execute specific items of
work at specific rates without reference to total quantity or time.
iii) By item rate contract 1*: In this contract the total approximate quantities of the respective items of
work and the time of completion are specified and the contractual obligations cover the rate the
approximate quantities involved and the time of completion. In the case of Item Rate Tenders, only
quoted rate of each item shall be considered. Any tender containing percentage rates quoted shall be
liable to rejection. Rates quoted shall be accurately filled-in, so that there is no discrepancy in the rates
written in figures and words. However, if a discrepancy is found, the rates written in words will prevail.
The item rate contract shall be followed for the works costing above Superintending Engineer’s
Technical Sanction Powers.
iv) Lump sum contract: Here the total cost of the completed works as per drawings and specifications
and the time of completion form the essence of the contract. In adopting this contract the drawings and
specifications must be full and complete in order to prevent claims arising for variations due to any
ambiguity in them. Cases may, however, arise where some modifications to the designs or specifications
are found necessary due to site conditions or other reasons. The bidder shall assess and evaluate &
convince himself that the amount quoted by him is adequate. The department will not entertain any extra
claim for such modification within the scope of the work, during execution. This method shall be
adopted only in unavoidable circumstances where the situation warrants.
v) Percentage rate contract 1*: In this type of contract the departmental rates for the different items of
work in an estimate are published and the contractor quotes his rate at a percentage above, or below or at
par the estimate rates so published. Only a single percentage applicable to all the items is quoted and this
percentage rate is applicable to extra items, if any, are found necessary during construction. Other
conditions of contract are similar to those applicable to schedule contracts.
A modification of this type of contract is when, instead of estimate rates for a work, the schedule of rates
is published and the contractor is asked to quote a percentage above, below or at par, the schedule of
rates so published. Since neither the total quantity of work nor the time is specified, this modified form
of percentage rate contract can be applied to piecework contracts only.
The most appropriate form of contract shall be decided upon in individual cases before inviting tenders.
The authority competent to accord technical sanction to the estimate is the authority, which will decide
whether the work is done departmentally or through contract. In the latter case, the authority will also
decide upon the form of contract. This method shall be followed for all works up to and including TS
powers of Superintending Engineer.
2002. Performance Based Maintenance Contract
A Performance Based Maintenance Contract (PBMC) is a lump sum contract of all ordinary
maintenance activities (Standard Jobs) in which the contractor is paid a set monthly/quarterly premium
irrespective of the amount of work required to keep the road or building safe and defect-free. It becomes
the contractors responsibility, without separate direction from PWD, to keep the road condition to a
specified standard and period and he may incur some financial penalty if he fails to achieve this
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1* All works having estimate cost exceeding Rs. 5 lakh shall be tendered on item rate basis only to enhance
transparency and to facilitate objective tender evaluation as per GO (P) No. 30/2016/Fin dated 29.02.2016
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

129
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

standard. Part of the contract requirement is use of specialized equipment specifically for road
maintenance, and there are limited provisional works for larger repairs/resurfacings. This system shall be
adopted only for major works on roads/Buildings, which satisfy minimum standards as per norms. The
road or buildings to be included in this contract shall be decided by the Chief Engineer. The contract
shall be valid for minimum period of three years beyond the defects liability period. If necessary an
initial rehabilitation work shall be done before arranging PBMC.
2003. Bidding of works
Before bids are invited for a work there should be
A) Administrative Sanction for the work
B) Technical Sanction for the work
C) 100% possession of hindrance free land.
However, in the case of road projects bids can be invited with prior permission of Govt.
provided 60% of land required is available and balance can be made available during the course of
construction.
The arrangement of works shall normally be made through bids (tenders) for works having
administrative and technical sanctions with proportionate provisions of funds in the Budget for the year.
The bidding of works shall be resorted to only after getting possession of the required land free of
encumbrances.
If there is a time lag of one year between the date of preparation of the estimate and the date of
tender of a work, it is necessary to verify whether any changes have occurred necessitating modification
to the provisions in the estimate. If the modifications required are only minor the officer competent to
enter into contract may invite tenders on the basis of the sanctioned estimate. Otherwise the estimate
shall be recast and tenders invited on that basis.
2004. Tender procedure 2*
The bids (tenders) are open to all contractors registered in PWD or recognized organizations,
under State Govt. or Govt. of India irrespective of registration status and who fulfil the qualification
criteria in the bid document in respect of post qualification or prequalification tenders as per provision in
the bidding document. For works costing up to the TS powers of Superintending Engineer Standard
Bidding Document (Minor) shall be followed. For works costing above TS powers Superintending
Engineer standard bidding document (major) for post qualification and prequalification shall be followed.
For work costing above Rs. 5 crores 3* prequalification tender shall be followed. The criteria for
the evaluation shall be prescribed in the bidding document.
For externally aided projects, norms of the concerned financing agencies shall be followed for
arranging the works.
An appraisal of the contractor is an essential criteria for award of works.
2004.1 Performance Appraisal of Contractors
Such a record of appraisals over the years will serve as a useful tool while taking decision about
award of works to that particular contractor and also while renewing the registration. It is suggested that
a much simpler proforma may be designed for the purpose. Failures of work carried out by the
contractor during the defect liability period and a quality index assigned to those works during quality
audits should find a place in the proforma. Such a proforma will be filled by each EE with who the
contractor is working, countersigned by the Deputy Chief Engineer concerned and submitted to the
Chief Engineer. The proforma should be filled up each year and all such reports of a particular contractor
may be kept in a single file to be available whenever needed. With the advent of computers it will be
possible to store these in electronic form to be available to any Superintending Engineer/Chief Engineer/
other Officers at the click of the button.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2* Adopted e- tendering in all departments with effect from 01.04.2013 (GO (P) No. 36/2013/PWD dated
17.04.2013). E-tendering shall be followed for all works costing above Rs. 5 lakhs as per GO (P) No. 524/2015/Fin
dated 17.11.2015.
3* For e-tendering Standard Bidding Document for works costing above Rs.5 Crores shall be followed for works
costing above Rs. 5 crores, which require pre-qualification and Standard Bidding Document for works costing
below Rs.5 Crores shall be followed for works costing below Rs. 5 crores, which do not require pre-qualification
(GO (P) No.3/2017/PWD dated 09.08.2017).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

130
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2005. Time of completion 4*

The time required for completion of a work, shall be carefully assessed based on scientific
parameters and indicated in the tender schedule. The seasonal variations, cost of works, probable time
required for procuring materials, the sequence of operation contemplated and such other limiting factors
as having a bearing on the progress of the work shall be taken into account while fixing the time of
completion. Time of completion shall be reckoned from the date of handing over of site.
2006. Advertisement of Tenders 5*
Sl No Work cost limits Nature of publication Minimum time between
Publication of notice and
submission of tender
1 up to TS powers of AEE’s PWD website and notice boards of the
concerned Division, Sub Divisions and
7 days
Sections and nearby LSGD offices, PWD
Water Resources office.
2 Up to TS powers of EE’s PWD website, and in any one Malayalam
newspaper having wide circulation in and 7 days
nearby District.
3 Up to TS power of SE’s PWD website and in two Malayalam dailies
with wide circulation in and nearby District. 7 days

4 Over SE’s powers PWD website and in one prominent English

daily with wide circulation in the State and 10 days
two Malayalam dailies with wide circulation.
In cases other than e-tendering the following procedures shall be followed. In addition to the above,
copies of the tender notices may be forwarded to other offices in the P.W.D. Tendering authority shall
publish the notice directly in the newspaper in case of works of urgent nature.
To reduce the advertising expense window publication for different works clubbed together shall be
adopted. In such cases, detailed notices shall be published in the PWD Web site. Payment towards
publication shall be made charging to work by making a provisional in the detailed estimate.
When sending window publication notice, sufficient time prescribed shall be allowed for the publication
to appear in the newspaper well ahead of the last date of tender.
Normally advertisements to be published in the dailies will be arranged by the Director of Public
Relations. The officer publishing tenders shall forward to the Director of Public Relations, at least 15
days before the last date proposed for publication.
In case of postponement of sale and receipt of tender, proper notice for the same should be posted in web
site of Public Works Department and should be published in the same manner as that of original notice
and the stipulation on time limit will apply in case of postponement also.
The tender forms shall be priced as per rates fixed by Govt. from time to time:-
Copies of bid documents shall be serially numbered 1, 2, 3, etc. and the pages and drawing of each
document shall also be serially numbered. These documents shall be available in the office of the
authority publishing the tender notice.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4* Since State Government is also now following Government of India rates for the preparation of estimates, price
variation clause followed in CPWD shall also be adopted for State Government works in case of works having
period of completion exceeding 18 months. (GO (P) No. 375/2015/Fin dated 24.08.2015).
5* In order to enhance the competition in execution of public works the cost of tender fee has been rationalized as
follows vide GO (P) No. 429/2015/Fin dated 28.09.2015.

Cost of work Tender fee 6*

Upto Rs. 50,000/- Rs. 300/-
Above Rs. 50.000/- - upto Rs 10 lakhs 0.2% of cost of work (subject to a minimum of
Rs. 500/- and maximum of Rs. 2,000/-
Above Rs 10 lakhs- upto Rs. 1 crore Rs 2,500/-
Above Rs. 1 crore - upto Rs. 2 crores- Rs 5,000/-
Above Rs. 2 crores - upto Rs. 5 crores- Rs 7,500/-
Above Rs. 5 crores - upto Rs. 10 crores- Rs 10,000/-
Above Rs. 10 crores Rs 15000/-
6*All charges related to Government service is increased with effect from 01.04.2018 by 5% vide GO (P) No.
44/2018/Fin dated 17.03.2018.
131
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

The bid documents shall be downloaded from the PWD web site. In such cases the cost of bid
documents shall be remitted by demand draft along with the submission of the tender.
The bid documents shall contain the following:-
(a) A complete set of approved architectural and structural drawings.
(b) Complete specification of work to be done and the materials to be used or reference to item of the
standard specification followed by the department or I.S.I. in respect of each item of the tender
schedule.
(c) A schedule of quantities of various items of the work.
(d) Time fixed for completion of work or parts thereof. The time for completion of work shall be
carefully assessed and fixed. This shall take into account the seasonal variations, probable time
required for procuring materials, the sequence of operations contemplated, and such other
limiting factors having a bearing on the progress of the work.
(e) List of materials proposed to be issued departmentally and the recovery rates.
(f) List of departmental tools and plant to be hired out and the hire rates.
(g) General conditions of contract current in P. W. D. and special conditions if any applicable to the
particular case
The bid documents 7* for a percentage rate contract will be same as listed above, except that in the
schedule of quantities, the estimate rates will be noted in words and in figures and the contractor called
upon to quote his percentage above, or below or at par the estimate rates. As only a single percentage is
to be quoted this need not be written against individual items but must be written at the bottom of the
schedule in words and in figures.
In the case of piecework contract, the tender notice may be of a simple form specifying the place of
work, the facilities available, the items of work to be done and the specifications to be followed. .
If the modified percentage rate contract is to be adopted for piecework contract, the above notice shall
also contain the concerned schedule of departmental rates and the contractor shall be called upon to
quote his rate at a percentage above, below or at par the schedule of rates so notified.
In the case of item wise contracts the schedule shall contain only the specification for items and quantities.
2006.1 Pre-bid meeting:
There shall be a pre-bid meeting with those bidders who choose to attend as mentioned in the bid
notice.
2006.1.1 Pre-bid meetings are to be held for works costing above TS Powers of Superintending
Engineers. It is possible that there could be difference in the understanding of the bidders
and the tendering on certain crucial issues; some errors or oversights in the tender documents
could go unattended; some oversights in the tender documents could go unattended; some
disputes could arise later on during execution.
2006.1.2 Date of this meeting should be declared in the tender notice and should be after the tender
forms have become available to contractors. The sale of tender forms should be kept open at
least for 10 days after issuance of clarifications and a corrigendum to tender documents if
any, as a result of the prebid meeting.
2006.1.3 The prebid meeting should be held at the level of the Chief Engineer for large works and
even at a higher level for very large works costing above Rs.20 crores. The officers who are
to execute the work i.e the concerned Ex.Engr the Deputy Chief Engineer etc must attend the
meeting. The contractors should be made to feel free to ask all their doubts and seek
clarifications and make suggestions for betterment of the work. All their queries should be
recorded in the minutes of the meeting which must invariably be drawn up and issued.
2006.1.4 If any clarification is issued on the spot, it should appear in the minutes. Certain queries may
require detailed consideration and may lead to modification of the tender document or the
work proposal. All such clarification should be prepared after obtaining orders from the
competent authorities and meticulously issued in a tabular form. Corrigendum to tender
documents should be issued to all those who have purchased the form already. The minutes
of the meeting, the clarification and the corrigendum should all be attached to the tender
forms issued thereafter. The contractors should be asked to initial all these when submitting
their bid.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7* In e-tendering, since there is no physical tender documents, the tender documents shall be available for free
download from the e-GP website for those tenders floated through e-GP system. However a bid submission fee
(tender fee) shall be paid online as per GO (Ms) No.08/2013/ITD dated 26.03.2013 by the bidder while submitting
the bids.

132
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2007. Submission of bid documents

2007.1.Bid Security (Earnest Money)
Earnest money is the financial guarantee of the bidder
(a) to abide by the terms of the tender till decision on the tender or the expiry of the firm period
whichever is earlier and
(b) to execute the agreement to carryout the work as per conditions of the contract if his tender is
accepted.
Each tender shall be accompanied by an earnest money deposit in such form and manner as prescribed in
the tender notice. The rates of Earnest Money Deposit 8* for works shall be 2.5% of the estimated
probable amount of contract.
Earnest money may be produced in one or other of the following forms 9*:
(i.) Chalan receipt from a Government treasury, the chalan being countersigned by an authorised
departmental officer where tenders are to be received.
(ii) Draft on a scheduled Bank / Nationalised Bank made payable to the officer who invites tenders.
(iii) Deposit at call on a schedule Bank/ Nationalised Bank Pledged in favour of the officer inviting
tenders.
(iv) National Savings Certificate or Kisan Vikas Patra
(iv) Cash remittance is not normally accepted. The officer receiving the tenders may, if he considers
necessary, relax this rule and permit cash being received in special cases.
(v) Bank Guarantee from Nationalised Banks shall also be accepted.
Note:
a) In the case of piece work contract the condition regarding Earnest Money Deposit shall be waived.
b) Payment of Earnest Money Deposit is also waived in respect of organizations, which are
exempted by Government to that effect.
2007.2 Bid documents:
The tender document shall include:
1. Notice Inviting Tender / Invitation for bidders (IFB)
2. Instruction to bidders
3. Conditions of Contract (General)
4. Special Conditions of Contract & Contract Data
5. General Information of The Project
6. General Technical Specifications
7. Special Technical Specifications
8. Schedule of Quantities (Tender schedule)
9. Drawings
10. Forms and Other Relevant Information (including Environmental Management Plans in case of
major projects)
11. List of mandatory tests
12. Preliminary agreement
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

8* Taking into consideration of the fact that fixing higher amount will reduce competition the rates of EMD has
been revised as follows vide GO (P) No. 429/2015/Fin dated 28.09.2015
.
Cost of work Amount of EMD
Upto Rs. 2 crores- 2.5% of the project cost, subject to a
maximum of Rs. 50,000/-
Above Rs. 2 crores - upto Rs. 1 lakh-
Rs. 5 crores-
Above Rs. 5 crores - upto Rs. 2 lakhs
Rs.10 crores-
Above Rs. 10 crores Rs. 5 lakhs
9* In e-tendering, online payment mechanism is introduced to collect EMD as per GO (Ms) No.08/2013/ITD dated
26.03.2013. The bidder shall pay EMD while submitting the bids online.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

133
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Notes: -
(i) When special conditions are introduced by the department in bid documents for a particular work,
the same shall be got approved by the next higher authority of the officer inviting tenders.
(ii) In the case of piecework contract, the bid documents shall consist of the details regarding
location, items of work or supplies for which rates are called for, rate of progress to be maintained,
and form of tender together with any other special conditions found necessary.

(iii) All documents must be self explanatory However if any bidder seeks clarification on any matters
in a tender document there is no objection for the officer accepting tenders to give clarification
needed, provided this does not in any way alter or modify, what is stated in the bid documents. If
in any special case such clarification, which may have the effect of modifying what is stated in the
bid documents, is found necessary and unavoidable, then such clarification shall be included in the
bid documents and intimated to those bidders who have already purchased tenders before the issue
of such clarification.
(iv) For items not included in the data book, standard specifications shall be prepared and incorporated
in BOQ.
(V)Agreement authority shall disclose the environmental issues of the Project during the pre-bid
meeting
The pages and drawings of each set of bid documents shall be numbered continuously. The total
number of pages of the documents and the number of drawing sheets forming part of the bid documents
shall be indicated on the cover sheet. Only one copy of the tender form shall be issued to one person
marked as original. However, additional copies may be sold marked as ‘Duplicate’ at specified prices.
Duplicate copies will not be accepted in place of original tender. When a tender document is sold, the
name and address of the person to whom it is sold shall be entered in the front cover page of the
documents under the dated initials of the person authorised to sell the document. Bid documents sold to
one party are not transferable to another.
It is necessary that the competent authorities in token of approval signs all pages, correction slips
and other corrections and modifications made in the bid documents. A slip showing such corrections and
modification shall be attached to the tender document before issue.
The bidder shall not make any addition, deletion or correction in any of the bid documents. If he has any
reservation, the details thereof shall be sent in a separate letter along with the tender.
2008.Submission 10*
It is important that the contractor shall examine the site condition and satisfy himself of the
availability of materials at nearby places, difficulties which may arise during execution etc. before
submitting the tender for the work.
1. Sealing and Marking of Tender
The bidder shall seal the tender with all relevant forms duly filled and bound and put in a
separate envelope duly marking on the envelope the following
a. Name of work with Tender No.
b. PAC
c. The concerned Circle, Division, Sub-division and section as the case may be
2. The envelope shall be addressed to the concerned officer inviting tender
3. The tender shall be sent by registered post or speed post so as to reach the officer inviting tender
before last date of receipt, sufficiently early.
2008.1. Late Bids
Any tender received by the employer after the deadline prescribed will be returned unopened to
the bidder.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10* In e-tendering the bid submission shall only be in online mode on the e-GP website as per vide GO (P)
No.72/2011/PWD dated 3.12.2011. The Bidders shall download the tender documents including the Bill of Quantity
(BoQ) file from the e tendering portal. The Bidder shall fill up the documents and submit the same online using their
Digital Signature Certificate. On successful submission of bids, a system generated receipt can be downloaded by
the Bidder for future reference. Copies of all certificates and documents shall be uploaded while submitting the
tender online.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

134
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2008.2. Tenders by Post

All tenders for works shall be received only by Registered/Speed Post of India Post. These tenders
shall be received up to the time fixed for receipt of tenders and such tenders shall be kept in safe custody of
the authorized officer. Postal delays shall not be considered as mitigating factor for late submission.
2009. Opening of Tenders
The tenders shall be opened at the appointed time, in the presence of such of the bidders or their
agents who may choose to be present.
If the officer who is to open the tender is on leave on tour or otherwise engaged, there shall be
standing arrangement by which a senior subordinate officer is authorized to open the tender on his behalf at
the appointed time and place. In case the opening date is declared a holiday the tenders shall be opened on the
next working day at the same hours and place as specified in the original notification. The postponement due
to declared holiday will not be applicable to submission of bids under e-tendering. The Divisional
Accountant/ Financial Assistant should invariably be present at the time of opening of tenders who will also
sign in the tender opening register. FA/DA should be the custodian of tenders after opening.
In case of postponement of sale and receipt of tender, proper notice for the same should be
posted in the web site of Public Works Department.
On opening the tender, the tenders for works which are to be opened on that day shall be serially
numbered work-wise indicating also the total number of tenders received for each work. The numbers
shall be written on the facing of envelope and also on the sheet of the corresponding tender after opening
eg. if 5 tenders are received the first shall be numbered 1/5, the second 2/5 as so on.
The officer opening the tender shall scrutinize the tender for any correction, omission etc. If any
tender is found defective in any respect, the fact shall be noted in the tender.
In case of percentage rate tender, the officer shall read out the percentage quoted. In case of item
rate tender, the total tendered amount either for the whole work of for each section and any additional
conditions, which a bidder has specified along with his tender, shall be readout.
If there is difference between the rates quoted in figures and in words the rates quoted in words
will alone be considered for tabulation and the officer will note in the tender in his own hand the rate to
be considered for evaluation of tenders. In case more than one rate is quoted in tender, the lowest shall
be considered for evaluation.
If there are mistakes in the amount for individual items or the total contract amount arrived at by
a tender the correct total figure arrived at based on quantities for individual items and the rates quoted by
the bidder will only be considered for evaluation of tenders.
The officer opening the tenders shall invariably record the date and initial all the corrections in
each tender. He shall also put his dated initial on all pages of the tender whether they contain or do not
contain corrections or over writings etc.
In case where there are corrections or overwriting on a page either in words or in figures or in
both, the number of such corrections and over writings shall be indicated by separate serial numbers.
The corrections/over writings shall be numbered as 1,2,3 etc. The total number of such corrections and
overwriting shall be clearly mentioned at the end or each page of the tender and the sum total in the last
page with the dated attestation of the officer. When there is no correction or overwriting in a page, the
fact shall be noted in that page under the initials of the officer.
Any ambiguity in units or rates quoted by the bidder shall be clearly marked on the concerned
page of the tender by the officer opening the tender. Where a bidder has omitted to quote the rate in
figures or in words, the officer opening the tender on the concerned page of the tender at the time of
opening the tender shall record the omission. When a bidder has omitted to quote rate for one or more
items, the tender shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected. After the tenders have been
opened the bidders or their agent a present shall be asked to sign in the tender register in token of their
having been present at the time of opening the tenders.
2009.1. Register of Tenders
All the tenders received shall be entered in a register of tenders in form given in Appendix 2000B as and
when they are received and their disposal watched till the contract is settled.
2009.2. Consideration and Tabulation of tenders
The officer inviting tenders may condone minor defects if any and allow the tender to be included for
tabulation. Such minor defects include:
(a) Omission to sign or include all or any of the plans with tender.

135
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

(b) Failure to produce the original chalan for remittance of E.M.D provided in its place the
temporary receipt given from the treasury is produced and the original chalan is produced before
the evaluation of tender is completed.
(c) Omission to total the different appendices.
(d) Failure to initial all or any of the pages provided he has signed in all the pages containing the
rates and in the page in which the tender offer is made.
(e) Failure to write rates in figures against-one or more items of the tender, provided the rates for
such items are unambiguously written in words.
The discretionary power of the officer opening the tender will be utilized to protect the interest of the
Government. A tabulation statement of the acceptable tender with a note on the merits of each shall
be prepared by the Technical Branch of the office and scrutinized by the head of the Technical
Branch. It shall also be examined by the Deputy Superintending Engineer in the case of Circle
Offices, Deputy Executive Engineer in Division offices and Drawing Branch in Sub Divisions, as
the case may be, before submission to the authority accepting the tender.
2009.3. Negotiation after opening of tender
There shall be no negotiation after opening of tenders.
2009.4. Approval of tender excess / quotation 11*
Normally the lowest tender/ quotation shall be accepted. If the quoted PAC for a work calculated
based on the rates quoted by the contractor is within the local market rate justification estimate, the tender
/ quotation shall be approved by the tendering authority. If the quoted PAC exceeds the local market rate
justification estimate amount the tendering authority shall reject the tender/ quotation and retender the
work or invite fresh quotation.
The tender / quotation shall be rejected in the following cases also.
1) Tender / quotation with additional conditions
2)
Tender / quotation with quoted PAC less than 75% of the estimate PAC. 12*

11* All tender excess upto 10% above estimated rate or LMR whichever is less, shall be approved by the Executive
Engineer for the TS amount upto Rs. 25 lakhs, Superintending Engineer upto Rs.75 lakhs. Tender excess above 10%
shall be rejected and retendered in normal case. In the case of urgency, these shall be sanctioned at higher level.
(GO (P) No. 375/2015/Fin dated 24.08.2015).
The committee constituted by Chief Engineer/ Head of the Department as Chairperson, Deputy Chief Engineer/
Technical Officer, Head of Finance Division, Tender Inviting Authority and a representative from Administrative
Department (in case of deposit works) as members shall sanction tender excess in respect of works exceeding
delegated powers of departmental officers.(GO (P) No. 16/2017/Fin dated 06.02.2017).
As per GO (P) No. 324/2015/Fin dated 30.07.2015, in the case of singe bid, (if only one bid is received or only one
bid is found eligible after technical evaluation) during the 1st tender, tender inviting authority shall not open the bid
or may either opt to re-tender the work or extend the last date of acceptance by 15 working days. If no bid is
received during the extended time, then re-tender shall be resorted to. As per GO (P) No. 154/2018/Fin dated
01.10.2018, the single bid during re-tendering for the tenders invited by Assistant Executive Engineers shall be
considered by the tender committees at Executive Engineer’s level constituted with concerned Assistant Executive
Engineer, Deputy Executive Engineer and Divisional Accountant as members and for the tenders invited by
Executive Engineers shall be considered by the tender committees at Superintending Engineer’s level with
concerned Executive Engineer, Deputy Superintending Engineer and Financial Assistant as members.
12* As per GO (P) No. 124/2016/Fin dated 29.08.2016
i. The tender with lowest quoted rate less than 75% estimated PAC shall not be rejected if sufficient
competition is ensured and the rate quoted by the second and third lowest bidder are also comparatively
nearer to the lowest bidder.
ii. The tender inviting authority shall obtain a statement from the lowest bidder quoting rates below PAC
regarding the reasonableness of the rate quoted to assess that whether the quoted rates are workable.
iii. Assessment shall be made by Department also, as to whether the particular work has any rate advantage as
compared to the rate as given in Price Software viz. reduction in cost of bitumen, steel etc.
iv. If any contractor quotes less than 75% of the estimated PAC and variation with all other quoted rates are
much higher, the tender accepting authority shall take appropriate decision based on merits.

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

136
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2009.5. Firm period

The firm period of a tender is the period from, the date of opening of the tender to the date upto. which the
offer given in the tender is binding on the bidder. The firm period is fixed as the maximum time required
within which a decision can be taken on the tender and order of acceptance issued in writing to the bidder
which shall not exceed two months 13* in the normal course. The consideration of tenders and decision there
on shall be completed well before the date of expiry of the firm period noted in the tender so that the letter of
acceptance is sent before the expiry of the firm period. If delay is anticipated, the officer who invited the
tenders shall get the consent of the lowest two bidders for extending the firm period by one month or more as
required. In case the lowest or any bidder refuses to extend the firm period that tender cannot be considered.
All officers concerned with the consideration of tenders, shall deal with them expeditiously to settle the
contract before the expiry of the firm period.
2009.6.Selection Notice
After it is decided to accept a tender, selection notice in the form of letter of acceptance as per bidding
documents shall be issued to the bidder by the tendering authority within seven days or before the expiry of
firm period whichever is earlier. The officer who is competent to enter into the contract shall send this notice
through registered post/courier service/e-mail. The date of registration shall be the date of acceptance of the
tender irrespective of the date when the communication is actually delivered to the bidder. In urgent cases,
acceptance of a tender can also be communicated by telegram/ and or SMS to be followed by selection notice
in proper form. In such cases, the date of filing of the telegram / sending the SMS shall be the date of
acceptance of the tender. Copy of the notice shall also be sent to the subordinate officer under the control of
the work. In the selection notice the selected contractor will be notified to execute an agreement within a
maximum period of fourteen days14* from the date of acceptance of the tender. Fine at the rate of 1% of
contract amount subject to a minimum amount of Rs. 1000 and a maximum amount of Rs. 25,00015* shall be
levied if agreement is not executed within ten days after the notified period of fourteen days14*.
The successful bidder shall execute the agreement within 14 days14* or with fine within next 10 days from the
date of selection notice. In case of failure to execute the agreement within this period, tendering authority
shall cancel the offer of contract forfeiting the EMD and taking such other actions as mentioned in the bidding
document. After canceling, the offer of contract in the above case, the tendering authority may negotiate with
the next lowest bidder and award the work to him if he expresses his willingness in writing to execute the
work at the accepted rate of the default bidder. Otherwise the work will be re-tendered.
2009.7 Performance Security Deposit16*
The selected bidder shall produce a security deposit equal to 10%16* of the contract amount in the form of
Bank Guarantee from any nationalized or scheduled Bank which shall remain valid till 28 days from the
completion of the defect liability period.

13* 120 days for works costing above Rs. 5 crores. (GO (P) No.3/2017/PWD dated 09.08.2017)

14* 28 days for works costing above Rs. 5 crores. (GO (P) No.3/2017/PWD dated 09.08.2017
)
15* Rs. 25,000/- for works costing above Rs. 5 crores. (GO (P) No.3/2017/PWD dated 09.08.2017)

16* Substituted with the term “Performance Guarantee” (GO (P) No.429/2015/Fin dated 28.09.2015) and will be
5% of the agreed PAC. At least fifty percent (50%) of this deposit shall be collected in the form of Treasury Fixed
Deposit and the rest in the form of guarantee issued from the Nationalized /Scheduled Bank/ Kerala Financial
Corporation. (GO (P) No.168/2018/Fin dated 02.11.2018).
Performance Security Deposit is the retention amount, which shall be deducted at 2.5% of the gross amount of each
running bill so that total of Performance Security Deposit is 2.5% of the value of work done. This can be released
against bank guarantee on its accumulation of a minimum amount of Rs. 5 lakhs subject to the condition that the
amount of BG except the last one shall not be less than Rs. 5 lakhs. This amount will be released after passing the
final bill as in the case of refund of deposit (GO (P) No.429/2015/Fin dated 28.09.2015).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--

137
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

The performance security deposit less any amount due from the contractor shall be returned to him, on written
application in the form given in Appendix 2000D, after 28 days from the date of completion of the defect
liability period.17*
If the bid of the successful bidder is unbalanced in any item in the case of item rate contract or in total in the
case of percentage rate contract, relation to the estimate, the difference in cost should be deposited as
performance security deposit for unbalanced price19* in addition to the normal performance security deposit.
2009.8 Release of Bid Security
The Bid Security (EMD) will be released to the selected bidder after he furnishes the above Performance
Security deposit or Bank Guarantee and duly enters into the contract.20*

17* Defects liability period for different type of works are as under (GO (MS) No.73/2013 dated 31.08.2013)

Sl Type of work Defects Liability period

No.
1 Original works- Buildings and Bridges 36 months
2 New road construction including sub base and base and BM & BC 36 months
surfacing
3 New road construction including sub base and base and surfacing 24 months 18*
with specification other than BM & BC
4 Surface renewal with BM & BC 24 months 18*
5 Surface renewal with minimum 30mm BC/SDBC or specifications 18 months
for similar standards
6 Surface renewal with minimum 20mm chipping carpet or 12 months
specifications for similar standards
7 Ordinary repairs and maintenance of Roads & Buildings 6 months
8 Special repairs of Roads & Buildings 18 months
9 Road markings using thermoplastic paint 12 months
10 Retro reflective sign boards & direction boards 36 months
11 Temporary works Defects Liability period will be fixed
based on use period and will be
specified in each case by Agreement
Authority

18* Warranty period for BM & BC works shall be minimum three years as per Govt. Circular No. PWD-
G3/39/2017/PWD dated 03.02.2017.

19* Additional Performance Guarantee (GO (P) No.19/2016/Fin dated 03.02.2016) will be required in all cases
where quoted rate falls below 10% of the estimate cost. (If the rate quoted by the bidder for an item of work is "x%"
below estimate cost where x lies above 10%, the additional performance guarantee for that item of work is equal to
(x-10)% of the estimate amount for that item of work). The total of additional performance guarantee for the whole
work is the total of individual additional performance guarantee for each item of work calculated as above.

20* In e- tendering the EMD will be released in the following stages (GO (MS) No.11/2013/ITD dated 10.04.2013)
a) After opening of bid (for incomplete bids or withdrawal of bids)
b) After Technical Bid Evaluation (rejected bids)
c) After Financial Bid Evaluation (all bids other than L1 and L2)
d) EMD of L2 bidder after award of contract/ execution of agreement with L1
e) EMD of Successful bidder (L1) after execution of agreement. (GO (P) No.104/2014/Fin dated 14.03.2014)

138
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2010. Agreement
The agreement for the work shall be got executed by the Contractor with Department in the form
prescribed in the bidding document after the award of contract within the period specified in the
selection notice and duly entered into the register of agreement as per Appendix 2000E.
The agreement shall include:
i. Original tender, plan and all accompaniments thereof.
ii. Acceptance letter from the authority awarding the contract together with copies of
correspondence, if any referred therein.
iii. Accepted schedule with conditions of contract.
iv. Agreement in stamp paper to the prescribed value.
v. The MoRT&H or the relevant BIS/NBC codes shall also be considered as part of the bid
documents though individual copies are not attached to such contract documents and the
contractor shall comply with relevant BIS/NBC codes and MoRTH Specifications.
In the case of agreements executed in Circle offices, the agreements shall be prepared in Triplicate
and all copies signed by the Contractor and the officer who executed the Agreement. The copies shall be
stamped “Original” “Duplicate” and “Triplicate”. Th e copy marked “Original” shall be in stamp paper
an d shall be sent for safe custody with the principal disbursing officer. The copy marked “Duplicate”
will be given to the contractor and the officer who executes the agreement will retain the copy marked
“Triplicate”. In the case, of agreement executed in Divisions, Sub divisions and Sections the officer who
executes the agreement will himself be the principal disbursing officer and therefore the custodian of
such agreements. In this case the third copy of the agreements will not be necessary. Attested copies of
agreements shall be forwarded to the subordinate officers responsible for preparation and scrutiny of
bills. In case of contracts executed in Circle office, copies shall be sent to the Accountant General as
well.
The physical custody of all original agreement executed in the Division and the Circle office will be
with the Divisional Accountant of the Division. In the case of Agreements executed in Sub Divisions the
physical custody of the original agreement will be with the Head Clerk and in Sections with the clerk
concerned. The custodian shall keep a register of all original agreements in the form given in Appendix
2000F.
This register and the concerned original agreements shall be handed over and acknowledgement
obtained in the register at the time of relinquishing of charge by the custodian officer.
Original tenders other than the accepted one shall be retained in the Technical Branch of the office of the
accepting authority for a period of one year after the award of contract, and destroyed thereafter.
The accepted rates shall remain firm during the contract period. For works for which TS is
issued by the Chief Engineer and having time of completion more than 18 months, the rates shall remain
firm during the contract period and subject to adjustments as per price adjustment clause prescribed in
the bidding document.
If a work has to be urgently carried out on account of natural calamities and other emergent
reasons, such as VVIP/VIP visits and repairs to Minister’s quarters the officer who is competent to
arrange the work shall do so through contract agencies in accordance with the provisions in the Manual
and if it is not feasible through other systems like piecework system, departmental execution or such
other means as may be found most expedient. In such a situation, he may sent immediately
communication to the Chief Engineer or the head of District Administration as the case may be by the
fastest possible means and immediately thereafter seek confirmative approval of competent authority. As
early as possible after arranging the work, sanction of the competent authority shall be obtained for the
expenditure on the work and the manner of execution.
2011Withdrawal of Tenders
Once the tender is submitted a bidder cannot withdraw his tender or make any modifications not
acceptable to the Department. Any contravention of the above will entail forfeiture of the earnest money.
If the Department for any reason fails to issue selection notice to a bidder before the expiry of the
firm period, or extended firm period mutually agreed to, his tender will stand nullified automatically
unless revived by mutual consent.
Note: -A Selection notice will be valid if it is sent by registered post on or before the date of expiry of
the firm period or extended firm period.

139
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2012 Waiving of Tender Calls

In appropriate case, powers have been delegated to various officers to waive tender calls as
indicated in Section 200. (Appendix) In case it has been decided to resort waiving of tender calls. It shall
be done subject to the powers delegated in this regard.
2013 Quotation
The award of contract shall be made after obtaining sealed competitive quotations in case of
emergency as per delegation of powers for waiving of tender calls fixing a period of three days from the
date of publication of quotation notice. This type of arrangement shall also be adopted in a situation
detailed under section 2013.1. The quotations need not be published in newspapers 21* but shall be
published in the notice boards of all Section, Subdivision and Division offices in the locality. Earnest
Money Deposit as per clause shall be remitted in both the above cases. However cost of quotation
schedule is exempted. For works of most urgent nature such as those relating to V.V.I.P visits,
restoration for natural disasters, rectification works for road breaches and blocks failure of structures and
leakage of water supply and sewage lines and works of similar nature if the competent authority feels
that the above mode of arrangement would delay the rectification work, he shall obtain negotiated
quotation and award the work to the lowest bidder, considering the arrangement as waiving of tender
calls. In this case the officer concerned shall sanction excess in rates up to a maximum limit of estimated
cost based on WPI and CPI indices rates fixed by the Executive Engineer, Buildings Division of the
concerned district. While exercising this power, the concerned officer will report the details to the
immediate superior officer.
When tenders have been called for a work in accordance with Section-2003 and there is no response or
all the tenders received are unsatisfactory and have to be rejected, and it is considered that a call for
further tenders will be futile or if the work is of an urgent nature, the officer, who is competent to accept
the tender may invite sealed competitive quotations. In case it is not possible to obtain any quotations as
above he shall obtain negotiated quotations and award the work to the lowest bidder. In either case, such
an action to award the work to the lowest bidder shall not be considered as waiving of tender call. But
should be reported to the Chief Engineer.
2013.1. Negotiated Quotation
In exceptional cases the officers of the PWD will be authorized to take up works within their
powers waving of tender calls, allowing tender excess up to a maximum limit of the estimated cost based
on the market rates fixed by the Executive Engineer of the concerned district. While exercising this
power the concerned officer will report to the immediate superior officer.
2014 Splitting up Tenders:
Generally splitting up of works for the purpose of limiting to the expenditure to the powers
delegated shall not be resorted to. However it may sometimes be more expedient to split and award a
work to different contractors with a view to expeditious completion and or on grounds of economy. In
such cases the officer competent to enter into contract for the whole work shall decide the manner in
which the work may be split up and also whether separate tenders may be invited for the different split
up portions of the work or a single tender for the whole work may be invited indicating therein the
manner of splitting up proposed. In the latter case when evaluating the tenders the alternative of splitting
the work among different contractors, or awarding more than one split up item to the same contractor,
shall be examined, taking into consideration the speed of completion and the cost. The tender
notification shall specify that the department reserves the right to split the contract in the manner given
in the notice and calls for the time of completion of individual parts as well as for the whole work.
Splitting shall not be resorted to if it is not provided for in the tender notice.
Splitting of works shall be resorted to only with the approval of the authority, who has accorded
Administrative Sanction for the subject work.

21* All quotations shall be floated through the e-tender portal only with a short tender cycle. (GO (P) No.
375/2015/Fin dated 24.08.2015). The Chief Engineers can arrange works on a quotation basis during emergent
situations subject to budget provision and within an annual ceiling of 50 times to the existing financial powers and
the other departmental officers shall sanction quotation works upto a maximum of 10 times of the existing delegated
powers in a financial year. Any quotation exceeding the above limit shall be sanctioned only with the prior approval
of the Secretary of the Administrative Department.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

140
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2015. Limited Tender

Limited tender shall be adopted for works of most urgent nature relating to V.V.I.P. visits, natural
calamities or other reasons, which are to be completed in the minimum time. This type of tender is
necessitated also for security reasons and for maintaining secrecy. In this type of tender, the schedule
shall be sold only to intending bidders included in a list of selected contractors maintained for the
purpose by the Executive Engineer based on the performance certificate of the contractor, as on 1st
April. The list shall be reviewed once every two years before 15th April. The provisions relating to
waiving of tender called shall be applicable in this case also.
2016. E-Tendering
The process of inviting, accepting and processing tenders and communicating through the
medium of Internet is termed as E-tendering. The e-tendering system facilitates complete tendering
process from advertising tender notice to the placing of the contract. Measurements of works done and
payment thereof are also envisaged under e-tendering. This includes the exchange of all relevant
documents in electronic format. E-tendering shall have the following processes:
All the contractors shall be separately registered for E-Tendering. The officers competent to
invite tenders publish the tender notices in the web site http://www.keralapwd.gov.in 22* of Public
Works Department. The tender notice will be published along with the documents, which are usually
termed as Bid documents.
Contractors, registered for E-Tendering, shall download the tender notice and bid documents and
can submit tenders online which shall remain strictly confidential. The cost of tender forms shall be paid
while submitting the tender, by providing the proof of payment or by making on line payment. At the
appointed time the competent authority can open tenders online using a private key. Further processing
of tenders and issuing selection notice to the successful tenderer shall be done online. Measurement and
progress of works done shall also be recorded online. E-payment is envisaged under e-tendering as per
which payment of works done shall be credited to the bank account of the contractor instead of issuing
cheques.
2017. Vendor Development
The program for providing training to the new generation contractors who are qualified in civil
engineering shall be conducted by the HRD wing of the department. The objective shall be to attract
interest from new generation contractors into the construction industry.

SECTION 2100
2101. Contract Management.
2101.1. General
All officers concerned with the supervision, management and control of contract works shall
thoroughly familiarize themselves with the general and special conditions of contract, the technical details and
specifications of the work. The officer who has executed a contract agreement shall be responsible for the
proper execution of the work as per specifications in accordance with the conditions of contract. There shall
be advance planning of each item of work to keep up the progress of work specified in the agreement. For this
advanced methods in planning and management techniques shall be adopted.
This planning shall be done in accordance with the schedule of work and the time frame fixed for the
project, by the Assistant Engineer or Assistant Executive Engineer in respect of contracts entered into by
them, or by the Executive Engineer in respect of other works. The contractor shall abide by the planning
schedule of the concerned authority and direction of the field Engineers. All preliminaries such as
removal of hindrances like underground cables, pipelines, electric posts, etc., shall be completed before
the award of contract. Difficulties if any shall be brought to the notice of the head of departments
concerned or to government. Where delay is anticipated, the matter shall be brought to the notice of the
authority who executed the agreement so that the date of commencement may be fixed suitably in
consultation with the contractor.

22* www.etenders.kerala.gov.in is the official e-GP (e-tendering) website for publishing and processing of
the departments’ tenders approved vide GO (P) No.72/2011/PWD dated 3.12.2011
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
141
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2102. Contractor’s authorized agent

The contractor shall if possible, be present himself at the site of work. In case this is not possible,
he shall appoint an authorised agent who shall be present at the site of work. The agent so appointed
shall be responsible to act on behalf of the contractor in all matters as far as the contract is concerned
except to sign agreements or to receive payments. Contractor shall engage Engineering personal as
prescribed in the bidding document.
2102.1. Handing over the site
After executing the agreement the contractor or his authorised agent shall take over the site from
the Assistant Engineer within ten days and commence the work immediately. If the contractor does not
turn up, the acknowledgement form for handing over of site duly signed by the Assistant Engineer shall
be sent to the contractor through registered post and it shall be deemed that the contractor has taken over
the site from the date of posting. The contractor shall sign an acknowledgement in the form given in
Appendix 2100A or his authorised agent while the site is taken over by the contractor. The Assistant
Engineer shall forward copy of acknowledgement directly to the agreement authority under intimation to
the other officers. For roads works in case the entire area is not available to be handed over at one
stretch, the site shall be handed over in stages according to availability. In such cases, the program of
construction shall be so phased as to fit in the availability of land and contractor shall accept the program
so prepared. The officer under the control of the work shall see that the contractor complies with the
conditions regarding use and care of site.
2102.2. Working Drawings
For all works except maintenance, it may be necessary to supply working drawings giving full
details of the work. Such working drawings may be prepared by the site Engineers of the contractor and
may be adopted with the approval of the officer who has executed the agreement. Where, however, there
is substantial variation contemplated from what is provided for in the original design, modifications shall
not be approved, except with the approval of the authority who gave technical sanction to the estimate.
Wherever necessary, approved working drawings may be made to form part of the contract.
2102.3. Setting out of works
Before starting any work, the work shall be set out on the ground as per approved plans. The
responsibility for setting out a work is that of the contractor as per terms of contract. It is however necessary
that the setting out is checked and approved by the departmental Officers. This shall be done by the Assistant
Engineer for works within his T.S. Powers and the Assistant Executive Engineer in other cases. If in the
course of checking, the Assistant Engineer or the Assistant Executive Engineer feels that the advice of any
higher authority is necessary he shall refer the matter to such higher authority and abide by his instructions.
The Agreement Authority may in the case of major works, direct that the setting out shall be got checked and
approved by an officer of rank higher than that of an Assistant Executive Engineer. All benchmarks and
setting out marks to be adopted for a work shall be of a permanent nature.
It is desirable to have more than one benchmark and these shall be properly interconnected to enable
checking on a future date. The position of these benchmarks and setting out marks shall be shown in a
sketch drawn in the field book and the work spot order book.
2102.4. Approval of Foundations
Works for which the Assistant Engineer/ Assistant Executive Engineer executes agreement, all
foundations have to be approved by the concerned officer. If any advice regarding the bearing capacity
or adequacy of a foundation is required then the Assistant Engineer/Assistant Executive Engineer shall
refer the matter to the Executive Engineer who shall take a final decision in the matter, immediately after
it is brought to his notice. For works, agreements for which are executed by an officer higher than the
rank of an Assistant Executive Engineer, the Executive Engineer shall inspect and approve the
foundation. If he feels that a change is required in the foundation of a work for which estimate is
technically sanctioned by a higher authority, he shall refer the matter to the authority that sanctioned the
estimate, which will be finally competent to order a deviation. The Assistant Engineer/Assistant
Executive Engineer shall inform Executive Engineer of any change required as above through
consultation or a note on the changes required which shall be submitted directly. The Executive
Engineer shall take a decision himself or refer the matter to the Superintending Engineer or Chief
Engineer through discussions and similar notes. In any case, a decision on the change shall be taken in
the minimum time possible, so that the program for completion is not affected.

142
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

In case of well foundations of bridges, the concerned Superintending Engineer shall approve the
plugging/ seating. Where a work contains several sub items, the Executive Engineer may delegate the
responsibility of inspecting and approving the foundation of some minor items to the Assistant
Executive Engineer concerned, provided such minor items are independent structures and will not affect
the safety of the main structure concerned or the work as a whole.
2103. Quality Control
Every work has to be properly supervised to ensure that it is carried out in accordance with the
required specifications. Effective supervision shall be insisted for maintaining quality of all items of
work. Where there is no specification for a particular item described in the schedule, the specification of
the item in the MoRTH/ NBC as the case may be, or the Indian Standard Specification shall be adopted.
Every officer and subordinate controlling the construction of the work shall be fully conversant with
these specifications. Any deviation from the standards prescribed shall be reported fourth-with by the
Assistant Engineer to the Assistant Executive Engineer. The Overseer under the control of a work shall
be responsible for maintaining quality of all items of work. They are bound to act according to the duties
and responsibilities laid to them as detailed in section 200. It will also be the duty of the Assistant
Engineer and other inspecting officers to check the quality of works to see that the specifications are
properly followed. If any bad work is noticed even though passed by a subordinate officer, it shall be
ordered to be removed forth with, at the cost of the contractor. Important items like R.C.C. in works
above T.S. powers of Assistant Engineer shall be carried out only in the presence of the Assistant
Executive Engineer. The Assistant Executive Engineer may delegate supervision of small items of
R.C.C. work like lintels, covering slab, sunshade and other similar items to Assistant Engineer, in case
he is unable to be present at the time of concreting. Plain cement concrete works for levelling course,
side drains and other similar items shall be done in the presence of the Overseer in charge. However,
plain concrete works for major structures shall be done only in the presence of the Assistant Engineer. In
all major works, the Executive Engineer shall decide, the items, which are to be done in his presence.
Quality control shall be effected as per the provisions of the chapter on Quality Control. Certificates as
required in this chapter shall also be insisted.
• A list of mandatory tests should be prepared and attached with the tender documents
• Test Registers should be issued to all officers under the control of the work by Executive
Engineer.
• Test Reports of all mandatory tests should be submitted along with the final bill of the work.

2103.1. Sub Standard Work

If any work done is found defective or not in accordance with the specification, the Engineer
under the control of the work may order its removal and re-construction or its rectification is deemed fit.
The contractor is bound to carry out such removal and re-construction or rectification at his cost. The
Engineer shall refer the matter to the agreement authority, who will decide whether to accept reject or
rectify the same. In case it is decided to be accepted, the agreement authority will also decide the rate at
which the work may be accepted.
2104. Issue, use and care of departmental materials
No departmental materials shall be issued to the contractor from the department. Bitumen required for
the work shall be issued from the department for works costing up to TS powers of the Superintending
Engineer.
2105. Work spot order book
For all works exceeding TS powers of Assistant Executive Engineer a work spot order book
shall be maintained in the prescribed form in Appendix 2100B at the site of work. The following
instructions shall be followed in maintaining work spot order book.
1. Each page of the book shall be machine numbered. The books shall be serially numbered and a
register of work spot order books shall be maintained in the Section office.
2. The Overseer under the control of the supervision of the work shall be responsible for the safe
custody and maintenance of the book issued to him for a particular work.
3. The Overseer at site shall record in the Work spot order book, the day-today progress of
the work; procurement of materials, inspecting officers shall record their remarks and
instructions in the work spot order book.
The work spot order book shall invariably be perused and initialed with date by the Assistant
Engineer in charge, during his inspection, irrespective of whether he has any remarks to offer or not.

143
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

The work spot order book shall not be treated as a substitute for measurement book or field book.
The orders issued by the inspecting officers shall be recorded in the work spot order book. If such orders
are beyond his competence, the officer issuing the orders shall address the appropriate authority and
obtain ratification. The instructions and orders issued through the work spot order book will be binding
on the departmental subordinates at site. The Overseer shall submit copies of the instructions to the
Assistant Engineer. The Assistant Engineer shall communicate copies of instructions to be complied
with by the contractor to him in writing.
2106. Progress Report
The Progress reports of works are very important for Department and Government, which enables
them to monitor progress of work and to complete the work in time so as to fulfill the commitment to the
public. For budgeted works, progress report in the prescribed form in Appendix 2100C1 shall be forwarded
by the Assistant Engineer on or before the third day of every month and these shall be consolidated and
forwarded to the Executive Engineer before 7th of every month by the Assistant Executive Engineer. The
Executive Engineer shall forward consolidated progress report of works in his division to the Chief Engineer
and Superintending Engineer before 15th of every month. The observations made by these officers after
analyzing the progress report and instructions if any shall be forwarded to all the subordinate officers
immediately after receipt of the progress report. However, the field officer concerned shall give maximum
effort to avoid unnecessary delays in the execution of works.
The Executive Engineer shall review progress of other works monthly, the Superintending
Engineer quarterly and the Chief Engineer half yearly. Conferences and their observations shall be
recorded in the minutes, which shall be forwarded to all subordinate officers. The Physical and Financial
progress of each work shall be analyzed in detail with the concerned field officer and bottlenecks, if any,
discussed and remedial measures suggested for speedy execution of the work. The form of the progress
report is as given in Appendix 2100C2
2107. Safety provisions
The Overseer under the control of a work shall ensure that all safety provisions given in
Appendix 2100D applicable to the work are complied with. He shall arrange to take corrective steps
wherever required. The inspecting officers shall also examine whether such provisions are adhered to.
2108. Labour
As per the provisions of the Contract Labour Regulation and Abolition Act 1970, the Executive
Engineer is considered to be the principal employer of labour in respect of those employed by the
contractors carrying out the work in his Division. It is therefore the duty of the Executive Engineer and
his subordinate officers under the control of the works to ensure that the labour laws are properly
complied with.
2109. Measurements and payments:
Payment for the works within the TS powers of the Superintending Engineer shall be based on
measurements recorded at various stages of the work by the Overseer/ Assistant Engineer as the case
may be and duly checked by superior officers. The contractor or his authorised agent shall be present at
the time of recording of each set of measurements and shall sign the measurement book and/or level
field book in token of his acceptance. If the contractor fails to be present at the time of taking
measurements either in person or through his authorised agent or fails to accept the measurements or file
objections to the measurements with reasons before check measurement, the measurements taken by the
Engineer / Overseer shall be deemed to be correct subject to check measurements.
The measurement book in the form given in Appendix 2100E1 is the original record of actual
measurements. Except for quantities of work paid on level basis, all measurements are recorded in the
measurement book. Works for which the Assistant engineer has accorded TS the Overseer shall record
the measurements. The measurements shall be checked by an officer higher in rank to the officer who
has recorded the measurement, but not by an officer below the rank of an Assistant Engineer. If an
Assistant Engineer holds full additional charge of a Sub division, the Executive Engineer shall nominate
another officer under his Division, not below the rank of an Assistant Executive Engineer to check the
measurements recorded by the Assistant Engineer, who holds additional charge. All measurements shall
be recorded directly in the measurement book or in the field book and the description shall be lucid to
enable easy identification and check. All the Measurement books and Field books belonging to each
Division shall be numbered serially and pages of each book shall be machine numbered and a register of
them shall be maintained in K.P.W. Form 84 in the Division Office, showing the serial number of each
book, names of sections to which issued, the date of issue and date of return so that its eventual return to
the Division Office may be watched. The completed measurement books shall be sent to the Division
Office for final record.

144
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

The above procedure shall be adopted for the maintenance of Standard Measurement books also.
A movement register shall be maintained in the Section, Sub Division and Division offices for noting the
receipt and return of measurement books and LF books.
As a general rule, earth work shall be measured by level section where the total quantity exceeds
300 cum. and where the site conditions are such that level sections, will give correct indications of the
quantity of work involved. If the site conditions are not suitable for working out the quantities through
level sections, orders of the officer who accorded technical sanction shall be obtained for taking
measurements otherwise, than by level sections in cases where the total quantity exceeds 300 cum.
Where level sections are taken for computing the quantity of earth work the initial levels and final levels
shall be entered in properly numbered field books (Appendix 2100E2) by the concerned Assistant
Engineer. Computerized calculation methods shall be utilized for earthwork computation wherever
available. The agreement authority shall approve the proposals for earthwork in the initial level sheets.
The method of measurement as indicated in the standard data book in metric system shall be followed.
Where there is no specific direction in this matter in the standard data book, the Indian standard method
of measurement for building work shall be followed (I.S. 1200 as amended from time to time).
Electronics device shall be utilized for earthwork computation as far as possible wherever
available in which case computerized print out duly signed by the contractor and verified by the
Assistant Engineer checked by the Assistant Executive Engineer shall be treated as records.
If an item of work is measured in incomplete stages, up to date measurements shall be recorded
each time and the quantity for payment at any stage shall be worked out by deducting the total quantity
already paid from the up to date quantity measured at that time.
In making interim payments, care shall be taken to see that no over payments are made. For this
purpose, if tape measurements are taken for earthwork, requiring level calculation a deduction of not less
than 10 percent shall be made in the quantity assessed for payment.
In case of works, which will be covered up, measurements shall be taken prior to such covering
up and got verified checked and accepted even though a bill may not be immediately due.
In case of works like demolition of an existing structure etc., which cannot be measured
after execution of the work, pre measurement of the work to be done shall be taken and got
check measured before the commencement of the work.
Payment for the works above the TS powers of the Superintending Engineers shall be based on
measurements / reduced level recorded and signed by the contractor in computer format at various stages
of the works duly verified by the Assistant Engineer and checked by the Assistant Executive Engineer.
The measurement shall be in computerized M-Book format. In quadruplicate the measurements shall be
verified by Assistant Engineer and checked the Assistant Executive Engineers and two copies to be
returned to the contractor. One copy of this approved measurement shall be accompanied with the bills
submitted by the contractor. The bill shall be prepared and submitted by the contractor in quadruplicate
supported by approved measurement with soft copy. The contractor shall jointly be responsible for the
correctness and completeness of the measurements with the verifying and checking officers.
Computerized level field books to be issued and maintained in the same way as computerized
th
measurement books as 5 para noted above.
The items of test check by Executive Engineer should invariably include
R.C.C./Reinforcement/other high value item which will also ensure structural safety.
Interim bills may be paid at suitable intervals according to the stage of execution of the work
subject to availability of funds. Assistant Engineer/Contractor shall prepare the bill on the basis of
measurements taken by him and deal with it after getting the bill accepted by the contractor. After
verification and check measurement, the Assistant Executive Engineer or Executive Engineer will pass
the bill and effect payments as per powers delegated to them.
Payment for deposit works shall be made by the concerned officers as per powers delegated for
passing and payments of bills.
2110. Payment of Work Bills
The officer competent to make payment for the work bill will be authorized to effect payment up
to a maximum of 75 % of the bill amount without detailed scrutiny in his office, if the officer himself is
satisfied of genuineness of the bills subject to the condition that if any excess payment is noticed, the
officer who authorized the payment will be held responsible. The officer, who passes the bill, before
making payment, will record a certificate to this effect in the bill (refer clause 2214 also).

145
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2111. Deviations and Extra Items

Alterations in sanctioned designs, except of a minor nature, shall not be made in a work without
the approval of the TS authority. The agreement authority shall be kept informed then and there of all
deviations ordered by authorities subordinate to him. All deviations, which involve major structural
alterations, whether excess cost is involved or not shall be reported to the authority who technically
sanctioned the estimate and his approval obtained before effecting the deviation.
The Engineers under the control of the work shall be careful to adhere to the estimate as far as
possible and shall not carry out excess quantities as a matter of course. If, however, in any item, excess
over estimate quantity is inevitable and has to be carried out, the authority competent to sanction the
excess amount involved shall deal with the case and concurrently report the fact to the Agreement
Authority. If excess is due to additional works not contemplated in the estimate, it will not be justifiable
to carry out the additional works without sanction of the authority that sanctioned the estimate. Once it is
decided that excess quantity in an item shall be carried out, the contractor shall be notified in writing to
that effect by the Engineer. The agreed rate for the concerned item shall be applicable for excess quantity
in that item upto 25% of the agreed quantity and upto 1% of the contract price. For excess beyond this
limit, and for the extra items the agreement authority shall fix the rate by negotiation with the contractor
for works within their powers of T.S. and by the Chief Engineer the Government in other cases.
• Deviation from the quantities in agreement which may result in exceeding the contract value
shall be taken up only after the approval of the competent authority.
• Extra/substitution of item shall be executed only after the approval of the competent authority.

2112.Extension of Time
Time shall be considered as the essence of contract except in the case of piecework contract. The
contractor shall submit a chronological programme for execution of each stage of work before executing
agreement which shall be examined by the agreement authority and the approved programme form part
of the agreement. If it is found that contractor is not adhering to the approved programme fine shall be
imposed / contract terminated as contemplated in the Standard Bidding Document. If however the failure
of the contractor to complete the work on the stipulated date is due to any departmental delays or due to
design and construction problems faced during execution, then he may apply for extension of time
through the Assistant Engineer before the expiry of the period of completion. This shall follow the
procedure of the Bidding Document. Every such application shall be properly enquired into by the
Assistant Engineer /Assistant Executive Engineer under the control and a report with recommendation
shall be submitted in proforma given in Appendix 2100F to the authority who executed the agreement.
The extension of time of completion that can be granted at a time shall not exceed 25% of the
original time or six months whichever is less. The maximum extension that can be granted for a work
shall be limited to half the original time of completion.
2112.1. Fines for Extension of Time of completion
The Contractor is bound to complete the work within the stipulated period as per the agreement.
When the contract period has to be extended wholly or partly due to default on the part of the contractor,
the Agreement Authority may sanction extension of time after imposing fine prescribed in the bidding
document.
It is also open to the agreement authority to refuse sanction to a modified program or extension
of time if such modification or extension is wholly or partly due to default on the part of the contractor.
The agreement authority may in such cases cancel the contract and arrange the balance work following
the procedure laid down in the General Conditions of contract / standard bidding document and
rearrange the work within ninety days from the date of order of termination.
Application for extension of time from the contractor shall in all cases be made before the expiry
of the time of completion as per agreement. The Assistant Engineer shall submit the application received
from the contactor to Assistant Executive Engineer with his remarks / recommendations regarding the
genuineness of the reasons stated by the contractor. If the contractor fails to make such application in
time as mentioned above the contract will stand terminated on the expiry of the time of completion
stipulated in the agreement including extension already sanctioned. In case there is no default on the part
of the contractor the termination will not attract any penalty. When there is default on the part of the
contractor, he shall he liable for penalties as per general conditions of contract for termination.
The contractor shall not execute any work as per the agreement after the expiry of the time of
completion unless the agreement authority duly sanctions extension of time. If any work is carried out by
the contractor in contravention to this, the same shall be treated as unauthorised and no payment will be
146
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

made for such work. The department will also have the right to claims from the contractor, cost of
dismantling and removing such unauthorised works. Departmental officers shall be responsible for the
delay in completion of a project if the delay is attributed due to lapses on their part.
Fines for extension of time
Period Rate of fine
First Extension 1% of the PAC subject to a minimum of Rs. 1000/- and maximum
of Rs. 50000/-.
Beyond First Extension 2% of the PAC subject to a minimum of Rs. 2000/- and maximum
of Rs. 100000/-
Incentives of timely completion
Incentive at the rate of 1% of the estimate PAC subject to the maximum of Rs. 4 lakhs will be
paid to the contractor if the work is completed with the original time of completion. This clause is
applicable only for works within TS powers of Chief Engineer.
2113. Date of Completion of Work
The date of completion of a work is the date of last measurements taken by the concerned
Assistant Engineer/contractor on completion of work. A completion certificate in the prescribed
proforma (Appendix 2100G) along with the as built drawings of the work shall be submitted to the TS
authority with copies to the superior officers. Final bill will be paid only after completion is certified by
the competent authority.
2114. Suspension of Works
If, in the course of execution of work, circumstances arise necessitating the suspension of the
work in whole or part, the agreement authority may order suspension of the work in accordance with the
provisions in the general conditions of contract. However, before ordering such suspension, the
agreement authority shall consider all alternatives for different and speedy execution of the work and
order suspension only if it is inevitable. The period of suspension shall be kept to the absolute minimum
required.
2115. Foreclosure
Cases may arise where a work or part of it may have to be abandoned after the contract agreement
for the same is executed. In such cases foreclosure shall be ordered by the agreement authority
immediately after the decision is taken regarding abandonment of a part or whole of the work and further
action taken in accordance with the provisions in the general conditions of contract. In such cases the
contractor will not be eligible for any claim other than extension of time of completion to the extent of
suspension period.
2116. Termination of Contract in Case of Death, Insanity or Insolvency:
If the contractor is an individual or a proprietary concern and the individual or the proprietor dies,
becomes insane or insolvent, the agreement authority has to satisfy himself whether the legal heirs or
legal representatives of the contractor are capable of carrying out and continuing the work, and if they
are willing, he may entrust the balance portion of the work to such legal heir or representative on a fresh
agreement on the same terms and conditions as in the original agreement. In other cases the agreement
authority shall cancel the contract in respect of the incomplete portion of the work and rearrange the
work otherwise without any penalty or damage to either party on account of such cancellation and
rearrangement. All liabilities due to government arising under the contract up to the date of death of
contractor shall be realized from the estate of the contractor.
2116.1. Termination - Default by Contractor
As per general conditions of contract, the agreement authority has the power to cancel the
contract and arrange the work otherwise in the event of default by the contractor. The agreement
authority in exercising the power vested with him shall follow the procedure outlined in the general
conditions of the contract. The damages and penalties provided there in and applicable to the particular
contract shall also be realised in accordance with the general conditions of contract.
Compensation for delay / Liquidated Damage
1) If the contractor fails to maintain the required progress as per conditions of contract or to
complete the work and clear the site on or before the contract or extended date of completion, he
shall, without prejudice to any other right or remedy available under the law to the Employer on
account of such breach, pay to the employer as liquidated damages an amount calculated @
0.1% (zero point one percent) of the contract price of the work for every week of delay subject a
maximum of 10% of the contract price.
147
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2) The amount of compensation may be adjusted or set-off against any sum payable to the
contractor under this or any other contract with the government. In case, the contractor does not
achieve a particular milestone mentioned in the conditions of contract or the re-scheduled
milestone(s), the amount shown against that mile stone shall be withheld, to be adjusted against
the compensation levied at the final grant of extension of time.
3) Withholding of this amount on failure to achieve the completion of work or of milestones shall
be automatic without any notice to the contractor.
2116.2. Termination of Contract
The department can terminate the contract and rearrange the work at the risk and cost of contractor
in the following cases
i. If the contractor does not turn up for starting the work within the specified period to take charge of
the site after executing the agreement.
ii. If the contractor does not show the proportionate progress during the extended period of time of
completion.
iii. If the contractor abandons the work after executing a portion without genuine reason and does not
resume or complete it even after specific direction from the Department.
iv. Fails to make application for extension of time of completion in time.
v. The licence of the contractor whose work has been terminated shall be cancelled with immediate
effect and shall be barred from quoting for another work for a minimum period of five years.
Contract licence shall not be renewed in his name or different name of a binamy.
vi. A company or person or firm once terminated shall be disqualified from participating in any tender
in his name or by using a different name or binamy. There shall also be a fine and forfeiture of
deposits.
2116.2.1 Realisation of loss on account of termination
An amount equal to 30% of the cost of the remaining works at agreed rates of the terminated
contract shall be recovered from the defaulted contractor towards the risk and cost. The contractor shall
be directed to remit the risk and cost amount within three months. There is no need to wait till the work
is arranged alternatively through another contractor and the total loss sustainable due to the default of the
original contractor is assessed. Such loss, if any, shall be realised after completion of the work. If he fails
to remit the amount within this periods following steps can be adopted for realisation of loss. The
amount can be realised from the following.
2. EMD / Security
3. Bill amount / retention if any due to the contract.
4. Any dues from department to the contract
5. Bank Guarantee / Performance Guarantee or By filling civil suit against the contractor
2116.2.2 Revoking of termination
The contract for a work on terminated by the agreement authority can be revoked by the
immediate superior officer if the contractor expresses his willingness at later date to complete the
balance work. But performance guarantee of 30% of the balance work to be completed shall be
deposited. This performance guarantee shall be released only on completion of the work. In such case
the contractor is bound to do the work at the originally agreed rates for which agreement authority shall
execute a supplemental agreement with balance schedule and fresh time of completion.
2117. Rearrangement of work after termination
The procedure to minimize the loss to government on account of termination of contract shall be
as incorporated in the general and special conditions of contract. Rearrangement of works should be
done as expeditiously as possible and there should not be any substantial changes in the specification of
balance works re-arranged.
2118. Settlement of Disputes and Differences
The agreement authority as well as the contractor shall follow the procedure contained in the
relevant clause in the general conditions of the contract for settling the disputes arising out of the
execution of the contract.
2119. Handing over work and site on completion
On completion of a work, the contractor shall hand over the completed work with asbuilt
drawings to the Assistant Engineer concerned after removing all debris, balance materials, temporary
construction etc., and cleaning up the site. The Assistant Engineer shall hand over when the work is
148
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

intended for the use of any other Department or agency, the completed works along with a set of
completion drawings to the concerned officer of that Department/ Agency. If any land is excess of that
required by the completed work had been taken over for the work and if it is no longer required for the
Department the Assistant Executive Engineer will take action to hand over such land to the Revenue
Department.

SECTION 2200
2201. Execution of works
2201.1. General
All works shall be executed based on the specification of MoRTH for road works and National
Building Code for building works. The Assistant Engineer is the first responsible engineering officer at
the site of any construction work like buildings, bridge, roads, etc., who looks after day to day working
of the project. The efforts taken & the strict supervision on his part have direct relation to the quality of
work. He shall therefore get conversant with various aspects of execution of work, to discharge the
duties efficiently. The Assistant Engineer can depute one or more Overseers to a work site for the
effective supervision and proper quality control.
2202. Handing Over Site
The Assistant Engineer will hand over the site to the contractor as specified in section 2102.1 of contract
management.
2202.1 Study of Concerned Documents by the Contractor
The basic document related to work is the estimate. Therefore it shall be thoroughly studied for
its scope and provisions. The relevant valid drawings shall also be studied and understood properly. The
tender document and specification of items must be clearly understood. The provision in the contract
document and schedule shall be studied with reference to time limit, escalation, defect liability, progress
schedule & quantities and rates mentioned. The specifications relevant to the schedule of items shall also
be refreshed.
The site may be finalized and desired location of site office, storage sheds, batching plant,
casting yard, labour camp etc. fixed. Source of construction material like sand, aggregates, cement and
steel etc. also to be identified. Draw a detailed work programme on the basis of availability of plant,
material manpower etc. for the smooth progress of work.
2202.2. Site office
The contractor shall set up site office and a permanent board shall be erected at the site
displaying the details of the work including estimate cost, contract amount, period of contract,
scheduled date of completion of work, name of contractor etc. The following details shall be available in
the site office at all times.
1. Drawings
All drawings like plan, elevation, layout plan, sections, R.C.C. layout, alignment plan etc. shall be
maintained in site office. Such plans are required for daily reference and during the inspection of higher
officers. These drawings shall be properly preserved. Such drawings shall bear the signatures of officers
approving such drawings, to avoid use of any other drawing. Outdated or superseded drawings shall be clearly
marked as such and removed from the site. Also all drawings in CD may be kept at the office.
2. Estimate & Tender
Copy of the technically sanctioned estimate shall be kept in site office under custody of
Assistant Engineer for correct reference. Similarly, the contract copy containing all documents shall be
kept at site for study and guidance.
3. Other Registers
Some other registers are also required to be maintained like dewatering, record for foundation,
labour attendance/ wages register maintained by the contractor.
4. Instruments to be kept at Site office
Essential instruments for execution of work shall be kept at site or carried along with if possible.
The Asst. Engineer / Overseer shall take care for safe custody and proper calibration of the instruments.
If there is loss/theft of any instrument, in that case the cost of instrument can be recovered from
Assistant Engineer / Overseer.
These are Dumpy Level, Theodolite Vernier Caliper and Tapes. Tapes are required to be carried
always for checking measurements. Generally, following tapes shall be available.
i. Metallic tape 15 m &-30 m.
149
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

ii. Steel tape lm, 15 m, 30m.

iii. Cloth tape 15m, & 30 m.
In addition each Asst. Engineer / Overseer must carry a 3 m. steel tape and a calculator in his pocket at
all times. The following tools are also helpful in execution.
hammer and peg
chisel
brush
Nylon string
1 m straight edge +
wedge Spirit level
1m meter square
template Chalk
Clip board
File folder
Torch with batteries
Sign board
Red & green flag (for road
works) Umbrella/ raincoat
5. Tools and Plants
Available modern instruments, tools and plants shall be used for speed and quality work
wherever possible.
2203. Safe constructional practices
Public safety as well as safety of the workforce is of utmost importance. In case of buildings the
provisions of Part 7 of National Building Code 2005 shall apply. For roads and bridges refer IRC SP 55
2204. Environmental considerations
For all construction activities, provisions of environmental requirements in the code and manual
shall be followed. All necessary clearances at the local, state and national levels shall be obtained prior
to the start of work.
2205. Quality Assurance of works
For all construction activities the provisions of quality manual shall be followed.
2206. Clearing and Grubbing
Before any construction starts the site must be cleared of debris. All materials including trees,
grass, vegetation, crops and structures, which fall within the area, must be removed. All stumps and
roots need to be removed (grubbed out) and the holes/ hollows left must be filled with compacted
suitable filling materials.
Existing structures that has to be demolished, shall be done as per the provision of Section 5 of
Part 7, National Building Code 2005.
The products of the clearing are to be stacked in such place and in such manner as may be ordered
by the Assistant Engineer and the ground shall be left in a perfectly clear condition. All products of the
clearing shall be the property of Government. These shall be disposed of as per existing rules without
damage to the environment.
2206.1 Layout of the Work
After having cleared the site, fix up permanent benchmarks, guide reference pillars, and transfer the
alignment with the help of reference pillars fixed at site during the location survey. The layout shall be
done correctly to true lines, dimensions and locations as per approved drawings. The junction pillars
beyond layout area shall be erected marked, painted and maintained throughout for reference. It shall be
crosschecked for right angles, diagonals etc. The Assistant Executive Engineer shall approve all layouts.
2206.2.Excavation for road work and drain and approval of foundation
All excavation shall be done as per section 300 of MoRTH specification. The Assistant
Executive Engineer shall approve all excavations.
2206.3. Excavation for structures
Excavation for structures shall consist of the removal of material for the construction of
foundations for buildings, bridges, culverts, retaining walls, headwalls, cut off walls, pipe culverts and
other similar structures, in accordance with the requirements of these specifications and the lines and
dimensions shown on the drawings or as indicated by the Assistant Engineer. The work shall include
construction of the necessary cofferdams and cribs and their subsequent removal; all necessary sheeting,
150
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

shoring, bracing, draining and pumping; the removal of all logs, stumps, grubs and other deleterious
matter and obstructions, necessary for placing the foundations; trimming bottoms of excavations;
backfilling and clearing up the site and the disposal of all surplus material.
Old curiosities, relics, coins, minerals and any other item of archeological importance found on
excavation or pulling down shall be the property of the Government. Shall any ancient masonry or other
old work of interest be opened up, or any religious edifice or relic be involved in removal or destruction
in the execution of a work, a clear report on the matter shall be sent to Government through the Chief
Engineer Administration & Designs and orders obtained before the demolition or removal of such works
or relics. Regarding the disposal of old curiosities, the Assistant Executive Engineer shall consult the
District Collector.
2206.4. Dewatering and protection
Normally, open foundations shall be laid dry. Where water is met with in excavation due to
stream flow, seepage, springs, rain or other reasons, the Contractor shall take adequate measures to keep
the foundation trenches dry when so required and to protect the green concrete/masonry against damage
by erosion or sudden rising of water level. The Contractor shall take all precautions in diverting channels
and in discharging the drained water as not to cause damage to the works, crops or any other property.
2206.5. Preparation of foundation:
The bottom of the foundation shall be leveled both longitudinally and transversely or stepped as
directed by the Assistant Engineer. Before footing is laid, the surface shall be slightly watered and
rammed. If, during inspection, it is found that the contractor has over excavated the foundation in excess
by what is shown in the drawings, he shall not be allowed to refill this with earth but, the additional
excavation shall be got filled up by concrete or masonry of such proportions as decided by the Executive
Engineer. No extra cost is payable to the contractor on this account.
When rock or other hard strata is encountered, it shall be freed of all soft and loose material, cleaned
and cut to a firm surface either level and stepped as directed by the Assistant Engineer. All seams shall be
cleaned out and filled with cement mortar or grout to the satisfaction of the Assistant Engineer.
When foundation piles are used, the excavation of each pit shall be substantially completed before
beginning pile-driving operations therein.
2206.6. Public safety:
Near towns, villages and all frequented places, trenches and foundation pits shall be securely
fenced and provided with proper caution signs and marked with red lights at night to avoid accidents.
The Contractor shall take adequate protective measures to see that the excavation operations do not
affect or damage adjoining structures. For safety precautions, guidance may be taken from IS: 3764.
2206.7. Backfilling
Backfilling shall be done with approved material after concrete or masonry is fully set and
carried out in such a way as not to cause undue thrust on any part of the structure. All space between
foundation masonry or concrete and the sides of excavation shall be refilled to the original surface in
layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thicknesses. The compaction shall be done with the help of
suitable equipment such as mechanical tamper, rammer, plate vibrator etc., after necessary watering, so
as to achieve a density not less than the field density before excavation.
2206.8. Excavated material
Excavated materials need assessing as suitable or unsuitable. Suitable materials shall be used
when required for works. The excavated materials can be temporarily stockpiled, but must cause no
damage to services or property. Any excess suitable material, which is not required for the construction
of the works or any material classified as unsuitable is the property of Department. The contractor shall
stockpile these materials separately, as directed, or place the material in an approved location on site. To
be suitable as fill material the soil must not contain any vegetable matter. (Details as per MoRTH)
2206.9. Borrow Pits
The borrow pits, if any required, shall be kept as drained as possible. It shall be made only at the
specified distance from the proposed structure. It shall not be cut opened where they might:-
a) affect the stability or safety of the highway, or any railway or other structures, which may
be present.
b) prevent natural or artificial drainage or irrigation.
c) damage adjacent property or future expansion plans for the highway.
After the correct layout is marked, cross checked and approved the excavation for foundation
starts. Before starting excavation, it is necessary that ground levels are taken correctly and recorded in

151
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

level book and the foundation plan. The levels at all junctions of building shall be taken at a large
number of points to give correct idea of ground occupied in foundation.
Unauthorised entries to site of work shall be prohibited. The contractor shall obtain proper
license for explosives whenever explosives are required to be stored at site and proper magazines as per
rules must be insisted on.
2207. Formwork
The concrete acquires exact shape of the mould in which it is placed. For good concrete work,
shuttering, centering and concreting operations are three important things. It is therefore important that
principle of sound design, erection of the shuttering is strictly followed. Any negligence on this count
may lead to mishaps resulting in loss of human life and Government money.
The provisions of clause 11 of IS 456:2000 shall be followed for formwork. The plan of the
formwork proposed to be employed by contractor shall be obtained and examined by the Assistant
Executive Engineer in respect of contracts entered into by him or higher officers. In respect of contracts
executed by the Assistant Engineer, the plans shall be obtained and examined by the Assistant Engineer.
If such plans are not satisfactory to the Assistant Executive Engineer or the Assistant Engineer as the
case may be, the contractor shall be asked to make such changes in them as may be required.
The formwork shall be robust and strong and the joints shall be leak-proof and must be properly
sealed. The number of joints in the formwork shall be kept to a minimum by using large size panels.
2207.1Forms
In designing forms, concrete shall be treated as a fluid weighing 2400 Kg. per cubic metre and in
addition a live load of 700 Kg. per square metre on horizontal projection of surfaces shall also be
allowed. Forms shall be so designed and constructed that they may be removed without injury to the
concrete. Blocks and bracings shall be removed with the forms and in no case shall any portions of the
wood forms be left in the concrete. The forms must be so constructed, set and maintained that the
finished concrete shall be of the form and dimensions shown on the plans and true to line and grade.
Allowance for the deflection of forms and for shrinkage and settlement of staging or centering in
addition to the allowance for dead loads, and camber, as shown upon the plans shall be provided.
Forms used a second time shall be thoroughly cleaned and shall be free from bulge, splits or
warps. In case of compaction of concrete by vibration, the forms shall be so designed as to withstand the
effects of vibration. The formwork shall be coated with an approved release agent that will effectively
prevent sticking/ coating the reinforcement and will not stain the concrete surface. Lubricating
oil(machine oils) shall not be used for this purpose.
The forms shall remain in place for the period required as per clause 11.3 of IS 456 2000. The
foregoing specification for forms shall also apply to steel forms. The sheets used shall be of such
thickness that the forms will remain true to shape. All bolt and rivet heads shall be countersunk. Clamps,
pins or other connecting devices shall be designed to hold the forms rigidly together and to allow
removal without injury to the concrete. Steel forms, which do not present a smooth surface or line up
properly, shall not be used. Special care shall be exercised to keep steel forms free from rust, grease or
other foreign matter, which will discolour the concrete.
Broadly, the following steps shall be observed
i) Proper design of centering system for all dead & live loads that is approved by competent officer.
ii) Proper use of shuttering & centering material. Centering shall be of steel props & beams
(telescopic), shuttering of waterproof ply board (preferably laminated on one side) & steel
centering plates.
iii) The erection shall be done carefully. The ground on which it is to be supported shall be firm and
unyielding even during rains. The supports shall be adequately braced.
iv) After erection, the Assistant Engineer and Assistant Executive Engineer shall check it for
dimension, line, level & safety.
v) The centering shall be removed only after the minimum prescribed curing period is over.
2207.2 Scaffolding
Scaffolding is the responsibility of contractors, but the departmental officer must ensure that the
scaffolding provided is adequate and properly fixed together and strengthened so that workmen and
others using them can carry on work safely.
2207.3 Shuttering and Centering Work
The Executive Engineer may require the contractor to use screw jacks or hardwood wedges to
take up any settlement in staging or centering either before or during the placing of the concrete. All
staging and false work shall be built on foundations of sufficient strength to carry the load without
152
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

appreciable deformation. On stable soils, like rock, shale, stiff clay and sands free from scour, spread
footings may be used and shall be of size to be determined by the load to be supported. In other
locations, the formwork shall be supported on piles. The piles shall be spaced and driven to support the
required loads without settlement
Special measures in the design of formwork shall be taken to ensure that it does not hinder the
shrinkage of concrete. The soffit of the formwork shall be so designed as to ensure that the formwork
does not restrain the shortening and/or hogging of beams during pre-stressing. Any cut outs or openings
provided in any structural member to facilitate erection of formwork shall be closed with the same grade
of concrete as the adjoining structure immediately after removal of formwork ensuring watertight joints.
Provision shall be made for safe access on, to and about the formwork at the levels as required. Close
watch shall be maintained to check for settlement of formwork during concreting. Any settlement of
formwork during concreting shall be promptly rectified. Water used for curing shall not be allowed to
stagnate near the base plates supporting the staging and shall be properly drained.
2208. Materials
2208.1.Cement
Cement to be used in the works shall conform to clause 5.1 of IS 456: 2000
Bagged or bulk cement which has partially set or which contains lumps of caked cement must be
rejected. The use of cement reclaimed from discarded or used bags is not permitted. Any cement stored
for a long time needs to be tested before its use.
2208.2. Aggregate
It includes both fine and coarse aggregates and shall comply with the requirements of IS 383
2208.3Coarse Aggregates
Coarse aggregate shall consists of clean, hard, strong, dense, non porous crushed stones, crushed
gravel , natural gravel or other approved inert materials. These shall not consist of pieces of disintegrated
stones, soft, flakey, elongated particles, salt, alkali, vegetable matter or other deleterious material.
Coarse aggregates having positive alkali-silica reaction shall not be used. Coarse aggregate shall confirm
IS 383 and tests for conformity shall be carried out as per IS 2386 Parts I to VIII.
2208.4Fine Aggregates
It consists of natural sand or hard pieces of crushed stone or gravel or combination thereof. They
shall be clean and shall not contain mica or other deleterious material in such quantities as to reduce the
strength and durability of the concrete or to attack the embedded steel. It also confirm to IS 383.
2208.5.Water
Water used for mixing and curing shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids,
alkalis, salts, sugar, organic materials or other substances that may cause deterioration to concrete or
steel. It shall conform to requirements of clause 5.4 of IS 456:2000. Potable water is generally
considered satisfactory for mixing concrete. Mixing and curing with seawater shall not be permitted.
2208.6. Admixtures
The admixtures for concrete shall be as per clause 5.5 of IS 456:2000.
2208.7.Reinforcement
Reinforcements shall be as per clause 5.6 of IS 456:2000. The schedule & drawing of
reinforcement shall be correctly prepared as per the design and got approved. The cutting length &
bending schedule shall be drawn in a correct manner to be understood by the site supervisor. Some
principles to be followed are
i) The laps shall be staggered.
ii) Extra care is needed during concreting at the crowded locations of reinforcement for good results.
iii) Cover shall be ensured by use of proper cover blocks of concrete.
iv) Cover shall be maintained during concreting.
v) Reinforcement in case of projection like canopies to be maintained at its correct location (i.e. top)
during concreting.
vi) The bars placed shall be measured and recorded properly by Assistant Engineer and crosschecked
by Assistant Executive Engineer before concreting.
vii) Wherever required, the bars shall be treated for protection from corrosion, particularly in coastal
areas and areas prone to industrial and environmental pollution.
2208.8. Bricks
Burnt clay bricks shall conform to the requirements of IS: 1077, except that the minimum
compressive strength when tested flat shall not be less than 8.4 Mega Pascal for individual bricks and
153
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

10.5 MPa for average of 5 specimens. They shall be free from cracks and flaws and nodules of free lime.
The brick shall have smooth rectangular faces with sharp comers and emit a clear ringing sound when
struck. The size may be according to local practice with a tolerance of ± 5 per cent.
2208.9.Stones
Stones shall be of the type specified. It shall be hard, sound, and free from cracks, decay and
weathering and shall be freshly quarried from an approved quarry. Stone with round surface shall not be
used. IS 1127 shall be adopted for the dimensions of natural building stones. The crushing strength of
2
building stones when tested as described in IS 1121 shall have a minimum value of 350 Kg/cm
Following IS codes give specification for various stones used for construction.
Lime Stone IS 1128
Granite IS 3316
Marble IS 1130
Sand Stone IS 3622
Laterite IS 3620
2208.9.1 Storage of Materials at site
Materials shall be stored as described in IS 4082
2208.9.2 Approval of Materials
All materials shall be got approved by the concerned Assistant Engineer or Assistant Executive
Engineer as the case may be and job mix formulae / Mix design shall be got approved by the concerned
Executive Engineer. For this the relevant details have to be submitted at least 20 days ahead of the
planned start date.
2208.10. Supply of Materials for Road Work
Aggregate supply required for any roadwork shall be from an approved quarry/ source. The
materials shall conform to the specifications in section 500 of MORTH and shall be stacked as provided
in Section 514 of MoRTH.
All aggregates required for road work shall be properly stacked in stacking areas near the plant
or on the road side in such a manner as not to interfere with traffic. Before the stacking is done the
stacking area shall be examined to see that it is level and dimensions of the stockpiles and the Engineer
shall approve their location.
Materials supplied for work during dry season shall be utilized not later than 15 days and if any
contamination occurs, shall be rectified by the contractor at his own cost. Aggregates shall not be
stacked until it has been thoroughly screened to gauge and free from all earth, rubbish, vegetable matter
and other foreign materials. If necessary, aggregates shall be washed and allowed to drain for at least 72
hours. When ready, it shall be stacked entirely clear of the roadway either upon the berms and platforms
provided for the purpose or outside the side drains where such berms do not exist. When aggregate
supplies for renewal and for patchwork are both to be supplied for the same reach of a road, these shall
be stacked on opposite sides.
The contract unit rates for different sizes of coarse aggregate, fine aggregate and stone filler shall be
paid in full for collecting, conveying and stacking or storing at the site including full compensation for:
(i) All royalties, fees, rents where necessary;
(ii) All leads and lifts; and
(iii) All labour, tools, equipment and incidentals to complete the work to the Specifications.
(iv) All necessary testing of material, both initial, to approve the source, and regular control testing
thereafter.
Aggregates shall be stacked in heaps of regular cross section. The deposition shall commence at one
end of the kilometre and be carried continuously to the other end unless the Executive Engineer shall
direct otherwise. Stacking shall begin at points farther from the quarry and progress continuously
towards the nearer point. Suitable length in a road not more than 2 kilometer will be considered one
stretch and the materials required for this stretch shall be fully supplied and stacked before
measurements are taken. No road material in excess of requirements shall be stacked in that stretch. Any
excess quantity shall be removed to where it is required, before the materials in that reach are measured.
If sufficient land with not available for stacking in the stretch and / or if safety consideration
demands, the stacking of materials can be permitted in suitable stacking yards with prior permission
from the Assistant Engineer.
All aggregates shall be measured by the Assistant Engineer and check measured by Assistant
Executive Engineer before it is spread. After check measurement, each stack shall he marked by
whitewash or otherwise to prevent the possibility of it being measured again. This shall be reported to
154
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

the Chief Technical Examiner for verification of quantities as per section 2213. As a rule, collecting and
spreading shall not be carried on at the same time in one and the same kilometer, or in two adjoining
kilometers.
During the time the aggregate is supplied and stacked, there shall be frequent inspections by the
Overseer as well as by Assistant Engineer to guard against stacks being formed over heaped up earth or
debris.

2209. Job Mix Formula/ Mix Designs

The contractor shall submit the job mixing formula / mix design before the commencement of
work. While establishing the job mix formula, the contractor shall ensure that it is based on a correct and
truly representative sample of the materials that will actually be used in the work and that the mixture
and its different ingredients satisfy the physical and strength requirements. Approval of the job mix
formula shall be based on independent testing by the Engineer for which the contractor shall furnish
samples of all ingredients of the mix as required by the Engineer. The approved job mix formula shall
remain effective unless and until a revised job mix formula is approved. Shall a change in the source of
materials be proposed; a new job mix formula shall be forwarded to the Executive Engineer for approval
before the placing of the material.
2209.1. Plant trials - permissible variation in job mix formula:
Once the laboratory job mix formula is approved, the contractor shall carry out plant trials at the
mixer to establish that the plant can be set up to produce a uniform mix conforming to the approved job
mix formula. The permissible variations of the individual percentages of the various ingredients in the
actual mix from the job mix formula to be used shall be within the permissible limits. These variations
are intended to apply to individual specimens taken for quality control tests as given in the Chapter on
Quality control.
2209.1.1Concreting
Concrete proportioning shall be as per clause 9 of IS 456:2000. Nominal mix concrete may be
used for M15 or lower. Design mix is adopted for higher grades. Concreting under special conditions
shall be as per clause 14 of IS 456:2006
2209.1.2. Mixing, placing, compacting and curing of concrete
Mixing shall be as per clause 10.3 of IS 456:2000. The transport, placing, compaction and curing
of concrete shall be as per clause 13 of IS 456: 2000

2209.2.General precautions
i) The mixing proportion shall be achieved correctly by using weigh batching or volumetric method.
ii) Concrete shall be thoroughly mixed and then immediately transported and placed without
segregation and before the initial setting time. Retarding chemicals can be used for delaying the
initial set, if required.
iii) Concrete shall be well compacted, immediately on placing with vibrators. Over or under
compaction shall be avoided. Care shall be taken where reinforcement is heavy in narrow sections.
The finished surface shall be re trowelled after initial set to avoid surface cracks.
iv) The curing must begin after the final set but not later than 24 Hrs. The date of concreting shall
be written by paint on column/ beam faces, after removal of shuttering for easy reference. Curing
shall continue for 14 days. When maintaining of proper curing is difficult, curing compounds shall
be used. To conserve water, fine sprayers shall be used for curing the sides & bottoms.
v) At least three cubes shall be taken from the working mix prescribed for day's concreting and
their record shall be maintained. These cubes shall be tested in the laboratory on due dates and
proper cognizance of results shall be taken. In case of abnormal results the fact shall be immediately
brought to notice of the superior officers.
2209.3 Removal of Shuttering Centering:
Normally, side shuttering of column, beam faces is removed after 24 Hours. However, the
centering shall be removed only after the prescribed period. While removing centering, care shall be
taken to avoid injuries to the labourers or staff working there. Particular care shall be taken while
removing shuttering below cantilever slab/ beams etc. Unless sufficient counter weight for the cantilever
portion is developed the centering shall not be removed. If proper sequence of removal of props is not
followed, the beam or truss may collapse due to wrong support pattern.

155
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2210. Ladder
Necessary ladders must be provided in accordance with the clause 14.3 of part 7 of NBC for
supervision and inspection of the official during execution and safety of the workers.
2211. Measurement of Works:
2211.1. Measurements
Measurement shall be as per section 2109. The Assistant Engineer / Overseer / Contractor shall
take measurements in time so as to get the same checked and bills passed as per terms of contract. The
contractor may also furnish measurements, in which case these shall be checked by Assistant Engineer
and further checked by Assistant Executive Engineer. Any corrections shall be brought to the notice of
the contractor, to be effected accordingly.
2211.2 Recording Measurement of Work
The Assistant Engineers / Overseers are given powers to record measurements of works subject to
certain rules & regulations. It shall be clearly borne in mind that these powers are given only to accept
sound work.
i) Measurements shall be recorded date wise. The measurements shall be signed with name &
designation. If any item is going to be covered by another item so as to be inaccessible for
subsequent measurement, it shall be finally measured and measurements got checked 100 % before
covering.
ii) The measurements for works as per the specifications shall only be recorded. The recording of
measurements in the Measurement Book means accepting the work. Therefore any inferior work
below acceptance norms shall not be recorded.
iii) The signature & designation with date of the checking/ cross checking officer shall be invariably
got recorded, however the responsibility of getting the measurements checked lies with the officer
/ contractor who records the measurements.
iv) While recording measurements for composite items, i.e. single items in the tender which
includes many sub items; Viz.
1. Composite masonry of stone & brick.
2. Item of door, which includes frames, panels, fixtures etc.
3. Items of w/c. containing the pan, flushing cistern, with connections, valves P/S trap
or urinals stands consisting of urinal pot, connecting water supply pipe, flushing tank
with overflow, disposal pipe etc.
Recording of the measurements signifies that all the sub items are completed as per the specification.
However, if it is necessary to release payments for such item, then proportionate payments for work
done & measured shall be recorded.
2211.3.Recording False And Incorrect Measurement or Advance Measurement - Punishment For :
The basic document for effecting payment is the Measurement Book and all payments to the
contractors are governed by the measurements recorded there us & bill recorded. If false, incorrect, or
excess measurements are recorded, it leads to payment not due and Govt. money is misappropriated. The
punishment for such act/lapse is severe and the incumbent shall be proceeded against as per rules.
2211.4.Cross-Checking of Measurement:
The measurements of aggregate collected at road side and the steel for RCC slab work are to be
got checked by Assistant Executive Engineer before spreading/concreting to ensure that complete
aggregate is collected and steel bars as per design are used. This principle shall be followed thoroughly.
2211.5 Computerization of Measurements
Measurement can also be entered and kept in the centralized computer system of the department.
2212. Visit of Higher Officers for Inspection
Generally, important road, bridge & building works are inspected at higher levels by the EE, SE &
CE. During such visits, the relevant information, plans, estimates, drawings etc. shall be made available for
ready reference. At such times the plans are displayed properly, progress reports/bar charts are properly
updated for targets/ achievements. All the quality control registers should be kept ready. Detailed Project
Report, copy of the agreement etc. are to be kept handy in proper form. A short note in the form of work
memo should be prepared highlighting the salient features, progress, bottlenecks, expenditure and future plans
etc. The movement paths for inspection of roads, bridge & building sites are to be clearly marked, to avoid
repetition and confusion in movements. These opportunities shall be utilized for seeking guidance,
highlighting achievements and difficulties, highlighting shortfalls and its reasons etc. for spot decision or

156
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

follow up decision. The inspecting officers shall record their comments in the work spot book and circulate
the inspection note as per Appendix 2200 A to all concerned for follow up action
2213. Verification of Quantity by the Chief Technical Examiner:
Earth work in all works exceeds 1000 Cum and the quantity of any aggregate supplied for Road work
exceeds 100 cum the Assistant Executive Engineer shall report by e-mail or fax to Chief Technical Examiner
in the proforma given in Appendix 2200B so as to verify the reported quantity. Earth work and usage of
stacked materials can be used only after the verification or on completion of three working days
from the date of sending the messages. In case of urgency the Executive Engineer shall super-check the
full quantity and give sanction to proceed with the work.
In road works involving multi layer pavements powered by the level measurements initial level
with proposal for subsequent layers shall be reported to the CTE without resorting to reporting of final
levels of intermediate levels.
2214. Bills and Payment
Bills are normally paid at suitable intervals according to particular stages of execution of work
as per the agreement for which the contractor shall submit the bill. The Assistant Engineer shall then
verify the bill by taking requisite measurements.
Preparation of Bill and payment for the work shall be done only with of the following certificates:
The contractor has to produce the necessary certificates / test results for compliance to quality
procedures as per chapter on quality control. Environment certificate as per the chapter on environmental
aspects shall also be produced. In case of road and bridge works, Road Safety Certificate as per the
chapter on road safety shall be produced (refer clause 2110 also). This shall be for works within the
technical sanction powers of the Executive Engineer and above.
2215. Road Machinery
As a matter of policy modern machineries shall be used for all public works and the same should
be encouraged Mechanization of road construction is not only necessary for speedy construction but also
for overall economy and for achieving the desired quality of the finished job. Starting from grubbing or
site clearance, the road construction machinery can be deployed at all stages of construction till
completion of the project. The requirement of appropriate machinery for excavation of different
operation of road construction is given in Appendix 2200C. The expected out put of machines is given in
Appendix 2200D.
2216. Departmental execution
If tenders are not obtained at reasonable rates, and there is no possibility of getting a better offer
from the contractors any further, the departmental execution shall be resorted to. The field officers shall
prepare the workable rate for the entire work for departmental execution and submit proposal to the
concerned Chief Engineer who shall approve the proposal and issue orders fixing the ceiling cost. This
shall be intimated to the government and availability of funds ensured and placed at the disposal of
Assistant Engineer every month according to time schedule of the work. After completion of the work, a
completion report shall be prepared. Notification inviting quotations for supply of goods and rendering
services shall be advertised in one or two newspapers having circulation in the district where the work is
being carried out providing a minimum gap of two weeks from the date of publication and the date of
submission of quotations, where the estimate cost is above Rs. 10 Lakh. Details of Execution of Roads,
Bridges and Buildings in Appendix 2200.
SECTION 2300

2301. DESIGN, EXECUTION & MAINTENANCE of ELECTRICAL WORKS

2301.1 General
The term "Electrical Works" is used to denote all works necessary for distributing electrical
energy from the supplier’s service within particular premises. In addition, the installation and
maintenance of certain appliances operated by electricity may also be carried out as part of electrical
works e.g. lifts, air conditioners, water coolers, refrigerator, heaters, cooking ranges, D.G sets,
transformers, fire detection and protection systems, computer networking etc. .
The responsibility for carrying out electrical works in all Government buildings is vested with
the Electrical Wing of the P.W.D. All allied electrical installations shall follow the provisions of
National Building Code part 8 Section 2, amendment No.3 to National Building Code (SP7), National
Electrical Code, National Illumination Code, Indian Electricity Act, Indian Electricity Rules, relevant
rules of Indian Standard Specifications (ISS) and International Electro Technical Committee (IEC),
157
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

amended from time to time. Even where the cost of the work involved is small, it is necessary that the
estimate for electrification is prepared, technically scrutinized, and the work supervised by the technical
personnel of the Electrical wing of the P.W.D.
When there is only a L.S. provision for electrification, working estimate shall be got prepared and
sanctioned by competent authority and the provisions made in the estimates shall be given in consultation
with the appropriate authority of the PWD Electrical wing. If variations from the norms are found
necessary, specific sanction of the Chief Engineer shall be obtained.
The number of lights, fans and other fixtures to be provided shall follow the norms specified in
Part 8 of the NBC 2005 and all the standards mentioned above. If additional points, fixtures, etc., are
found necessary, specific sanction of the Chief Engineer shall be obtained before provision for the same
shall be included in the estimate.
In cases where the continuous functioning of life saving equipments, lights and A/C system is to
be ensured even when there is failure in power supply, such as in operation theatres of hospitals, stand-
bye energy source shall be installed and maintained by the Electrical Wing. This alternate system shall
have ample capacity to take care of the essential loads and function independently of normal power
supply system (grid supply from KSEB). Government shall decide the buildings where such installations
are to be provided. The capacity of the D.G set for captive power generation shall be fixed to deliver
power supply considering essential loads as per requirements fixed in consultation with the Head of the
concerned institutions and as per the norms specified in the above-mentioned standards.
If a building is to be used for industrial purposes and power wiring is necessary, the requirement
shall be assessed on the basis of the various machinery to be installed and the wiring designed as per
I.S.S. and other relevant standards.
2302.Estimate for Electrification Works
The estimates are to be prepared by the Assistant Engineer of Electrical Wing of PWD based on client
requirements, but subject to prescribed norms. All estimates shall be accompanied by dimensioned plans
indicating the purpose for which each room is proposed to be used and a circuit diagram and report with
the following details.
i. Location of building
ii. Purpose of the building and nature of work conducted in the building.
iii. Details of light points, fan points, light fittings, fan fittings and plug points etc.
iv. Specification of working accessories and fittings.
v. Details of major appliances, fixed and portable.
vi. Cost of existing installation and fittings (in case of old buildings).
vii. Details of repairs and replacements of electrical installation last effected and approximate cost (in
case of old buildings)
viii. Proximity to electric supply lines and feasibility of service connection.
ix. The authority that will look after the maintenance of the building.
No estimate for electrification shall be technically sanctioned unless scrutinised and approved by
the concerned officer of the Electrical Wing. Where lifts are to be provided, it shall be ensured that the
lift well and its approaches are in conformity with the relevant Indian Standard Codes, for the type and
size of lift proposed.
Sometimes it will be necessary to obtain sanction from the inspecting authorities such as Kerala
State Electrical Inspectorate and the Fire Force Department for which necessary scrutiny and inspection
fee will have to be paid. Provision for the same shall be included in the estimate for preparation of
necessary drawings and to make necessary fees to the respective departments. The charges for the
preparation of drawings and connected documents shall be included in a realistic manner so as to meet
the actual expenses incurred for this purpose. The fees are to be paid by the selected contractor to the
concerned department and such amounts shall be reimbursed to him / them on production of
documentary evidence.
To ensure the quality of certain products as well as certain panel assemblies etc., such items will
have to be tested either in any of the CPRI Test Centres or any other institutions approved by BIS to
carry out such tests. In such a case, either the product or the panel assembly will have to be conveyed to
the test centres and necessary testing fees will also have to be paid. It will be the responsibility of the
selected contractor to convey the materials and to pay the required fees. The department shall reimburse
the expenses towards one-time to and fro conveyance to the nearest Test Centre from the place of
manufacture / fabrication, having the facility to conduct the prescribed test and one-time remittance of
fees. If the product or the panel assembly has to be conveyed and tested further, the subsequent expenses

158
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

to this effect will be on the contractors account. If tests are proposed, necessary provision shall be made
in the estimate to make payments for such tests.
The estimate for electrification shall be scrutinised by the competent authority of the Electrical
wing as detailed in the Delegation of powers. In the case of existing buildings under construction where
electrification was not originally contemplated, the electrification estimate will require both
Administrative Sanction and Technical Sanction.
Necessary funds for making payments to avail service connection shall be included in the
electrical estimate and shall be paid to the KSEB by the Executive Engineer (Electrical).
2302.1.New Buildings
In the case of new buildings to be constructed by P.W.D. adequate provision shall be made in
the detailed estimate towards electrification works, subject-to the requirement of the concerned
department and in compliance with the standards and statutory rules mentioned above. The competent
authority in Electrical Wing shall sanction necessary working estimate against any lumpsum provisions
made in the estimate. The electrical works shall be done along with the civil works and completed
simultaneously so as to occupy the buildings soon after construction.
2302.2. Building of other departments
In the case of existing buildings under the control of other departments on request of the District
Officer of' the concerned department the Assistant Executive Engineer concerned shall arrange to get the
estimate for electrification work prepared and scrutinised by the competent officers of the Electrical
Wing after realising the centage charges as per rules provided. It shall be ensured that funds are available
for the execution of the work. In the case of deposit works, the approved estimate will be forwarded to
the concerned department for Administrative Sanction and placement of necessary funds on receipt of
which, necessary technical sanction for the estimate will be issued by the competent authority and the
work arranged for execution.
2303. Specifications for materials and works
Detailed specification for the materials to be used and the principal items of work normally
involved in electrification works shall be drawn up by the Superintending Engineer (Electrical) in the
office of the Chief Engineer (Buildings). After approva1 by the Chief Engineer, this shall be published
for adoption in the department. In preparing the specification, wherever I.S. specifications are available,
the relevant I.S. specifications shall be followed. In other cases, detailed specifications shall be prepared
to suit the requirements.
To facilitate easy check of the quality of materials, the Superintending Engineer (Electrical) in
the Office of the Chief Engineer Building, shall also prepare a list of brands and makes of different
wiring materials, fans, fluorescent lamps fittings and other equipments/control devices/gadgets which
are, inconformity with the specifications and circularize the list. If different catalogue numbers/sub
sections are available for the same brand, the particular catalogue number/sub section shall be
mentioned. This list shall be reviewed and revised and brought up-to-date from time to time. If any
material or fitting outside such accepted 1ist is proposed to be used in any work, the Assistant Engineer
(Electrical) under the controlshall report the matter to the Superintending Engineer (Electrical) who will
arrange for tests etc., and give instructions as to whether such materials can be used or not.
2304. Schedule of Rates
The Superintending Engineer (Electrical) in the Office of the Chief Engineer Building shall also
prepare a schedule of rates for the electrification works in Government buildings periodically as ordered
by Govt. The Chief Engineer (Administration & Design) shall follow the procedure lay down in section
1701 and publish this for use. Estimates for electrification shall be based on this schedule of rates and
whenever any deviation is necessary, sanction of the Chief Engineer (A&D) shall be obtained.
2305. Materials fittings to be provided and stocked by the department for use in electrification
works
Supply of materials and labour shall be combined and work arranged. In unavoidable
circumstances some electrical materials and fittings can be procured directly by the department with the
approval of the Chief Engineer (Buildings) and arrange to have the same used in electrification works.
2306.Execution of electrification works
2306.1. Contractors for Electrical works
The electrification works in Government buildings shall be arranged only through competent
PWD registered electrical contractors.
2306.1.2. Invitation of Tenders

159
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Before inviting tenders for electrification, it shall be ensured that there is a sanctioned estimate
for the work and that funds are available for carrying out the work. Tenders for Electrical works shall be
invited so as to complete the electrical works on the completion date of civil works. The Executive
Engineer in charge of civil works shall seek the assistance of Executive Engineer electrical to lay the
conduits etc for which provision shall be included in the civil works.
2306.2.Service Connection
On completion of the electrical wiring and checking the same, the Assistant Engineer
(Electrical) shall give to the Assistant Engineer (Civil)/ concerned authority, a test report and completion
report for availing service connection. The Executive Engineer (Electrical) responsible for maintaining
the Register of Building shall keep a copy of the circuit diagram and inventory of the buildings along
with the Register. The agreement authority as per procedure shall issue a completion certificate. A copy
of the completion certificates shall be issued to the concerned Assistant Executive Engineer (electrical).
The Assistant Engineer (civil) under the control of the construction of the building shall arrange for the
transfer of the building with the electrical installation to the occupying department. The inventory shall
also be handed over to the concerned department. The authority who has control over the building and
who is responsible for payment of electrical charges shall make the application for service connection.
If there is any delay on the part of the occupying department to take over the completed building
together with the electrical installations, the fact shall be reported to Government so that appropriate
action can be taken on the basis of Government orders.
2307.Inventory of Electrical Installations in Government Buildings.
Inventory of electrical installation in all Government buildings shall be prepared by the Assistant
Engineer concerned, verified by the Assistant Executive Engineer concerned and submitted to the
Executive Engineer. An inventory register of these installations shall be maintained at the Division
Level. This shall contain the plan of the building, cable route, schematic diagram of the installation etc.
All fittings/gadgets/equipments specifying the make, size, etc. date of completion and handing over the
installation, cost and subsequent changes effected, maintenance done etc. Installations shall be tested
periodically and test readings shall be recorded in the inventory register. The inventory register shall be
reviewed periodically and the installation also shall be inspected.
2308. Maintenance
In an electrical installation, a defect which remains unnoticed, can cause serious and fatal
accidents. It is therefore very necessary that electrical installations in Government buildings are
periodically inspected and minor defects set right then and there. During such inspection, besides
attending to minor repairs, if major repairs are necessary details shall be collected and the estimates
prepared on the basis of such inspection.
The subordinate staff in the electrical wing shall examine the electrical installations in
government buildings during service calls, attend to petty defects then and there and make a record of
such inspection with a report to Assistant Engineer (Electrical). Any major repair and replacement found
necessary during such service calls have to be reported to Assistant Engineer (Electrical) and further
action pursued to get them done after obtaining sanction from the competent authority. The details of
work attended to shall be recorded in a register maintained by the overseer and verified by the Assistant
Engineer. An extract of the same shall be submitted to the Executive Engineer (Electrical) within three
days after the work is done, under intimation to the Assistant Executive Engineer.
The Assistant Engineer shall periodically inspect electrical Installations in government building
once in three months and by the Assistant Executive Engineer once in every six months. In respect of
buildings in which the installations are in poor conditions the inspection shall be carried out more
frequently. Special repairs in the nature of re-wiring and replacement of major parts, if any, during such
inspection will be reported any found necessary to the Executive Engineer (Electrical) through the
Assistant Executive Engineer ( Electrical) accompanied by a detailed report and estimate. It shall the
duty of the officers under the control to take prompt steps to get sanction for the estimate and carry out
the repair.
Normally rewiring shall not be done in buildings within a period of 15 years of the initial
installation. If for any specific reason such rewiring is found necessary after conducting insulation test,
the matter may be brought to the notice of the Chief Engineer and sanction obtained before rewiring is
taken up. Insulation resistance and earth readings of all installations subject to periodical inspection shall
be conducted at least once in a year and the reading shall be recorded in the inventory register. In case
the readings are not within the permissible limits immediate action shall be taken to rectify the defects.

160
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Funds required to meet the expenditure for the rectifications maintenance and also special
repairs if any required for electrical installation, shall be made available from the allocation made for the
maintenance and repairs of the buildings under the concerned Executive Engineer. The requirement shall
be assessed early in financial year and the amount required earmarked for this purpose, subject to
availability of grant.
Such minor repairs and replacements necessitated during the periodical inspection and testing
have to be carried out charging to respective maintenance head of account. With regard to major repairs
and replacements such as rewiring, replacements of fans, fluorescent lights etc., special estimates have to
be got prepared and sanction obtained from competent authority and work executed charging to relevant
maintenance head. All such maintenance and special repairs estimates have to be prepared and submitted
at the beginning of the financial year so as to take up the works after obtaining necessary sanction in
time. In preparing the revised maintenance estimates, the cost shall not exceed the limit allowed as per
Government orders or departmental circulars.
Tool kit must be available with the field staff, which they shall carry with them while they visit a
centre either on routine inspection or on receipt of any notice.
The field staff shall maintain a diary of works attended and submit the same to the Assistant
Engineer periodically for review.
2309. Precautions to be noted in Execution of works
Drilling holes etc for the purpose of wiring shall not compromise the structural safety of the
buildings.
Electrification works shall be considered as complete only after rectification, plastering, and
painting of walls are accomplished.
Open wiring shall be resorted to as far as possible
2309.1. Safety Precautions
It is of utmost importance that electrical installations are maintained in good order as, even
minor defects if unattended to, can cause serious accidents. All those who are connected with wiring or
maintaining the electrical installations in any structure shall promptly take steps to set right the defects
noticed through the appropriate technical authority after cutting power supply to the defective section of
the installation.
2309.2. Accidents
In all Industrial establishments notices indicating how to treat persons who have suffered electric
shock shall be displayed at prominent places as per rule 44 of the Indian Electricity Rules.
When accidents are caused due to electricity, information shall be given to the Electrical
Inspector to Government as per Rule 44 A of the Indian Electricity Rules.
2309.3 Duties of Client Department
After the electrical works are completed and handed over to the user department, they shall be
responsible for charges like payments of electricity charges, consumables like diesel, oil to generator,
maintaining of battery etc. Petty repairs and fuse coils are to be attended by the user department. Petty
repairs include changing of fuses, switches cleaning of electrical fixtures, repairs of fans and light
subject to expenditure of Rs. 2000/- at a time. Improper additions will affect the installation and can be
fatal to human and properties. Hence, all additions and alterations should be done through electrical
wing of PWD.
SECTION 2400
2401. Quality Control
2401.1. General
Quality is an attribute to excellence. According to BSS 4778 (1) quality is totality of features and
characterization of a product or service that bears on its ability to satisfy, the stated or implied needs.
Quality in fact should be an ongoing process of getting the best continuously. Quality is fundamental to
reliability and durability of a product. The quest for quality calls for integrity, commitment, dedication,
knowledge, ethics and team work of persons involved in construction activity. Quality upgrading is a
continuous process of innovations of products, processing and adapting control tools. The quality must
be consistent. There are two types of quality control (1) Process control includes control at every stage
specifically; and (2) End Control based on end results. Quality management covers management
responsibilities, internal and external control, tests, acceptance criteria, corrective actions,
documentations, transparency etc.

161
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Two Tier Quality Monitoring System:

The PWD shall follow a two tier quality monitoring system for works. The first tier monitoring
system shall be by the Engineers in change of the works at various levels. The second tier monitoring is
by Quality Control Cell at State level. The procedure for first tier quality monitoring is explained below:
All works of PWD shall be executed and tested as per the prescribed Indian Standards. Where
Indian Standards are not available, these tests shall conform to the methods of test issued by the
agreement authority. In addition to the officers executing the work, the officers of quality control wing
of PWD shall also check quality. They shall insist on necessary tests, for ensuring the quality of work
and issue certificates that shall be produced before bill payment. The work program in detail shall be
intimated to the Quality control wing and any change communicated in advance.
Testing shall be done only in PWD approved labs and the expenses borne by the contractor. No
claims shall be entertained in this respect. Manufactures/ Suppliers shall satisfy themselves that the
materials conform to the requirement of the specifications and if requested shall supply a certificate to
this effect failing which the specimen shall be tested.
If the work is found to be of inferior quality, the contractor is bound to remove / demolish the
construction and replace it with prescribed quality work at his own expense. If he fails to do so, the
concerned Assistant Engineer shall arrange for removal/ demolition of inferior quality work and the
expenses arising due to this shall be made good from the contractor’s bill.
Alternately PWD Quality Control Labs in each district and the KHRI can be utilized to do the
relevant tests and issue certificates.
2402. Road Works
Quality control of road works shall be as per the guidelines provided in Section 900 of MoRTH
specification for road and bridge works. Guidelines on quality systems for roads have been evolved by
IRC vide SP 57 to facilitate preparation of appropriate quality systems for road projects. Procedures laid
down for roads and bridges as per Quality Manuals of the department issued from time to time shall also
be followed. The table2400.1 gives the physical requirements of aggregates for bituminous base course.
Table 2400.2 gives physical requirements for coarse aggregate in surface (wearing) courses and table
2400.3 the requirements of Mix for Surface (wearing) course.
For all renewal programme work mandatory tests shall be done and results incorporated with the
bill. For all prequalification and post qualification works tests results from quality control wing shall be
incorporated with bill. For all other works above the TS powers of Assistant Executive Engineers tests
results from approved lab / field lab / district quality control lab shall be incorporated with the bill.
2402.1 Traffic Diversions and Other Disturbances include abetment of construction noise and
environmental hazards, (Refer EMP for the work).
2402.2 Steps for Proper Patching of Pot-hole Given Below
a) Preparation of area to be patched by cutting to rectangular shape with vertical edges
b) Removal of all weak and loose materials and removal of dust by hand brushes and clearing
of fine dust and excess moisture (if any) using air blower
c) Application of tack coat using appropriate type and grade of cationic bituminous emulsion
by a hand operated pressure sprayer on the entire receiving surface of the prepared area
including the vertical edges (Tack coat may also applied along the vertical faces of the
rectangular cut by hand brush)
d) Laying of premix of appropriate thickness by making allowance for compaction.
e) Thorough compaction o the mix in the patch using a small vibratory roller or any other
suitable roller or compacting equipment (or even by the rear wheels of a loaded heavy truck
if none of these are available), soon after laying the mix and finishing to the same level as
the adjoining/surrounding area of the patch.
2403. Bridge Works
To ensure construction of safe, serviceable, durable and economically viable bridges, it is
necessary to have a strategy for management of human skills by way of quality systems defining quality
policy, quality assurance and quality audit. Guidelines on quality systems for road bridges have been
evolved by IRC vide SP 47: 1998 to facilitate preparation of appropriate quality systems for new bridge
projects. Procedures laid down for roads and bridges as per Quality Manuals of the department issued
from time to time can also be followed.
For all bridge works tests certificate from the quality control wing shall be incorporated with the
bill.

162
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2404. Building Works

Quality checks shall be performed at every stage from preparation of building layout,
construction, till the completion of the work.
The provisions of part 0, 2 and 3 of National Building Code and the prevailing rules and
regulation of the local bodies shall be followed in preparation of architectural plans and layouts. Also the
provisions contained in Section 5A (b) Part 6, Materials workmanship, inspection and testing for
concrete works shall be followed. In case of masonry construction, the details as per National building
code Part 6 Section 4 shall be followed. Details in Part 7, 8 and 9 of National Building Code relating
construction, safety and building services shall be followed. For test on various building materials the
relevant IS Codes as listed in Part V of National Building Code shall be followed.
The Executive Engineers in the Division / Assistant Executive Engineer in Sub division shall
furnish copy of the contract documents to the Zonal Executive Engineers in the Quality Monitoring Cell.
For all works above the TS powers of Superintending Engineer contractor shall set up field
laboratory for conducting mandatory tests.
For all original building works except prequalification work tests results from approved lab /
field lab shall be incorporated in the bill. For the prequalification works certificate from the quality
control wing shall be incorporated with the bill.
The second tier monitoring is the responsibility of the Quality Control Cell under the direct
control of the Chief Engineer (A&D). There shall be three Executive Engineers at zonal level and a
Assistant Executive Engineers at district level in the cell with lab facilities and support staff.
The Engineers in the cell shall conduct mandatory quality test for materials and works man ship
at the field laboratories for major works (above the Superintending Engineer’s powers of sanction) and
at district level quality control labs for works below Superintending Engineer’s powers. The concerned
construction division shall extend the required support for carrying out the test.
The Executive Engineers at quality control cell shall forward the monitoring reports to the Chief
Engineer (A&D) for major works with suggestions on the actions to correct the defects if any. The field
staff should also be advised on corrective actions on the defective materials and workmanship. The
Chief Engineer (A&D) shall initiate necessary actions as appropriate.
Procedures laid down for structures as per Quality Manuals of the department issued from time
to time can also be followed.
2405. Physical requirement of aggregates and requirement of mix for surface wearing course refer table
2400.
2406. Technical Audit
The objective of Technical Audit on works is to encourage Departmental officers to pay adequate level
of attention to quality in works. All works of original nature above Rs. 5 crores shall be subjected to
Technical Audit immediately after physical completion of works through an expert agency. The
Executive Engineers shall report the details along with a copy of abstract of final bill direct to the Chief
Engineer (A&D) for transmitting to the agency appointed for technical audit. Further details for
verification by the Technical Audit agency may be forwarded on demand. The Technical Audit agency
shall conduct detailed checks at every kilometer of road or as required at site including quality of
materials used, thickness of layers, workmanship etc by carrying out mandatory test as per IS, IRC
standards and specifications and quality manual. National building code and other standards and
specifications shall be in the case of building works. Copies of the audit details including findings shall
be forwarded to the Chief Engineer (A&D) who shall promptly call for Action Taken Reports (ATR)
from the Executive Engineer and Superintending Engineer on the rectification works, if any suggested
by the Technical Auditor, under intimation to Govt. In case there are defects in the quality of materials,
thickness in layers, or workmanship which cannot be rectified, suitable actions against the contractor and
the officers responsible may be initiated under intimation to Govt. However, the technical audit shall not
be linked to payment of contractor’s regular and final claims as per rules.
2406.1 Selection and Performance Evaluation of Technical Auditor
The Chief Engineer (A&D) shall forward a panel of consultants with proven expertise and
integrity, along with Terms of Reference (ToR), payment terms etc to Govt. once in two years for
st
approval before 31 March. The expenses towards Technical Audit shall be charged to the contingencies
of the concerned works. The Chief Engineer shall arrange to make payment through the Executive
Engineer. Performance of the Technical Audit agency shall be evaluated in detail by a committee
constituted by Govt. every year. The Chief Engineer (A&D) shall be the convener of the committee.

163
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2407 Need of New Materials

With tremendous increase in traffic volume as well as in the load carried by the commercial
vehicles per axle, it is necessary to introduce better materials in road works – both new construction as
well as in maintenance works. Moreover, the road technology has advanced tremendously and lot of new
materials and techniques are available for better performance and durability of road. There are many
high performance bituminous and cementations materials available for both flexible and rigid pavement
construction.
Some of the new materials and techniques are indicated in the following sections for developing
suitable specifications adopting from MORTH and other agencies.
2407.1 High Performance Bituminous Materials
2407.1.1 Cationic Bituminous Emulsion
Bitumen emulsion is a liquid product in which a substantial amount of bitumen is suspended in a
finely divided condition in an aqueous medium and stabilized by means of one or more suitable
materials. In India, among various types, normally cationic type of emulsion is used. A small proportion
of an emulsifier is also used to facilitate dispersion and to keep the globules of dispersed binder in
suspension. The bitumen content in emulsions is around 60 percent and the remaining is water. When
cold mix with emulsion is used on the road, it breaks down resulting in release of water and the mix
starts to set. Bituminous emulsion based construction is very efficient in terms of avoiding wearing of
the ingredient of the mix and preparation of the mix. However, emulsion based technology is somewhat
more stringent in terms of compliance to the proportion and requirements about the cleanliness of the
aggregates. The special advantage is that moist aggregates can be used for preparation of the mix.
Emulsion is advantageous for both new constructions as well as for the repair and maintenance.
2407.1.2 Modified bitumen
Properties of bitumen binders and bituminous mixes can be improved to meet requirements of
pavements with the incorporation of certain additives or blend of additives. These blends of additives are
known as modifiers and bitumen premixed with these additives are known as Modified Bitumen.
IRC:SP:53-2002 deals with “Guidelines for Use of Po lymer Modified Bitumen in Road Construction”.
The specification of modified bitumen by BIS has also been published recently (IS:15462-2004). The
advantages of using polymer and rubber-modified bitumen are given as under.
i. Lower susceptibility to daily and seasonal temperature variations
ii. Higher resistance to deformation at elevated pavement temperature
iii. Better age resistance properties
iv. Better adhesion between aggregate and binder
v. Higher fatigue life of mixes
vi. Delay of cracking and reflective cracking
vii. Overall improved performance in extreme climatic conditions and under heavy traffic
conditions.

PMB - Polymer Modified Bitumen (EMB or PMB)

NRMB - Natural Rubber Modified Bitumen
CRMB - Crumb Rubber Modified Bitumen

The issues related to handling of modified bitumen and mixes at sites are very important. It is extremely
important that modifier is thoroughly blended with bitumen before preparation of mix so that modified
bitumen retains its premium properties. The other precautions shall be as under:

i. Preferably be blended at refinery or proper mixing plant.

ii. Product supplied hot in tankers or if supplied in drums shall be agitated in melted
conditions with suitable device.
iii. Penetration, softening point, separation and elastic recovery test shall be conducted at
site for a lot of 10 tonnes.
iv. Multiple heating shall be avoided.
O
v. In case of NRMB, material shall be supplied at 130-150 C and shall be used within 24
hours of its filling.

2407.1.3 Modified bitumen emulsions

Modified emulsion are those whose residue is modified bitumen. Modified emulsion may be
classified as mono phase and bi phase system. The types of modifying agents used for production of mono
phase modified emulsions are EVA, SBS, SIS etc. In case of bi phase modified emulsions, latex of natural

164
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

or synthetic origin having extremely fine particles are used for modification in aqueous phase. The main
property of this modifier is their elastic rubber behaviour of residue that allows them to accept and
recover from large strains when they are exposed to temperature. This property of residue from modified
emulsion can be observed by elastic recovery test. The merits of modified emulsions over normal
emulsions are many but some are listed below:
i. High cohesion at medium and high service temperature
ii. Improved performance at low temperature
iii. Improved theological behaviour.
iv. Increased plasticity interval (P1=TR&B-T Fraass)
v. Better resistance to ageing.
2407.1.4 Multigrade Bitumen
Multigrade bitumen performs over a wide temperature range than conventional bitumen and re
formulated to resist both pavement rutting/deformation at high summer temperature and pavement
cracking at low winter temperature. These bitumen are mainly characterized by high value of penetration
index, typically greater than 0 but less than 2. Multigrade bitumen can either be considered to bridge the
performance gap between conventional bitumen and Polymer Modified Bitumen. These bitumen are in
most cases applied in thick wearing courses although in special situations of very heavily trafficked
roads. Multigrade bitumen can be applied in both the binder and wearing course to increase overall
performance including resistance to rutting like polymer modified bitumen. Multigrade bitumen will
require higher mixing and compaction temperature than those of conventional bitumen.
2407.1.5 Super-pave asphalt binder specifications
The super-paver binder specification (US-SHRP) is intended to control permanent deformation
at highest pavement temperature, low temperature cracking and fatigue cracking in flexible pavements.
The specification accomplishes this by controlling various physical properties. They are known as
‘performance grade’ meaning that the performance fo r the specified period is guaranteed. For example,
a PG 58-16 grade is designed to be used in an environment to offer protection for an average seven day
o
maximum temperature of – 16 C. the performance grade bitumen binder is normally selected on the
basis of climate from the grades. Of course, the equipments needed for performance based testing of
bituminous binders are more sophisticated than the normal bitumen.
2407.1.6 Production of Cubical Aggregates
The Indian Road aggregates industry is not so very well organized as in the west. In India, hand
breaking of stones is still continued in many Projects. The ideal is a hammer or a percussion crusher
which by giving an impact blow would shatter the rock boulder into smaller fragments resulting in
uniformly angular or cubical aggregates rather than flaky ones. Depending upon the magnitude of work
involved, an integrated crushing plant should be set up for each Project. Further, introducing shaping
unit after secondary crushing stage can control shape of aggregates. Crusher type also has effect on
shape of aggregates is well known. The shape of aggregates gives strength to bituminous mixes. If the
flakey particles are more, these are likely to be crushed under traffic and the gradation will be changed
which will affect the voids in the mix and subsequently the strength properties of the mix. The reduced
flakiness index, increase the mix strength and reduces the binder consumption significantly.
2407.1.7 Mastic Asphalt
Bitumen mastic, alternatively known as Mastic Asphalt, is a mixture of bitumen, mineral filler
and fine aggregates in suitable proportions designed to yield a void less compact mass. Its consistency is
0
such that it flows like a viscous fluid at temperatures of around 200 C, but on cooling to normal
temperature; it solidifies into a dense mass. Thus, its construction required no compacting effort. Mastic
Asphalt is used as wearing course material for heavy-duty pavement, city street carrying high volume of
traffic, bus stops where heavy tangential forces are expected due to deceleration and acceleration,
junctions where cornering stresses are predominant and on bridge decks. Thin mastics are also used for
footpaths.
2407.1.8 Milling/Recycling of Bituminous Pavement
Cold and hot recycling of the bituminous pavement is in vogue all over the world, specially for
the urban roads where increasing the levels of the road surface is often not possible. Moreover the top 1-
2 cm of the bituminous surface get oxidized and become brittle to develop micro-cracks under traffic
load, and bituminous materials in lower part of the bituminous layers are much better which can be
reused after rejuvenating. Moreover, the most voluminous part of the road pavement, i.e the aggregates;
can be reused for a fresh layer after correction of the grading by additional of required sizes. Presently,
only a part of the recycled materials from bituminous layers is used in the lower layer of granular base
course. However, it must be used in bituminous binder course and surfacing layer also using hot or cold
recycling method approximately correcting the mix for the specifications.

165
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2407.1.9 Stone Matrix Asphalt

Stone Mastic Asphalt (SMA) is a substitute to dense graded bituminous mix. It is a tough, stable,
rut resistant mixture that relies on Stone-on-Stone contact to provide strength and a rich mortar binder to
provide durability. SMA consists of two parts: a coarse aggregate skeleton with high binder and
stabilizing additive. The coarse aggregate skeleton provides stone-on-stone contact, and the stabilizing
additive acts to hold the asphalt binder from drain down in the mixture during the high temperatures of
production and placement. SMA has proved superior performance on heavily trafficked roads in city
traffic condition. The application of SMA are given below;
With high trucks frequency On bridges
Intense wheel tracking In bus lanes
At traffic lights At bus-stops
At intersections In car parks
On highways On airport runways
On gradients On unloading areas
2407.1.10 Porous Asphalt
Porous asphalt mix is a thin open graded mix, which has been found to eliminate the danger of
hydroplaning, enhance surface friction, reduces spray, and night glare during wet weather conditions as
porous mixes have interconnected voids and high permeability. Porous asphalt mixes are designed so as
to form a surfacing with a voids ratio of about 18-22% after laying and compaction. With such a high
percentage of voids, a network of channels is created in the layer, capable of carrying off the water that
has fallen on the pavement during a rain/shower and penetrated the surface. The benefits from porous
asphalt are:
i. Hydroplaning potential during rainstorm is minimized
ii. Skid resistance at high speeds during wet weather is improved
iii. Splash and spray during wet weather is minimized
iv. Road smoothness is improved (due to correction of minor surface irregularities)
v. Wheel-path rutting is minimized
vi. There are fewer glares at night during wet weather
vii. Riding surfaces are quieter (because of less noise from tyres)
viii. There is better wet-night visibility of traffic stripes
ix. Safety is increased (because of reduced stress on the operator during rainstorms)
2407.2 Geosynthetics
Geosynthetic is a revolutionary material for various applications for road works to provide
advantages in the performance and level of service of the specification in which it is used. These are
available in various forms: geotextile, geogrid, geonet, geomembrane, geocomposite, etc for appropriate
applications. Each of these are produced in different forms; for example, the geotextile can be woven or
non-woven type with different gauge of the fabric to meet different strength requirements in the two
perpendicular directions. Geosyntehtics can be used in pavement structure for various purposes: as
separation layer, drainage layer, to enhance tensile strength, to prevent reflection cracks in bituminous
layers, to use in reinforced earth/fill, for consolidation of clayey layer and many other such applications.
2407.3 Cold Mix Technology
Cold mix technology aims to save heating energy in bituminous construction by use of materials
in cold condition such as bitumen emulsion or cutback (only in special cases). Mix for both surfacing
layer or the binder course can be prepared using cold mix method, while certain specifications for
preventive maintenance are otherwise cold mix, e.g slurry seal and micro-surfacing. The cold mix
technology has various advantages over conventional hot mix technologies.
i. Non polluting and consumes only 70 per cent energy of the quantum consumed in 20-40
mm thick hot mix laying
ii. Raise in pavement height is marginal say 4-6 mm
iii. Execution is fast and safe
iv. Surface is resistant to skidding, oxidation and stripping
v. Cost effectiveness is also in that it saves pavement materials.
2407.4 Slurry Seal
The slurry seal is a mixture of fine aggregates, Portland cement as filler, bitumen emulsion and
water. It is like a slurry of thick consistency to be laid in a layer of 1.5-5 mm thickness to seal the cracks
and to fill any voids left in the surface course. Emulsion of modified bitumen provides better result.
Slurry seal may be used on top of single coat surface dressing. The surface shall be opened to traffic in
about 2 hours.

166
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2407.5 Micro Surfacing

Micro sufacing is a high performance mixture of polymer modified emulsified bitumen, dense
graded crushed mineral aggregate, filler (normally Portland Cement), Water chemical additive to
facilitate early setting of mix. A typical micro surfacing mix contain 12% modified emulsion, 86% dense
graded aggregate, 1% cement, 1% additive and sufficient water for workability. It is applied by
synchronized machine through spreader box. The micro sufacing is a similar specification as that of
slurry seal. This can be laid in thickness of 4mm to 16 mm depending on the present undulations of the
surface. Structurally adequate pavements having the bituminous surface oxidized and with micro-cracks
are most suited for this treatment as preventive maintenance intervention. Micro surfacing have the
following advantages over convention hot mixed techniques:
i. Marginal raise in pavement height
ii. Least environment pollution
iii. Life comparable to hot mix renewals
iv. Increased skid resistance
v. Faster laying process
vi. High durability due to rubber additives
2407.6 Fibre Reinforced Concrete
Fibre Reinforced Concrete is a Composite material, which consists of conventional concrete
reinforced by randomly, dispersed short length fibres of specific geometry, made of steel, synthetic
(polymeric) or natural fibres. The secondary reinforcement (fibres) is used to uniformly improve the
structural quality and also the inherent flexural strength of concrete. Internal stresses due to shrinkage
are restrained by uniformly mixed fibers in the concrete. Secondary reinforcement is the approach to
modify the brittle properties of concrete. The fibres are capable of carrying load across the crack.
2407.7 Roller Compacted Concrete (RCC)
RCC is a technique which makes use of zero slump concrete with or without fly ash, laying
manually or with mechanical spreader and compacting with vibratory road roller of 4-6 tonnes capacity.
Construction of RCC layer is fast and it is a suitable alternative technique for providing a surfacing layer
for medium to low traffic roads. The grade of concrete may be M-35. The riding quality of roller
compacted concrete pavement (RCCP) is not as good as cement concrete roads, but it is comparable to
the bituminous roads. While the flexible pavement layers require high volume proportions of good
quality aggregates (coarse and fine), this provides a very good alternative as semi-rigid base course also.
Moreover, bituminous surfacing can be provided on RCC as it is done in case of DLC.
2407.8 Wet Mix Macadam (WMM)
In most of the road construction work the normal WBM technology is still in use and rarely in some
special cases only WMM is considered. In view of the weakness left out in WBM construction due to non-
uniformity over the surface area of the road (due to largely manual construction process), and the excessive
water required to construct WBM specification, it is no longer popular for higher category of roads as well as
city roads. WMM is a mix prepared from clean crushed aggregates and fine aggregates with proper grading,
premixed with water, to form a dense mass, which is laid by pavers in the required thickness providing the
needed camber and compacted to the finished thickness. WMM so laid is popular now a day for all types of
road and is a much better specification than WBM in many ways. WMM can be laid in thickness from 75mm
to 200mm in one layer depending on the compacting equipment available. WMM specifications given in
clause 406 of MoRTH specification should be used directly.
2407.9 Ready Mixed Concrete
Ready mixed concrete (RMC) is a need of today’s concrete construction industry to produce and
deliver high quality produce economically. It is extremely useful on congested sites or in road
construction where limited space is available for keeping a mixing plant as well as aggregate stock
piling. It is a concrete delivered at site or into the purchaser’s vehicle in plastic condition and requiring
no further treatment before placing in the position in which it is to set and harden. By using RMC, there
may be less chances of spillage of concrete and its constituents and the concrete mix would be of better
quality than conventionally mixed concrete, since better quality control measures are adopted in making
RMC is not only a “quality material” but also a “service”.
2407.10 Concrete Overlay on Bituminous Pavement
2407.10.1 White Topping (WT)
A white Topping can be defined as: “A concrete over lay of adequate thickness bonded to an
existing asphalt pavement”. A solution for rutting asphalt pavement is ‘White Topping”, which means th
at the placement of a concrete overlay on top of asphalt pavement. This is an acceptable pavement
restoration practice since 1977. Much of the white topping technology has been developed in the USA
and other countries. Rigid pavement could be built in 15 to 20 cm depths over the enhanced sub grade

167
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

capacities of deteriorated asphalt pavements after correcting the existing level or providing leveling
course of dry lean concrete of grade M-10 over bituminous layer.
2407.10.2 Ultra thin while topping (UTW)
With the advent of new fast track concrete pavement technologies that allow the opening of a
concrete pavement within 24 hours or less of initial paving, white topping technology is advancing. Ultra
Thin White Topping (UTW) is the next generation concrete pavements. It involves the construction of a
concrete pavement of thickness 9 cm (90 mm) or less. Reduction in concrete pavement depths results in
a substantial reduction in concrete pavement cost with large scale economy. This type of pavement is
suggested where the minimum thickness of bituminous layer after milling is 75 mm and also existing
bituminous layer is in good condition so that reflection cracks or sympathetic cracks are as minimum as
possible. The left out cracks after milling shall be repaired first with either bituminous or cement
concrete or any other suitable polymers; and thereafter, ultra thin white topping is applied. The basic
purpose of UTW is to improve the riding quality along with the load carrying capacity.
2407.10.3 High Performance Concrete (HPC)
High Performance Concrete (HPC) is defined as concrete specially designed to meet long term
strength and durability. Use of HPC in pavements may result in extended service life, and improvement
of compressive/flexural strength and performance of the concrete. HPC is generally characterized by low
water/cement ratio and may contain silica fume and fly ash as mineral admixtures as replacement of
cement. The cost of the production of HPC is higher (by 16-32 percent) as compared to that of the
normal concrete at equivalent mix proportion. However, there is 20 to 50 percent increase in the
compressive and flexural strength as compared to conventional or normal concrete. Further, the benefits
accrued from the use of HPC, such as low maintenance cost. Longer life of the structure, higher strength,
trouble free service etc, shall compensate the high initial cost of the HPC. Possible benefits include:
i. Reduced construction times
ii. For rapid repair of distressed pavements and bridges
iii. Chloride resistance
iv. Reduced Permeability
v. Reduced corrosion of steel bars
vi. Improved durability, and serviceability, and
vii. Enhancement of the life of concrete pavements and bridges.
2407.11 Materials for Special Applications
2407.11.1 Ready to use patching mixes/materials for repair
Carbon core asphalt is a cold mix commercially available which is a ready to use mix that can be
used for resurfacing, patching and filling of potholes. It is available in disposable bags or drums.
Similarly, other brands are also available like Shellmac etc, which are also capable of doing the same
job. There are other polymeric cement and resin materials available commercially which can be used
even in wet climate for emergency repair of roads as they set very fast.
2407.11.2 Controlled low-strength material (CLSM)
Controlled Low-Strength Material (CLSM) is defined by ACI Committee 229 as a “self-
compacted material used primarily as a backfill material in lieu of compacted fill with a compressive
strength of 1200 psi (8400 kPa) or less”. However, where future excavation may be required, the
ultimate compressive strength of CLSM should be less than 300 psi (2100 kPa). The level of strength is
very low compared to concrete, but very strong when compared to soil. CLSM is the only viable method
of completely filling the voids, and additionally there is no associated cost for vibration or compaction of
the material in place. Controlled low strength material (CLSM) is an useful construction material for
filling the utility-cut trenches, specially for the lower layers. It is flow able grout for trench filling as it is
a self-compacting grout which is pumped into the location and water is allowed to flow out.
2407.12 Quality Control for New Materials
New materials like geotextiles and modified binders or SMA and Microsufacing or any of the
other materials described in this chapter can also be used to advantage wherever appropriate. All such
new materials will require appropriate quality control for the material as well as for the construction
specification to derive the true advantage. Therefore, specifications and quality control requirements of
each of these are to be understood clearly before their use. The quality control tests as required for use of
some of these materials are given in MoRTH specification also; for example, the quality control
requirements of geotextiles and modified bitumen are as given in clause 703 and 521 respectively of
MORTH specifications.
Each of these new materials may be adopted for use of appropriate, but with due care for actual
method of its use. Moreover, the material should be tested by more than one equipped laboratory for that
purpose to prove the efficacy of the same as per available specification. If it is not used anywhere in India

168
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

under similar conditions, it must be used first for experimental purpose as test sections of the actual road
for evaluation under normal traffic. For such experimentation, the manufacturer of the material should
also contribute to fund the study. Such study shall comply to the following equipments.
i. The quality control and quality assurance for such experimental (construction) sites shall
be more stringent.
ii. The proper plan for monitoring the performance of the road be made and data recorded
over sufficiently long period to justify the use of such materials.
iii. The proper record of planning and design of the experimental section is also to be
maintained so as to replicate and to develop design methodology after the successful
experimentation.
iv. The manufacturer of the material should provide minimum period (normal performance)
guarantee for the performance of the material under experimentation.
2407.13 Pavement Performance Evaluation
2407.13.1 Importance of Pavement Performance Evaluation
The performance of a pavement needs to be continuously evaluated with respect to both
functional and structural performance. The functional evaluation needs to be carried out more frequently
to know the riding quality of the pavements and the localized failures such as potholes. Raveling,
cracking, rutting etc. These problems may be addressed by way of minor surface treatments. Whenever
there is a need for provision of major overlays, structural evaluation needs to be carried out for designing
the overlay thickness.
The deterioration in pavement riding quality due to the above mentioned failures will increase
the road user costs in a significant way. By comparing the various parameters of pavement performance
with their respective permissible values one can taken decisions regarding the type of maintenance
measure to be implemented. Also several maintenance options for improving the pavement performance
to an acceptable level could be evaluated and an economical one could be adopted.
The whole pavement performance evaluation should be a part of a Road Maintenance
Management System (RMMS), where it is also possible to predict the pavement condition using
deterioration models. These deterioration models could be calibrated for the local conditions by utilizing
the pavement performance data. Therefore, an RMMS is essentially a preventive maintenance system
which keeps the pavement performance always at an acceptable level. Thus, the main objectives of
pavement performance evaluation are
• Establish maintenance priorities
• Determine maintenance and rehabilitation strategies
• Predict pavement performance
• Evaluate the performance of new materials and techniques.
2407.13.2 Methodology of Performance Evaluation
The performance evaluation for flexible pavements in normally carried out by objectively or
subjectively measuring the condition of the pavement surface with respect to roughness, surface distresses
such as cracking, raveling, pothole formation, shoving, rutting, localized depressions, and skid resistance. The
structural evaluation is also carried out by measuring the pavement deflection. The various techniques of
objective measurement of these distresses and pavement deflection are explained below.
2407.14 Methods of Measuring Distress
The pavement performance is largely defined by evaluation in the following
categories. Roughness / Unevenness
Surface distress
Skid resistance
Structural evaluation – Deflection
Roughness / Unevenness
Pavement roughness or unevenness is generally defined as an expression of irregularities in the
pavement surface that adversely affect the ride quality of a vehicle (and thus the user). Roughness is an
important pavement characteristic because it affects not only ride quality but also vehicle delay costs,
fuel consumption and maintenance costs.
Subjective measurement of Roughness
Pavement Roughness can be measured subjectively or objectively. In subjective measurement, a set of
road users can be asked to rate the riding quality on a 0-5 scale as shown below:
Present serviceability Rating (as suggested in AASHTO on a scale of 0-5) can be worked out from these
subjective ratings.

169
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Objective Measurement of Roughness / Unevenness

In the objective measurement, the roughness is indicated in terms of cumulative measure of vertical
displacements as recorded by a recorder when due to the unevenness in the longitudinal profile of the
road. The cumulative measure of ups and downs in road profile to termed as roughness index or
unevenness index and is represented in m/km or mm/km.
Roughness Measurement Equipment
Following are the methods/equipment that can be used for computing roughness index.
Road and level survey
A survey can provide an accurate measurement of the pavement profile. The use of surveys for large
projects, however, is impractical and cost prohibitive.
Dipstick Profiler
This instrument can record the pavement profile measurement very accurately. The device records 10 to
15 readings per minute. Software analysis provides a profile accurate to 0.127 mm. However,
measurements by dipstic are time consuming and therefore, it is commonly used to measure a profile for
calibration of more complex instruments.
Profilographs
Profilographs have a sensing wheel, mounted to provide for free vertical movement at the center of the
frame. The deviation against a reference plane, established from the profilograph frame, is recorded on
graph paper from the motion of the sensing wheel. Profilographs can detect very slight surface
deviations or undulations up to about 6 m in length. However, they are not practical for network
condition surveys due to slow speed.
Response type road roughness meters (RTRRMs)
These instruments provide indirect measure of longitudinal road profile. The RTRRMs measure the
relative movement between the body of the automobile and the centre of the real axle. The RTRRM
measurements are sensitive to the type of tyre, tyre pressure, load, vehicle suspension system, speed of
vehicle, etc. Because of such sensitivity they need to be calibrated when any of the above factors change
significantly. The CRRI’s fifth when bump integrator that is normally used in India also falls in this
category. The advantage of these RTRRMs is that they can record the road roughness at speeds upto 80
km/hr. Since no two RTRRMs are exactly alike, it is necessary to convert the measures (unevenness
index) to a standard common international scale.
To provide a common quantitative basis on which the different measures of roughness can be compared,
the International Roughness Index (IRI) was developed by World Bank. The IRI summarises the
longitudinal surface profile in the wheel path and the computed from surface elevation data collected by
either topographic survey or a mechanical profilometer or a dipstick. IRI is reported in units of m/km.
All the RTRRMs need to be calibrated by measuring the unevenness of a standard stretch for which IRI
value are known.
Profile devices
These devices very accurately can establish the longitudinal profile of a pavement by either using
contact or non-contact sensor systems. The non-contact systems use laser/ultrasonic devices for mapping
the road profile. These profilometers are expensive and are normally used to calibrate RTRRMs.
Range of Roughness Values
The following figure shows the range of IRI values for different pavements and the corresponding speeds.
There are several correlations between PSR and IRI. One of the correlations is presented here.
Where,
PSR = present serviceability rating
IRI = International roughness index
2407.15 Surface Distress
Surface distress is any indication of poor or unfavourable pavement performance or signs of
impending failure. The general surface distresses can be grouped under the following three road groups.
The distresses under each of the groups are also mentioned along with the unit of measurement in
parentheses.
• Fracture – Cracking (% area cracked)
• Distortion – Localized settlements and depression ( depth in mm) rutting (rut depth in mm) and
shoving
• Disintegration – raveling, stripping, potholes and patching (% effected area or no of pot holes per
km length)
Surface distress is related to roughness (the more cracks, distortion and disintegration – the rougher
the pavement will be) as well as structural integrity (surface distress can be a sign of impending or
current structural problems).

170
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Measures of distress can be either subjective or objective. A simple example of a subjective

measurement may be rating of each type of defect based on visual inspection on a scale of 0-5 as Very
Poor, Poor, Fair, Good and Very Good as in PSR.
Objective measurements, which are generally more expensive to obtain, use different types of
automated distress detection equipment. Older techniques, used teams of individuals who drove across
every km of pavement to be measured. The measurements were made using simple instruments and by
visual estimation. The rut depths were measured using straight edge and the area of cracking, patching,
raveling, etc were visually estimated. Based on the objective measurements the present serviceability
index (PSI) could be obtained using the ASSHTO equation.
Current methods record pavement surface distresses using video imaging using a specially equipped
van that is fitted with high resolution cameras. The van can travel at the usual highway speeds.
Evaluation is either done manually by playing the video back on specially designed work stations while
trained crews rate the recorded road surface or automatically by computer image processing software’s.
In more advanced Integrated Pavement Analysis Units, in addition to high resolution video cameras,
other instruments such as non-contact (laser) profilometers for mapping longitudinal as well as
transverse pavement profile, distance measuring instrument and computer workstations for processing
the data are fitted. Automatic Road Analyzer and Laser Road Surface Tester fall in this category. Using
integrated pavement analysis units one can obtain the following measurements.
• Roughness
• Distress (cracking, rut depth)
• Gradients, camber, curvature
• Pavement texture
The rating suggested by IRC in its guidelines or maintenance management of primary, a secondary
and urban road is given in the following table:
Pavement condition rating based on Different Types of Defects
Defects Range of Distress
Cracking (%) >30 21 to 30 11 to 20 5 to 10 <5
Ravelling (%) >30 11 to 30 6 to 10 1 to 5 0
Pothole (%) >1 0.6 to 1.0 0.1 to 0.5 0.10 0
Shoving (%) >1 0.6 to 1.0 0.1 to 0.5 0.10 0
Patch (%) >30 16 to 30 6 to 15 2 to 5 <2
Settlement and
>5 3 to 5 Up to 2 Up to 1 0
depression (%)
Rutting (mm) >50 21 to 50 11 to 20 5 to 10 <5
Rating 1 2 3 4 5
Condition Very Poor Poor Fair Good Very Good
(Source: Guidelines for Maintenance Management of Primary, Secondary and Urban Roads, IRC,
2004)
2407.16 Skid Resistance
Skid resistance is the force developed when a tyre that is prevented from rotating slides along the
pavement surface (Highway Research Board, 1972). Skid resistance is an important pavement evaluation
parameter because inadequate skid resistance will lead to higher incidences of skid related accidents.
Skid resistance depends on pavement surface texture. Skid resistance changes over time.
Typically it increases in the first two years following construction as the roadway is worn away by
traffic and rough aggregate surfaces become exposed, and then decreases over the remaining pavement
life as aggregates become more polished.
Skid resistance is generally quantified using some form of friction measurement such as a friction
factor or skid number.
Friction factor (like a coefficient of friction) : = F/L
Skid number: SN = 100 (f)
Where:
F = Frictional resistance to motion in plane of interface
L = Load perpendicular to interface
Measurement Techniques
• Portable pendulum skid tester
• The locked wheel tester
• The spin up tester
• Pavement surface texture measurement

171
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Portable Pendulum Skid Tester

It is a dynamic pendulum impact type tester for measuring the resistance offered by a surface under test.
It is used for measuring spot value of surface friction at representative locations. Though, it provides good
information on the skid resistance of the pavement, it cannot provide data with different speeds.
The locked wheel tester
This method uses a locked wheel skidding along the tested surface to measure friction resistance. It is
possible to measure skid resistance at different speeds in this method.
The spin up tester
A spin up tester has the same basic setup as a locked wheel tester but operates in an opposite manner.
For a spin up tester, the vehicle (or trailer) is brought to the desired testing speed (typically 64 km/hr)
and a locked test wheel is lowered to the pavement surface. The test wheel braking system is then
released and the test wheel is allowed to “spin up” to normal tr avelling speed due to its contact with the
pavement. The friction force can be computed by knowing the test wheel’s moment of inertia and its
rotational acceleration. This avoids the use of costly force measuring equipment.
Pavement surface texture measurement
In this method the pavement skid resistance is correlated with the pavement macro texture. By
measuring the pavement texture and using the established correlation between the macro texture and the
skid resistance, the skid resistance is obtained.
Deflection
Pavement surface deflection measurements are the primary means of evaluating a flexible pavement
structure. Although other measurements can be made that reflect (to some degree) a pavements structural
condition, surface deflection is an important pavement evaluation method because the magnitude and
shape of pavement deflection is a function of traffic (type and volume), pavement structural section,
temperature affecting the pavement structure and moisture affecting the pavement structure. Deflection
measurements can be used in back calculation methods to determine pavement structural layer stiffness
and the sub grade resilient modulus. Furthermore, pavement deflection measurements are non-
destructive destructive in nature which adds on to the overall viability of usage.
Measurement Technique
The pavement surface deflections can be measured using either static deflection equipment or impact
load deflection devices. Static deflection equipment measure pavement deflection in response to a static
load. Benkelman Beam falls in this category. Impact load devices deliver a transient impulse load to the
pavement surface. The subsequent pavement response (deflection basin) is measured by a series of
sensors. The most common type of equipment is the falling weight deflectometer (FWD)
Benkelman Beam
Is a simple device that operates on the lever arm principle. The Benkelman Beam is used with a loaded
truck – typically 80 KN on a single axle with dual tires inflated to 480 to 550 kPa. Placing the tip of the
beam between the dual tires and measuring the pavement surface rebound as the truck is moved away to
make measurement. The Benkelman Beam is low cost but is also slow, labor intensive and does not
provide a deflection basin. The procedure of measuring rebound deflection and finding the characteristic
deflection using Bnkelman Beam is documented in the following standard.
IRC: 81-1997 Guidelines for strengthening of flexible road pavements using Benkelman Beam
deflection technique.
Using the above standard one can design the overlays after arriving at the pavement characteristic
rebound deflection.
Falling Weight Deflectometer
(FWD) is an impact load device that delivers a transient impulse load to the pavement surface and the
resulting pavement response (deflection basin) is measured by a series of sensors (geophones). Vertical
deflection of the pavement in multiple locations is recorded by the geophones, which provides a more
complete characterization of pavement deflection. The area of pavement deflection under and near the
load application is collectively known as the “defl ection basin”. One of the advantages of FWD is that
multiple tests can be performed on the same location using different weight drop heights. The advantage
of FWD over BB is that it is quicker, the impact load can be easily varied and it more accurately
simulates the standard loading of trucks, both with respect to time of application of the load as well as
the magnitude of the load. Therefore, using FWD deflection data one can characterize the existing
pavement layers in terms of their layer modulii using back calculation procedures with the help of
mechanistic structural models.

172
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Once the pavement layers are characterized in terms of their present resilient modulii, overlays can be
designed using mechanistic procedures.
The characteristics of important equipment or the pavement performance evaluation is documented in
guidelines for Maintenance Management of Primary, Secondary and Urban Roads, “IRC, 2004.
2407.17 Intervention Criteria
Based on the objective/subjective rating of the pavement distress one can adopt a maintenance
strategy to bring back the distress ratings to an acceptable level. This kind of maintenance termed, as
pavement condition responsive maintenance is very effective when compared to the traditional
scheduled maintenance approach.
In order to determine the intervention criteria with respect to various distress indicators, it is
necessary to classify the roads. For the purpose of fixing the intervention criteria and for determining the
level of pavement evaluation to be adopted the following classification. Category-I : All State Highways
and City Roads
Category-II : Major District Roads
Category-III: Other District Roads
Table -1 Intervention Criteria for PWD Road Networks
Sl No Serviceability SH & City Roads MDR Other Roads
Indicator
1. Deflection 1.0mm 1-1.5 mm 1.5-2.0mm
2. Roughness by bump integrator 2500 mm/km 3000 mm/km 4000 mm/km
(max.permissible)
3. Pot-holes/l, (max. numbers of size Nil 2-3 4-8
<100 sq cm and depth <2.5 cm)

4. Cracking and patching repairs 5 percent 10 percent 10-15 percent

(max. permissible)
5. Rutting (max. permissible) 5mm 5-10 mm 10-20 mm
6. Skid Resistance (Skid number by 50 SN 40 SN 35 SN
ASTM-274 minimum desirable)
7. User Information All road signs, Major road signs, Major road signs and
road markings in road markings in markingsinfair
good condition good condition condition
Pavement performance is evaluated both functionally and structurally. However, functional
evaluation is more frequent than structural evaluation. A poor rating in functional evaluation leads to
structural evaluation.
The two ways of carrying out functional evaluation of pavements can be summarized as follows:
I. Qualitative approach based on subjective ratings of the above parameters and working out
a single performance index (similar to PSR on 0-5 scales)
II. Using objective measurements on rut depth, cracked and patched area, rutting, raveling
and roughness using appropriate instruments and working out the performance index.
In the long run, the data on Roughness, surface distress, skid resistance and structural evaluation
should be collected using suitable instruments as explained in Annexure 12-A in an objective manner. At
a network level, as speed of collection of such data is also an important factor, integrated analysis units
may be used for collecting data on pavement distress and FWD may be used for structural evaluation.
Ultimately, an objective system of road performance evaluation should be in place as a part of the Road
Maintenance Management System. In the mean time a qualitative approach of pavement performance
evaluation could be attempted.
In the mean time
- A detailed qualitative rating system on each and every parameter Table-2 may be tried for
State Highway & MDR.
This pavement performance evaluation when implemented in its full form should become part of
a road maintenance management system, which will guide in deciding the best maintenance strategy.
The data on pavement performance evaluation could be used for arriving at workable quality
assurance and quality control criteria.

173
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Table 2
RATING OF PAVEMNT SURFACE
Name of Road: Rater:
Section: Date and Time:
Number of Traffic Lanes:
Distress Rating Scale

Cracking GOOD FAIR POOR

5 4 3 2 1 0
Rutting GOOD FAIR POOR
5 4 3 2 1 0

Patching GOOD FAIR POOR

5 4 3 2 1 0

Raveling GOOD FAIR POOR

5 4 3 2 1 0
Bleeding GOOD FAIR POOR
5 4 3 2 1 0

Potholes GOOD FAIR POOR

5 4 3 2 1 0

Riding Quality GOOD FAIR POOR

5 4 3 2 1 0

Explanatory Notes
Cracking : Good: Generally un-cracked
Fair: Single crack along the when path or localized very fine cracking.
Poor: Extensive cracking
Rutting : Good: Deformation along wheel path up to 10mm
Fair: Deformation along when path between 10 and 20 mm
Poor: Deformation along wheel path above 20mm
Patching : Good: No patching or potholes or localized depressions observed
Fair: Localized patching or potholes observed at some places
Poor: Extensive patching or potholes spread all along the section.
Raveling : Good: No raveling or stripping observed
Fair: Stripping confined to localized pockets but exposed aggregate remain stable
Poor: Aggregate surface is exposed extensively and extensive raveling observed.
Bleeding: Good: No bleeding observed
Fair: Bleeding confined to a few localized patches
Poor: Extensive bleeding spread all along the section
Riding Quality Good: Comfortable travel inside the vehicle
Fair: Generally comfortable with occasional bumps
Poor: Uncomfortable ride with frequent bumps.

Simple qualitative rating shown in tables below could be used for other roads.

1. Measurement based on visual inspection only

An experienced engineer can rate the PCI by visual inspection of the pavement for each
kilometer on a scale of 1 to 5 as under:

Description of Surface Condition PCI

Very Good 5
Good 4
Fair 3
Poor 2
174
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Very Poor 1

2. Based on riding comfort

A jeep or car is driven at 50 km/ hr and the riding comfort noted for each kilometer. Based on
riding comfort while driving at the design speed of 50 km/hr, the PCI is assessed as under:

Riding Comfort at 50 km/ hr PCI

Smooth and pleasant ride 5
Comfortable 4
Slightly uncomfortable 3
Rough and bumpy 2
Dangerous 1

3. Based on comfortable driving speed possible

The driver is instructed to drive at the most comfortable and safe speed possible on the road.
The PCI then assessed for each kilometer based on normal driving speed as under:
Normal Driving Speed PCI
Over 50 km/hr 5
40 to 50 km/hr 4
30 to 40 km/hr 3
20 to 30 km/hr 2
Less than 20 km/hr 1

2407.18 Performance Evaluation for New projects and Techniques

As mentioned earlier, evaluation of performance of the roads constructed by using new materials
or new techniques is to be carried out to get an idea about their behavior after 2 to 3 years. The
techniques of performance evaluation are similar to those described above and additional tests or
methods may be employed as necessary. The results of such post construction performance evaluation
will be educative which enable the implementation of corrective measures and carry out modifications in
future works of similar type and design.
2407.19 Drainage Aspect
2407.19.1 Drainage is the most important aspect for proper upkeep of roads. Strength and life of the
pavement greatly depends on the moisture present in and below the pavement. Performance and
durability of the pavement is inversely proportional to be quantum and duration of the presence of
moisture in the road structure. Failure of bituminous pavement in rainy season is mainly due to the
action of moisture on the various components of pavement.
2407.19.2 Entry of Moisture
Moisture gets into the road structure through various sources like-rain water falling on the
pavement, water flowing on the surface, moisture getting into pavement through cracks in the pavement,
water seeping into the pavement through uncovered soil, moisture from below rising by capillary action,
water getting in to the pavement by way of spring flow and pipe leaks and stagnation of water due to
flooding or other reasons.

2407.19.3 Action of Moisture of Pavement Components

Once moisture finds entry into the pavement structure it acts in various ways. It saturates the soil
which reduces its bearing capacity and the pavement starts sinking. Moisture present in the WBM
loosens the interlocking of the metal pieces and they move from their original position disturbing the
upper layers. Moisture present in the bituminous courses reduces the adhesive property of the bitumen
which results in to stripping of the metal. Such loose metal under the moving rubber tyres start grinding
the surface. This grinding results in to further loosening of other metal pieces in the pavement and with
the sucking and churning effect of traffic the whole surface starts raveling. Water accumulated in

175
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

depressions and pot holes continuously supplies moisture to lower layers weakening the whole structure
for the pavement. Prolonged contact of moisture affects all the components of the pavement.
2407.19.4 Dealing with Moisture
Best approach to tackle the moisture problem lies in totally eliminating the water contact. However it
is very difficult to have such an environment. So attempt should be to minimize the quantity of moisture entry
and to reduce the duration of the moisture contact with pavement. This can be achieved by providing efficient
drainage system to quickly carry away the surface water and quickly removing the subsoil water that has
found entry into the structure. Also create such situation that the entry points of moisture penetration are
effectively sealed. Problem of flooding on the road is dealt separately below.

2407.20 For New Road

1) A drainage layer having good permeability with inverted choke should be provided below the
pavement. Thickness should be minimum 150mm.
2) In locations where water table is high, to prevent entry of soil particles into the drainage
layer/capillary cut off, some capping layer should be provided such as geo-fabric, quarry spall,
moorum etc
3) Drainage layer and GSB should be provided for the full width up to road side gutters and weep
holes should be provided at suitable level and suitable intervals in the gutter (Fig.2407 A)
4) Road side edge of the open gutter should be lower than the edge of the pavement at that location.
5) Built up gutter should have min gradient of 1:400, however 1:300 is preferable. Invert gradient
should be checked by third party preferably with sight rails.
6) Curb inlets / Drop inlets should be at least 25-30 mm lower than the edge of the pavement. In
case of pipe laterals depth of 50mm is preferable.
7) Built up drains should finally lead to some natural water course or SWD system of sufficient
capacity. This should be ensured by some third party inspection.
8) In case of foot paths proper edge gully and kerb inlet arrangement should be provided.
9) Before issue of work order fresh levels should be taken by the executing staff, invert levels of
longitudinal drains and final disposal point should be determined. A working drawing should be
prepared or the project and it should be available on the site all the time.
10) At the location of C.D work and bridges provision of one or two conduits cross wise and in the
kerb is very useful in laying future utilities.
11) Road formation should be at least 300mm higher than the general ground level except where the
road passes through cutting. No land development above the road level should be permitted.
12) Minimum camber for bituminous surface should be 2.5% however 3% camber would be more
desirable.
13) Camber should be attempted from the formation itself, and all pavement layers should have the
desired camber during construction itself.
14) Shoulder should have min camber of 5% and should have good permeability.
2407.21 For Existing Roads
1) When road work is taken for improvement or relaying etc. pot hole filling and camber correction
should be done in advance.
2) Due to creep if the edges of the pavement are higher than the adjoining portion they should
either be chopped out or leveling courses should be so adjusted that the finished surface is at
desired camber.
3) Existing drainage system should be thoroughly checked by some experienced and responsible
person. Any deficiencies noted, modifications suggested etc should be duly undertaken on
priority, preferably before main work of pavement is taken up.
4) Leaking pipes, spring flows, chronic damage spots and cracked up portions should be
investigated and proper corrective measure should be taken before the main work.
5) If adjoining plots are higher than the main road they should be trimmed. Alternatively a cattle
trap type drain should be provided and joined to SWD system.
6) Edge gutter/gully, inlet etc should be examined for their levels and clearance.
7) Provision of shoulder drains should be made where soft shoulders exist. Similarly in case of roads in
cutting and at chronic spots provision of subsoil drains should be made. (Appendix 2407 C&D)
8) At the end of the flyovers and ramps water flowing along the slopes should be arrested and
diverted to SWD system by providing a slotted/cattle trap type drain at the foot of the slope.
9) Water flowing through water spouts of the flyovers should be lead through suitable pipes to the
ground chambers and connected to SWD.
176
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

10) Wearing coat on the flyover and bridges should be 15 to 20 cm short from the kerbs. The notch
formed will serve as a drainage gully. This will avoid stagnation on the bridge decking and avoid
damages to wearing coat.

1) Pot-holes should be filled timely and systematically.

2) Cracked up, sunken, dislodged portions should be removed fully and rebuilt in layers.
3) Top surface of the filled pot-hole should be flush and in camber with the adjoining surface.
Smooth flow of surface water to the side drains should be ensured.
4) Raised bituminous edges should be trimmed and made lower than the neigh boring surface.
5) Pipe leaks should be attended by stopping the leaks immediately; in case it is not possible, a
suitable out let by way of a bypass should be provided to leaking water.
6) Reinstatement of trenches with loose material without proper compaction gives easy entry to
moisture and renders the adjoin pavement week. Subsequent settlement of the loose fill results
into local sinking which further attracts moisture and leads to failure of the pavement.
Reinstatement should be with non-cohesive material compacted in layers. Top surface of the
reinstatement should be regular pavement and it should be flush with the surface in level and
camber. Subsequently if it shows some settlement it should be made good time and again, but in
no case it should be kept proud.
7) Building debris and other heaps obstructing the flow of water should be immediately removed.
8) The system of pot-hole repairs with Pre Mix material laid in cold condition, without removing
the loose material filed during monsoon, without tack coat and without rolling should be
discontinued. Similarly pot-hole filling by contracting agencies needs a fresh look, as it is
proving to be costly and ineffective.
9) Pre-monsoon and post-monsoon inspections of surface drainage system by the section in charge
should be strictly enforced. It should be monitored by his superiors and test checked.
2407.23 Work Zone Traffic Management
2407.23.1 General
The purpose of any work zone Traffic Management Plan (TMP) is to ensure that
the impacts 1*of road works on the public domain, in particular with respect to temporary interruptions
to vehicular and pedestrian traffic, are considered by the authority. The TMP must ensure safety to the
workers, pedestrians and vehicle users at all times, and that the delay due to interruptions is minimized.
The TMP should also ensure that the minimum required time is made available to the roadwork before
the road is opened for traffic.
2407.23.2 Present Status of Traffic Management for Road Works
At present it appears that there is very little planning carried out for work zone traffic
management for all road works of PWD. For all cement concrete road works construction is done lane
wise allowing traffic on the remaining lanes. The impact of lane closure however is not being
scientifically assessed. Provision of the traffic control devices and signs are also decided at the time of
construction in the site. Only bare minimum work zone safety measures are being under taken by the
contractor. Flexible pavement maintenance works at present are carried out during night time when the
traffic volume levels are negligible. No specific traffic management measures are being implemented for
these road maintenance works. One of the important problems observed in the case of road resurfacing
works is that these works are opened to traffic much earlier than the minimum required curing period. A
proposer work zone traffic management plan will ensure the availability of minimum required time for a
roadwork before it is opened to traffic, safety at the work zone and minimum delay to the road users.
Therefore, it is suggested the PWD should prepare and implement a traffic management plan for all road
works. Particularly attention should be paid to requirements for smooth and safe pedestrian flow.
2407.23.3 Components of Temporary Traffic Control Zones of Road Works
The temporary traffic control zone includes the entire section of roadway between the first
advance warning sign (“ROAD WORK AHEAD” sign) and t he last traffic control devices (“ROAD
WORK ENDS” sign). The four components of temporary traffic control zones, in the order that drivers
encounter them, are
Advance Warning Area
This area notifies the driver of an impending temporary traffic control zone. This advance
warning may vary from a single sign to a series of signs and / or flashing lights on a vehicle preceding
the transition area. The distance the warning area should be placed ahead of the transition area depends
on factors such as the speed limit, roadway condition, and type of road.
Transition Area
177
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

When traffic needs to be redirected from normal lanes, channelization devices are used to move
traffic to a new path. This redirection should occur at the beginning of the transition area. Transition
areas usually involve the use of roadway tapers. Tapers are created using a series of channelizing devices
or pavement markings placed out of or into the normal traffic path. There are several types of tapers;
merging, shifting, shoulder downstream, and one –la ne / two –way.

1* As per the suggestion of the Supreme Court Committee, Road Safety Audit should be conducted by a third party
for the construction work of any road costing above Rs. 10 crores, at the design stage and recommendations of the
design stage auditor should be incorporated and implemented (GO (Rt) No.1557/2016/PWD dated 11.11.2016).

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Activity Area
Actual road works is conducted within the activity area. This area is made up of the worm space,
the traffic space, and optional buffer spaces. The works pace is that portion of the roadway closed to
traffic and set aside for workers, equipments, and material. The work space can be stationery or move as
work is conducted. The traffic space is the portion of the roadway in which traffic is routed through the
activity area. Buffer space is intended to provide an area of separation and security between the work site
and traffic. The buffer space can be placed longitudinally and/ or laterally to the work area. Buffer
spaces are optional.
Termination Area
The termination area is used to return traffic to the normal traffic path. In this area, tapers can be
used to achieve rerouting of the traffic back to the normal traffic lanes. The termination area extends
from the downstream end of the work area to an “END OF R OAD WORK” sign if posted.
All these four components are shown for a typical work zone in Fig. 18.1 wherein one lane is
closed for maintenance.
2407.23.4 Work Zone Traffic Control Strategies
A suitable strategy from the ones mentioned below should be adopted for traffic control at work
zones after assessing the impact.
Lane Constriction ie., reducing the width of one or more lanes to retain the number of lanes normally
available. Lane constriction is usually the least disruptive to traffic, but is applicable only if the work
area is predominantly outside the normal traffic lanes and if should are available.
Lane Closure ie., one or more traffic lanes are closed after determining that serious congestion will not
result based on a capacity analysis. (Appendix 2407 F).
Shared right – of –way ie., utilizing one lane for both directions of traffic flow with flaggers or signals
to coordinate the two directions of traffic or possibly traffic control signing alone for short term work
zones on very low volume two lane roads (Appendix 2407 E).
Temporary by-pass, ie., total closure of the roadway in one or both directions where work is being executed,
and rerouting the traffic to a temporary roadway constructed within the highway right – of – way (Appendix
2407 F). Where a temporary diversion is constructed, the geometrics of the same should be as per the
standards that apply to the normal traffic lanes and the number of lanes for diversion should be decided based
on the volume of diverted traffic and a minimum level of service of D should be ensured during peak hour.
The pavement section for the diversion should be designed based on the diverted traffic loading and duration
following the normal standards that apply to the regular traffic lane pavements.
Intermittent closure, ie, stopping all traffic in one or both directions for a relatively short period of time
to allow work to proceed, then after a certain time (based on traffic volume) reopening the roadway
(normally applicable on very low volume roadways).
Crossover, ie, routing a portion or all of one direction of the traffic stream across the median to the
opposite traffic lanes, or utilizing the shoulder and / or lane construction to maintain the same number of
lanes (Fig. Appendix F).
Use of the shoulder or median, ie., the existing shoulder ort median acts as a temporary traffic lane
(Appendix 2407 F). Where shoulder lane is used for diverting the traffic , shoulders should be
strengthened to take the regular traffic during the duration of closure. Earthen shoulders for the purpose

178
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

of strengthening shoulder be provided with 150mm thick granular base covered with bituminous surface
dressing or carpet or mix seal surface.
Detour, ie, total closure of the roadway (one or both directions) and rerouting traffic to existing alternate
facilities.
2407.23.5 Impact Analysis of the Work Zone Traffic Control Strategy
For a given roadwork several alternative traffic management plans could be generated using the
above listed strategies. All these alternatives are evaluated by qualifying their impacts. One of the
measures that could be used to evaluate the plans is the delay to traffic which is the difference between
the normal travel time and the increased travel time due to the implementation of the strategy. Capacity
deficiency due to the road work is overcome by implementing traffic management strategies. The impact
of each strategy is worked out. Simple speed flow curves could be used to work out the reduction in
speed for each of the strategies. The best strategy that has minimum adverse impacts could be selected.
The work zone traffic management plan should also identify any interruption to bus services ort
bus stops and provide details of any measure to ensure continued access to public transport. Existing o
bus routes will be maintained as far as is reasonably practicable and any diversions necessary will be
well publicized. The TMP should also ensure that satisfactory access for emergency vehicles such as
ambulances, fire fighting vehicles etc is not impeded. Emergency vehicles require reasonable access to
every property, along the construction route at all times.

2407.23.6Traffic Control Devices Used in Temporary Traffic Control Zones

A traffic control device is a sign, signal, marking or other device placed on or adjacent to a street
or highway. Devices should be placed by an official or public body with jurisdiction to regulate, warn, or
guide traffic.
Types of Work Zone Devices
Traffic control devices within temporary traffic control ones serve essentially the same functions
as traffic control devices do generally. The types and uses of the various devices used in temporary
traffic control zones include:
Signs
Temporary traffic control zone signs are similar in their communication objectives to all other
traffic signs. Line other signs, temporary traffic control signs are categorized as regulatory signs,
warning signs, and informatory signs. Signs used at night need to be retroreflecterized or illuminated to
achieve a nighttime visibility that is comparable to that in daylight. The illumination can be internal or
external; street or highway lighting is not usually adequate to satisfy this requirement. Signs used in
temporary traffic control zones are often relocated and subject to considerable are and tear during
handling. Therefore, they should be routinely inspected for cleanliness, visibility, excess wear, and
proper positioning and should be replaced if necessary. Descriptions of specific signs are available in
IRC: 67-2001.
Arrow Displays
An arrow display is a sign with a matrix of elements. The matrix, capable of wither flashing or
sequential displays, provides the driver with additional warning or information. The direction of
movement of vehicle at diversions could be effectively indicated by these arrows.
High level Warning Device
A high level warming device, or flag tree, is designed to be visible over the top of vehicles, has
at least two flags, and may contain an appropriate warming sign. They are often used in high volume
urban temporary traffic control zones to warn motorists of short-term operations.
Channelizing Devices
Channelizing devices warn and guide drivers through work activities in or near the roadway and
protect workers in the temporary traffic control zone. Types of channelizing devices include: cones,
tubular markers, vertical panels, drums, barricades, portable barriers, and temporary raised islands. Each
device is subject to specific requirements as to size, color, stripe patterns and use of retroreflecterized
material.
Pavement Markings
Pavement markings provided in a temporary traffic control zone must be comparable to the
markings maintained along adjacent roadways. Pre-existing markings need to be evaluated for their
potential to misguide vehicles. Any such markings need to be thoroughly removed (black spray paint is
not satisfactory as in certain lighting it can appear to motorists as an existing marking). All markings and
devices used to delineate vehicle paths and pedestrian routes should be evaluated in differing lighting
179
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

and weather conditions to assess the risk of misguidance. Descriptions oof pavement markings are
available in IRC: 35-1997.

Lighting Devices
It is often necessary to supplement retroreflecterized signs, barriers and channelizing devices
with lighting devices at night. Floodlights should be used to illuminate flagger stations, equipments
crossings, and other work areas where existing light is not adequate. The floodlights should not be used
where they may create a disabling glare for drivers. A flashing beacon is a flashing yellow light used to
alert drivers to special road conditions. Steady – burning lamps placed in a line on channelizing devices
are effective in delineating the proper vehicle path through a temporary traffic control zone. Because
warning lights attract a driver’s attention, they are used to help drivers identify road hazards.
Other Devices
Other devices include impact absorbing attenuators, portable barriers, temporary traffic signals,
rumble strips, screens and lane dividers. Impact attenuators, which may be stationary or mounted on a
vehicle, protect motorists from the exposed ends of barriers, fixed objects, and other hazards. Like all
traffic control devices, these temporary devices must be routinely inspected to ensure they function as
untended. Details of road delineators are available in IRC : 79-1981.
2407.23.7 Pedestrian Safety
The following points should be given due consideration for pedestrian safety at road works.
1) Pedestrians and vehicles should be physically separated (ie, by barriers, barricades, or similar
items).
2) Pedestrian walkways should be maintained free of any obstructions and hazards such as holes,
debris, mud, construction equipments, stored materials etc.
3) Temporary lighting should be considered for all walkways that are used at night, particularly if
adjacent walkways are lighted.
4) Walkways should be at least 1.5m wide, and should be wider in areas of high pedestrian activity.
5) All hazards (ditches, trenches, excavations, etc) near or adjacent to walkways should be clearly
delineated.
6) Walkways under or adjacent to elevated work activities such as bridges or retaining walls may
require a protective roof.
7) Advance information is needed if the pedestrian pathway is blocked or detoured. Signs and
traffic control devices should be provided at points of decision to properly guide the pedestrians
along the detour. Pedestrian signals that no longer apply should be covered. Signs and traffic
control devices should not be a hazard to pedestrians. Signs located near or adjacent to a
sidewalk should have a 2m clearance.
8) Where safe pedestrian passage cannot be provided, pedestrians should be directed to the other
side of the street by appropriate traffic control devices (eg. “Foot Path Closed- Use Other Side”
and “Pedestrian Detour- Follow the Arrow “ signs).
9) Where construction activities involve sidewalks on both sides of the street efforts should be
made to stage the work so that both sidewalks are not out of services at the same time.
10) In the event that sidewalks on both sides of the street are closed, pedestrians should be guided
around the construction site.
11) Reflectorized traffic control devices are of little value of pedestrians. Warning lights should be
used to delineate the pedestrians’ pathway and to mark hazards as appropriate.
12) Particular attention should be given to avoid inconvenience to senior citizens and handicapped
pedestrians.
2407.23.8 Worker Safety
Worker safety is another primary objective of the TMP, Key elements of traffic control
management that enhance worker safety are: Training workers about how to work safety next to traffic;
Equipping workers with bright and highly visible clothing; Using barriers to separate work space from
traffic; Reducing speed zones and using law enforcement; Lighting the work area; Preparing public
relations efforts to reduce traffic through the temporary traffic control zone; and Closing roads.

SECTION.2500
2501. Asset Management

180
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2501.1. Introduction
Maintenance of all the assets is far more important than continuous creation of new assets
without provision for proper upkeep. Currently the backlog of maintenance activities has caused the
deterioration of structures and most of them have to be reconstructed. It is vital to the economy of the
State that timely maintenance is carried out.
The maintenance activities should be properly planned and implemented periodically. For this all
the assets shall be recorded in registers and regular inspection and verification done.
2501.2. Land Plans & Land Records
The land plans & land records are the basic documents of property right of the Govt. /Department.
Therefore, land plan showing boundaries of the area etc. should be kept on record & updated from time
to time. Sometimes part of Govt. land is given on lease to some private parties or corporations. In such
cases lease proposals are approved at Govt. level & lease agreements are signed at Assistant Engineers
level. The Assistant Engineer has no power to give any piece of Govt. land to any party without
permission from the competent authority. In all such cases of leases of Govt. property a lease register &
agreement copies of lease deed should be maintained by the Assistant Engineer for record, reference,
renewal or termination of lease.
2501.3. Encroachments
The encroachments generally occur on Government land of buildings or adjoining the roads/
bridges. Such encroachments should be removed with the help of revenue and police authorities then and
there.
2501.4. Auction of Usufructs
The fruit bearing trees and other trees on Government land viz. along the internal road, quarters,
office premises, rest houses etc. and along the PWD roads should be protected properly. Every year
auction should be held for sale of usufructs. The money realised should be credited to revenue of the
department.
2501.5. Dismantled Material Account
The useful materials obtained from dismantling of the old structures, buildings, roads or bridges
etc should be taken on record as per provisions in section.3019.3. Before dismantling any old building,
permission of the competent authority should be obtained for dismantling and to write off the structure
from Building Register as per section 2901.1.3. In case of culverts the same shall be noted in the
concerned register as per section 2702 and bridges as per section 2802.
2501.6 Theft of Government Property / Articles
Any theft of Government property is to be immediately brought to the notice of higher officers.
Similarly, action to lodge the complaint with the police is also to be taken.
2501.7Accident Reporting
Sometimes accidents happen on site of work involving injuries to persons, deaths, loss of
property etc. All efforts should be made to give medical treatment at the earliest. Such instances should
be immediately brought to notice of higher officers. Similarly, action should be initiated to mobilise
support of relief/ rescue from local police/ revenue officers. The detailed reporting should follow later
on. In case of major accidents the matter shall be reported.
2501.8 Erosion control and environment protection
Any maintenance activity shall also include necessary precautions for the control of erosion and
leaching. In case of buildings, retaining wall and toe wall with turfing shall be done. The provisions of
the guidelines for environmental protection shall be adhered to. In case of roads and bridges, erosion
control shall be done by turfing or seeding and mulching as per clause 306, 307 and 308 of Standard
Specification for Roads and Bridges of MoRTH.
2501.9 Maintenance Estimates
The divisional officer shall forward the maintenance requirements within his jurisdiction by end of
each calendar year to the concerned planning wing who shall incorporate this in the annual budget. Once the
budgets are passed the concerned Chief Engineer shall place at the disposal of each divisional officer a
lump sum amount at the start of the financial year. It is the responsibility of the divisional officer to
prioritise the works in his jurisdiction within the allotted amount.

181
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

SECTION 2600

2601. Maintenance of Roads

2601.1. General
The maintenance of road is an elaborate activity and includes maintenance of basic records,
maintenance of structures and tools & plants required including carrying out inspection of all the
structures at regular prescribed intervals. While maintenance of State Highways and Major District
Roads is the responsibility of PWD, the State Government acts as the agent of the Union Government
for carrying out maintenance works on National Highways. In respect of Corporations, Municipalities
and Panchayats all roads falling within their jurisdiction are to be maintained by them with the exception
of certain specified roads in each Corporation, Municipality or Panchayat which Government have
ordered the P. W D. to maintain. Even when roads are constructed in highest quality, over a period of
time, they will show signs of distress due to the effects of increase in vehicular traffic, climatic effects
and other reasons.
Traffic on most of the roads have exceeded their capacities, and do not cater to the needs of
modern multi axle heavily loaded vehicles. Moreover, reclassification to higher categories is done
without properly designed upgradations. Hence, this has resulted in deterioration of roads which in turn
causes loss to the economy by way of increased fuel consumption, wear and tear to vehicles, accident
costs and increased travel times. The need of the hour is to create a road network of desired level of
service for which upgradation of existing roads shall be done in a phased manner.
Maintenance of all elements of the road is important but the condition of the pavement is the
most important in predicting the performance of the road. Appendix 2600A details the type of distress,
symptoms, probable causes and possible types of treatment. Road maintenance is required on a regular
basis to keep these effects to a minimum, extend the life of the road and provide a high level of service
to users. The criterion for maintenance shall be as per Appendix 2600B
All maintenance and repairs are to be carried out as per relevant codes and specifications of IRC
and similar instruction/orders issued by the competent authority on the subject.
The basic objectives of maintenance are
a. Affording riding comfort, convenience and safety to the public
b. Preservation of the investment in roads and appurtenances
c. Preservation of the aesthetics and compatibility of highway system with environment; and
d. Accomplishing necessary expenditure of resources with continuing emphasis on economy.
2602. Road Maintenance Unit:
At each Division, there is a Road Maintenance Unit (RMU) under the Divisional Officer,
Executive Engineer It shall have the responsibility of maintaining a register of all assets with periodical
updating. This may be obtained from the respective Assistant Engineer, who shall maintain current
records in the form of registers (given as Appendix 2600E to 2600F) for all the roads and culverts under
his charge. Wherever necessary the RMU shall undertake regular monitoring surveys and the reports
submitted to the Divisional Officer and forwarded to the Central Road Maintenance Unit. The Executive
Engineer shall prioritize the roads for maintenance for next financial year in his Division before the end
of each calendar year. The RMU cell in the centre shall collect the road maintenance requirement for the
entire State from respective divisions and the proposal for total fund requirements shall be incorporated
in the annual budget as a planned item.
2602.1. Maintenance Planning:
The annual maintenance plan for the next financial year shall be prepared by the Executive
Engineer and forwarded to the Chief Engineer before end of November. A proforma for such proposal is
given as Appendix 2600G. Chief Engineer shall finalize actual fund requirement based on output from
Road Maintenance Management System and this shall be transmitted to the Finance Department before
st
31 December every year. Chief Engineer shall allocate the maintenance fund to each Division at the
start of every financial year.
The Executive Engineer shall arrange and execute the maintenance work based on fund allocation as
regular maintenance contract or as Fixed Term Maintenance Contract. To enable this, the Assistant

182
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Engineer shall prepare detailed maintenance estimate of the identified roads. The specifications for
maintenance shall be as per Section 3000 of specification for road and bridge works of MoRTH and shall
apply to all items of road maintenance works as required to carry out under the contract or as directed by the
Executive Engineer. The works shall be carried out in conformity with the relevant specifications to the
required level, grade and lines using approved materials. The works shall be carried out using light duty
machinery or manual means provided the quality of the end product does not suffer. In execution of
maintenance works, a reference is made to the IRC publications Manual for Construction and Supervision of
Bituminous works and Code of Practice for Maintenance for Bituminous Surfaces of Highways, IRC 82 for
guidance and compliance wherever applicable. Wherever the specification is not clear, good engineering
practice shall be adopted in the construction to the satisfaction of the Executive Engineer.
2602.2. Inspection Schedule
The Assistant Engineer under the control of the road shall inspect the roads frequently at least
once a month. The frequency of this inspection shall be increased during monsoons or calamities.
Overseer on directions from the Assistant Engineer shall also conduct routine checking and report the
condition of roads. He shall also check the condition of avenue trees from time to time and take such
steps as lies within his means to prevent unauthorised cutting of avenue trees or damages to culverts,
Kilometre stones, signboards etc. Should there be any accidental obstruction to traffic by fallen trees,
erosions slips, damages to bridges, culverts etc., the Overseer must immediately get orders from the
Assistant Engineer and provide necessary caution boards and report the fact to the Assistant Engineer
and under his instructions arrange the removal of the obstruction as early as possible.
It shall be the duty of the Highway Authority to conduct annual check of the boundaries of
the Highways in its charge with a view to locating and removing encroachment, if any.
2602.3. Maintenance of National Highways
Estimates for maintenance of National Highways shall necessarily give particulars of the annual
requirements under this head to the MoRTH, before the commencement of every financial year. This
shall be sent with full details of type of works and amount as prescribed by MORTH from time to time.
The Ministry will sanction the maintenance based on the detailed estimate submitted by the state
NH wing. Normally fund shall be allotted for this head by the Ministry to the Divisions. Executive
Engineer will be permitted to carry out ordinary repair works subject to availability of funds. Works
under ordinary repairs will be carried out by Executive Engineers of NH wing by issuing AS and TS as
per their delegation of power.
On receipt of sanction from MoRTH, technical sanction by the officer of P.W.D. as per
delegation of powers and subject also to such individual items not exceeding the amount shall be
accorded for this purpose.
2602.4. Maintenance of State Highways and Major District Roads
The work of maintenance on these roads may be broadly divided into the following heads-.-
(a) Ordinary Repairs
(b) Renewal of Surface (periodic maintenance)
(c) Special repairs.
Maintenance of roads shall be as per section 3000 of Specification for Road and Bridge works
Published by MoRTH. For specific treatment of surface distress, and other maintenance of bituminous
surface, the Manual for construction and supervision of Bituminous works by MoRTH and as per IRC
SP 20, the Rural Roads Manual shall be followed.
2602.4.1. Ordinary Repairs
All items of routine maintenance except renewal of surface required for keeping the road in good
condition and which are of a repetitive nature shall be included under ordinary repairs. The following are
some of the main items normally included under this head:
(i) Filling up potholes and patchwork to black topped surface.
(ii) Thorough repairs including clearing of jungle growth, sectioning and forming of berms,
clearing side drains
(iii) Clearing of culvert and opening outlets.
(iv) Filling up erosions and removal of slips.
(v) Repairs to pitching, retaining walls, masonry works, culverts.

183
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

(vi) Painting Signboards, Kilometer stones, Hectometer stones, Guard stones, Boundary stones,
road markings etc.
(vii) Planting avenue trees and maintaining the same.
Maintenance of traffic signs and markings shall also be an inevitable component of
maintenance activity.
The patchwork shall be measured by volumetric measurements of broken stones collected for
the work and paid for with necessary utilization certificate.
2602.4.2. Renewal of surface:
This provides for resurfacing the road at regular intervals or when found necessary. Normally
the following periodicity may be adopted for renewals.
Concrete roads once in 10 years
Bituminous Roads
Chipping carpet once in 3 years
BM and AC once in 7 years
If in any particular reach renewal has to be carried out earlier than the period mentioned above
the necessity shall be specifically brought to the notice of the Executive Engineer and his sanction shall
be obtained. A renewal coat shall be done after all the defects, like pothole, undulations etc. has been
rectified.
A road chart shall be maintained in the form given in Appendix 2600H for each important road,
which will give all data about the history of renewal of surfacing of different sections of the road. This
will be helpful in selecting the reaches requiring renewal or special attention.
The funds available under renewal shall not be utilized to upgrade the surface of the road. All
up-gradation shall be considered as original work.
The renewal of surface shall be done as per provisions in Section 3000 of Specification for
Road and Bridge Works published by MoRTH
2602.4.3. Special Repairs
Special repairs are such items of repairs, reconstruction, or additional construction found
occasionally necessary to keep the road in good condition. These may be divided into
a. Special repairs to roads, such as construction or reconstruction of retaining walls, raising a
portion of the road, widening of pavements, maintenance of shaller, construction of drains etc.
b. Special repairs to culverts up to 6mts span, construction and maintenance of road side drains
These may include reconstruction as well as construction of new culverts if found necessary.
c. Emergency works related to VVIP visit.
d. Repairs to flood damages.
e. Repairs to drought and other natural calamities.
The nature of repairs consequent of floods, drought and other natural calamities may fall under one
or other of the above categories or may be a new type of work such as training of a river course etc.
Even when a flood damage work comes under the category of special repairs to roads or to culverts, this
is kept distinct from original repairs mentioned in (a) and (b) above since the financing is from an
allocation specially earmarked for this purpose.
Adequate signboards and road markings, not provided as per requirements, shall also be included
in special repairs.
Necessary provisions shall be made in the estimate for carrying out periodical maintenance including
clearing of drains, jungles, painting of sign boards, road markings and shaller maintenance etc. during
the defect and maintenance liability period.
For renewal coat, the defect and maintenance liability period shall be 3 years. All the periodical
maintenance including clearing of drains, jungles, and shaller maintenance etc. in the defect and
maintenance liability period shall be done by the contractor for the up keep of the road. After the end of
3 years (defect and maintenance liability period), ordinary repairs (annual maintenance) shall be done for
next 2 years. After end of 5 years, surface renewal shall be done.
2602.5. Schedule of Maintenance operations.
Maintenance of roads involves several operations some of which can be done during rainy
season and others which can be done only in dry weather. All bituminous works shall be carried out only
184
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

during dry weather. A timetable for the various operations in the different roads under each section shall
be drawn out and adhered to by the Assistant Engineer.
The table on the Schedule of maintenance operations given in Appendix 2600I may be used as a
guidance in preparing the time table over a two year period.
Periodicity of Routine Maintenance Activities
No. Name of item Frequency of operation in the year
1. Clearing of road side gutters Twice
2. Pothole filling (WBM & BT) Once
3. Filling up edges of asphalt surface of excavating (i) Single lane
borrow pit. T.I*. 0-1000 Twice
T.I. 1000-5000 Four times
(ii) One and Half lane
T.I. 0-1000 Once
T.I. 1000-5000 Twice
T.1. Over 5000 Four times
(iii) Two lane
T.I. 1000-5000 Once
T.I. Over 5000 Twice
4. Dressing of berms Once
White washing/ Painting guard stones/ Kilometer
5. Twice
Stones/Hectometer Stones, Boundary Stone, Road markings
Fixing/ Painting disturbed caution board/Village name
6. Once
board/ Traffic sign boards, etc
Refixing displaced guard stones/ Kilometer
7. Once
Stones/Hectometer Stones, Boundary Stones
8. White washing and numbering of trunks of trees Once
9. Cutting of branches of trees, etc. Once
10. Topping of W.B.M. blind age operation including 18 times
Picking of loose metal
II. Maintenance of catch water drains Once
12. Clearance of C.D. works Twice
13. Clearing of wild seasonal growth on berms Twice
14. White washing parapets of C.D. Works Once
15. Earthwork in berms, de-silting of drains, etc. As per actual requirement
*T.I. = Traffic Intensity
Supply and stacking of materials shall be done as per section 514 of specification of road
and bridgework by MoRTH
2602.5.1. Important points to be attended to when carrying out maintenance operations
This includes thorough repairs, clearing jungle, clearing drains and culverts etc. The side drains
shall be cleared off all jungle growth and obstructions and graded so as to have proper slope. All
overhanging jungle growth, which may obstruct traffic or vision, shall be cut along with such repairs. All
unauthorized advertisement boards, banners and arches across and along the roads shall be removed. In
the case of masonry works, if any jungle growth is observed, the same shall be rooted out. The site or
work spot shall be cleared by the contractor after construction by removing waste material like aggregate
wastes, dust, timber woods, ashes etc and disposed according to the environmental guide lines.
2602.6. Maintenance of should er
This is an important part of maintenance activity and shall be done as per section 3003 of MoRTH.
Exposed earth berms above the level of road surface shall be restored to original profile so as to facilitate
easy access and drainage.
2602.7. Painting and Maintenance of Traffic signs
Maintenance of traffic signs and road marking including painting of bridges and culverts parapet,
kerbs, Kilometer stones, Hectometer stones, Boundary stones and guard stones are part of maintenance
activity. Road signs (other than enameled/ Reflective signs) shall be painted legibly once a year. All these
works shall be done as per the section 800 of MoRTH Specifications for Road and Bridge Works.

185
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2602.8. Defects of Roads

The various defects on flexible pavements are cracks, potholes, bleeding, corrugations,
depression/ settlement, disintegration, ravelling, rutting shoving and upheaval. In semi rigid and rigid
pavements, usual defects are blowup, pumping, reflection cracks, scaling and spalling. The details of
various defects are given in chapter 11 of IRC SP 20. The maintenance practices shall conform to
MORTH clause 3000 and the chapter 9 of “Manual for Construction and Supervision of
Bituminous Works”.
2603. Special types of pavement rectification courses
2603.1. Slurry Seal
Slurry seals are mixtures of fine aggregate, portland cement filler, bitumen emulsion and
additional water. When freshly mixed, they have a thick consistency and can be spread to a thickness of
1.5 - 5 mm. They may be used to seal cracks, arrest fretting and fill voids and minor depressions, to
provide a more even riding surface or a base for further treatment; they may also be used on top of a
single coat surface dressing.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish, quality checks and opening to
traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 516.
2603.2. Fog Spray
Fog spray is a very light application of low viscosity bitumen emulsion for purposes of sealing
cracks less than 3mm wide or incipient fretting or disintegration in an existing bituminous surfacing, and
to help reduce loosening of chips by traffic on newly finished surface dressing.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish, quality checks
and opening to traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 518.
2603.3. Crack Prevention Course
This clause covers the provision of Stress Absorbing Membrane (SAM) and Stress Absorbing
Membrane Interlayer (SAMI) as measures to inhibit the propagation of cracks. A SAM is an elastomeric
bitumen rubber membrane, which is laid over a cracked road surface, together with a covering of
aggregate chips, in order to extend the life of the pavement before major treatment is carried out. SAM
can be laid as a single coat or a double coat. A SAMI is a layer which is applied to a cracked pavement
surface but which is followed (within 12 months) by the application of an overlay course. A SAMI may
be a material similar to that used for a SAM. It may alternatively consist of a bitumen-impregnated
geotextile.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish, quality checks and opening to
traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 522.
2604. Planting and Maintenance of avenue trees
Avenue trees shall be planted on roadsides as per environmental guidelines in practice. Planting
shall be carried out in the early part of the rainy season so that the tree saplings can take root and grow.
Suitable guard fences shall be provided for a height of 1½ metres to protect the young tree from cattle,
until it reaches sufficient maturity.
Avenue trees shall be properly numbered and a register of avenue trees maintained in each sub-
division vide form given in Appendix 2600J. The numbering shall be clearly made after stripping the
bark for an area not less than 15 cm. x 15 cm. at height 1.2 metres from ground level and facing the road.
The numbering shall be checked and re- numbered once in every five years.
2604.1.Auction of Usufructs
The usufructs of revenue yielding trees shall be properly disposed. The right of enjoying the
usufructs may be sold by auction or tender and the amount realised credited to P.W.D Revenue. It shall
be ensured through suitable conditions in the auction or tender notice that the person who is enjoying the
usufructs does not cause any injury or damage to the tree as such. This right may be auctioned either for
a year or for such longer period as the Executive Engineer thinks fit.
The Overseer under the control of sections of road shall keep a careful watch of the avenue trees.
If any unauthorised attempt to cut, damage or remove avenue trees is observed he shall take immediate
action to protect Government property and also concurrently report to higher officers and lodge
complaints with the police.
In the case of dead trees and decayed branches of trees, the Assistant. Executive Engineer in
whose jurisdiction the tree exists has the power to authorize cutting and removal of such dead tree or
186
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

branches. When a tree or branch is in a condition as to cause damage to the road or adjoining property
and the removal of such dangerous tree or branch is imminent, the Assistant Engineer may order its
removal in anticipation of approval of the Assistant Executive Engineer after making a report to the
Assistant Executive Engineer explaining the circumstances. In all cases where a living tree has to be cut,
sanction of the Executive Engineer shall be obtained.
Branches of avenue trees shall have to be cut to maintain sight distances form Road safety point
of view. It may also happen that branches be cut for maintenance of or extension of electric lines,
telegraph lines or telephone lines. In the case of maintenance of existing lines, the authorities under the
controlcan cut the obstructing branches in order to restore service quickly without prior intimation to
P.W.D. In the case of extension, the Executive Engineer under the control of the concerned road shall be
informed of the proposal by the authority concerned. Even here the authority under the controlmay
arrange the actual cutting of branches, after intimating the Executive Engineer P.W.D. All branches,
leaves etc. cut during such process shall however be disposed by the P.W.D. For this purpose, the
Overseer shall arrange to collect the branches etc., in suitable places and help in disposal as directed by
the Assistant Engineer. Roadside arboriculture could be a separate contract to the maintenance works.
2605. Kilometer stones.
th
Kilometer stone and 5 Kilometer Stones as per type designs and colour scheme shall be planted
on all the roads as per IRC 8 and IRC 26 for 200-meter stones. They shall be placed clear of the shallers
of the road so as not to obstruct traffic but shall be in such a position as to be quite visible. They shall be
maintained clean and legible always. The provision of kilometer stones and 200 meter stones, wherever
absent, shall be taken up as part of renewal coating or special repairs.
2605.1. Boundary Stone
Standard boundary stones as per IRC: 25-1967are to be laid in both boundaries of the road so as to
identify encroachments if any in the P.W.D. land during inspection of the roads. The boundary stone shall be
the responsibility of the Assistant Engineers and wherever absent shall be brought to the notice of the higher
officers and installed then and there without waiting for any renewal work or special repairs.
2606.Advertisement Board
In the case of National Highways advertisement boards shall not be erected without the sanction
of MoRTH.
For all other roads in the state, the authorities under the control of the road can permit display of
advertisement boards after collecting prescribed fees, which shall be remitted directly to Kerala Road
Fund Board. Any displays within the right of way shall be permitted only by the Highway authority who
is the Executive Engineer, P.W.D, who while granting such permit, shall be careful to see that following
are not allowed.
(a) At or within 100 metres of any road junction.
(b) Where the planting of such boards is likely to obstruct the vision of the Driver.
(c) At hairpin bends of curves, approaches of bridges.
(d) Near prestigious buildings, hospitals, educational institutions etc.
(e) Within 50 metres of any of the signboard erected.
(f) In such a manner as may obstruct the vision or distract the attention of the driver of a vehicle on
the road.
(g) To mar the aesthetic appearance of this background especially in localities which are
predominantly residential or where the national scenery is likely to be spoiled by such display.
National Building Code Part 10 Section 2 also provides the guidelines for display boards.
The highway authority may permit the display of advertisements in the typical formats on the railings
fences and bus bays built under private sector participation after levying the prescribed fees/ rent, which
shall be deposited to Kerala Road Fund Board. This agreement shall be renewed annually or a new
agreement executed. The Highway Authority has the power to order removal of all unauthorised display
of advertisements and other encroachments.
2607. Cutting roads/ overhead crossing
For any work involving the opening of the PWD roads, the road cutting protocol as per Appendix
2600K shall be followed. It shall be unlawful for any person or authority or agency intending to construct,
place, maintain or carry any cable, wire, pipe, drain, sewer, channel of any kind through, across, along, under,
in or over any PWD road to make an excavation/ Crossing in or disturb the surface of any PWD road without
written permission from the Highway Authority, whose decision shall be final and binding.
187
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Application for permit for road cutting shall be submitted to the Highway Authority in Form No.
I (given in Appendix 2600L) and after examining the urgency the Highway Authority shall issue the
permit in Form No. II (given in Appendix 2600M). Upon receipt of the permit from the Highway
Authority, the person or authority or agency intending to dig the road, shall execute an
agreement/Memorandum of Understanding in Form (given in Appendix 2600N), before taking up the
work, as per GO (Rt) No.684/09/PWD dated 27/5/2009 of Public Works (H) Department.
2608. Encroachments
Kerala Highway Protection Act empowers the officers of the department i.e. Executive Engineer
(Roads Division) and his subordinate officers to take action for removal of encroachments with the help
of district/ municipal and Police administration.
Section 2700
2701. Maintenance of Bridges
2701.1. General
Bridges are vital links in the highway network and if a bridge goes out of commission for any
reason, the resultant disruption of traffic seriously affects the capacity and efficiency of the network.
Highway structures, both old and new have to be maintained in a traffic-worthy condition to facilitate
uninterrupted flow of traffic. For this, regular and systematic inspection of the structures shall be made
by responsible officers to find out defects or deterioration of the various parts and urgent action taken to
remedy the defects.
2702. Maintenance of records of bridges
For recording maintenance of bridges, the respective Assistant Engineer shall maintain a bridge
register. The records in the form of registers (given as Appendix 2700 A & B) for all the bridges under
his charge shall be kept updated. The report shall be submitted to the Division office and the Executive
Engineer shall forward the same along with his recommendation to the higher authorities. However, for
each bridge, there shall be two reports
i) Original bridge report
ii) Inspection report
2703. Inspection
Periodical inspection shall be conducted for all bridges as per IRC guidelines. Weak bridges
shall be inspected more often according to necessity and appropriate steps shall be taken to remedy
defects if any noticed.
2703.1. Routine inspection
This involves visual assessment using conventional standard tools to determine obvious
deficiencies in the bridge structure, which might lead to traffic accidents or cause high maintenance and
repairs cost, if not attended promptly. The frequency of routine inspection shall be at least once a year
but preferably twice a year before and after monsoon. However, bridges located in high altitude terrain
prone to effects of landslides and bridges in severe exposure conditions shall be inspected twice a year,
i.e. before and after monsoon. In general the designation of the inspecting officer may be as per table
2700.1, but the same can be altered depending upon the importance of the work.

Table 2700.1 Minimum Yearly Inspections by Engineers

Designation Type of Structure Test Checks
Assistant All culverts and bridges of span less than
Engineer 30 m
Assistant All minor bridges of span less than 60m, Culverts inspected by Assistant Engineer
Executive causeways of like length especially those in a dangerous condition
Engineers
Executive All major bridges of span greater than 60
Bridges and culverts inspected by the
Engineers m and less than 200m subordinate officers especially all minor
bridges marked weak and dangerous.
Superintending All bridges of span greater than 200 m and Above cases especially those marked as
Engineers all pre-stressed concrete, continuous weak and dangerous.
structures, suspension bridges, cable
188
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

stayed bridges and special structures

Chief Engineer Bridges above 500m in length Any Bridges

The routine inspection shall be as per Appendix 2700C. The inspection reports shall be
submitted to higher officers within 10 days from date of inspection.
The following instructions may be followed as an aid to systematic inspection.

2703.2.Waterway: Conditions in the stream bed shall be noted as to adequacy of channel afforded by
the existing structure, risk of scour that may endanger the foundation, presence of obstructions such as
drift, logs, undergrowth, stumps of old piers etc. that may be diverting the current so as to cause
undermining of the foundation and need for any bank protection to keep the channel properly confined.
2703.3.Foundation and Substructure:
(a) Timber and steel Piles: Piles supporting Timber Bridge shall be inspected carefully at and below
the ground line for any decay. A crow bar with one end sharpened to a long tapering point and the other
end provided with a chisel face is a very useful tool in such an examination. It can be jabbed in to a pile
to disclose deterioration not apparent on the surface and to determine the extent of sap rot. Piles in which
the diameter of sound materials has been reduced to 15 cm or less shall be marked for replacement. Sills,
bottom of posts and mud sills for trestle piers shall be similarly tested. Steel or CI tubular piers shall be
carefully examined for corrosion in rivet or bolt head connecting the cylinder sections. Examination
shall also be made to note whether there has been appreciable movement or sinkage of the tubes due to
impact of heavy loads on the structure; if so additional footings or bracings may be needed. If the tubes
are out of plumb, it shall be checked whether this is due to undermining or the lack of proper bracing or
inadequate support below.
(b) Concrete or masonry piers or abutments-These shall be examined for damages if any arising
from impact of floating matter or undermining or cracks. Further, they shall be examined whether
they are plumb. If cracks exist, the cause shall be properly investigated so as to choose appropriate
remedial measures. In the case of masonry abutments any tendency of bulge shall he particularly
noted as this will indicate excessive lateral pressure. When any such defect is noticed, corrective
steps shall be taken to relieve such pressure.
2703.4.Superstructure:
Where flooring is provided as in culverts and small bridges, any upheaval or sinkage in the
flooring shall also be carefully noted and corrected. Where the deck is of reinforced or pre-stressed
concrete, the examination shall cover the following:
(i) Expansion joints and bearing plates examined to ensure that they are functioning properly and
that their lubricating arrangements are satisfactory.
(ii) Drainage facilities verified to see that there is no collection of water in any part of the structure
and that water is drained easily.
(iii) Roadway surface checked to see whether there is excessive scaling or unevenness.
(iv) The bottom and sides of girders of slabs checked to note whether there is any honeycomb area
exposing reinforcement and further whether any cracks appear on such parts.
(v) Kerbs and handrails to be checked for any spalling and exposed reinforcements.

(i) General alignment of the span to see whether in the case of “through Bridges' the end posts
and top chords are straight and in line. Any buckling would indicate that the structure has been
overloaded.
(ii) Whether any of the structural members is kinked or rusted or has in any other manner suffered
deterioration.
(iii) Where there is excessive deflection of any member.
(iv) Whether any of the rivets and bolts in important junctions has worked loose.
(v) Whether the conditions of end shoes and rollers are good.

(i) Whether there is any noticeable sag. If sag is present, note whether it is due to failure of
splices. Improper adjustment of vertical rods or crushing or diagonal members.
(ii) The condition of the bearing and the caps over the pier piling.
(iii) Whether all bolts through splices packing blocks and cross bracing are tight and in good
order.
189
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

(iv) The condition of the stringers.

(v) The condition of the stringers as seen from the bottom particularly with regard to full bearing
on pier caps and indications if any, of crushing.
(vi) Examination of the deck and hand rails from roadway.
(vii) Whether all bolts in the deck are properly tightened or have become loose due to shrinkage
of the timber.
(viii) The condition of the underside of the decking.
2703.5. Culverts: The waterway shall be examined whether it is obstructed by jungle growth, or silting
etc. In the case of pipe culverts, examine whether the pipes have gone out of alignment either vertically
or laterally and also whether any of the pipes has cracked The condition of the headwalls shall also be
noted particularly to see whether they are plumb and free from cracks.
To facilitate proper routine inspection reporting, a simple check-list as suggested in IRC:SP: 35
shall also be used.
2703.6. Principal inspection
This is a more intensive and detailed inspection involving close examination of elements of
structure with a purpose to determine the nature and degree of distress in any component of a bridge. It
will primarily be close visual assessment supplemented by standard instrumented aids. Detailed
inspection of foundation shall also be included and may involve underwater inspection wherever
appropriate. The first principal inspection shall be conducted before the expiry of defect liability period
of contract but not later than 6 months after completion and opening of the bridge to traffic. The
frequency of principal inspection thereafter shall not be more than 3 years. This inspection shall be
carried out by a senior level engineer against a comprehensive check-list
Underwater inspection: Visual examination of the surface may be done after removing marine growth
like coral deposits, algae, etc. Detailed inspection for obtaining more information of deteriorated areas
shall be done after clearing the surface growth as to enable closer inspection. Underwater inspection is a
highly specialized activity and as such shall be entrusted only to competent agencies experienced in
underwater inspection. Such agencies shall be carefully briefed on the components to be inspected and
the nature of defects to be inspected. Close circuit television may be used where the water is reasonably
clear. Where visibility is poor, portable echo sounding equipment can be used to provide a reasonably
accurate profile.
2703.7. Special inspection
This shall be undertaken in the event of unusual occurrences such as strong earthquake,
accidents, passage of unusual loads or floods, heavy impact of barges or floating debris on substructure
and/or foundations, major weaknesses noticed during routine or principal inspection, unusual settlement
of foundations and substantial changes of traffic pattern. When any bridge of similar design and
constructed almost at the same time are showing some distresses, all such bridges may be subjected to
special inspections. Such inspections may require a good deal of supplementary testing and structural
analysis and will invariably require detailed involvement of design organizations and experts in the
relevant fields, who shall be senior level engineers.
2703.8. Inspection procedure
The activities scheduled during the inspection of the bridge shall be planned in detail including
sequence of inspection. Where mobile bridge inspection unit is used, the inspection shall be carefully
planned beforehand so as to minimize the period of use of such equipments as the hourly cost of use of
such a unit is quite high and it obstructs one lane of traffic on the bridge. The inspection shall follow a
pre-determined pattern to ensure that no component is overlooked.
The inspection shall be undertaken in those periods of the year, which offer the most critical
evaluation of the performance of the structures as suggested below:
Items Time of inspection
Foundations, protective works, scour effects,
(a) During and after monsoons
maximum flood level, etc.
(b) High structures During and after season of high velocity wind.
(c) Bearings and expansion joints During extreme seasons and after floods.
(d) Bridges in hilly terrain Before and after monsoons.
2703.9. Means of access

190
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appropriate means of access are a pre-requisite for all the three forms of inspection. For every
means of access, special emphasis shall be laid on safety, ease and convenience. Due consideration shall
be given at the design stage itself to the provision of proper means of access taking into account
individual requirements of the structure and its components such as type of structure, topographical,
local and climatic conditions of the bridge site, height, minimum water level. The possible means of
access can be of the following type:
(a) Built-in access
Manhole, Built-in ladders and Permanent catwalks.
(b) Semi-mobile access:
Access ladders, Catwalks, Platforms, Inspection pits, Planking & scaffolding, etc. and Semi-
stationery inspection equipment.
(c) Mobile equipments:
Equipment operating under the bridge from river bed/water barges, Equipment operating from the
bridge deck and Mobile inspection unit.
128.3.7 Guidelines
Detailed guidelines for highway bridge inspection and maintenance are contained in the following
and the same should be invariably followed.
i) IRC SP 35 "Guidelines for Inspection and Maintenance of Bridges",
ii) IRC Special Publication No 18 "Manual for Highway Bridge Maintenance Inspection"
iii) IRC: 52-1998 "Bridge Inspection's Reference Manual".
2703.9.1. Inspection Report
The inspection report shall be in the prescribed formats. Properly referenced sketches or
photographs shall be used to illustrate the defects and condition of the bridge. Free hand sketches shall
be made during the inspection at the site itself. The size and location of the defects shall be dimensioned
though the sketch itself need not be to scale. For taking photographs, reference number of the bridge and
the location of the defects may be written in colour at the appropriate place on the bridge. Apart from
reporting defects and deficiencies any proposals or recommendations for strengthening and repairs of the
affected components shall also be included.
2703.9.2. Follow-up action
The Assistant Engineer-in-charge shall immediately attend to minor points or shortcomings
noticed during inspection. However, in case of any important or major shortcoming / distress noticed
either during routine inspection or principal inspection, the matter shall be reported to the senior level
Engineer and the latter shall decide further line of action in consultation with the Design Wing/
Consultants, if he considers it necessary and give detailed instructions as to whether special inspection is
called for.
If during the inspections any bridge is found to indicate distress of serious nature leading to
doubt about structural adequacy, the bridge will have to be evaluated for its load carrying capacity.
If the assessment shows the bridge to be inadequate for the design loads, one or more of the following
actions shall be taken:
The load on bridge shall be restricted to its assessed capacity. The condition of the bridge shall be
monitored by special inspection at intervals not exceeding 6 months.
The bridge shall be closed for all traffic where the rated capacity of the bridge is lower than the
lowest level of traffic load expected to ply on it.
Replacement or strengthening of the bridge or its affected part shall be undertaken.
2703.9.3. Remedial measures
The purpose of detailed inspection as outlined above is to find out whether damage or deterioration
has occurred in any part of the structure and if so to take appropriate remedial measures. The inspection
report of each bridge shall contain a specific remark as to the works necessarily to be taken up based on
the results of such inspection. These works shall have the highest priority regarding maintenance of
bridges. In addition to such special works, certain works of a routine nature shall invariably be carried
out in respect of bridges and culverts. These are. -
(i) Keeping the water clear.
(ii) Where there is any growth of vegetation, shrub, etc. in the masonry or concrete part of the
structure, the removal of such vegetation and steps to prevent such growth.

191
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

(iii) Wherever bearings are provided the greasing or oiling of such bearings.
(iv) Periodical painting of steel and cast iron structures of parts of bridges. Normally painting shall
be done once every year unless special circumstances warrant changing the periodicity.
(v) Wherever scours are noted, filling up the scours with stones of suitable size in such a manner
as is found best suited to circumstances.
(vi) Wherever cracks, spalling of concrete, disintegration etc. are noted in wearing coat, drainage
spouts, hand rails, footpaths and construction joints shall be rectified.
(vii) Corrosion of reinforcement shall be attended.
(viii) Missing and broken footpath slab shall be replaced immediately.
2704. Repair and Rehabilitation of Bridges
All bridges are to be kept in good condition and their rehabilitation and strengthening needs shall
be attended to as and when they arise. It is now well recognized that bridges not only require systematic
maintenance but also strengthening or rehabilitation during their service life. IRC: SP-40 "Guidelines on
Techniques for Strengthening and Rehabilitation of Bridges" provides guidance on basic approach to
repair and rehabilitation, identification, assessment and diagnosis of distress, repair materials and repair
and strengthening techniques to be adopted in respect of concrete bridges. These guidelines may be
followed while undertaking rehabilitation or strengthening of concrete bridges.
2704.1. Steps Involved in Repair and Rehabilitation
Various steps involved in arriving at an appropriate solution to the problem of a distressed bridge
and implementation of remedial measures can be broadly identified as:
i) Identify signs of distress and need for rehabilitation through routine inspection and study of
construction drawings.
ii) Carrying out special inspection by expert team.
iii) Investigation of type and extent of distress and the causes thereof based on in-situ and laboratory
tests.
iv) Analysis of investigation data supplemented by structural analysis and formulation of detailed
plans for repair or strengthening.
v) Implementation of repair or strengthening measures.
vi) Documentation of repair works done.
vii) Evaluation and monitoring of rehabilitation measures.
2704.1.2. Repair materials
Selection of a repair material must be based on an evaluation of damage, characteristics of the
repair material and local conditions. Repair material must be compatible with the concrete being
repaired. The selection of material depends on many factors such as physical and chemical properties,
mechanical response, long-term durability, cost and record of field performance.
2704.1.3. Techniques of repair and strengthening
Repair and remedial measures vary according to the location, form and severity of distress of
deterioration. These may range from protective coatings or patch repairs in the case of mild deterioration
to reconstruction or replacement of key elements in the case of severe distress. Different repairs and
strengthening techniques have been described in IRC: SP-40. Some commonly used techniques of repair
and strengthening of distressed concrete bridges are as follows:
i. Patching and grouting: Patching is carried out for repair of deep and wide cracks and for
replacement of spalled concrete. Dry-pad mortar or conventional replacement mortar are normally
used for filling cavities and around rebars. For very large areas concrete may be used. Cracks are
also repaired by means of pressure grouting with epoxy resins for fine cracks and Portland cement
grout for larger cracks.
ii. Hydro demolition: Hydro demolition technique involves selective removal of damaged concrete by
means of one or more high speed water jets without using any abrasive. Hydro demolition is
unanimously accepted as the best process for concrete removal.
iii. Vacuum grouting: Vacuum grouting with epoxy resin or cement grout can be used for filling up
voids in cable ducts. The equipment used sucks the air out of the cavity and then via a relay valve
presses the injection material into the cavity.
iv. Epoxy injection: Epoxy injection for sealing fine cracks as small as O.05mm shall be applied. The
epoxy is injected under pressure to penetrate the very fine and tortuous cracks that may exist. Ensure
good quality of epoxy resin, correct selection of equipment and experienced operating personnel for
the application.
192
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

v. External pre-stressing: External pre-stressing consists of adding cables placed externally to the
girders with new anchorages at suitable locations. It can be used to compensate the loss of pre-stress
in the cables and partly/fully restore the bridge deck to its original serviceability level.
vi. As the external cables are fully exposed and do not have concrete cover, they shall be encased in
either a strong High Density Poly Ethylene (HDPE) tubing or rigid metallic pipe protected against
corrosion by special coating. Pressure grouting of external pre-stressing cables after tensioning is
essential. Special care shall be taken while drilling holes or cutting recesses in the structure for
fixing anchorage assemblies to ensure that the existing pre-stressing tendons are not damaged.
vii. Epoxy bonded steel plates: Steel plates bonded to concrete surface with epoxy structural adhesive
can strengthen RCC members in flexure and shear.
viii. Full depth concrete overlay/deck slab replacement: Where deterioration of large areas of concrete
surface of bridge decks has occurred, it may not be possible to repair it by crack repair or patching.
In such cases, a full depth concrete overlay may be required. Similarly, where the deck slab has
become structurally weak due to loss of cross pre-tress or other reasons, complete replacement of the
deck slab may have to be resorted to. The overlays can be of dense Portland cement concrete with
special quick setting admixtures of latex modified cement concrete. They shall be bonded
structurally to the underlying old concrete and shall match the underlying concrete in thermal
properties. In all such cases of overlays or deck replacement, the work can be carried out over half
the width of the deck while permitting traffic on the other half. Traffic management or restrictions
may be required during the course of the work.
2704.2. Repairs to Masonry Structures
Existing masonry bridges are sometimes considered as historical landmarks and need
preservation. Strengthening and widening will, therefore, mean maintaining the same appearance.
Widening is usually not possible but strengthening can often be done. The general defects and remedial
measures for arch bridges in stone or brick masonry are as follows.
2704.3. Loss of Bond for the Crown stone
Flat jacks have been successfully used for pushing the stone back to its original position.
Generally, low pressure cement grouting is done to strengthen the old mortar. The mortar is sometimes
replaced by epoxy mortar also, though epoxy is not ideal.
2704.4. Longitudinal cracks along the direction of traffic
Rake mortar joints and refill with cement mortar. However, it must be mentioned that the depth
of penetration is important, as usually it is not possible to suspend traffic. The portion of earth fill shall
be removed to ensure that penetration is limited to masonry only. Fine cement grouting (injection) shall
be adopted for remedial measures.
2704.5. Transverse cracks
Injection of cement will provide a good bond between stones and brick masonry
2704.6. Strengthening of arch rings
The arch ring can be strengthened in two ways - by adding material to the - intrados or to the
extrados. Adding to the intrados causes the least disturbance but is more difficult to complete
successfully. Also it results in a reduction in headroom or clearance, which is often restricted, and will,
in most cases be the cause of new damage to the intrados as experienced on many bridges even where
the headroom/clearance satisfies legal limits. Extra material may be placed by shuttering and pumping
concrete (which is difficult to compact at the crown) or by fixing a mesh to the intrados and spraying
concrete. In both cases, any shrinkage of the new concrete will tend to make the old and the new
material separate radically. Also these impervious rings prevent natural drainage between the stones or
brickwork of the arch so that special provision must be made to deal with water or under severe climatic
conditions. Sprayed-on concrete will in any case change the appearance of an arch constructed of stone,
brick or a combination of the two.
A more effective, but at times a more expensive, treatment is to remove the fill and cast the extra
required thickness on the extrados of the arch. Usually, a full ring is cast but occasionally only the end
quarters are strengthened to act as cantilevers and reduce the effective span of the arch. Normal concrete
placing techniques are satisfactory. Replacement backfill may be with normal or lightweight concrete.
The latter will reduce dead load on the foundations but may also reduce the factor of safety for stability
of the substructure.

193
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Another expedient which is satisfactory where the increase in load carrying capacity is relatively
small, especially for small span bridges is to cast slab at road level to act as an auxiliary deck which
spreads the wheel loads.
For cracks in arches, grouting with cement, at pressure 4 to 6 kg/sq.cm is sometimes quite effective,
through care shall be taken to see that pressure will not damage the surrounding masonry.
2705. Repairs to Steel Structures
2705.1. Deck replacement of older steel bridges
Many of the old bridges (usually truss or arch bridges) have either warped steel plates with a
bituminous surfacing or a concrete deck. Due to insufficient waterproofing, the steel plates are often corroded.
Bridge decks can be replaced by new concrete decks or by new orthotropic steel decks. Usually, when a
reduction in dead load or additional widening (adding cycle or pedestrian lanes) is necessary, replacement by
an orthotropic steel deck is preferred. Bolting is the preferred method of connecting the
new deck system to existing structural members.
2705.2. Strengthening of structural members
Strengthening usually involves more conventional techniques such as installing new diaphragms
to existing double compression members (increasing buckling strength) strengthening or replacement of
diagonals. Plate girders may be strengthened by external pre-stressing cables, anchored and fixed on the
web in the required parabolic curvature acting in a similar way as in pre-stressed concrete. Strengthening
is sometimes concerned with compression failure and has involved the addition of stiffeners to flanges,
webs, and diaphragms.
2705.3. Repair of cracks
Crack repair methods depend on the root cause of crack initiation. The structure and especially
those components, which influence the overall safety of the structure, shall be analyzed. Action to be
taken when a crack is detected or suspected in welded steel bridge girders. Repairs can be made by
techniques such as drilling holes at the crack tip (this shall only be done in less sensitive locations),
cutting out the cracked material and bolting plates in place, cutting out the crack and re-welding with a
higher class weld (e.g. increasing the size and penetration of a fillet weld) strengthening the connection
by introducing stiffening and by changing the structural action so that loads are supported in a way that
prevents high stress range from developing.
2705.4. Underwater welding
Arc welding has become an accepted procedure in underwater construction, salvage and repair
operation.
2705.5. Use of steel arch superposition scheme
This can be used to strengthen old truss bridges. The strengthening scheme consists of
superimposed arches, hangars and additional floor beams.
2705.6. Excessive vibrations
Suitable structural alterations and increased damping for which a specialist in dynamic behavior
of structures may have to be consulted can overcome these.
2706. Monitoring
After the rehabilitation/strengthening of the structure is completed, it is essential that the bridge
structure is kept under observation and its condition monitored regularly so as to ascertain its
performance and the efficacy of the measures adopted. The monitoring may involve inspections at more
frequent intervals, carrying out of certain laboratory and field-tests as well as condition surveys and
measurements to detect even small strains, movements, changes in deformation etc.

SECTION 2800

2801. MAINTENANCE OF BUILDINGS

2801.1 General
All Government buildings are to be maintained properly. As a matter of convenience, heads of various
departments of the State are authorized to arrange and carry out maintenance works of buildings under their
administrative control provided the annual maintenance cost of any building or group of buildings in one

194
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

campus does not exceed Rs. 1,00,000 in each case and the estimate does not exceed 10% of the capital cost of
building. This shall be intimated to the PWD. In addition, departments other than P.W.D, which are having
engineering wings under them such as Harbor Engineering Department, are allowed to carry out maintenance
works of all the buildings under their administrative control. Quasi Government Organizations and local
bodies and Government owned corporations attend to maintenance of their buildings even if the buildings
were originally put up at Government cost. Subject to these and other exceptions ordered by Government
from time to time, the P. W. D. has the responsibility to maintain all Government buildings. Maintenance
includes white washing, coloring, painting, repairs to doors, windows, roofs, sanitary & water supply fittings,
structural repairs, internal roads, fencing, compound walls etc., However, expenditure towards day to day
cleaning, sweeping, watch & ward, gardening, payment of rent, water and electricity charges, taxes & tariffs
etc. shall be borne by the user department.
2801.1.1. Layout Plans & Building Plans
The Assistant Engineer, in-charge of the section is to maintain correct layout plans of the area
with position of roads, buildings, gardens, water supply, electric O/H lines, sewer & w/s lines etc.
Similarly the detailed building plan of the individual building showing plan elevation & section shall
also be maintained for record & reference purpose. For any new work in an existing building, as built
drawings shall be furnished along with the proposal.
2801.1.2. Protection of Govt. Property
All the properties in-charge of the department like buildings, lands, parks, gardens, grounds etc. are
required to be protected from unauthorized encroachments, unauthorized construction, use etc.
2801.1.3. Register of buildings
This is a very important register to be maintained in each Buildings Division of the P.W.D
showing therein inventory of all the buildings under its charge, constructed, purchased or acquired by the
Govt. irrespective of the manner in which the Govt. funds are allotted for such procurement. The register
shall be in the form given in Appendix 2900A. It shows year of construction, cost, use of building,
occupant, maintenance cost etc. The number allotted to such buildings in the Register of buildings is
displayed prominently in front face on each building. All government buildings shall have a name
display board and list of all offices housed there in.
Whenever a new building is completed, the maintenance of which is to be attended by the
Building Division, details regarding the building shall be added to the register. Disposal of any building
or part by dismantling or sale shall be recoded in the building register. Transfer of control of any
building or part of the building from other Divisions or Departments etc. shall be incorporated in the
Building Register. Alterations or additions of substantial nature in such buildings shall also be noted.
Similarly, if the extent of land surrounding a building is increased or decreased by acquisition, transfer
or otherwise, the fact shall be noted in the register. The intention is that the register shall give full and
up-to-date information about the buildings under the maintenance charge of every building division.
Possession Certificate showing property rights of the land / building shall be obtained from concerned
authorities and maintained in proper order.
2801.1.3.1. Inventory in the Buildings
An inventory of all the fixtures in each building viz. electrical fixtures, like fans, lights, geysers,
Air-conditioner or Civil fixtures like mirrors, basins, taps, flushing cisterns etc. and furniture if provided
shall be maintained building wise. In case of non-residential buildings such inventory of fixtures is to be
got signed from the representative of the user department, at the time of first occupation. Thereafter the
user department is responsible for their safety. In case of residential buildings the inventory is to be got
signed from each new occupant and checked by the Assistant Engineer concerned when the residence is
being vacated. Any shortfall is to be made good by the occupant.
2802. Maintenance of Government Buildings
Designated PWD Civil Engineers and Electrical Engineers under the control of each Government
building shall be responsible for its upkeep and maintenance. All maintenance and construction shall be done
under their supervision and direction. Other quasi government agencies or private agencies shall not carry out
any modification, minor or major works in such government buildings.

195
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2802.1. Fixing of maintenance grant

Each building or group of buildings in one campus forming one administrative unit shall have an
annual maintenance grant fixed by the Chief Engineer (Buildings). This grant is intended to meet the, cost of
ordinary repairs such as petty repairs to walls floors, doors and windows, roof etc., white washing, painting
etc. which are of a recurring nature. This grant shall be fixed on the basis of a standard estimate for its
ordinary repairs. Annual cost shall include proportionate amounts for items like painting. The grant also
includes cost of maintenance of water supply, sanitary installations and electric installations.
Divisional Officers will program the works in the Divisions suitably under the various sub heads
of account and forward them to the Chief Engineer before 15th November every year for incorporating
in the budget for the coming financial year. Total budget provision is allotted by Chief Engineer
(Buildings) amongst the divisions under the different sub heads in April of every year and the Divisional
Officers shall plan their programs within the funds so allotted.
Maintenance of buildings shall be taken up-as soon as the monsoon is over and all items
according to the sanctioned estimate carried out. If changes are required in the approved estimate for any
reason it shall be effected before according sanction to the estimate. On no account shall the limits set
out for carrying out the repairs exceeded.
The fixing of grant for ordinary repairs subject to the conditions laid down above shall be approved
by the Chief Engineer, Buildings and recorded in the register for typical maintenance estimate kept in that
office. The approval and copy of sanctioned estimate shall be forwarded to the Executive Engineer Building
Division concerned for recording. In any particular case where the grant of 2% will not meet the needs of the
situation, sanction of the Government shall be obtained for the fixation of the grant.
In some cases requiring expenditure by way of labour charges may have to be met from the
maintenance, as for instance, wages of staff appointed to look after rest houses, or staff for operation of
water supply scheme to colonies, cleaning of toilets and urinals in the office complex etc. The amount
required for such engagement of workers may be considered as over and above the 2% ceiling fixed for
ordinary maintenance grant. The nature of workers to be employed, the number and the grades of
persons shall however be got sanctioned by Government as per rules in force.
In the case of certain classes of buildings like Tourist Bungalows, Rest Houses etc. Linen
curtains, crockery etc. originally provided at Government cost and responsibility for renewal is with the
P. W. D, shall be dealt with as part of special repair. The cost on account of these need not be included
as part of the ordinary maintenance grant of the concerned building. In all other cases such charges shall
not be incurred by the P.W.D. except under special orders of Government.
The grant fixed for ordinary repairs for every building shall be revised once in every five years
or as often as found necessary. In all cases where the existing grant is altered, the alteration shall be on
the basis of the standard estimate and the then current schedule of rates. The ceiling of 2% of capital cost
will not apply in such cases. Revisions shall also be noted in the typical maintenance register.
Maintenance grant do not include expenditure. Like - a) Municipal taxes, b) Service charges, c)
Water charges, d) Telephone, e) Electricity, f) Internal roads etc.
2802.2. Periodicity of certain items of ordinary repairs
White washing in Government buildings shall be carried out once every year. One coat will
normally suffice.
Distemper washing when provided shall normally be carried out once every two years. Here also
one coat will suffice. However, in buildings where distemper washing is badly soiled, the bottom portion
of the wall for a height of 2 meters may be distempered with one coat even in years when the full
distempering is not done.
Water proof colored cement washing like snowcem etc. need be redone only once in 2 years.
The renewal need be of only one coat. If fungus or moss growth is observed here and there, such
portions may be cleaned and touched up with the waterproof cement wash of the same color (snowcem
etc.). Ordinary cement washing wherever provided may be redone every year.

196
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Painting of walls, woodwork and doors and windows is to be normally redone once every two
years. As an exception to the above painting of walls etc. in the case of laboratories, hospitals, such other
buildings as are considered by the Executive Engineer to require special treatment may be carried out
once every year. One coat of paint will do in all cases except where the old paint has peeled of or has
shown blisters. In such cases the old paint has to be completely scraped and two coats of new paint
applied.
Painting of iron work including fittings and fastenings in doors, windows etc. shall be redone
once every year with one coat. Where the existing paint is damaged and rust or corrosion is seen, the
particular area shall be thoroughly cleaned of all old paint and two coats of paint one base coat and one
final coat shall be applied. Particular attention to this aspect is necessary in respect of buildings within
half a mile of the seashore where ironwork is subjected to severe corrosion.
Galvanized iron work as in pipes, or G.I. sheets etc. need not be painted for the first 2 years.
Thereafter because of gradual wearing out due to abrasion etc., the protection afforded by galvanization
gradually wears out and hence after the first two years such items may also be included along with
ironwork for painting purposes.
Varnishing and wood oiling are to be redone once in two year with one coat.

Wherever there are thatched roofs, re-thatching shall be done normally once every year with one
old and one new cadjan leaf.
In case of prestigious buildings declared as such by the Chief Engineer, the Chief Engineer
concerned will issue special instructions regarding periodicity and items of maintenance work to be
carried out.
2802.3. Special repairs
These refer to repairs which are not periodic or frequent e.g.-rebuilding of a damaged wall, re-
roofing a building, renewal of flooring etc. Although funds for such special repairs are allotted from the
grant under maintenance, such works shall be treated generally as original works and shall be arranged
only after the estimate is sanctioned and funds are specifically allotted for the purpose. In other words
special repairs shall not be started anticipating sanction to estimate and funds except in emergent cases
when certain works may have to be carried out in the interest of safety of life and or property. Officers
sanctioning special repairs estimates must take care to see-
(a) That the works do not involve substantial additions or alterations. Petty items costing not more than
Rs. 3 lakhs in respect of any building other than residential buildings may be carried out as special
repairs even though they may be of an original nature. Example:- Construction of drains, small retaining
walls, enclosing verandas etc.
In respect of residential buildings the cost of original works, if any carried out, as special repair
work shall not exceed Rs 3 lakhs or 2% of the value of the building whichever is less;
(b) That the standards prescribed for the class of buildings are not increased.
(c) That the estimate does not include items which shall be provided by the occupant or occupying
department
(d) That the works include major repairs, which strengthens the building, prolongs, its life, improves its
hygienic condition & safety of the building.
2803.Responsibility of the occupant or occupying department
It is the responsibility of the occupant or occupying department to attend to the following works in
regard to the building and premises under its occupation.
i. Sweep and keep the building and premises clean.
ii. Remove cobwebs and white ants as and when they are detected.
iii. Remove rubbish and silt from drains and grit chambers if any, and keep them clean.
iv. Keep the sanitary fittings cleaned up.

197
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

v. Replace electric bulbs and tube lights when they get fused, cleaning electrical installations like
fans, tubes, air-conditioner and inverters and filling distilled water in batteries, radiator coolant
and toping up of diesel to generators.
vi. Arrange watch and ward.
vii. Arrange lease of usufructs of trees in the premises and dispose decayed, dangerous or unwanted
trees (applicable only to occupying departments).
viii. Maintain garden, if any.
ix. Maintain furniture.
x. Keep overhead tanks, if any, cleaned up periodically.
xi. See that the structure is not damaged in any way, as for instance by heavy furniture being
dragged on the floor.
xii. Deal direct with the electric supply authorities in regard to payment of bills, and in regard to
complaints regarding service.
xiii. Deal direct with the authority controlling the public water supply system supplying water to the
building in regard to payment for water charges and complaints regarding service.
xiv. Deal direct with the authority controlling the public sewerage system serving the building,
regarding payment of bills and complaints regarding service.
xv. Deal direct with the Local Bodies regarding payment of property tax.
xvi. Request the Public Works Department for any maintenance/additional works
xvii. Deal directly with concerned authorities for payment of telephone and internet charges.
xviii. Deal directly with concerned authorities for payment of land tax, other levies etc.

Further, the occupant or occupying department shall not make any structural alterations or put up
additional structures, or dismantle any portion of the building. Such construction work, if required shall
be done by the Building wing of PWD, who is responsible for the safety and maintenance of the
building. The Electrical wing of PWD shall attend to any alterations to the electric circuits.
In case any damage in the structure or the internal electrification or water supply or sanitary
installation is noticed the same shall forthwith be intimated by the occupant or occupying departments to
the concerned PWD officers for necessary action. On receipt of any such complaint it is the
responsibility of the P.W.D. officers concerned to arrange to inspect the building and rectify the damage
as early as possible. If such rectification is likely to take time the fact shall be intimated to the occupant
or occupying department and where possible, necessary temporary arrangements may be made to enable
the building being occupied and put to use before permanent rectification is done. Such temporary
arrangements shall be treated as special repairs.
2804. Inspection
It is essential that buildings under the maintenance of the P.W.D. are periodically inspected so that
damage, if any noted, is attended to then and there and not allowed to cause deterioration of the structure. The
Assistant Engineer shall inspect all the buildings (whose maintenance is under his/her charge).
a. At least once before preparation of estimate for annual repairs.
b. As often as is necessary for quality control during the execution of repair work.
c. As often as is necessary for measurements and for accompanying superior officer for check
measurement.
d. When the occupying department points out damage if any.
The Assistant Executive Engineer shall inspect all buildings under his maintenance charge as often
as possible for quality control of maintenance works and for check measurement. Further, where the
annual maintenance grant is over and above the TS powers of Assistant Engineer, he shall also inspect
the building before sanctioning the maintenance estimate.
The Executive Engineer shall inspect once every year all the major buildings under his maintenance
charge where the annual maintenance grant is over and above the TS powers of Assistant Executive Engineer.
He shall also inspect once in a year at least 50% of the other buildings under his charge.
Inspections shall be purposeful. Attention shall be particularly directed to the following:-
i. Whether any wall is cracked or is bulged or is thrown out of plump.
198
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

ii. Whether doors and windows close and open properly and have all their fastenings and fittings.
iii. Whether the drainage from the bathroom is satisfactory.
iv. Whether the general drainage is satisfactory.
v. Whether there is any subsidence or crack in floor.
vi. Whether there is seepage of water and consequent damages in walls and floors.
vii. Whether the compound wall and fencing, gate etc. are in good condition.
viii. Whether woodwork particularly in doors show signs of decay or rot.
ix. Whether there are leakages.
x. Whether the floors of open terraces are properly slopped towards outlets and whether the down
water pipes are intact and clear.
xi. Whether the valley sheets are in good condition.
xii. Whether the yard is clear of jungle growth and unwanted vegetation
xiii. Whether any vegetation growth observed on walls or roofs.
xiv. Whether the sanitary installation is satisfactory.
xv. Whether water supply installation is satisfactory.
xvi. Whether the electrical installations such as lifts, air conditioners etc. are functioning satisfactorily
Note: The examination of the electrical installation shall he got done by the concerned officers of
Electrical Wing of the P.W.D.
2804.1. Maintenance of Heritage Structures
Buildings maintained by PWD also include many heritage structures of prestigious nature. While
attending to repairs of such buildings it shall be ensured that the original characteristics and aesthetics of
these structures are preserved.
2804.2.Repairs of Emergency nature
Certain items of repairs of emergency nature such as dampness, leakages in roofs and walls, water
percolation through water supply and sanitary installations, damaged stairways etc. shall be attended to
immediately by the concerned Assistant Engineer under intimation to the immediate superior officers.
2804.3. Cracks in Buildings
Cracks if any noticed in any part of the building needs to be investigated thoroughly and cause
ascertained before taking remedial measures.
2804.4. Calendar for Maintenance of buildings
The work of maintenance of building shall be so programmed as to cause least inconvenience to
the occupants. As far as possible, special repair, if any, shall be carried out along with ordinary repairs.
Work shall be started only after all the requisite materials are available and completed within the shortest
time possible. Suitable penalties shall be prescribed for delays in executing contract agreements and
completion for maintenance works.
In the case of vacation departments like Schools, Colleges, Courts etc., the maintenance works
shall be carried out during the vacation period (generally April and May) unless such vacation period
happens to be the monsoon season.
In the case of buildings other than those of vacation departments and buildings of such vacation
departments as have the vacation in monsoon period; the maintenance work shall be done in the dry
weather between December and February.
For buildings whose maintenance work has to be carried out between April and May, tenders
shall be invited and finalized even before the commencement of the new financial year so that work can
be started as early as possible in April.
Tenders for the maintenance of other buildings shall be invited and finalized well before
December every year.
Since the buildings will be under occupation, the actual period when maintenance works are to be done
shall be settled in consultation with the authorities of occupying department.
2805. Funds

199
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Funds required for maintenance of buildings under the control of any Division during any financial
year will be made up of-
i. Amount for ordinary repairs as per sanctioned grants for the several buildings.
ii. Amount for payment or dues on account of carry over portion if any of special repairs works of
the preceding year or years.
iii. Amount for payment or dues on account of carry over portion if any of Ordinary repairs works
of the preceding year or years.
iv. Amount for payment of such portion of staff charges as is directly debitable to maintenance and
not included under establishment charges.
v. Amount required to meeting emergent and unforeseen items of repairs.
vi. Amount required to carrying out new special repair works during the current year.
Out of the above, items (i) to (iv) are more or less in the nature of inevitable expenditure and shall,
therefore, have a prior claim on the funds allotted for maintenance of buildings. Item (v) is a provision
for emergencies and a reasonable forecast shall be made based on past experience and a L.S. amount
reserved for this. The L.S. amounts shall be retained by the Chief Engineer and distributed suitably. Item
(vi) shall be based upon rough estimated cost of the works proposed to be taken up in a Division.
The Executive Engineer when moving for funds under this item shall also list the works in the
order of priority. If the total funds allotted falls short of the requirement some works of lower priority
shall be dropped out and these may be accorded higher priority next year. As far as possible special
repairs shall be completed and paid during the year itself but if this is not possible, it is permissible to
carry over the work to the next year. The number of works to be taken up from out of the available grant
shall be so fixed that it is possible to make payment for all works completed during the year.

2805.1. Sanctioning Authority

No administrative sanction is required to carry out maintenance works. The officer of the
P.W.D. may accord technical sanction but the following condition shall be satisfied before according
technical sanction.
(a) In the case of ordinary repairs, the amount of the estimate shall not exceed the maintenance grant
sanctioned. If due to special circumstances, the estimate cannot be limited to the grant, approval of the
Chief Engineer shall be obtained for the increased amount.
(C) In the case of maintenance and repairs of electrical works, the technical sanction is to be accorded
by the Executive Engineer (Electrical) up to a maximum of Rs. 25,000. When the amount exceeds Rs.
25,000 (in respect of electrical works) technical sanction will be accorded by the Chief Engineer in
consultation with the Superintending Engineer (Electrical).
(d) In the case of emergent works charged to maintenance, the technical sanction shall be accorded by an
officer not below the rank of an Executive Engineer.
2806. Arrangement of contracts for maintenance works
It is preferable to arrange contracts for maintenance works on the basis of percentage rate
contracts.
The quality of materials, paint etc. to be used in maintenance works shall be clearly specified in
the tender documents. This is because there is a wide range of quality of paints etc. available in the
market and it is essential that the quality of the material to be used shall be understood by the tender.
During execution the departmental subordinates shall ensure that the proper quality of materials, paint
etc. as provided in the contract has been used.
In all contracts for maintenance works there shall be a condition that the contractor shall carry
out the work without causing hindrance or disturbance to the occupants of the building. If during the
course of the work, the floor or walls or other portions of the structure under use are spoiled by debris,
spots of paint, white wash etc. such portions shall be cleaned up then and there without waiting for the
whole work to be completed. This is in addition to the contractor's responsibility for removal of debris
on completion of work.
2806.1. Use of standard measurement
200
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

It is very desirable that standard measurement books containing detailed measurements of

various items of ordinary repair of major buildings are maintained as prescribed in Para 10.2.12 and
10.2.13 of the K.P.W.A. Code. This will considerably lighten the work of measurements of maintenance
works year after year.
2807. Rest Houses
The Assistant Engineer shall see that as far as possible the rest houses are not occupied without
valid reservations. Rules for the reservation, occupation, etc of travelers’ bungalows, rest houses,
inspection bungalow, camp shed etc., under the control of PWD are given as Appendix 2900B
2807.1. Inventory of Furniture, Crockery & Fixtures of Rest Houses
The Rest Houses requires both perishable, non perishable items & consumables for its running.
Therefore, purchases as per requirement shall be done and taken on record promptly. Items get
unserviceable in due course which shall be properly surveyed and survey report prepared for further
inspection and sanction from the competent authority. These materials shall then be destroyed/ disposed
and written off from the record as per procedure.
2807.2. Proper upkeep & Cleanliness
Rest Houses shall be kept clean, neat and tidy at all times. All the rooms, dinning hall, kitchen,
verandahs, work area should be neat. Furniture, carpets, drapery shall be cleaned periodically. Bed
sheets, towels, utensils shall be properly washed and cleaned. The toilets, bathrooms and wash basins are
to be cleaned and kept odorless. Proper arrangements for water in toilets, bathrooms and wash basins
shall be provided. The staff is to be properly dressed and their behavior shall be gentle and courteous.
2807.3. Misuse of Rest Houses
The Assistant Engineer of the Building Section shall be responsible for the proper use of Rest
Houses. He shall avoid unauthorized occupation and use of Rest Houses. Holding meetings, arranging
lunches, marriage functions, ceremonies etc. in the R.H premises, shall not be allowed without prior
permission of the Executive Engineer of Building Division.
2808. Allocation of Quarters
The Government employees can be allotted Government accommodation on availability. The
District Collector as per rules given as Appendix 2800C issues the allotment of the quarters other than
PWD quarters. The employer to whom quarter has been assigned shall execute agreement as per
Appendix 2800D with concerned Assistant Engineer (Buildings) with an advance payment equal to an
amount of two months’ rent. The copy of the agreement shall be forwarded to the Executive Engineer
under intimation to the Assistant Executive Engineer.
A full list of furniture, fittings and equipments like Electric items, Water supply fittings,
Ammikal, Attukal, locks, keys etc. of each residential building shall be maintained by the Assistant
Engineer under the control of the maintenance of the building. When the building is handed over for
occupation, the occupant shall sign and acknowledge the various items included in the inventory as per
Appendix 2800E. When the occupant vacates the house he shall give prior intimation to the Assistant
Engineer and handover all the items in the inventory list as well as any additional items subsequently
fitted, in good condition. The occupant shall also produce necessary no due certificates from the Kerala
Water Authority, KSEB etc. at the time of handing over the quarters. The Assistant engineer shall
intimate the vacancy of the quarters to the Executive Engineer on the same day when the occupant
handover the key.
2809. Miscellaneous Provisions
2809.1. General
All major public buildings and government quarters shall have provision for waste disposal.
Solid wastes shall be disposed in an incinerator. Non-biodegradable waste materials shall be, segregated
and suitably disposed.
Public buildings shall be provided with sufficient urinals and latrines, as per norms and shall be
properly maintained. Their location must be clearly exhibited with name boards.
201
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Electrical installations such as lifts, escalators, AC etc. shall be periodically inspected and
maintenance arranged as per specification of the manufacturer. Backup electric power shall be provided
for such installations with staff posted for operation.
2809.2. Furniture
The responsibility for providing furniture in any public building shall be that of the occupying
department. In the case of Rest Houses and Tourist Bungalows under the Control of P.W.D., the supply
of furniture cutlery, crockery, linen etc., shall be provided by the P.W.D. and the same shall be charged
to the estimate for the construction of the building.
2809.3. Fire Fighting Systems
The occupying department shall render all assistance for renewals and repairs of the fire fighting
system, if any, if sought from the Fire Force Department.
2809.4. Advertisement/ Display boards
All display boards in government property shall comply with the provisions of part 10 section 2 of
National Building Code. All advertisement/ display boards utilizing Government/PWD building, land and
compound wall shall require permit from the concerned Executive Engineer, buildings, which shall collect the
prescribed fees and remit it directly to the KERALA ROAD FUND BOARD. This amount shall be released
for any maintenance of buildings on request of concerned Executive Engineer.
2809.5. Fixing of Rent for Building
When government buildings are not available it may be necessary to hire private buildings for
government purpose. The officers of the administrative department will locate suitable buildings, get the
consent from the owner and furnish a copy of same along with a certificate that no other private building
at a lesser rate of rent is available shall be forwarded to the Assistant Executive Engineer, Buildings, Sub

Division of the locality. The Assistant Executive Engineer will then issue a certificate that no
government building in his charge is available in the locality for the purpose. The administrative
department will then decide to take the building on rent.
The Executive Engineer, Buildings Division will act as the Estate Officer of all
government buildings.
Once the building is decided to be taken on rent the head of the occupying office will forward the
following documents to the Assistant Engineer Buildings Section of the locality for fixing rent of the
building.
1) Consent document in original with dated countersignature.
2) Land value certificate indicating the market value of land on the date of occupation/proposed date
occupation issued by the Thasildar.
3) Age certificate of the building issued by the local authority.
4) A list of officers and staff of the office with a note on special request of space if any.
5) The prescribed proforma duly filled up and signed.
The Assistant Engineer is responsible for taking exact measurements and working out rent as per the
guidelines prescribed in the specific proforma Appendix 2800F. The construction material, construction
method etc. shall be properly verified on site and the rent workedout The Assistant Engineer shall
prepare the rent calculation on the basis of clause 2809.5 and approve the same and issue rent certificate
if the rent calculated is within his powers of sanction and if not forward it to the superior officer to
approve the rent calculation as per delegation of powers.
The rent calculation and processing shall be completed within 20 days in the section office and 10 days in
each higher office. The competent authority of the occupying department, who shall get the administrative
sanction from the competent authority of their department and pay the rent from their funds, shall forward the
rent certificate. On receipt of the administrative sanction the concerned officer of the occupying department
shall execute a lease deed with the owner of the building in the form given in Appendix 2800G and pay the
rent to the parties from the date of occupation or date of agreement whichever is earlier. The occupying
department or the occupant shall pay the electricity and water charges for the building during the period of
occupation. Once a building is occupied and rent fixed for the same, revision of rent will be permissible only
202
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

after the expiry of a period of 3 years from the date of agreement or date of occupation whichever is earlier.
Any revision of rent shall be made only on specific request from the owner of the building and shall be
effective only from the date mentioned above or from the date of application for revision of rent whichever is
later. Notwithstanding the above if any alterations or additions are made to the rented building by the owner at
the request of the occupying department rent may be revised to allow for the above alteration or additions
from the date of completion of the same.
If the rent demanded by the owner is higher than the P.W.D. rate of rent the same has to be treated as
special rent. In case of special rent approval of the Government Rent Committee constituted for this
purpose shall be obtained before the administrative department passes orders. Government will fix the
procedure for this from time to time through technical circulars or orders. If special rent is sanctioned the
same shall be valid for five years and the owner can demand revision only after this period. The lease
deed shall be executed specifying this period
2809.6.Rent Calculation
The capital cost of a building at current rates as per technical circular of the Chief Engineer from
time to time will be calculated and depreciated capital cost worked out at the rate provided as detailed
under clause 2810.2.1. The cost of actual land limited to 3 times of the plinth area of the main building
and 1½ times that of the outhouse will also be calculated at the rate as per the land value certificate
issued by the Thasildar. This will be added to the depreciated cost of the building to arrive at the total
capital cost. 6 % (Six Percent) of the capital cost will be taken as the annual rent. It shall be the
responsibility of the owner to do the maintenance work as also to pay the taxes due to the building and
premises. The details of rent calculation for partially occupied building etc., will be worked out based on
the technical circular issued by the Chief Engineer from time to time.

PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2810. Valuation
2810.1. Valuation of Building
First a detailed plan and specifications of the items of work in the structure shall be prepared. It
is likely that certain details like mortar proportions or quantity of steel used in R. C. work cannot be
found out by usual observation. In such cases assumption may be made that the mortar or concrete of the
type used contains the minimum proportion of cement material, which will be required for the stability
of the concerned portion of the structure. Similarly in R. C. work, in the absence of any other data, the
minimum of steel necessary for the particular item may be assumed as having been used. With regard to
foundations a few examination pits shall be taken to find out depth and nature of foundations.
2810.2. Cost Estimation
An estimate shall be prepared for the construction of the structure using the current PWD
schedule of rates. Where non-standard items of work are done, special data for the same shall be worked
out on the basis of prevailing market rates. In case the building is electrified, the estimated cost of
electrification shall be worked out in consultation with the Assistant Engineer, Electrical Wing of PWD.
For leveling site, only the minimum quantity necessary for construction of a building of the size shall be
assumed unless there is evidence at site that extra quantity of work was involved and it is possible to
measure such extra quantity. Leads and lifts for materials shall be worked out as if the structure is being
constructed by the department at that site. If any item of work done is sub- standard as compared to the
same item as per P. W. D. specifications, suitable percentage reduction may be made for the same.
Similarly, if any item of work is of especially superior standard as compared with the corresponding
item of P. W. D specification, a suitable extra percent on the rate of the concerned item due to such
superior work may be allowed.

203
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2810.2.1. Depreciation
From the estimated cost of the building worked out on the above basis, depreciation shall be
deducted for the period, which had elapsed after the building was constructed. The age of the building
shall be ascertained by local enquiries including enquiries from local bodies like Municipalities, etc.,
having jurisdiction over the area. The facts ascertained through such local enquiries shall also be verified
by examination of the condition of the building and its component parts.
Depreciation is effected from the estimated capital value worked out and above. The
depreciation is applied successively for each year, i.e., by compounding the depreciation annually. The
depreciation constant for calculation is given in Table 2800.1

Table 2800.1 Depreciation Constant

The description of various categories of building are given in the table below
Type Description
A Buildings with brick or stone masonry in lime or cement mortar with R.C.C. or tiled roof over
good quality Teak of wood and R.C.C. framed structure
B Building with brick or stone masonry in mud mortar or laterite in lime mortar with tiled, A.C.
or G.I. sheet roofing over country wood or steel.
C Buildings with sundried brick or laterite in mud mortar with country wood over tiled, .A.C. or
G.I. roofing
D Buildings with mud walls, and thatched roof over country wood or bamboo rafters etc. And
Temporary sheds thatched buildings of inferior type construction.
The depreciation for electrical installation shall be 6% and that of water supply and sanitary
fittings shall be4%.
In addition to normal depreciation, deductions shall be made for damages in any point of the structure.
When allowing normal depreciation rates, it is expected that the structure is maintained properly. Hence
depreciation does not cover special damages such as cracked walls, damaged roof, rotten state of wood
work etc. A reasonable amount, which may be more or less equal to the cost of rectification, shall be
deducted from the depreciated value of the building to arrive at the final cost to be intimated to the
revenue authorities.
204
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Powers of the officers of the P.W.D. regarding valuation of buildings shall be as per delegation
of powers given in section 200. The maximum time that can be allowed for completing such valuation in
the section office shall be 30 days.
In all cases of valuation of buildings, the Assistant Engineer concerned shall make the
preparation of the plan, specifications and estimate. Where the valuation has to be approved by officers
higher in rank than Assistant Engineer sufficient time (15 days in each of the higher offices) shall be
allowed. Before the valuation is approved it is imperative that the officer who is competent to approve
the valuation shall inspect the structure with the plan and estimate and satisfy himself about the various
provisions made therein.

2811. Lease of Government Property/ Buildings

The government may provide its land or buildings on lease for public use to other agencies like
bank/ societies/ public undertakings etc. for a specific period on remittance of monthly rent. The
Government and the lessee shall enter into an agreement as per Appendix 2800H. Under no
circumstances government land or building shall be leased free of cost. Chief Engineer Buildings shall
fix a reasonable rent and the agreement executed.

SECTION 2900
2900. Maintenance –Movable Assets
2900.1. General
This chapter includes the maintenance of articles, which are necessary for carrying out the
various works of the Department. It includes items like vehicles, office accessories like furniture and
communication systems, survey instruments and other tools and plants, reference books and codes,
appliances, etc., which are not consumed in the course of execution of works. This invariably includes
the replacement/procurement of obsolete/requisite items also. This chapter also includes materials and
other stores that get consumed in due course.
Most of the works in the P. W. D. are carried out through contract agencies and the selected
contractor is to supply all the materials required for the complete work, including special items as in the
case of projects. However, for departmental execution, supply of certain materials for the construction is
necessary and these shall be procured as per section 2909.
Projects under departmental execution may require a number of special items to be procured
and stocked particularly tools and plants and their spares and accessories. In such cases, the list of items
to be stocked shall be prepared by the officer under the control of the project and the approval of the
concerned Chief Engineer obtained. Such projects shall have its own store to cater to the needs of the project.
In the case of completed projects with special tools & plants charged to the project, these shall be
disposed off in public auction after obtaining sanction for the survey report of the articles.
tools and plants shall be grouped under the following heads prescribed in the list of Major and
Minor heads of account with sub-groups wherever necessary.
(a) Scientific and drawing materials
(b) Tools, Plants and Machinery
2901. Registers
A Register of movable assets in the form given in Appendix 2900A shall be maintained in each office.
Every item acquired by purchase, transfer or through any other way shall be included in the appropriate
groups in the register kept in the concerned Division Office. Similarly every item, which is disposed of
finally by transfer to other divisions or by sale or in any other manner shall be noted in the appropriate
register. Each division will have an up to date register of all the assets like vehicles, office furniture,
survey instruments and other tools and plants, reference books and codes, all appliances and spares
including those in subordinate offices grouped under proper heads as above.
To ensure that all acquisitions and final disposals are posted in the register, the vouchers dealing
with the acquisition or final disposal shall contain a certificate from the Accountant under the control of
work in the division that the transactions have been posted in the Register giving also the page and item

205
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

number of the entry. The certificate shall be checked and initialed by the Divisional Accountant after
verifying the concerned register.
Cases may arise where the transactions regarding acquisitions or final disposal are dealt in the
subdivision office. Before the concerned vouchers or other documents dealing with these are finally
accepted, the same shall be got pre-checked and passed by the Executive Engineer so that appropriate
entries are made in the register of the division.
Each item of tools and plants, scientific and mathematical instruments and furniture shall be
given an identification number when first received in the division and this number shall be quoted in all
transactions relating to the same. The identification numbers will be preceded by an initial representing
the name of the Division and followed by initials representing the group and sub group to which the item
belongs. The number itself will be based on the serial number of the item in its subgroup or groups in the
concerned register.
Spares shall also be entered in the register as per Appendix 2900A and treated as stock items and
when used for replacement or in repairs shall be shown as issue on the register and concerned repair
estimate. Accessories however are additional equipments to improve its performance. If these are kept
separate, these shall be numbered and accounted in the register. If fitted, the accessory need not be
separately accounted but the descriptions of the Plants shall indicate the fact of the accessory being fitted
in it.
All movements of tools and plants, scientific instruments etc., which are given separate
identification numbers shall be watched through a movement register so that at any time the location of
any item is easily known. The form in which movements shall be recorded is given in Appendix 2900B.
To enable the movement register kept in the Division Office being posted up-to-date, all movements of
such Tools and Plants shall be accompanied by a transfer note in form vide Appendix 2900C a copy of
which shall he sent to the Division Office.
2902. Classification of Stores.
For easy identification, docketing and control, each item to be stored shall be suitably grouped/
classified under different trade groups and given a permanent identifying number by the Executive
Engineer. All the transactions shall indicate the code identification number and the measurement of
each item shall be in standard units only. The variation, if any, between the quantities entered in the
store accounts and the quantity computed from the suppliers bill shall be adjusted in the account then
and there.
2903. Estimating the Requirements
Requirements vary with the nature of work. If additional instruments are required, as in the case
of special investigation work or in project work, the sanction of competent authority shall be obtained
for procuring the same.
In the case of Divisions, Subdivisions and Sections the annual requirement must be prepared by the
Executive Engineer based on the shortage arising either from inadequate supply originally or from some
of the available instruments being in disorder. In the latter case, before arranging for fresh supplies in
lieu of instruments in disorder, an examination must be made whether the same can be repaired at
reasonable cost. Repairs shall be done at the Government approved workshop.
Where electronic or other sophisticated equipments are required, estimate shall also include the
necessary cost for annual maintenance contract if the manufacturer has such provision.
2904. Instruments
Regarding, mathematical and drawing instruments each Draftsman. Overseer, Tracer and
Assistant Engineer shall have one set of drawing instruments consisting of-
(a) One Mathematical Instrument Box
(b) One tee square/ Mini drafter
(c) Two set squares
(d) One parallel ruler
(e) Box of scales including plotting scales and architectural scales.
In addition in each Division Office there shall be one set of French curves, Pantograph and Planimeter
and computers with drafting software’s like AutoCAD and a printer/ plotter. If in any Division,
Subdivision, or Section the normal standard as specified above is found inadequate then additional
instruments and/or Superintending Engineer or Chief Engineer may sanction additional quantities of the
listed items according to necessity.
206
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2905. Tools and Plants

Tools and plants required for the general use of the department will be held as part of stock and
will be accounted for as such. The Executive Engineer shall annually review the existing stock of the
Tools and Plants available in the Division.
Existing hand tools like mammatties, pickaxes, shovels etc. not in use shall be accounted and
survey report prepared. These shall be disposed off in public auction after getting sanction to the survey
reports from the competent officer.
Machinery required for works done by contractor shall be provided by the contractor himself
and shall not be provided by the department on hire. The department shall hire all machinery required
for departmental execution of works.
Existing road rollers, bitumen rollers asphalt hot mix plants, sprayers and accessories of the
above for road surfacing work, which are not in use, shall be accounted and survey reports prepared. These
shall be disposed off in public auction after obtaining sanction from the competent authority

2906. Departmental Vehicles

Departmental vehicles may broadly be divided into goods vehicles and vehicles for inspection.
Contractors shall provide the goods vehicles necessary for all transport of goods in connection with the
execution of the contract. Hence all the departmental goods vehicles shall be accounted and survey
report prepared. These shall be disposed off in public auction after the competent officer sanctions the
survey report. If there occurs a need for goods vehicle, it shall be hired by the department.
For inspection work officers are expected to use their own conveyances for which they are entitled to get
T. A. as per rules. However, it is necessary that some Departmental vehicles are also available for
inspection and for use as a staff car. The number of such staff cars shall be kept to a minimum, with each
Division being given one car and each subdivision one jeep or a car. Where the vehicles provided are
inadequate, sanction of Government shall be obtained for the additional vehicles.
Wherever vans are available and are in use this may be considered against the provision for jeep.
In addition to the above there will be one car under each Chief Engineer and each
Superintending Engineer and the Chief Architect to serve as staff car. Mobile Laboratory shall be
provided for the KHRI and a Mini Bus under Human resources for Training.
In some cases as in projects, it may be necessary to provide special facilities by way of school
bus, ambulance etc. These shall be considered as special requirements and shall be provided only with
sanction of Government.
Vehicles may be taken on hire with the approval of concerned Chief Engineer, if department
vehicles are not provided.
2907. Office Accessories- Furniture, Communication Systems.
All the offices of PWD shall have the necessary means of communication service for improving
the performance. Telephone and photocopiers, Computers, printers etc shall be provided to all the offices
of PWD. In addition Chief Engineers shall also be provided with laptop. Offices of Executive Engineer
and above shall have fax. In addition, concerned Chief Engineer shall sanction Fax facility to other
offices as per requirement. All officers of and above the rank Assistant Executive Engineer are provided
with email facility and communications may be sent as email also.
Apart from the existing postal delivery system, modern communication facilities such as, email
and web connectivity, couriers etc. may also be suitably used. Mobile phones, call conference, video
conference, shall be made available as per requirement.
All PWD offices shall have necessary tables, chairs, stools, racks/ shelves, almarah and cash
chest as per Government rules. Computer tables and chairs shall also be provided.
2908. Bitumen
The Executive Engineer shall procure the bitumen for works up to TS powers of Executive
Engineer1*, from approved sources.
2909. General principles regarding procurement.
For works executed through contractors, the contractor with the exception of clause 130.3 shall
do all procurement. The procedures laid down in the Store Purchase Manual shall be followed for all
other procurements of the department.

207
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

All purchasing officers of the Department when exercising their powers of purchase shall also
note the following points.
a. If any tools & plants and vehicles are required, the concerned Chief Engineer shall sanction a
proposal with an estimate for the same. This will form the basis for procurement.
b. Office accessories like furniture, small tools, survey instruments and reference books and codes
shall be procured by an officer not below the rank of an Executive Engineer based on the
sanctioned estimate
c. All purchases shall be against specific provision in sanctioned estimates. As an exception to the
above, spares/ replacements may be purchased against L. S. provision provided in the annual
maintenance estimate.
d. The Executive Engineer as per sanction shall procure Scientific and Mathematical instruments, etc.
by the competent authority. Special specifications if any shall be clearly indicated in notice
inviting tenders.
e. No unserviceable article shall be accepted/procured.
The procedure to be followed for inviting tenders and arranging purchases will be as detailed in the
Store Purchase Manual of Government of Kerala. On receipt of the items, the Executive Engineer shall
conduct proper inspection and where necessary test of the equipment and articles received. If required,
the help of any Government approved Workshops may be availed for conducting tests and in
inspecting the plants, spares and accessories.
2910.Custody and protection of Equipments
Scientific and Mathematical instruments allotted to an office shall be under the custody of a technical
officer working in that office subject to the overall control of the Head of the office. Mathematical
instruments, and articles like tapes, foot rules etc. may be entrusted to the officers using the above
instruments regularly on their personal receipts, subject to the over-all control of the Head of the office.
Plants and Machinery in use will be under the custody of the officer to whom they are issued. Where
operators or drivers are employed the operator or driver will be in direct charge of the Plants during the
period it is in operation subject to the control of the officer having custody of it. During the period when
the Plants are not being operated or where there is no operator for the Plants, the custodian shall arrange
for its protection including watch and ward where necessary.
2911. History Book
The custodian of the each and every equipment/ tool/plants/ instruments, etc. shall maintain a
history book (Appendix 2900D) that records all the relevant information like registered number,
equipment number, date of purchase, model, make, manufacturer, cost of equipment, maintenance
schedules, dates of repairs, type of repair, cost of repair, replacements, transfer from Division / offices
and any other special remarks.
1* Bitumen will be supplied in respect of all departmental works up to the limit of Rs.100 lakhs vide GO (P)
No.375/2015/Fin dated 24.08.2015.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

If any plants or equipment needs repairs, the custodian shall report the fact to the Executive
Engineer through his official superior. The custodian shall also arrange a competent mechanic or
Engineer/ government approved workshop to inspect the plants and report on the nature of repairs to be
done, the time required and the probable cost. If the plants is beyond the stage of economical repair this
fact also shall be reported by the inspecting mechanic or Engineer. Executive Engineer may then
propose to dispose off the plants at the place where it is or transferred to a suitable place and may then
be auctioned as per sanction received from competent authority.
The custodian shall arrange the repairs after getting sanction from the competent Engineer.
Where operators or drivers are under the control of a vehicle or plants, they shall notify the custodian
immediately of any special requirements or replacements needed for safe functioning of the vehicle or
plants.
2912. Use and operation of Tools and Plants
Scientific instruments like levels, theodolites, Total stations etc., shall be handled and used only
by technical hands having the requisite training in the use of these instruments. When they are not in use,
208
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

these instruments shall be kept properly in their boxes or containers. When transported, the boxes or
containers shall be carefully supported in cushions without the chance of getting jolted, during the
journey. Necessary skilled labour shall be employed for conveyance and carrying out the work.
2912.1.Calibration
Prolonged use may stretch tapes and chains, and the Legal Metrology department as per rules shall do
standardization. Measuring and weighing apparatus shall be calibrated at least once in 6 months. Other
scientific measuring instruments and lab equipments shall be calibrated periodically as per rules.
Calibration and validity certification shall be the responsibility of the custodian.
2912.2. Operation
Operation of plants and machinery shall be entrusted only to operators competent to handle
them. For this purpose the required training shall be given to persons selected to work as operators. Such
training may be given in special training establishments or by a period of apprenticeship under a skilled
operator. Wherever the manufacturers of the equipment issue operating instructions, the same shall be
translated to local language and the operator asked to get fully conversant with it. A copy of such
operating instructions shall be kept along with the equipment and exhibited in such a manner that the
operator can at all times refer to it easily. Where the manufacturers issue no operating instructions, the
Assistant Engineer shall write out the important operating instructions for the guidance of operator.
Road vehicles as well as plants that require the operators and crew to have licenses issued by
certain statutory authorities shall have Operators who shall possess the required licenses, which shall be
periodically renewed and kept current at their own expenses.
All important items of equipment such as vehicles, road rollers, plants, pile driving plants, U
compressors, mixers, pumps etc., shall have log books maintained for each such equipment. The log
book shall be written by the operator-in-charge of the equipment and frequently checked by the Assistant
Engineer, and reviewed by Assistant Executive Engineer concerned. In the case of vehicles, the log book
shall be written by the officer in-charge of the vehicle or the officer assigned to use the vehicles.
In the case of plants consuming fuel, lubricants etc., the standard rate of consumption of these
per hour of operation or for a certain unit of work done shall be prescribed after carefully watching the
performance of each such plants. When reviewing the logbook, a check shall be made whether the actual
consumption is reasonable as compared with the prescribed standard. If any abnormality is noticed, the
plant’s performance shall be tested and if necessary repairs or tuning as are required shall he carried out.
The standard of consumption shall be re fixed once a year or as often as found necessary by the Assistant
Executive Engineer.
Remittance of Motor vehicle tax, insurance premia, pollution control tests, obtaining vehicle
fitness certificate, etc. shall be the responsibility of the operator/ driver and custodian officer.
The rules regulating the use of the staff vehicles maintained in Government offices are
reproduced the “Handbook on Rules and Orders for Use Maintenan ce and Repairs of Government
Vehicles” published by PWD mechanical Wing. It also gives the form for Logbook.
2913. Stores
Each store will have a custodian /Assistant Engineer who will be responsible for the verification,
receipt, custody and issue of the stock materials and maintenance of initial accounts of all store
transactions. The administrative control over such custodians will be exercised by stores officers
(Assistant Executive Engineer) who will be stationed in suitable places. The Stores controlling Officer
(concerned Executive Engineer) shall render compiled accounts to the Accountant General monthly.
The Stores officers and custodians of Stores shall be provided with ministerial and field staff if
required to assist them in the discharge of their duties.
Periodical verification of stores is a matter of great importance and a regular systematic
verification of all the stores has to be carried out at least once a year under control of concerned
Superintending Engineer.
2913.1. Stationery stores
Stationery items required for each office shall be procured from the government stationery stores.
In the case of non-available items, the Head of Office shall arrange the procurement, from open market.
The Head of Office shall designate custodian of Stationery store.
2913.2. Receipt of materials

209
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

When materials are received in the stores, the custodian shall verify the supply against the order
both as regards quantity & quality and against specification. It may sometimes happen that along with
serviceable articles, some unserviceable or partly damaged articles are also received, and only the
serviceable articles shall be accepted and the unserviceable articles either returned to supplier or
temporarily kept in the transit shed till it is disposed of in the manner as settled between the department
and the supplier. If any tests are being carried out such tests shall be arranged and the articles shall be
accepted and taken into stock only after the tests prove satisfactory. The supplier shall be kept informed
of the action taken. The cost of such tests shall be borne by the department unless the order specifies that
the test will be at supplier's cost. The accepted quantities shall be entered in the Goods Received Sheet as
per Appendix 2900E. The custodian of the stores will retain the office copy. The other copies will be
sent to the Stores Officer, out of which one copy will be passed on to the supplier. The measurements
shall be got checked by the Stores Officer and bill prepared for payment.
Booklets will be serially numbered and the issue and the receipt back of the booklets will be
watched through a Register of Goods Received Sheet in Appendix 2900F. The used-up sheets shall be
arranged in chronological order and bound in volumes of convenient sizes and kept under the safe
custody of the Stores Officer.
If the order specifies that supplies shall be completed by a certain date, supplies made after that date
shall be accepted only after getting sanction from the authority who ordered supply. Should any correction be
effected during check-measurement on a subsequent date, such correction shall be noted in the store records
through a plus or minus entry indicating the reason for such entry in the remarks column.
2913.3. Store Accommodation
In the case of departmental execution, the accommodation required shall be assessed based on the
expected maximum quantities of materials to be stored at a time. The provision for storage shall be on a
generous scale to avoid deterioration and consequent loss and to facilitate inspection. Covered
accommodation shall be provided for all materials that deteriorate due to exposure to weather.
Suitable arrangements shall be provided so as to obtain the maximum storage utilizing the minimum
building space. Inflammable materials shall be stored separately in compartments not likely to catch
fire. Explosives shall be stored only in magazines of approved design with sufficient safety margin all
round.
Materials in store shall be properly planned so that supplies received and issues can be traced
accurately and care shall be taken to issue out earlier supplies first and later supplies thereafter. (i.e.
First in First Out)
The custodian of stores, with the following details, shall maintain an indexed register for different
articles.
Type of Material ___________________________________________________________
Sl Open Receipts Total Issue Total Balance as Remark
No ing on date of s
Bala Issue
nce
Order Date ofQuantities Issue Date ofQuantities
No. receipt received No. Issue issued
This register shall be up to date at all times for verification by higher officers.
The store and the yard around it shall be properly protected with only one gate, controlled by a
gateman who shall have a shelter put up near the gate.
2913.4. Issues of articles.
Issues of articles from the stores shall be made only as per issue orders passed by the Stores
Officer. The requisition shall contain the name of the work, names of the articles, the code numbers,
the unit of measurement, quantities required for the whole work, quantities already obtained and
quantities for which requisition is made.
If the articles are to be issued to a contractor, the contractor or his agent/ representative shall
produce the Indent (Appendix 2900G) from the Store control Officer who after verification may issue
the indent. Simultaneously the Assistant Executive Engineer shall be informed of the number and date
of Indent issued against the requisition. At the time of issue, the custodian shall obtain a receipt

210
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

(Appendix 2900H) from the contactor/ contractor's agent/ representative along with the requisition and
the issue shall be intimated to all concerned.
The quantity shall be entered in standard units prescribed for each item either in full or part
both in words and in figures. All articles issued shall be counted, measured or weighed as the
case may be before they are issued. There shall be proper measuring and weighing apparatus
in each store for this purpose. The stores officer shall make it a point to test these measuring
and weighing apparatus and keep it accurate.
Counting, measuring or weighing of articles particularly heavy articles may need the
assistance of some labour. This shall be legitimately charged to work. Loading of articles into lorry
or other conveyance for removal from the store is the responsibility of the custodian of the store. For
this purpose the messenger who arrives with the Indent may be allowed to bring in his own labour,
lorry or other conveyance to the stores for removal of articles from the store and arrange the loading
work.
In the case of issue of stationery items, the custodian shall collect requests for issue and get it
sanctioned by the store controlling Officer. Each issue shall be entered in the indexed register shown
below then and there and the receiving officer shall sign in the Signature column as a token of
receipt.
Name of article _______________________________
Sl Opening Receipts Issue Balance as Remarks
No Balance on date of
Issue
OrderDate Quantities TotalIssueDate QuantitiesIssued Signature Total
No. of received No. of issued to
receipt Issue
2914. Hiring of Equipments
The contractor shall provide equipments necessary for a work. PWD shall not hire out any equipment.
In the case of departmental execution, PWD shall take such equipments on hire, if necessary, with
approval of competent authority.

2915. Repairs and Maintenance

It is essential that all assets be properly maintained so that they can efficiently function
whenever required. The maintenance work may be divided into three broad categories, viz.-
Preventive maintenance
Periodical overhauls
Special repairs
Every repair/ replacement shall be duly noted in the logbook and the history book.
2915.1. Preventive maintenance
This consists of carrying out certain item of maintenance as a regular feature so as to reduce
the wear and tear of assets. The custodian shall maintain all instruments and equipments accurately
and in working condition.
In the case of tools & plants and Department vehicles, regular lubrication, periodical cleaning of
oil and fuel filters, tightening of loose joints, etc. shall normally be done by the operating crew when the
equipment is in operation. When the equipment is laid off, certain preventive maintenance items may
still have to be done occasionally and this shall be arranged through any other suitable approved agency.
Checking and correcting contacts in electrical system and works of a similar nature can be
considered as preventive maintenance.
Such preventive maintenance items shall be properly listed out for each equipment and charts of
the same written in Malayalam or the language known to the operator and kept with the equipment and
displayed whenever it is in operation.
The cost of preventive maintenance works for the above items shall be included in the general
maintenance estimate for the division concerned. The Executive Engineer shall arrange such works
immediately.
2915.2. Periodical overhauls

211
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

This shall be arranged at regular intervals for all items including furniture. The interval may be
once every 6 months or once every year or at such periods as decided by the Assistant Engineer. Worn
out parts shall be replaced, adjustments shall be effected wherever necessary and painting of such
portions as needed shall be done, all as a part of periodical overhaul. The intention is that after every
periodical overhaul the equipment is refitted to operate at the maximum efficiency possible consistent
with its age and general condition.
If any Plants/ vehicle or equipment has become so old that replacement of worn out parts and
refitting will be too costly and commensurate with the efficiency of its performance after the overhaul
then it is better that the Plant is disposed off as it is without attending to the repairs. This aspect shall
also be borne in mind when taking up periodical overhaul. Mathematical and Scientific Instruments shall
be serviced regularly as per manufacturer’s instructions and measuring instruments calibrated at the
specified intervals as per rules. Electronics equipments like fax, photocopiers, computers etc. shall be
serviced regularly. Annual maintenance contracts shall be arranged for electronic and other sophisticated
equipments, through agencies approved by manufactures.
The cost of periodical overhauls will depend on the cost of spares replaced, cost of other
materials required including oil and fuel, labour involved etc. The Assistant Engineer under the control
of the equipment shall prepare the estimate for such periodical overhaul after proper assessment. All
such estimates for periodical overhauls to be done during the financial year for the whole division shall
st
be submitted by the 1 week of April, as proposal to the concerned Chief Engineer for approval to
arrange the works on time and allotment of funds. The competent authority shall arrange work.
2915.3. Special repairs
These are taken up as and when necessary mostly to repair unforeseen damages to any
equipment. With proper preventive maintenance, careful operation, and regular periodical overhauls, the
need for special repairs shall arise only very occasionally perhaps due to accidents.
Special repairs can be estimated only after a proper examination of the plant/ equipment is done
by competent mechanic or Engineer/ Government approved workshop. The Assistant Engineer shall
prepare an estimate based on such assessment including cost of spare and submit for approval from the
competent authority. Work may be arranged after sanction is accorded for the estimate. In urgent cases,
the Executive Engineer shall arrange work in anticipation of sanction provided funds are available with
him to meet the cost.
2916. Workshops
P. W. D. shall make use of the Government approved workshops for all repairs in the case of
vehicles and tools and plants. For electronic and other equipments, the authorized service centers of the
manufacturer shall be utilized.
2917. Periodical Verification
Periodical verification of all stock items shall cover not only the verification of physical
balances, but also the postings and accounts of all transactions, which have taken place since the last
verification. The physical balance shall be compared against the account balance after providing for
corrections against erroneous entries, if any. Immediate necessary steps shall be taken to deal with
excess and shortage. Concurrently appropriate disciplinary action shall be initiated regarding erroneous
postings and other irregularities if any detected during verification. An officer designated by the Store
Control Officer shall do verification.
2918. Verification of Movable Assets and Store item
Movable Assets shall include Equipments, tools, machinery instruments, computers, vehicles,
furniture, books etc. that has to be physically checked and accounted annually. In the case of items in store,
the physical balance of item shall be checked periodically and it shall be ensured that there is no transaction of
that article (either receipt or issue) until the physical verification of that article is completed.
2918.1.Procedure for Verification
1. The object of verification is not only to ensure that the book balances and the actual physical balances
agree but also to see that all the accounts prescribed in the Public Works Department Manual are
maintained, strictly in accordance with rules.
2. Before verification of articles actually in the Stores, the verifiers will make a test check of the accounts
maintained and satisfy themselves that the book balances are arrived at correctly. This shall be done with
reference to the relevant Goods Received Sheets, Indents and the issues.
3. Stock Verifiers will select at random any material for physical check and count all the materials. They
shall open the stock ledgers as in the enclosed form (Appendix 2900I) check articles, opening balance and
212
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

entries for each receipts, and issues and closing balances. Differences if any between book balance and
actual stock listed out shall be reported to the concerned Chief Engineer.
4. They will so arrange their program of physical check of the store materials as to cover up all the important
articles. All verification must be made in the presence of the concerned custodian who will be required to sign
the verification sheets or inventories as a token of the acceptance of the correctness of entries.
5. The Verifiers shall record the following certificate in the Registers “Certified that the actual Stock s of
__________ on hand are verified by me on the date noted against each and found to be correct”
6. If the physical balance as per the findings of the verifier agrees with the balance, the Verifier will affix his
dated initials in register on the next line with the dated initials of the Custodian of Stores and the Stores
Officer.
7. The actual counted figures agreed upon by the Custodian of Stores and the Stores Officer, will be the
basis for regulating future balances, the differences being taken up separately through the concerned
Chief Engineer. Wherever differences are observed between the book (ledger) balances and the counted
balances, the postings shall be checked, the case for the differences investigated and instructions recorded
in the ledger maintained by the Verifier.
8. The result of such verification shall be recorded in the progress reports (Appendix 2900J) to be submitted
to the Chief Engineer. Each article counted shall be carefully examined and its condition shall be noted in
the progress report. Also materials, which have not been operated upon for more than one year noted and
explanation called for. The report must be handed over to the Stores Officer for record.
9. The Verifiers will also see that orders of the concerned Chief Engineer passed on the different statements
are given effect to promptly and action is taken to adjust all shortages and surpluses in balances.
10. They shall verify whether list of surplus, obsolete and unserviceable articles are promptly submitted and
disposed off.
11. The Verifier shall furnish a certificate in the progress reports to the effect that the accounts prescribed in
the Public Works Department Manuals are properly maintained.
12. The progress reports will he prepared in triplicate, with original copy submitted to the Stores Officer who
will record his remarks and submit it to the concerned Chief Engineer through the Executive Engineer.
The duplicate copy submitted directly to the concerned Chief Engineer. The Verifier will retain the
triplicate copy for his reference.
13. The Verifier shall also furnish his remarks in the progress reports about the adequacy of arrangements
made for the custody of materials.
14. The Verifier has also to verify whether reports are periodically sent to the Executive Engineer.

2919. Disposal
2919.1. Disposal of Equipments.
It is unnecessary and costly to maintain old, obsolete and unserviceable equipments. Every year the
Executive Engineer shall review the equipments in his Division and sort out such items, which in his opinion
fall within the above category and may be disposed. In respect of machinery items the advice of the
competent mechanic/ Engineer/ government approved workshop may also be sought. After finalizing the list,
a survey report shall be prepared. Sanction to this report shall be obtained from the competent authority
before the disposal of equipments in public auction.
2919.2. Disposal of Unserviceable Articles
All care shall be exercised to prevent or minimize deterioration by proper care in storage and by
timely issues. Some articles may deteriorate or become unserviceable due to long storage. Frequent inspection
of the stores is to be undertaken to identify such articles likely to get deteriorated, provide them with proper
protection if it is lacking. The inspecting officer shall report the matter to Chief Engineer and with his
approval arrange for open sale of the article before it actually gets deteriorated or unserviceable.
An article that has already become unserviceable must be removed from the stores to a suitable place
where these unserviceable articles can be retained till disposal. The Stores Officer shall conduct necessary
enquiries as to the reason for the article having become unserviceable and obtain sanction from competent
authority to dispose of the unserviceable articles through a survey report giving a clear history of the matter.
After such sanction is received, the articles shall be disposed off in public Auction.
2919.3. Dismantled Materials
In any work the dismantled materials obtained shall be properly accounted as per Appendix 2900K.
As far as possible, serviceable dismantled materials shall be utilized for the concerned work or issued to any
other work. Dismantled materials remaining unutilized shall be physically verified and disposed off in public
auction after preparing necessary survey report and sanctioning it by the competent authority. All
unserviceable dismantled materials obtained shall also be disposed off in a similar manner.

213
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

GOVERNMENT OF KERALA

Kerala Public Works Department Manual

Revised Edition 2012

PART – III

APPENDICES

214
PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

215
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

List of Appendices
Appendix No Details
200 A Questionnaire
200 B Delegation of powers
200 C Space Standards
400 A Areas covered under integrated computerized MIS
500 A Major head of AIC

500 B Plan works

500 C Non Plan Works
700 A Order of Government of India regarding the procedure for payment from fund
700 B Monthly Progress Report Proforma
700 C Monthly Progress Report Proforma
700 D Work Expenditure Proforma
700 E Administration Report
1100-1 Environmental Regulations Management
1100-2 Standard EMP for Project works
1100-3 Guidance on Oxbow Lands
1100-4 Guidance on Quarry and Borrow Area Management
1100-5 Guidance on landscaping and Tree species
1100-6 Guidance on Public Consultations
1100-7 Guidance for preparing management measures where project specific EMP required
1202-A Rehabilitation and Resettlement Policy of Government of Kerala
1202-B Social Screening Format
1202-C Social Impact Data Sheet
1202-D Budget estimate to be attached with detailed project report
1500 Design Parameters
1500-A Design Data for Major and Minor Bridges
1500-B Checklist of details required for approval of alignment of Roads/Bridges
1500-C Checklist of details required for design of Roads/Bridges
1600-A1, A2, A3 Model Preliminary Estimate for roads/buildings/bridges.
1600 B Docket Sheet for Issue of Technical Sanction
1600-C1, C2, C3 Details to be incorporated in Preliminary Project Report for bridges/roads/buildings
1600-D Docket sheet (preliminary report / detailed report)
1600-E Checklist for Detailed Estimate Report
1600-F Deviation Statement in the course of actual construction of works
1600-G DB4 Comparative Statement (Large)

216
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

1800-A Register of Sanction to Estimates

1900-A Application Form for Registration of Contractors
1900-B Registration Certificate
1900-C Form for Experience Certificate for Renewal of Registration of Contractors
1900-D Renewal form for Contractors Registration
2000-A Short Tender Notice
2000-B Register of Tenders
2000-C Proforma to Accompany for acceptance of Tender Excess
2000-D Application for release of Security Deposit
2000-E Register of Agreements
2000-F Register of Custody of Agreements
2100-A Acknowledgement form of handing over the site to contractor
2100-B Sample form of Work Spot Order Book
2100-C1, C2 Sample Progress Report of Budgeted Works/ Non Budget works
2100-D Safety Code
2100-E1 Measurement Book
2100-E2 Level Field Book
2100-F Proforma to Accompany Recommendation for Extension of Time of Completion
2100-G Certificate of Completion of Work
2200 Execution of Roads, Bridges and Buildings.
2200-A Inspection Note
2200-B Material Collection Report
2200-C Machinery for excavation of different operation of Road Construction
2200-D Tentative output of Road
2200-E Details to be submitted for approval from Engineer to start work
2200-F Proforma of Progress of well steining and sinking
2200-G Proforma for recording tilts and shifts of wells
2200-H Statement showing particulars of different methods adopted and phenomenon encountered
during well sinking on different wells.
2400 Physical requirement of aggregates and Mix for surface wearing course
2402 A&B Pot hole repairs
2407 A&D Drain details
2407 E&F Traffic Management during construction & strategy
2600-A Type of distress symptoms probable causes and possible types of treatment.
2600-B Maintenance criteria
2600-C Road Register
2600-D Format for Road Condition

217
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2600-E Inventory of Culverts

2600-F Condition of Culverts
2600-G Abstract particulars of estimate for maintenance and repairs
2600-H Road Chart
2600-I Schedule of Maintenance of operations
2600-J Register of avenue trees
2600-K Road cutting and Restoration Protocol
2600-L Application for permit for Road Cutting
2600-M Permit for Road Cutting
2600-N G.O (Rt) No.684/09/PWD dated 27-05-2009
2700-A Bridge Register
2700-B Condition of Bridges
2700-C Inspection Report of Bridges
2800-A Building Register
2800-B Rules for the reservation, occupation etc of TB’s, RH’s, IB, Camp shed’s etc
2800-C Rules for the allotment and occupation of Government Servants Quarters
2800-D Agreement to be executed by allottees.
2800-E Handing over /Taking over statement of Residential Building
2800-F Proforma for fixation/revision of rent
2800-G Lease deed for building to be hired for Government purpose.
2800-H Lease deed for lettering and Government building/property
2900-A Register of Movable Assets
2900-B Register of Movements of Movable Assets
2900-C Transfer Note
2900-D History Book
2900-E Goods Received Sheet
2900-F Register of Goods received sheet
2900-G Stores Indent
2900-H Stores issue receipt
2900-I Stock Ledger
2900-J Progress Report of Stock Verifier
2900-K Register of Dismantled materials

218
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 200 A

QUESTIONNAIRE (Vide item 10 of section 203.3, under Superintending Engineer)

1. Is the division having adequate staff? if not, indicate where it is deficient.

2. Is the technical and ministerial staff distributed properly according to requirements?
3. Are there sanctioned posts left vacant; if so why?
4. Is there sufficient number of scientific and mathematical instruments? Are they in good working
condition? If there is deficiency indicate the same.
5. Are the tools and the plant and the staff to man them adequate?
6. Have steps been taken to forecast and procure the requirements of departmental materials?
7. Are the arrangements for conveyance of the required materials to different work sites adequate?
Has action been taken and followed up in all cases where land acquisition is involved? If not indicate
cases where delays are noticed.
8. Have estimates been prepared for all budgeted works; if not what are the steps taken?
9. Have steps been taken to regularize works started without adequate funds? Give details.
10. Are there works started without Administrative Sanction or Technical Sanction? If so give details
and reasons.
11. Has a Review of expenditure vis-à-vis budget provis ion been made with regard to works under
various head? If so where performance budget has been introduced, has the review of the
performance been made in accordance with the performance budget?
12. Have estimates been prepared and sanctioned for all budgeted works? If not, indicate the present
position regarding estimates as given below:
a. No. of works not yet investigated,
b. No. of works investigated and in the design stage.
c. No. of works where estimate is under preparation or scrutiny.
d. No. of works where investigation design or estimate is held up on account of some special
reasons.
13. Has a test check of the designs approved by the Executive Engineer been made? If so, are these in
accordance with standards followed in the Department? Where type designs are available are these
being adopted?
14. Are there cases where the actual cost of work has exceeded or is likely to exceed the Sanctioned
Estimate by more than 50%? If so, make a case study and indicate the principal reasons for the
excess and how such large excess can be avoided in future.
15. Have all safety precautions been taken in the works under execution?
16. Have the various registers like Revenue Register Tender Register, Building maintenance register,
Acquittance roll been examined? What are the general conclusions after a review of the register?
17. Are service books kept up-to-date?
18. Has a test check of overtime allowances paid been made? If so, does this disclose any abnormalities
or irregularities?
19. Has a test check been made regarding wages of workers to whom Factory Act is applicable? If so
does this disclose any irregularity?
20. Has the Executive Engineer inspected the Subdivision office and Stores if any under his control
during the year? If so review any one of the inspection registers of the Executive Engineer and
indicate the findings.
21. Are labour gangs in different sections of roads adequate?
22. Is sufficient number of quarries available?
23. Is road traffic statistics conducted and details kept in proper form?
24. Are there pending replies to remarks of Audit reports, inspection reports and public accounts,
committee estimates committee etc? If so give details.
26. Have sufficient computers installed in Divisions and are they operational? If not,
action taken.

219
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

DELEGATION OF POWERS Appendix – 200B

1. Administrative Powers

Sl Nature of powers Chief Engineer Superintending Executive Assistant Assistant Administrative Officer Remarks
No Engineer Engineer Executive Engineer
Engineer
1 Creation of posts Part time contingency post &
make appointments
2 Appointments CE Administration and Non Gazetted Upper Lower To appoint and promote
subject to PSC Designs to make appointments Posts in circles Division Division clerk non-gazetted ministerial
rules of up to lowest gazetted post (temporary or clerk and and Third officers and last grade
Sanctioned posts permanent) Overseer grade employees in the
Grade II Overseer headquarters units with
concurrence of concerned
CE
Menials charged to office contingencies
3 Transfers and All officers whom he is All NGOs & All NGOs All NGOs Within the headquarters
postings competent to appoint. AEs within the within the within the unit whom he is
circle Division subdivision competent to appoint
Post any officer whom he is Post all non-gazetted officers Same as EE
competent to appoint for working under him on working but for a
special duty for a period not arrangements for a period not period not
exceeding one year. exceeding six months. exceeding
three months.
Provided the strength in the cadre is not exceeded, no special allowance is payable on account of the special duty. Postings in gazetted cadre shall be
intimated to government The officer ordering working arrangement is authorised to order payment of TA and meet the MO charges for sending their pay,
as and when found necessary.
To detach officers whom he is competent to
appoint from one office and fix another office as
their headquarters on working arrangements for a
period not exceeding six months in exigencies of
public service.
Fix the headquarters and Recommend
jurisdiction of all section removals and
offices including individual transfers of
works Divisional and
Sub divisional
Officers from his
Circle
4 Sanction of Casual leave to all subordinate officers. Casual leave to all gazetted
Leave officers up to and including
Administrative Assistants in the

220
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

headquarters unit

Surrender of earned leave, subject to eligibility, to all officers working under him.
All kinds of leave except study leave, leave without allowance exceeding 120 days and To sanction leave, other than CE (A&D) to sanction
special disability leave to all officers and staff under him study leave and special charge allowance for
disability leave, to those whom additional charge as per
he is competent to appoint rules
5 Impose minor Other than Superintending Other than other than other than Any To institute disciplinary Powers subject to
punishment on Engineers or officers of Executive Asst. Assistant non- proceedings against those Kerala Services Rules
any officer equivalent rank. Engineers. Executive Engineers gazetted whom he is competent to
serving under Engineers officer appoint.
him working
under
him.
Dismiss, degrade, suspend, effect recovery from pay, discharge and retire under Suspend Subject to Kerala
rules, or to accept resignation of any officer whom he is competent to appoint. any Services Rules and
non- other rules laid down
gazetted by Government from
officers time to time.
working
under
him
6 Sanction of Within the country, except for Within the state Tour Tour within Tour Journey outside the
Tours for journey by air and in the within the his within state for CEs require
subordinate staff adjoining state. jurisdiction his Govt. sanction. All
districts of jurisdict journeys by air also
neighbouring ion require Govt. sanction.
states
No separate sanction is required for sanctioning travelling allowance to an officer for journey outside jurisdiction undertaken on the orders of competent authority. Attendance
certificate shall be produced by non-gazetted officers. CE to sanction the cancellation charges already incurred by an officer for journey approved by the Chief Engineer and
subsequently cancelled for valid reasons.
7 Provident Fund Sanction temporary Sanction NRA Sanction Sanction - To countersign and forward Subject to conditions and
withdrawals from provident equal to an NRA equal NRA equal applications for admission to limitations under GPF
fund deposits without amount of Rs 1 to an to an Provident Fund from (Kerala) Rules.
monetary limit & lakh or ½ the amount of amount of members of staff of the
nonrefundable withdrawals amount standing Rs 75,000 or Rs 50,000 or headquarters and Sanction
from PF upto 3/4th of the to the credit of ½ the ½ the Sanction temporary
balance at the credit of the subscriber or 5 amount amount withdrawals from provident
subscriber.. times basic pay, standing to standing to fund deposits without
whichever is the credit of the credit of monetary limit to his
less. subscriber or subscriber or subordinate officers
5 times 5 times

221
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

basic pay, basic pay,

whichever is whichever is
less. less.
8 Increments To execute agreement in Deputy CE shall Sanction Sanction To sanction increments to DCE admin to sign
respect of advance sanctioned sanction increments increments those whom he is competent Increment Certificates of
and to execute agreements and increments to all to all non- to all non- to appoint. non-gazetted technical
reassignments of Insurance non-gazetted gazetted gazetted To fix pay of all non- staff of the headquarters
policies offered as collateral staff in the staff in the staff in the gazetted officers. unit
security to all officers under Circle. To fix Division. To Division and
his administrative control. pay of all non- fix pay of all Sub-
gazetted officers. non-gazetted division. To
officers. fix pay of all
non-gazetted
officers.
9 Advance TA Sanction advance TA, 15 days Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil
before the actual journey
10 Sanction To all subordinate officers Nil Subject to Govt Servants
Reimbursement Medical Benefit Rules.
of medical
expenses
11 Investigation of To sanction investigation of To sanction investigation of
arrear claims arrear claims including claims arrear claims including
which cannot be verified by claims of not more than five
audit due to limited period of years old, excluding time-
preservation. barred claims.
12 Training To depute technical hands to Training programme shall
facilities to seminars, short term courses be monitored by HRD
officers and for study purposes within Cell.
India.
13 Sanction shifting To sanction shifting of or disconnection of the To sanction
of telephones phones in his jurisdiction. shifting of
phones in
his
jurisdiction.
14 Sanctioning of To sanction TA Bills of all To sanction TA Bills of all staff working under Countersign TA bills of non- TA Bills shall be
TA bills staff working under him and him. technical Gazetted Officers sanctioned within 15 days
his TA Bills. in the headquarters unit after receipt and kept
below the rank of the ready for payment.
Administrative Officers.

222
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2. Financial Powers
Chief Engineer Superintending Executive Assistant Executive Assistant Remarks
Engineer Engineer Engineer Engineer
1 Administrative Sanction
A Original Works (i) Original works Rs. 50 lakhs Rs. 20 lakhs Rs. 15 lakhs Rs 200000 Nil

o.667/20
GO(P)N
(ii) Electrification/ Electronics Works Rs. 7 lakhs Rs. 3 lakhs Rs. 2 lakhs Rs. 50000 Rs 15000

00/Fin
(iii) Investigation of schemes Unlimited Rs. 5 lakhs (for all Rs. 2 lakh Rs. 50,000 Nil
(budgeted works) works)
Rs. 8 lakhs (for all
works)
(iv) Contribution works Rs. 50 lakhs Rs. 20 lakhs Rs. 15 lakhs Rs 75000 Nil
B Repairs (i) Special repairs of Buildings Rs. 10 lakhs Rs. 6 lakh Rs. 300000 Rs 75000 Nil
(ii) Ordinary and Special repairs Rs. 5 lakhs Rs. 200000 Rs. 50000 Nil Nil
Electrical
(iii) Repairs of Roads Rs. 15 lakhs 10 lakhs Rs. 6 lakhs 1.5 lakhs Rs. 10,000
2 Technical Sanction
(i) Original, maintenance and Unlimited Rs. 100 lakhs (R ) Rs. 50 lakhs Rs. 5 lakhs (R ) Rs. 100000

GO(P
)No.
investigation & contribution Rs. 250 lakhs (B) (R ) Rs. 6 lakhs (B) (R )
Rs. 100 lakhs Rs. 100000
(B) (B)
(ii) Electrification/ Electronics works Unlimited Rs. 50 lakhs Rs. 20 lakhs Rs. 200000 Rs. 15,000

4 Sanction for Purchase, Manufacture

and Repairs of Stores including T&P
(i) Sanction for purchase of T&P Rs. 15 lakhs Rs. 10 lakhs Rs. 5 lakhs Rs. 100000 Rs. 15,000
charged to work
(ii) Sanction for purchase of T&P not Rs. 15 lakhs Rs. 10 lakhs Rs. 5 lakhs Rs. 100000 Rs. 15,000
charged to work (excluding motor
vehicles)
(iii) Sanction for materials other than Unlimited Rs. 10 lakhs Rs. 5 lakhs Rs. 100000 Rs. 15000
T&P
(iv) Sanction for purchase of Stock Unlimited Rs. 3 lakhs Rs. 100000 Rs. 25000 Rs. 5000
articles T&P required for
electrical/electronic works

223
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

(v) Sanction for repairs of Motor LMV Rs. 50000 LMVRs. 30000 LMV Rs. LMV Rs. 3000 others AE LMV
Vehicles others Rs. 50000 others Rs. 40000 10000 others Rs. 4,000 Rs. 1000
Rs. 15,000
(vi) Sanction for repairs and carriage of Unlimited Rs. 7 lakhs Rs. 200000 Rs. 25,000 Rs. 5,000
T&P
5 Sanction of Survey Reports
(i) For disposal of stores Unlimited Rs. 5 lakhs Rs. 200000 Rs. 50,000 Rs. 10,000
(ii) For disposal of buildings Unlimited Rs. 50 lakhs Rs. 25 lakhs Rs. 5 lakhs Nil
(iii) unserviceable articles including T7P Unlimited 200000 100000 50000 50000 Go (P) no.
and improvements in acquired lands and 128/PW
trees (both living and dead) dated
17.6.1968
6 Write off
Of stores on account of deficiency or To value of Rs. Rs. 10,000 at a Nil Nil Nil GO (P) No.
deterioration 100000 at a time time (annual limit 667/2000/F
(annual limit 10 Rs. 500000) in dated
lakhs) 22/3/2000
7 Contracts and Tenders
(i) Invitation of Tenders and
execution of agreements

(a) All works except item (b) below Unlimited Unlimited Upto his TS Upto his TS powers Upto his TS
powers powers

dated
(b) Electrical / Electronic works Unlimited Unlimited Upto his TS Upto his TS powers Upto his TS
powers powers
(c) Purchase of materials and T & P Unlimited Unlimited Same as for Same as for sanction Same as for

667/2000/Fin
sanction of of purchase sanction of

GO (P) No.
22/3/2000
purchase purchase
ii) Waiving of tender calls Upto Rs. 25 lakhs Upto 10 lakhs Rs. 300000 Rs.50000 Rs.10,000
8 Miscellaneous powers

224
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

(i) Passing and payment of bills Bills other than work Bills other than All bills 1.Part and Final 1. Passing
Bill - Unlimited work bill - without payments for contract of all bills
Unlimited monitory entered into by him including
limit (including approved work bills,
tender excess and bills
excess over estimate). relating to
2.All bills relating to supplies
supplies and services and service
within his competency and
of sanction contingent
bills
(recurring
and non
recurring)
within his
powers of
sanction
(ii) To draw temporary advance for within his powers of within his powers within his within his powers of payment of
payment of vouchers payment of payment powers of payment bills,
payment vouchers
within his
powers of
payment.
(iii) Sanction refund of revenue Unlimited Rs. 3 lakhs Rs. 50,000 Rs. 2000 Nil
Sanction re-appropriation of Funds Unlimited Unlimited Rs. 50000 Nil Nil

(iv) Office Expenses (Non-recurring) Rs.100000 in each Rs. 50,000 in each Rs. 25,000 in Rs.5,000 in each case Rs. 1000 in

da
case case each case each case

te
d
00/F
GO(

7/20

in22
o.66
P)N

/3/2
000
(v) Office Expenses (Recurring) Expenses relating to Expenses relating -do- -do- -do-
his office and those to his office and
under his charge those under his
charge
(vi) Purchase of books and periodicals Unlimited Rs. 7,000 (A.L. Rs. 10,000 Rs. 2,000 (A.L. Rs. 750
15,000) (A.L. 25,000) 4,000) (A.L. 1,500)

225
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

(vii) Purchase of stationery Rs. 10,000 at a time Rs. 15,000 at a Rs. 10000 at Rs. 10000 at a time Rs. 10000
(A.L. 100000) time (A.L. 75,000) a time (A.L. (A.L. 20000) at a time
50,000) (A.L.
1,0000)
(viii) Purchase of Scientific and Unlimited Rs. 50,000 (AL) Rs. 100000 Rs. 20,000 (A.L) Rs. 5000
Mathematical instruments (A.L) (A.L)
(ix) Sanction for purchase of Office Unlimited Rs. 50,000 at a Rs. 25000 at AEE Rs. 15,000 at a Rs. 2,000 at
furniture time (A.L. 2.5 a time (A.L. time (A.L. 50,000) a time (A.L.
lakhs) 1.5 lakhs) 10,000)
(x) Printing of forms reports pamphlets, Rs. 200000 (A.L.) Rs. 100000 (A.L.) Rs. 5,0000 Rs. 5,000 (A.L.) Rs. 2,000
notices photo copying, stenciling (A.L.), (A.L.)
ammonia printing
(xi) Replacing spares of vehicles without Rs. 25,000 at a time Rs. 10000 at a Rs. 5000 at a Rs. 2500 at a time Rs. 750 at a
consulting mechanical wing (A.L. Rs. 100000) time (A.L. Rs. time (A.L. (A.L. Rs. 15000) time (A.L.
50,000 Rs. 30,000) Rs. 3,000)
(xii) Advertisement Charges Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited
(xiii) Photographic Charges Unlimited Rs. 50000 in each Rs. 25,000 Rs. 5000 Rs. 1000
(xiv) Demurrage/ Wharfage Charges Rs. 20,000 in each Rs. 10,000 Rs. 5,000 Rs. 1000 Nil
case
(xv) Workmen’s Compensation Unlimited Unlimited Nil Nil Nil
(xvi) Renting of private buildings Rs. 50000 Rs. 25000 Rs. 15000
(xvii) Rent Fixation Unlimited Rs. 40000 per Rs. 20000 Rs. 10000 per month Rs. 5000
month per month per month
(xviii) Issue of Rent Certificate Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited RS. 10000 per month Rs.5000 per
month
(xix) Valuation of Buildings Unlimited Rs. 100 lakhs Rs. 25 lakhs Rs. 6 lakhs Rs. 50,000
Rs. 1.5 lakh
(Plinth area
valuation)

GO(P)
(xx) Sanction lease of usufructs of trees Rs. 10 lakhs/year in Rs. 2 lakhs/year in Rs. 100,000/ Rs. 50,000/year in Rs.

No.
and land each case not each case not year in each each case not 10,000/year
exceeding 3 years exceeding 3 years case not exceeding 3 years in each case
exceeding 3 not
years exceeding
3 years

226
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

(xxi) Sanction auction of right for Unlimited Upto Rs. 5 lakhs Upto Rs. Upto Rs. 50,000 Nil
conduct of ferries / canteen etc and powers for 200000
confirmation and
remission of
revenue on
account of
interruption
(xxii) Sanction right for collecting toll at Rs. 100 lakhs Nil Nil Nil Nil
bridges
(xxiii) Auction of articles and buildings
(a) Conduct of auction Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Upto an assessed Upto an
value of Rs. 200,000 assessed
value of Rs.
50000
(b) Confirmation of auction Unlimited (even if Unlimited Confirmation Confirmation of Confirmatio
bid amounts is (Provided the bid of auction auction conducted by n of auction
less than 50% of the amount is not less conducted by him if the bid amount conducted
assessed value) than 50% of him if the bid is not less than 75% of by him if
assessed value) amount is not assessed value the bid
less than amount is
75% of not less than
assessed 75% of
value assessed
value
(xxiv) Approval of designs for Unlimited Rs. 200 lakhs Rs. 100 lakhs Rs. 25 lakhs Nil
engineering structures (Monetary limit)
(xxv) Arranging works departmentally Rs, 100 lakhs Rs. 50 lakhs Rs. 25 lakhs Rs. 5 lakh Rs. 100,000
(xxvi) Expenses for conducting Training Rs. 50,000 (max) per
CE, DRIQ course of two weeks
subject to a
minimum of 15
participants (annual
limit 10 lakhs)
(xxvii) Expense for conducting Seminars Rs. 20,000 per
and Technical discussion CE, DRIQ discussion (A.L. Rs.
2lakhs)

227
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

(xxviii) Sanction of estimate for eviction Rs. 25 lakhs Rs. 15 lakhs Rs. 10 lakhs Rs. 2 lakh (A.L.) Nil
of encroachments (A.L.)
(xxix)Imprest for expenditure on Rs 10000 at
removal of fallen trees, earth slips, a time
diverting stagnant water Monthly
limit 50000
(xxx)Imprest for Departmental Rs 10 Lakhs
Execution at a time
* - GO (P) NO. 667/2000/FIN Dated 22.03.2000
Note: 1. Joint Director, KHRI shall exercise powers delegated to Executive Engineers in all the relevant items

Administrative Powers of Chief Architect PWD

Sl. Nature of powers

no
1 Creation of posts Part time contingency post & make appointment
2 Appointments subject to PSC rules Appointments up to lowest gazetted post of Sanctioned posts
3 Transfers and postings All officers whom he is competent to appoint Post any officer whom he is
competent to appoint for special duty for a period not exceeding one year.
To detach officers whom he is competent to appoint from one office and fix another office
as their headquarters on working arrangements for a period not exceeding six months in
exigencies of public service
4 Sanction of Leave Casual leave to all subordinate officers. Surrender of earned leave, subject to eligibility, to
all officers working under him.
All kinds of leave except study leave, leave without allowance exceeding 120 days
5 Impose minor punishment on any officer Powers subject to Kerala Services Rules
serving under him
6 Sanction of Tours for subordinate staff Within the country, except for journey by air
7 Provident Fund Sanction temporary withdrawals from provident fund deposits without monetary limit &
nonrefundable withdrawals from PF upto 3/4th of the balance at the credit of the subscriber.
Subject to conditions and limitations under GPF (Kerala) Rules
8 Increments Sanction increments to all non-gazetted staff.
To fix pay of all non-gazetted officers.
9 Advance TA Sanction advance TA, 15 days before the actual journey.

228
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

10 Sanction Reimbursement of medical To all subordinate officers. Subject to Government Servants Medical Benefit Rules
expenses
11 Training facilities to officers To depute technical hands to seminars, short term and for study purposes within India.
Training shall be monitored by HRD Cell
12 Sanction shifting of telephones To sanction shifting of or disconnection of the phones in his jurisdiction
13 Sanctioning of TA bills To sanction TA Bills of all staff working under him. TA Bills shall be sanctioned and after
receipt and kept ready for payment within 15 days

229
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 200 C
Space Standards :
Design of Quarters :
Classified into 5 categories according to the scale of pay as given in the Table below :
Sl. TYPE Floor Area in Scale of Pay (2009)
No. m2 per unit
1 I 60 8500-13210 to 8960-14260
2 II 80 9190-15780 to 15380-25900
3 III 100 16180-29180 to 21240-37040
4 IV 120 22360-37940 to 44640-58640
5 V 196 46640-59840
Quarters for Judiciary Staff:
( As per G.O. (MS) No. 31A/95/Home dated 06-10-1995)

Sl. Designation Floor Area in m2 per unit

No.
1 Munsiff/ Magistrate 100
2 Sub Judge/ Chief Judicial Magistrate 140
3 District Judge 196
Standards of space allotment for various types of Buildings :
1. School Buildings
1.1 For Primary Schools.
Class Room : Minimum of 1 sq.m per student
1.2 For Secondary Schools.
Class Room : Minimum of 1 sq.m per student
1.3 For Colleges( Arts & Science)
Lecture Hall : Minimum of 1.2 sq.m per student
Laboratory : Minimum of 2.5 sq.m per student
The requirement for Professional Colleges will be suggested by the authorities concerned.
2. Standards for student hostels
2.1 For Dormitories : Minimum of 4.5 sq.m per student For
triple occupancy : Minimum of 6.5 sq.m per student For
Double occupancy : Minimum of 7.5 sq.m per student For
Single Occupancy : Minimum of 9.0 sq.m per student
2.2 Standards For sanitary requirements :
Relevant Rules in KMBR shall be followed.
For Office buildings, officers with basic pay 36140 and above are eligible for
separate toilet.
3. Space standards for tourist Bunglows
3.1. Economic Class :
Area for Single Room : 12 sq.m. excluding toilets
Area for Double Room : 18 sq.m. excluding toilets

3.1. Upper Class :

Area for Single Room : 15 sq.m. excluding toilets
Area for Double Room : 20 sq.m. excluding toilets

Minimum Space Standards for Government Officials

1. For Gazetted Officer 15 sq.m.

2. For Non-gazetted Officer 3.75 sq.m
3. For Records 10% of the Item no.2 above

230
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 400 A
Areas covered under Integrated Computerised MIS (section 406.5)
Core Business Function Core Operations Contracts Contractor Technical Tools to Finance and Account Human Resources Network and Office
Functions /Project Manageme assist core function Development Information Automation
Manageme nt business functions Systems
nt Management
⋅ Roads Information system ⋅ Inventory/ Assets ⋅ Contrac ⋅ Contrac ⋅ Computer ⋅ General Ledger ⋅ Personal Files ⋅ PWD ⋅ e Mail
(with GIS) Management ts tor Aided Design ⋅ Accounts ⋅ Service records Website / ⋅ Messaging
⋅ Roads Maintenance ⋅ Procurement and ⋅ Contract Profile Tools Payables ⋅ Salary Records Portal: ⋅ Workflow
Management Tender s ⋅ Projects ⋅ Modeling and ⋅ Accounts ⋅ Seniority, WINGS automation
⋅ Roads Safety Management Administr in Simulation Receivables Promotions and ⋅ Secure ⋅ Groupware
Management/Accident Info ⋅ Revenue: Billing & ation progress Tools ⋅ Assets Valuation Transfers Department ⋅ MS Office
System Collection ⋅ Plannin /complet ⋅ Structural ⋅ Funds Flow ⋅ Training and Intranet / equivalent
⋅ Bridges Management ⋅ Budget Planning & g ed Analysis Tools Management Career WAN for tools
⋅ Pavement Management Monitoring ⋅ Tenderin ⋅ EMD & ⋅ Sattelite ⋅ Cash Development employees & ⋅ Files
⋅ Traffic Management ⋅ Contracts g BG Imagery Management ⋅ Performance internal Tracking
System Management ⋅ Planning ⋅ Bills Interpretation/ ⋅ Cheque Books Appraisals stakeholders ⋅ Library
⋅ Toll ways Management ⋅ Contractors ⋅ Costing Raised editing tools Management ⋅ Skills Inventory ⋅ Secure Information
System Management ⋅ Funding ⋅ Stage- ⋅ Aerial ⋅ Treasury ⋅ Capability Extranet for Management
⋅ Real-time Traffic Control ⋅ Projects ⋅ Resourc wise Photography / Management Profile external ⋅ Legislative
and Monitoring System Management e payment Other ⋅ Budgeting ⋅ Employee stakeholders Assembly &
⋅ Investigation and Planning ⋅ Stores Accounting Managem s made Integration ⋅ Financial Payroll and agencies Parliamnet
⋅ Design & Analysis ⋅ Environment ent ⋅ Recove Tools Controls ⋅ Expense and ⋅ Public Q&A
⋅ Works/Construction Management ⋅ Billing ries Due ⋅ GIS ⋅ Financial Travel Processing Access portal ⋅ Litigation
Management ⋅ Social and RAP ⋅ Progress ⋅ Perfor environment Reporting ⋅ Leave Records ⋅ HW, SW & and Court
⋅ Decision Support Systems ⋅ Monitoring & Report mance ⋅ Technical ⋅ Pay Roll ⋅ Loans and Networking Cases
⋅ Stakeholders Management Learning System Databases and Accounting Advances Facilities Tracking
Systems ⋅ Measurement Standards ⋅ Expense and ⋅ PF/ESI Management ⋅ Land
⋅ Strategic Performance Book Electronic Travels ⋅ Staff Welfare ⋅ Configuratio Acquisition
Reporting & Management computerization Documents ⋅ Measurement ⋅ Knowledge n Management Cases
⋅ Integrated Computerised Management Book Management and ⋅ Formats & Tracking
Information System System computerization On-Line Training Reports ⋅ Legacy Data,
⋅ Policies and Management Maps,
Employee related Drawings,
Information files
digitization.

231
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

A Arc Assistant Architect JC Judicial Circle

AA Administrative Assistant JD Joint Director
AD Assistant Director JS Junior Superintendent
Admn. Administration KHRI Kerala Highway Research Institute
AE Assistant Engineer KRFB Kerala Road Fund Board Legend- abbreviations Used
AEE Assistant Executive Engineer KSTP Kerala State Transport Project
AO Administrative Officer LDC Lower Division Clerk
Arc Architect LSGD Local Self Government Department
Ar HD Architectural Head Draughstman min. Ministerial
Bldg. Buildings NC North Circle
Brd. Bridges NH National Highways
C Arc Chief Architect Op Operations
CA Confidential Assistant Ovr Overseer
CC Central Circle PF Provident Fund
CE Chief Engineer Plng Planning
Conc. Concrete PM Personal Management
DA Divisional Accountant PPU Project Preparation Unit
DCE Deputy Chief Engineer PR Public Relations
DD Deputy Director Prj Projects
Dsn Design QC Quality Control
Dm Draughtsman QM Quality Management
Dir Director R&B Roads & Bridges
EE Executive Engineer Rds Roads
Ele. Electrical R Research
Els. Electronics RS Road Safety
Env. Environmental SC South Circle
FA Financial Assistant SE Superintending Engineer
FC Financial Controller SM Soil Mechanics
FO Financial Officer SS Senior Superintendent
FP Flexible Pavement Trc Tracer
Ge Geologist Tech. Technical
Gnl General Trf Traffic
HC Head Clerk Tr. Treasury
In Investigation UDC Upper Division Clerk
V Vehicle

232
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 500 A

Major PWD Head of accounts

Major Head Code Major Head Name Major Head Description
2059 Public works Public works Revenue Section
3054 Roads and Bridges Roads and Bridges Revenue Section
4059 Capital Public Works Capital Section Outlay on Public Works
0059 Public Works Revenue Public Works Revenue
1054 Roads and Bridges Roads and Bridges
5054 Capital Outlay on Roads and Bridges Capital Outlay on Roads and Bridges
4202 Capital Outlay Education. Sports art and culture Capital Outlay Education. Sports art and culture
4216 Housing Capital outlay on Housing
4210 Medical and Public Health Capital outlay on Medical and Public Health
4211 Family Welfare Capital outlay on Family Welfare
4225 Welfare of SC/ST and other backward classes
4235 Social Security and welfare Capital outlay on Social Security and welfare
4403 Animal Husbandry Capital outlay on Animal Husbandry
4405 Fisheries Capital outlay on Fisheries
4058 Stationary and Printing Capital outlay on Stationary and Printing
3452 Tourism
5452 Tourism Capital outlay on Tourism
5475 General Economic Services Capital outlay on General Economic Services
3054-80-799-95 Suspense Account

233
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Sl No. Sl No.

Status Code Status Code

Work Name Work Name

Head of account Head of account

STLF order no. with AS no. with date

date

Amount Allotted AS amount

TS no. with date TS no. with date

TS issuing authority TS issuing authority

WorksPlan-Non (section 503)

(CE/SE/EE/AEE) (CE/SE/EE/AEE)
Appendix C500

Appendix500B
TS amount TS amount

Plan Works 9 (section 503)

20

Agreement No with Agreement No with

date date
Agreement period of
completion in months
Agreement period of
completion in months

Office with whom Office with whom

Agreement Executed Agreement Executed

Agreed contract Agreed contract

Amount (in Rs) Amount (in Rs)

Expenditure incurred Expenditure

till date incurred till date

Name of Contractor Name of Contractor

Contractor code Contractor code

234
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Planning and Policy 600A

20-Year Master Plan

GIS
Preliminary
Assessments/ Pre
Pre- 5-Year Plan Safety and social aspects and
environment.
feasibility Studies

Investigations
Annual Plan

FMS

Budget RMMS
PPR

DPR Implementation

Quality
Safety Environment &
Social
Performance Budget

Review & Monitoring

Administration Report

235
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 700A

Orders of the Government of India regarding the Procedure for payment from the fund
1. The money lying in the Fund exists in three different forms (i) Payments from Road Fund Allocations; (ii)
The Central (Ordinary) Reserve and (iii) The Central Special Reserve.

Payments from Roads Fund Allocation of States

2. Under Paragraph 7 of the Road Fund Resolution, the sums allocated for expenditure in the States can be
spent only on the objects specified in that paragraph and such expenditure requires the PREVIOUS
APPROVAL of the Central Government. Before approving a proposal for expenditure from the Road Fund
Allocations of a State, the Central Government are required to refer it the Standing Committee for Roads, vide
para 9 (4) of the Resolution. It will, therefore, be necessary for the State concerned to obtain the previous
approval of the Central Government to schemes, which they intended to finance wholly, or partly from the
State's Road Fund Allocations. They must do this before incurring, any commitments on these schemes. They
need not send the estimates to the Centre for approval of any works proposed to be financed from the Road
Fund Allocations, though such estimates may be sent for technical advice to the Roads Organisation of the
Ministry of Transport if the State wishes to do so.
3. Quarterly allotments will be made by the Central Government from the allocations held by them to the
credit of the State Government concerned for expenditure in specific schemes, which have been previously
approved by the Central Government.
4. Audit is required to see that expenditure on any scheme met out of allocations from the Central Road Fund
is within the programme approved by the Central Government with the advice of the Standing Committee for
Roads. For this purpose the Government of the State concerned, upon the receipt of the approval of the
Central Government, shall intimate to them the name number and date of detailed' estimate as (technically)
sanctioned by the competent authority, the amount for which it is sanctioned the amount to be met from the
State's Road Fund Allocations and a very brief description of the work which it comprises in those cases
where the title of the estimate itself does not adequately convey its scope. This information will be passed on
by the Government of India to audit with instructions that expenditure against the estimate in question may be
adjusted against the State's Road Fund Allocations to the extent authorised.
5. The Accountant General or Comptroller concerned is authorised to pass an excess over the estimated cost
of a scheme, as approved by the Central Government, up to a limit of 10% of the estimated cost. When the
excess is more than 10%, the approval of the Central Government to the revised cost shall be obtained by the
State Government concerned. This limit of 10% applies to excess over the amounts approved by the
Government of India whether at the preliminary stage, when approval to schemes is accorded after obtaining
the advice of the Standing Committee for Roads, or at the later stage when the final costs of works as per
detailed estimates are intimated to Audit.
Payments from the road fund Central (Ordinary) reserve
6. Under paragraph 6 of the Road Fund Resolution, the Central (ordinary) Reserve with the Government of
India can be applied only for the purpose specified in that paragraph. Defence approving a proposal for
expenditure from the Central (Ordinary) Reserve the Central Government are required to refer it to the
Standing Committee for Roads, vide, paragraph 9 (4) of the Resolution.
7. When an application is received by the Government of India for a grant from the Central (Ordinary)
Reserve they will in the first instance satisfy themselves whether the proposed scheme is suitable and then
refer it to the Standing Committee for Roads. If, in the light of the advice tendered by the Committee, the
Government of India decide that a grant shall be given from the Reserve to the State Government or other
administration or authority concerned, the Government of India will inform them that they will be prepared to
meet from the Reserve the whole or a stated percentage of the estimated cost of the work, subject to a
maximum limit, if necessary.
8. The State Government or other administration or authority concerned shall then submit detailed estimates,
with plans etc. for each such scheme to the Government of India. After scrutiny of the estimates, the
Government of India will communicate their technical approval and financial sanction to the State
Government or other administration or authority concerned.
9. The competent authority will then accord (technical) sanction to the estimates, and the State Government or other
administration or authority concerned shall then intimate to the Government of India the number, date a-id other
particulars of the detailed estimates so sanctioned as in paragraph above. The Government of India will at once pass
on this information to Audit and inform them that a contribution will be made from the Central (Ordinary) Reserve
towards the expenditure against the sanctioned estimate to the extent decided upon.
10. Actual payments will be made by the Accountant General, Central Revenues, to the State Government or
other administration concerned on the basis of the monthly audited expenditure on the work as communicated

236
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

to him by the State Accountant-General or Comptroller concerned.- subject to the limit of the contribution
sanctioned by the Government of India.
11. Where the Accountant General, Central Revenue, is also the Audit Officer for a Chief Commissioner's
State, he will make the necessary adjustments himself in his books, subject to the limit of the contribution
sanctioned by the Government of India.
12. The State Accountant-General or Comptroller, or the Accountant General, Central Revenue, as the case
may be, is empowered to pass any excess over a contribution from the Central (Ordinary) Reserve sanctioned
by the Government of India up to a limit of Rs. 1,000 in any one case. When the excess is more than Rs.
1,000, an application may be made by the State Government or other administration or authority concerned
for an extra grant from the Central (Ordinary) Reserve. In making such an application, the revised (detailed)
estimates, if any, for the work shall also be submitted to the Government of India for technical approval and
financial sanction, with a report explaining in full the reasons for the excess.
13. Applications, if any. for extra grants from the Central (Ordinary) Reserve, will be considered by the
Government of India on the merits of each case in the light of the financial position of reserve and other
circumstances prevailing at the time, but no assurance can be given that the extra grant required will be
forthcoming. Therefore, while sanctioning a grant from the Central (Ordinary) Reserve initially the
Government of India may require an assurance from the State Government or other administration or
authority concerned that they will provide the balance of the funds that may be needed to complete the project
from their own resources.
14. The procedure described in paragraphs above has been in force for the Provinces (now Part A States)
since the Road Fund was instituted 20 years ago. It is a simple procedure quickly understood by the P. W. D.
of the States and give no trouble in all these years.
Payments from the Road fund Central (Special) reserve
15. The Special Reserve is intended for expenditure on specified objects, vide paragraphs 3 (5) and 9 (4) of
the Resolution. The procedure for the sanction of grants, and adjustment of expenditure from the special
Reserve is the same as that for grants from the Central (Ordinary) Reserve.
16. Strict instructions have been issued to Audit not to admit expenditure from any of the subdivisions of the
Central Road Fund. i.e. the Allocations, the Central (Ordinary) Reserve, and the Central (Special) Reserve,
unless it has been authorised by the Central Government under the prescribed procedure described above. If,
for any special reasons, it is described that expenditure shall he permitted Iron the Fund in anticipation of
sanction of the Central Government in accordance with the above described procedure, their orders shall be
obtained for the departure_ from the rules. Audit is not empowered to admit such expenditure from the Fund
and will not do so unless authorised specifically by the Central Government

Appendix 700 B
Monthly Progress Report
________ 5 Year PlanYY-YY - Annual Plan YY- YY Progress Report (Financial) for the month of
______ YY
Rs in Lakhs
includingShareDebitduringthemont
uptopreviousMonthincludingShareDebi
uptopreviousmonthexcludingShareDe

excludingShareDebitduringthemo

Progressive Total

Progressive Total
Budget Provision
Head of Account
Name of Scheme

tduringthemonth

andreasonforshortfall
Expenditure

Detailed Remarks
Expenditure

Expenditure
Expenditure
Plan Outlay

nth
bit

h
Sl No

237
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 700 C
Monthly Progress Report
________ 5 Year Plan YY-YY - Annual Plan YY YY Progress Report (Physical) for the month of ______
YY
Sl Name Head of No. of No. of No. of Progressive No, Remark/s/
No of Account work works works total works in reasons for
Scheme in the completed completed progress shortfall.
st
budget upto 31 in the
Vol. I march of current
YY) year (YY-
Previous YY)

Appendix 700 D
Work Expenditure for the Month _______________________of YY under plan heads
Sl Head of Expenditure upto during Expenditure during Progressive total
No Account ______Previous month ______current month

Appendix 700 E
Administration Report
Buildings/ Roads & Bridges
Contents Statement for Statement Statement Statement Statement
Buildings for Roads & for DRIQ for for National
Bridges Projects Highways
1 Introduction
1.1 Period of report
1.2 Performance of the
Department
1.3 Finance
2 Organisation
Structure
2.1 Head Quarters Office
with Organisation
Chart
2.2 Field Office I, II, III, IV, I, II, III, IV, I, II, III, IV, I, II, III, I, II, III, IV,
Organisation Chart V, VI V, VI A V, VI B IV, V, VI V, VI D
C
2.3 Appointments of VII VII VII VII VII
Scheduled Caste and
Schedule Tribes in the
Organisation
3 Objectives and
performance of the
department
3.1 Objectives
3.2 Achievements VIII, IX,IX A, VIII, IX, X, XII H to K VIII, IX, VIII, IX, X,
X, XI, XII, XI, XII A to X, XI, XII XI, XII A,
XIII, XIII A F, XIII A, XII C, XII C, XII
XII D, G, XIII
XIII
3.3 Original Works and
Improvements
3.4 Maintenance XIV, XV XIV A to D, XV XIV A to XIV A, XIV
XV D, XV D, XIV E,
XV
4 Finance
4.1 Sources of Fund
4.2 Plan Outlay

238
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

4.3 Annual Plan Outlay XVI XVI XVI XVI XVI

for YY- YY
4.4 Non Plan allotment XVII, XVIII XVII, XVIII XVII, XVII, XVII, XVIII
for YY- YY XVIII XVIII
4.5 Budget works for the XIX,XX XIX,XX
welfare of scheduled
caste, Schedule Tribes
and other backward
classes
4.6 Central Government
Grants other than
flood relief
4.7 Expenditure
5 Monitoring
5.1 Close monitoring of
works at different
levels
5.2 Introduction of
Malayalam as official
language
6 Conclusion
Satetment I.
Chief Executives of the Department (_____________ wing)
Minister (Works)
PWD Secretary
Chief Engineer (_________ wing)
Satetment II.
Name of senior personnel of PWD ______wing from Executive Engineer level and above during YY-YY
Sl Name of Officer Designation of post held Period of Incumbency
No.

Satetment III.
Circle wise details of Office
Sl Name of Divisions under the Name of Subdivision under Name of sections under the
No. circle the division subdivisions

Satetment IV.
List of Office/ Post newly created during the year YY-YY
Sl. No. Name of Office Designation No. of Posts Government order no. Remarks
and date

Satetment V.
List of offices/ Posts abolished during YY - YY
Sl. No. Name of Office Designation No. of Posts Government order Remarks
abolished no. and date

Satetment VI.
Name and number of Posts Category wise in various offices of PWD Buildings in YY-YY
No. Of posts
Engineers
DesignationCategorywise

South CircleTrivandrum
EE Electronics
Chef Architect

North Circle
SE electrical

Remarks
Ernakulam
Judiciary

LSGD
Thrissur

Total
Calicut
Central
Chief
Sl No.

Circle
Offic

239
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Satetment VI.A
Name and number of Posts Category wise in various offices of PWD Roads and Bridges in YY-YY
No. Of posts

CentralCircleAluv
DesignationCategorywise

South CircleTrivandrum

Administration
North CircleCalicut
EngineersOffice

Remarks
KRFB
a

Total
Chief
Sl No.

Satetment VI.B
Name and number of Posts Category wise in various offices of PWD DRIQ in YY-
YY No. Of posts
DesignationCategorywise

EngineersOffice

BuildingsDesign

BridgesDesign

Remarks
Chief

Total
KHRI
Sl No.

PPU
Satetment VI.C
Name and number of Posts Category wise in various offices of PWD National Highways in YY-YY

No. Of posts
Chief Engineers
DesignationCategor

CircleTrivandrum

CentralCircleE

CircleCalicut
rnakulam

Remarks
North
South
ywise
Sl No.

Total

Satetment VI.D
Name and number of Posts Category wise in various offices of PWD Projects in YY-
YY No. Of posts
DesignationCategorywise
Engineers

Muvattupuzha
Kottarakkra

Remarks
Sl No.

Total
Chief

Circle

Circle
Office

Satetment VII.
Recruitment of Persons belonging to Scheduled caste sand Schedule Tribes
Sl Name of Name of No. of Persons recruited Posting Order
No. office category under the division No.

Satetment VIII.

240
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

List of Major works costing above 5 lakhs for which Administrative Sanction was accorded during YY-YY
(Circle wise)
Sl Name of Work Administrative Sanction order Number Amount (Rs in
No. and date Lakhs)

Satetment IX.
List of Major works costing above 5 lakhs for which Technical Sanction was accorded during YY-YY (Circle
wise)
Sl Name of Work Technical Sanction order Amount (Rs in
No. Number and date Lakhs)
Satetment IX.A
List of Major Electrical works costing above 5 lakhs for which Technical Sanction was accorded during YY-
YY
(Circle wise)
Sl Name of Work Technical Sanction order Amount (Rs in
No. Number and date Lakhs)

Satetment X.
List of Works costing 5 lakhs and above for which investigation is completed in the year YY-YY (Roads/
Buildings/ Bridges/ NH/ Projects)
Sl Name of Division Name of Work Approximate Estimate Cost (Rs in Lakhs)
No.
Satetment XI.
List of Works costing 5 lakhs and above for which investigation is in progress in the year YY-YY (Roads/
Buildings/ Bridges// NH/ Projects)
Sl Name of Division Name of Work Approximate Estimate Cost (Rs in Lakhs)
No.
Satetment XII.
List of Permanent Buildings –Completed and worthwhi le to be highlighted as notable achievements in the year
YY-YY
Sl Name Cost of Date of Plinth Floor Implementing Department/
No. of Completion Completion area of Area of agency/ Contractor Agencies for whom
Work in Lakhs the the work was carried
building building out
Satetment XII.A
Details of roads costing 5 Lakhs and above completed during YY-YY
(Length in Km)
Sl. No Name of Division Name of Road Cost Remarks

Satetment XII.B
Details of MLA roads completed during YY-YY
Sl. Name of Name of Road Length of Width of Cost Remarks
No Division road road

Satetment XII.C
Details of Bridges costing 5 Lakhs and above completed during YY-YY
(Length in Km)
Sl. No Name of Division Name of Bridge Cost Remarks

Satetment XII.D
Category wise Length of roads newly constructed in each Division
(Length in Km)
Sl. Name of Division State MDR ODR Village Total
No Highway Roads

Satetment XII.E
Details of roads transferred to/ converted to other department/ category in each Division during YY-YY
(Length in Km)

241
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Sl. Name of Name of Length Category Transferred to/ Converted Order

No Division Road to No.

Satetment XII.F
Details of roads taken over by PWD from other departments in each Division during YY-YY
(Length in Km)
Sl. Name of Name Length Category of Category to Name of Order
o
No Department from f in Km surface and which added division no.
Roa
which the road is d Surface Width and existing taking charge
transferred (m) land width and date

Satetment XII.G
Category wise Length of National Highways newly constructed in each Division
(Length in Km)
Sl. Name of Division National Total
No Highways

Satetment XII.H
List of bridges and Building for which design was completed (in YY-YY)
Sl. Name of work Approximate
No (Building design) cost

Satetment XII.I
List of bridges and Building for which design work ongoing (in YY-YY)
Sl. Name of work Approximate
No cost

Satetment XII.J
List of bridges and Building for which Project Preparation was completed (in YY-YY)
Sl. Name of work Approximate
No (Building/ Bridge cost
design)

Satetment XII.K
List of bridges and Building for which design work ongoing (in YY-YY)
Approximat
Sl. Name of work (Building/ e
No Bridge design) cost

Satetment XIII.
List of works costing 5 lakhs and above for which work is ongoing in the year YY-YY.
(Roads/ Bridges/ Buildings/ National Highways, Projects)
Name of Division Sl Name of work Estimate Cost (Rs in Lakhs)
No.
Satetment XIII.A
Electrical works costing above 5 Lakhs ongoing in the year YY-YY.
Sl Name of Work File No. Estimate Cost (Rs in Lakhs)
No.
Satetment XIV.
Number of government Buildings maintained in each division during YY-YY
Sl Name Type of Number Plinth Floor Remarks
No. of Government area of Area of
Division Building the the
building building
Satetment XIV.A
Length of roads (Surface wise) maintained in each division during YY-YY
(Length in Km)
Sl. Name of Division CC BT Metalled Others Total
No
242
PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

243
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Satetment XIV.B
Length of roads (Category wise) maintained in each division during YY-YY
(Length in Km)
Sl. Name of Division State MDR ODR Village Total
No Highway Roads
Satetment XIV.C
Length of roads for which various surface treatments done in each division during YY-YY
(Length in Km)
Sl. Name of Division Chipping BM & AC Surface others Total
No Carpet treatments

Satetment XIV.D
Length of roads given Surface treatment in each division (category wise) during YY-YY
(Length in Km)
Sl. Name of Division State MDR ODR Village Total
No Highway Roads

Satetment XIV.E
Length of National highways, Surface wise, maintained in each division (category wise) during YY-YY
(Length in Km)
Sl. Name of Division Name of Chipping BM & AC Surface others Total
No National Carpet treatments
Highway

Satetment XV.
Details of Vehicles, Tool and Plants and other Equipments
Sl No. Name of Office Item Number Remarks

Satetment XVI.
Statement of Plan Outlay of expenditure (Rs in Lakhs)
Sl Head of YY-YY YY-YY YY-YY YY-YY
No. Account (3 years previous) (2 years previous) (Previous Financial Current Financial
Year) Year
Outlay Expenditure Outlay Expenditure Outlay Expenditure Outlay Expenditure
Satetment XVII.
Statement of Financial Review Non Plan Schemes (Rs in Lakhs)
Sl Head of YY-YY YY-YY YY-YY YY-YY
No. Account (3 years previous) (2 years previous) (Previous Financial Current Financial
Year) Year
Outlay Expenditure Outlay Expenditure Outlay Expenditure Outlay Expenditure
Satetment XVIII.
Statement details of revenue anticipated and realised for the year YY -YY (Rs in Lakhs)
Sl Head of YY-YY YY-YY YY-YY YY-YY
No. Account (3 years previous) (2 years previous) (Previous Financial Current Financial
Year) Year
Anticipated Realised Anticipated Realised Anticipated Realised Anticipated Realised
Satetment XIX.
Statement details of Expenditure regarding TSP/SCP for the welfare of Scheduled caste and scheduled tribes
Sl Head of Expenditure During YY-YY
No. Account (RS in Lakhs)

Satetment XX.
Statement showing details regarding the 50% and 100 % CSS works in TSP/SCP
Sl Head of Expenditure During YY-YY
No. Account (RS in Lakhs)

244
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 1100.1 Environmental Regulations (National, State and Local) Management

˜Sl Name of Act/ Rule Brief description Implementing Agency

No.
1. • The Environmental This includes air, noise and water quality standards and the requirements for the Ministry of Environment
Protection Act, 1986, preparation of Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) statements for & Forests
and the developmental projects. Expansion or modernization of any activity shall not
Environmental be undertaken in any part of India unless it has been accorded environmental Central Pollution Control
Impact Assessment clearance by the Union Government, in accordance with the procedures Board
(EIA) Notification, specified in this notification. As per the procedure, anybody who desires to
2006 undertake any project is required to submit a detailed project report, which shall Kerala Science
inter-alia include an Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA). Technology &
Environment Department
As per the EIA Notification 2006, (i) new State highways and (ii) expansion of
State highways greater than 30 km involving additional right of way greater Kerala State Pollution
than 20m involving land acquisition are classified as Category ‘B’ projects. Control Board
Also, (i) buildings ≥20000 sq.mtrs and <1,50,000 sq.mtrs. of built-up area and
(ii) Townships and Area Development projects covering an area ≥ 50 ha and or
built up area ≥1,50,000 sq .mtrs are classified as Category ‘B’ pr ojects.

In these Category ‘B’ projects or activities, PWD h ave to submit an application

seeking prior environmental clearance made in Form 1 to the concerned State
level Expert Appraisal Committee (SEAC) for determining whether or not the
project or activity requires further environmental studies such as the preparation
of an Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA). If SEAC indicates that the
project require an EIA report, then the project shall be classified as Category
‘B1.’ Otherwise, the project shall be termed Catego ry ‘B2’ and will not require
an EIA report.
2. The Water and Air Prevention and Control of Pollution, Setting and managing water quality and Central Pollution Control
(Prevention and Control of effluent standards, as well as monitoring water quality, prosecuting offenders Board
Pollution) Acts of 1974 and and issuing licenses for establishment and operation of certain facilities.
1981 (respectively) Empowered for conduct of public hearing of all projects including road Kerala State Pollution

245
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

projects. Control Board

3. The Public Liability An Act to provide for public liability insurance for the purpose of providing Kerala State Pollution
Insurance Act, 1991 immediate relief to the persons affected by accident occurring while handling Control Board
any hazardous substance (defined under the Environment (Protection) Act 1986
and exceeding such quantity as may be specified by notification by the central
Government.) and for matters connected therewith or incidental thereto.
4. The National Environment An Act to provide for strict liability for damages arising out of any accident Ministry of Environment
Tribunal Act, 1995 occurring while handling any hazardous substance and for the establishment of & Forests
a National Environment Tribunal for effective and expeditious disposal of cases
arising from such accident, with a view to giving relief and compensation for
damages to persons, property and the environment and for matters connected
therewith or incidental thereto.
5. The National Environment An Act to provide for the establishment of a National Environment Appellate Ministry of Environment
Appellate Authority Act, Authority to hear appeals with respect to restriction of areas in which any & Forests
1997 industries, operations or processes or class of industries, operations or processes
shall not be carried out or shall be carried out subject to certain safeguards
under the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 and for matters connected
therewith or incidental thereto.
6. The Forest (Conservation) The Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980 pertains to the cases of diversion of forest
Act, 1980 area and felling of roadside plantation. Depending on the size of the tract to be
cleared, clearances are applied for at the following levels of government:
Restrictions and clearance procedure proposed in the Forest (Conservation) Act
applies wholly to the natural forest areas, even in case the protected/designated
forest area does not have any vegetation cover.
Area of forests to be cleared or diverted exceeds 40ha (or, 10ha in hilly area) Ministry of Environment
and Forests
Area of forest to be cleared or diverted is less than 40ha. Chief Conservator of
Forests or Conservator of
Forests of the concerned
Regional Office of the
Ministry of Environment
and Forests.

246
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

7. The Wildlife (Protection) Establish a number of National Parks and Sanctuaries, to protect and conserve Ministry of Environment
Act, 1972 the flora and fauna. & Forests

8. The Biological Diversity An Act to provide for conservation of biological diversity, sustainable use of its Ministry of Environment
Act, 2002 components and fair and equitable sharing of the benefits arising out of the use & Forests
of biological resources, knowledge and for matters connected therewith or
incidental thereto.
To develop national strategies, plans, programmes for the conservation and
promotion and sustainable use of biological diversity including measures for
identification and monitoring of areas rich in biological resources, promotion of
in situ, and ex situ, conservation of biological resources, incentives for research,
training and public education to increase awareness with respect to biodiversity.
9. Coastal Regulation Coastal stretches of seas, bays, estuaries, creeks, rivers and backwaters which Ministry of Environment
Zone (CRZ) and Regulating are influenced by tidal action (in the landward side) upto 500 metres from the & Forests
Activities in CRZ. High Tide Line (HTL) and the land between the Low Tide Line (LTL) and the
(Notification) HTL as Coastal Regulation Zone; and imposes restrictions on the setting up and Kerala Science
expansion of industries including construction of infrastructure projects, Technology &
operations or processes, etc. in the Coastal Regulation Zone (CRZ). Environment Department

10. The Motor Vehicles Act, Enforce standards for prevention and control of vehicular pollution . The State Transport Authority
1988 authority also checks emission standards of registered vehicles, collects road
taxes, and issues licenses Pollution Under Control Certificate (PUC)
programme to control vehicular emissions.
11. The Ancient Monuments , According to this Act, area within radii of 100m and 300m from the “protected 1. Archaeological Survey
Archaeological Sites and property” are designated as “protected area” and “c ontrolled area” respectively. of India (ASI) if the
Remains Act, 1958 No development activity (including building, mining, excavating, blasting) is site/remains/ monuments
permitted in the “protected `area” and development activities likely to damage are protected by ASI
the protected property are not permitted in the “co ntrolled area”. 2. State Department of
Archaeology if these are
protected by the State
12. The Building and other All the establishments who carry on any building or other construction work The employer to whom
Construction Workers and employ 10 or more workers are covered under this Act. All such the Act applies has to
(Regulation of Employment establishments are required to pay cess at rate not exceeding 2% of the cost of obtain a registration

247
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

and Conditions of Service) construction as may be notified by the Government. The employer of the certificate from the
Act 1996 establishment is required to provide safety measures at the Building or Registering Officer
Construction work and other welfare measures, such as Canteens, First-aid appointed by the
facilities, Ambulance, Housing accommodation for workers near the workplace Government
etc..
13. Explosives Act, 1884 and An act, to regulate manufacture, possession, use, sale, transport, import and Central Government
Explosive Rules, 1983 export of explosives. (Department of
Explosives)
14. Petroleum Act, 1934 and An Act to consolidate and amend the law relating to the import, transport, Central Government
Petroleum Rules, 2002 storage, production, refining and blending of petroleum.
15. The Mines and Minerals An Act and rules to provide for the regulation of mines and the development of State Government
(Regulations and minerals to be followed for the extraction of the sand and aggregates through
Development) Act, 1957 and mining.
rules there under

Appendix 1100.2 Standard EMP for Projects / Works

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Issue

A. INITIAL JOINT VERIFICATION

The PWD and the Contractor will carry out joint field verification to ascertain the possibility to saving
Initial Joint Field trees, environmental and community resources.
Verification for The verification exercise should assess the need for additional protection measures or changes in
W.A.1
modifying contract design/scale/nature of protection measures including the efficacy of enhancement measures suggested in the
documents EMP. Proper documentation and justifications/reasons shall be maintained in all such cases where deviation
from the original EMP is proposed.
Relocation of All community utilities and properties i.e., water supply lines, sewer lines, bank buildings, health centers,
Community schools, health clinics and veterinary hospitals will be relocated before construction starts, on any section of
W.A.2
Utilities & the project corridor. The PWD will relocate these properties in consultation and written agreement with the
Common Property agency/ owner/community. The schools and health centers will be constructed as per the relevant state

248
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Issue

Resources. norms.
All other community property resources within the corridor of impact such as hand pumps, ponds, grazing
lands etc. will be relocated.
The relocation sites for these schools will be identified in accordance with the choice of the community.
Environmental considerations with suitable/required actions including health and hygiene aspects will be
kept in mind while relocating all community utilities and resources.
All religious property resources such as shrines, temples and mosques within the project zone will be
relocated.
Sites for the relocation of these religious structures will be identified in accordance with the choice of the
community. The NGO and PWD in consultation with local people will finalize design of these temples. As
far as possible, the architectural elements of the structure should be conserved/reflected/translated into the
design of new structures.
The entire process (i.e. selection of relocation sites and designs) will be under supervision of the PWD. The
relocation will be completed before the construction starts in these sites.
The contractor shall take necessary care to ensure no impact on cultural properties such as (i) historic sites
and remains, (ii) places of worship including temples, mosques, churches and shrines, (iii) graveyards and
W.A.3 Cultural properties monuments and other important structures as identified during the design.
As per design, if there are works that impact these cultural properties, the contractor shall execute the works
in close co-ordination with the PWD and the local community.
B. FLORA & FAUNA
All efforts will be made to preserve trees including evaluation of minor design adjustments/alternatives (as
applicable) to save trees. Specific attention will be given for protecting giant trees, green tunnels and locally
important trees (religiously important etc.).
Preservation of Tree cutting is to proceed only after all the legal requirements including attaining of In-principle and
W.B.1
Trees Formal Clearances from the Forest Dept./DoEF/MoEF are completed and subsequently a written order is
issued to the Contractor.
Particular species declared as ‘protected’ by the S tate’s Forest Dept. in the private land will be felled only
after due clearance from the Forest Dept. is obtained.

249
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Issue

In the event of design changes, additional assessments including the possibility to save trees shall be made.
Stacking, transport and storage of the wood will be done as per the relevant norms.
Systematic corridor level documentation for the trees cut and those saved will be maintained by the PWD.
The contractor will adhere to the separate PWD Guidance on landscaping and tree species.
The contractor will undertake compensatory plantation for every tree cut. The plantation will be at least 2
trees planted for every tree cut.
The contractor will do the plantation along the ROW wherever feasible.
Compensatory
W.B.2 Minimum 80 percent survival rate of the saplings will be acceptable otherwise the contractor will replace
Plantation
dead plants at his own cost. The contractor will maintain the plantation till they handover the project site to
PWD.
The PWD will inspect regularly the survival rate of the plants and compiance to agreed plans.
Vegetation will be removed from the construction zone before commencement of construction. All works
will be carried out such that the damage or disruption to flora other than those identified for cutting is
minimal.
Only ground cover/shrubs that impinge directly on the permanent works or necessary temporary works will
Clearing and be removed with prior approval from the PWD.
W.B.3
Grubbing The contractor, under any circumstances will not cut or damage trees. Trees identified under the project will
be cut only after receiving clearance from the Forest Dept./DoEF/MoEF (as applicable) and after the receipt
of PWD’s written permission in this regard.
Vegetation only with girth of over 30 cm will be considered as trees and shall be compensated, in the event
of PWD’s instruction to undertake tree cutting.
The contractor shall ensure that none of its workers adversely affect any fauna or wildlife. Hunting will be
W.B.4 Fauna and wildlife
strictly prohibited.
C. BORROW AREAS & QUARRIES
Finalizing borrow areas for borrowing earth and all logistic arrangements as well as compliance to
environmental requirements, as applicable, will be the sole responsibility of the contractor.
W.C.1 Borrow Areas
The Contractor will not start borrowing earth from select borrow area until the formal agreement is signed
between land owner and contractor and a copy is submitted to the PWD.

250
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Issue

Locations finalized by the contractor shall be reported to the PWD and who will in turn report to PWD.
Format for reporting will be as per the Reporting Format for Borrow Area and will include a reference
map. Planning of haul roads for accessing borrow materials will be undertaken during this stage. The haul
roads shall be routed to avoid agricultural areas as far as possible and will use the existing village roads
wherever available.
In addition to testing for the quality of borrow materials, the PWD will be required to inspect every
borrow area location prior to approval (follow criteria for evaluation of borrow areas). Contractor shall
adhere to the separate Guidelines on Borrow area management.
Contractor shall acquire material only from approved and licensed quarries. If contractor intends to develop
.2 Quarrying a new quarry, then all the approvals and licenses must be obtained prior to withdrawing material from the quarry.
Contractor shall adhere to the separate Guidelines on quarry management.
D. CONSTRUCTION CAMP
The contractor as per prevalent rules will carry out negotiations with the landowners for obtaining their
Arrangements for
consent for temporary use of lands for construction sites/hot mix plants/traffic detours/borrow areas etc.
W.D.1 Temporary Land
The PWD will be required to ensure that the clearing up of the site prior to handing over to the owner (after
Requirement
construction or completion of the activity) is included in the contract.
Hot mix plants and batching plants will be sited sufficiently away from settlements and agricultural
operations or any commercial establishments. Such plants will be located at least 150 m away from the
nearest village/settlement preferably in the downwind direction.
The Contractor shall submit a detailed lay-out plan for all such sites and approval of PWD shall be
necessary prior to their establishment.
Crushers, hot-mix
Arrangements to control dust pollution through provision of wind screens, sprinklers, dust encapsulation
W.D. 2 plants and Batching
will have to be provided at all such sites.
Plants Location
Specifications of crushers, hot mix plants and batching plants will comply with the requirements of the
relevant current emission control legislations and Consent/NOC for all such plants shall be submitted to the
PWD.
The Contractor shall not initiate plant/s operation till the required legal clearances are obtained and
submitted.

251
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Issue

All vehicles, equipment and machinery to be procured for construction will confirm to the relevant Bureau
of India Standard (BIS) norms. The discharge standards promulgated under the Environment Protection
Other Construction Act, 1986 will be strictly adhered to.
Vehicles, Noise limits for construction equipments to be procured such as compactors, rollers, front loaders concrete
W.D.3
Equipment and mixers, cranes (moveable), vibrators and saws will not exceed 75 dB (A), measured at one meter from the
Machinery edge of the equipment in free field, as specified in the Environment (Protection) Rules, 1986.
The Contractor shall maintain a record of PUC for all vehicles and machinery used during the contract
period.
The contractor will use ground water as a source of water for the construction and will set up the own bore
well facility for construction work.
Contractor can use the ponds, which are not in use by community or identified to fill up for the project, but
in that case, before using any pond water contractor will obtain written consent from the owner and submit
to PWD.
To avoid disruption/disturbance to other water users, the contractor will extract water from fixed locations
and consult the PWD before finalizing the locations.
The Contractor will provide a list of locations and type of sources from where water for construction will be
Arrangement for
W.D.4 used.
Construction Water
The contractor will not be allowed to pump from any irrigation canal and surface water bodies used by
community.
The contractor will need to comply with the requirements of the State Ground Water Department and seek
their approval for doing so and submit copies of the permission to PWD prior to initiating the works.
Contractor will arrange adequate supply and storage of water for the whole construction period at his own
costs. The Contractor will submit a list of source/s from where water will be used for the project to PWD.
The contractor will take all precaution to minimize the wastage of water in the construction process/
operation.
The Contractor will also provide potable water facilities within the precincts of every workplace in an
Potable water for accessible place, as per standards set by the Building and other Construction Workers (Regulation of
W.D.5
labour Employment and Conditions of Service) Act, 1996.
The contractor will also guarantee the supply of sufficient quantity of potable water (as per IS) in every

252
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Issue

workplace/labor camp site at suitable and easily accessible places and regular maintenance of such
facilities.

E. CONSTRUCTION WASTES
Debris generated due to the dismantling of the existing road will be suitably reused in the proposed
construction, subject to the suitability of the materials and approval of the PWD as follows:
The sub grade of the existing pavement shall be used as embankment fill material.
The existing base and sub-base material shall be recycled as sub-base of the haul road or access roads
The existing bitumen surface may be utilized for the paving of cross roads, access roads and paving works
in construction sites and campus, temporary traffic diversions, haulage routes etc.
The contractor will suitably dispose off unutilized debris materials either through filling up of borrow areas
located in wasteland or at pre-designated disposal locations, subject to the approval of the PWD.
Generation of At locations identified for disposal of residual bituminous wastes, the disposal will be carried out over a 60
Debris from mm thick layer of rammed clay so as to eliminate the possibility of leaching of wastes into the ground
W.E.1 dismantling water. The contractor will ensure that the surface area of such disposal pits is covered with a layer of soil.
structures and road All arrangements for transportation during construction including provision, maintenance, dismantling and
surface clearing debris, will be considered incidental to the work and will be planned and implemented by the
contractor as approved and directed by the PWD.
The pre-designed disposal locations will be a part of Comprehensive Solid Waste Management Plan to be
prepared by Contractor in consultation and with approval of PWD.
Debris generated from pile driving or other construction activities shall be disposed such that it does not
flow into the surface water bodies or form mud puddles in the area.
The contractor shall identify dumping sites. The identified locations will be reported to the PWD. These
locations will be checked on site and accordingly approved by PWD prior to any disposal of waste
materials.

253
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Issue

The pre-identified disposal locations will be a part of Waste Disposal to be prepared by the Contractor in
consultation and with approval of PWD. Location of disposal sites will be finalized prior to completion of
the earthworks on any particular section of the road.
The PWD will approve these disposal sites after conducting a joint inspection on the site with the
Contractor.
Other Construction Contractor will ensure that any spoils of material unsuitable for embankment fill will not be disposed off
W.E.2
Wastes Disposal near any water course, agricultural land, and natural habitat like grass lands or pastures. Such spoils from
excavation can be used to reclaim borrow pits and low-lying areas located in barren lands along the project
corridors (is so desired by the owner/community).All waste materials will be completely disposed and the
site will be fully cleaned and certified by PWD before handing over.
The contractor at its cost shall resolve any claim, arising out of waste disposal or any non-compliance that
may arise on account of lack of action on his part.
F. SOIL & DRAINAGE
The top soil from all areas of cutting and all areas to be permanently covered will be stripped to a specified
depth of 150 mm and stored in stockpiles. A portion of the temporarily acquired area and/or Right of Way
will be earmarked for storing topsoil. The locations for stock piling will be pre-identified in consultation
and with approval of PWD. The following precautionary measures will be taken to preserve them till they
are used:
(a) Stockpile will be designed such that the slope does not exceed 1:2 (vertical to horizontal), and height of
Stripping, stocking the pile is restricted to 2 m. To retain soil and to allow percolation of water, the edges of the pile will be
W.F.1 and preservation of protected by silt fencing.
top soil (b) Stockpiles will not be surcharged or otherwise loaded and multiple handling will be kept to a minimum
to ensure that no compaction will occur. The stockpiles shall be covered with gunny bags or vegetation.
(c) It will be ensured by the contractor that the top soil will not be unnecessarily trafficked either before
stripping or when in stockpiles.
Such stockpiled topsoil will be utilized for -
• Covering all disturbed areas including borrow areas (not those in barren areas)
• Top dressing of the road embankment and fill slopes

254
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Issue

• Filling up of tree pits, in the median and

• In the agricultural fields of farmers, acquired temporarily.
Residual topsoil, if there is any will be utilized for the plantation at median and side of the main
carriageway.
Along landslide prone areas in hilly terrain, the slopes need to be stablised. As drainage is most critical at
W.F.2 Landslides
these locations, proper drainage needs to be constructed at these locations.
Contractor will ensure that no construction materials like earth, stone, ash or appendage disposed off so as
not to block the flow of water of any water course and cross drainage channels.
Drainage and Flood Contractor will take all necessary measures to prevent the blockage of water flow. In addition to the design
W.F.3
Control requirements, the contractor will take all required measures as directed by the PWD to prevent temporary or
permanent flooding of the site or any adjacent area.
Proper drainage should be arranged in the construction camps.
G. WATER BODIES & WATER POLLUTION
The Contractor will not excavate beds of any stream/canals/ any other water body for borrowing earth for
embankment construction.
Contractor will construct silt fencing at the base of the embankment construction for the entire perimeter of
any water body (including wells) adjacent to the RoW and around the stockpiles at the construction sites
Siltation of Water
close to water bodies. The fencing will be provided prior to commencement of earthwork and continue till
Bodies and
W.G.1 the stabilization of the embankment slopes, on the particular sub-section of the road.
Degradation of
The contractor will also put up sedimentation cum grease traps at the outer mouth of the drains located in
Water Quality
truck lay byes and bus bays which are ultimately entering into any surface water bodies / water channels
with a fall exceeding 1.5 m.
Contractor will ensure that construction materials containing fine particles are stored in an enclosure such
that sediment-laden water does not drain into nearby water course.
Water Pollution The Contractor will take all precautionary measures to prevent the wastewater generated during
from Construction construction from entering into streams, water bodies or the irrigation system. Contractor will avoid
W.G.2
Wastes, Fuel & construction works close to the streams or water bodies during monsoon.
Lubricants All waste arising from the project is to be disposed off in the manner that is acceptable to the KSPCB.

255
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Issue

The PWD will certify that all liquid wastes disposed off from the sites meet the discharge standards. The
contractor will ensure that all construction vehicle parking location, fuel/lubricants storage sites, vehicle,
machinery and equipment maintenance and refueling sites will be located at least 500 m from rivers and
irrigation canal/ponds.
A minimum distance of any sewage or toilet facility will be 200m from the water course.
All location and lay-out plans of such sites will be submitted by the Contractor prior to their
establishment and will be approved by the PWD.
Contractor will ensure that all vehicle/machinery and equipment operation, maintenance and refueling
will be carried out in such a fashion that spillage of fuels and lubricants does not contaminate the ground.
Oil interceptors will be provided for vehicle parking, wash down and refueling areas as per the design
provided. In all, fuel storage and refueling areas, if located on agricultural land or areas supporting
vegetation, the top soil will be stripped, stockpiled and returned after cessation of such storage.
Contractor will arrange for collection, storing and disposal of oily wastes to the pre-identified disposal
sites (list to be submitted to PWD) and approved by the PWD. All spills and collected petroleum
products will be disposed off in accordance with MoEF and state PCB guidelines.
PWD will certify that all arrangements comply with the guidelines of PCB/ MoEF or any other
relevant laws.
H AIR POLLUTION
All vehicles delivering materials to the site shall be adequately covered.
The contractor will take every precaution to reduce the level of dust emissions from crushers/hot mix
plants/batching plant/WMM plant, construction sites involving earthwork by sprinkling of water,
encapsulation of dust source and by erection of screen/barriers.
The contractor shall obtain the necessary consent-to-establish and consent-to-operate for all its plants from
W.H.1 Dust Pollution
the KSPCB.
All the plants will be sited at least 150m in the downwind direction from the nearest human settlement.
The contractor will provide necessary monitoring reports to confirm that all plants conform to relevant dust
emission control legislation. The suspended particulate matter value at a distance of 40m from a unit located
in a cluster should be less than 500 g/m3. The contractor shall conduct pollution monitoring at periodic

256
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Issue

intervals.
Dust screening vegetation will be planted on the edge of the RoW for all existing roadside crushers. Hot
mix plant will be fitted with dust extraction units.
Air Emission from
Contractor will ensure that all vehicles, equipment and machinery used for construction are regularly
Construction
maintained and confirm that pollution emission levels comply with the relevant requirements of PCB.
W.H.2 Vehicles,
The Contractor will submit PUC certificates for all vehicles/ equipment/machinery used for the project.
Equipment and
Monitoring results will also be submitted to PWD as per the monitoring plan.
Machineries

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

I. NOISE
The Contractor will confirm the following:
All plants and equipment used in construction shall strictly conform to the MoEF/CPCB noise standards.
All vehicles and equipment used in construction will be fitted with exhaust silencers.
Servicing of all construction vehicles and machinery will be done regularly and during routine servicing
Noise Pollution: operations, the effectiveness of exhaust silencers will be checked and if found defective will be replaced.
Noise from Limits for construction equipment used in the project such as compactors, rollers, front loaders, concrete
W.I.1
Vehicles, Plants mixers, cranes (moveable), vibrators and saws shall not exceed 75 dB (A) (measured at one meter from the
and Equipments edge of equipment in the free field), as specified in the Environment (Protection) rules, 1986.
Maintenance of vehicles, equipment and machinery shall be regular and up to the satisfaction of the PWD
to keep noise levels at the minimum.
At the construction sites within 150 m of the nearest habitation, noisy construction work such as crushing,
concrete mixing, batching will be stopped during the night time between 9.00 pm to 6.00 am.

257
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

No noisy construction activities will be done around educational institutes/health centers (silence zones) up
to a distance of 100 m from the sensitive receptors i.e., school, health centers and hospital.
Contractor will provide noise barriers (Design of Noise Barrier Provided) to the suggested locations of
select schools/ health centers. List of locations for noise barriers is given in specific EMP.
Monitoring shall be carried out at the construction sites as per the monitoring schedule and results will be
submitted to PWD. PWD will be required to inspect regularly to ensure the compliance of EMP.
Workers in the vicinity of loud noise, and workers working with or in crushing, compaction or concrete
mixing operations shall be provided necessary PPE such as ear plugs and ear muffs.
J. TRANSPORTING MATERIALS
Contractor will maintain all roads (existing or built for the project), which are used for transporting
construction materials, equipment and machineries. All vehicles delivering fine materials to the site will be
covered to avoid spillage of materials.
Transporting
All existing highways and roads used by vehicles of the contractor or any of his sub-contractor or suppliers
Construction
W.J.1 of materials and similarly roads, which are part of the works, will be kept clear of all dust/mud or other
Materials and Haul
extraneous materials dropped by such vehicles.
Road Management
Contractor will arrange for regular water sprinkling as necessary for dust suppression of all such roads and
surfaces.
The unloading of materials at construction sites in/close to settlements will be restricted to daytime only.
K. TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
The contractor will provide safe and convenient passage for vehicles, pedestrians and livestock to and from
roadsides and property accesses connecting the project road, providing temporary connecting road.
The contractor will also ensure that the existing accesses will not be undertaken without providing adequate
W.K.1 Accessibility provisions and to the prior satisfaction of PWD.
The contractor will take care that the cross roads are constructed in such a sequence that construction work
over the adjacent cross roads are taken up one after one so that traffic movement in any given area not get
affected much.

258
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

Temporary diversions will be constructed with the approval of the PWD.

Detailed Traffic Control Plans will be prepared and submitted to the PWD for approval, five days prior to
commencement of works on any section of road. The traffic control plans shall contain details of temporary
diversions, traffic safety arrangements for construction under traffic, details of traffic arrangement after
cessation of work each day, safety measures undertaken for transport of hazardous materials and
Planning for Traffic arrangement of flagmen.
W.K.2 Diversions and The contractor will provide specific measures for safety of pedestrians and workers at night as a part of
Detours traffic control plans. The contractor will ensure that the diversion/detour is always maintained in running
condition, particularly during the monsoon to avoid disruption to traffic flow.
The contractor will also inform local community of changes to traffic routes, conditions and pedestrian
access arrangements with assistance from PWD. The temporary traffic detours will be kept free of dust by
sprinkling of water three times a day and as required under specific conditions (depending on weather
conditions, construction in the settlement areas and volume of traffic).
The contractor will take all necessary measures for the safety of traffic during construction and provide,
erect and maintain such barricades, including signs, markings, flags, lights and flagmen as proposed in the
Traffic Control Plan/Drawings and as required by the PWD for the information and protection of traffic
Traffic and Safety, approaching or passing through the section of any existing cross roads.
W.K.3 Informatory Signs The contractor will ensure that all signs, barricades, pavement markings are provided as per the MoRTH
and Hoardings specifications. Before taking up of construction on any section of the existing lanes of the highway, a
Traffic Control Plan will be devised and implemented to the satisfaction of the PWD.
The contractor will provide, erect and maintain informatory/safety signs, hoardings written in English and
local language, wherever required or as suggested by the PWD.
L. LABOUR
Labor The contractor preferably will use unskilled labor drawn from local communities to give the maximum
W.L.1
Requirements benefit to the local community.
Personal Safety Contractor will provide:
W.L.2
Measures for • Protective footwear and protective goggles to all workers employed on mixing asphalt materials,

259
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

Labour cement, and lime mortars, concrete etc.

• Welder's protective eye-shields to workers who are engaged in welding works
• Protective goggles and clothing to workers engaged in Factories Act, 1948 stone breaking activities
and workers will be seated at sufficiently safe intervals
• Earplugs to workers exposed to loud noise, and workers working in crushing, compaction, or
concrete mixing operation.
• High visibility overalls particularly when working along the ROW.
• Hard hats / helmets when working with materials at heights or working inside trenches.
Adequate safety measures for workers during handling of materials at site are taken up.
The contractor will comply with all regulations regarding safe scaffolding, ladders, working
platforms, gangway, stairwells, excavations, trenches and safe means of entry and egress.
The contractor will comply with all the precautions as required for ensuring the safety of the workmen
as per the International Labor Organization (ILO) Convention No. 62 as far as those are applicable to
this contract.
The contractor will make sure that during the construction work all relevant provisions of the Factories
Act, 1948 and the Building and other Construction Workers (regulation of Employment and Conditions
of Services) Act, 1996 are adhered to.
The contractor will not employ any person below the age of 14 years for any work and no woman will
be employed on the work of painting with products containing lead in any form.
The contractor will also ensure that no paint containing lead or lead products is used except in the form
of paste or readymade paint.
Contractor will provide facemasks for use to the workers when paint is applied in the form of spray
or a surface having lead paint dry is rubbed and scrapped.
The Contractor will mark ‘hard hat’ and ‘no smoking ’ and other ‘high risk’ areas and enforce non-
compliance of use of PPE with zero tolerance. These will be reflected in the Construction Safety Plan to
be prepared by the Contractor during mobilization and will be approved by PWD.
W.L.3 First Aid The contractor will arrange for:

260
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

• A readily available first aid unit including an adequate supply of sterilized dressing materials and
appliances as per the Factories Rules in every work zone
• Availability of suitable transport at all times to take injured or sick person(s) to the nearest hospital
• Equipment and trained nursing staff at construction camp.
M. MISCELLANEOUS
The contractor will take all reasonable precautions to prevent danger to the workers and public from fire,
flood etc. resulting due to construction activities.
W.M.1 Risk Force Majeure The contractor will make required arrangements so that in case of any mishap all necessary steps can be
taken for prompt first aid treatment. Construction Safety Plan prepared by the Contractor will identify
necessary actions in the event of an emergency.

261
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

App 1100.3 Guidance on Oxbow Lands

7.1 General
In rural areas with the realignment of roads, land acquisition is required and “Oxbow” lands
can result from this process. This is the land in between the existing road and the new
alignment. The Government of Kerala owns the land and the PWD Chief Engineer have
delegated authority to use and manage this land in the public interest.

This land can be an opportunity to provide benefits for the road corridor and the community.
Oxbow lands can vary in length ranging from a few metres to a few kilometers with a
variable width of a few metres, which is unlikely to exceed 20 metres. As land is scarce in
Kerala, the remaining Oxbow lands provide an opportunity for public and private investment
to ultimately provide public benefit.

Each parcel of land will differ in size and context and the area suitable for only certain types
of activities. A preliminary needs analysis should be undertaken initially to identify and
establish the feasibility of options. A detailed plan can then be prepared.

7.2 Land Use Options

Options for the use of these lands could include:

• Traffic and transport related infrastructure - such as vehicle parking bays, lay bys,
safety billboards, bus bays, taxi ranks, bus shelters.
• Compensatory habitat - to replace trees that may have been removed during construction.
• Rest Area Facilities primarily for travelers and include basic facilities such as seating,
play area, signage and information.
• Comfort stops – these could be larger facilities to provide for recreation, rest, toilet and
food facilities.
• Commercial Facilities. These would be for primary use by commercial travelers
and include petrol.
• Local Parkland, Sport and Recreation and Entertainment spaces.
• Visual Amenity Improvement - by providing seating, landscaping, lighting, community
art and signage.
• Public utility purposes including Waste management facilities for collection.
• Tourism related activities - such as interpretation centres.
• Expand or complement existing adjoining property activities.

7.3 Key Issues and Opportunities

• Potential Income Generation: There is potential to generate economic benefit for

PWD through the lease, use or disposal of the land. The local municipality may also
have an interest in the land for purchase or lease.

• Capital Expenditure: The type of facilities provided will require capital investment.
Options to share in costs or for generating income to provide facilities should be
explored with relevant authorities and non-government organisations.

262
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

• Maintenance Costs: Depending upon the type of activity and the land tenure, the areas
may require ongoing expenditure for maintenance by PWD. Self financing options or
income generating activities should be explored where appropriate.

• Liaison with other Stakeholders: Consultation with the relevant stakeholders would
assist in the decision-making process for the planning, design and operation of the land.
This includes community representatives, concerned authorities such as the panchayet
and non-government organizations.

• Encroachments: Signs should clearly state the use of the site and the penalties for
encroachment. Encroachment enforcement should be carried out as per the Kerala
Highway Protection Act, 1999.

7.4 Guidelines

The development and use of this land should be considered by PWD in road planning,
design, construction and operation phases.

7.4.1 Stage 1: Planning and Site Analysis: Prepare a Concept Plan(s)

Each oxbow land area is to be considered on its merit. A Concept Plan should be prepared
at the same time as planning for the overall road project. Each site should be assessed before
a detailed design is prepared. The Concept Plan can show:

• Environmental characteristics of the land including its topography and significant

vegetation or environmental values that should be retained.
• Social characteristics of the land including any cultural values associated with the land,
the need for community facilities and services in that specific location.
• The relationship of the area land to adjoining areas and the type of uses adjoining the area.
• The size of the land.
• Access control and sight distance.

Consider other factors in developing options.

• The size of the area and the demand or need for rest stops or facilities in the area
identified (Refer: Tables 1 and 2).
• The need to provide compensatory habitat as a result of the road works.
• Any impact on personal or property safety for any activities proposed on the site.
• The need for tourism facilities, rest stops, local facilities such as parking, bus shelters
and laybys.
• Funding Sustainability.

This process will assist in deciding the best type of use for the site and the task can be
assigned by an assistant engineer with appropriate training.

Stage 2: Analysis

Based on the information from Stage 1, identify a range options for the use of the area.
Identify Criteria and weight the criteria according to their importance to the area and the
outcomes to the achieved. Each option can then be evaluated against the specified criteria to
select a preferred option. Criteria can include:
• Road Safety

263
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

• Pedestrian Amenity
• Public transport use
• Transport efficiency
• Land use/resource efficiency
• Cultural and Social Values
• Environmental Values
• Viability Sustainable funding or ongoing income generating economic returns.

Stage 3: Design and Implementation:

Prepare detailed design for the selected option on a Site plan/Landscape Plan/Strip Plan for
the area.

7.4.2 Stage 4: Specific Design Guidelines

Species should be planted in accordance with the Guidance for Landscaping Species unless
the land is used for agricultural purposes.

Buildings and structures must comply with relevant IRC Codes, building specifications
or relevant policies.

Safe access and egress should be provided generally using the existing road, which may
require reconfiguration to enhance safety.

Any proposal for facilities will require the preparation of a Planning Report, which considers
the implications of the proposal and also a site map this should include the following:

• Type of facilities, proposed operation of building, hours of operation

• Elevation and orientation of the proposed buildings
• A dimensioned plan showing the floor space area, height and relationship to
existing buildings
• Location and number of parking spaces
• Pedestrian access
• Signage
• Waste disposal facilities
• Lighting
• Utility connections
• Landscaping details
• Environmental and Social improvements

264
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Table 1: Typical type of Infrastructure and size for use of oxbow lands

Type of Average Average Infrastructure

Facility Size - Size -
Rural Urban
1 Rest Area 300m 100m Seating, tables, lighting, signage, play equipment
for children, fencing, landscaping, community
cultural feature, information display boards,
garbage bins, parking, bus shelter, layby

2 Comfort Stop 500m N/A All of the above including, potable water,
restaurants, limited retail facilities, toilets.
3 Commercial 500m 400m Service centres such as petrol stations, truck stops

4 Tourist Places 50m Seating, parking

3 Other Uses Planting, utility services, stockpile, weighbridges,

public uses, limited retail uses, parkland

Table 2: Spacing or Distance between Facilities

Type of
Facility
1 Rest Area One every 50 km in rural areas

2 Comfort Stop One every 70 km in rural areas

3 Commercial One every 100km in rural areas

4 Tourist Places As required

5 Other Uses Merits of the Site

265
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

App 1100.4.Guidance on Quarry and Borrow Area Management

7.5 Purpose

To avoid and manage the impact of activities associated with quarry and borrow areas on
the environment and affected community.

Some of the impacts of borrow areas and quarrying activities can include:

• Rock blasting can create air and noise pollution and vibration.
• Transport of material in trucks along roadways may create air and noise pollution.
• Excavated areas can provide places for water to pond and stagnate giving rise to the
breeding of mosquitoes and the spread of malaria and other mosquito borne diseases.
• Excavation can affect the natural beauty of the landscape along the road through the
removal of vegetation.
• Changes to the natural drainage pattern of the area.
• Loss of agricultural/productive soils especially paddy field areas due to borrow areas/Quarry.
• Digging of borrow areas within and along the proposed roadway.
• Improper management of the quarry/borrow area top soil.
• Over quarrying shall be avoided because of adverse impact on the ecology

These activities can have an affect on ecologically sensitive areas, the visual appearance of an
area and also impact on the health and wellbeing of communities living nearby. Management
measures should be used to avoid and minimize any impacts from quarry related activities.

The guidelines seek to ensure that the contractors and subcontractors:

• comply with the regulatory requirements in force at the time
• reasonably manage any impacts.
• reinstate and rehabilitate the land appropriately.
• consult with the affected community. Reference should also be made to the Policy
Guidelines for Public Hearing.

7.6 Guidelines

All works to be undertaken in accordance with relevant rules and legislation including IRC
guidelines and MORT&H specification (e.g. clauses111.2, 111.3, 305.2.2.2 and 305.3.3).

Quarry activities cannot commence until consent has been given in writing by the
Forest Department or other concerned authorities.

The Contractor will provide the Employer/Engineer with details of the location, size and shape
of borrow areas/quarry areas for written approval prior to opening the area.

Where specific borrow areas are not designated by the Employer/the Engineer, the Contractor
will be solely responsible for ensuring that the source of supply of material for embankment
and subgrade is carried out in accordance with environmental requirements for excavation and
borrow areas as stipulated, from time to time by the Ministry of Environment and Forests,
Government of India and the local bodies, as applicable.

266
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Topsoil shall not be unnecessarily trafficked either before stripping or when in a stockpile.
Stockpiles shall not be surcharged or otherwise loaded and multiple handling shall be kept
to a minimum.

Following excavation, the sides of excavated area shall be trimmed and the area contoured
to minimize erosion, subsidence and pounding, allowing for natural drainage to take place.

If trees were removed, new trees shall be planted, as directed by the Engineer. Additional
borrow pits should not be opened without the restoration of those areas no longer in use.

Borrow areas are not permitted to be located in the paddy fields or other agricultural areas.

The contractor is to prepare a Borrow and Quarry Area Management Plan and include
the following details:

• Name.
• Location.
• Size of the Quarry or Borrow area.
• Ownership of the borrow or Quarry area. Whether purchased or leased. Include a
signed statement of approval from the owner giving approval for the works.
• State the proposed Activities including:
Approximate quantity and type of the material available.
Approximate depth of excavation required to obtain the material.
Whether the depth and cut slope are as per IRC guidelines?
The number, species type, location and maturity of trees to be
removed. Quantities of top soil removed.
Location of storage of top soil.
Estimated daily truck movements.
• Existing land use of the area (including the access road to be developed) to be quarried.
• The relationship to adjoining areas including whether it is located near to ecologically
sensitive area, proximity to residential areas? Specify the nature and approximate
distance from the proposed quarry or borrow area.
• Include details of the safety precautions to be used during quarry operation to
protect workers, the environment and the public.
• Proposed plan for the reuse of top soil.
• Methods used to reduce air (e.g. dust from trucks) and noise pollution during operation.
• Methods for the proper drainage of water.
• Offset form the TOE of the Roadway.
• Distance from the adjacent borrow area.
• A Restoration Plan indicating the location, type and number of trees that will be planted,
the method to rehabilitate the access road, the landscaping plans for the borrow or quarry
area and the maintenance program that will be implemented to ensure the proposed works
are properly maintained following completion of the project.
• The action plan for leveling and landscaping in order to bring the area in conformity to
the neighbouring land uses.
• The quality of the proposed borrow materials shall be determined and approved prior to use.

267
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Format 1

7.7 BORROW AREAS IDENTIFICATION

(To be completed by the Contractor)

Pre-Construction Stage Report-Date ... ... ... ... ... .. Month ... ... ... ... .. Year... .

Site Layout of Borrow Area and Proposed Borrow Area Rehabilitation Plan are required
to be attached with format. Format to be submitted before target date as (decided by PWD) for
establishing Quarries Area No. BA.

Location of Borrow Area (KM) ... ... ... ...(RHS/LHS) Package ... ... ... ... ... ...
SL. No. ITEM UNIT DETAILS REMARKS
1 Date of Borrow Area becoming
Operational dd/mm/yy
2 Current Land use
3 No of settlements within 500m of
Borrow Area nos
4 Distance from the ecologically sensitive km
area
5 Offset from the ROW m
6 Total Capacity cum
7 No of Trees with girth more than nos
0.3 cms
8 Details of the plan for re-plantation
9 Length of Haul Road km
10 Width of Haul road m
11 Type of Haul Road metal/dirt .
12 No of settlements within 200m of
Haul Road nos
13 Size of Borrow Area sqkm
14 Area of Borrow Area kmxkm
15 Depth of Borrow area m
16 Cut slope as specifications Yes/No
17 Quantity Available cum
18 Dist of Nearest Water Source Type / Size/
Capacity/
Present
Use/ Ownership
19 Quantity of top soil removed cum
20 Details of storage of topsoil
21 Details of the plan for the reuse of top soil
22 Details of the arrangement for proper
drainage.
Certified that the furnished information is correct and all relevant information as required
is attached.
Contractor_____________ PWD Engineer

268
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Format 2

QUARRY SOURCE IDENTIFICATION

(To be completed by the Contractor)
Pre-Construction Stage Report-Date... ... ... ... .. Month ... ... ... ... ... .. Year... ... ... ... ...

Site Layout of Quarry and Proposed Quarry Re-habilitation Plan to be attached with
format. Format to be submitted before target date quarries as (decided by the PWD) for
establishing Quarry No.Q

Location of Quarry (Km) (RHS/LHS) Package

SL. No ITEM UNIT DETAILS REMARKS
1 Location Ch
2 Distance from ecologically sensitive area km
3 License no
4 License Valid till Date
5 Size of Quarry mxm
6 Quantity Available Cum
7 Proposed depth m
8 Total Capacity Cum
9 No of Settlements within 500m of Quarry Nos
10 Width of Haul road M
11 Type of Haul Road Metalled/dirt
12 Length of Haul Road Sqkm
13 No of Settlements within 500m of Haul Name
14 Road
15 Distance from Nearest Water Source Type/Distance
16 Whether Crusher Plant located on Site Yes/No
17 Details of the safety precautions during
blasting.
18 Whether local people are aware of the Yes/No
proposed quarry ?
19 Quantity of top soil removed
20 Details of the storage of top soil
21 Plan for the reuse of top soil
22 Details of the arrangement for proper
drainage

Certified that the furnished information is correct and all relevant information as required
is attached.

Contractor PWD Engineer

269
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

App 1100.5.Guidance on Landscaping & Tree Species

7.8 General

Purpose: The purpose of this policy is to provide a list of species that can be used in
landscaping for road purposes. Planting is an important part of the road network and can be
used as a tool to improve roadside appearance and also to moderate driver behaviour.

Planting is an important part of the road network. It offers an opportunity to:

• Enhance the visual appearance of an area
• Provide shade and shelter for pedestrians
• Improve local air quality and micro-climate
• Reduce soil erosion
• Increase flora and fauna habitat
• Modify vehicle speeds and driver and pedestrian behaviour

The PWD prefers species that have some or all of the following attributes:
• Are indigenous to the area and can be sourced and grown locally
• Provide weather protection
• Require low maintenance and low water consuming
• Are low hazard to people and property
• Enhance the quality of the environment or streetscape
• Will not interfere with utility services

The type of species selected will also depend upon the location of the site, the purpose of
the planting and how the space will be used. For example:
• Pedestrian Streetscape Planting
• Median Planting
• Visual Amenity/Thematic
• Waterway Planting
• Noise Barrier and Access Restriction Planting (State and National Highways)
• Planting in Rural Areas

7.9 The Process

A Landscape Plan should be prepared for projects either as a separate document or as part of
an ESAMP. A Concept Plan may be prepared initially, based on a preliminary analysis of the
site conditions and the future use of the site. A more detailed Landscape Plan is required when
the concept is finalised and should include relevant supporting information. The Landscape
Plan should include a Title block with details including date, scale and revision number,
dimensioned plan of the site, the proposed location and type of species and the relationship of
the site to adjoining areas and the species within those areas. Supporting documentation is to
include a site analysis, species selection analysis, detailed species list, proposed maintenance
management plan and any other information necessary to justify that the use of landscaping,
tree planting and rehabilitation options have been selected to best meet the needs of the specific
project. (Suggest that PWD draft A Guideline on how to prepare a Landscape Plan for
inclusion in the Code and Manual. Until then, it is recommended to retain this clause).

270
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Removal of any vegetation should comply with relevant statutory requirements including
the Kerala Preservation of Trees Act (1986) which lists species that are not to be removed
without first securing permission.

7.10 Tree plantation guidelines

The following guidelines need to be adhered:

On State Highways, planting should be avoided within 3 metres of the edge of the carriageway.
Beyond 3 metres, planting may be provided where the girth of the trunk of the tree/shrub is
less than 300mm at maturity and where it satisfies other relevant specified criteria. In areas of
high risk, such as the outer edges of high speed curves, all planting should be avoided within
10 metres of the edge of the carriageways. Reason: Life Safety
Species are to be planted and maintained in accordance with nursery recommendations. Reason:
Plant survival
Large trees should not be planted in locations, such as road corners, where a loss of
vehicle control could result in a severe accident. Reason: Life Safety
High canopy or low shrubs species should be planted to provide visibility in areas where sight
distance may be obscured or to achieve personal safety and security. Reason: Maintain
Sight Distance – safety, personal safety.
Select species that integrate and complement existing indigenous species and could improve
vegetation corridors. Reason: Visual integration and Enhance Habitat Corridor
Where theme planting is required, select a few dominant species and replicate their use
through the streetscape to create a visual rhythm. Reason: Visual enhancement
In urban areas, due to narrow carriageway widths, roadside planting may not be appropriate.
Planting for Medians, traffic islands, traffic management measures, roundabout planting
with fencing can be promoted where it does not obscure sight distance or create a traffic
hazard. Reason: Pedestrian safety and Capacity
For median planting, shrubs should generally not exceed 60 cm in height and should be spaced
in accordance with plant specifications. Reason: Visibility
Plant species should be selected that avoid impacts on utility services and the roadway. For
example potential root damage to underground pipes and pavements and interference
with above ground services such as powerlines due to height. Reason: Avoiding
Disruption to Services
The potential impact on human health and well being such as respiratory ailments caused
by flowering species, is to be considered in species selection. Reason: Human Health
The propagation and use of native seeds collected from the local site or district is to be
promoted. Reason: Species Health
The type, location and spacing of species is appropriate for the road speed environment. For
example shrubs and small trees could be used in a village area as a tool to reduce driver
speeds, manage parking allocation and alter pedestrian behaviour. Reason: Modify road
user behaviour
For large tracts of land consultation is recommended with the Forestry Department regarding
the opportunities associated with mass planting. Reason: Compensatory habitat and
Carbon Sequestration.
The planting of productive food producing plants, such as coconut palms or herbs is promoted
in appropriate locations such as certain oxbow lands only if effective management
measures can be implemented. Reason: Food Supply
Adequate watering shall be made available during the contract and maintenance period

271
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Specific Landscaping contracts for routine maintenance and watering of

medians/islands/oxbow lands may be implemented

7.11 Species List

Table A includes a List of Species Indigenous to Kerala. Examples of species that can be
considered are listed below by their Scientific Name, Common Name and Malayalam
name. Other species may also be suitable and the reasons for their use justified in the
supporting information accompanying the Landscape Plan.

7.12 Other Considerations

Aspects to consider in the selection of species also includes:
• whether fruit or limbs will impact on pedestrians or vehicles
• size at maturity and ultimate girth size
• life span of the species and replacement
• attraction of fauna
• shade and shelter potential
• visual interest
• potential interference with drainage or services or other structures
• irrigation requirements
• personal safety and security
• impact on human health e.g. respiratory
• potential carbon sequestration
• dust and pollution tolerance
Longer Term Suggestions:
Develop Policy Guidelines for Landscape Planning if they do not already exist with reference
to more detailed landscape and planting elements including:
• Standard work items
• Payment for landscaping
• Landscape establishment timeframe
• Material type and requirements
• Plant Supply – suppliers, plant specifications, ord ering
• Mulching e.g. organic mulch
• Weed Control
• Erosion Control e.g. matting
• Garden Edge Materials e.g. concrete, paving materials
• Irrigation
• Seeding e.g. seed type, watering
• Planting Layout e.g. stakes
• Surface preparation e.g. tilling, cultivation
• Maintenance requirements and program e.g. pruning, pest management, drainage

272
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

7.13 Table A: Species List

Malayalam
Sl.No. Botanical Name Name Trade/Popular Name Habit/Nature Sutability Character
1 Acalipha brachystachya Acalipha Evergreen Bet.1200-1800 above Sea level Ornamental Shrub (2-5m tall)
2 Acalipha ciliata " Temperate Ornamental Shrub (2-5m tall)
3 Acalipha dalzillii " Tropical Ornamental Shrub (2-5m tall)
4 Acalipha hispida " Sub-tropical Ornamental Shrub (2-5m tall)
5 Araucaria cookie Araucaria Evergreen Sea coast to mid-hills Ornamental,Shade, Landscape
6 Azadirachta Indica Aryaveppu Neem Evergreen All over Kerala Multi purpose (Tree)
7 Alstonia Scholaris Ezhilampala Shaitan wood/Devils Tree Tropical Shade, Ornamental Tree
8 Anthocephalus Chinensis Kadambu Kadamba Evergreen Coastal areas Shade, Ornamental Tree
9 Agathis robusta Kauri Coniferous Ornamental,Landscape
10 Buettneria herbacea Rudraksham Cedar Plains and Valleys Shrub, Ornamental, Landscape
11 Butea monosperma Plasu, Chamatha Flame of the Forest Deciduous Wastelands, Waterlogged areas Landscape Tree
12 Bauhinia Purpurea Bauhinia Evergreen Plains and Valleys Avenue,Ornamental,Road sideTree
13 Bauhinia variegata Kachnar/Mt. ebony Deciduous Subtropical up to 800m above sea Avenue,Ornamental,Road sideTree
14 Barleria cristata Barleria Evergreen Tropical,Subtropical,hills Hedge,Dwarf tree
15 Chloroxylon swietenia Varimaram Satin wood Shade, Ornamental Tree
16 Chassalia cirviflora Vellakurunji Ornamental Shrub
17 Cinnamomum sulphuratum Vazhana Landscape Tree
18 Caesalpinia pulcherrinia Rajamalli Pride of Barbados Avenue,Ornamental,Road sideTree
19 Calophyllum inophyllum Punna Alexandrian Laurel Shade, Ornamental Tree
20 Cllistemon lanceolatus Bottle brush Evergreen Plains and Valleys Avenue,Ornamental,Road sideTree
21 Cassia Fistula Kanikonna Amaltas Deciduous Plains and Valleys Avenue,Ornamental,Road sideTree
22 Cestrum nocturmum Night Jasmine Evergreen Valleys,Low hills Shrub,Ornamental, Landscape
23 Cupressus spp. Cupressus Evergreen Low hills(bushes or small trees Landscape, border, Wind break
24 Delonix regia Gulmohar Gulmohar Evergreen All over Kerala Landscape Tree
25 Duranta plumieri Duranta Evergreen Warm regions Ornamental long lasting bush
26 Eugenia Cuspidata Berg Jamao Evergreen Moist areas Avenue,Ornamental,Road sideTree
27 Erythroxylon monogynum Velladevadarum BastaRoad Sandal Ornamental,Avenue tree
28 Elaeocarpus tuberculatus Amukkaram Rudrak Avenue,Ornamental,Road sideTree
29 Euphorbia royacana Thor Evergreen Waste lnd dev,Shrub
30 Ervatamia gamblei All over Kerala Good foliage & Landscape Tree
31 Ficus robusta Rubber plant tree Evergreen Moist subtropical to tropical Ornamental, Landscaping tree
32 Grevillea robusta Silver oak Deciduous Subtrop 0 to 2300 m abv sea Avenue,Ornamental,Road sideTree

273
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

33 Garcinia morella Pachilamaram Indian Gamboge Avenue,Ornamental,Road sideTree

34 Helicters isora Valmpiri East Ind Screw Tree Shrub,Ornamental, Landscape
35 Humboldtia vahliana Attuvanchi Riverside etc Ornamental, Landscaping tree
36 Humboldtia decurrens Shade, Ornamental Tree
37 Hamelia patens Avenue,Ornamental,Road sideTree
38 Homskioldia sanguinea Avenue,Ornamental,Road sideTree
39 Carallia bracteata Avenue,Ornamental,Road sideTree
40 Jacaranda mimosaefolia Jacaranda Evergreen Valleys,Low hills Avenue,Ornamental,Road sideTree
41 Largestroemia reginae Manimaruthu Queen's Flower All over Kerala Landscape, Road side tree
42 Largestroemia microcarpa Venteak Naked maiden of forest All over Kerala Road side tree
43 Melia azedarach Malaveppu Malabar neem Central and Northern Kerala Road side tree
44 Murraya Paniculata Hedge,topiary, road edges. Tree
45 Michelia champaca Champakam All over Kerala Avenue,Ornamental,Road sideTree
46 Mimusops elenji Elenji All over Kerala Avenue,Ornamental,Road sideTree
47 Millingtonia hortensis Indian Cork tree All over Kerala Road side (arbori culture) tree
48 Murraya exotica Kamini Evergreen Warm Subtropical areas Ornamental small tree
49 Nerium Oleander Arali Roadside,Avenue planting Shrub
50 Ochroma Pyramidale Balsa Balsa All over Kerala Road side planting
51 Olea europea Olive Olive Evergreen Cold valleys Avenue,wind break,Road sideTree
52 Optunia spp. Nagphani Evergreen Tropical,Dry areas Waste lnd dev,Shrub
53 Plumeria rubra Arali Pagoda tree Avenue, tree/shrub
54 Populus ciliata wall. Poplar Deciduous All over Kerala Road side, soil conservation etc
55 Pongamia pinnata Punku/Vangu Evergreen All over Kerala Ornamental tree
56 Peltrophorum pterocarpum Chakkarakonna Yellow flame Evergreen All over Kerala Roadside shade tree
57 Pisonia alba Marakkera Lettuce tree Coastal areas Ornamental shrub
58 Pandanus odoratissimus Thazhampoo All over Kerala Landscape (20 feet)
59 Robinia psuedoacacia Black Locust Deciduous All over Kerala Avenue, Wood is decay resistant
60 Rawolfia macropylla Evergreen All over Kerala Road side, good foliage
61 Saraca indica Linn. Asokam Asok Evergreen Mild climatic conditions Ornamental and avenue
62 Sesbenia grandiflora Poir Agasty Agastya/Sesban Deciduous Coastal, Subtropical Ornamental, Landscape tree
63 Spathodia campanulata Tulip Tree Evergreen All over Kerala Shade, Avenue, Landscape tree
64 Swietenia Mahogani Cheria mahogany Mahogany All over Kerala Shade Tree
65 Swietenia macrophylla Mahogany Mahogany All over Kerala Shade Tree
66 Syzygium jambos Panineerchamba Evergreen All over Kerala Avenue, Road side planting
67 Syzygium wightianum Thoosivazhana Evergreen Valleys,Low hills Roadside planting
68 Stereospermum suaveolens Pathiri Padri Evergreen All over Kerala Avenue, Ornamental
69 Salix tetrasperma Vanchi Indain Willow Deciduous Tropical, Valley areas Riverside, Wind break,

274
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

70 Thespesia populnia.Soland Poovarasu Bhendi/Portia tree Deciduous Coastal/All over Keral Road side planting
71 Terminalia Catappa Badam Badam All over Kerala Road side, Shade tree
72 Terminalia Crenulata Thempavu Kindal All over Kerala Road side, Shade tree
73 Tectona grandis Teak Teak All over Kerala Road side, Avenue
74 Tabernae montana Coronaria All over Kerala Road edges
75 Tecoma gaudi chaudi Tecoma Evergreen All over Kerala Road edges (Shrub)
76 Tamarix articulata Vahl Pala Deciduous Dry areas Wind break, Shelter, Road side
77 Terminalia Arjuna Bedd. Arjuna Evergreen Near water coarses Shade Tree, Landscape
78 Thuja occidentalis Thuja Thuja Evergreen Subtropical, Tropical Foliage, wind break, Shade
79 Wrightia tinctoria Danthappala Ivory wood Valleys,Low hills Shade tree
80 Zamia pumila-Zamiaceae Good for road islands(Shrub)

275
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

App 1100.6. Guidance on Public Consultations

General principles

1 Consultation should be Consultation should be undertaken as early as

undertaken as early as possible before the project starts. The need for
possible information prior to any formal consultation should
be considered. Each circle should prepare a profile
of the community which shows the demographic
profile, groups, cultures, issues etc. Particularly for
face to face consultation such as workshops, the
following is recommended:
• Establish protocols for conducting the
consultation (e.g. respect the views of all people
even if you don’t agree, only one person to talk at
a time, max)
• Explain the project/issue
• Outline of the role of the stakeholders in the
overall decision-making process
• Identify the key stakeholder issues
• Outline the proposed consultation process
• Approve the consultation schedule
2 The decision-making Consider using an independent person to conduct the
process should be consultation
transparent Outline the roles of the decision-makers and the
status of stakeholder inputs
Clarify the scope of the consultation discussion e.g.
issues related only to that project
Document input received and allow participants to
access the inputs if required
Record and document all actions
Consider developing criteria with stakeholders to
weigh up or rank the most important issues
Feedback to the stakeholders on the outcomes of the
consultation process and how their input has been
incorporated or why their input was not incorporated
Use recognized or auditable processes for
information distribution such as press release, media
conference,
Consider establishing a reference group (which
includes external stakeholders) to oversee
implementation of the consultation plan
3 Allow sufficient time for Adequate time should be provided to allow
stakeholders to stakeholders to participate in the consultation process
participate process e.g. 10 days notice. Adjust the Consultation activities
(type, timeframe and location of consultation) to suit
the local needs. Consider the following:
• how accessible it is for stakeholders to
participate e.g. district or panchayat
• will the time of day and day of the week affect

276
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

participation e.g. Sunday

• any cultural activities, holiday periods or public
events
• Advise stakeholders of any changes to the
proposed schedule.
4 The process should Identify all relevant stakeholders who are genuinely
facilitate participation by interested in or affected by the proposed project.
all relevant stakeholders This could include:
Affected property owners; occupants; business,
institutions; government and non-government
agencies; Elected Representatives; Transport user
groups; Media; Special interest groups (environment,
educational, industry or representatives of cultural
properties).
Consider the input of people with special needs or
interests such as children, visually impaired or
physically less mobile, low literacy or women.
Find ways of including them in the consultation
process
5 Sufficient information Access to background information increases
should be made available understanding and can better inform stakeholder
about the project, issue or input. In preparing the Communications Plan,
activity to inform input consider how participants will be able to get access
by stakeholders information easily. Use diagrams, maps, drawings
and easy to understand concepts if possible when
preparing materials. Examples include:
• Internet e.g. PWD Web Portal
• Newspaper advertisements
• Flyers in shops and offices
• Telephone recorded message
• Newsletter or letter
• NGO’s or other representative groups

6 Comments should be Develop a stakeholder register listing the participants

recorded in a database name and contact details (as agreed) and issues of
and considered in the concern or suggestions. The register can be used as a
decision-making process base document for the decision-maker to complete and
respond to the issues identified, record all views,
acknowledge different view points, try to create an
environment that makes people feel comfortable
get professional advice if necessary e.g.
dispute resolution

7 Respond to all comments Respond to each comment and state if and how it is to
and document be addressed by the decision maker. This information
should be made available for participants to provide
for transparency in decision-making.

8 Feedback to stakeholders Feedback helps participants gain a better

on the final decision understanding. They also feel they have been
listened to and their concerns considered. It is not
always possible to address all concerns, so the extent

277
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

to which comments or concerns have been addressed

should also be fed back to the stakeholders. This
process builds trust in the community and is
important for maintaining the profile of PWD. Similar
methods can be used to feedback to the community as
it was to get their input.

278
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 1100.7. Guidance for preparing management measures where project-specific EMP are required

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Issue

PS.P. PRE-CONSTRUCTION STAGE

The acquisition of land and private properties will be carried out in accordance with the Resettlement
Action Plan (RAP) and entitlement framework for the project.
PS.P.1 Land Acquisition
PWD has to ascertain that any additional environmental impacts resulting from acquisition of land shall be
addressed and integrated into the EMP and other relevant documents.
All Resettlement & Rehabilitation (R&R) activities will be undertaken in accordance with the RAP
document. It will be ensured that all R&R activities including environmental management plan preparation
EMP preparation
are completed before the construction activity starts, on any section of ROW of existing road and/or
PS.P.2 for Resettlement
proposed new bypasses.
Sites
EMPs for the Resettlement Site will be prepared in consultation with the concerned community. Plans will
include specific actions in relation to health, hygiene and plantation
All efforts will be made to preserve trees including evaluation of minor design adjustments/alternatives (as
applicable) to save trees. Specific attention will be given for protecting giant trees, green tunnels and locally
important trees (religiously important etc.).
Tree cutting is to proceed only after all the legal requirements including attaining of In-principle and
Formal Clearances from the Forest Dept./DoEF/MoEF are completed and subsequently a written order is
Preservation of
PS.P.3 issued to the Contractor.
Trees
Particular species declared as ‘protected’ by the S tate’s Forest Dept. in the private land will be felled only
after due clearance from the Forest Dept. is obtained.
In the event of design changes, additional assessments including the possibility to save trees shall be made.
Stacking, transport and storage of the wood will be done as per the relevant norms.
Systematic corridor level documentation for the trees cut and those saved will be maintained by the PWD.
Relocation of All community utilities and properties i.e., water supply lines, sewer lines, bank buildings, health centers,
Community schools, health clinics and veterinary hospitals will be relocated before construction starts, on any section of
PS.P.4 Utilities and the project corridor. The PWD will relocate these properties in consultation and written agreement with the
Common Property agency/ owner/community. The schools and health centers will be constructed as per the relevant state
Resources norms.

279
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Issue

All other community property resources within the corridor of impact such as hand pumps, ponds, grazing
lands etc. will be relocated.
The relocation sites for these schools will be identified in accordance with the choice of the community.
Environmental considerations with suitable/required actions including health and hygiene aspects will be
kept in mind while relocating all community utilities and resources.
All religious property resources such as shrines, temples and mosques within the project zone will be
relocated.
Sites for the relocation of these religious structures will be identified in accordance with the choice of the
Relocation of
community. The NGO and PWD in consultation with local people will finalize design of these temples. As
affected Cultural
PS.P.5 far as possible, the architectural elements of the structure should be conserved/reflected/translated into the
and Religious
design of new structures.
Properties
The entire process (i.e. selection of relocation sites and designs) will be under supervision of Environmental
Expert of Supervision Consultants / Environment Cell of PWD. The relocation will be completed before
the construction starts in these sites.
The Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD and the Contractor will carry out joint field
Joint Field
verification to ascertain the possibility to saving trees, environmental and community resources.
Verification to
The verification exercise should assess the need for additional protection measures or changes in
PS.P.6. assess the need to
design/scale/nature of protection measures including the efficacy of enhancement measures suggested in the
modify the contract
EMP. Proper documentation and justifications/reasons shall be maintained in all such cases where deviation
documents
from the original EMP is proposed.
Assessment of
Impacts due to
The Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD will assess impacts and revise/modify the
Changes/Revisions/
PS.P.7 EMP and other required sections of the project document/s in the event of changes/revisions (including
Additions due to
addition or deletion) in the project’s scope of work.
PS.P.6 in the
Project Work
Hot mix plants and batching plants will be sited sufficiently away from settlements and agricultural
Crushers, hot-mix
operations or any commercial establishments. Such plants will be located at least 150 m away from the
PS.P.8 plants and Batching
nearest village/settlement preferably in the downwind direction.
Plants Location
The Contractor shall submit a detailed lay-out plan for all such sites and approval of Environmental Expert

280
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Issue

of SC / Environment Cell of PWD shall be necessary prior to their establishment.

Arrangements to control dust pollution through provision of wind screens, sprinklers, dust encapsulation
will have to be provided at all such sites.
Specifications of crushers, hot mix plants and batching plants will comply with the requirements of the
relevant current emission control legislations and Consent/NOC for all such plants shall be submitted to the
SC and PWD.
The Contractor shall not initiate plant/s operation till the required legal clearances are obtained and
submitted.
All vehicles, equipment and machinery to be procured for construction will confirm to the relevant Bureau
of India Standard (BIS) norms. The discharge standards promulgated under the Environment Protection
Other Construction Act, 1986 will be strictly adhered to.
Vehicles, Noise limits for construction equipments to be procured such as compactors, rollers, front loaders concrete
PS.P.9
Equipment and mixers, cranes (moveable), vibrators and saws will not exceed 75 dB (A), measured at one meter from the
Machinery edge of the equipment in free field, as specified in the Environment (Protection) Rules, 1986.
The Contractor shall maintain a record of PUC for all vehicles and machinery used during the contract
period.
Finalizing borrow areas for borrowing earth and all logistic arrangements as well as compliance to
environmental requirements, as applicable, will be the sole responsibility of the contractor.
The Contractor will not start borrowing earth from select borrow area until the formal agreement is signed
between land owner and contractor and a copy is submitted to the SC and the PWD.
Locations finalized by the contractor shall be reported to the Environmental Expert of SC / Environment
Cell of PWD and who will in turn report to PWD. Format for reporting will be as per the Reporting Format
for Borrow Area and will include a reference map.
PS.P.10 Borrow Areas
Planning of haul roads for accessing borrow materials will be undertaken during this stage. The haul roads
shall be routed to avoid agricultural areas as far as possible (in case such a land is disturbed, the Contractor
will rehabilitate it as per Borrow Area Rehabilitation Guidelines) and will use the existing village roads
wherever available.
In addition to testing for the quality of borrow materials by the SC, the environmental personnel of the SC
will be required to inspect every borrow area location prior to approval (follow criteria for evaluation of
borrow areas).

281
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Issue

Contractor will work out proper haulage network for transportation of fly ash from plant to project site. If
any village road is identified for transportation of fly ash, the road will be improved before starting the
transport work.
The haul road will avoid using agricultural land (in case such a land is disturbed, the Contractor will
PS.P.11 Fly Ash rehabilitate it as per Borrow Area Rehabilitation Guidelines) and try to use the existing road network of the
area wherever possible.
The contractor will consult the Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD before finalizing
the haulage network and also take necessary approval from the expert. SC in turn report to the PWD before
giving final approval to the contractor.
Contractor will finalize the quarry for procurement of construction materials after assessment of the
availability of sufficient materials and other logistic arrangements.
In case the contractor decides to use quarries other than recommended by DPR consultants, then it will be
selected based on the suitability of the materials.
PS.P.12 Quarry The contractor will procure necessary permission for procurement of materials from Mining Department,
District Administration and State Pollution Control Board and shall submit a copy of the approval and the
rehabilitation plan to the PWD and Environmental Expert of the SC.
Contractor will also work out haul road network and report to Environmental Expert of SC / Environment
Cell of PWD and SC will inspect and in turn report to PWD before approval.
The contractor will use ground water as a source of water for the construction and will set up the own bore
well facility for construction work.
Contractor can use the ponds, which are not in use by community or identified to fill up for the project, but
in that case, before using any pond water contractor will obtain written consent from the owner and submit
then to SC.
Arrangement for To avoid disruption/disturbance to other water users, the contractor will extract water from fixed locations
PS.P.13
Construction Water and consult the Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD before finalizing the locations.
The Contractor will provide a list of locations and type of sources from where water for construction will be
used.
The contractor will not be allowed to pump from any irrigation canal and surface water bodies used by
community.
The contractor will need to comply with the requirements of the State Ground Water Department and seek

282
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Issue

their approval for doing so and submit copies of the permission to SC and PWD.
Labor The contractor preferably will use unskilled labor drawn from local communities to give the maximum
PS.P.14
Requirements benefit to the local community.
Siting of the construction camps will be as per the guidelines below. Locations identified by the contractor
will report as per format given.
Construction camps will not be proposed within 500 m from the nearest settlements to avoid conflicts and
Construction Camp stress over the infrastructure facilities with the local community.
Locations – Location for stockyards for construction materials will be identified at least 200 m from water courses.
PS.P.15
Selection, Design The waste disposal and sewage system for the camp will be designed, built and operated such that no odor
and Lay-out is generated.
Unless otherwise arranged by the local sanitary authority, arrangements for disposal of night soils (human
excreta) suitably approved by the local medical health or municipal authorities or as directed by
Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD will have to be provided by the contractor.
The contractor as per prevalent rules will carry out negotiations with the landowners for obtaining their
Arrangements for
consent for temporary use of lands for construction sites/hot mix plants/traffic detours/borrow areas etc.
PS.P.16 Temporary Land
The Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD will be required to ensure that the clearing up
Requirement
of site prior to handing over to the owner (after construction or its completion) is included in the contract.
Orientation of The PWD shall organize orientation sessions and regular training sessions during all stages of the project.
Implementing This shall include on-site training (general as well as in the specific context of a sub-project). These
PS.P.17
Agency and sessions shall involve all staff of Environmental Cells, field level implementation staff of PWD,
Contractors Environmental Experts of SCs and Contractors.

283
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

PS.C. CONSTRUCTION STAGE

Vegetation will be removed from the construction zone before commencement of construction. All works
will be carried out such that the damage or disruption to flora other than those identified for cutting is
minimal.
Only ground cover/shrubs that impinge directly on the permanent works or necessary temporary works will
Clearing and be removed with prior approval from the Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD.
PS.C.1
Grubbing The contractor, under any circumstances will not cut or damage trees. Trees identified under the project will
be cut only after receiving clearance from the Forest Dept./DoEF/MoEF (as applicable) and after the receipt
of PWD’s written permission in this regard.
Vegetation only with girth of over 30 cm will be considered as trees and shall be compensated, in the event
of PWD’s instruction to undertake tree cutting.
Debris generated due to the dismantling of the existing road will be suitably reused in the proposed
construction, subject to the suitability of the materials and approval of the SC and Environmental Expert of
SC / Environment Cell of PWD as follows:
The sub grade of the existing pavement shall be used as embankment fill material.
The existing base and sub-base material shall be recycled as sub-base of the haul road or access roads
The existing bitumen surface may be utilized for the paving of cross roads, access roads and paving works
in construction sites and campus, temporary traffic diversions, haulage routes etc.
Generation of
The contractor will suitably dispose off unutilized debris materials either through filling up of borrow areas
Debris from
located in wasteland or at pre-designated disposal locations, subject to the approval of the Environmental
PS.C.2 dismantling
Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD.
structures and
At locations identified for disposal of residual bituminous wastes, the disposal will be carried out over a 60
road surface
mm thick layer of rammed clay so as to eliminate the possibility of leaching of wastes into the ground
water. The contractor will ensure that the surface area of such disposal pits is covered with a layer of soil.
All arrangements for transportation during construction including provision, maintenance, dismantling and
clearing debris, will be considered incidental to the work and will be planned and implemented by the
contractor as approved and directed by the Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD.
The pre-designed disposal locations will be a part of Comprehensive Solid Waste Management Plan to be
prepared by Contractor in consultation and with approval of Environmental Expert of SC / Environment

284
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

Cell of PWD.
Debris generated from pile driving or other construction activities shall be disposed such that it does not
flow into the surface water bodies or form mud puddles in the area.
The contractor shall identify dumping sites. The identified locations will be reported to the Environmental
Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD. These locations will be checked on site and accordingly
approved by Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD prior to any disposal of waste
materials.

The pre-identified disposal locations will be a part of Comprehensive Waste Disposal Solid Waste
Management Plan to be prepared by the Contractor in consultation and with approval of Environmental
Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD. Location of disposal sites will be finalized prior to completion
of the earthworks on any particular section of the road.
The Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD will approve these disposal sites after
conducting a joint inspection on the site with the Contractor.
Contractor will ensure that any spoils of material unsuitable for embankment fill will not be disposed off
Other near any water course, agricultural land, and natural habitat like grass lands or pastures. Such spoils from
Construction excavation can be used to reclaim borrow pits and low-lying areas located in barren lands along the project
Wastes corridors (is so desired by the owner/community).
PS.C.3
Disposal No fly ash will be disposed in any disposal site. Contractor will take care of residual fly ash, if any that
including Fly remains after construction work. Either this will be returned to the source or used in construction of
Ash embankment elsewhere with proper protection measures. SC will keep strict vigil on this aspect.
Non-bituminous wastes other than fly ash may be dumped in borrow pits (preferably located in barren
lands) covered with a layer of the soil. No new disposal site shall be created as part of the project, except
with prior approval of the Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD.
All waste materials will be completely disposed and the site will be fully cleaned and certified by
Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD before handing over.

The contractor at its cost shall resolve any claim, arising out of waste disposal or any non-compliance that

285
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

may arise on account of lack of action on his part.

The top soil from all areas of cutting and all areas to be permanently covered will be stripped to a specified
depth of 150 mm and stored in stockpiles. A portion of the temporarily acquired area and/or Right of Way
will be earmarked for storing topsoil. The locations for stock piling will be pre-identified in consultation
and with approval of Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD. The following
precautionary measures will be taken to preserve them till they are used:
(a) Stockpile will be designed such that the slope does not exceed 1:2 (vertical to horizontal), and height of
the pile is restricted to 2 m. To retain soil and to allow percolation of water, the edges of the pile will be
protected by silt fencing.
Stripping,
(b) Stockpiles will not be surcharged or otherwise loaded and multiple handling will be kept to a minimum
stocking and
PS.C.4 to ensure that no compaction will occur. The stockpiles shall be covered with gunny bags or vegetation.
preservation of
(c) It will be ensured by the contractor that the top soil will not be unnecessarily trafficked either before
top soil
stripping or when in stockpiles.
Such stockpiled topsoil will be utilized for -
covering all disturbed areas including borrow areas (not those in barren areas)
top dressing of the road embankment and fill slopes
filling up of tree pits, in the median and
in the agricultural fields of farmers, acquired temporarily.
Residual topsoil, if there is any will be utilized for the plantation at median and side of the main
carriageway.
The contractor will provide safe and convenient passage for vehicles, pedestrians and livestock to and from
roadsides and property accesses connecting the project road, providing temporary connecting road.
The contractor will also ensure that the existing accesses will not be undertaken without providing adequate
PS.C.5 Accessibility
provisions and to the prior satisfaction of Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD.
The contractor will take care that the cross roads are constructed in such a sequence that construction work
over the adjacent cross roads are taken up one after one so that traffic movement in any given area not get

286
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

affected much.
Temporary diversions will be constructed with the approval of the SC and Environmental Expert of SC /
Environment Cell of PWD.
Detailed Traffic Control Plans will be prepared and submitted to the Environmental Expert of SC /
Environment Cell of PWD for approval, five days prior to commencement of works on any section of road.
The traffic control plans shall contain details of temporary diversions, traffic safety arrangements for
Planning for construction under traffic, details of traffic arrangement after cessation of work each day, safety measures
Traffic undertaken for transport of hazardous materials and arrangement of flagmen.
PS.C.6
Diversions and The Contractor will provide specific measures for safety of pedestrians and workers at night as a part of
Detours traffic control plans. The Contractor will ensure that the diversion/detour is always maintained in running
condition, particularly during the monsoon to avoid disruption to traffic flow.
The contractor will also inform local community of changes to traffic routes, conditions and pedestrian
access arrangements with assistance from SC and PWD. The temporary traffic detours will be kept free of
dust by sprinkling of water three times a day and as required under specific conditions (depending on
weather conditions, construction in the settlement areas and volume of traffic).
No borrow area will be opened without permission of the Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell
of PWD. The location, shape and size of the designated borrow areas will be as approved by the
Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD and in accordance to the IRC recommended
practice for borrow pits for road embankments (IRC 10: 1961). The borrowing operations will be carried
out as specified in the guidelines for sitting and operation of borrow areas.
The unpaved surfaces used for the haulage of borrow materials, if passing through the settlement areas or
Earth from
habitations; will be maintained dust free by the contractor. Sprinkling of water will be carried out twice a
PS.C.7 Borrow Areas
day to control dust along such roads during their period of use.
for Construction
During dry seasons (winter and summer) frequency of water sprinkling will be increased in the settlement
areas and Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD will decide the numbers of sprinkling
depending on the local requirements.
Contractor will rehabilitate the borrow areas as soon as borrowing is over from a particular borrow area in
accordance with the Guidelines for Redevelopment of Borrow Areas or as suggested by Environmental
Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD.

287
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

Contractor will ensure that they will strictly follow the specification given in IRC: SP: 58 for fly ash
embankment construction. Further, Contractor will also ensure that -
Fly ash will be transported in covered dump truck to the project site and is directly dumped on the
embankment. This will not be stockpiled at project site.
Weathered (at least not freshly generated) fly ash will be collected from the fly ash pond to reduce the
possibility of water contamination due to leaching of heavy metals.
Fly ash surface will be graded and sloped at the end of each working day to provide drainage and to prevent
the ponding of water or the formation of run-off channel.
The side slope will be properly benched and covered with soil and later vegetation will be grown to prevent
the erosion.
Run-off from the fly ash embankment/stockpile will be collected and discharged into proper drainage
PS.C.8 Fly Ash
system.
Further handling, if any will be restricted within ROW. During such handling and also after placing on
embankment, if the fly ash surface is dries up completely, contractor will arrange for frequent sprinkling of
water for dust suppression. Otherwise, surface of the fly ash will be covered with tarpaulin or polyethylene
sheets or other suitable material.
The fly ash will be placed on an aggregate drainage blanket to prevent water from rising into the fly ash by
way of capillary action. Contractor will ensure that fly ash layer is separated from the drainage blanket by
an appropriate filter fabric/sand blanket of adequate thickness over full width of embankment as capillary
cut-off.
Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD will be required to inspect and report regularly to
ensure the compliance in this regard.
The contractor shall obtain materials for quarries only after consent of the Department of Mining and
District Administration.
Quarry
PS.C.9 The contractor will develop a Comprehensive Quarry Redevelopment plan, as per the Mining Rules of the
Operations
state and submit a copy to PWD and SC prior to opening of the quarry site.
The quarry operations will be undertaken within the rules and regulations in force.
Transporting Contractor will maintain all roads (existing or built for the project), which are used for transporting
PS.C.10
Construction construction materials, equipment and machineries as précised. All vehicles delivering fine materialsto the

288
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

Materials and site will be covered to avoid spillage of materials.

Haul Road All existing highways and roads used by vehicles of the contractor or any of his sub-contractor or suppliers
Management of materials and similarly roads, which are part of the works, will be kept clear of all dust/mud or other
extraneous materials dropped by such vehicles.
Contractor will arrange for regular water sprinkling as necessary for dust suppression of all such roads and
surfaces.
The unloading of materials at construction sites in/close to settlements will be restricted to daytime only.
Contractor will arrange adequate supply and storage of water for the whole construction period at his own
costs. The Contractor will submit a list of source/s from where water will be used for the project to SC and
PWD.
Construction The contractor will source the requirement of water preferentially from ground water but with prior
PS.C.11
Water permission from the Ground Water Board. A copy of the permission will be submitted to SC and PWD
prior to initiation of construction.
The contractor will take all precaution to minimize the wastage of water in the construction process/
operation.
While working across or close to any perennial water bodies, contractor will not obstruct/ prevent the flow
of water.
Construction over and close to the non-perennial streams shall be undertaken in the dry season. If
construction work is expected to disrupt users of community water bodies, notice shall be served well in
River Training advance to the affected community.
and Disruption The contractor will serve notice to the down stream users well in advance to divert the flow of water of any
PS.C.12
to Other Users surface water body. Wherever excavation for diverting water flow will take place, contractor will ensure
of Water that the slopes are not steeper than 1:2 (vertical: horizontal) otherwise proper slope protection measures will
be taken as approved by the Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD.
The contractor will take prior approval of the River Authority or Irrigation Department or SC for any such
activity. The PWD will ensure that contractor has served the notice to the downstream users of water well in
advance.
Drainage and Contractor will ensure that no construction materials like earth, stone, ash or appendage disposed off so as
PS.C.13
Flood Control not to block the flow of water of any water course and cross drainage channels.

289
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

Contractor will take all necessary measures to prevent the blockage of water flow. In addition to the design
requirements, the contractor will take all required measures as directed by the Environmental Expert of SC /
Environment Cell of PWD to prevent temporary or permanent flooding of the site or any adjacent area.
The Contractor will not excavate beds of any stream/canals/ any other water body for borrowing earth for
embankment construction.
Contractor will construct silt fencing at the base of the embankment construction for the entire perimeter of
Siltation of any water body (including wells) adjacent to the RoW and around the stockpiles at the construction sites
Water Bodies close to water bodies. The fencing will be provided prior to commencement of earthwork and continue till
PS.C.14 and the stabilization of the embankment slopes, on the particular sub-section of the road.
Degradation of The contractor will also put up sedimentation cum grease traps at the outer mouth of the drains located in
Water Quality truck lay byes and bus bays which are ultimately entering into any surface water bodies / water channels
with a fall exceeding 1.5 m.
Contractor will ensure that construction materials containing fine particles are stored in an enclosure such
that sediment-laden water does not drain into nearby water course.
The contractor will take slope protection measures as per design, or as directed by the Environmental
Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD to control soil erosion and sedimentation through use of dykes,
sedimentation chambers, basins, fibber mats, mulches, grasses, slope, drains and other devices.
All temporary sedimentation, pollution control works and maintenance thereof will be deemed as incidental
to the earth work or other items of work and as such as no separate payment will be made for them.
Slope Contractor will ensure the following aspects:
Protection and During construction activities on road embankment, the side slopes of all cut and fill areas will be graded
PS.C.15
Control of Soil and covered with stone pitching, grass and shrub as per design specifications.
Erosion Turfing works will be taken up as soon as possible provided the season is favorable for the establishment of
grass sods. Other measures of slope stabilization will include mulching netting and seeding of batters and
drains immediately on completion of earthworks.
In borrow pits, the depth shall be so regulated that the sides of the excavation will have a slope not steeper
than 1 vertical to 2 horizontal, from the edge of the final section of the bank.
Along sections abutting water bodies, stone pitching as per design specification will protect slopes.
PS.C.16 Water Pollution The Contractor will take all precautionary measures to prevent the wastewater generated during

290
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

from construction from entering into streams, water bodies or the irrigation system. Contractor will avoid
Construction construction works close to the streams or water bodies during monsoon.
Wastes All waste arising from the project is to be disposed off in the manner that is acceptable to the State Pollution
Control Board or as directed by Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD.
The Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD will certify that all liquid wastes disposed off
from the sites meet the discharge standards.
The contractor will ensure that all construction vehicle parking location, fuel/lubricants storage sites,
vehicle, machinery and equipment maintenance and refueling sites will be located at least 500 m from rivers
and irrigation canal/ponds.
All location and lay-out plans of such sites will be submitted by the Contractor prior to their establishment
and will be approved by the Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD and PWD.
Contractor will ensure that all vehicle/machinery and equipment operation, maintenance and refueling will
be carried out in such a fashion that spillage of fuels and lubricants does not contaminate the ground. Oil
Water Pollution
interceptors will be provided for vehicle parking, wash down and refueling areas as per the design provided.
PS.C.17 from Fuel and
In all, fuel storage and refueling areas, if located on agricultural land or areas supporting vegetation, the top
Lubricants
soil will be stripped, stockpiled and returned after cessation of such storage.
Contractor will arrange for collection, storing and disposal of oily wastes to the pre-identified disposal sites
(list to be submitted to SC and PWD) and approved by the Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell
of PWD. All spills and collected petroleum products will be disposed off in accordance with MoEF and
state PCB guidelines.
Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD will certify that all arrangements comply with the
guidelines of PCB/ MoEF or any other relevant laws.
The contractor will take every precaution to reduce the level of dust from crushers/hot mix plants,
construction sites involving earthwork by sprinkling of water, encapsulation of dust source and by erection
of screen/barriers.
PS.C.18 Dust Pollution All the plants will be sited at least 150 m in the downwind direction from the nearest human settlement.
The contractor will provide necessary certificates to confirm that all crushers used in construction conform
to relevant dust emission control legislation.
The suspended particulate matter value at a distance of 40m from a unit located in a cluster should be less

291
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

than 500 g/m3. The pollution monitoring is to be conducted as per the monitoring plan.
Alternatively, only crushers licensed by the PCB shall be used. Required certificates and consents shall be
submitted by the Contractor in such a case.
Dust screening vegetation will be planted on the edge of the RoW for all existing roadside crushers. Hot
mix plant will be fitted with dust extraction units.
Emission from
Contractor will ensure that all vehicles, equipment and machinery used for construction are regularly
Construction
maintained and confirm that pollution emission levels comply with the relevant requirements of PCB.
PS.C.19 Vehicles,
The Contractor will submit PUC certificates for all vehicles/ equipment/machinery used for the project.
Equipment and
Monitoring results will also be submitted to SC and PWD as per the monitoring plan.
Machineries
The Contractor will confirm the following:
All plants and equipment used in construction shall strictly conform to the MoEF/CPCB noise standards.
All vehicles and equipment used in construction will be fitted with exhaust silencers.
Servicing of all construction vehicles and machinery will be done regularly and during routine servicing
operations, the effectiveness of exhaust silencers will be checked and if found defective will be replaced.
Limits for construction equipment used in the project such as compactors, rollers, front loaders, concrete
mixers, cranes (moveable), vibrators and saws shall not exceed 75 dB (A) (measured at one meter from the
edge of equipment in the free field), as specified in the Environment (Protection) rules, 1986.
Noise Pollution:
Maintenance of vehicles, equipment and machinery shall be regular and up to the satisfaction of the
Noise from
PS.C.20 Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD to keep noise levels at the minimum.
Vehicles, Plants
and Equipments
At the construction sites within 150 m of the nearest habitation, noisy construction work such as crushing,
concrete mixing, batching will be stopped during the night time between 9.00 pm to 6.00 am.
No noisy construction activities will be permitted around educational institutes/health centers (silence
zones) up to a distance of 100 m from the sensitive receptors i.e., school, health centers and hospitals
between 9.00 am to 6.0 pm.
Contractor will provide noise barriers (Design of Noise Barrier Provided) to the suggested locations of
select schools/ health centers. List of locations for noise barriers is given in specific EMP.
Monitoring shall be carried out at the construction sites as per the monitoring schedule and results will be

292
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

submitted to SC and PWD. Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD will be required to
inspect regularly to ensure the compliance of EMP.
Contractor will provide:
Protective footwear and protective goggles to all workers employed on mixing asphalt materials, cement,
and lime mortars, concrete etc.
Welder's protective eye-shields to workers who are engaged in welding works
Protective goggles and clothing to workers engaged in Factories Act, 1948 stone breaking activities and
workers will be seated at sufficiently safe intervals
Earplugs to workers exposed to loud noise, and workers working in crushing, compaction, or concrete
mixing operation.
Adequate safety measures for workers during handling of materials at site are taken up.
The contractor will comply with all regulations regarding safe scaffolding, ladders, working platforms,
gangway, stairwells, excavations, trenches and safe means of entry and egress.
The contractor will comply with all the precautions as required for ensuring the safety of the workmen as
Personal Safety
per the International Labor Organization (ILO) Convention No. 62 as far as those are applicable to this
PS.C.21 Measures for
contract.
Labour
The contractor will make sure that during the construction work all relevant provisions of the Factories Act,
1948 and the Building and other Construction Workers (regulation of Employment and Conditions of
Services) Act, 1996 are adhered to.
The contractor will not employ any person below the age of 14 years for any work and no woman will be
employed on the work of painting with products containing lead in any form.
The contractor will also ensure that no paint containing lead or lead products is used except in the form of
paste or readymade paint.
Contractor will provide facemasks for use to the workers when paint is applied in the form of spray or a
surface having lead paint dry is rubbed and scrapped.
The Contractor will mark ‘hard hat’ and ‘no smoking ’ and other ‘high risk’ areas and enforce non-
compliance of use of PPE with zero tolerance. These will be reflected in the Construction Safety Plan to be
prepared by the Contractor during mobilization and will be approved by SC and PWD.
PS.C.22 Traffic and The contractor will take all necessary measures for the safety of traffic during construction and provide,

293
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

Safety erect and maintain such barricades, including signs, markings, flags, lights and flagmen as proposed in the
Traffic Control Plan/Drawings and as required by the Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of
PWD for the information and protection of traffic approaching or passing through the section of any
existing cross roads.
The contractor will ensure that all signs, barricades, pavement markings are provided as per the MoRTH
specifications. Before taking up of construction on any section of the existing lanes of the highway, a
Traffic Control Plan will be devised and implemented to the satisfaction of the Environmental Expert of SC
/ Environment Cell of PWD.
The Contractor will take all required precautions to prevent danger from electrical equipment and ensure
that -
No material will be so stacked or placed as to cause danger or inconvenience to any person or the public..
Risk from
All necessary fencing and lights will be provided to protect the public in construction zones.
PS.C.23 Electrical
All machines to be used in the construction will conform to the relevant Indian Standards (IS) codes, will be
Equipment(s)
free from patent defect, will be kept in good working order, will be regularly inspected and properly
maintained as per IS provision and to the satisfaction of the Environmental Expert of SC / Environment
Cell of PWD.
The contractor will take all reasonable precautions to prevent danger to the workers and public from fire,
flood etc. resulting due to construction activities.
Risk Force
PS.C.24 The contractor will make required arrangements so that in case of any mishap all necessary steps can be
Measure
taken for prompt first aid treatment. Construction Safety Plan prepared by the Contractor will identify
necessary actions in the event of an emergency.
The contractor will arrange for:
• A readily available first aid unit including an adequate supply of sterilized dressing materials and
PS.C.25 First Aid appliances as per the Factories Rules in every work zone
• Availability of suitable transport at all times to take injured or sick person(s) to the nearest hospital
• Equipment and trained nursing staff at construction camp.
Informatory The contractor will provide, erect and maintain informatory/safety signs, hoardings written in English and
PS.C.26 Signs and local language, wherever required or as suggested by the Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of
Hoardings PWD.

294
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

The contractor will do the plantation at median and/or turfing at embankment slopes as per the tree
plantation strategy prepared for the project.
Road side Minimum 80 percent survival rate of the saplings will be acceptable otherwise the contractor will replace
PS.C.27 Plantation dead plants at his own cost. The contractor will maintain the plantation till they handover the project site to
Strategy PWD.
The Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD will inspect regularly the survival rate of the
plants and compliance of tree plantation guidelines.
The contractor will take reasonable precaution to prevent his workmen or any other persons from removing
and damaging any flora (plant/vegetation) and fauna (animal) including fishing in any water body and
hunting of any animal.
Flora and If any wild animal is found near the construction site at any point of time, the contractor will immediately
PS.C.28 Chance found upon discovery thereof acquaint the Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD and carry out
Fauna the SC's instructions for dealing with the same.
The Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD will report to the near by forest office (range
office or divisional office) and will take appropriate steps/ measures, if required in consultation with the
forest officials.
All fossils, coins, articles of value of antiquity, structures and other remains or things of geological or
archaeological interest discovered on the site shall be the property of the Government and shall be dealt
with as per provisions of the relevant legislation.
Chance Found The contractor will take reasonable precautions to prevent his workmen or any other persons from removing
PS.C.29 Archaeological and damaging any such article or thing. He will, immediately upon discovery thereof and before removal
Property acquaint the Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD of such discovery and carry out the
SC's instructions for dealing with the same, waiting which all work shall be stopped.
The SC will seek direction from the Archaeological Survey of India (ASI) before instructing the Contractor
to recommence the work in the site.
Labour camp Contractor will follow all relevant provisions of the Factories Act, 1948 and the Building and the other
management - Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Service) Act, 1996 for construction
PS.C.30
Accommodatio and maintenance of labour camp.
n The location, layout and basic facility provision of each labour camp will be submitted to SC and PWD

295
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

prior to their construction.

The construction will commence only upon the written approval of the Environmental Expert of SC /
Environment Cell of PWD.
The contractor will maintain necessary living accommodation and ancillary facilities in functional and
hygienic manner and as approved by the SC.
The Contractor will construct and maintain all labour accommodation in such a fashion that uncontaminated
water is available for drinking, cooking and washing.
The Contractor will also provide potable water facilities within the precincts of every workplace in an
accessible place, as per standards set by the Building and other Construction Workers (Regulation of
Employment and Conditions of Service) Act, 1996.
The contractor will also guarantee the following:
a) Supply of sufficient quantity of potable water (as per IS) in every workplace/labor camp site at suitable
and easily accessible places and regular maintenance of such facilities.
Labour camp b) If any water storage tank is provided that will be kept such that the bottom of the tank at least 1mt. from
PS.C.31 management - the surrounding ground level.
Potable Water c) If water is drawn from any existing well, which is within 30mt. proximity of any toilet, drain or other
source of pollution, the well will be disinfected before water is used for drinking.
d) All such wells will be entirely covered and provided with a trap door, which will be dust proof and
waterproof.
e) A reliable pump will be fitted to each covered well. The trap door will be kept locked and opened only
for cleaning or inspection, which will be done at least once in a month.
f) Testing of water will be done every month as per parameters prescribed in IS 10500:1991.
Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD will be required to inspect the labour camp once
in a week to ensure the compliance of the EMP.
The contractor will ensure that -
Labour camp
the sewage system for the camp are designed, built and operated in such a fashion that no health hazards
management -
PS.C.32 occurs and no pollution to the air, ground water or adjacent water courses take place
Sanitation and
separate toilets/bathrooms, wherever required, screened from those from men (marked in vernacular) are to
Sewage System
be provided for women

296
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

adequate water supply is to be provided in all toilets and urinals

all toilets in workplaces are with dry-earth system (receptacles) which are to be cleaned and kept in a strict
sanitary condition
Night soil is to be disposed off by putting layer of it at the bottom of a permanent tank prepared for the
purpose and covered with 15 cm. layer of waste or refuse and then covered with a layer of earth for a
fortnight.
The contractor will provide garbage bins in the camps and ensure that these are regularly emptied and
disposed off in a hygienic manner as per the Comprehensive Solid Waste Management Plan approved by
Labour camp
the Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD.
PS.C.34 management -
Unless otherwise arranged by local sanitary authority, arrangements for disposal of night soils (human
Waste Disposal
excreta) suitably approved by the local medical health or municipal authorities or as directed by
Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD will have to be provided by the contractor.
Contractor will prepare site restoration plans, which will be approved by the Environmental Expert of SC /
Environment Cell of PWD. The clean-up and restoration operations are to be implemented by the contractor
prior to demobilization. The contractor will clear all temporary structures; dispose all garbage, night soils
and POL waste as per Comprehensive Waste Management Plan and as approved by SC.
Clean-up
All disposal pits or trenches will be filled in and effectively sealed off. Residual topsoil, if any will be
Operations,
PS.C.35 distributed on adjoining/ proximate barren land or areas identified by Environmental Expert of SC /
Restoration and
Environment Cell of PWD in a layer of thickness of 75 mm-l50 mm.
Rehabilitation
All construction zones including river-beds, culverts, road-side areas, camps, hot mix plant sites, crushers,
batching plant sites and any other area used/affected by the project will be left clean and tidy, at the
contractor's expense, to the entire satisfaction to the Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of
PWD.

297
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Issue

PS.O. OPERATIONAL STAGE

The PWD will monitor the operational performance of the various mitigation/ enhancement measures
Monitoring carried out as a part of the project.
PS.O.1 Operation The indicators selected for monitoring include the survival rate of trees; utility of enhancement provision
Performance for relocated temples, schools and other relocated structures; status of rehabilitation of borrow areas; and
utility of noise barriers.
PWD will ensure that all drains (side drains, median drain and all cross drainages) are periodically cleared
Maintenance of especially before monsoon season to facilitate the quick passage of rainwater and avoid flooding.
PS.O.2
Drainage PWD will ensure that all the sediment and oil and grease traps set up at the water bodies are cleared once in
every three months.
The periodic monitoring of the ambient air quality, noise level, water (both ground and surface water)
quality, soil pollution/contamination
Pollution
MA. O.3
Monitoring
in the selected locations as suggested in pollution monitoring plan will be responsibility of PWD.
PWD will appoint PCB approved pollution monitoring agency for this purpose.
Ambient air concentrations of various pollutants shall be monitored as envisaged in the pollution-
Atmospheric
MA. O.4 monitoring plan.
Pollution
Roadside tree plantation will be maintained.
Noise pollution will be monitored as per monitoring plan at sensitive locations. Noise control programs are
to be enforced strictly.
PS.O.5 Noise Pollution
Monitoring the effectiveness of the pollution attenuation barriers, if there is any, will be taken up thrice in
the operation period.
Soil Erosion and Visual monitoring and inspection of soil erosion at borrow areas, quarries (if closed and rehabilitated),
PS.O.6 Monitoring of embankments and other places expected to be affected, will be carried out once in every three months as
Borrow Areas suggested in monitoring plan.
Changes in Land PWD shall take initiative and act as facilitator to prepare an action plan for balanced regional development
PS.O.7
Use Pattern in consultation with Local Development Authority and State Government to control the ribbon

298
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Issue

development along the project road including new bypasses. A land use regulation control, if applicable
need to be adopted.
A land use-zoning map may be developed, under which up to a particular distance from the ROW of the
alignment especially in new bypass stretches, no development will be allowed.
Necessary hoardings will be erected indicating the availability of ROW and legal charges for encroachment
of ROW. Budgetary provisions are to be made to control the ribbon development along project road.

299
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

1202-A

REHABILITATION AND RESETTLEMENT POICY OF GOVERNMENT OF KERALA

Introduction and Objectives

Land Acquisition in Kerala is carried out under the provisions of the Land Acquisition Act
18941*. This being a Central Act, State Government has powers only to implement
rehabilitation package to supplement the compensation awarded under the provisions of this
Act. The State Government has made some arrangements in this direction by introducing a fast
track mechanism for land acquisition; which has ensured a better compensation to the evictees.
When adequate or suitable public land is not available for any specific public purpose including
infrastructure and development projects, Government has to resort to land acquisition. Often
families get displaced from their ancestral personal properties and also lose their land or
premises that provide them their income. Kerala is a State with high population density. The
State’s growth structure makes some areas extended habitation continuum with no clear
boundary between the rural and the urban. It is in this context that a Comprehensive Relief,
Resettlement and Rehabilitation Policy has become essential.
2. Aims & Objectives of the Relief, Resettlement and Rehabilitation Policy
Government aims to ensure the following through the Relief, Resettlement and
Rehabilitation Policy;
a) The project affected persons (PAP’s) are provided with a just and reasonable
compensation.
b) Where the negative impact are unavoidable, the project affected persons are to be
assisted in ensuring that their socio-economic status does not fall below what it
was before the acquisition.
c) People’s participation shall be ensured in the acquisition of land and in the
implementation of the project so that there is transparency and openness and the
PAPs are made stakeholders to the extent possible.
d) The project is implemented without causing any major disruption or disturbance to
the daily lives of the PAPs and the negative effect of having to be displaced from
their land can be minimized.
e) Before taking possession of the acquired land and property, disbursement of all
compensation is ensured.
3. Basic Framework of the Policy
The Relief, Resettlement & Rehabilitation Policy of the Government of Kerala includes
the following;
1) Any Land Acquisition should be for a declared and established public purpose and
the ‘Public Purpose’ should be clearly defined righ t at the commencement.
2) Land Acquisition should commence based on a project proposal that should
indicate the total area required to be acquired and why the acquisition has become
necessary. A High Level Committee headed by the Chief Secretary, Secretary
(Revenue) and the Secretary of the Administrative Department shall assess the
project, its viability and extent of land required. The Administrative Department
will have to submit before this Committee a detailed project elucidating the kind
and extend of land to be acquired. Land Acquisition will commence only after the
approval of the project by the Committee.

1* Land Acquisition Act 1894 is replaced by Right to Fair Compensation and Transparency in Land Acquisition,
Rehabilitation & Resettlement Act, 2013 (30 of 2013) with effect from 1st January 2014. Kerala Government
have issued the Right to Fair Compensation and Transparency in Land Acquisition, Rehabilitation and
Resettlement (Kerala) Rules, 2015 and approved State Policy for compensation in land acquisition as per G.O(P)
No 470/ 15/RD dated 19-09-2015 and G.O. (Ms) 485/15/RD dated 23-09-2015
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
300
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

3) The Administrative Department shall carry out Social Impact Assessment in the
prescribed proforma before Land Acquisition commences and the report shall be
submitted before the High Level Committee. A Social Impact Assessment Study
shall be conducted in the case of acquisition for projects as recommended by the
High Level Committee. Clear guidelines on the functioning of the High Level
Committee will be laid down including where Social Impact Assessment Study is
necessary.
4) The Project Affected Persons (PAPs) shall be informed about the details and
purpose of the project in a form and manner that is comprehensive to the common-
man.
5) Section 4 (1) Notification shall be issued only after issue of Administrative
Sanction by the Administrative Department for the project that has got the
approval of the High Level Committee.
6) A District Level Purchase Committee (DLPC) is constituted in every district. The
DLPC would decide the classification and value of lands based on market value of
land after negotiations with land owners. The DLPC members would be as follows:
(i) District Collector – Chairman
(ii) Concerned RDO/Sub Collector
(iii) Finance Officer, Collectorate
(iv) A representative of Requisitioning Agency, not below the rank of a District
Level Officer.
(v) Deputy Collector in charge of Land Acquisition.
7) The value of land would be approved by the Government after approval by a State
Level Empowered (SLEC), based on the recommendation of the DLPC. The SLEC
would include:
(i) Chief Secretary - Chairman
(ii) Revenue Secretary
(iii) Secretary of the Administrative Department
(iv) Law Secretary
(v) Finance Secretary
8) Urgency clause shall be invoked only in the rarest of rare cases, with the
recommendation of the High Level Committee and only with adequate justification.
9) Land acquired should be utilized within three years, failing which the land will be
taken over by the Government in Revenue Department and assigned for any other
public purpose. The High Level Committee shall have the authority to condone the
delay where justified.
10) No ‘de novo’ process shall be initiated unless the High Level Committee condones
the delay and responsibility foxed for the process becoming ‘de novo’.
11) Section 4(1) notification shall be issued only after at least 25% of the LA cost is
deposited in the Land Acquisition Officer’s Account .
12) The compensation payable includes: the land value based on a negotiated price
and the value of the structures without depreciation.
13) A family rendered landless and homeless with no salaried income whose annual
income is below Rs.75,000/- shall be provided upto 3 cents of land.
14) In employment generating projects, providing jobs with permanent income to one
member of the out see family may be considered by the Requisitioning Authority.
15) House rent grant should be paid for a minimum period of 6 months to the PAP
who loses his home which he and his family were occupying and who have no
other house.
16) Tenants in occupation for a minimum 3 years who lose their source of income will
be paid a one-time allowance. Roadside vendors and other small scale industries
shall be covered in this category.
301
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

17) In cases where the title is not clear or in cases where the land value decided by the DLPC
is not acceptable to the land owner, further land acquisition as permissible shall be carried
out under the provision of Land Acquisition Act 1894 or NHAI Act, as the case may be.

4. Alternate Methodologies
The Government also propose to try out the following alternate methodology for land
acquisition in specific cases depending upon their applicability as per the recommendation
of the Cabinet Sub Committee.
• For developmental and infrastructure projects, the PAP shall also be given a chance to
become shareholders in the upcoming project and offered with stocks up to the value of
the land acquired in lieu of the compensation.
• The LSG institutions shall give priority to the PAP tenants who were running shops and
other business establishments, in assignment of commercial space in PRI run commercial
complex.
• Where the land owner whose land is acquired, is left with less than 50% of his land and is
willing to have the balance land also acquired, Government will acquire such land and
utilize it for public purpose.
• In the case of every acquisition, the owner who loses his entire land will be given the option to
claim either the compensation or to take 25% of the quantum of land acquired form him as
compensation, in the vicinity of the project site or along the new or widened road. This will
enable the PAP to get advantage of the land value appreciation that will take place with the
advent of the project.
5. Resettlement and Rehabilitation
Government will ensure that land owners who lose their land and other assets through land
acquisition get compensation and resettlement in the manner specified under each
category of project. The rate of compensation for all land acquisition cases is given in the
Annexure.
5.1 Land Acquisition for Special Projects Other than Roads
i) Land Value shall be based upon the Basic Land Value arrived at by the
DLPC & SLEC
ii) Value of Construction will be assessed without depreciation.
iii) Where the project affected person (PAP) is rendered homeless and income of the family is
below Rs.75,000/- per annum, alternate land of 3 cents per family shall be assigned for
rehabilitation. Such land will be acquired as part of the project and it will be adjacent or
close to the project site. This is to ensure that the project affected persons also benefit
from the increase n land value and from the developmental activities that take place in the
vicinity. The basic amenities viz. power, water and road to rehabilitation site shall be
provided, the cost of which shall be borne by the Requisitioning Agency/Department.
Such development site shall be handed over to the project affected persons simultaneously
with the take over of the acquired land.
iv) Where the Requisitioning Authority is a Public Sector Undertaking, action shall be taken
to provide employment to one member of the family to the extent feasible.
v) The Requisitioning Agency or the Local Self Government institution should construct
shopping Complex on land acquired for this purpose at the cost of the Requisitioning
Authority and commercial space should be provided to those displaced from their
shops/business centres at a nominal rent for a period of five years. This benefit is meant
for the small commercial establishment and shall not be available for companies, banks,
financial, agencies, PSUs, showrooms, shopping malls etc.

302
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

vi) Upto 10% of the land acquired may be earmarked for rehabilitation of
project affected persons.
vii) Option could be provided to project affected persons to claims
compensation or to get 25% of the land acquired from him (with a
maximum extent fixed by the High Level Committee) assigned to him in
the vicinity of the project area.
5.2 Land Acquisition for Road Projects
Kerala, with its linear type development along the existing roads, widening of
roads requires linear acquisition which is bound to displace a large number of residential and
commercial properties, structures, institutions and other establishments. Since commercial
tenants and employees in such places and encroachers are not generally entitled to any legal
compensation, the Government is of the view that persons/families falling in these categories
also deserve special attention and cannot be ignored, primarily in those cases where these
persons/families fall in the category of Economically weaker section. Such persons also shall
therefore be assisted under the following package;
i. Land value shall be determined based on the Basic Land valued arrived at by DLPC &
SLEC.
ii. Value of constructions and improvements shall be assessed without depreciation.
iii. Where the project affected person is rendered homeless and income or the family is
below Rs. 75,000/- per annum, alternate land of 3 cents per family shall be assigned for
rehabilitation. The basic amenities viz. power, water and road to Rehabilitation site
will be provided.
iv. Local Self government institutions should endeavour to construct shopping complex to
rehabilitate displaced small shop keepers for this purpose. Commercial space should be
provided to small-scale commercial vendors displaced from their shops/ business
centers on a priority basis. This benefit will not be available to companies, banks, large
shops, financial agencies, PSUs Shopping Malls etc.,
v. Option could be provided to project affected persons (PAPs) to claim compensation or
to get 22% of the land acquired from him/ her (with a maximum extent fixed by the
High Level Committee) assigned to him in the vicinity of the newly-formed road.
5.3 Land Acquisition for National Highways:
Land Acquisition for National Highways will be carried out in accordance with the NHAI Act.
However, the Rehabilitation package formulated by the State Government will be applicable
for the land acquisition for NH also. Rehabilitation Committee to DLPC constituted under the
chairmanship of the District Collector will hear the complaints regarding rehabilitation and take
remedial measures. A State Level Committee comprising of the Secretaries of PWD and
Revenue and the representatives of NHAI, PWD Chief Engineer will scrutinize the complaints
and take decisions thereon.
5.4 Irrigation Project
Land Acquisition policy as explained above will be applicable in the case of Irrigation Projects
also. The Project affected persons (PAPs) with land rights will be given the option of getting up
to 50% of the land (with a maximum extent fixed by the High Level Committee) acquitted
from them in the command area, in lieu of compensation.
6. Categorization of Project Affected Persons
1. Those who lose only land and residential structures but are not residing there
2. Those who lose land and residential structures and are residing there
3. Land holders who have given their commercial structure for rent
4. Those that lose commercial structures and are themselves running the commercial
establishments.
5. Residential tenants
6. Commercial tenants running establishment for at least 3 years.

303
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

7. Employees working in commercial establishments for at least 3 years.

8. Encroachers who live or run their small business on puramboke land for a minimum period of
3 years
9. Places of worship/ Socio-cultural and Education centers.
7. Institutional Mechanism for Implementation
Each project will have a resettlement and rehabilitation cell with a Rehabilitation Officer, who
will co-ordinate the R&R activities. In the districts, the District Collector or his representative
will act as the R&R officer. The High Level Committee headed by the Chief Secretary will co-
ordinate the R&R activities in the State.
8. Kerala Infrastructure Bonds
Besides the land acquisition policy adverted above, Government is actively considering a novel
idea of assigning Kerala Infrastructure Bonds in lieu of compensation in full or par which may
aid the PAPs to avail themselves of the hike in land price in future. This shall assigned for
study and report within six months by an expert committee since the Model calls for better
clarity regarding assessment of land value, transfer of bonds identifying implementing agency
and the structures that need to be in place for implementing such a model. Annexure

Proposed compensation package

i. Those who lose only land residential structures but are not residing there :
a. Land value determined by the DLPC
b. Structure value without depreciation.
ii. Those who lose land and residential structures and are residing there:
a. Land value determined by the DLPC
b. Structure value without depreciation
c. Rent at Rs. 5,000/- per month for 6 months from the date of takeover of the land
or till the compensation is paid whichever is later.
d. Shifting allowance of Rs. 25,000/-
iii. Those whose land and commercial structures are acquired but who are not running these
themselves:
a. Land value determined by the DLPC
b. Structure value without depreciation.
iv. Those who lose commercial structures and are themselves running the commercial
establishments:
a. Land value determined by the DLPC
b. Structure value without depreciation.
c. Rent at Rs. 5,000/- per month for 6 months
d. Shifting allowance of Rs.25,000/0
v. Residential Tenants:
a) Rent @ 5,00/- per month for 6 months
b) Shifting allowance of Rs.25,000/-
vi. Commercial Tenants:
a) One time assistance Rs.2,00,000/- to meet all shifting charges and social costs.
However, such assistance would not be provided to companies, banks, financial
institutions and large shops, shopping malls, etc.
vii. A maximum of two employees working in commercial establishments who have been
working for a minimum period of three years will apply only for small establishments
excluding banks, financial institutions, companies, malls etc. would be given:
a) Rs.6,000/- per month for 6 months for loss of livelihood.
viii. Encroachers who live or run their small business on puramboke land for a minimum
period of 3 years.
a) Rs.6,000/- per month for 6 months for loss of livelihood

304
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

b) Cost of structure subject to a minimum of Rs.25,000/-

ix. Socio-Cultural & Educational Centres or place of worship:
a) Land Value determined by the DLPC
b) Structure Value.
Annexure 1202B: Social Screening Format for Categorization of Social Impact

Part A

Name of the Department: ______________________________

Name of the Circle: ______________________________

Name of Division: ______________________________

Districts covered by the Project: ______________________________

Name of Sub division Responsible: ____________________________

Name & Address of the Officers Responsible

(i) Superintending Engineer: _______________________________

(ii) Executive Engineer: ______________________________

(iii) Sub Divisional Engineer: ______________________________

Category of Project: _______________________________

Part B

(Please tick mark (√) in the appropriate column and provide relevant information in Col.6)

Probable social Impacts

Sl.
Screening Questions Extent/Number/
No Yes No Possible
Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6

Is land acquisition necessary?

1

Is the ownership status and current usage of

2 the land known?

3 Will there be loss of agricultural plots?

4 Will there be loss of seasonal crops?

5 Will there be loss perennial crops (yielding

and/or fruit bearing and other trees?
Will the project displace residential
6 structures (Houses)?
Will the project displace commercial
7 structures (shops workshops, factory and
other establishments)?
Will there be loss of structures other than
8 buildings? (Compound wall/gate/water
tanks/ slabs/ wells/ septic tanks, etc
Are any cultural properties (place of
9 worship, religious structure, memorial,
monument, cemetery, etc) affected or

305
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

displaced?
Are any community properties affected or
10 displaced?
Are any tenants running enterprises or
11 operating from the structures that would be
displaced?
Are there any tenants residing in the
12 structures that would be displaced?
Are there residential squatters within the
right of way?
Are there commercial squatters within the
13 right of way?
Are there residential and commercial
14 squatters within the right of way?

Will there be loss of incomes and livelihoods

15 of employees of affected establishments/
structures?

Will people lose access to common facilities,

16 services, or natural resources?

17 Will there be loss of existing access to

private properties and services?
1. Social Screening sheet must be completed by all projects at Investigation Stage and forwarded to
social cell for review, verification and records

Date Signature and Name of the Officer Responsible

306
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Annexure 1202C: Social Impacts Data Sheet– to be at tached with investigation Report

Number of Number of Extent of

S. Number of
Category of the Affected households/ persons Land
No. structures
Families affected Involved

Private Land with Legal Ownership

A
(Titleholders)
Residential properties
Commercial Properties
Residential & Commercial Properties
Agricultural Land
Vacant Land (urban)
Vacant Land (rural)
Other categories of private land (specify)
B Non-Titleholders attached to Private Properties
Tenants –Residential
Tenants – commercial
Employees
C Cultural Properties (with Legal ownership) Number
Land only
Land and structure (specify)
Number of Extent of Number of
Cultural Properties (without Legal ownership)
D Number persons land structures
of squatter status
affected involved involved
Shrine
Hundi (Boxes to receive offerings)
Others (specify- arch, gate, c/wall, etc)

Government /Public sector/Panchayat

E
Properties
Land only
Land with minor structure
Land and building
F Community Properties
Land only
Land with minor structure
Land and building
Land and some public utility (specify eg. well)
G Squatters (Non-titleholders)

Residential

Commercial

Residential & commercial

307
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Annexure 1202D: Budget Estimate to be attached with Detailed Project Report

Estimated
S. Total Units
Item Unit Cost (Rs) Replacement
No. (specify)
Cost
1 Private Land Value (specify category)
1 (a)
1 (b)

Structure value of (specify type) as per BSR of

2
PWD
2 (a)
3 Compensation towards other immovable properties

R and R Assistance and Activities

1 Shifting assistance
Transitional allowance to those whose livelihood is
2
affected
Additional assistance to vulnerable groups 3
3
women headed households
4 Documentation
5 Operational costs
6 Consultancy charges
Total

Sample SIA for S-1 & S-2 category (Table of Contents)

Executive Summary

Chapter I : THE PROJECT AND SCOPE OF LAND

ACQUISITION 1.1 Introduction
1.2 Objective of the Study
1.3 The Project and Project Site
1.4 Public Consultation
1.5 Efforts to Minimize Negative Impacts
1.6 Extent of Land Acquisition

CHAPTER II: SOCIAL ASSESSMENT OF PROJECT AFFECTED

2.1 Census Survey
2.2 Population Profile
2.3 Vulnerable Population
2.4 Magnitude of displacement
2.5 Loss of Immovable Properties
2.6 Loss of Livelihood
2.7 Gender Impacts
2.8 Analysis of Alternatives

CHAPTER-III MITIGATION MEASURES

3.1 Targeting Vulnerable Groups
3.2 Resettlement and Rehabilitation (R&R) Package
3.3 Entitlement Criteria and Frame work
3.4 R&R Budget

308
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

CHAPTER IV: MONITORING AND MANAGEMENT

4.1 Institutional Mechanism for Implementation and Monitoring
4.2 Criteria for Inclusion on PAP List
4.3 Methods for determining compensation
4.4 Appeal Procedures and Grievance Redressal Mechanism
4.5 Procedure and Mode of delivery of compensation and assistances
4.6 Monitoring and Evaluation System

The SIA report for S-2 Category Project shall pride the following:
• Screening
• Transect walk proceedings,
• Analysis of alternatives
• Consultation proceedings,
• Impact Statement,
• Census and socio-economic survey form,
• Micro plan and short resettlement Plan,
• Land Acquisition Plan.
• Budget

Outline for Full Resettlement Plan

CHAPTER I: SCOPE OF LAND ACQUISITION AND RESETTLEMENT
What the project is all about and why land acquisition is necessary. Maps, charts and sketches
may be used to illustrate the point.

CHAPTER II: SOCIO ECONOMIC INFORMATION

Define, identify and enumerate the affected people. Describe the possible impacts of land
acquisition by the project on people being affected. Explain the social, cultural and economic
impacts of land acquisition on the community.
Identify all looses of people and quantify them. Special attention must be given to the identify
the impact of the project on the poor and the vulnerable population such as the SCs and STs,
women and women headed families. Suggest special measures within the policy framework to
restore fully and to enhance their economic and social base.

CHAPTER III: OBJECTIVES, POLICY FRAMEWORK AND ENTITLEMENTS

Explain the purpose and objectives of land acquisition and resettlement. Describe relevant
national and state policy pertaining to resettlement and rehabilitation applicable to the project
and the relevant portion of the LA act
Prepare entitlement matrix for all categories of loss including compensation rates and eligibility
criteria.
If the project is financed by any bilateral agency, their policy requirements should be
accommodated and explained in this chapter.
CHAPTER IV: PUBLIC CONSULTATION, PARTICIPATION AND
GRIEVANCE REDRESS

Identify project stakeholders, describe mechanisms used to ensure active participation of the
primary, secondary and tertiary, etc. of stakeholders in the planning, implementation,
management, monitoring and evaluation of the development project and the resettlement and
rehabilitation component.
Identify local organizations and institutions and suggest ways and means to support the affected
population
Establish procedures for public consultation and redress of grievances of the affected population.

309
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

CHAPTER V: RELOCATION OF HOUSING AND SETTLEMENTS

Identify relocation options for all structures including housing, commercial establishments,
cultural and community properties including cash compensation and self-relocation. Specify
measures to assist with transfer and establishment at new sites
In extreme cases specify measures to include resettlement sites in land
acquisition. Specify means to safeguard livelihoods of the affected population.
Identify and suggest concrete measures to address gender issues and others related to vulnerable
groups
Identify cultural and environmental risks precipitated by land acquisition and displacement and
measures to manage and monitor.

CHAPTER VI: INCOME AND LIVELIHOOD RESTORATION STRATEGY

Identify livelihoods at risk. Develop income restoration strategy with options to restore all types
of livelihoods.
Specify job opportunities and job creation plan; provision for compensating loss of livelihood,
retraining and skill up gradation for self-employment.
Prepare plan to relocate and restore business including income substitution.

CHAPTER VII INSTITUTIONAL FRAMEWORK

Identify various tasks from planning land acquisition to resettlement and allocate responsibilities
showing implementation schedule
Review capacity building requirements and provide for assistance including technical and
managerial skills to manage the tasks at hand
Specify role of NGOs if required for resettlement planning and management

CHAPTER VIII RESETTLEMENT BUDGET AND FINANCING

Identify land acquisition and resettlement costs
Prepare annual budget and specify timing for release of funds

CHAPTER IX IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE

Prepare a time schedule showing start and finish dates for land acquisition and resettlement
tasks. Show how affected people will be provided before demolition of structures.

CHAPTER X MONITORING AND EVALUATION

Prepare internal monitoring plan for land acquisition and resettlement with targets and key
indicators of progress, mechanism for reporting and resource requirements.
Prepare evaluation plan with provision for external independent evaluation for bilateral funded
projects.
Specify participation of affected people in monitoring and evaluation.

Outline for Short Resettlement Plan

Chapter 1: Scope of Land Acquisition and Resettlement

Describe alternative options considered to minimize land acquisition and displacement. Explain
why the remaining effects (land acquisition and displacement if any) are unavoidable. Give a
summarized version of the key effects, the extent of land acquired, the assets people would lose
and the people displaced from homes or from their livelihoods or occupations.

Chapter 2: Objectives, Policy framework and Entitlements

Describe the resettlement policy of the State which provides resettlement benefits to mitigate
the negative impact and the details of entitlements of the project affected persons and families

310
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Chapter 3: Public Consultation, People’s Participation and Grievance Redress

Describe consultation process and procedures, how the project will ensure participation of the
affected people in the awareness programs on the proposed project, the processes of land
acquisition and resettlement and how their grievances will be redressed.

Chapter 4: Compensation, Relocation and Income/Livelihood Restoration

Describe arrangement for valuing and disbursing compensation. Explain the arrangements that
would be made for relocation of housing and shifting of establishments. Describe livelihood
restoration measures to be implemented, as to how, when, where and by whom, and the
mechanism to monitor the processes and time-bound progress.

Chapter 5: Institutional Framework

Identify main tasks and responsibilities related to planning, implementing and monitoring
land acquisition and resettlement.

311
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

1500

1500 A. Design of Roads

All major PWD roads shall be designed in accordance with the relevant IS/IRC codes and practises. For
this purpose the following list of codes may be made referred.
1. IRC: 32-1969Standard for Vertical and Horizontal Clearances of Overhead Electric Power and
Telecommunication Lines as Related to Roads
2. IRC: 38-1988Guidelines for Design of Horizontal Curves for Highways and Design Tables (First
Revision)
3. IRC: 39-1986Standards for Road-Rail Level Crossings (First Revision)
4. IRC: 41-1997Type Designs for Check Barriers (First Revision)
5. IRC: 54-1974Lateral and Vertical Clearances at Underpasses for Vehicular Traffic
6. IRC: 65-1976Recommended Practice for Traffic Rotaries
7. IRC: 66-1976Recommended Practice for Sight Distance on Rural Highways
8. IRC: 69-1977Space Standards for Roads in Urban Areas
9. IRC: 73-1980Geometric Design Standards for Rural (Non-Urban) Highways
10. IRC: 80-1981Type Designs for Pick-up Bus Stops on Rural (i.e., Non-Urban) Highways
11. IRC: 86-1983Geometric Design Standards for Urban Roads in Plains
12. IRC: 92-1985Guidelines for the Design of Interchanges in Urban Areas
13. IRC: 98-1997Guidelines on Accommodation of Underground Utility Services Along and Across Roads in
Urban Areas (First Revision)
14. IRC: 99-1988Tentative Guidelines on the Provision of Speed Breakers for Control of Vehicular Speeds on
Minor Roads
15. IRC: 103-1988 Guidelines for Pedestrian Facilities
16. IRC: SP: 12- Tentative Recommendations on the Provision of Parking Spaces for Urban Areas
1973
17. IRC: SP: 23- Vertical Curves for Highways
1983
18. IRC: SP: 41- Guidelines on Design of At-Grade Intersections in Rural & Urban Areas
1994
19. IRC: 58-2002 Guidelines for the Design of Plain Jointed Rigid Pavements for Highways (Second Revision)
Latest Revision of relevant codes shall be followed.
1501. Classification of roads
The roads under PWD are classified as Expressways, National Highways (NH), State Highways
(SH), and Major District Roads (MDR) as detailed below,
(a) Expressways: The function of Expressways is to cater for movement of heavy volumes of motor
traffic at high speed. They connect major points of traffic generation and are intended to serve trips of
medium and long length between large residential areas, industrial or commercial concentration and the
central business districts.
(b) National Highways (NH): These are main highways running through the length and breadth of the
country connecting major ports, highways of neighbouring countries, state capitals. These are the
highways connecting major ports, industrial and tourist centres within the state and neighbouring states.
© State Highways (SH): These are arterial routs of a state linking district head quarters and important
cities within the state and connecting them with National Highways to the neighbouring state.
(d) Major District Roads (MDR): These are important roads within a district serving areas of
production/markets and connecting these with each other or with the main highways.

312
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

1502. Design Parameters

The main parameters involved in the design of any road is the traffic volume it has to cater to,
the speed at which the traffic flows, and the safety of vehicles in terms of sight distance considerations.
th
1502.1. Speed: The design speed is the expected 95 percentile speed of the motorised traffic on the new
th
road in the design year. The 95 percentile speed is the speed, which only 5% of vehicles will exceed. The
choice of design speed has a big influence on key aspects of highway design, especially curvature.
In practice it is rarely possible to adopt a uniform design speed for the whole road - design speeds need
to vary from section to section to reflect differences in the road environment, terrain, etc. IRC SP 73
specifies the design speeds for different types of terrain.
1502.2. Volume: Traffic data is critically important in the design of roads. Traffic surveys must cover
motorised as well as non-motorised traffic. For new roads on completely new alignments it will be
necessary to assign traffic to them from existing roads and then make an allowance for generated traffic.
Usually mixed traffic volumes are expressed in PCU. The PCU factor for various vehicle types are
available in IRC 73 and the PCU ranges for various class of roads are in IRC 86
1502.3. Sight distance: The need to achieve minimum sight distance standards sets limits on how sharp
the curves can be. The details of sight distance for horizontal curves and vertical curves are given in IRC
73 and IRC SP 23 respectively. In the case of Rural Highways, IRC 66:1976 may be referred. There are
three main types of sight distance to consider: Stopping Sight Distance (SSD), Overtaking Sight
Distance (OSD) Intermediate Sight Distance (ISD).
1502.4. Stopping Sight Distance. This is the visibility necessary for a driver to be able to see an
obstruction in time to bring the vehicle to a halt without a collision. This is a basic minimum standard
for two-lane single carriageway roads. It is assumed that the driver’s eye height is 1.2m and the height of
the obstruction is at least 0.15m above the road surface.
1502.5. Overtaking Sight Distance: This is the visibility necessary for a driver to be able to see
whether the road ahead is sufficiently clear to enable him to overtake a vehicle in front – even if an
oncomin g vehicle appears after he has started the overtaking manoeuvre. It is a very long distance,
especially at the higher speeds, and it can be difficult to achieve.
1502.6. Intermediate Sight Distance: This is the visibility necessary for a driver to be able to see
whether the road ahead is sufficiently clear to enable him to overtake, assuming that he will abort the
manoeuvre if an oncoming vehicle appears before he has got level with the slower vehicle. ISD is much
less than OSD yet it permits reasonably safe overtaking. ISD is about twice SSD. It is assumed that the
observer and the obstruction are at eye height (1.2m).
1502.7.Geometric Design Standards: Geometric Design Standards for Urban Roads in Plains shall be as
per IRC: 86-1983 and for Rural (Non-Urban) Highways as per IRC: 73-1980. The space standards for
Roads in Urban Areas shall be IRC: 69-1977. In the case of Hill Roads Recommendations About the
Alignment Survey and Geometric Design of Hill Roads IRC: 52-2001 may be followed. Appendix 3.4
gives the standards for roads in Kerala.
1503. Cross Sectional Elements
1503.1. Building lines, Control lines, Land width, ROW
Desirable land width in metre for different classes of roads is indicated in Appendix 3.4. The same is
also shown in Figure 3.1

313
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Overall width between Control lines

Overall width between Building lines

Setback Road Land Width Setback

Distance Distance
Roadway

Carriageway

Boundary

Centre Line of Road

Building

Road Land Boundary

Building
Control Line

Control
Land
Line

Line

Line
o
a
d

Figure 3.1: Road Terminology

1503.2. Camber or Cross Fall
Carriageway cross fall must be sufficient to provide good surface drainage, without causing
problems for drivers. On two-way way single carriageway roads the carriageway is normally cambered to
form an inverted ‘V’, which may be rounded at its h ighest point, the crown. On dual carriageway roads
the carriageway normally slopes away from the median.
At curves the carriageway and shaller profile may change Shallers having the same surface as
the carriageway may have the same cross fall, but generally shaller cross falls will be a little steeper -
normally 5%. The cross falls for different type of pavement surfaces are provided in IRC 73
1503.3. Shaller
Shallers are essential for safety, to ensure capacity utilisation, and must be provided on all
roads. Shallers along Highways must ideally be paved in order to be durable and perform effectively in
all weathers. This can be achieved either by extending the main pavement or using a different
construction, such as double bituminous seal treatment. Generally, the width of Shallers will be one
half- the difference between the roadway width and carriageway width.
1503.3.1. Factors to be considered when desidesigning shallers:
the shaller needs to be strong enough to take all vehicles in any weather and without needing much
maintenance
shallers that are to be used by NMVs and pedestrians must have a good good-quality
quality smooth surface –
otherwise NMVs and pedestrians w will use the carriageway instead
using a different surface to that of the carriageway makes the shaller look different and this helps
emphasise that it has a different function, it is essential to use edge lines (preferably made of
thermoplastic) to mark the divide between carriageway and shaller
there shall be no difference in level between the carriageway and the shaller – an edge drop could
discourage smaller vehicles from using the shaller and could be hazardous, especially for
motorcyclists.
On dual carriageway roads there must be a 0.25m wide shaller on the right right-hand
hand side of the
carriageway next to the median. The divide between the carriageway and shaller must be marked
with an edge line.
1503.4. Medians
Medians segregate traffic, provides proteprotection from out-of-control
control vehicles, reduce glare at
nighttime, and acts as pedestrian refuge in urban intersections. For details the chapter on road safety
may be referred.

314
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

1503.5 Culverts
Culverts must be designed for the entire carriageway width. IRC SP 13 may be referred for
details of Culvert design. Typical drawings are also given. IRC SP 20:2002 also details the different
type of culverts.
1503.6. Utilities
Provision for Underground Utility Services Along and Across Roads in Urban Areas shall be as
per IRC: 98-1997
1503.7. Bus Bays
In the case of highways, bus bays are to be provided to ensure that the other vehicles in the
stream are not obstructed due to stoppage of buses. The bus bays are usually of one lane width and the
length varies depending on number of buses that stop simultaneously. Details are included in the chapter
on Road Safety
1503.8. Footpath:
Roads passing through urban locales with considerable pedestrian traffic must be provided with
footpaths. From safety considerations, fencing may be appropriate. IRC 103 shall be referred for
pedestrian facilities Details are also included in the chapter on Road Safety.`
1503.9. Truck Lay byes
Highways usually cater to long distance truck traffic and facilities shall be provided for their
parking. These laybyes shall offer resting facilities for the drivers also. Length of lay bye shall be
adequate to cater to peak parking demand estimated on volume projections and average delay expected.
Details are included in the chapter on Road Safety
1503.10. Passing places
On hill roads, passing places are required to facilitate crossing of vehicles. These shall be
provided at the rate of 2 to 3 per km and each shall be of 20 to 30 m length and of 5.5m widths.
1503.11. Lateral and vertical clearances
Lateral clearance is the distance between the extreme edges of the carriageway to the face
of the nearest support, whether it is a solid abutment, pier or column.
Vertical clearance stands for the height above the highest point of the travelled way i.e. the
carriageway and part of the shallers meant for vehicular use (crown/ super elevated edge) to the lowest
point of the overhead structure/ overhangs. For details refer IRC 54. Standard for Vertical and
Horizontal Clearances of Overhead Electric Power and Telecommunication Lines as Related to Roads
shall be as per IRC:32-1969
1503.12.Embankments
The details of embankment design are given in IRC 36 and IRC SP 20, and the Guidelines for
the Design of High Embankments as per IRC: 75-1979

1503.13. Drains
Drains are an integral part of road and must be provided for all roads. These must be permanent
structures, considering the heavy monsoons that the state is subjected to. Moreover, these must be
properly maintained, as otherwise, the entire road gets damaged. The main objective of drainage is to
prevent early damage of the pavement due to entry of excess of water and preventing saturation up to a
dept of 1 m below the top of the sub grade. This can be achieved by providing proper drainage. The two
types are surface drains and subsurface drains.
Details may be referred in IRC SP 42 and IRC SP 50.
1504. Horizontal Alignment
The alignment shall be as directional, fluent and matching well with the surrounding topography as
possible and also to avoid abrupt changes.
On new roads, the curve shall be designed to have the large practical radius, generally not less than
the ruling value corresponding to ruling design speed given in IRC: 38-1988.

315
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Absolute minimum values based on minimum design speed may be used where economics of
construction and sight conditions so dictates. The radii below absolute minimum shall not be
provided
Straight section exceeding 3 km length must be avoided
A curvilinear alignment with long curve is better from point of safety and aesthetics.
Sharp curve shall not be introduced at the end of long tangents, since this can be extremely
hazardous.
Curve shall be sufficiently long and shall have transition curves at either end to eliminate shock due to
o
application of centrifugal force. Deflection angle less than 1 no curve is required to be designed.
Reverse curves may be needed in difficult terrain. Sufficient length between 2 curves shall be
provided for introduction of requisite transition curve.
To avoid distortion, in appearance, the alignment shall coordinate with longitudinal profile.
1504.1. Horizontal curves
The radius of curvature in horizontal curves is decided by the design speed of the road, side
friction. In general Horizontal curves shall consist of a circular portion flanked by spiral transition at
both ends. Refer IRC 38 and IRC 73 for details of horizontal curves, extra-widening super-elevation and
setback distances.
1505.Vertical Alignment
The general alignment of the road shall follow the terrain as far as possible. Economy and
aesthetics are also of importance is choosing the longitudinal profile.
1505.1.Gradient
The rate of rise or fall with respect to the horizontal along the length of road expressed as ratio or
a percentage is termed as gradient. Recommended gradients for different terrain conditions are given in
IRC 73 and IRC SP 23
1505.2.Vertical Curves
Formula and length of Summit curves and Valley curves are as per IRC SP 23.
1506. Coordination of Horizontal and vertical alignment
Vertical and horizontal curves shall coincide and result in a smooth flowing appearance. If not
possible, the horizontal curve shall be somewhat longer than the vertical curve. Sharp horizontal curve
shall be avoided. If the horizontal scale is large and the vertical scale is relatively small, it may be
satisfactory to include two vertical movements on one long horizontal curve.
Grade and curvature shall be in proper balance. Flat horizontal curves at the expense of steep or long
grades or sharp curvature with flat grades shall be avoided.
Broken-back curves (2 curves in same direction with short tangent in between) both in alignment and
profile shall be replaced by a single curve.
Proper coordination in this respect will ensure safety improve utility and enhance aesthetics of the road.
1507. Hairpin bends
A hairpin bend may be designed as a circular curve with transition at each end. Alternately,
compound circular curves may be provided. The general design criteria are as per IRC 73
1508. Intersections
The design for intersections is based on safety conditions and to cater to peak turning traffic volume.
General guidelines to be followed are:
i) The number of intersections shall be kept at minimum
ii) If necessary, some minor roads may be connected with each other before joining a major road.
iii) Geometric layout shall be so selected that hazardous movements by drivers are eliminated. This can
be achieved by various techniques such as canalising and staggering.
iv) The design shall permit the driver to discern quickly either from the layout or from traffic signs, the
path he shall follow and the actions of merging and diverging. This can be achieved by a good
layout, traffic islands, signs and carriageway markings. Good visibility improves safety.
v) The number of conflict points shall be minimised.
vi) Vehicles that are forced to wait in order to cross a traffic stream shall be provided with adequate
space at the junctions.

316
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Generally intersections are classified as at grade intersections and Grade separated intersections
a. At grade intersections (Junctions)
The different types of at grade intersections are given in IRC SP 41. Recommended Practice for Traffic
Rotaries are as per IRC: 65-1976V
b. Grade Separated intersections
An intersection layout that permits crossing manoeuvres at different levels is known as grade
separated intersection or an interchange. These are provided when the traffic volumes on the intersecting
arms are too heavy and results in long queues is being formed. Usually these are required in urban
intersections where both the roads are equally important. Also from a safety point, those intersections
with high accident records may be converted into grade separated intersections. IRC 92 gives the details
for interchanges in urban areas.
1509. Sub grade and Pavement
The road structure may be divided into four major components, Viz. Land, Earthwork,
pavement and cross drainage works. The types of pavement are
Flexible Pavement
Rigid Pavement
Composite Pavement (Semi rigid and Roller Compacted Concrete)
In case of rural roads, in view of the stage development strategy and the initial cost advantage,
the flexible pavement may be the appropriate choice. Generally, the choice of pavement will be further
guided by several other factors such as
Rainfall and temperature
Type and strength of soil along the alignment
Availability of good aggregates
Availability of Industrial wastes like Fly ash slag etc in the proximity.
In all designs, economies in the initial cost as well as in life cycle costs are crucial and very
important.Components of Pavement are detailed in the section on Execution of Road Works.
1510. Design of Flexible Pavement
1510.1. Pavement Thickness: The thickness of pavement is designed on the basis of projected number
of commercial vehicles, for the design life using the current commercial vehicles per day and its growth
rate. Based on the strength of granular materials that are used, the total design thickness is divided into
base and sub-base thickness.The principle criteria for determining the thickness of a flexible pavement
with a thin bituminous surfacing is the vertical compressive strain on top of the subgrade imposed by
standard axle load of magnitude 8.17 KN (870 Kg) Excessive vertical Subgrade strain causes permanent
deformation in the subgrade, which is manifested in the form of rutting on the pavement surface. The
minimum recommend pavement thickness is 150 mm. For rigid and semi rigid pavements, tensile stress
is taken as design criteriaThe detail design for flexible pavement may be as per IRC: 37
1511. Design of Rigid Pavements
The main type of rigid pavement usually practiced is cement concrete pavements and Roller
Compacted Concrete Pavements (RCCP). Strict quality control shall be exercised during construction.
Cement Concrete Pavement (CC) Design of cement concrete pavement shall be as per IRC 58. IRC 15
gives the detailing of joints. These may be used in Special cases only where drainage problem is acute
and continuous and may be used in limited length. However drainage arrangements shall be ensured
even for concrete pavements.
1511.1.Roller Compacted concrete Pavement: RCCP is a technique which makes use laying of zero
slump concrete manually and compacting with vibratory or static road roller.
1512. Design of Bridges
1512.1. Introduction
The design of Bridges shall be carried out as per the provisions and recommendations IRC/IS
codes as per list below. In case of IRC codes being silent about any design aspect, provisions in IS/
International codes or general practice adopted in DESIGN WING (DRIQ) may be followed.
1512.1.1. List of Codes to be referred for Design of Bridges

317
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

1. IRC: 5-1998
1998 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section I –
General Features of Design (Seventh Revision)
2. IRC: 6-2000 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section II – Loads
and Stresses (Fourth Revision)
3. IRC: 18-2000 Design Criteria for Prestressed Concrete Road Bridges (Post(Post-Tensioned
Tensioned
Concrete) (Third Revision)
4. IRC: 21-2000 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section III –
Cement Concrete (Plain and Reinforced) (Third Revision)
5. IRC: 22-1986 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section
VI – Composite Construction (First Revision)
6. IRC: 24-2001 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section V – Steel
Road Bridges (Second Revision)
7. IRC: 40-2002 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section IV –
Brick, Stone and Block Masonry (Second Revision)
8. IRC: 78-2000 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section
VII – Foundations and Substructure (Second Revision)
9. IRC: 83-1999 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section IX –
Bearings, Part I : Metallic Bearings (First Revision)
10. IRC: 83-1987
1987 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section IX – Bearings,
(Part II)Part II: Elastomeric Bearings
11. IRC: 83-2002 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section IX – Bearings,
(Part III)Part III: POT, POT-CUM
CUM-PTFE,
PTFE, PIN AND METALLIC GUIDE BEARINGS
12. IRC: 87-1984 Guidelines for the Design and Erection of False work for Road Bridges
13. IRC: 89-1997 Guidelines for Design and Construction of River Training & Control Works for
Road Bridges (First Revision)
14 IRC SP 20 Specifications for Rural Roads
15. IRC: SP: 33- Guidelines on Supplemental Measures for Design, Detailing & Durability of Important
1989 Bridge Structures
16 IS 456-2000 Plain and Reinforced Concrete - Code of Practice
Latest revision of above codes shall be followed.
The competent authority shall approve the design of Bridges and culverts. For any structure for
which detailed investigations are required the same may be conducted by the Assistant Engineer and
supervised by the Assistant Executive Engineer, and details shall be furnished for final design and got
approved by the competent authority. If the designs are decided to bbee done by Design wing of the
concerned Chief Engineer may forward the details to Chief Engineer (A&D).
If the officer competent to approve a design requires the assistance of the Design wing for
specific problem, he shall hold consultation with the Chief Engineer (A&D).
1512.2. Design Data Required for Design of Bridges
For all bridges to be designed in the Chief Engineer (A&D) shall make a complete
investigation of the site and the design data and required drawings shall be prepared and submitted
along with the proforma given in Appendix 1500A.
The other documents required to be submitted along with the investigation report are alignment
plan approved by the Chief Engineer (A&D) and checklist given in Appendix 1500B & 1500C
1513. Design Procedure for Bridges
1513.1. Preliminary Design:: The Assistant Director shall study the investigation details and alignment plan
of a particular bridge and shall make note on any modification required for the above alignment plan
considering the various design aspects. The Assistant Director shall also make preliminary design of the
bridge in the form of a proposal drawing and submitted to the superior officers, if the modifications required
in the alignment plan are of trivial nature. If any major alterations aare
re required in the alignment plan, the
same may be intimated to the Chief Engineer (A&D) with specific recommendations for revision

318
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

and approval. After receipt of the revised approved alignment, a proposal drawing shall be prepared on
the basis of the same and forwarded the Chief Engineer (A&D) who shall subsequently furnish a
feasibility report considering the various construction and economic aspects of the proposed bridge at
the site.
1513.2. Detailed Design: Based on the feasibility report furnished and the alignment plan approved by
the Chief Engineer (A&D), the Assistant Director shall do a general and detailed design of the bridge.
The design shall be done by manually or by using approved computer software. In both cases a design
volume shall be maintained and approved by the Chief Engineer (A&D). The Deputy Director shall
check the general arrangement and detailed design drawing designed by the Assistant Director. The
Joint Director shall review the same and the Director (Designs) shall recommend the drawings to Chief
Engineer (A&D) for approval. The Chief Engineer (A&D) may entrust the whole design to outside
consultant also if found necessary.
1514. Geometrical Criteria
1514.1. Width of Carriageway, Footpath, Median and Kerb; This shall be as per the provisions of
IRC 5.
1514.2. Longitudinal Gradient: The Engineer in charge of design has to consider all aspects such as
construction costs, practical problems in construction at the site and the vehicle operation cost, before
finalizing the gradients. Based on the topography of site, IRC has recommended the following
categories of gradients for roads which shall be applicable to bridges also.
Terrain Ruling Limiting Exceptional
gradient gradient gradient
a) Plain or rolling 3.3 % (1 in 30) 5 % (1 in 20) 6.7 % (1 in 15)
b) Mountainous terrain 5 % (1 in 20) 6 % (1 in 16.7) 7 % (1 in 14.5%)
c) Steep terrain 6 % (1 in 16.7) 7 % (1 in 14.5%) 8 % (1 in 12.5%)
Where non-motorised vehicle are likely to use the structure more appropriate lower gradients shall be
utilized, but may need to a balance against cost and other environmental issues.
1514.3. Cross gradient
The deck cross gradient shall be adopted with a view that in localities with lower rainfall, a flatter
camber and in places with high rainfall, a steeper camber. The values of cross gradient recommended by IRC
for different types of road surfaces are as follows, which shall be applicable to bridges also.
Range of cross gradient in areas of rainfall
Type of surface coat Heavy to Light
a) Cement concrete 2.0% (1 in 50) to 1.7%(1 in 60)
b) Bituminous 2.5% (1 in 40) to 2.0%(1 in 50)
1514.4.Gradients, Super Elevation
If there is a change of gradient on the bridge deck, suitable vertical curve shall be introduced
conforming to the stipulations contained in IRC: SP-23. The super elevation on the deck of a bridge on a
horizontal curve shall be provided in accordance with the relevant IRC Road Standards.
1514.5. Clearances
The minimum vertical and horizontal clearance (clear height and width respectively available for
passage of traffic) to be provided on bridges shall be as specified in IRC:5. For vertical and horizontal
clearances at under passes and / rail over bridges the essential provisions of the code has to be followed.
1516. Hydraulic Criteria
1516.1. Design Discharge: The design discharge, for which the waterway of the bridge is to be
designed, shall be based on maximum flood discharge of 50 years return cycle. In case where the
requisite information is not available, the design discharge shall be the maximum estimated discharge
determined by the methods suggested in IRC:5 or any other rational method. The investigation report
shall contain the discharges obtained by the different methods suggested in IRC: 6.

319
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

1516.2. Effective Linear waterway, Afflux and Scour depth

The effective linear waterway may be compared with that provided under other
bridges in the vicinity over the same river after duly considering their performance. IRC 5
may also be referred.
For calculation of afflux IRC SP: 13 may be referred to. To calculate the maximum scour depth, IRC: 5
and IRC SP: 13 shall be followed.
1516.3. Loading Criteria
The Loading criteria to be adopted for all the bridges are as per IRC: 6.
1517. Selection of Type of Bridge and Span Arrangement
1517.1.General Considerations: Specific site characteristics like width of crossing, nature of stream,
depth of flow, depth of flow during different seasons, subsoil characteristics, and the capabilities of
contracting agencies, who would be interested in building the structure including the availability of
skilled and unskilled labour are mostly the major considerations in selecting the type of structure and
span arrangements in specialized structures like long span bridges. The attempt of the engineers shall be
towards minimising the overall cost of the total structure including approaches within the site-specific
constraints as obtained. For normal simply supported structures, it has been observed that the total cost
of the bridge proper tends to be the minimum, when the cost of superstructure approaches to that of
foundation and substructure put together which may be applied as a thumb rule for initial trial.
1517.2.Environmental Considerations
Aesthetic and environmental considerations are increasingly becoming major factors in the
selection of the type of structure including its foundation to be adopted for a specific site. To achieve
aesthetically pleasing view of bridge structure, attention shall be paid to produce a clean, simple, well
proportioned structured form. In most cases, achieving the desired structural quality may add little to the
overall cost of structure. Aesthetic considerations include harmony with the general topography of the
site, optimisation in the use of materials etc. Environmental considerations include limitation of noise
levels during and after construction of the bridge and the level of pollution due to air and water during
construction and service, conservation of flora and fauna etc.
1517.3. Economical Range of Span Lengths for Different Type of Superstructures
Piers and abutments shall be so located as to make the best use of the foundation conditions
available. The number of supports and their locations shall be so fixed as to provide the most
economical design of the bridge and at the same time to satisfy special requirements, if any, for
navigation, railways or other crossings in consultation with the concerned authorities, floating logs or
debris and bridge aesthetics, etc. Placing a pier at the deepest portion of an active channel may be
avoided by suitably adjusting the number and length of the spans. The ranges of span length within
which a particular type of superstructure can be economical along with other considerations like type of
foundation etc. are given below:

Type of superstructure Span (metres)

i) RCC single or multiple boxes 1.5 to 15
ii) Simply supported RCC slabs 3 to 10
iii) Simply supported RCC T beam 10 to 25
iv) Simply supported PSC girder 25 to 45
v) Simply supported RCC voided slab 10 to 15
vi) Simply supported / continuous PSC voided slab 15 to 30
vii) Continuous RCC voided slab 10 to 20
viii) RCC box sections; simply supported /Balanced cantilever continuous 25 to 50
ix) PSC box sections; simply supported /Balanced cantilever continuous 35 to 75
x) PSC cantilever construction / continuous 75 to 150
xi) Cable stayed bridges 100 to 800
xii) Suspension bridges 300 to 1500

320
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

However, whenever an economical span arrangement and type of structure is decided, it has to be
ensured that the required infrastructure facilities, design and construction capabilities, specified
materials etc. are available.

1518. Superstructure
It is the superstructure of a bridge that directly supports the traffic and facilitates its smooth
uninterrupted passage over natural/man made barriers like rivers, creeks, railways, roads, etc. by
transmitting the loads and forces coming over it to the foundation through the bearings and substructure.
The minimum functional requirement of superstructure is mentioned in section 1617.2. Consistent with
economy and local availability of the materials, labour and technology for a particular type of
superstructure selection may have to be made out of the following:
i) Reinforced cement concrete superstructure: These are the most poplar type of superstructure in the
present day which may take the form of solid slab, voided slab, T-beam and slab, box girder, rigid
frame, arch, balanced cantilever or bow-string girder.
ii) Pre-stressed concrete superstructure: This may also take any of the above forms referred in the
previous paragraph. Care shall be taken about the provision of future pre-stressing to the extent of
20 per cent of total pre-stress force. For this purpose, dummy cables may be laid in the structure,
which can be used for further pre-stressing if the need arises afterwards.
iii) Steel superstructure: With increasing availability of quality steel at international prices in recent
years the use of steel for superstructure is becoming attractive option. The forms, these may take are
steel beam, plate girder, box girder, steel truss, arch, cantilever suspension bridges and cable stayed
bridges.
Any combination of above materials considering their distinct advantages for particular elements
may be adopted. Most common types of composite construction are cast in situ or pre-cast girder in
pre-stressed concrete with RCC deck or steel beam/plate girders with RCC deck or cable stayed
bridges with RCC or PSC deck.
1518.1. Design
Relevant IRC Codes which have to be complied in the design of superstructure are IRC: 40, IRC:
21, IRC: 18, IRC: 24, IRC: 22 for Masonry, RCC, PSC, Steel and Composite Structures respectively.
Other codes applicable for all types of superstructures are IRC: 5 and IRC: 6. Other major guidelines
also include IRC: 85. In case of IRC codes silent about some design aspects, provisions in the
IS/International Codes may be followed.
1518.2. Standard Plans (Type designs)
Wherever possible the adoption of standard plans prepared by the MoRTH shall be followed for
superstructure. These will obviate detailed individual designs for bridge decks and ensure that drawings
are available on time and also maintain accuracy in design.

Ministry of Road Transport & Highways have brought out various standard plans which include
standard plan for:

No. Type of Deck Skew Overall Effective span

Angle width of (m)
deck (m)
1.a. RCC Solid Slab without footpath 0° 8.45 3.37, 4.37, 5.37, 6.37, 7.37, 8.37, 9.37, 10.37
1.b. RCC Solid Slab with footpath 0° 11.05 3.37, 4.37, 5.37, 6.37, 7.37, 8.37, 9.37, 10.37
1.c. RCC Solid Slab without footpath 15°, 30° 8.45 5.37, 6.37, 8.37
45°, 60°
1.d. RCC Solid Slab with footpath 15°, 30° 11.05 4.37, 6.37 & 8.37
45°, 60°
1.e. RCC Solid Slab with and without 0° 12.00 3.00, 4.00, 5.00, 6.00, 7.00, 8.00, 9.00, 10.00
footpath
1.f. RCC Solid Slab without footpath 15°, 12.00 4.00, 6.00, 8.00, 10.00

321
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

22.5°, 35°
2.a. RCC T-beam and slab without 0° 8.45 10.5, 12.5, 14.5, 16.5, 18.75, 21.75, 24.75
footpath (3 girders)
2.b. RCC T-beam and slab with 0° 11.05 10.5, 12.5, 14.5, 16.5, 18.75, 21.75, 24.75
footpath (3 girders)
2.c. RCC T-beam and slab with & 0° 12.00 10.0, 12.0, 14.0, 16.0, 18.0, 21.0, 24.0
without footpath (4 girders)
3.a. PSC Girder and RC Slab without 0° 8.58 30.0 & 40.0
footpath (3 girders)
3.b. PSC Girder and RC Slab with 0° 11.23 30.0 & 35.0
footpath (3 girders)

1519. Bearings
The design of metallic bearings and neoprene bearings shall be in conformity with IRC: 83 Parts
II & I. and clause 2000 of Specifications for Road and Bridge Works published by Ministry of Road
Transport and Highways (MoRTH)
(MoRTH) carries out pre-qualification of the manufacturers of bearings from time to time. The pre-
qualification is valid for a certain period. Bearings have to be procured from such manufacturers only.
1520. Sub-structure
Substructure include those portions of a bridge which are above the foundation which include
piers, abutments, abutment and pier caps, dirt wall, returns, wing wall etc. but excludes bearings and
superstructure. It can be built of brick/stone masonry, plain/reinforced/pre-stressed concrete, steel.
Selection of a particular type of sub structure depends upon the span and type of superstructure, the
height of substructure, availability of construction material and construction equipments, period and
time of construction and above all on overall economy. The shape of piers and abutments in general,
shall be such as to cause minimum obstruction to flow of water.
1520.1.General Considerations:
The following general conditions are to be followed for the construction of substructures:
i) On all exposed faces of concrete member a minimum reinforcement equivalent to 2.5 kg/sq.m.
shall be provided to withstand stresses due to temperature and shrinkage with maximum spacing
limited to 200 mm.
ii) The width of abutment and pier cap shall be fixed on the basis of design and construction
requirement. Further it shall be sufficient to accommodate not only the bearings but also an
offset of 150 mm beyond the edges of the bearings and also facilitate inspection and repairs of
bearings. The thickness of such caps shall not be less than 225mm up to a span of 25 m.
iii) In skew bridges, where bearings are placed at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the bridge,
the top width of the piers/abutment has to be more compared to right bridges in order to have a
clear distance of 150 mm beyond the edges of bearings.
iv) It is desirable to lay the abutment caps and the dirt walls over abutments with the same concrete
and in one operation, and make them monolithic by detailing the reinforcement properly, to
avoid cracking at the junction of the two components.
v) The top of wing return walls shall be carried 100 mm above the top of the slope of embankment
to prevent any soil from being blown or washed away by rain.
vi) Length of cantilever returns where adopted, shall not be more than 3.5 metres.
vii) All abutments shall be designed for a live load surcharge equivalent to 1.2 m height of earth fill.
viii) All wing walls or return walls provided for full height of approaches shall be designed to
withstand a live load surcharge equivalent to 0.6 m height of earth fill.
ix) The fill behind abutments, wing walls, and return walls shall conform to specifications given in
IRC:78.
x) Suitably designed cut and ease waters shall be provided in piers up to affluxes High Flood Level
or higher from consideration of waves, etc.
xi) If the height of pier exceeds 6 metres, R.C.C. piers may be preferred.
1520.2. Design: Sub-structure shall be designed to withstand the loads and forces as specified in IRC:6,
the worst combination of forces and factors of safety shall be as specified in IRC:78. For allowable

322
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

stresses and other design requirements, IRC Codes depending upon the type of construction material
shall be followed.
1521. Bridge Foundations
The foundations for piers and abutments shall be at such depths that they are safe against scour
and large impacts where necessary and are protected against it. They shall be taken down to a level
sufficient to secure firm foundation from consideration of bearing capacity, overall stability and
suitability of the strata at founding level and sufficient depth below it. The subsoil characteristics
obtained at a particular site and consequently the type of foundations feasible is one of the major
considerations in selection of type of structure and span arrangement.
It is necessary to evaluate, in advance, at the preliminary design stage, the pros and cons of choice of
a particular type of foundation. The selection of wrong type of foundation may lead to delay in construction,
increase in cost, and distress during construction and sometimes impossibilities of realizing technical
requirement. In order to avoid such difficulties that may arise during execution stage, alternative foundation
types shall be suggested in the Proposal Drawing. The concerned authority in the field office shall study the
pros and cons of constructing the suggested types of foundations and shall record a note about the same in the
feasibility report. Based on the above report, the type of foundation shall be fixed by the engineer responsible
for the design. Refer IRC 78 for different types of foundations.
1522. General Considerations and Design
All Bridges within 20 km of the sea cost shall be given anti corrosive treatment for
reinforcements as per specifications for Road and Bridge Works published by (MoRTH) and IS 13260.
Epoxy painting may be given to all exposed surface of RCC structural elements in the seacoast area;
similar treatment may also be done in areas prone to industrial/environmental pollution.
1522.1. Open foundations: The design aspects of open foundations can be obtained from IRC: 21 and
IRC: 78. Excavation on open foundations shall be done after taking necessary safety precautions for
which guidance may be taken from IS: 3764.
1522.2. Well foundations: Well foundation shall be designed to withstand the loads and forces as
specified in IRC: 6, the stability and design of well foundations shall be done under the most critical
combination of loads and forces as specified in IRC: 78. The pressure on foundations shall also satisfy the
provisions of IRC: 78. For allowable stresses and other design requirements, IRC: 21 shall be followed.
1522.3. Pile foundations: Piles shall be designed to carry uplift and lateral loads besides direct vertical
load. The worst combination of forces and factors of safety shall be as specified in IRC: 78. For design of
piles guidance may be taken from IS: 2911 subject to limitations/stipulations given in IRC: 78. For
allowable stresses and other design requirements, IRC: 21 shall be followed.
1522.4. Expansion Joints
Expansion joints are provided at the end of deck and cater for movement of deck due to
temperature, shrinkage, creep etc. Expansion joints make the deck joint leak proof, protect the edges of
slab/girder and allow smooth passage of loads from one span to other by bridging the gap. Depending
upon the gap width to be bridged, there are various types of expansion joints in use at present. IRC 83-
part Part II and I may be referred for details regarding expansion joints.
Specifications for Road and Bridge Works published by (MoRTH) have issued interim specifications for
expansion joints and subsequent modifications in the list of manufacturers/suppliers, which may be
followed. Further, a warranty of 10 years of trouble free performance may be insisted upon from the
contractors/suppliers for all type of joints except for buried joints and filler joints.
1522.5. Railings, Parapets or Guide Posts and Crash Barriers
The forces to be considered in design of Railings, Parapets or Guide Posts and Crash Barriers
shall be shall be as per relevant stipulations of IRC:6. For R.O.Bs across railway lines, those for
railway’s safety shall govern these requirements.
1522.6. Surface Finishes and Drainage of Carriageway
All carriageway and footpath surfaces shall have anti-skid characteristics. Average 75 mm thick
M20 cement concrete with temperature steel shall be provided for wearing coat with necessary camber
and over it a uniform treatment of 25mm mastic asphalt top layer for waterproofing. Alternately wearing
coat as specified in Specifications for Road and Bridge Works published by (MoRTH) may be provided
depending on site condition.

323
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

The deck has camber or super elevation, which guides rainwater towards kerbs, and
waterspouts located near the kerb further disposes the water out. One waterspout per 20 sq.m. of the
deck area is considered adequate and the spacing shall not exceed 10 m. The spout shall have diameter
not less than 100 mm and shall be of corrosion resistant material such as galvanised steel, with suitable
clean out fixture. The arrangement of waterspout shall be detailed along with the Detailed Design
Drawing of the Superstructure.
For drainage of a road over bridge or flyover, a suitably designed drainage arrangement shall
be provided. This may consist of vertical C.I. or rigid PVC pipes connecting the down spouts below the
deck with funnels and along the pier up to ground level and eventually joined to the road drainage
system. Suitable vertical recess in the piers may be provided to accommodate the drainage pipes rather
than providing drip courses underneath the deck slab.
If the height of abutment and return wall above bed level is more than 2 metres, weep holes
shall be provided 150 mm above low water level or ground level whichever is higher at centre of 2
metres horizontally and 1metre vertically (Slope of 1 in 20) and shall be staggered. Normally 100 mm
diameter PVC pipe shall be used. Provision made in IRC: 40 may also be referred.
1522.7. Utilities
In all bridges with footpaths, a service duct shall be made under one or both footpaths to take
water supply mains, electric and telephone cables etc. The size and other requirement may be as per
standards in practice. Where footpaths are not provided, provision shall be made for supporting a
suspended service duct under the cross girder. For this purpose suitable boot holes may be left in the
cross girders, which can later be used for fixing steel supports for a suspended deck with due, care for
durability and serviceability of the bridge and its approaches. For details refer IRC 98
1522.8. Access for Inspection and Maintenance
The design of the bridge shall be such as to provide for adequate access to all parts of the bridge to
facilitate future inspection and maintenance operations.
1522.9. Illumination of Bridge Deck
Provision for Illumination for bridges, grade separators and interchanges shall be an integral part
of the estimate. This shall be done in consultation with the Electrical wing. The installation, lighting
arrangement, and method of control, switches etc. shall all conform to the provision contained in IS:
1944. Illumination levels for the vehicular and pedestrian subway/underpasses may be kept same as
those on the approaches at either end of the subway/underpass.
1522.10. Approaches to Bridges
The approaches on either side of a straight bridge shall have a minimum straight length of 15
meters in the case of State Highways and MDRs and 10 meters in the case of ODRs and shall be
suitably increased to where necessary to provide for the minimum sight distance for the design speed. In
difficult situations, the Engineer responsible for the design may at his discretion permit a reduction in
the minimum straight length of approaches, provided reasons for making a departure from the Code are
clearly recorded in the proforma for Design Data submitted along with the Investigation Report. The
investigation reports shall be accompanied by land plan clearly marking the land to be acquired from
private and public bodies and the extend of each category along with the duly completed social impact
check list.
Where horizontal curves have to be provided on the approaches beyond the straight portion on
either side, the minimum radius of curvature, the super elevation and transition length for various speed
and the curve radii shall be provided in accordance with relevant stipulations contained in IRC: 38.
If there is a change of gradient, suitable vertical curves shall be introduced conforming to
relevant stipulations contained in IRC: 23.
Minimum surfaced width of these straight lengths of approaches shall be equal to the
carriageway width on the bridge.
Reinforced concrete approach slab covering the entire width of roadway shall be provided as per the
details given in the Detailed Design Drawing of the particular bridge. The minimum length of approach
slab shall be 3.5 meters and the minimum thickness as 150 mm.
If the approaches is in filling, borrow pits shall not be dug close to the embankment to avoid
risk of parallel flow being developed which may endanger safety of the embankment. In this connection,

324
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

provision made in IRC: 10 may also be kept in view.

Where the ground level falls continuously away from the banks of the stream, the overflow spreads
far and away from banks. In such cases, it is impossible to force the overflow back into the main stream. The
correct thing to do is to pass the overflow through relief culverts at suitable points in the road embankment.
They shall not be too small to cause detrimental ponding up of the overflow, resulting in damage to the road
or some property. Nor, shall they be so big as to attract the main current. Also protection work has to be
designed at downstream of the culverts so as to dissipate the energy of the falling water, where the water
from the relief culvert, rejoins the main stream somewhere lower down.
1522.11. River Training and Protection Work
River training and protective works are required for ensuring the safety of bridges and their approaches
on either side. The selection of the type of river training or protective work will depend upon terrain,
overall behaviour of the river, location of the bridge vis-à-vis the areas of attack of the river, span arrang
ement, nearness of the approaches from the influence zone of the river, etc. The types of river training
and protective works generally being used are as follows:
i) Guide bunds
ii) Spurs or groynes
iii) River bank protection
iv) Approach road protection
v) River bed protection
The details of river training measures shall be referred to in Section 2500 of Specifications for Road and
Bridge works published by (MoRTH)
1523.Road Signs and Signals
All multi-lane bridges, complex interchanges and grade-separated structures shall be provided with
overhead signs and signals conforming to the provision contained in IRC: 67. Non-luminous signs,
however, shall not be permitted. IRC SP 31 may be referred for new sign and IRC: 5 for overhead
structures.
1524. Building Design
This section deals with the general building requirements to ensure safety of public health
through open spaces, adequate room sizes and limitations on area and height of building.
1524.1. Introduction
Based on the preliminary investigation report, the architectural wing prepares a layout plan of the
structure in consultation with client and the Electric Wing, which shall be got approved by the
concerned department. The architect wing shall then prepare detailed architectural plan. This shall
comply with The National Building Code 2005 and the Kerala Municipal Building Rules.
R.C.C. design of all load bearing structures and framed structures up to two stories shall be prepared by
the Assistant Engineers and approved by the Executive Engineers and Superintending engineers as per
their powers. Necessary wind and seismic analysis must be performed. If the design is complicated the
engineer can refer it to the Chief Engineer (A&D) for detailed design.
Design Wing of the Chief Engineer (A&D) office will undertake the work of preparing R.C.C, design
for a structure only after the receipt of the following information.
Set of original Architectural drawings and CD from Chief Engineer (A&D) or through WINGS
web portal.
Copy of Administrative approval to the estimate of the structure, (based on approved
Architectural drawings.)
Soil investigation details.
Proposed construction programme i.e. proposed dates of start of different stages of construction
and scope of different phases of construction in case of phased construction from the Executive
Engineers office.
After the Executive Engineer submits the required documents and architects design on a CD or through
WINGS Portal to the Design Wing (Signed copies also to be forwarded), the Final design shall be
prepared and forwarded to the EE/SE/ CE as per TS issuing powers by the Executive Engineer /Chief
Engineer (A&D). The Architects plan shall also be forwarded to Electrical wing simultaneously, for

325
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

preparing layout of electric installations and concerned Executive Engineer for preparing sanitary and
water supply details.
1524.2.Design Philosophy
R.C.C design of buildings is being carried out mainly by three methods of design. They are namely: (1)
Working stress method, (2) Ultimate load method and (3) Limit state method.
The Limit state method is now in vogue in all government design offices and premier private consulting
firms .The B.I.S. have published I.S.: 456-2000 incorporating the use of Limit state Method of design.
Working Stress Method: Used over decades, this method is now practically outdated in many advanced
countries of the world, because of its inherent limitations
The I.S: 456-2000 code gives emphasis on Limit State Method which is the modified form of Ultimate
Load Method .
Besides analytical part of structural design, following factors shall also be kept in mind while designing
the structure.
Strength of structure.
Durability of structure.
Serviceability of structure, during construction as well as during design life time of
structure.
Economy in building materials and ease of
constructions. Economy in entering and formwork.
Aesthetics and functional use of structure.
1524.3. Classification of buildings
Buildings are classified based on occupancy and type of construction as per the provisions of
National Building Code 2005 part III Clause 7.
List of I.S. Codes generally required to be referred for Building Design
The National Building Code published by the Bureau of Indian Standards and Kerala Municipal
Building Rules has to be followed for the purpose of design of Buildings. The important I.S. Codes
(with their latest editions/ amendments) to be referred to for design of building are as follows:
1. I.S. 456-2000Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.
2. I.S. 800-1962Code of practice for use of structural steel in general building constriction.
3. I.S. 875-1987Designs load other than (part I to V) earthquake for building Design.
4. Part-I: Dead loads.
5. Part-II: Imposed loads.
6. Part-III: Wind loads.
7. Part IV: Snow loads.
8. Part V: Special loads and load combinations.
9. I.S. 1080-1965Code of practice for design and construction of shallow foundation in soils (other
than Raft, Ring and shell)

10. I.S: 1642-1988Fire safety of buildings (General) Detail 3 of construction.

11. I.S.: 1643-1988Code of practice for Fire safety of buildings (General) Exposure Hazard.
12. I.S. 1644-1988Code of practice for Fire safety of buildings (General) Exit requirements and
personal Hazards.
13. I.S. 1888-1972Methods of load test on soils.
14. I.S.: 1893-1984Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures.
15. I.S: 1904-1986Code of practice for design & construction of pile foundation in soil structural
safety of building foundation.
16. I.S. 2911-1990Code of practice for design and construction of pile (Part I to IV) foundation.
17. I.S. 2950-1981Code of practice for design and construction of raft foundation.
18. I.S. 3370-1965Code of Practice for water retaining structures.
19. I.S. 3414-1987Code of Practice for Design and Installation of joints in buildings.
20. I.S. 4326-1993Code of practice for earthquake resistant design of structure.
21. I.S. 6403-1981Code of practice for Determination of bearing pressure of shallow foundation .

326
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

22. I.S.13920-1993Code of practice for ductility detailing of reinforced concrete structures subjected
to seismic forces .
Latest revisions of above code shall be followed.
I.S. Codes are also available for design of special types of structures like folded plate, shell structures etc.
Refer publication list of BIS for the same.
Similarly there are special publications of I.S., which are useful for design of buildings such as.

1. SP-16 Design Aids to I.S.: 456-1978

2. SP-22 Explanation to I.S.: 1893 & I.S.: 4326.
3. SP-23 Concrete Mix.
4. SP-24 Explanation of I.S. 456-1978.
5. SP-25 Cracks in buildings and their repairs.
6. SP- 34 Detailing in R.C.C. structures.
7. SP-38 Design of steel trusses.
For aspects, which are not covered by any other I.S. codes available, relevant International Standard
Codes may be referred to. While designing R.C.C. structures, important provisions (as detailed below)
of I.S. 456 must be borne in mind.
General Provisions
Clause No. 20 Deals with stability of the structure against overturning and sliding.
Clause No. 26.2.1: Development length of bars.
Clause No. 26.3.2: Minimum distance between individual bars.
Clause No.26.3.3: Maximum distance between bars in tension.
Clause No.26.4: Cover to reinforcement.
Clause No.27: Expansion joints.
Provision regarding slabs
Clause No.22.2: Effective span.
Clause No.22.4.1: Arrangement of live load.
Clause No.22.5: Moment and shear co-efficient for continuous beams .
Clause No.23.2: Control of deflection.
Clause No.24.1: Provisions regarding solid slabs.
Clause No. 26.5.2.1: Minimum reinforcement.
Clause No.26.5.2.2: Maximum diameter.
Provisions regarding beams
Clause No.22.2: Effective span
Clause No.22.4.1: Arrangement of live load.
Clause No. 22.5: Moment and shear co-efficient for continuous beams.
Clause No. 23.2: Control of deflection.
Clause No. 23.3: Slenderness limits for beams.
Clause No. 26.5.1.1: Tension Reinforcement.
Clause No. 26.5.1.2: Compression reinforcement.
Clause No. 26.5.1.3: Side face reinforcement.
Clause No.26.5.1.5: Maximum spacing of shear reinforcement.
Clause No.26.5.1.6: Minimum shear reinforcement.
Clause No.26.5.1.7: Distribution of torsion reinforcement.
Provisions for columns;
Clause No.25.1.2: Short and slender compression members.
Clause No.25.1.3: Unsupported length.
Clause No.25.2: Effective length of compression members.
Clause No.25.3: Slenderness limits for columns.
Clause No.25.4: Minimum eccentricity.
Clause No.26.5.3.1: Longitudinal reinforcement.
Clause No. 26.5.3.2: Transverse reinforcement.
Clause No.43: Cracking Consideration.

327
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Provisions for footings

Clause No. 33.1.2: Thickness at the edge of footing.
Clause No.34.4: Transfer of load at the base of column.
Appendix- 1500 A
7.14 DESIGN DATA FOR MAJOR AND MINOR BRIDGES
7.14.1 General
1. Name of Road :
2. Classification of Road : SH / MDR / ODR
3. Road chainage at centre :
4. Land width of road :
5. Formation width of road :
6. Width of Roadway :
7. Name of the Stream/Canal/Backwater :
8. What arrangement exists for crossing the river at present
a. during monsoon :
b. during dry season :
9. Type of Navigation
a. (if any, whether country boat / INS / NWW) :
10. Distance of site from the sea :
7.14.2 Catchment area and run-off (applicable for rivers only)
11. Catchment area
in hilly parts :
in plains :
12. Rainfall during the year and maximum recorded intensity :
13. Nature of catchmnet :
14. Any artificial or natural storage present in the catchment :
C. Nature of Stream/Canal:
15. Is the stream
a) alluvial with erodable banks :
b) quasi-alluvial with fixed bed but erodable banks :
c) rigid with inerodable bed and banks :
16. Is the stream
a) perennial : Yes/No
b) seasonal : Yes/No
c) tidal : Yes/No
if so i) High Tide Level (HTL) :
ii)Low Tide Level (LTL) :
d) saline : Yes/No
e) polluted with any industrial waste : Yes/No
if so, specify the predominant chemicals in the waste:
17. Hydraulic particulars at low water level
a) Low Water Level (LWL) :
b) observed water surface velocity :
c) water surface slope :
d) bed slope :
18. Hydraulic particulars at high flood level :
a) High Flood Level (HFL)
i) at site :
ii) at u/s cross section :
iii) at d/s cross section :
(specify distance of u/s & d/s from site)
b) estimated water surface velocity :
c) water surface slope :
e) area of cross section
i) at site :

328
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

ii) at u/s cross section

iii) at d/s cross section :
f) discharge at H.F.L. :
19. R.L. and location of maximum scour recorded below HFL:
20. R.L. of maximum anticipated scour below HFL (scour
depth shall be determined actually by mechanical means)
21. Nature of bed material: fine sand / loose clay /Coarse sand /
fine gravel / Sandy or stiff clay /
Coarse gravel / Boulders /Rock
7.14.2.1 D. Ventway Parameters:
22. Vertical clearance above HFL required for navigation:
23. Horizontal clearance required for navigation:
24. Does the stream carry drifting matter in floods? :
25. Details of training works, if needed:
E. Alignment and approaches:
26. Whether the bridge proposed is right or skew? :
if skew, give the angle of skew :
27. Whether the approaches straight? :
if not i) straight reach and radius of curve at side-1 :
ii) straight reach and radius of curve at side-2 :
28. Maximum approach height possible at site:
29. Proposed gradient on approaches:
30. Do the approaches require land acquisition/in
voluntary displacement:
F. Superstructure:
31. Loading to be done for (Class A / 70R):
31. Proposed clear roadway over the bridge:
32. Width of footpath, if any:
33. Formation level i) at centre of bridge:
ii) at abutment points:
34. Number and size of span recommended:
G. Foundations:
35. Foundations recommended: Open / Well / Pile

7.14.2.2 H. Existing Structures

36. Details of each of the existing bridges on the stream/canal in the vicinity
No. Details Upstream Downstream
a) Distance from site
b) Number and size of spans
c) Year of construction
d) Type of structure
e) Width of roadway
f) Provision of footpath
g) Vertical clearance
h) Horizontal clearance
i) Type & depth of foundations
j) Whether the existing structure
is trouble free
k) Any other information
7.14.2.3 I. Miscellaneous
37. Name of town nearest to the bridge:
38. Nearest Railway station and its distance from bridge site:
39. Is the site located in an industrially or otherwise polluted
area: (If so, specify the predominant air and water pollutant):

329
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

40. Nature of terrain: Plain/Rolling/Hilly

Prepared by Verified by Reviewed by Recommended by

Signature
Designation Assistant Asst. Executive Executive Superintending
Engineer Engineer Engineer Engineer(R & B)

Appendix 1500B
CHECK LIST OF DETAILS REQUIRED FOR APPROVAL OF ALIGNMENT
Road/ Bridge
Name of Work:
1. S.E.’s Authentication in all drawings and data: Yes/No
2. Investigation report: Yes/No
3. Form D.A. Completely filled up: Yes/No
4. Design Data form completely filled up: Yes/No
5. Index map (District map): Yes/No
6. Key map (site plan): Yes/No
7. Two copies of Alignment plan with the following details: Yes/No
a) Names of stations connected: Yes/No
b) North direction: Yes/No
c) Name of River: Yes/No
d) Direction of flow: Yes/No
e) Skew angle (if any): Yes/No
f) Width of river at HFL: Yes/No
g) Proposed Land width (available/to be acquired): Yes/No
h) Continuous chainages of approach roads: Yes/No
i) Bore hole locations with chainages: Yes/No
j) Strip plan for affected properties: Yes/No
k) Social impact assessment (SIA) reports. If the impact fall
within category A or B Yes/No
8. L.S. PLOT of the road along the alignment: Yes/No
a) Reduced levels: Yes/No
b) Proposed formation levels: Yes/No
c) LWL, OFL, HFL and LTL & HTL(if any) :Yes/No
d) Bore hole details with reduced levels: Yes/No
9. List of horizontal curves with chainages: Yes/No
10. List of gradient with chainages: Yes/No
Note: 1 If any of the above items is marked as ‘No’ , the reasons for the same shall be
indicated along with this.
2 Italicised details not required for roads.
Appendix 1500C
CHECK LIST OF DETAILS REQUIRED FOR DESIGN OF ROADS/ BRIDGE

Name of Work:
1. S.E.’s Authentication in all drawings and data: Yes/No
2. Copy of Administrative Sanction obtained: Yes/No
3. Investigation report: Yes/No
4. Design Data form completely filled up: Yes/No
5. Index map (District map): Yes/No
6. Key map (site plan): Yes/No
7. Catchment area map: Yes/No

330
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

8. Two copies of approved Alignment plan with the following details: Yes/No
a) Names of stations connected: Yes/No
b) North direction: Yes/No
c) Name of River: Yes/No
d) Direction of flow: Yes/No
e) Skew angle (if any): Yes/No
f) Width of river at HFL: Yes/No
g) Proposed Land width (available/to be acquired): Yes/No
h) Social impact data sheet Yes/No
i) table of impact by type Yes/No
j) Continuous chainages of approach roads: Yes/No
k) Bore hole locations with chainages: Yes/No
9. L.S. PLOT of the road along the alignment: Yes/No
a) Reduced levels: Yes/No
b) Proposed formation levels: Yes/No
c) LWL, OFL, HFL and LTL & HTL (if any): Yes/No
d) Bore hole details with reduced levels: Yes/No
10. Cross sections of the river
a) At site: Yes/No
b) At upstream side: Yes/No
c) At downstream side: Yes/No
11. List of horizontal curves with chainages: Yes/No
12. List of gradient with chainages: Yes/No
13. Discharge calculation sheets: Yes/No
14. Vent way calculation sheets: Yes/No
15. Design Details of pavement (BT/CC/WBM): Yes/No
16. Resettlement Action plan Yes/No

Note: 1 If any of the above items is marked as ‘No’ , the reasons for the same shall be
indicated along with this.
2 Italicised details not required for roads.

APPENDIX 1600 A1

Model Preliminary estimate for Road Works

Name of Project
Name of Division, subdivision, section. (Constituency also)
Part I. Acquisition of site.
(a) Land acquisition.
(h) Acquisition of structures and R& R cost.
(c) Shifting of electrical lines, Telephone/Telegraph lines, Pipe lines
etc. Part II. General improvements.
(a) Felling trees.
(b) Earthwork-widening, raising and/or forming embankments.
(c) Blasting rock.
(d) Conveyance of materials.

(a) Retaining walls.

(b) Construction of culverts.
(c) Construction of small
bridges. Part IV. Surfacing
(a) Gravelling or soling and/or metalling.

331
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

(i) Supply of materials.

(ii) Spreading & consolidation of materials to form the road.
(iii) Forming the sides.
(b) Remetalling.
(i) Supply of materials.
(ii) Spreading and consolidation of mate materials to form the road surface.
(iii) Forming the sides.

(i) Supply of materials (a) metal (b) sand (c) bitumen.

(ii) Mixing, spreading and consolidating the materials.
(iii) Forming sides.

(a) Turfing slopes of embankments.

(b) Cutting side drains and slope drains.
(c) Providing guard stones.
(d) Providing Km stones.
(c) Providing signboards.
Part VII. Tools and plant.
Part VIII. Value of departmental materials such as rubble credited, if
any Part IX. (a)Contingency charges.
(b) Difference in value between recovery rate and issue rate of materials etc.
(c) Cost for project preparation including investigation and design.
TOTAL COST OF WORKS
Part X. Time schedule for the completion of the work.

APPENDIX 1600 A2
Model Preliminary Estimate for Bridge Works
Name of Project
Name of Division, subdivision, section. (Constituency also)
Part I. Acquisition of site,
(a) Land Acquisition.
(b) Acquisition of structures and R & R cost.
(c) Shifting of electrical lines, Telephone lines, Telegraph lines, Pipe lines etc.
(d) Felling trees.
Part 11. Construction of temporary site office and working yard when necessary.
Part III Foundation.
Part IV. Sub-structure.
Part V. Super-structure.
Part VI. Approaches.
(a) Earth work filling/Cutting including conveyance if any.
(b) Blasting rock.
(c) Masonry works.
(i) Retaining walls.
(ii) culverts.
(d) Soling and/or metalling.
(i) Supply of materials.
(ii) Spreading & consolidating the materials for forming the road surface.
(e) Black top surfacing.
(i) Supply of materials (a) metal (b) sand (c) bitumen.
(ii) Mixing, spreading & consolidation for forming the surface of the road.
(iii) Forming the sides of roads.

(a) Providing guard stones & Km. stones.

(b) Name and sign boards.
(c) Turfing slopes of embankments.
(d) Cutting side drains and/or slope drains.

332
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Part VIII. Tools & Plant.

Part IX. Value of departmental materials such as rubble credited, if any
Part X. (a)Contingency charges.
(b) Difference in value between recovery rate and issue rate of materials etc.
(c) Cost for project preparation including investigation and design.
TOTAL COST OF WORKS
Part X. Time schedule for the completion of the work.

APPENDIX 1600 A3
Ill. Model Preliminary Estimate for Building Works

Name of Project
Name of Division, subdivision, section. (Constituency also)
Part I. Acquisition of site-. .
(a) Land acquisition.
(b) Acquisition of structures, if any.
(c ) Resettlement and Rehabilitation cost

(d) Shifting of Electrical lines/ telephone/Telegraph lines and Drainage Sewer Pipe
lines. Part II. Preparation of site.
(a) Clearing and levelling site.
(b) Demolishing existing structures, felling trees etc., if
any. Part III. Earth work.
(a) Earth work for foundation.
(b) Filling basement.
Part IV. Sub-structure and super-structure.
(a) Foundation.
(b) Basement.
(c) Superstructure.
(d) Wood work for doors and windows etc.
(e) Roof timber/trusses.
(f) M. P. tiled/A. C. Sheet/RCC/Roof.

(a) Flooring.
(b) Ceiling.
(c) Plastering.
(d) Painting etc.

(a) Water supply both internal and external / well with pumping arrangement and overhead tank.
(b) Sanitary installation both internal and external.
(c) Electrical installation both internal and external.
(d) Provision for electronic installation both internal and external.
Part VII.
(a) Compound wall/Enclosures.
(b) Approach roads.

a) Lift
b) Firefighting
c) HVAC
d) Storm water storage
Part XI. Other items.
(a) Contingency.
(b) Difference in value between recovery rate and issue rate of materials etc.
(c) Cost for project preparation including investigation and design.

333
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

TOTAL COST OF WORKS

Part XI. Time schedule for the completion of work.

Appendix 1600 B
Docket Sheet
ISSUE OF TECHNICAL SANCTION

Kerala …………………………………………………….Department

Name of Division
Name of Sub Division
Name of Work
Amount of Estimate
Reference to Administrative Sanction
Register Number and date of estimate
Source of funds
Duration in which work has to be executed

Estimate enclosed as briefly described above is sanctioned as register number ……………………

…………..dated……………….

Signature of Engineer

Appendix 1600 B1
Preliminary Estimate Report
(Details to be incorporated in Preliminary Project Reports for Roads)
1. Name of Work and Scope
2. Authority and Plan Provision
3. Climatic, Geographic and Historic details
4. Necessity/Justification (with traffic counts): Reasons for justifying the work, based on traffic
intensity, proximity and location in relation to important town and industrial and commercial
centres, educational institutions, hospitals etc., which will be served by the road.
5. Existing facilities
i) Road way
ii) Transport
iii) Pavement and Shaller Condition
iv) Cross drainage facilities
6. Engineering facilities required for transport
i. Classification as per standards.
ii. Alignment with respect of topographical features, bridge sites, important town etc.
iii. Gradient
iv. Type of pavement and surfacing
v. Geometries with reference to the general standards for different classifications.
vi. Protective works required
vii. Drainage facilities and cross drainage works with location and type of each work
viii. Any other technical features as may be found necessary
7. Timeframe to complete proposed project
8. Plans including an index map, location map showing alternative proposals, LS and typical CS.
9. Rough cost estimate giving a break up of the cost under major heads, viz, land acquisition, R &
R, EW, pavement, surfacing, protective works, cross drainage works as per Appendix 3.13 a.

334
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Note: 1. Where realignment of telegraph posts, telephone lines, cables water mains etc. are involved, the
site survey shall show their present location and the extent of realignment requirement required, so that
the concerned departments may be addressed.
2. The standards prescribed in regard to road width and geometrics of the road shall be fully adhered to
through out the length of the road. If for any reasons such adherence is found not possible, the sanction
of the Chief Engineer shall be obtained for relaxing the standards.

Appendix 1600 B2
(Details to be incorporated in Preliminary Project Reports for Bridges)
1. Name of Work and Scope
2. Authority and Plan Provision
3. Climatic, Geographic and Historic details
4. Necessity/Justification (with traffic): Reasons for justifying the work, based on traffic intensity,
details of the bridges crossing the river within a reasonable distance of the proposed bridge.
5. Existing facilities
6. Engineering features giving:
i. Class of road in which bridge is proposed and Technical standards for bridge.
ii. Flood characteristics and maximum flood discharge in the stream.
iii. Periods of high flood levels for a number of years.
iv. Soil and sub soil particulars at the site
v. Type of foundation
vi. Type of superstructure suggested.
vii. Angle and direction of skew if any.
viii. Number of spans
ix. Any other technical details as may be necessary
7. Plans viz, index plan, site plan, LS of stream, cross section of stream at site of bridge and at 30
metres upstream and downstream etc.
8. Cross sections of the stream within 250 M. upstream and down stream where the stream is
appreciably narrower than the proposed site (if any)
9. Rough cost estimate with break up of cost under major heads viz, land acquisition, EW,
pavement, surfacing, protective works, cross drainage works as per Appendix 3.13 b.
10. Timeframe to complete proposed project

Appendix 1600 B3
(Details to be incorporated in Preliminary Project Reports for Buildings)
1. Name of Work and Scope
2. Authority and Plan Provision
3. Climatic, Geographic and Historic details
4. Necessity/Justification for the building
5. Details of Existing Facilities and Structures
6. Engineering aspects giving
i. Site condition
ii. Accessibility viz. approaches roads and internal roads within colonies.
iii. Nature of terrain
iv. Sub soil particulars
v. Prevailing winds
vi. Type of buildings proposed
vii. Type of foundation suggested
viii. Proximity to water and power supply
7. Plans viz, Index map, site plan with layout and line plan of the buildings.
8. Rough cost estimate as per Appendix 3.13 c
Note: i. The sites for buildings shall be chosen in consultation with the Department for which it is
constructed.

335
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

ii. For major buildings, the site shall be selected only after inspection of prospective sites by the
Superintending Engineer and the Chief Architect. The proposal shall conform to the development plan if
any prepared for the area by the Town planning or any other development authority.
iii. The by laws or building rules of the Corporation, Municipality or other Local Body or Development
Authority, as the case may be shall be complied with, in regard to the set back line, free space around
building etc.
iv. In the case of buildings to be put up within 5 km of existing aerodrome, the height of the building
shall be restricted by Rules laid down in this regard by the Ministry of Transport and communication
(Dept. of Civil Aviation).
v. Shall be consistent with provisions of National Building Code 2005

Appendix 1600 C
Docket sheet (preliminary report / detailed report)
Kerala Public Works Department
Circle..
Division..
Sub Division. ………………………….

Section..

1.Name of work:
2.Amount of Administrative Sanction *:
3.Reference to Administrative Sanction *:
4.Source of funds:
5.Head of classification as per viz. major
head, minor head, departmental head and
the service head :
6. Recommendation/Orders of the Assistant Engineer

Submitted to the Assistant Executive Engineer

Signature of the Assistant Engineer (with date)

7. Recommendation/Orders of Assistant Executive

Engineer Submitted to the Executive Engineer

Signature of Asst. Executive Engineer (with date)

8. Recommendation /Orders of the Executive

Engineer. Submitted to the Superintending Engineer

Signature of Executive Engineer (with date)

9. Recommendations/Orders of the Superintending Engineer**

Submitted to the Chief Engineer

Signature of Superintending Engineer (with date)

10. Recommendations/ Orders of the Chief Engineer.**

336
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

*Only for Detailed Reports

**only wherever applicable
Note: - Certificates as detailed under 6.2.2 shall be recorded in the docket sheet along with the
recommendations.
Appendix 1600 D
Checklist for Detailed Estimate Report

1. Name of Work and Scope

2. Authority and Plan Provision with details of administrative sanction
3. Climatic, Geographic, Environmental, Historic, Social details
4. Necessity/Justification (with traffic counts for R& B Works)
5. Pavement and Shaller Condition (for R& B Works)
6. Cross drainage requirements and details (for R& B Works)
7. Rehabilitation works, diversion of utilities.
8. Details of land acquisition, demolition, Resettlement and Rehabilitation etc.
9. Timeframe to complete proposed project
10. Detailed drawings and designs
11. Itemised detailed estimate

* Note :
(1) An estimate report explaining the location, length of roads and other salient features of the works
proposed, and a site plan shall be furnished.
(2) All the items indicated in the model estimates may not be required in all cases. Where an item is not
required, it may be indicated as 'Nil'.
(3) The standard specification laid down for different classification of roads and bridges and standing
circular orders shall invariably be followed while proposing the works under various sub heads in
the model estimates.
(4) Under ‘Land Acquisition’ the area of land, plinth area, or other relevant details of the structures to be
acquired and approximate costs for shifting lines shall be furnished.
(5) ‘ Under General Improvements’ the quantity of earthwork, and rock blasting (Approximate) shall be
furnished.
(6) In the case of retaining walls, the section proposed, height and the type of construction i.e. D. R. or
Masonry, the length etc., shall be indicated.
(7) In the case of culverts, the span, or the size of the culverts shall be furnished.
(8) In the case of small bridge works, which form part of a road work, the span, width of roadway etc.,
shall be noted.
(9) For "Surfacing" the formation width of the roadway, width of soling and/or metalling/ gravelling,
width and type of blacktopping, and the length shall be furnished.
(10) In the model estimate for bridges, in addition to the points mentioned above the following points
shall also be noted.
(a) Under 'Foundation', the type of foundation i.e. open, Pile or well, size and, No. of piles and/or
wells shall be furnished.
(b) Sub-structure. Type and size of piers and abutments have to be noted.
(c) Superstructure. Type of decking, width of roadway, span etc., shall be noted.
(11) With regard to buildings, in addition to the general instructions mentioned above, the following
points shall a1so be noted.
(a) If the estimate provides for residential quarters for Government employees, the pay scales of the
officers for whom the quarters are intended, shall be furnished.
(b) In the case of buildings for accommodating officers, the number of offices, details of staff and
other requirements shall be indicated.
(c) In the case of other buildings also, like hospitals, hostels etc., full details of requirements shall
be given.
(d) The possibility of getting adequate supply, of potable water shall be investigated, where there is
no protected water supply system

337
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

APPENDIX 1600 E

KERALA …………………………… DEPARTMENT

8 Deviation statement in the course of actual construction of works
Name of work Sub-heads in which Name of departure Reason for the Results Orders of the
departure occurs Original or sanctioned Arrangements proposed to deviation anticipated …………….
arrangement be carried out Engineer

APPENDIX 1600 F

FORM No. D.B.4-COMPARATIVE STATEMENT (LARGE)

Abstract of original and revised estimates with explanations for difference in quantities and rates
Subheads Original Estimate Revised Estimate Explanation
of estimates Quantity Rate Amount Quantity Rate Amount for work
and items Already To be Total Rs Ps Already To be Total Savings Excess
of works Rs Ps Rs executed executed executed executed Rs. (Minus) (Plus)
Rs. Rs

APPENDIX 1800 A
(Vide Para
G. W. D. 156
Register of sanction to estimates for ................................
Technical Name of work Amount of Reference to Administrative sanction Source of funds
Sanction No. estimate
Authority No. Date

338
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

APPLICATION FOR RENEWAL REGISTRATION AS CONTRACTORS *

*(As per GO (Ms) No. 59/2013/PWD dated 17.07.2013 this section is amended-
Refer pages 345 to 353 for new forms)

1. Name of Applicant (In Block letters) :

2. Full Address :

3. Officer to whose application for renewal is :

made

5. Previous registration No. and the year from :

which the continues to be on the rolls
6. Details of financial capacity (enclose solvency :
certificate on bank guarantee. If the period of
Bank Guarantee already produced in previous
years has elapsed)
7. Particulars of experience on works labour :
command equipment and other facilities on
head and technical assistance available etc.
8. State whether he is registered contractor in any :
other office in the PWD
9. State Whether the applicant was penalized in :
connection with may contract with
Government if so, give details.
10. State whether any of his previous applications :
for registration in any of the officers in Kerala
PWD has been rejects.
11. Enclose copy of Income tax clearance :
certificate
12. State whether the applicant is under this :
employments, dismissed Government servant

Station:
Date:
Signature of Applicant

339
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

GOVERNMENT OF KERALA
……………………………… DEPARTMENT

Name of Circle
Address and Phone No. :

Name of Division
Address and Phone No. :

CERTIFICATE OF EXPERIENCE

1. Name of Contractor :
1.2 Address :

1.3 Registration Number :

2. Name of Work :
3. Amount of original contract :
4. Whether Sublet work :
5. Amount of sublet work :
6. Agreement No. and date :
7. Amount of work executed :
8. Stipulated period of completion :
9. Scheduled date of completion :
10. Extended date of completion :
11. Number of extension (s) granted :
12. Final date of completion :
13. Details of major components of the
work with quantity and list of machinery
:
used/hired (attach separate sheet if
required)
14. Whether the work was completed :
satisfactorily
15. Whether any penalties/fine/Termination :

340
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

imposed
16. Litigation/Cases/Enquiry pending in :
respect of the work with status
17. Defect or liability noted during the :
Guarantee period
18. Performance of the contractor : Poor/Satisfactory/Good/V.
Good/Outstanding
19. Other remarks if any :
20. Name of the officer issuing the :
Certificate

CERTIFICATE

Certified that the details furnished of the

work…………………………………………………………………………..

………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………………

…………………………………………………….are true.

Signature with Seal

Place:

Date:

341
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

APPLICATION FOR REGISTRATION AS CONTRACTOR IN ALL CATEGORIES

1. Name of Applicant (In Block Letters) :

2. Full Address :

3. Office to whom applications is made :

4. In the case of individuals who was :
partners of the firm or in the case of firm of
contractor the following details should
be furnished
i) Whether the firm in a private/public Ltd. :
Concern or undivided Hindu Family
individual or Regd. Partnership firm
(Attested copies of ded and articles of
association is enclosed)
ii) Name of partner with their liabilities. :
iii) Name of person holding Power of :
Attorney
iv) Place of business :
5. Category to which Regn. Is sought :
6. Details of financial capacity (enclosed :
solvency certificate or bank guarantee)
7. Particulars of experience on works labour :
concerned equipment and other facilities
on head and technical assistance available
to.
8. State whether he is a Regd. Contractor in :
any other office in PWD
9. State whether the applicant was published :
in connection with any contract with
Govt. If so give details.
10. State whether any of the previous :
application for registration in any office in
Kerala PWD has been rejects.
11. State whether the applicant or any of :
partners or shareholders/ is/ are dismissed
Govt. servants
12. State whether the applicant has produced :
plumber/electrical licenses from contract
authority (only in case of contractor
executing the specified type of work)

I have read and understood the rules regarding the Registration of contractor published in
G.O (P) 69/PWD dated 25-4-65 and amended from time to time.

Place:
Date:
SIGNATURE OF APPLICANT

342
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Registration No.
Contractor’s
Registration Card

KERALA STATE

Form III

Name……...…………………………………
……………...........
of (Permanent address)
………………………………………………
…………………………….
………………………………………………
…………………………….
………………………………………………
…………………………….

2 3
Of (Temporary address) Of (Changed address)
...................................................................
...........................................................................
.......... ..
...................................................................
...........................................................................
.......... ..
...................................................................
...........................................................................
.......... ..
Of (Changed address) Of (Changed address)
...................................................................
...........................................................................
.......... ..
...................................................................
...........................................................................
.......... ..
...................................................................
...........................................................................
.......... ..
Of (Changed address) Of (Changed address)
...................................................................
...........................................................................
.......... ..
...................................................................
...........................................................................
.......... ..
...................................................................
...........................................................................
.......... ..

4 5
Of (Changed address) Is/are registered as a contractor under the
...................................................................
category
.......... ...............................................................
...................................................................
...........................................................................
.......... ...
...................................................................
The registration No. being
.......... ...................................
Of (Changed address) ...........................................................................

343
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

................................................................... ...
.......... Electrical / Non Electrical.
................................................................... The registration is a valid from
.......... .................................. to
................................................................... .......................................
.......... Date............................
Of (Changed address)
................................................................... Signature & Designation
of the Registering Officer
..........
...................................................................
..........
...................................................................
..........

6 7
Note:- No.
1. The registration card is to be renewed Date...........................
every two years. This Registration is renewed for a period of 2
2. Renewal applications are to be submitted years from ................................. to
st
in the prescribed form before the 1 ..............................
January of every year together with an up- Signature & Designation
to date income tax clearance certificate Of Registration authority
and fee for Rs As per rules (Non
refundable) No.
3. Renewal applications will however be Date...........................
consider for a further period of one This Registration is renewed for a period of 2
st
month. ie. Upto 31 January of every year, years from ................................. to
provided they are accompanied by a fine ..............................
of Rs. As per rules. Signature & Designation
4. While tendering for the work number of Of Registration authority
registration card shall invariably be
referred to produced when called for.
8
No.
Date...........................
This Registration is renewed for a period
of 2 years from ................................. to
..............................
Signature & Designation
Of Registration authority

No.
Date...........................
This Registration is renewed for a period
of 2 years from ................................. to
..............................
Signature & Designation
Of Registration authority

344
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 1900 A
*(As per GO (Ms) No. 59/2013/PWD dated 17.07.2013 this section is amended)
APPLICATION FOR ISSUE OF EXPERIENCE CERTIFICATE FOR REGISTRATION
AS A CONTRACTOR

1. Name of Applicant/ Firm (In Block letters) :

2. Full Address :

3. Date of birth (for individuals) :

4. Professional qualification, if any (for individuals) :

5. Officer to whom application is made :

6. Category of Registration intended :

7. Particulars of experience on works :

a) Whether as a contractor/ supervisor/engineer/consultant :

b) Name of firm in which employed :

(if experience is as a Supervisor/Engineer)

c) No. of projects executed/ supervised within last three years :

d) Type of projects done/ supervised :

e) Name of each project and location :

f) Project cost for each project :

g) Period during which work was done/ supervised :

(Add separate sheet if required for items c to g)

8. Documents submitted to prove claim under item 7

Whether following documents have been produced

a) Details of registration of firm :

b) Architectural and Structural drawings of projects :

c) Copy of agreement with client :

d) Certificate from client on satisfactory completion :

9. Documents to prove identity and age

345
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Whether following documents have been produced

a) Photo Identity Card approved by government :

showing full name and address (in case of individual)

b) Documents to prove date of birth (in case of individual) :

10. Declaration

I have read and understood the rules regarding the Registration of contractors in Kerala Public
Works Department. All the details furnished above are true and the documents submitted are
those prepared for the projects in which I was involved. I understand that if the details furnished
and the documents submitted are proved to be false at a later stage, my registration would stand
cancelled and I will be blacklisted as per rules.

Place
Date SIGNATURE OF APPLICANT

CERTIFICATE

Certified that the details of experience furnished by the applicant are found to be true on enquiry.
It is ascertained that Sri ………………………… is having ……… years of experience as a
Contractor/ Supervisor/ Engineer. From the records submitted, the cost of projects done/
supervised by him is found to be approximately Rs. ……………..
He is qualified for registration as a ……….Category Contractor in Kerala Public Works
Department.

Place:
Date: Office seal Signature of Engineer
(with seal)

Appendix 1900 B
APPLICATION FOR REGISTRATION AS A CONTRACTOR IN ALL CATEGORIES/
UPGRADATION OF CATEGORY

1. Name of Applicant/ Firm (In Block letters) :

2. Full Address :
3. Officer to whom application is made :
4. Whether applicant is an individual/
Hindu undivided family individual/ firm :
5. In case of registered firms, state whether
346
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Proprietership/ Partnership/ Company :

6. Furnish the following details in case of Partnership/ Company
i) Whether the firm is a private/ public Ltd. concern
or registered partnership firm :
ii) Name of partner with their liabilities :
iii) Name of person holding Power of Attorney :
iv) Place of business :
7. Category to which registration is sought :
8. Details of financial capacity :
9. Particulars of experience on works, labour, command,
equipments and other facilities on hand and
technical assistance available :
10. State whether copy of Contractors Work Register has been
enclosed (in case of application for upgradation of category) :
11. State whether applicant is a registered contractor
in any other office of PWD :
12. State whether applicant was penalized in connection
with any contract with Government. If so give details :
13. State whether any of the previous application or
Registration in any office in PWD has been rejected :
14. State whether the applicant or any of partners or
shareholders is/are dismissed Government servants :
15. State whether applicant has under his employment
dismissed Government servants :
16. State whether applicant has produced experience
certificate as required by rules :
17. State whether applicant has attached copy of PAN card :
18. State whether applicant has attached acknowledgement
of income tax return last filed :
19. State whether applicant has enclosed approved
photo ID to prove name and address (in case of individuals) :
20. State whether applicant has enclosed documents
to prove date of birth (in case of individuals) :
21. State whether applicant has attached registration certificate :
( in case of registered firm/ Company)
22. State whether attested copies of deed and articles of
association are enclosed ( in case of firms) :
23. Declaration

I affirm that all the particulars given above are true. I understand that if the details given by are
found false at a later stage, I will be blacklisted by the Registering Authority. Further I swear
that, I have read and understood the rules regarding registration of contractors. I accept the rules.
I also affirm that I will be carrying out the responsibilities as a contractor as envisaged in the
rules and contract documents.

347
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Place
Date Name & Signature of Applicant

Office Use

The applicant Sri…………………………………is approved to be registered as a Contractor.

The application of Sri………………………………has been rejected for the following reasons.

1).
2).
3).

Security deposit to be remitted………………

Registration fee to be remitted………………

Signature of Engineer with date

Security deposit and registration fee remitted on………………..

Sri. …………………………………………… is registered as an ……….Category contractor
with Reg. No. ………….. Entered in the register of contractors kept in this office on
…………………as Sl. no……..

Signature of Engineer with date and seal

Office seal
Appendix 1900 B1
INTIMATION MEMO

Office of the ………………………

Station…………………………….
Date……………………………….

With reference to an application dated ………………. for registration as a contractor, Sri,/

Messrs …………………………………………. is/ are hereby informed that he/they can be
registered as a ……………… category contractor, subject to the rules governing registration of
contractors. He/ They will remit a sum of Rs. …………….. as registration fee and produce
Security Deposit/ solvency for Rs. ……………..

Signature of Engineer
To
Sri./ Messrs………………………………….

………………………………………………

………………………………………………

348
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 1900 C

Registration No. Contractor’s

Registration Card

KERALA STATE

Form III
Name …………………………………………
of (permanent address)
…………………………………………………
………………………………………………..
………………………………………………..
Date of birth………………………………….

2 3
Of (Temporary address) Of (Changed address)
……………………………………………… ………………………………………………
………………………………………………. ……………………………………………….
……………………………………………… ………………………………………………
Of (Temporary address) Of (Changed address)
……………………………………………… ………………………………………………
………………………………………………. ……………………………………………….
……………………………………………… ………………………………………………
Of (Temporary address) Of (Changed address)
……………………………………………… ………………………………………………
………………………………………………. ……………………………………………….
……………………………………………… ………………………………………………

4 5
Of (Changed address) Is/ are registered as a contractor under the
……………………………………………… category
………………………………………………. ………………………………………………..
……………………………………………… …………………………………………………
Of (Changed address) The registration No. being
……………………………………………… ……………………………………………….
………………………………………………. Electrical/ Non Electrical

349
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

……………………………………………… The registration is valid from

Of (Changed address) ………………. to
……………………………………………… …………………
………………………………………………. Date ……………
………………………………………………

Signature & Designation

of the Registering Officer
6 7

Note:- No.
1. The registration card is to be renewed every Date………………….
three years This Registration is renewed for a period of 3
2. Renewal applications are to be submitted in years from ……………………….to
the prescribed form before 1st January of every ………………….
year together with an upto date income tax
clearance certificate and fee for Rs. as per Signature & Designation
rules (Non refundable) of Registration Authority
3. Renewal applications will however be No.
considered for a further period of one month. Date………………….
i.e. upto 31st January of every year, provided This Registration is renewed for a period of 3
they are accompanied by a fine of Rs. as per years from ……………………….to
rules. ………………….
4. While tendering for the work number of
registration card shall invariably be referred to/ Signature & Designation
produced when called for of Registration Authority
8
No.
Date………………….
This Registration is renewed for a period of 3
years from ……………………….to
………………….

Signature & Designation

of Registration Authority

No.
Date………………….
This Registration is renewed for a period of 3
years from ……………………….to
………………….

Signature & Designation

of Registration Authority

350
 3 2 1 1 Sl No
2 Name of work
3 Estimate PAC
4 Agreed PAC
5 Agreement No. & Date
6 Period/ Date of completion as per agreement
7 Defects Liability Period
8 Dated signature of Agreement Authority (for entry of items 1 to 7)

CONTRACTORS WORK REGISTER

9 Date of handing over site
10 Expenditure as on date of completion fixed

11 First extension of TOC, Date & Fine

Appendix 1900 D
12 Reason for granting extension/ whether default of contractor
13 Dated signature of Agreement Authority (for entry of items 9 to 12)
14 Second extension of TOC, Date & Fine
15 Reason for granting extension/ whether default of contractor

PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION

16 Dated signature of Agreement Authority (for entry of items 14 to 15)
17 Third extension of TOC, Date & Fine
18 Reason for granting extension/ whether default of contractor
19 Dated signature of Agreement Authority (for entry of items 17 to 18)
20 Date of completion
21 Project cost- Total bill amount (as per CC final)
22 Date of final payment
23 Dated signature of Payment Authority (for entry of items 20 to 22)

2012
24 Date on which security was released
25 Any Litigation/Case/Enquiry regarding the work
351

26 Dated signature of Agreement Authority (for entry of items 24 to 25)

 3 2 1 Sl No

1
Date

RECORD OF ENTRIES IN CONTRACTORS WORK REGISTER

2
Name of work

3
Agreement No. & Date

4
Name of contractor

Appendix 1900 E
Entry as made in Contractors Work Register

PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION

Initials of Agreement Authority
7

Remarks
8

2012
352
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 1900 F
PERFORMANCE CERTIFICATE

maintaining Quality

Any penalties/ fine/

Reason for delay, if
Actual completion

adhering to TOC
Performance on

Performance on

enquiry pending
Litigation/ case/
Name of work

Original TOC
Agreed PAC

Termination
Sl No

fixed
date

any
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Certificate
Overall performance of the contractor in respect of the following items is assessed as detailed
below.
1. Maintaining quality in works - excellent/ good/ satisfactory/poor
2. Adhering to Time of Completion fixed - excellent/ good/ satisfactory/poor
3. Labour command - excellent/ good/ satisfactory/poor
4. Equipments and other facilities on hand - excellent/ good/ satisfactory/poor
5. Technical assistance available - excellent/ good/ satisfactory/poor

Place:
Date: Signature of Engineer with seal

Office seal

353
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 1900 G
APPLICATION FOR RENEWAL OF REGISTRATION AS A CONTRACTOR

1. Name of Applicant/ Firm (In Block letters) :

2. Full Address :

3. Officer to whom application for renewal is made :

4. Category of Registration :

5. Registration number :

6. Date of original registration :

7. Details of last renewal :

8. No. of works done since last renewal :

9. Total PAC of the works done as stated in item 8 :

10. State whether the applicant was penalized in connection

with any contract with Government. If so give details :
11. State whether any contract of the applicant has been
terminated after last renewal :
12. State whether applicant is a registered contractor
in any other office in the PWD , if so furnish details :
13. State whether extract of updated Contractors Work Register
Since last renewal is enclosed :
14. State whether copy of acknowledgement of income tax
return last filed has been enclosed :
15. Declaration

I affirm that all the particulars given above are true. I have furnished details of all works done by
me in PWD since last renewal. I understand that if any of the detail given by me are found to be
false at a later stage, I will be blacklisted by the Registering Authority.

Station
Date Signature of Applicant

Office Use

354
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

The registration of applicant Sri………………………………as….…category contractor is

approved to be renewed. The application for renewal of registration submitted by
Sri………………………………has been rejected for the following reasons.

1).
2).
3).

Renewal fee to be remitted………………

Signature of Engineer with date

Renewal fee remitted on………………..

The registration of Sri. …………………………………as an………… category with Reg. No.
………….. is renewed for ………years with effect from ……………Entered in the register of
contractors kept in this office on …………as Sl. no……..

Signature of Engineer with date and seal

Office seal

355
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 1900 H
CERTIFICATE OF EXPERIENCE FOR UPGRADATION OF CATEGORY OF
REGISTRATION
(Separate Certificate to be issued for each work)

Name of Circle Name of Division

Name of Sub Division Name of Section

1. Name of Contractor :
2. Address :
3. Category and Registration number :
4. Name of Work :
5. Amount of original contr :
6. Agreement No. and date :
7. Amount of work executed :
8. Stipulated period of completion :
9. Scheduled date of completion :
10. Extended date of completion :
11. Number of extension(s) granted :
12. Final date of completion :
13. Details of major components of the
work with quantity and list of
machinery used/ hired
(attach separate sheet if required) :
14. Whether the work was completed
satisfactorily :
15. Whether any penalties/ fine/
Termination imposed :
16. Litigation / Cases/ Enquiry pending in
respect of the work with status :
17. Defect or liability noted during the
Guarantee period :
18. Performance of the contractor : Poor/Satisfactory/Good/V.Good/Outstanding
19. Other remarks if any :

20. Name and designation of the officer issuing the certificate

CERTIFICATE
Certified that the details furnished regarding the work (Enter name of work)……………………..
………………………………………… …………………………………………………………...
………………………………………………………………………………………….… are true.
Place:
Date: Signature of Engineer with seal

Office seal
356
 Sl No

REGISTER OF CONTRACTORS FOR THE YEAR………………

Date of application

2
Name and address of the contractor

3
Category

4
Whether application is for fresh

5
registration or renewal

Appendix 1900 J
If renewal, year in which he was
registered and the details of

6
previous renewals

Details of fee remitted

PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION

Whether application is accepted or
rejected. If rejected, state reasons in

8
detail
No. of card issued

9
If application is rejected , whether

10
contractor has been intimated

Signature of officer

11

2012
357
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

APPENDIX 2000A
Tender Notice (As per Para 2003)
Tenders are invited from registered contractors for the following works. -
Sl Name Probable Period of Earnest Cost of Last date Date of Office where tender should Remarks
No. of amount of completion money tender form of sale of receipt of be submitted
work contract & where tender tender
available form
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Place.
Designation
Date.

APPENDIX 2000B
Register of Tenders (As per Para 2009.1)
Sl No
Tender number
Tender Opening Date & Time.
Name of Work
PAC and EMD
No Name & address Registration No. of Details of EMD Quoted rate/percentage Signature of contractor or Remarks
of tenderer tenderer excess or deduction in case representative present
of percentage rate
contract/total quoted
amount of contract as
entered in the tender in
case of schedule rate
contract and L.S. contract
(In words & Figures)

Signature of. Engineer

Here enter the nature of final disposal of the tender:

358
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 2000C
PROFORMA TO ACCOMPANY RECOMMENDATION FOR ACCEPTANCE OF TENDER EXCESS
1. Name of work in full:
2. Brief description of work:
3. Name of Circle:
4. Name of Division/Sub Division/Section:
5. Details of A.S.
(a) A.S. No. and date
(b) Amount of estimate:
(c) Issuing Department:
6. Whether aided scheme/Centrally Sponsored/ Electrification works State
Highway/N.H. etc./Quarters Public building etc./M.I.
7. Details of T.S.
(a) No. and date
(b) Amount of estimate:
(c) Issuing Authority:
8. Details of Budget provision:
(a) Budget Head:
(b) Budget provision (Denote year also):
(c) Item No. and page No.
(d) Amount required for land:
Acquisition and other commitments:
9. Whether land required for the work is
already taken possession:
10. If tendered earlier, details there of:
11. Nos. of Tender & forms:
12. Nos. of tenders received:
13. Estimate RA.C.
14. Value of Departmental materials:
15.Sl.No. Name of Class of Registration Percentage excess quoted less cost of Amount less cost of Contract PAC
contractor dept. materials departmental materials

16. Whether sufficient EMD has been furnished by all Tenderers

17. Details of contractor whose tender is recommended for acceptance
(a) Name and address:
(b) Class of Registration:
(c) Whether he is qualified to execute the work
18. Year of Schedule of rates followed for preparing estimate
19. If current schedules of rates is not followed, state reason there of
20. Whether sufficient publicity and time were given for submission of tenders
21. Details of publication in detail with date of insertion
22. Last date fixed for receipt of tenders:
23. Date of expiry of firm period:
24. Date of receipt of tenders in Circle/ Division/Sub Division/Section office
25. Whether any attempt has been made to get the quoted rates reduced. If so the result of
each attempt at each level
26. Specified reason for recommending a high rate
27. Whether re-tender is advisable if not, the reasons there of
28. If a balance work, furnish the following:
(a) Physical percentages of work already completed
(b) Reasons for re arrangement:
(c) Details of revised estimate sanctioned if any, with a amount sanction No. and percentage
excess:
(d) Year of schedule of rates/ based on which balance works are arranged
(e) Whether the work is arranged at risk and cost:
(f) If not state reasons there of:
29. In case of Quotations/Negotiated quotation furnish the following details
(a) Whether tenders were invited originally and if so details of each call and response there of
(b) If it is a case of waiving a tender call, reasons there of
30. Recommendation of the officer who has invited the tender

Submitted to the .......................................................................... Signature

of the officer (with date)

Recommendation of ...................................................................
(Intermediate officers)
(The same column shall be repeated for use all intermediate officers who recommend the tender excess)
Submitted to the .........................................................................
Signature of officer (with date)

359
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

ANNEXURE – 2000D
Application for Release of Security Deposit (As per Para 2009.7 & 2009.8)
1. Name of Work :
2. Name and address of contractor :
3. Agreement No. :
4. Probable amount of contract :
5. Date of commencement :
6. Actual Date of completion :
7. Amount of Security deposit and details of Remittance
8. Signature of contractor with date :
(Item 1 to 8 to filled up by the contractor)
9. Recommendation / Orders of the Assistant Engineer
Submitted to the Assistant Executive Engineer.
Signature of Assistant Engineer
(with date)
10. Recommendation / Orders of the Assistant Executive Engineer
Submitted to the Executive Engineer
Signature of Asst. Exe. Engineer
(with date)
11. Recommendation / Orders of the Executive Engineer
Submitted to the Superintending Engineer
Signature of Executive Engineer
(with date)
12. Order of the Superintending Engineer
Signature of Superintending
Engineer (with date)
(Score out columns not applicable)
13. Released on _____________________Date

APPENDIX 2000E
Register of Agreements (As per Para 2010)
Sl Date of Agreement No/ Name Name of PAC Date of Extension/ Remarks Signature
N agreemen Supplemental of contracto completion/ Extra item
o t agreement No. work r Extended Date Sanctioning
of Completion Order and date
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

APPENDIX 2000F
Register of custody of Agreements (As per Para 2010)
Register of Agreement in the custody of ……………………………… ………………….

Sl No Date of receipt Agreement Name of Name of PAC Date of completion/ Remarks Signature
of agreement No and work contractor Extended Date of
Date Completion
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

360
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

APPENDIX 2100A
(Referred to in Para 2102.1)
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FORM OF HANDING OVER THE SITE TO THE CONTRACTOR
Shri. ........................................................... (Name of Contractor)
1. Name of work
2. Estimate amount
3. Agreement No.
I have this day.…. ...... taken over the site for t he above work subject to the conditions in the notes
below.-
Taken over
Contractor's signature with date
Countersignature of Assistant Engineer with date
Submitted to the Assistant Executive Engineer/Executive Engineer.
NOTE:- (1) Handing over site in this context would imply making available the site for the contractor
and his agents, workmen etc., to enter the site and carry on the work entrusted to him.
(2) This does not mean occupancy right in the normally accepted sense of the word.
(3) In respect of maintenance work and works of additions and alterations to existing structure, the
contractor's right of entry to the site and carrying on the work should be so exercised as not to cause
hindrance or disturbance to the existing structures or occupants / Traffic in case of road works thereof.
(4) The Contractor should vacate the site and clear it of all debris etc., on completion of the work or
when the contract is terminated.
APPENDIX 2100B
Sample Form of Work spot Order Book (As per Para 2105)
Name of Division………………………….
Book No…………………………………..
INSTRUCTIONS
1. The work spot order book is to be maintained in all cases when tile estimated cost of work exceeds the
TS powers of the Assistant Engineers.
2. This Book will be maintained by the Work Superintendent/Overseer posted for supervision of the
work and he will be responsible for its proper maintenance and safe custody.
3. After completion of the work, the book will be recorded in the office of the authority who gives
technical sanction to the work.
4. Each book will be numbered serially and an account of the books maintained in the Division Office.
5. The orders issued by the inspecting officers shall be recorded in the work spot order book. If such
orders are beyond his competence, the officer issuing the orders shall address the appropriate authority
and obtain ratification. The instructions and orders issued through the work spot order book will be
binding on the departmental subordinates at site. The Overseer shall submit copies of the instructions to
the Assistant Engineer. The Assistant Engineer shall communicate copies of instructions to be complied
with by the contractor to him in writing.
6. The instructions and orders issued through the work spot order book are binding on the departmental
subordinates in charge of the concerned work. The subordinate keeping the book, to the Junior Engineer
and Assistant Engineer, should send copies of orders noted in the work spot order book. So far as the
Contractor is concerned, all-important instructions should also be intimated in writing to him.
7. The officers, as and when they inspect the work shall record their views in the work spot order book.
1. Name of work
2. Estimated cost
3. Do P.A.C
4. Agency for the work
5. No. and date of agreement

361
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

6. Date of handing over site

7. Date of commencement
8. Date of completion
AGREED SCHEDULE OF PROGRESS OF WORK
INCUMBENCY OF OFFICERS IN CHARGE OF WORK
Overseer Assistant Engineer Assistant Executive Executive Engineer
Engineer
Name Period Name Period Name Period Name Period

PROGRESS OF WORK
Month Progress
TOOLS AND PLANT AT SITE
INSPECTING OFFICERS ORDERS AND INSTRUCTIONS
Date and time of Name and Designation of the Orders and instructions
inspection Officer issued

Appendix 2100C1
Sample progress report for Budgeted works (As per para 2106)
Progress Report for the Month of____________________ 20_ _
Name of Office _______________

Name Budget Estimate Agreed Work done Cumulative Financial Stage Physical Reason Expected
of Item Agreement Date of PAC PAC this work done Progress of Progress for delays date of
l no. Work no. No. completion (Rs) (Rs) month(Rs.) (Rs) (%) work (%) if any Completion Remarks

Signature
Date

Appendix 2100C2
Sample progress report for non budgeted works (As per para 2106)
Progress Report for the Month of____________________ 20_ _
Name of Office _______________

Reason
Name Budget Estimate Agreed Work done Cumulative Financial Stage Physical for Expected
of Item Agreement Date of PAC PAC this work done Progress of Progress delays if date of
l no. Work no. No. completion (Rs) (Rs) month(Rs.) (Rs) (%) work (%) any Completion Remarks

Signature
Date

362
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

APPENDIX 2100D
SAFFTY CODE (As per para 2107)
1. Suitable scaffolds shall be provided for workmen for all work that cannot safely be done from
the ground, or from solid construction except such short period work as can be done safely from
ladders. When a ladder is used an extra mazdoor shall be engaged for holding the ladder and if the
ladder is used for carrying materials as well, suitable footholds and hand- holds shall be provided
on the ladder and the ladder shall be given an inclination not steeper than ¼ to 1 ( ¼ horizontal
and 1 vertical).
2. Scaffolding or staging more than 3.25 metres above the ground or floor, swung or suspended from
an overhead support or erected with stationery support, shall have a guard rail properly attached,
bolted, braced and otherwise secured at least 1 meter high above the floor or platform of such
scaffolding or staging and extending along the entire length of the outside and ends thereof with only
such openings as may be necessary for the delivery of materials. Such scaffolding or staging shall be
so fastened as to prevent it from swaying from the building or structures.
3. Working platform, gangways, and stairways shall be so constructed that they do not sag unduly
or unequally, and if height of a platform or gangway or stairway is more than 3.25 meters above
ground level or floor level, it shall be closely boarded, have adequate width and be suitably
fenced as described in 2 above.
4. Every opening in floor of a building or in a working platform shall be provided with suitable
means to prevent fall of person or materials by providing suitable fencing or railing with a
minimum height of 1 meter.
5. Safe means of access shall be provided to all working platforms and other working places.
Every ladder shall be securely fixed. No portable single ladder shall be over 9 metres in length.
Width between side rails in ,a rung ladder shall in no case be less than 30 cm. for ladders upto and
including 3 metres in length. For longer ladders this width shall be increased at least 6 mm. for
each additional 30 cm. of length. Uniform step spacing shall not exceed 30 cm.
Adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent danger from electrical equipment. No materials on
any of the sites shall be so stacked or placed as to cause danger or inconvenience to any person or
the public. The contractor shall provide all necessary fencing and lights to protect public from
accidents and shall be bound to bear expenses of defense of every suit, action or other
proceedings at law that may be brought by any person for injury sustained owing to neglect of the
above precautions and to pay any damages and costs which may be awarded in any such suit,
action or proceedings to any such person or which may with the consent of the Contractor be paid
to compromise any claim by any such person.
6. Excavation and Trenching.-All trenches, 1. 5 metres or more in depth shall at all times be
supplied with at least one ladder for each 30 metres in length or fraction thereof. Ladder shall be
extended from bottom of trench to at least 1 meter above surface of the ground. Sides of a trench
which is 1. 5 metres or more in depth shall be stepped back to give suitable slope, or securely held
by timber backing, so as to avoid the danger of 1.5 meters of edge of trench or half of depth of
trench, whichever is more. Cutting shall be done from top to bottom. Under no circumstances shall
undermining or undercutting be done.
7. Demolition.-Before any demolition work is commenced and also during the process of the work:-
(a) All roads and open areas adjacent to the work site shall either be closed or suitably protected;
(h) No electric cable or apparatus which is liable to be a source of danger over a cable or apparatus
used by operator shall remain clerically charged;
(c) All practical steps shall be taken to prevent danger to persons employed, from risk or fire or
explosion, or flooding. No floor roof or other part of a building shall be so overloaded with debris
or materials as to render it unsafe.
8. All necessary safety equipment as considered adequate by the Engineer-in-charge shall he
available for use of persons employed on the site and maintained in a condition suitable for
immediate use; and the Contractor shall take adequate steps to ensure proper use of equipment by
those concerned.
(a) Workers employed on mixing asphaltic materials, cement and lime mortars/concrete shall be
provided with protective footwear and protection goggles.

363
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

(b) Those engaged in handling any material which is injurious to eyes shall be provided with
protective goggles.
(c) Those engaged in welding works shall be provided with welder's protective eye shields.
(d) Stone breakers shall be provided with protective goggles and protective clothing and seated at
sufficiently safe intervals.
(e) When workers are employed in sewers and manholes, which are in use, the Contractor shall
ensure that manhole covers are opened and manholes are ventilated at least for an hour before
workers are allowed to get into them. Manholes so opened shall be cordoned off with suitable
railing and provided with warning signals or boards to prevent accident to public.
(f) The Contractor shall not employment below the age of 18 and women on the work of painting
with products containing lead in any form. Whenever men above the age of 18 are employed on
the work of lead painting, the following precautions shall be taken:
(i) No paint containing lead or lead products shall be used except in the form of paste or
readymade pain.
(ii) Suitable face marks shall be supplied for use by workers when paint is applied in the form of
spray or a surface having lead paint dry rubbed and scraped.
(iii) Overalls shall be supplied by the Contractor to workmen and adequate facilities shall be
provided to enable working painters to wash during and on cessation of work.
9 When work is done near any place where there is risk of drowning all necessary equipment shall
be provided and kept ready for use and all necessary steps taken for prompt rescue of any person in
danger and adequate provision made for prompt first aid treatment of all injuries likely a be
sustained during the course of the work.
10. Use of hoisting machines and tackle including their attachments, anchorage and supports shall
conform to the following:-
(a) (i) These shall be of good mechanical construction, sound material and adequate strength and
free from patent defects and shall be kept in good repair and in good working order.
(ii) Every rope used in hoisting or lowering materials or as means of suspension shall be of durable
quality and adequate strength and free from patent defects.
(b) Every crane driver or hoisting appliance operator shall be properly qualified and no person
under the age of 21 years shall be in charge of any hoisting machine including any scaffold winch
or give signals to operator.
(c) In case of every hoisting machine and of every chain ring hook, shackle swivel and pulley
block used in hoisting of lowering or as means of suspension, safe working load shall be
ascertained by adequate means. Every hoisting machine and all gear referred to above shall be
plainly marked with safe working load In case of a hoisting machine having a variable safe
working load, each safe working load and the conditions under which it is applicable shall be
clearly indicated. No part of any machine or of any gear referred to above in this paragraph shall
be loaded beyond safe working load except for the purpose of testing.
(d) In ease of departmental machine, safe working load shall be notified by the Engineer-in-
charge. As regards Contractor's machine the Contractor shall notify safe working load of each
machine to the Engineer-in-charge, whenever he brings it to site of work and get it verified by the
Engineer-in-charge.
11. Motors, gearing, transmission electric wiring and other dangerous parts of hoisting appliance
shall be provided with efficient safeguards, hoisting appliances shall be provided with such means
as will reduce to the minimum risk of accidental descent of load, adequate precautions shall be
taken to reduce to the minimum risk of any part of a suspended load becoming accidentally
displaced. When workers are employed on electrical insulations which are already energised,
insulating mats, wearing apparel such as gloves, sleeves and boots, as may be necessary, shall be
provided. Workers shall not wear any rings, watches and carry keys or other materials, which are
good conductors of electricity.
12. All scaffolds, ladders and other safety devices mentioned or described herein shall be,
maintained in a safe condition and no scaffold, ladder or equipment shall be altered or removed
while it is in use. Adequate washing facilities shall he provided at or near place of work.

364
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

13. These safety provisions shall be brought to the notice of all concerned by display on a notice
board at a prominent place at the workspot. Persons responsible for ensuring compliance with the
safety code shall be named therein by the Contractor.
14. To ensure elective enforcement of' the rules and regulations relating to safety precautions,
arrangements made by the Contractor shall be open to inspection by the Engineer-in-charge, or his
representatives and the Inspecting Officers.*
15. Notwithstanding the above conditions 1 to 14 the Contractor is not exempted from the
operation of any other Act or Rules in force.
*’Inspecting Officer’ means any Labour Enforcement Officer or Assistant Labour Commissioner
of the Chief Labour Commissioner's Organisation
Appendix 2100E1
MEASUREMENT BOOK (As per para 2109)
Circle/Division ...............................................................
Subdivision/Section .......................................................
Measurement Book No ...............................................
Notes
1. The measurement book is the basis of all accounts of quantities, whether for work done by piece
work for by contract, or of materials received for specific works which have to be measured, and
should be so kept that the transaction may be readily traceable into the accounts.
2. (a) Measurements shall invariably and neatly be recorded direct in the measurement books at
site, and not copied into them later on at leisure, from measurement sheets.
(b) Erasures and over writings in the measurement books are strictly prohibited and will be
seriously noticed. If mistakes are made, they should be corrected by neatly scoring off the incorrect
entries and inserting the correct once between the lines. Dated initials of the recording officer shall
be insisted on, on each page of the measurement book in the case of original entries, and initials, in
the case of each and every correction. In the case of contract work, the contractor's signature
should be taken in the measurement book in token of the contractor's acceptance of the
measurements recorded either at the time of measurement or in any case, before payment, to avoid
complaints of omissions, incorrectness, etc.
3. (a) No officer below the rank of a 2nd Grade Overseer in responsible charge of a work, is
empowered to measure a work and make either an entry or a correction in the measurement books
in respect of particulars, measurements or rails. Measurements relating to all supplies and services
shall also be recorded by the 1st grade overseer/ 2nd grade overseer. No member of the clerical
staff except the account section responsible for the preparation and checking of the bills, is allowed
to make arithmetical corrections. Such corrections noticed in the preparation of bills, shall be
invariably attested by the bill preparing officer, while those noticed during audits shall be attested
by the Passing Officer. The store-keepers in charge of departmental stores may be permitted to
record supply bills, and conveyance charges of stores moved to and for, in measurement books
issued to them.
(b) The theoretical issue of departmental materials and receipts and issues of other items based on
measurements against each item in a bill shall be noted in remark column by a technical
subordinate while preparing a work bill and during audit.
(c) The officer to whom a measurement book is issued shall be its custodian until it is finally
returned to the Sub Division office for record after completion or transferred in the meantime by
official transfer, to his successor on relief. Except when the book is sent officially to other offices
for preparation, audit and payment of bills, book must always be kept in the personal custody of an
officer not below the rank of a Lower Division Clerk.
4. (a) For easy identification and check, the descriptions of the locality and items must be lucid;
and the measurements shall be recorded systematically item by item of the sanctioned estimates
noting also the respective item numbers. The total of the quantities under the different items as
entered in the quantity column of the measurement book should be in the case of each bill, an up-
to-date quantity and not a ‘since last’ quantity.

365
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

(b) For large works separate measurement books shall be kept by the measuring officer for each
individual work or contract, or if found necessary or convenient separate books may be set apart for
different classes of works or subheads of works, in which himself and the checking officer will have
with them at the time of any measurements or check measurement all the previous measurement in one
and the same book for easy reference and guidance. Promiscuous recording of measurements of one and
the same work indiscriminately in different measurement books, is prohibited and if resorted to will be
seriously noticed. 5. In the case of extra items or extra rates, the orders sanctioning its execution or
provision should invariably be quoted in the measurement books and bills before the auditing wing
passes such claims for payment. The measuring officer may however record extra items if any in the
measurement book if he is satisfied that they are covered at least by the written orders of the inspecting
officers in the workspot order book though not at the time of measurement regularised by the formal
sanction of the competent authority. The audit wing will all the same defer passing of such items until
formal sanction is secured. Such items will however be entered in the quantity columns but the rates and
amounts will be noted therein only on receipt of formal sanction from sanction of competent authority to
such items. This stipulation is precautionary to ensure that the measurement and check measurement of
extra items which it may be difficult or impossible to measure at a later stage of work should not be lost
sight of , while closing or checking interim bills or at the time of final payment.
6. The measuring officer shall be responsible for closing the bills in the measurement books and taking
care to enter therein correctly, all references previous measurements and all receipts and issues of
materials utodate and effect all recoveries, they shall be observed as an orthodox rule, as the measuring
officer is primarily and wholly responsible for all entries made by him in the measurement book and for
the bills as corrected and finally passed by on for audit on the basis of those measurements. In fact the
bill will be an exact copy of the closing abstract as made out by the measuring officer, in the
measurement book.
7. From the measurement book all quantities should be clearly traceable to the documents on which
payments are made reference to voucher in which the quantities are entered for payment as well as date
of entry should be given by endorsement upon the original entries in the measurement book. No contract
certificate or bill should be signed without crossing out the connected entry in the measurement book
and the document on which the payment is made should invariably bear a reference number and page of
the book in which detailed measurements are recorded.
8. The measurement books are thus one of the most important initial records relating to the execution
and payment of works, they should be carefully checked by Divisional/ Sub divisional officer to see that
they are kept as per complete records of each kind of work done for which certificates have been
granted. The eventual return of all books to the division office for record should be insisted upon.
9. Name of officer and check measuring officer shall be noted below the signature.

Name of Work: Date of measurement

Name of contractor Agreement No.
Reference Partic 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Remarks
to ulars
estimate

Sub Item Measurement up-to- Rate

Total Deduct previous Since last
hea no date value measurement measurement
d to date
No L B D Contents Rs p Rs p boo Page quan Quantity Value
or area k tity col (5- at rate
8) in col.
6
Rs p

366
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 2100E2
Level Field Book ( As para 2109)
Rules to be observed in leveling and survey operations

1. In all surveys the survey line should be shown with a fine red line that it may be at once apparent
with what degree of accuracy a plan has been made.
2. it is also directed that on every convenient occasion tie lines shall be introduced to check the
general accuracy of the work
Though the features of the ground may not need these tie lines for filling in detail, they must not be
omitted, as the general accuracy of survey is the chief point to be ensured
3. It is further directed that all levels should be checked either by returning to the point originally
started upon or by closing on a bench mark known to be accurately determined. Under no circumstances
shall levels be run from one point to another without the accuracy of the work being inconsistently
proved.
4. The adjustments of instruments including chains and tapes, should be checked and if necessary
adjusted before using. Field book level or survey must be carefully preserved records. Under no
circumstances shall nay page or part of a page be torn from the book. Entries shall invariably and neatly
be recorded direct in the field book in ink at site. Pencil entries should be avoided but if unavoidable
these shall be in indelible pencil and shall not be inked in, but left untouched. Erasures and overwriting s
in the field book are strictly prohibited. And will be seriously noticed. Any mistakes made should be
neatly scored off and corrected in red ink between lines. Dated initials of the recording officer are to be
insisted on, on each page of field book in the case of each and every correction.
5. The greatest care must be exercised in the use of optical instruments. Peons or lascars must on
no account be allowed to touch an instrument beyond in the actual carriage of it, and then it should be
seen that the instrument is being conveyed in a proper way o avoid injury. The officer using an optical
instrument must take it out of its box and return thereto with his own hands. Instrument boxes should
always be kept locked and the key kept in the custody of the officer in charge, who is responsible for all
instruments issued to him.

Propose:
Locality
Date: Name of officer
Back Sight Intermediate Sight Foresight Height of Collimation Reduced Level Distance Remarks

Appendix 2100F
Proforma to Accompany Recommendation for Extension of Time of Completion (As per para 2212)
1. Name of work with estimate amount :
2. Agreement number and date :
3. Name of contractor :
4. Date of commencement as per agreement :
5. Date of completion as per agreement :
6. (a) 1st extension :
(b) 2nd extension :
7. Date upto which extension is now applied for :
8. Whether ground for extension applied is default by the
contractor. If not, specify the grounds on which extension is
applied
9. Present stage of work with percentage of progress so far
achieved
10. Whether fine has been realised for previous extension. If so
furnish details
11. Period of extension now recommended :
12. Fine proposed :
13. Recommendations :
Assistant Engineer

367
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Assistant Executive Engineer

Executive Engineer
Appendix 2100G
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION OF WORK (As per para 2113)

Name of Work :
Name of contractor :
Contract Agreement No. and date :
Supplemental Agreement No. and date :

Certified that the works as per the above contract agreement and supplemental agreements have been
completed in all respects on ................... ................................................... The certificate does not
however absolve the contractor from any of the liabilities for which he is responsible as per terms of
the contract.

...................................................... Engineer

APPENDIX - 2200
2217. EXECUTION – ROADS
This section provides a guide to the correct construction practices and procedures for use on road
contracts. Throughout the site (the area where the works are being constructed) the contractor is
responsible for supplying all the necessary signs and other equipment to ensure the smooth and safe flow
of traffic. The construction shall be carried out in a safe and controlled manner to prevent damage to
vehicles and the general public from construction equipment, site materials and activities.
2218. General
2218.1. Key Points
• Before any construction the roadway must be cleared of all vegetation and trees, including their
roots removed.
• Cross sections shall be taken prior to any excavation works.
• Finalize cross section of the alignment and levels prior to excavation.
• All construction works must be carried out in as safe a manner as possible.
• Excavated materials, if suitable, shall be used wherever possible in the works.
• Provision has to be made for drainage of the temporary and permanent works.
• Soil containing vegetable matter shall not be used as fill material.
• Borrow pits shall not affect the stability of the road, or any other structure.
Details to be submitted for Approval from Engineer to start work are as per Appendix 2200
E 2219. Setting Out
The working Bench Marks tied with the Reference Bench Mark, wherever necessary, shall be
established before commencement of the work. The working Bench Marks shall be at the rate of four per
km and also at or near all drainage structures over-bridges and underpasses. An up-to-date record of all
bench marks including approved adjustments, if any, shall be maintained by the Assistant Engineer. The
lines and levels of formation, side slopes, drainage works, carriageways and shallers shall be carefully
set out and frequently checked during construction, care being taken to ensure that correct gradients and
cross sections are obtained everywhere.
In order to facilitate the setting out of the works, the centerlines of the carriageway or highway must be
accurately established based on the investigation report (as specified in chapter 2 of section 3), in every 30 m
or less intervals in plain and rolling terrains and 20m intervals in hilly terrain and in all curve points with
marker pegs and chainage boards. On construction reaching the formation level stage, the

368
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

centerline shall be set out again to avoid any deviation from the approved centre line. No reference peg
or mark shall be moved or withdrawn and no earthwork or structural work shall commence until the
centre line has been referenced and approved by the Assistant Engineer.
2220.Public Utilities
The Assistant Engineer shall prepare drawing showing the affected services like water pipes,
sewers, oil pipelines, electric lines and posts, telephone lines, cables, gas ducts etc owned by various
authorities including Public Undertakings and Local Authorities. He shall do this by collecting necessary
details of such utilities in the site or in consultation with the concerned departments and joint inspection
wherever necessary. These drawings shall be finalized during the tender stage and utilities are to be
shifted before the commencement of the work. The improvement and upgradation of the roads are
important for the community; hence all departments/authorities using PWD land must co-operate to shift
the utilities in time.
2221.Clearing of Site:
Clearing of site by dismantling old bridges and culverts and existing pavements shall be as per
section 200 of MoRTH.
2222. Excavation
This work shall consist of excavation, removal and satisfactory disposal of all materials necessary
for the construction of roadway, side drains and waterways in accordance with the lines, grades and
cross-sections shown in the drawings or as indicated by the Engineer. Excavation for road works shall
conform to the specifications of Section 300 of MoRTH. It shall include the hauling and stacking of or
hauling to sites of embankment and subgrade construction, suitable cut materials as required, as also the
disposal of unsuitable cut materials in specified manner, trimming and finishing of the road to specified
dimensions or as directed by the Assistant Engineer.
2222.1. Classification of excavated material
The excavated materials shall be classified as specified in section 301.2.1 of MORTH.
2222.2.Authority for classification
The classification of excavation shall be proposed by the Assistant Engineer and got approved
by the Assistant Executive Engineer.
2222.3.Road Formation in Cutting
Where hard strata are available, and the formation level is below existing ground level, excavation
shall be done with due consideration of the stability of slopes. Benching may be resorted to wherever
necessary and other suitable slope protection provided. In case of rocks the provisions of clause 301.3.5
and 301.6 of MoRTH shall apply.
2223.Embankment construction
2223.1.Key Points
• All fill materials must be free from vegetable matter and the material must be approved as
suitable.
• The material shall be of an appropriate nature and at moisture content that permits compaction to
form a stable layer.
• Generally embankments shall be constructed in 150 mm compacted layers parallel to the
finished grade of the road.
• For each completed layer the density shall be checked (One test for each 1,000 square meters) by
laboratory personnel. If test results show the required density is not achieved further compaction
is necessary
• Any soft areas must be rectified before further material is placed. Each earthworks layer requires
to be approved before the next layer can be started.
All embankments, subgrades, earthen shallers and miscellaneous backfills shall be constructed in
accordance with the lines, grades, and cross-sections shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Assistant Engineer. It shall follow the specification as per clause 305 of MORTH

369
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Figure 4.1 Pavement Layers

2223.2. Sub grade
The sub grade is the layer of embankment immediately below the pavement. This may be
undisturbed local material or may be soil excavated elsewhere and placed as fill. In either case it has to
be prepared to give added strength. All subgrade material must be free of vegetable matter. The material
also needs to be of a type and moisture content that it can be compacted to form a stable layer. If the
material in the subgrade level is found to be unsuitable, this must be excavated and replaced with
suitable material, which shall then be compacted. The subgrade must be prepared over the full width of
the embankment, including the shallers. This is generally carried out in lengthlengthss of greater than 100
metres. In some cases to maintain traffic, part width working may be necessary. If this is the case it is
vital that the full width of the embankment meets the subgrade material and compaction requirements.
When the road is to be placed ed on existing material, this shall be fully loosened to a depth of 150 mm
below the subgrade level. Any lumps shall be removed or broken up to be less than 50 mm in size. The
subgrade must be compacted uniformly by use of adequate and appropriate compacticompaction
on equipment. The
material shall be at moisture content close to optimum throughout the layer so that it can be compacted
to produce a dense compacted layer. Generally the compaction shall begin at the outer edges of the
embankment and by rolling in a long
longitudinal
itudinal direction gradually progress towards the centre so that each
section receives equal compaction.
Laboratory tests shall be performed as specified in the chapter on Quality control.
2223.3.Drainage
The surface of the embankment/subgrade at all times during construction shall be maintained at
such a cross fall (not flatter than that required for effective drainage of an earthen surface) as will shed
water and prevent ponding. For this surface drains and subgrade drains shall be provided.
2223.4. Surface drains
Drains shall follow the slope of embankment. Surface drains shall be excavated to the specified
lines, grades, levels and dimensions to the requirements of Clause 309 of MoRTH Specifications for
Road and Bridge works.
2223.5. Sub grade Drains
Sub grade drains are constructed to ensure that water in the pavement, which would weaken the
road, is allowed to drain way. Subgrade drains shall be extended to the edge of the embankment with
drains on opposite sides of the road being staggered. In case of roads with minimal longitudinal fall it is
often better to install subgrade drains longitudinally at the edge of the road pavement, see Figure 4.1

370
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Subgrade drains shall be excavated by hand in the prepared subgrade. The excavation shall be
filled with clean sand or gravel, which contains no vegetable matter, silt or clay. The backfill must be
compacted by hand ramming and struck off level with, or slightly above, the finished subgrade level.
The finished backfill must be immediately covered with an approved separator material. The separator
material is normally specified and will be woven rot proof fabric, geo-textile membrane or perforated
heavy duty polythene sheeting. The separator material shall extend 150mm beyond the edges of the
drain on all exposed faces. Any joints in the fabric shall overlap by at least 150mm. Materials over the
drain shall be placed by hand for at least 100mm above the separator membrane prior to rolling either
the pavement or the shaller materials.
2223.6.Finishing operations
Finishing operations shall include the work of shaping and dressing the shallers /verge/road bed and
side slopes to conform to the alignment, level, cross-sections and dimensions shown on the drawings or
as directed by the Engineer. Both the upper and lower ends of the side slopes shall be rounded off to
improve appearance and to merge the embankment with the adjacent terrain. When earthwork operations
have been substantially completed, the road area shall be cleared of all debris, and ugly scars in the
construction area responsible for objectionable appearance eliminated.
2224. Sub Base
2224.1. Granular Sub Base
This work shall consist of laying and compacting well-graded material on prepared subgrade in
accordance with the specifications. The material shall be laid in one or more layers as sub-base or lower
sub-base and upper sub-base (termed as sub-base hereinafter) as necessary according to lines, grades and
cross -sections shown on the drawings or as directed by the Assistant Engineer.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and Quality checks and opening
to traffic shall be as per the specifications of MORTH clause 401.
2224.2.Cement treated Soil Sub-Base/Base
This work shall consist of laying and compacting a sub-base/base course of soil treated with
cement on prepared subgrade/sub-base, in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications and
in conformity with the lines, grades and cross-sections shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and Quality checks and opening
to traffic shall be as per the specifications of MORTH clause 403.
2225. Base Course (Non Bituminous)
The following are the base courses (Non Bituminous) usually provided for road works
Water Bound Macadam Sub –Base / Base
Sub Base Course: Normally consists of at least one layer of grading I or II materials.
Base course: Base course is done using Grade III
material. Crusher-Run Macadam Base
Crushed Cement Concrete Sub-Base/Base
Wet Mix Macadam Sub -Base/Base
2225.1.Water Bound Macadam Sub –Base / Base
WBM may be used as Sub Base as well as Base course and also surface course of rural roads.
This work shall consist of clean, crushed aggregates mechanically interlocked by rolling and bonding
together with screening, binding material where necessary and water laid on a properly prepared
subgrade/ sub-base/ base or existing pavement, as the case may be and finished in accordance with the
requirements of these Specifications and in close conformity with the lines, grades, cross-sections and
thickness as per approved plans or as directed by the Engineer.
It is, however, not desirable to lay water bound macadam on an existing thin black topped surface
without providing adequate drainage facility for water that would get accumulated at the interface of existing
bituminous surface and water bound macadam. The materials to be used, construction operations,

143

371
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

surface finish and Quality checks and opening to traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH
clause 404
2225.2.Crusher-Run Macadam Base
This work shall consist of furnishing, placing and compacting crushed stone aggregate sub-base
and base courses constructed in accordance with the requirements set forth in this Specification and in
conformity with the lines, grades, thicknesses and cross-sections shown on the plans or as directed by
the Engineer,
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish, quality checks and opening to
traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 410.
2225.3.Crushed Cement Concrete Sub-Base/Base
This work shall consist of breaking and crushing the damaged cement concrete slabs and
recompacting the same as sub-base/base course in one or more layers. Where specified, it shall also
include treating the surface of the top layer with a penetration coat of bitumen.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening
to traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoORTH clause 405.
2225.4.Wet Mix Macadam Sub -Base/Base
This work shall consist of laying and compacting clean, crushed, graded aggregate and granular
material, premixed with water, to a dense mass on a prepared subgrade/sub -base/base or existing
pavement as the case may be. The material shall be laid in one or more layers as necessary to lines,
grades and cross -sections shown on the approved drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The
thickness of a single compacted Wet Mix Macadam layer shall not be less than 75 mm. When vibrating
or other approved types of compacting equipment arc used, the compacted depth of a single layer of the
sub-base course may be increased to 200 mm upon approval of the Engineer.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening to
traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 406.
2226. Bituminous Base and Surface Courses
2226.1.General
Bituminous pavement courses shall be in accordance with Specifications of MoRTH clause 501.
The use of machinery and equipment mentioned in various Clauses of these Specifications is mandatory,
and for more details Manual for Construction and Supervision of Bituminous Works by MoRT&H may
be referred.
2226.2. Laying Trials
Once the plant trials have been successfully completed as per MoRTH, and approved, the
Contractor shall carry out laying trials, to demonstrate that the proposed mix can be successfully laid,
and compacted all in accordance with the MoRTH Specifications. The laying trial shall be carried out as
per MoRTH Specifications for road and Bridge works.
2226.2.1.Key Points
• Samples of the material along with laboratory test results shall be submitted to the Engineer at
least 14 days in advance of a proposed material’s u se. If approved, the contractor shall then
carry out trial mixes. This shall also be tested and approved. No dense bituminous surfacing can
occur until both the job mix formula and the trial sections have been approved.
• Thereafter all asphalt work is required to follow the approved Job Mix formula and the
procedures established by the approved trials.
• The surface upon which the bitumen or bituminous mixture is to be placed must be thoroughly
cleaned immediately before the bitumen or mixture is placed.
• Bituminous materials shall be placed only when the surface is dry, when rain does not appear
imminent and when the prepared road bed is in a satisfactory condition.
• The entire surface to be primed must be covered evenly. The distributor shall be cleaned and
calibrated to ensure the required rate of spray is achieved. Depending on the nature of the surface
144

372
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

to be primed a light application of water just prior to priming may be beneficial to aid
penetration of the bituminous material.
• No bituminous mixtures shall be placed until the prime coat has dried.
• Tack coat may need to be applied to make the road surface sticky prior to the bituminous
carpeting layer being placed.
• For Primer Seals and Bitumen Surface Treatments the aggregate must be spread and rolled into
bitumen immediately after spraying, preferably rolling shall be by multi tyre rollers.
• Each day dense bituminous surfacing is laid, three Marshall specimens shall be prepared and
tested as ASTM D 2041
• Samples to be collected from either the plant or the laid mat, as directed by the Engineer.
Samples shall also be taken each day to determine the mix composition (Extraction of bitumen
test and grading),
• All equipment proposed to be used by the Contractor are in good condition and operated by
competent and experienced operators
• Dense bituminous surfacing must be thoroughly compacted as soon as the material will support
the roller without undue displacement or cracking. Excess use of water on the roller drums is to
be avoided as this cools the asphalt mat.
• The surface of the mixture after compaction must be close and tight, and free from dragging
cracks. Any mixture that is defective shall be removed and replaced with fresh hot material,
which shall be compacted immediately.
• After final rolling, samples shall be cut from areas of bituminous surfacing for density and
thickness at specified intervals. Where samples have been taken, fresh material must be placed
and thoroughly compacted.
2226.2.2. Surface Preparation: Prime coat shall be provided as per Clause 502 and tack coat as per
clause 503 of MoRTH specifications.
2227. Base Course (Bituminous)
The different types of bituminous base course are as follows
• Bituminous Macadam
• Bituminous Penetration Macadam
• Built-up Spray Grout
• Dense Graded Bituminous Macadam
• Sand Asphalt Base course
2227.1. Bituminous Macadam
This work shall consist of construction in a single course having 50mm to 100mm thickness or
in multiple courses of compacted crushed aggregates premixed with a bituminous binder on a previously
prepared base to the requirements of these specifications. Bituminous macadam is more open graded
than the dense graded bituminous materials.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening
to traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 504.
2227.2. Bituminous Penetration Macadam 1*
A penetration Macadam is a compacted layer of coarse aggregates into which bituminous binder
is introduced. The binder penetrates in to the layer through the voids and binds the stone aggregates. A
layer of small aggregates, called key aggregates, is spread on the surface and rolled so as to fill in the
surface voids in the coarse aggregate layer. A seal coat is provided to make the surface more impervious
to water. This type is commonly used in remote areas where it is difficult to transport mixing and laying
equipment. It can also be used as a temporary emergency material to repair a pavement damaged by
rains and floods.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening to
traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 505.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1* Deleted in the MoRTH Specifications for Road & Bridge Works (Fifth Revision)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2227.3. Built-up Spray Grout 1*

373
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

This work shall consist of a two-layer composite construction of compacted crushed coarse
aggregates with application of bituminous binder after each layer, and with key aggregates placed on top
of the second layer, in accordance with the Specifications of MoRTH, to serve as a base course and in
conformity with the lines, grades and cross-sections shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. The thickness of the course shall be 75 mm. Built-up spray grout shall be used in a single
course in a pavement structure.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening
to traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 506.
2227.4.Dense graded Bituminous Macadam 2*
It may be used as base/binder and profile corrective courses. Apart from Bituminous Macadam,
the only difference is being that the stone aggregates are more closely graded. As a result, the resultant
mixture is denser. DBM is also intended for use as road base material. This work shall consist of
construction in a single or multiple layers of DBM on a previously prepared base or sub-base. The
thickness of a single layer shall be 50mm to 100mm.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks shall and
opening to traffic be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 507.3*
2227.5. Sand Asphalt Base Course
This work shall consist of a base course composed of a mixture of sand, mineral filler where
required and bituminous binder, placed and compacted upon a prepared and accepted subgrade in
accordance with the Specifications of Clause 520 4* of MoRTH. The materials to be used, construction
operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening to traffic shall also follow the same.
This is used in special situations when quality coarse aggregates are not available within
economical leads and/or water needed for conventional base course not being readily available, as in
desert areas. 50mm to 100mm.
2227.6.Surface (wearing) Course
The following are the surface (wearing) courses usually adopted.
Semi dense Bituminous Concrete 1*
(SDBC) Bituminous Concrete (BC)
Surface Dressing
Open grade premix carpet
a. Open grade premix carpet using Penetration Bitumen or Cutback.
b. Open grade premix carpet using cationic bitumen emulsion
Mastic Asphalt
Close graded/ Mixed Seal Surfacing (MSS)
2227.7. Semi dense Bituminous Concrete 1*
This clause specifies the construction of Semi Dense Bituminous Concrete, for use in
wearing/binder and profile corrective courses. This work shall consist of construction in a single or
multiple layers of semi dense bituminous concrete on a previously prepared bituminous bound surface.
A single layer shall be 25mm to 100mm in thickness.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening
to traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 508.

1* Deleted in the MoRTH Specifications for Road & Bridge Works (Fifth Revision)
2* Dense Bituminous Macadam
3* Clause 505 of MoRTH
4* Clause 506 of MoRTH

374
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2227.8. Bituminous Concrete

This clause specifies the construction of Bituminous Concrete, for use in wearing (also used as
profile corrective courses) especially for heavily trafficked highways. This work shall consist of
construction in a single layer (25mm to 100mm in thickness) of bituminous concrete on a previously
prepared bituminous bound surface.

The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening
to traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 509.5*
2227.9 Surface Dressing
This work shall consist of the application of one coat or two coats of surface dressing, each coat
consisting of a layer of bituminous binder sprayed on a previously prepared base, followed by a cover of
stone chips rolled in to form a wearing course to the requirements of these Specifications. Surface
Dressing is used in the case of relatively lightly trafficked roads over gravel or other untreated road
bases. It shall be noted that surface dressing is a thin treatment and does not enhance the structural
strength of the pavement. If the existing road is full of irregularities and undulations, it does nothing to
improve riding quality. Design of Surface Dressing may be referred to in the Manual for Construction
and Supervision of Bituminous Works.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening
to traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 510.6*
2227.10.Open grade premix carpet
2227.10.1.Open-graded Premix Surfacing using Penetration Bitumen or Cutback.7*
This work shall consist of the preparation, laying and compaction of an open-graded premix
surfacing material of 20 mm thickness composed of small-sized aggregate premixed with a bituminous
binder on a previously prepared base, in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications, to
serve as a wearing course.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening
to traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 511.1 8*.
2227.10.2.Open graded premix surfacing using cationic bitumen emulsion
This work shall consist of the preparation, laying and compaction of an open graded premix
surfacing of 20 mm thickness composed of small-sized aggregate premixed with a cationic bitumen
emulsion on a previously prepared surface, in accordance with the requirements of the relevant
Specifications of MoRTH, to serve as a wearing course.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening
to traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 511.2.9*
2227.11 Mixed Seal Surfacing
This work shall consist of the preparation, laying and compaction of a close-graded premix
surfacing material of 20 mm thickness composed of graded aggregates premixed with a bituminous
binder on a previously prepared surface, in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications, to
serve as a wearing course. Close graded premix surfacing shall be of Type A or Type B as specified in
the Contract documents.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening to
traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 512.10*
5* MoRTH Clause 507
6* MoRTH Clause 509
7* Open -graded premix surfacing using Viscosity Grade Paving Bitumen
8* Clause 510.1 of MoRTH
9* Clause 510.2 of MoRTH
10* Clause 508 of MoRTH. This shall be followed for all works as the same is most suitable for our
state having moderately high rainfall (Govt. Circular No. PWD-G3/39/2017/PWD dated
03.02.2017)
375
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2227.12 Mastic Asphalt
This work shall consist of constructing a single layer of mastic asphalt wearing course for road pavements and
bridge decks. Mastic asphalt is an intimate homogeneous mixture of selected well graded aggregates, filler
and bitumen in such proportions as to yield a plastic and void less mass, which when applied hot can be
trowelled and floated to form a very dense impermeable surfacing. Its consistency is such that it flows like a
0 0
viscous fluid at temperatures of around 175 C to 210 C but, on cooling to normal temperatures; it solidifies
in to a dense mass. Thus its construction requires no compacting effort. Because of its superior properties, it is
used as a wearing

course material for heavy duty pavements, city streets carrying high volume of traffic, bus stops where heavy
tangential forces are expected, junctions where cornering stresses are predominant.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and Quality checks and opening to traffic
shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 515.11*

2227.13. Seal Coat

This work shall consist of the application of a seal coat for sealing the voids in a bituminous surface laid to
the specified levels, grade and cross fall (camber). Seal coat shall be of either of the two types specified
below:
Liquid seal coat comprising of an application of a layer of bituminous binder followed by a cover of stone
chips.
Premixed seal coat comprising of a thin application of fine aggregate premixed with bituminous binder.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening to traffic
shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH 513.12*
2227.14. Bituminous Cold Mix (Including Gravel Emulsion)
Bituminous Cold Mix consists of a mixture of unheated mineral aggregate and emulsified or cutback bitumen.
This Specification deals only with plant mix (as opposed to mixed- in-place). Bituminous cold mixes are used
in situations where hot mix plants are not readily available, including for work in remote areas and
maintenance operations. Two types of mix are considered, namely,
Designed Cold Mix Recipe Cold
Mix.
The Design Mix procedure shall be used unless the Engineer specifically approves the Recipe Mix procedure.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening to traffic
shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH 519.13*
2228. Concrete Pavement
2228.1. Semi-rigid Pavement Construction
Semi- rigid pavements are a concrete sub base having a wearing course over it. In case of rural roads the
wearing coarse have be a thin bituminous surface. Semi-rigid pavements are also used as a Sub base for
making cement concrete pavement. Generally, the following types are used for Semi-rigid pavement
construction.
Dry Lean Cement Concrete. (DLC) Cement Fly
Ash Bound Macadam Lime Fly Ash Concrete
Lime Fly Ash Bound Macadam
However, Dry Lean Cement Concrete (DLC) is most commonly adopted.

11* Clause 516 of MoRTH

12* Clause 517 of MoRTH
13* MoRTH Clause 518
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
376
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2228.2.Lean Cement Concrete (DLC)

The work shall consist of construction of dry lean concrete sub base for cement concrete pavement in
accordance with the requirements of the specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades and cross-
sections shown on the drawings.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening to traffic
shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH 601.
1*
2228.3.Rolled Cement concrete Base
The work shall consist of construction of rolled concrete base course for cement concrete pavement in
accordance with the requirements of these specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades and cross
sections shown on the drawings.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening to traffic
shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH 603.
2228.4.Cement Concrete Pavement
The work shall consist of construction of unreinforced, dowel jointed, plain cement concrete pavement in
accordance with the requirements of the specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades and cross
sections shown on the drawings.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening to traffic
shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH 602.
2229.Shallers
2229.1. General
Shaller gives adequate side support to the pavement and also drains off surface water from the carriageway
to the roadside drain. The work shall consist of constructing shaller on either side of the pavement in
accordance with the requirements of these Specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades and cross-
sections shown on the drawings.
Shaller may be of selected earth/ granular material/ paved conforming to the requirements of MoRT&H
Clause 305/407. Paved shallers shall consist of sub-base, base and surfacing courses, as shown in the
drawings and materials for the same shall conform to relevant Specifications of the corresponding items.
Where paved or hard shallers are not provided, the pavement shall be provided with brick/stone block
edgings as shown in the drawings. The bricks shall conform to Clause 1003 of these Specifications. Stone
blocks shall conform to Clause 1004 of these Specifications and shall be of size 225 mm x 110 mm x 75
mm.
2229.2.Shoulder width
Width of the shoulder shall vary from 1 m to 2.5 m be as shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Assistant Engineer.
2229.2.1Construction Method
The sequence of operations shall be such that the construction of paved shaller is done in layers each
matching the thickness of adjoining pavement layer. Only after a layer of pavement and corresponding layers
in paved and earth shaller portion have been laid and compacted, the construction of next layer of pavement
and shaller shall be taken up.
Where the materials in adjacent layers are different, these shall be laid together and the pavement layer shall
be compacted first. The corresponding layer in paved shaller portion shall be compacted thereafter, which
shall be followed by compaction of earth shaller layer. The adjacent layers having same material shall be laid
and compacted together.
During all stages of shaller (earthen/ hard/ paved) construction, the required cross fall shall be maintained to
drain off surface water.

1* Deleted in the MoRTH Specifications for Road & Bridge Works (Fifth Revision)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
377
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2229.3Culverts
Culverts are mainly of two types, Pipe Culverts and Slab Culverts. The width of culvert shall be equal to the
formation width of the road. It shall be generally situated on the straight alignment of the road. If the road
has a gradient the same shall be maintained for deck slab of the culvert.
2229.3.1Pipe Culverts:
2229.3.2NP 4 pipes for national highways conforming to IS 458:1988 shall be used.
Bedding: The bedding must be even and uniform, projecting rock faces and boulders must be
removed before forming the bedding. The thickness of bedding layer shall be minimum 75 mm. The
bedding material shall be well graded sand or granular material passing 75 mm sieve.
For heights of fill greater than 4 m, continuous concrete cradle bedding may be used. The mix
shall not be leaner than M150 concrete and the pipes shall be laid in position before the concrete has set.
Laying: Start Laying from the outlet and proceed towards the inlet ensuring the specified lines and grade.
The minimum longitudinal slope shall be 1 in 1000.
Where two or more lines of pipes are to be laid adjacent to each other, they shall be separated by
a distance equal to at least half the diameter of the pipe subject to a minimum of 450 mm. Ensure that
the pipe has a cushion of at least 0.60 m excluding crust thickness at the top.
Section 2900 of MoRTH specifications shall be referred for further details.

2229.3.2.RCC Slab Culverts:

Depending on the scour characteristics of the bed material, open foundations with or without
erosion proof bed flooring is generally adopted. In general, concrete footing shall rest over good
stratum at a depth of about 1.5m below the lowest bed level. Bed flooring where provided shall consist
of stone pitching set in cement mortar 1:3 or two layers of brick on edge set in cement mortar 1:3.
These shall be laid over 150 mm thick foundation concrete M15.
2229.3.3.RCC Box culverts
These are economical in such cases where either the depth of foundation is more than 4 m below bed
level or where the total embankment is very high and are suitable for a situation where the catchment area is
more than 40 hectares. Box section of height less than 2m X 2m is not practicable to implement.
2230.Dimensions of abutment and wing wall:
Dimensions of abutment for RCC Slab Culvert
Span 1m to 4 m 5m to 6 m
H 2 3 4 2 3 4
b1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.2 0.3 0.4
b2 0.7 1.1 1.4 0.6 1 1.4
b3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.4
b4 - 0.2 0.5 - 0.2 0.6
B1 1.5 2.0 2.4 1.5 2.0 2.5
B2 2.7 3.6 4.6 2.7 3.6 4.9
Dimensions of wing wall
Span upto 2 m 3m 4m 5m 6m
H 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4
b1 0.23 0.33 0.43 0.24 0.34 0.44 0.24 0.34 0.44 0.25 0.35 0.45 0.25 0.35 0.45
b2 0.57 0.82 1.07 0.59 0.84 1.09 0.6 0.85 1.10 0.62 0.87 1.13 0.63 0.88 1.13
B1 1.3 1.65 2.0 1.33 1.68 2.03 1.34 1.69 2.04 1.37 1.72 2.08 1.38 1.72 2.08
B2 2.1 2.45 2.8 2.13 2.48 2.83 2.14 2.49 2.84 2.17 2.52 2.88 2.18 2.53 2.88

378
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

.3 0.3

b3

BED LEVEL BED LEVEL

b4 b2 b3 b1 b4 0.4 0.3 b2 b1 0.4

0.4 0.4
B1 B1
0.2 0.4 0.2 0.4
0. 2 0.2
0.2 0.4

B2 B2

Section of Abutment Section of Wing Wall

Figure 4.2 Abutment and wing wall section for height more than 4.5m

3000mm 1500mm 3000mm

Road
End Pillar Construction
Premix Carpet Parapet CC Bed Joint
Wearing Coat

30 Deck Slab 150 mm

40 Masonry /
210 mm WBM
H CC Abutment
Slope 1: 3 150 mm
Boulder
CC/ RR Packing
10
10 Masonry /
CC
10

CC 1:4:8 , 20mm

Figure 4.3 Typical Details of Abutment and wing wall section for height upto
The following points are to be followed for construction of culverts.
1. The design shall be based on 2lane IRC Class A loading.
2. The length of wing walls shall be sufficient to eliminate any tendency of the embankment slope to
slip into the stream.
3. Construction joint between abutment and wing wall shall be provided to avoid overstressing at the
junction due to differential settlement.
4. The bearing shall be of reinforced bitumen laminated Kraf
Kraftt paper conforming to IS 1938. While
concreting the slabs, care shall be taken to prevent the bearing material from being displaced.
5. All space between foundation, masonry or concrete and the sides of excavation shall be refilled to
the original surface in layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness.
6. The backfill material around the structure shall be of granular type having plasticity index and
liquid limit not exceeding 20 and 40 respectively. The fill material shall be deposited in horizontal
layers not exceeding 200 mm compacted thickness.
7. If the height and abutment and return over bed level is more than 2 m weep hole shall be provided
150 mm above low water level or ground level whichever is higher. In case of concrete/ masonry,

379
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

weep holes of 150 mm dia or 80 X 150 mm size in 1:20 slope shall be provided at 1 metre interval
both horizontally and vertically. Refer IRC 40
8. Water Spout shall be provided for large span culverts. For 5 and 6 m span, one water spout of 100
mm diameter shall be provided in the centre of slab on either side of the deck.
9. All culverts shall be numbered on the end pillars as per IRC SP 20 with year of construction.
10. In case of stone masonry, coarse rubble masonry is stipulated.
11. Face stones shall be hammer dressed on all beds and joints so as to give them approximately
rectangular shapes.
12. The hearting or interior filling of the wall shall consist of flat bedded stone carefully laid on their
proper beds in mortar. While the use of chips shall be restricted to the filling of interstices between
the adjacent stones in hearting and these shall not exceed 15 % of the quantity of masonry.
13. Bond stones or headers shall be at 1.5 m or 1.8 m apart clears in every course. The headers shall
overlap at least by 150 mm
14. Face stone shall tail into the work for not less than their heights and at least one third of the stones
shall tail into the work for a length not less than twice the height.
15. The face joint shall not be more than 20 mm thick.
2231.Causeways and Submersible Bridges.
A causeway is a small submersible structure, which allows flood to pass over it.
2231.1.Flush causeway: It is a paved dip built to cross a shallow water course. The top level shall be at
the same level as that of the bed of the water course.
2231.2. A low level or vented causeway: This is a structure provided with a few openings comprising
of pipes, small span slabs or small arches etc. with a raised road top level to a moderate height upto 1.5
m height.
2231.3. A high-level causeway: This is a submersible structure provided with larger openings
comprising of a simply supported /continuous RCC slab or multiple arches or boxes and a raised road
top level to a reasonable height 1.5 m to 3 m. The RCC Slab may be supported over a series of short
piers (Masonry/ CC)
To avoid the heading up of water on the upstream side which results in producing high velocities
leading to structural failure and out flanking, the top level of the causeway shall be kept as low as
possible. The water way provided in the causeway shall not be less than 30 % of the area of the stream,
measured between the stream bed level and the proposed top level of the road.
The details for culvert and causeway design shall be referred to in IRC SP 20-2002.
2232.Side drains
Side drain must be provided to collect surface water from the roadway and lead to an outlet. It
also acts as an outlet for the subsurface drains thereby protecting the base course of the roadway
structure from getting saturated/ lost its load bearing capacity. Side drains are designed for open channel
flow and generally provided on both sides of the road. Road drains in hilly terrain are constructed to
parabolic, trapezoidal, triangular, V-shaped, Kerb and channel or U- shaped cross sections.
IRC SP 20 and IRC 42 may be referred for details and design of drains.
2233. Geosynthetics
This specification covers the various applications of Geosynthetic materials in road and bridge
works including supplying and laying as per special provisions.
Geosynthetics includes,
(i) Geotextile: Any permeable textile natural or Synthetic, used with foundation, soil, rock, earth, or
any other geotechnical engineering related material. In the present chapter, it is related to synthetic
material only.
(ii) Geogrid: A deformed or non-deformed grid of polymeric material used primarily for reinforcement
purposes with foundation, soil, rock, earth, or any other geotechnical engineering related material.
(iii) Geonets : These are net made of polymeric material used for drainage of foundation, soil, rock,
earth or any other geotechnical engineering related material.

380
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

(iv) Geomembrane : An essentially impermeable membrane of polymeric material used with foundation,
soil, rock, earth or my other geotechnical engineering related material, to control fluid migration.-
(v) Geocomposite : A manufactured material using geoiexliles, geogrids, geonet and/ or geomembrane in
laminated or composite form,"
The details on specifications, quality and laying of geosynthetics are given in Section 700 of MoRTH.

2234. Execution – Bridges

2234.1.General
Before starting the construction work, the procedure mentioned in section 2200 must be followed
and care must be taken to ensure that the following documents are available at site.
1. Sanction letter and technical note, if any
2. Bill of Quantities
3. Copy of contract document
4. Copy of approved set of plans, estimates and detailed working drawings
5. Standards, specifications, guidelines, codes of practices etc., according to which the work must
be executed as per contract
6. Survey, investigation and subsoil test reports
2235. Excavation
Before starting excavation, it is necessary that initial site levels are taken. Protective works, if
any, shall be completed before monsoon so that foundations do not get undermined. Excavations for
laying foundations shall be carried out in accordance with Section 300 of MoRTH Specification for
Road and Bridge works. The last 300 mm of excavation shall be done just before laying of lean concrete
below foundation.
Where there is any doubt regarding the bearing capacity or suitability of the foundation soil the
matter shall be reported to the Executive Engineer. In the case of small works up to TS power of
Executive Engineer, if any variation on the width, depth and type of foundation is found necessary the
Assistant Executive Engineer himself may decide the matter after reporting to the authority sanctioning
the estimate.
Load tests shall be conducted in the foundation soil if found necessary. If the contractor has over
excavated the foundation, he shall not be allowed to refill this with earth but, the additional excavation
shall be filled up by concrete. No extra cost is payable to the contractor on this account. In some cases, it
may be possible to reduce the depth or width of foundation due to existence of harder type of soil or rock
in particular localities but the Assistant Executive Engineer may decide on the alteration necessary and
instruct the contractor accordingly. A report shall be sent to the Executive Engineer clearly indicating
the change effected and the reasons therefore.
The useful materials obtained from excavation like moorum sand stone etc. shall be stacked
separately and properly measured and accounted for. It shall be reused for backfilling of foundations and
other useful works. All spaces excavated and not occupied by the foundation shall be refilled upto
surrounding level in accordance with section 300 MoRTH Specification for Road and Bridge works. All
safety measures shall be observed at site to avoid accidents. Unauthorized entries to site of work shall be
prohibited. The contractor shall obtain proper license for explosives whenever these are to be stored.
The excavation for foundation shall be checked and got approved by the Executive Engineer
2236. Concreting
All the materials used in concreting must be tested for relative properties before hand.
2236.1. Key Points
The minimum cement content is based on 20 mm aggregate.
For 40 mm and larger sized aggregates, cement content may be reduced suitably, but the
reduction shall not be more than 10%
For underwater concreting, the cement content shall be increased by 10 %.
Prior to start of construction, the contractor shall design the mix and submit to the Executive
Engineer for approval of the mix, proportions of materials, including admixtures used.
Trial mixes: Test cubes shall be taken, from trial mixes. For each mix, set of six cubes shall be
made from each of three consecutive batches. Three cubes from each set of mix shall be tested at

381
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

an age of 28 days and three at an earlier date (7 days) approved by the Executive Engineer. The
cubes shall be made, cured, stored, transported and tested in conformity with the MoRTH
specifications.
The average strength of the nine cubes at 28 days shall exceed the specified characteristic
strength.
Concrete shall be mixed either in a concrete mixer or in a batching and mixing plant approved
by the Executive Engineer. Hand mixing shall not be permitted.
Mixers, which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes, shall be thoroughly cleaned
before putting in a new batch.
The first batch of concrete from the mixer shall contain only two thirds of the normal quantity of
coarse aggregate.
The compacted thickness of each layer shall not be more than 0.45 m when internal vibrators are
used and shall not exceed 0.3 m in all other cases.
Do not allow dropping of concrete from a height exceeding 2 m.
When concreting is to be received on a surface, which has hardened, it shall be roughened, swept
clean, wetted and covered with a 13 mm thick mortar layer composed of cement and sand in the
same ratio as in the concrete mix.
Do not apply vibration through the reinforcement.
Keep the compacted concrete continuously wet for a period not less than 14 days
Transporting, placing and compaction of Concrete shall be as per clause 1709 of MoRTH
Specification for Road and Bridge works. For formwork and staging clause 1500 of MoRTH
Specification for Road and Bridge works shall be followed. The contractor shall furnish the design and
drawings of complete formwork as well as their supports for approval of the Assistant Executive
engineer before any erection is taken up. Metal/ laminated board formwork shall preferably be used for
achieving good finish. The formwork shall be robust and strong and the joints shall be leak proof. The
formwork shall be coated with an approved release agent that will effectively prevent sticking and will
not stain the concrete sides. The formwork shall be inspected and approved by Assistant Executive
Engineer before concreting is done.
The requisite properties for structural steel shall be as per clause 1009 of MoRTH Specification for
Road and Bridge works and its placement shall conform to clause 1600 of MoRTH Specification for
Road and Bridge works. This includes protection of reinforcement, bar splicing and bending of
reinforcement. The size (Maximum nominal) of coarse aggregates for concrete to be used shall be as
given in Table 123.4
Table 123.4 Maximum nominal size of Coarse aggregates
Sl Components Maximum nominal size of Coarse
no: aggregates
1 RCC Well kerb 20
2 RCC/ PCC Well steining 40
3 Well cap or pile cap, solid type piers and abutment 20
4 RCC work in Girders, slabs, wearing coat, curb 20
approach slab, hollow piers and abutments, piers.
5 Pre stressed concrete (PSC) work 20
6 Any other item. As specified by the Executive Engineer
The time of removal of formwork and staging shall be as per Table 4.3.2.
Table 4.3.2 Time of Removal of Formwork
a) Walls, piers, abutments, columns and vertical faces of 12 – 48 hours as may be decided by the
structural members Assistant Executive Engineer
b) Soffits of slab (with props left under) 3 days
c) Props (Left under Slabs) 14 days
d) Soffits of Girders (With props left under 7 days
e) Props (left under Girders) 21 days

382
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2237. Foundations
2237.1. Open foundation:
The plan dimensions of the foundation shall be set out at the bottom of foundation trench and
checked with respect to original reference line and axis. It shall be ensured that at no point the bearing
surface is higher than the founding level shown on the drawing.
Open foundation shall be constructed in dry conditions and the contractor shall provide for adequate
dewatering arrangements to the satisfaction of the Assistant Executive Engineer. Measures such as bailing
out, pumping, constructing diversion channels etc. shall be taken to keep the foundation trenches dry and to
protect the green concrete against damage. Where the bearing surface is earth, a layer of M15 concrete shall
be provided below foundation concrete. The thickness of lean concrete layer shall be 100 mm minimum
unless otherwise specified. All spaces excavated and not occupied by the foundation shall be refilled and
compacted with earth up to the surface of surrounding ground. In case of excavation in rock, the annular
space around foundation shall be filled with M 15 concrete up to the top of rock.
The construction procedure shall conform to provisions contained in Section 2100 of MoRTH
Specification for Road and Bridge works.
2237.2. Well foundation:
This work consists of construction of well foundation, taking it down to the founding level
through all kinds of sub-strata, plugging the bottom, filling the inside of the well, plugging the top and
providing a well cap in accordance with the details shown on the drawing and as per the specifications of
MoRTH Specification for Road and Bridge works section 1200.
Key points:
Fix up reference points, away from the zone of blowups/ settlements resulting from well sinking
and mark centre lines of the individual wells in longitudinal and transverse directions accurately.
Benchmark and reference points shall be checked regularly from permanent points fixed at
site. Cutting edge shall be laid on dry ground / Sand Island.
Sand Island to be protected against scour until the sinking is done to a safe level.
Floating caisson of steel can be adopted when construction of Sand Island is not
feasible. Use steel formwork for well curb
Concreting in the well curb shall be done in one continuous operation.
Steining shall be cast only after sinking the curb to some extent so that it becomes
stable. The steining shall be built in one straight line from bottom to top.
The height of the steining shall be calibrated by marking on outer faces in longitudinal and
transverse directions (4 sides) with every metre mark in paint. Zero shall start from bottom of the
cutting edge.
For sinking, material be excavated uniformly all round the dredge
hole De-watering shall not be permitted as a means for sinking.
A detailed statement with regard to the progress of well sinking shall be maintained at site as per
Appendix 2200 F.
If a tilt occurs, further steining has to be carried out, with the axis of the extended steining
following the axis of the well already sunk. Tilts shall be corrected as soon as it occurs.
Sinking history of well including tilt and shift, kentledge, dewatering, blasting done during
sinking shall be maintained in the format given in Appendix-2200 G
The depth of sump below the level of cutting edge shall be generally limited to one-sixth of the
outer diameter/ least lateral dimensions of well in place. Normally, the depth of sump shall not
exceed 3m unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Engineer.
Bottom plugging shall be done with the help of tremie pipe. Additional 10 per cent cement shall
be provided in the concrete for bottom plug.
A record of the method of sinking adopted, bottlenecks encountered etc. may be kept as per
proforma given in Appendix-2800 H
2237.3. Pile Foundation
Sub-surface investigation shall be carried out by in-situ pile tests. At least one bore- hole for every
foundation of the bridge shall be executed. Depth of boring shall not be less than
1.5 times estimated length of pile in soil but not less than 15 m beyond the probable length of
pile 15 times diameter of pile in weak/jointed rock but minimum 15 m in such rock

383
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

4 times diameter of pile in sound, hard rock but minimum 3 m in such rock
2237.3.1. Type of piles
The piles may be of reinforced concrete, pre stressed concrete, steel or timber. The piles may be
of solid or hollow sections or steel cased piles filled with concrete. Concrete piles may be driven cast-in-
situ or pre-cast or bored cast- in-situ or pre-cast piles driven into preformed bores. The shape of piles
may be circular, square, hexagonal, octagonal, "H" or "I" Section.
Construction of pile foundations shall be as per the MoRTH Specification for Road and Bridge
works clause 1100 and IS: 2911. The construction of pile foundations requires a careful choice of the
piling system depending upon sub-soil conditions and loading characteristics and type of structure. The
method of installing the piles, including details of the equipment shall be submitted by the Contractor
and got approved by the Executive Engineer
2237.3.1.1. Key points:
(i) Test piles
Test piles that are to become a part of the completed structure shall be installed with the same
type of equipment that is proposed to be used for piling in the actual structure.
Test piles, which, are not to be incorporated in the completed structure, shall be removed to at
least 600 mm below the proposed soffit level of pile cap and the remaining hole shall be
backfilled with earth or other suitable material.
(ii) Pre-cast concrete piles
For pre cast piles, concrete shall be placed continuously until the completion of each pile, the
length of pile shall not normally exceed 25 metres.
Pre-cast concrete piles shall be lifted by means of a suitable bridle or sling attached to the pile
but normally at points not more than 3 metres from the ends of the piles
Pre-cast concrete piles cured with water shall not be driven for at least 28 days after casting ( 10
days with rapid hardening cement )
Detailed procedure for construction and driving of pre-cast pile are given in the MoRTH Specification
for Road and Bridge works clause 1106
(iii) Cast-in-situ concrete piles
Cast-in-situ concrete piles may be either installed by making a bore into the ground by removal of
material or by driving a metal casing with a shoe at the tip and displacing the material laterally.
Cast- in-situ concrete piles may be cast in metal shells, which may remain permanently in place.
The reinforcement cages must be prepared in advance and adjustment to the length done
depending on site requirements.
This cage shall be lowered just prior to concreting and completed without interruption.
In case of liners being withdrawn, sufficient head of concrete has to be provided to prevent the
entry of ground water or reduction of cross section (necking of the pile).
A minimum of 2.0 m length of top of bore shall invariably be provided with casing to ensure
against loose soil falling into the bore.
If the concrete is placed inside pre-cast concrete tubes or consists of pre-cast sections, these shall
be free from cracks or other damage before being installed.
Specific requirements of cast- in-situ driven piles shall be as per Clauses 1100 of
MoRTH Specification for Road and Bridge works.
The equipments used for pile driving and the detailed procedures shall be as per Clauses 1110 &
1111 of MoRTH Specification for Road and Bridge works.
2238 Sub Structure
The construction procedure shall conform to provisions contained in Section 2200 of MoRTH
Specifications for Road and Bridge Works.
2238.1. Piers and Abutments
In case of concrete piers, the number of horizontal construction joints shall be kept
minimum. Construction joints shall be avoided in splash zones.
No vertical construction joint shall be provided.
In case of tall piers and abutments, use of slip form shall be preferred.

384
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

The surface of foundation/well cap/pile cap shall be scrapped with wire brush and all loose
materials removed.
In case reinforcing bars projecting from foundations are coated with cement slurry, tapping,
hammering or wire brushing shall remove the same.
Before commencing masonry or concrete work, the surface shall be thoroughly wetted.
In case of solid (non-spill through type) abutments, weep holes as shown on the drawings shall
be provided.
The surface finish shall be smooth, except the earth face of abutments, which shall be rough,
finished.
In case of abutments likely to experience considerable movement on account of backfill of
approaches and settlement of foundations, the construction of the abutment shall be followed by
filling up of embankment in layers to, the full height to allow for the anticipated movement
during construction period before casting of superstructure.
Specific requirements of piers and abutments shall be as per Clauses 2204 of MoRTH
Specification for Road and Bridge works.
2238.1.1. Pier Cap and Abutment Cap
• The locations and levels of pier cap/abutment cap/pedestals and bolts for fixing bearings shall be
checked carefully to ensure alignment in accordance with the drawings of the bridge.
• The surface of cap shall be finished smooth and shall have a slope for draining of water as
shown on the drawings.
• For short span slab bridges with continuous support on pier caps, the surface shall be cast
horizontal.
• The top surface of the pedestal on which bearings are to be placed shall also be cast horizontal.
• The surface on which elastomeric bearings are to be placed shall be wood float finished to a
level plane which shall not vary more than 1.5 mm from straight edge placed in any direction
across the area.
• The surface on which other bearings (steel bearings, pot bearings) are to be placed shall be cast
about 25 mm below the bottom level of bearings and as indicated on the drawings.
Specific requirements of Pier Cap and Abutment Cap shall be as per Clauses 2205 of
MoRTH Specification for Road and Bridge works.
2238.2. Dirt/ Ballast Wall, Return Wall and Wing Wall
• In case of cantilever return walls, no construction joint shall generally be permitted.
• Wherever feasible, the concreting in cantilever return walls shall be carried out in continuation
of the ballast wall.
• For gravity type masonry and concrete return and wing wall, the surface of foundation shall be
prepared in the same manner as prescribed for construction of abutment. No horizontal
construction joint shall be provided.
• If shown on drawing or directed by the Assistant Executive Engineer, vertical construction joint
may be provided.
• Vertical expansion gap of 20 mm shall be provided in return wall/wing wall at every 10 metre
intervals or as directed by the Assistant Executive Engineer.
• Weep holes shall be provided as prescribed for abutments or as shown on the drawings.
• The finish of the surface on the earth side shall be rough while the front face shall be smooth
finished.
• Architectural coping for wing wall/return wall in brick masonry shall conform to section 1300 of
MoRTH Specifications.

385
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Specific requirements of Dirt/ Ballast Wall, Return Wall and Wing Wall shall be as per Clause
2206 of MoRTH Specification for Road and Bridge works.
2239. Bearings
Bearings are the part of the bridge structures, which bears directly all the forces from the structure
above and transmits the same to the supporting structure. The different types of bearings currently in use are
Steel bearings, Elastomeric Bearings, Pot Bearings and Special bearings. Bearings shall conform to the
provisions contained under section 2000 of MoRTH Specifications for Road and Bridge Works.
2240. Super Structure
2240.1. Reinforced Concrete Construction
Construction of Solid Slabs and RCC T-Beam & Slab are carried out as per the clause 2300 set
forth in MoRTH Specification.
2240.2. Pre-stressed Concrete Construction
Construction of PSC Girder and Composite RCC Slab, Box Girder and Cantilever shall be
carried out as per the clause 2305 set forth in MoRTH Specifications
2241. Expansion Joint
Expansion Joints shall be provided as per Section 2600 of MORTH specification for Road and
Bridge Works.
2242. Wearing Coat and Appurtenances
2242.1. Wearing Coat
A wearing coat over the deck slab with bituminous material or Cement concrete shall be
provided as per Clause 2702 of MoRTH Specifications.
2242.2. Approach Slab
Reinforced concrete approach slab covering the entire width of the roadway shall be provided as
per details given on the drawings or as approved by the Assistant Executive Engineer. Minimum length
of approach slab shall be 3.5 m and minimum thickness 300 mm. The base for the approach slab shall be
as shown on the drawings.
2242.3. Drainage Spouts and Weep Holes
Drainage spouts and Weep holes shall be provided as per the clauses 2705 and 2706 of
MoRTH respectively.
2242.4. Illumination
Provision for lighting arrangements shall be done as per the drawings.
2242.5. Railings
Bridge railing includes the portion of the structure erected on and above the kerb for the
protection of pedestrians and traffic. Railings can be of Metal, Cast in situ and Pre-cast concrete. These
shall be erected as per the Clause 2703 of MoRTH Specification. Railings or closely spaced guard stones
shall be extended to the approach slabs.
2243.River Training and Protection Works
River training and protection work shall include construction of Guide bunds, Aprons, Stone
pitching or Revetment on Slopes, Flooring, Curtain wall and Flexible Aprons as required for ensuring
safety of the bridge structure and its approaches against damage by flood/flowing water. Constructions
of the above components shall be carried out as per section 2500 of MoRTH Specifications.
2243.1.Brick and Stone Masonry
Where the design suggests the use of Brick or Stone masonry, these shall conform to the specifications
in section 1300 and 1400 of MORTH respectively.
2244. Quality Control
The quality control of Bridge construction shall conform to the section 2500 of this section

386
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2245. Execution – Buildings

2245.1. General
Before start of the construction work, care must be taken to ensure that the documents as
specified in section 2200 are readily available. The site shall be handed over to the contractor within the
stipulated time and acknowledgement in prescribed form forwarded to all concerned officials.
2245.1.1. Professional Services and Responsibilities
The responsibility and competence of the team of professionals with regard to planning designing
and supervision of building construction work shall be in accordance with Part 2 'Administration' of
National Building Code 2005. The provisions in Part 2 ‘Administration’ of National Building Code 2005
shall also govern all applications for permits and issuance of certificates, etc. Employment of trained
workers shall be encouraged for building construction activity.
2245.1.2. Storage, Stacking and Handling of Building Materials
Storage, Stacking and Handling of Building Materials shall be in accordance with the Part 7
section 2 of National Building Code.
2245.1.3.Safety in Construction of a Building
The provisions of this Section shall apply to the erection/alteration of the various parts of a
building or similar structure. In case of a doubt or dispute, the specific Rules, Regulations and Acts
pertaining to the protection of the public or workmen from health and other hazards wherever specified
by the Local/State Authority or in the Acts of the Government take precedence over whatever is herein
specified. The safety management of the building site shall be in accordance with Part 7 Section 3 of
National Building Code 2005.
2246.Construction Activities Undertaken from Foundation to Roof:
i) The Contractor shall mark the Layout of Building on the ground in the form of centre lines of walls
and columns. These centre lines shall be guided by brick pillars made along the centre line at a
distance of 1.2 m from the outer walls and columns with the centre marked on these reference pillars
with fresh plaster. Excavation is done to the prescribed basement floor level.
ii) Balance excavation to be done after remarking the position of columns on excavated ground and also
making temporary markings of centre lines on excavated sides. Marking the foundation/ beams sizes
and then doing the balance excavation giving shape to the raft foundation / column foundations as
per the design.
iii) In case external waterproofing is to be done, it is to be done on the PCC and if internal it shall be
done after completing the RCC of the basement. Then the final Layout of walls, columns and beams
on the PCC shall be made and got verified by the Assistant Executive Engineer.
iv) Contractor shall prepare and submit the bar bending schedule as per drawings and get it approved by the
Assistant Executive Engineer. Cover blocks to be made by contractor in PCC at the time of laying PCC in
the thicknesses stipulated and placed below or around reinforcement so as to provide proper cover. After
laying of the Steel reinforcement it is to be checked and measured by the Assistant Executive Engineer
for accuracy and cover to reinforcement. This shall be check measured by AEE
v) Concrete for columns (or in walls) shall be as per design mix and vibrated properly. Cement
additives can be added for generating proper flow and compaction of concrete as per clause 5.5 of IS
456: 2000. Single lift shall not be more than 1.2 m
vi) Contractor is to cast the balance height of column after proper shuttering up to beam bottom.
vii) Contractor is to provide and do shuttering of the roof as per structural drawings and check its level.
It shall be ensured that proper amount of supports are provided and also that the shuttering is not
uneven or done with very old planks or bent plates. The shuttering of wareproof ply or of steel
sections made to the size required shall be used. Steel shuttering of various column sizes and also
steel plates for roof shuttering shall be used. Assistant Engineer shall check the shuttering for levels
and design aspect he shall also check the supports for any loose ends.
viii) The primary responsibility of ensuring the correctness of the reinforcement details as per design
is vested with the Assistant Engineer. But the contractor’s Engineer shall certify that the
reinforcement is provided as per structural drawings and bar bending schedule. The Overseer in
charge shall report the matter to the Assistant Engineer.

387
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

ix) In normal course concreting shall be done at a stretch. In the case of emergency the work shall be
stopped only at supports or at the point of contra flexure.
x) Time shall be given to the electrical contractor and the plumbing contractor for laying the pipes, fan
and light boxes properly. Thus a gap of one day shall be provided after the bending of steel
reinforcement so that both the electrical and sanitary contractors can execute this work properly and
also for the Assistant Executive Engineer to check the reinforcement, shuttering, electrical and
sanitary work.
xi) Assistant Engineer shall depute one of his Overseers to keep a check at the point of mixing for
volumes of cement, coarse sand, coarse aggregate. Additives for concrete available in the market for
increasing the workability of concrete shall be used as per requirement.
2246.1. Site layout
The layout of the construction site shall be carefully planned keeping in view the various
requirements to construction activities and the specific constraints in terms of its size, shape, topography,
traffic and other restrictions, in public interest. A well-planned site layout would enable safe smooth and
efficient construction operations. The site layout shall take into considerations the following factors:
a) Easy entry and exit, with proper parking of vehicle and equipments during construction.
b) Properly located material stores for easy handling and storage.
c) Adequate stack areas for bulk construction materials.
d) Optimum location of plants and equipments (batching plants, etc).
e) Layout of temporary services (water, power, power generation unit, hoists, cranes, elevators, etc).
f) Adequate yard lighting and lighting for night shifts.
g) Temporary buildings; site office and shelter for workforce with use of non-combustible materials as
far as possible including emergency medical aids.
h) Roads for vehicular movement with effective drainage plan.
i) Construction safety with emergency access and evacuations and security measures.
j) Fabrication yards for reinforcement assembly, concrete pre-casting and shuttering
k) Fencing, barricades and signage’s.
2246.2. Buildings Materials
For all Building materials, methods of use and specifications National Building Code 2005, part
V- may be followed
2247. Earthwork Excavation
Excavation wherever required shall be done to the prescribed building plan as per the clause 11,
12 and 13 of Section 3 Part 7 National Building Code 2005.
2248. Foundation
Foundation shall be done as per the design drawings. The forms and materials of building
foundations vary according to ground conditions, structural material, structural type, and other factors.
Types of foundation and details shall be referred to in Part VI Section 2 of National Building Code 2005
(Clause 6 to 13)
2249. Plain Cement Concrete.
Plain Cement Concrete shall be done as per the thickness given in the drawing. The minimum
thickness of PCC must be 100 mm. The bottom of the foundation shall be leveled both longitudinally
and transversely or stepped as directed by the Assistant Engineer. Before footing is laid, the surface shall
be slightly watered and rammed. In the event of excavation having been made deeper than that shown on
the drawings or as otherwise ordered by the Assistant Engineer, the extra depth shall be made up with
concrete of same grade as that of PCC of the foundation at the cost of the Contractor. Earth filling shall
not be used for the purpose to bring the foundation to level. When rock or other hard strata is
encountered, it shall be freed of all soft and loose material, cleaned and cut to a firm surface either level
and stepped as directed by the Assistant Engineer. In the case of open foundation dewatering shall not be
permitted from the time of placing of concrete up to 24 hours after placement.
2250. Random Rubble Masonry for foundation and Basement:
In this type rubble stones are carefully laid, hammered down in to position and solidly embedded
in mortar, with mortar joints not exceeding 12.5 mm in thickness. The stones will be hammer dressed on
the face and stones are so arranged as to break joint as much as possible and long vertical lines of joints

388
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

are avoided. The mortar used in the rubble foundation shall be minimum 1:6 proportion. Bond stones
must be used at staggered spacing of 1.5 m. The stones must be wetted before using.
2250.1 Damp proof course
Damp proof courses are inserted in horizontal beds in masonry. In basements vertical damp-proof
courses also are provided. Usually the damp proof course consists of a layer of cement mortar or cement
concrete 25 mm to 40 mm. thick painted over with 2 coats of bitumen - 1st coat at 1.2 Kg./sq. meter and
2nd coat at 0.7 Kg. per sq. meter. This is covered with coarse sand @ 0.006 cum per sq. meter.
Another method of damp proofing consists of adding certain compounds to concrete or mortar,
like chalk, talc etc. which have a mechanical action of pore filling or alkaline silicates, aluminum or zinc
sulphates, calcium, aluminum or ammonium chloride, iron fillings etc. which react chemically and fill
the pores.
A third method of damp proofing consists of incorporation of a layer of water-repellent material such
as lead sheet, slates, mastic asphalt etc. between the source of moisture and part of the building adjacent
to it. Alternately one of the specifications as per part 5 of National Building code shall be followed.
2250.1.1. Damp-proof course above ground level
To prevent moisture rising above ground level by capillary action, the damp proof course is
provided above ground level. To form an effective barrier, the course shall extend to the full thickness of
masonry. Damp proof course when provided below flooring shall form a continuous layer with the
damp-proof course in the masonry.
2250.1.2. Damp proof course for basement
This work shall be taken on hand only when the sub-soil water level is at its lowest. Further the
site has to be kept dry by pumping till the work is completed and has set completely. Suitable structural
support shall be provided for the damp - proof course to withstand the anticipated water pressure.
The following methods can be adopted:
a. A base slab of weak cement concrete with a smooth surface finish is constructed on the floor of the
excavation. This shall project at least 15 cm. beyond the outer walls. The damp proof course is laid
over the entire slab.
b. A protective flooring of flat brick or cement concrete 1:3:6 is constructed over the damp proofing
course to protect it. The structural walls and floor are then constructed. They shall be suitably
designed to withstand the anticipated water pressure. The outside faces are plastered and finished
smooth.
c. The damp proof course is then applied to the outside face of the wall, joining at the base to the
projecting damp proof course originally laid over the base slab, taking care to ensure a perfect bond.
A thin protective brick wall, half brick thick, is then constructed over the projecting base slab. The
gap between the walls shall be grouted with cement.
Alternately, where sufficient working space is not available after the base concrete is laid, the
outer protective wall is first constructed. The damp proof course is then laid over the floor and sides. A
protective layer of brick is laid over the floor and a thin inner protective wall is constructed to protect the
damp proof course laid over the sides. The structural walls are then constructed.
2250.2. Plinth beam
If the foundation is deep, that is, going more than half a storey in depth below the plinth, the
Plinth shall be connected using beams. Plinth level shall be checked with respect to drawing level.
Bottom of the peripheral plinth beam shall be kept 15cm below the existing ground level. Plinth beam
shall be provided as per structural drawing.
2251. Cement Mortar
Cement and sand shall be mixed intimately in a mechanical mixer in the specified proportions.
Proportioning of cement shall be weighed while sand can be by volumes, after making due allowance for
bulking. The mortar shall be used within 30 minutes of addition of water.
2252. Brick work for structures
Bricks are to be immersed in water for a minimum period of one hour before use. All brickwork shall
be laid in English bond, even and true to line, plumb and level. Bricks shall be laid with frogs up, on a full bed
of mortar. All joints shall be properly flushed and packed with mortar so that no hollow space is

389
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

left. Thickness of joints shall not exceed 10mm. The masonry shall be kept constantly moist on all faces
for a minimum period of 7 days.
2253. Formwork
Most structural concrete is made by placing (also called CASTING) plastic concrete into spaces
enclosed by previously constructed Forms. These forms are usually removed once the plastic concrete
hardens into the shape outlined by the forms. For Forms
ms for concrete structures must be tight, rigid, and
strong. The forms must be strong enough to resist the high pressure exerted by the concrete.
2253.1.Form Materials
Wood, plywood, steel, fiberglass, and other approved materials are commonly used as form
materials.
2253.1.1.Foundation Forms
Foundation forms may include forms or parts of forms for column footings, pier footings, and
wall footings. Whenever possible, the earth shall be excavated and the hole used to contain the
foundation of footing forms.
orms. Footings are cast directly against the earth, and only the sides are molded in
forms. Where there is a firm natural earth surface, which is capable of supporting and molding the
concrete, there is no need of additional formwork.
Wall forms are made up of five
basic parts. They are as follows:
(1) Sheathing, to shape and retain the
concrete until it sets;
(2) Studs, to form a framework and support
the sheathing;
(3) Wales, to keep the form aligned and
support the studs;
(4) Braces, to hold the forms erect under
lateral pressure; and
spreader units,
(5) Ties and spreaders or tie-spreader
to hold the sides of the forms at the correct
spacing.
Wall forms may be built in place or pre pre-
fabricated, depending on the shape and the
desirability for reuse. Wall forms are usually
reinforced against displacement by the use of
TIES. Small surface holes remain, which
can be plugged with grout. The
prefabricated panels for formwork can be
used. The panels can be sized to suit any
particular situation. Projects requiring mass concrete are often formed by the use of giant panels or
ganged, prefabricated forms. Cranes usually raise and place these large sections, so only the available
equipment limits their size. These large forms are built or assembled on the ground, and their only basic
basi
difference from regular forms is the extra bracing required withstanding handling. Special attention must
be given to corners when forms are being erected. These are weak points because the continuity of
sheathing and wales is broken. Forms must be pulle
pulledd tightly together at these points to prevent leakage
of concrete.
2253.2. Column Forms
A typical concrete column form is securely braced to hold the sheathing together against the
bursting pressure exerted on the form by the plastic concrete. Since the bursting pressure is greater at the
bottom than the top, the bracings are placed closer together at the bottom. Boltholes are bored in
projections, and bolts are inserted to backup the wedges that are driven to tighten.
2253.3. Beam and Girder Forms
The type of construction to be used for beam forms depends upon whether the form is to be
removed in one piece or whether the sides are to be stripped and the bottom left in place until such time
as the concrete has developed enough strength to permit removal of the shoring. Beam forms are
subjected to very little bursting pressure but must be shored up at frequent intervals to prevent sagging

390
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

under the weight of the fresh concrete. The vertical side members are placed to assist in transmitting slab
loads to the supporting shores.
2253.4. Scaffoldings
Properly designed and constructed scaffolding built by competent workmen shall be provided
during the construction in the building site to ensure the safety of workers. Joining the members of
scaffolds only with nails shall be prohibited, as they are likely to get loose under normal weathering
conditions. In the erection or maintenance of tall buildings, scaffoldings shall be of noncombustible
material especially when the work is being done on any building in occupation. Frequent inspections of
scaffolding shall be done after initial construction of the scaffolding.
2254. Column
Concrete columns shall be executed as per approved structural drawings/ designs. For any
change proposed at site, in the size of column section and reinforcement/or their orientation, etc.,
approval of Executive Engineer shall be obtained before execution.
2255. Walls
Walls are differentiated into two types: load bearing and non-load bearing. Load-bearing walls
not only separate spaces, but also provide structural support for whatever is above them. Non-load
bearing walls function solely as partitions between spaces. Partition walls, curtain wall, panel wall and
shear wall come under this category.
Common burnt clay bricks, Burnt clay fly ash bricks, pulverized fuel ash lime bricks, Stones,
Sand lime bricks, Concrete blocks (Solid & Hollow), Lime based blocks, Burnt clay hollow blocks,
Gypsum Partition blocks, Autoclaved cellular concrete blocks and Concrete stone masonry blocks are
used with cement mortar for the construction. The materials used in masonry construction shall be in
accordance with the Part 5 Building Materials and construction shall conform to the accepted standards
of Part 6 Section 4 Masonry of NBC. Height and length of masonry walls shall be restricted as per
clause 4.6 and clause 8 of Section 4 of part 6 of National Building Code.
Depending on the type of wall to be constructed height of the wall per day shall be restricted to
ensure that the newly constructed wall does not come down due to lack of strength in lower layers. In
long walls adequate expansion/crumple joints shall be provided to ensure safety. If an opening is
necessary in the existing wall then adequate support against the collapse or cracking of the wall portion
above or roof or adjoining walls shall be provided. Whenever projections cantilever out of the walls
temporary form work shall be provided for such projections and the same shall not be removed till wall
over the projecting slabs providing stability load against over turning are completely constructed.
2256. Lintel, Bond Beams, and Sills
Bond beams are reinforced courses of block that bond and integrate a concrete masonry wall into
a stronger unit. They increase the bending strength of the wall and are particularly needed to resist the
high winds of hurricanes and earthquake forces. In addition, they exert restraint against wall
movement, reducing the formation of cracks. Bond beams are constructed with special-shape masonry units
(beam and lintel block) filled with concrete or grout and reinforced with embedded steel bars. These beams
are usually located at the top of walls to stiffen them. Since bond beams have appreciable structural strength,
they can be located to serve as lintels over doors and windows. Lintels shall have a minimum bearing at each
end equal to depth or 15cms whichever is higher. Pre-cast concrete lintels can be used with an offset on the
underside to suit the modular openings. Pre-cast concrete sills can be used.
Pre-cast concrete lintels can be used with an offset on the underside to fit the modular openings.
Pre-cast concrete sills can be used.
57.1. Sunshade: This is provided for protection of doors windows, ventilators and other openings from
the effect of rain and sunlight. This may be provided as per the provisions of the code IS 456. It must be
cast monolithically with the lintel and care must be given to ensure sufficient slope to aid runoff. Lintel
must be raised above the sunshade to a minimum 5 cm so that water seepage is avoided.
2257. Beam
Beams are the principal load-carrying horizontal members. They take the load directly from
the floor above and carry it to the columns. The beams shall be constructed in accordance with the
structural drawings.

391
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2258. Slabs
Slabs shall be constructed as per the structural drawings. Top surface of Roof slab shall have necessary
slope to drain off rainwater. In case of sloping roof, the slabs shall rest on RCC beams over masonry walls,
so that crack development can be avoided.
2259. Pre-stressed concrete
For this method of concreting Refer IS 1343: 1980
2260. Ready mixed concrete
For this method of concreting Refer IS 4926: 2003
2261. Doors
Wood, Metal and Plastic are used for fabrication of doors, windows and ventilators. All wood
components are treated with a water-repellent preservative to provide protection against moisture. Doors in
the traditional pattern are usually of the panel type. Flush doors consist of thin plywood faces over a
framework of wood with a wood block or particleboard core. Exterior doors are usually 4cms thick and not
less than 2mts high. The main entrance door is of minimum 100cms width, and the side or rear door is
normally 90cms wide. Novelty doors, such as PVC door unit, are commonly used for water closets/bath
rooms because they provide water resistance. Hinged doors shall open or swing in the direction of natural
entry, against a blank wall, and shall not be obstructed by other swinging doors. Doors shall never be hinged
to swing into a hallway. If there is no sufficient space for swing doors, sliding doors shall be provided. For the
general requirements of the door refer Part 3 Clause D-3.3 of the NBC.
2261.1.Windows
Windows shall be designed to avoid the glare which is a particular problem for people with
impaired vision. Large glass areas close to circulation spaces shall be marked a little below eyelevel with
a coloured band or frame. Normally, the sill shall not be more than 800 mm from the floor. Windows
shall be easy to open and close. A window schedule on the construction drawings shall give the
dimensions, type, such as casement, double-hung, and so forth, and the number of lights (panes of glass)
for each window in the structure.
2261.2.Ventilators
Windows and Ventilators are provided for the air circulation and daylight. But in case where
window is not advisable ventilators are provided. Generally glazed ventilators with wooden or metal
frames shall be provided in bathrooms, toilets, storerooms, dressing rooms etc.
2262. Hardware & Fasteners
Hardware accessories of approved quality made of metal or plastic that includes locks, hinges,
door pulls, cabinet hardware, window fastenings, door closers and checks, door holders, and automatic
exit devices shall be used. The fastening devices like nails, glues, screws, and bolts shall be of approved
quality.
2263. Interior Finishes
Finishes for floors, walls and partitions, and ceilings is an important and make sure that each
finishing job is properly done and gives a neat, attractive appearance Interior finishes are those materials
installed to cover the surfaces of the floors, the walls, and the ceilings.
2263.1. Flooring and Floor Finishes
Floor materials found in shore establishment buildings and structures for various occupancies
include wood, concrete, terrazzo, and clay tile. Common floor coverings include asphalt, vinyl tile, and
linoleum. Common tiles in use are ceramic tiles, stone tiles, granite tile, marble and slate etc
2263.2. Laying of tiles
Clean the surface. Roughen the concrete under-bed to provide a good bond for the new setting
cement. Dampen the under-bed and place the setting mortar mixed in the proportion of 1 part cement to 3
parts sand. Set the tile, tamping it to the level of the required finished floor. Fill the joints with grout or
pointing mortar, matching the color and finish of floor as closely as possible. Grout joints 3 mm or less in
width with neat cement grout of the consistency of thick cream. Point joints one-3mm to 6mm in width with
pointing mortar, consisting of one-part cement to one-part screened sand. Point joints wider than 6
mm with pointing mortar consisting of one-part cement to two-parts screened sand. I n locations, such as
galleys and food-preparation areas, where the floor is directly exposed to the effects of corrosion agents,

392
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

acid-resistant joint material is used to fill the joints. The acid-resistant mortars are proprietary products
and shall be mixed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
2263.3. Grinding and Polishing
When grinding of a floor/Tile is required, it shall be started after the surface has hardened
sufficiently to prevent dislodgement of particles or till the tile is fixed. The machines used shall be of an
approved type. The floor is kept wet during the grinding process, and the cuttings are removed by
squeegee and flushing with water. After the surface is ground, air holes, pits, and other blemishes are
filled with a thin grout. This grout is spread over the floor and worked into the pits with a straightedge
and rubbed into the floor with the grinding machine. When the filings have hardened a final grinding
removes the film and gives the finish a polish. All surplus material is then removed by washing
thoroughly. A rubbed finish is required when a uniform and attractive surface must be obtained. The first
rubbing shall be done with coarse carborandum stones curing must precede until final rubbing. Finer
carborundum stones are used for the final rubbing.
2264. Wall finishes
Plastering is the common type of wall finish for walls and partitions. Other types shall be
drywall and wall tile.
2264.1.Plastering
Plastering using cement mortar as per specification shall be done for both interior and exterior
walls.
2264.2. Drywall
Drywall construction is an alternative to plastering for walls and ceilings. Essentially, it consists
of panels of wallboard of various types with joints tight, true, and effectively concealed. All materials
used shall strictly adhere to the specifications. Ensure that the wallboard is applied accurately.
2264.3. Wall Tile
For wall finishes of baths, galleys, mess halls, hospital rooms, and other applications for which a
highly sanitary, easily cleaned, impervious wall finish is required, glazed ceramic tile, glazed vitrified
(waterproof) clay tile, and plastic tile shall be used. In the case of exterior walls, for better appearance,
suitable tiles shall be used. Ensure that the tile furnished conforms to the specifications in kind, quality,
size, colour, glaze, texture and grip.
2264.4. Stucco
This shall be done on walls, for acoustical effects in interiors and for an ornamental finish for
exterior walls. It has to be ensured that the masonry has an unglazed rough surface with joints struck
flush and adequate key to assure a good bond.
2264.5.Ceiling
Plastering is the common type of ceiling finish. Other types of finishes using tiles, boards etc.
may be used. In case of large halls and auditoriums, for acoustics, special acoustical tiles and acoustical
plaster of approved quality and specifications shall be used. Acoustical tiles are available in various
materials, such as wood, vegetable or mineral fibre, perforated metal, or cemented shavings in different
thicknesses, shapes, and dimensions and with varying textures, perforations, and joint treatment.
2265. Painting
2265.1.Surface Preparation
The most essential part of any painting job is proper surface preparation and repair. Each type of
surface requires specific cleaning procedures. Before painting suitable priming coat shall be applied as
per specifications and maximum possible time gap shall be allowed before painting is done. Paint will
not adhere well, provide the protection necessary, or have the desired appearance unless the surface is in
proper condition for painting. Exterior surface preparation is especially important because hostile
environments can accelerate deterioration.
2265.1.1.Application of Paint
Painting shall be done to different types of surfaces, such as metal, wood, and concrete/ masonry. The
common methods of applying paint are brushing, rolling, and spraying. The choice of method is based on
several factors, such as speed of application, environment, type and area of surface, type of coating to be
applied, desired appearance of finish, and training and experience of painters. Brushing is

393
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

ideal for small surfaces and odd shapes or for cutting in corners and edges. Rolling and spraying are
efficient on large, flat surfaces. Spraying can also be used for round or irregular shapes. While spraying,
adjacent areas not to be coated must be covered. Lacquer products, which dry rapidly, shall be sprayed.
2265.2.Interior Painting
Paint for interior walls and ceilings are usually flat wall paint. Interior enamel may be specified
where a semi gloss or gloss washable finish is desired on woodwork or walls. A standard undercoat for
primer under enamel, or use of the enamel with thinner may be permitted. Paint and enamel may be
obtained with color added, or color-in-oil may be added to the white paint on the job. Specifications may
require the sanding of interior woodwork or rubbing with steel wool. Priming of plaster surfaces with a
glue size may also be required. Make sure that finish coats are of uniform gloss and color and are free
from suction spots, highlights, brush marks, and other imperfections.
2265.3.White washing
The interior wall of ordinary buildings and all ceilings shall be whitewashed
2265.4.Colour washing
The interior wall of residential buildings and office buildings shall also be colour washed.
2265.5. Distemper washing
Interior walls of hospitals and other important buildings shall be given distemper coating.
In the case of prestigious buildings, plastic emulsion shall be provided.
2265.6. Exterior Painting
The exterior work includes steel structures, concrete masonry and woodwork. The
exterior painting of steel structures, concrete, masonry and woodwork shall be done with
special care for protection from environment.
2265.7. Metal and Steel Structures
Metal and Steel surfaces shall be cleaned by wire brushing, sandblasting, grit blasting, flame
cleaning, cleaning with solvent, or air blasting, as may be specified; All surface rust, dirt, grease, oil, and
loose scale shall be removed and if specified tight scale shall also be removed. Suitable priming coat
shall be applied after cleaning the surface. The paint is worked thoroughly into all joints, cracks, and
crevices. Each coat is allowed to dry thoroughly before the next coat is applied and the prescribed
number of coats, each conforming to the requirements of the specifications, is applied. Nonferrous metal
is usually not painted.

2265.8. Masonry walls

Painting of concrete, stucco, masonry walls and similar surfaces is done primarily for decorative
purposes or for damp proofing walls. Paints usually are of white Portland cement base with color but may be
of an oil base. Make sure that the materials conform to the standard specifications. Also determine whether
surfaces are clean and free from dust, efflorescence, and other contamination and whether they are adequately
cured. When Portland cement paint is used, be certain that the surface is thoroughly wetted. If oil-based paints
are used, ensure that the surface is thoroughly cured, pretreated as specified, and thoroughly dry. In the case
of prestigious buildings, good quality anti fungal paints shall be provided

2265.9. Woodwork
Make sure that surfaces are thoroughly dry and clean and are otherwise suitably prepared for
painting before permitting work to proceed. Ensure that the priming coat is intact and is of suitable
consistency to protect the wood, but not so tight that moisture in the wood is prevented from
evaporating. Make sure that the wood is smooth enough to assure the continuity and adherence of the
paint film; that holes and cracks are puttied or filled with wood filler; and that knots and pitch streaks are
sealed with shellac, varnish, or other sealer, as prescribed. Make certain that the paints are of approved
quality and color; and are applied by brushing, using high-quality brushes, until the coat is smooth, even,
free from brush marks, and of uniform thickness, texture, and color. Also be sure that the paint is not
brushed too thin to assure satisfactory hiding power; that each coat is allowed to dry thoroughly to a firm
film before permitting application of the next coat; and that the specified number of coats is applied.

394
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2266. List of relevant codes for painting

Document Standard Title
Number
IS 144: 1950 Ready mixed paint, brushing, petrol resisting, air-drying, for interior painting of tanks
and container, red oxide (colour unspecified)
IS 145: 1950 Ready mixed paint, slushing, petrol resisting, air-drying for interior painting of tanks
and containers, red oxide (colour unspecified)
IS 146: 1950 Specification for ready mixed paint, brushing, petrol resisting, stoving, or interior
painting of tanks and containers, red oxide
IS 147: 1950 Specification for ready mixed paint, slushing, petrol resisting, stoving, for interior
painting of tanks and containers, red oxide
IS 1200: Part 13: Method of measurement of building and civil engineering works: Part 13 Whitewashing,
1994 colour washing, distampering and painting of building surfaces
IS 1200: Part 15: Method of measurement of building and civil engineering works: Part 15 painting,
1987 polishing, varnishing etc
IS 1477: Part I: Code of Practice for Painting of Ferrous Metals in Buildings - Part I : Pretreatment
2000
IS 1477: Part 2: Code of practice for painting of ferrous metals in buildings: Part2
Painting 1971
IS 2395: Part 2: Code of practice for painting concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces: Part 2
Schedule 1994
IS 2524: Part 1: Code of practice for painting of nonferrous metals in buildings: Part 1
Pretreatment 1968
IS 2524: Part 2: Code of practice for painting of non-ferrous metals in buildings: Part 2
Painting 1968
IS 3140: 1965 Code of practice for painting asbestos cement building products
IS 9954: 1981 Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting of Steel Surfaces
IS 14177: 1994 Guidelines for painting system for hydraulic gates and hoists
IS 14428: 1997 Guidelines for painting of structures in aggressive chemical environment
2266.1. Lighting and Ventilation
Refer National Building Code 2005, Part 8 215
2266.2.Electrical and Allied Installations
Refer National Building Code 2005 Part 8 Section 2
2266.3. Heating Ventilation and Air conditioning (HVAC)
Refer National Building Code 2005 Part 8 Section 3
2266.4. Acoustics sound Insulation and Noise control
Refer National Building Code 2005 Part 8 Section 4
2266.5. Lift and Escalators
Refer National Building Code 2005 Part 8 Section 5
2266.6.Stairs, passages
This shall be constructed as per the architectural and structural drawings.
2266.7.Water supply
Refer National Building Code 2005 Part 9 Section 1 clause 4
2266.8.Rain Water Harvesting
Refer National Building Code 2005 Part 9 Section 1 clause 5.5.12
2266.9.Drainage and Sanitation
Refer National Building Code 2005 Part 9 Section 1 clause 5
2266.10.Gas Supply
Refer National Building Code 2005 Part 9 Section 2

395
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

2266.11.Fire fighting
Refer National Building Code 2005 Part 4
2266.12.Landscaping, Signs and Outdoor Display Structures
Refer National Building Code 2005 Part 10 Section 2
2267. Completion Certificate
After the construction is complete in all respects, including provision of all service connections,
the site must be returned to the parent department. The Assistant Engineer shall submit the completion
certificate as per Appendix 4.13 along with as built drawings to the higher officers for approval. The
final drawing must also include layouts of water supply and drainage system. Detailed drawings of
electric connections, electronic and communications systems shall be handed over by the respective
wings of PWD.

APPENDIX 2200A
Inspection Note (As per para 2212)
............InspectionNotesof
Date of Inspection .................. Estimate amount ..................
Name of work ...................... Date of contract ..................
Name of contractor ................. Date of completion as per agreement…………………..
1. What is the stage of progress at present
2. Is the general progress of work satisfactory/unsatisfactory/poor
3. Are there any special difficulties affecting the progress of the work
4. Is the supply of departmental materials satisfactory
5 Are there any designs, working drawings or special instructions required from the Department which
might hold up progress. If so what action has been taken
6 Remarks on the quality of work done so far
7. Do you find any need for deviation from sanctioned estimate of any particular item. If so briefly
indicate measures of the nature of deviation
8. Any special instructions to subordinate officers
9. General remarks:

396
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 2200B
Material Collection Report (As per para 2213)

Material Collection/ Initial Level Report No Date of Reporting

Name of Work Name of Section
Name of Subdivision
If part supply reference to earlier report and
clearance
Estimated PAC
Agreed PAC
Name of Contractor
Agreement no. and date
Tender Excess
Date of handing over of Site
Scheduled date of Completion
Sl no. Description of Name of Locality, Km Quantity as Quantity Reference to Date of Date of Quantity as Upto Remar
item / and chainage of road per measured M.book/ Field measurement check per check date ks
supplied agreement Book measureme measurement quantity
nt
3 3 3 3
(M ) (M ) No Page (M ) (M )

Submitted to the Chief Technical examiner

Finance (Inspection Wing – Technical) Department Signature of Assistant Executive Engineer with date

SETEU Building, 3rd floor, Pulimoodu Thiruvananthapuram

Copy submitted to : Executive Engineer, PWD

Superintending Engineer, PWD

397
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

APPENDIX 2200C
MACHINERY FOR EXCAVATION OF DIFFERENT OPERATION OF ROAD CONSTRUCTION (As per para 2215)
Sl. No. Type of Soil Choice of Roller/Plant Remarks
A Compaction of Embankment and Sub-grade
A.1 Granular and dry cohesive soil i 8-10 Ton three smooth wheeled roller
ii 80-100 kN vibratory compactor
iii Pneumatic tyred roller Load per wheel 20 kN
A.2 Uniformly graded soil i 8-10 Ton three smooth wheeled roller
ii Pneumatic tyred roller Load per wheel 15 kN
iii 8-10 Ton vibratory roller
A.3 Cohesive soil Sheep foot roller
A.4 Cohesionless soil Vibratory roller
B Earth Moving Operations
B.1 Clearing and grubbing clearing light scrub, i Dozer
grass, etc.
ii Motor Grader Can easily be used if scrub is very light
B.2 Clearing debris and rubble i Dozer
ii Front end loader smaller size
iii Tractor with heavy duty For clearance of large objects
B.3 Excavation, earth movement and
embankment
B.3.1 Light and medium soils requiring preliminary i Dozer Best unit for hauls of under 90m
loosening Also, for hill cuts and cuts down vertical faces for
roads
ii Scraper tractor towed/ motorised Tractor towed scraper for hauls for 60m to 300m.
Motorised scraper for hauls of 300m and above
iii Excavator and dumper Best unit for shallow road embankments across
generally flat terrains
iv Front end loader and tipping truck
B.3.2 Heavy soils i Dozer, Crawler/ Dozer wheeled
ii Towed scraper with pusher/ Motorised scraper
with pusher, proceeded by rooter
iii Motor grader proceeded by tractor towed Preliminary rooting is essential from motor graders
rooter

398
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Sl. No. Type of Soil Choice of Roller/Plant Remarks

B.4 Spreading : Distributing fill in layers of i Scraper, tractor towed or motorised Best machine for hauling and spreading thin layers of
uniform thickness material
ii Motor Grader Used for spreading and withdrawing materials of
workable nature
iii Tipping Trucks Can spread their loads to a limited extent
iv Crawler Dozer Best machine for initial spreading of workable
material
B.5 Cambering i Motor Grader Best machine for providing final camber
ii Crawler Dozer Can provide camber during initial excavation for road
formation
iii Scraper, tractor towed or motorized Can provide camber during initial excavation for road
formation
B.6 Scarifying and shaping earth roads Grader with scarifier Best machine for loosening for shaping top layer of
earth
B.7 Maintenance of earth haul roads i Motor grader/ wheel crawler Best machine for this work
ii Wheel / Crawler dozer Should be used only if grader not available
B.8 Watering i Truck or trailer mounted water tanker with a
sprinkler and water pump
C Compaction
C.1 Soil Stabilisation i 8-10 ton three smooth wheeled roller
ii Vibrating roller
C.2 Granular base/ Sub Base i 8-10 ton three smooth wheeled roller
ii Vibrating roller
C.3 Macadam and other coarse aggregate base i 8-10 ton three smooth wheeled roller
courses
ii Steel wheeled Vibratory roller
C.4 Mix-in-place Asphalt base course i 8-10 ton three smooth wheeled roller
ii Vibratory compactor tandem 8-10ton
iii Pneumatic Tyre roller
C.5 Plant-mix base leveling or surface courses i 8-10 ton three smooth wheeled roller For break-down rolling
ii Steel wheeled tandem roller For break-down rolling
iii Pneumatic tyred roller(Self propelled) For intermediate rolling
iv Tandom Roller For intermediate rolling
v Rubber tyred roller For final rolling

399
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Sl. No. Type of Soil Choice of Roller/Plant Remarks

D Bituminous Pavement
D.1 Surface dressing i Bitumen pressure distributor, if bulk bitumen For uniform application of binder
supply is available
ii Chip spreader For even spreading of chips to correct thickness
D.2 Bituminous grouting (Penetration machine) i Bitumen boilers with sprayers
Semi grout and Full Grout
ii Bitumen pressure distributor if bitumen is
supplied, in bulk.
D.3 Seal coat Mini hot mix plant (6-10 ton/hr capacity) For laying manually
D.4 Premix carpet i 20-30 and 40-60 tons/ hr hot mix plant If there is sufficient work load
ii Paver finisher Paver finisher for mechanical spreading and tipping
truck for haulage would be a good combination.
iii Tipping Truck
iv 8-10 ton three smooth wheeled roller
v Rubber tyred roller
D.5 Hot mix BM/AC i Mechanical broom
ii Bitumen boilers with sprayers For tack coat
iii Bitumen pressure distributors
iv Hot mix plant 40-060 ton or more/ hr Batch or continuous type
v Electronic paver finisher with sensor To match the capacity of hot mix plant
vi Tipping Trucks 6-8 nos depending on the distance from the plant
vii Front end loaders For cold feed loading
viii Generators if required For electrical hot mix plants
ix 8-10 ton three smooth wheeled roller
x Vibratory tandem roller
xi Rubber tyred roller
E Sub base/ base course
E.1 Soil Stabilisation i Soil Stabiliser
ii Rotavater
iii Vibratory road roller
iv 8-10 ton three smooth wheeled roller
v Water Sprinkler
E.2 Water Bound Macadam (WBM) i Aggregate spreader
ii Water Sprinkler

400
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Sl. No. Type of Soil Choice of Roller/Plant Remarks

iii 8-10 ton three smooth wheeled roller
iv Tipping Trucks
E.3 Wet Mix Macadam (WMM) i Multi-stage stone crushing plant
ii Concrete mixer Suitable for small quantity of works
iii Wet Mix plant Plant should have tin shaft pug mill
iv Paver Finisher It has better control of thickness and profile
v Tipping Trucks
vi 8-10 ton three smooth wheeled roller
vii Vibratory road roller
E.4 Granular Sub base (GSB) i Motor Grader
ii Tipping Trucks
iii 10 ton three smooth wheeled roller
iv Vibratory road roller
v Water Sprinkler
F Concrete Pavements
F.1 Dry Lean Concrete (DLC) i Multi Stage Stone crushing Plant
ii Concrete Batching/ Mix Plant
iii Mixed Form Paver
iv Transit Mixer
v Compactor
F.2 Paving Quality Concrete (PQC) i Multi Stage Stone crushing Plant
ii Concrete Batching/ Mix Plant
iii Fixed Form/ Slip Form Paver finisher
iv Concrete Cutter (Saw Cutting machine)
v Texturing machine
vi Curing machine
vii Concrete Placer
viii Transit Mixer
ix Dowel bar Inserter

401
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

APPENDIX 2200D
Tentative Output of Road Machinery (As per para 2215)
Machine/ Tool Output
1 Scraper (Motorised) towed 160 cum/day
2 Dozer 200 cum/day
3 Motor Grader 600 cum/day
3
4 Excavator 1 m capacity 400 cum/day
5 Three smooth wheeled road roller
5.1 Earth work 450 cum/day
5.2 Moorum/Gravel 450 cum/day
5.3 Pavement
5.3.1 WBM Stone base course 45 cum/day
5.3.2 WBM/ WMM wearing course 40 cum/day
5.3.3 DBM 40 cum/day
5.4 Surface Dressing
5.4.1 First Coat 2500 Sqm/ day
5.4.2 Second Coat 3500 Sqm/ day
5.5 Premix Carpet
5.5.1 25 mm Thick 2000 Sqm/ day
5.5.2 20 mm Thick 2000 Sqm/ day
6 Earthwork compaction by sheep foot road roller 600 cum/day
7 Vibratory Road Roller earth-work (Depends on layer thickness and type) 600 cum/day
8 Other Machinery
8.1 Mini-Hot Mix Plant 6-10 TPH 8 Ton/Hr
8.2 Hot Mix Plant 40-60 TPH 50 Ton/Hr
8.3 Paver Finisher 75-160 TPH 75 Ton/Hr
8.4 Bitumen Boiler 2000 Litr/hr
8.5 Water Tankers 10,000 litres
8.6 Bitumen Pressure Distributors 10,000 litres
8.7 Wet Mix Macadam Plant 60 TPH 50 Ton/Hr
8.8 Stone crusher less than 100 ton/ hr Depends on requirement
8.9 Multistage Stone crusher more than 100ton/hr Depends on requirement
8.10 Concrete Batch mixing Plant upto 50 cum/Hr 40 cum/hr
8.11 Concrete Batching Mix more than 50 cum/Hr Depends on requirement
9 Haulage by trucks/Tippers
9.1 When lead = 2 km 8 Trips per day
9.2 When lead = 8 km 6 Trips per day
9.3 When Lead = 16 km 5 trips per day
9.4 When lead = 30 km 4 trips per day

402
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

APPENDIX 2200E
Details to be submitted for Approval from Engineer to start work (As per para 2218.1)
(i) Source and location of all materials;
(ii) Proportions of all materials expressed as follows where each is applicable:
(a) Binder type, as percentage by weight of total mixture;
(b) Coarse aggregate/Fine aggregate/Mineral filler as percentage by weight of total aggregate
including mineral filler;
(iii) A single definite percentage passing each sieve for the mixed aggregate;
(iv)The individual gradings of the individual aggregate fractions, and the proportion
of each in the combined grading.
(v) Physical properties of the mix detailed in the relevant sections as obtained by the Contractor;
(vi) Where the mixer is a batch mixer, the individual weights of each type of aggregate,
and binder per batch,
(vii) Test results of physical characteristics of aggregates to be used;
(viii) Mixing temperature and compacting temperature.
APPENDIX 2200F
PROFORMA OF PROGRESS OF WELL STEINING AND SINKING (As per para 2237.2)

Note: Give the number plan of the wells on the first page.
*Heading of columns shall be as given below:
1. Date
2. Time of observation
3. Well No.
4. Work done during 24 hours preceding time of
observations steininglsinking
5. Steining works:
(i) R.L. at the top of well and the time of observation.
(ii) R.L. at top of well at the time of last observation
(iii) Steining done since last observations (i) minus (ii)
(iv) Gauge upto which steining done todate including height of curbs
(v) R.L. of bottom of curb (i)-(iv)
(vi) R.L. of L.W.L. as per contract.
6. Total sinking done up-to-date:
7. Total sinking done as per last observation
8. Sinking done since last observation (6)-(7)
9. Sump observation:
(i) Depth of bottom of sump below top of well
(ii) Magnitude of sump 9(i) - 5(iv)
10. Strata met with at the time of observation
11. Any obstacle met since last observation
12. Any plastering done since last observation
13. Any sand blowing took place since last observation.
14. Kentledge observations:
(i) Extra kentledge over the well
(ii) Eccentricity along X - axis
(iii) Eccentricity along Y-axis
(iv) Approximate total quantity of dredged materials on last observation
(v) Approximate quantity of dredged materials at the time of observation
(vi) Approximate quantity of dredged materials since last observation
15. Is any special method of sinking being employed at the time of observation?
16. If so, give brief description in Remarks column Remarks.
17. Signature of official taking the observation
18. Signature of Assistant Engineer in token of check.
19. Signature of Executive Engineer/Superintending Engineer in token of having seen the
register.

403
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

APPENDIX 2200G
PROFORMA FOR RECORDING TILTS AND SHIFTS OF WELLS(As per para
2237.2) Note: Give the numbering plan of the wells on the first page. *Heading of columns shall be
as given below:
1. Date
2. Time of observation
3. Well No.
4. Total steining done in the well up-to-date (vide column 5(iv) of proforma of progress of
sinking)
5. Total sinking done up-to-date (vide column 6 of proforma of progress of sinking).
6. Reduced levels at the gauge marks on the tilted plane:
(i) Along X axis (traffic axis)

(say north side) (say south side)

(ii) Along Y axis (perpendicular to traffic
axis) On downstream side On upstream side
7. Difference in levels taken on the tilted plane:
(i) Along X-axis.
(ii) Along Y-axis
8. Extent of tilt:
(i) Along X-axis
(ii) Along Y-axis
9. Shifts:
(i) Along X-axis
(ii) Along Y-axis
10. Action being taken in case tilt has exceeded 1/80 and shift 150 mm
11. Remarks.
12. Signature of the official taking observation
13. Signature of Assistant Engineer in token of check
14. Signature of Executive Engineer/Superintending Engineer in token of having seen the
register
APPENDIX 2200H
STATEMENT SHOWING PARTICULARS OF DIFFERENT METHODS ADOPTED AND
PHENOMENON ENCOUNTERED DURING WELL SINKING ON DIFFERENT WELLS (As
per para 2337.2)
of_____________bridge on _____________Road________________District
1. Well No________(Below______________Side Abutment/Pier No.............
*Heading of column shall be as given below:
1. Date
2. Total steining uptodate
3. Total sinking uptodate
4. Working progress on steining or sinking
5. Total weight available for sinking:
(i) Weight of well for portion below water level allowing for buoyancy
(ii) Weight of well above water level
(iii) Kentledge weight
6. Total
7. Eccentricity of kentledge:
(i) Along X-axis
(ii) Along Y-axis
8. Hours of working for which sinking was done
9. Quantity of Material taken out from well Pocket:
(i) During last 24 hours
(ii) Per running metre of sinking of well done in 24 hours
10. Details of explosive if used and name of person in whose presence it was used.
11. Whether dewatering was done during sinking and if so how much below river water level

404
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

12. Whether dewatering was done after bottom plugging and if so how much below river
water level
13. Rate of rise of water inside the well in dewatering test Remarks
14. Signature of person recording the information

405
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

APPENDIX – 2400

Table 2400.1 Physical Requirements of Aggregates for bituminous base course

Test Requirement for BM, BPM
Property IS Code Requirement for DBM
and BUSG
1 Cleanliness Grain Size analysis IS 2386 Part 1 Max. 5% passing 0.075 mm IS Max. 5% passing 0.075 mm
sieve IS sieve
2 Particle shape Flakiness & Elongation Indices ( Combined) IS 2386 Part 1 Max. 30% Max. 30%
3 Strength Los Angels Abrasion Value IS 2386 Part 4 Max. 40% Max. 35%
Aggregate Impact Value IS 2386 Part 4 Max. 30% Max. 27%
4 Durability Soundness: IS 2386 Part 4
Sodium Sulphate Max. 12% Max. 12%
Magnesium Sulphate Max. 18% Max. 18%
5 Water Absorption Water Absorption IS 2386 Part 3 Max. 2% Max. 2%
6 Stripping Coating and Stripping of Bitumen aggregate Mixtures IS 6241 Min. 95% retained coating Min. 95% retained coating
7 Water Sensitivity Retained Tensile Strength Min. 80% Min. 80%

Table 2400.2 Physical Requirements for Coarse Aggregate in Surface (wearing) Courses
Property Test IS Code Specification
SDBC / BC Surface Dressing Premix Carpet Mastic Asphalt
(Open/ Close
graded)
Cleanliness Grain Size Analysis IS 2386 Part 1 Max 5 % passing 0.075 mm Max 5 % passing Max 5 % passing Max 5 % passing
sieve 0.075 mm sieve 0.075 mm sieve 0.075 mm sieve
Particle shape Flakiness&Elongation IS 2386 Part 1 Max 30% Max 30% Max 30% Max 30%
Indices (Combined)
Strength Los Angels Abrasion Value IS 2386 Part 4 Max 35 % Max 40 % Max 40 % Max 40 %
Aggregate Impact Value IS 2386 Part 4 Max 27 % (SDBC), 24% (BC) Max 30 % Max 30 % Max 30 %
Polishing Polished BS 812 Part Min 55 Min 60 Min 55 -
Stone Value 114
Durability Soundness: IS 2386 Part 4 Max 12 % Max 12 % Max 12 % Max 12 %
Sodium Sulphate
Soundness: IS 2386 Part 4 Max 18% Max 18% Max 18% Max 18%
Magnesium Sulphate
Water Water Absorption IS 2386 Part 3 Max 2 % in exceptional cases) Max 1% Max 1% Max 2%
Absorption

406
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Stripping Coating & Stripping of IS 6241 Min retained coating 95 % Min retained coating Min retained coating Min retained
Bitumen aggregate Mixtures 95 % 95 % coating 95 %
Water Retained Tensile Strength AASHTO Min 80 % Min 80 % Min 80 % Min 80 %
Sensitivity T283
Notes: 1. IS: 2386 Part 1 6. IS: 2386 Part 5
2. IS: 2386 Part 1 7. IS: 2386 Part 3 (the elongation test may be done only on non-flaky aggregates in the sample)
3. IS: 2386 Part 4* 8. AASHTOT283**
4. IS: 2386 Part 4* 9. IS: 6241
5. BS: 812 Part 114
* Aggregate may satisfy requirements of either of these two tests.
** The water sensitivity test is only required if the minimum retained coating in the stripping test is less than 95%.
Table 2400.3 requirements of Mix for Surface (wearing) course
Sl Description Requirements
No. SDBC BC
1 Marshall Stability (at 60oC (ASTM D 1559) determined on Marshall 8.20 KN min.
specimens 75 compaction blows on each end
2 Marshall Flow (mm) 2 to 4
3 Percent air voids in mix 3 to 5 3 to 6
4 Percent air voids in mineral aggregate (VMA) (min) 13 to 15 11-13
5 Percentage voids in mineral aggregates filled with bitumen (VFB) 65 to 78 65 to 75
6 Binder content, Percent by weight of mix 4.5 min 5 min
7 Water sensitivity (ASTM D 1075) loss of stability on immersion Minimum 75 %
in water at 60 o C retained strength

407
PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

408
PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

409
PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

410
PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

411
PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

412
PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

413
PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

414
PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

415
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 2600A
Type of distress, Symptoms, Probable causes and possible types of treatment (As per Para 2601.1)
Sl Type of distress Symptoms Probable causes Possible types of treatment
no
A Surface defects
1 Fatty surface Collection of binder on the surface Excessive binder in premix, spray or tack coat, loss of Sand blinding; open-graded premix;
cover to aggregates; excessively heavy axle loads liquid seal coat; burning of excess
binder; removal of affected area
2 Smooth surface Slippery Polishing of aggregates under traffic, excessive binder Resurfacing with surface dressing or
premix carpet
3 Streaking Presence of alternate lean and heavy lines Non-uniform application of bitumen or at a low Application of a new surface
of bitumen temperature
4 Hungry surface Loss of aggregates or presence of fine Use of less bitumen or absorptive aggregates Slurry seal or Fog seal
cracks
B Cracks
1 Hairline cracks Short and fine cracks at close intervals on Insufficient bitumen, excessive filler or improper The treatment will depend on
the surface compaction whether pavement is structurally
2 Alligator cracks Interconnected cracks forming Weak pavement, unstable conditions of subgrade or sound, or unsound. Where the
a series of small blocks lower layers, excessive over loads or brittleness of pavement is structurally sound, the
binder cracks should be filled with a low
3. Longitudinal Crack on a straight line along the road Poor drainage, shoulder settlement, weak joint viscosity binder or a slurry seal or
cracks between adjoining spreads of pavement layers or fog seal depending upon the width of
differential frost heave cracks Unsound cracked pavements
4. Edge crack Crack near and parallel to pavement edge Lack of support from shoulder, poor drainage, frost will need strengthening or
heave or inadequate pavement width rehabilitation treatment
5. Shrinkage cracks Cracks in transverse direction or Shrinkage of bituminous layer with age
interconnected cracks forming a series of
large blocks
6. Reflection cracks Sympathetic cracks over joints and cracks Due to joints and cracks in the pavement layer
in the pavement underneath underneath
C. Deformation
1. Slippage Formation of crescent-shaped cracks Usual thrust of wheel in a direction, lack or failure of Removal of the surface layer in the
pointing in the direction of the thrust of bond between surface and lower pavement courses affected area and replacement with
wheels fresh material
2. Rutting Longitudinal depression in the wheel Heavy channelised traffic, inadequate compaction of Filling the depressions with premix
tracks pavement layers, poor stability of pavement material, material

416
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

or heavy bullock cart traffic

3. Corrugations Formation of spots regular undulations Lack of stability in mix, oscillations set up by Scarification and relaying of
vehicles, springs, or faulty laying of surface course surfacings, of cutting of high spots
and filling of low spots
4. Shoving Localised bulging of pavement surface Unstable mix, lack of bond between layers, or stop Removing the material to firm base
along the crescent shaped cracks type movements and those involving negotiation of and relaying a stable mix
curves and gradients
5. Shallow Localised shallow depressions Presence of inadequately compacted pockets Filling with premix materials
depressions
6. Settlement and Large deformation of pavement Poor compaction of fills poor drainage, inadequate Where fill is weak, the defective fill
upheaval pavement or frost heave should be excavated and re-done.
Where inadequate pavement is the
cause, the pavement should be
strengthened.
D Disintegration
1 Stripping Separation of bitumen from aggregate in Use of hydrophilic aggregate, inadequate mix Spreading and compacting heated
the presence of moisture composition, continuous contact with water, poor sand over the affected area in the
bond between binder and aggregate, poor compaction, case of surface dressing; replacement
etc. with fresh bituminous mix with
added anti-stripping agent in other
cases
2 Loss of Rough surface with loss of aggregate in Ageing and hardening of binder, stripping, poor bond Application of liquid seal, fog seal or
Aggregate some portions between binder and aggregate, insufficient binder, slurry seal depending on the extent
brittleness of binder, etc. of damage.
3 Ravelling Failure of binder to hold the aggregate Poor compaction, poor bond between binder and or Application of cutback covered with
shown up by pock marks or eroded areas aggregate, insufficient binder, brittleness of binder, etc coarse sand or slurry seal or a premix
on the surface renewal coat
4 Pothole Appearance of bowl-shaped holes usual1y Ingress of water into the pavement, lack of bond Filling potholes with premix material
after rain between the surfacing and WBM base, insufficient or penetration patching
bitumen content, etc
5 Edge- breaking Irregular breakage of pavement edges Water infiltration, poor lateral support from shoulders Cutting the affected area to regular
inadequate strength of pavement edges, etc sections and re-building with
simultaneous attention paid to the
proper construction of shoulders

417
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 2600B
Maintenance criteria (As per Para 2601.1)
Features Criteria Action Priority
A Features concerned with safety of
Traffic
A1 Major breaches in the road way Any type of breach which endangers safety of Steps to be taken as per clause 14.7 of MoRTH Urgent
traffic and causes obstructions to flow of traffic Handbook
A2 Minor cuts or blockades Cuts or blockades which do not completely Get blockades removed and get the cuts repaired Urgent
obstruct traffic but endanger safety of traffic
A.3 Branches of trees at height less Any kind Get them cut in order of lower ones first Special attention
than 4.5 m over the roadway
B. Carriageway and crust conditions
B-1 Cracking not accompanied by a) Cracking in local areas equal to or less than 25 a) Local sealing or filling of the .cracks preferably Routine
rutting per cent of the total area with slurry seal or fog seal or as per Ministry's
Specifications
b) Binder @ 1.5 kglm2 of bitumen emulsion or 1
kglm2 of cut -back or local sealing
b) Cracking in large areas exceeding 25 per cent c) Surface Dripping as per Ministry's specifications Special attention
of the total area
B-2 Stripping a) In local areas not exceeding 25 per cent sealing Apply local sealing Routine
of the total area
b) In long areas exceeding 25 per cent of the total Apply surface dressing use antistripping compounds Special attention
area
B.3 Bleeding a) In local areas not exceeding 25 per cent of the Spread and roll over 6 mm size aggregate, heated Routine
total area to60°C
b) In local areas exceeding 25 per cent of total Apply surface dressing Special attention
area
B-4 Rutting a) Less than 50 mm accompanied by cracking Apply tack coat @ 0.5 kglm2 and fill bituminous, Routine
mix using a rake and leaving an excess thickness of
about one- third the depth of rut. Compact till
surface is levelled and local sealing of cracks.
b)More than 50 mm accompanied by cracking With surface dressing over cracks, overlay required Work of original
nature
B-5 Potholes Potholes, as soon as they occur required Local restoration by patching preferable Special attention
B-6 Reflection cracks a) Widely spaced cracks Slurry for fog seal Recurrent
b) Closely spaced Apply surface dressing use of geotextiles Special attention

418
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Features Criteria Action Priority

B-7 Edge subsidence and rutting Any extent Patch road edge and repair shoulder Recurrent
B-8 Defective camber Any extent Check and correct by reconstructing to proper Special attention
camber profile
B-9 Undulations Any extent Investigate the cause and rectify Special attention
B-10 Loss of material from unpaved Any extent Investigate the cause and rectify Special attention
road
C Shoulders-side-drains
C-I Deformation or scour of shoulders Any extent Fill and compact and bring its surface to desired Routine
camber
C-2 Silting of side-drains Any extent Clean out the drains Routine
C-3 Damage or scouring of drain Any extent Reconstruct to adequate shape and size Special attention
D. C.D. Works
D-1 Causeways
a) Potholes in paved. surface Any extent Repair by filling Special attention
b) Erosion at inlet/outlet Any extent Repair Special attention
c) Guide posts/ flood guage Any Repairs/ Replace Special attention
missing
D -2 Culverts
a) Silting Any Desilting Special attention
b) Erosion at inlet/outlet Any extent Repairs Special attention
c) Settlement cracks Any Repairs Special attention
E. Other Works
E-l Road furniture and warning dirty Any extent Clean and repair/replace Routine
or corroded or damaged missing
E-2 Missing road signs Any Fix new one Special attention

419
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 2600C
Road Register (As per Para 2602)
A: Format for Road Inventory
Public Works Department, Kerala State
Road Name: Section: Name of Official with Designation:
OD
Type of Road: SH MDR R VR
Road Number
Division: Sub- Division:
Road Starts at (Location): Starting Chainage: Date of Survey
Road Ends at (Location): Ending Chainage: Road Length (km):
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Chainage (km) Carriageway Median Drain Type & Condition Shoulder Type Condition
LHS RHS LHS RHS
Wid Width Existi Exist Dept Exist Dept
ng ing Conditio h of ing Conditi h of
From To Type th Typ Condi Ty Condi Existing Ty
(m) e Lengt tion pe Leng tion Type Width (m) n Cut/ pe Widt on Cut/
(m)
h th (cut/fill) Fill h (cut/fill) Fill
(m) (m) (cm) (m) (cm)

2 3 3 3 3 3
20 21 22 23 24 5 26 27 28 29 30 1 2 33 4 5 6
Distance of
PWD Boundary Embank Location of Important
Footpath Type Condition Land Use Light Post
from Edge of ment/Cu Road crossing and
Carriageway tting Name of Cross-Road
Name of
LHS RHS Terrai (Numbers)
Village/
Exis n Location
Existi Town Name of
ting Co LHS RHS LH Height
ng Conditi RHS Crossing
Type Type Wid ndit (m) (m) S (+/-) LHS RHS
Width on (Chainage) /Joining
th ion metres
(m) Road
(m)

Type of Footpath: Condition of Footpath: Land Use: Terrain:

EF Earthen Footpath G Good R Residential O Open land P Plain
SL Slab Footpath A Average C Commercial W Water-bodies R Rolling
Agricultural
CF Concrete Footpath P Poor A land I Industries H Hilly
In Institutional F Forest

420
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Type of Carriageway Type of Drainage: Condition of Drain: Type of Shoulder

B Bituminous Road E Earthen Drain BL Blocked beyond 50% ES Earthen Shoulder

Drain damaged- one side wall to be
W S Stone Masonry Drain DO PS Paved Shoulder
WBM Road re-constructed
Drain damaged- both side wall to be
C C Concrete Drain DD
Concrete Road re-constructed
Good drain but blocked upto 50%
GB

Appendix 2600D
B: Format for Road Condition (As per Para 2602)
Public Works Department, Kerala State
Road Name: Section: Name of Official with Designation
Type of Road: SH MDR ODR VR Road Number
Division: Sub- Division:
Road Starts at (Location): Starting Chainage:
Road Ends at (Location): Ending Chainage: Date of Survey
Road Length (km):

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Global Position System
Rut Measured using 2m Straight Edge
Chainage (km) (GPS) coordinates at Start Cracks
Along Wheel Paths
Node*
Map Datum: WGS 84
Total Total Average
Latitude Longit Accuracy Total Length of Length of Average Rut Average Rut
(Deg. ude in Meters Cracked Portion Length of Crack with Crack with Length, m Total Rut Depth,
From To (Deg. Type Crack with
Min. (if, Width, mm width width measured Width, mm
Sec.) Min. available) width less between 3- greater longitudinally mm (maximu
Sec) than 3 mm 6 mm than 6 mm m)

421
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Patch Rough Road Asphalt Edge Breaks
LHS RHS
Average Ravelle Total
Total No. Average d Ravelled Average Total Average Average Depth,
of Patches Length, m Width, Width, Length, m Length, Average Width, m Depth, mm Length, m Width, m mm
m m m

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
Shoulder Water Stagnation
Potholes Texture Geometric Details
Deficiency Problems
LHS RHS
Quantity of
Average
Average Average Average sand Average Average
Number Width of Length of Depth of spread in Shoulder Shoulder Length, Average Total Number Number Camber Camber Elevation of the
of Width, Number on the on Road above
Potholes Pothole, Pothole, Pothole cc to form Drop, Drop, m m of Curves of Rise of Fall Road Curve mean sea level
m m in cm 30 cm cm cm
(using GPS)
diameter

* Note: Type of Cracks: Texture:

This data is required for A Alligator Cracks sand passing through 600 micron
integration with GIS based L Longitudinal Cracks and retained on 300 micron sieve
RIMS data T Transverse Cracks diameter of spread = 300 mm

422
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 2600E
C. Inventory of Culverts (As per Para 2602)
Public Works Department, Kerala State
Type of Road: Section: Name of Official with Designation:
Type of Road: SH MDR ODR VR Road Number
Division: Sub- Division:
Road Starts at (Location): Starting Chainage: Date of Survey
Road Ends at (Location): Ending Chainage: Road Length (km):

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Structure Details, Superstructure, in m Substructure Foundation
Structure Width, Height, Depth of Slab in
Chainage Type Nos Type Material Type Material Type Material
number m m mm

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Wingwall Railing Parapet Wearing course
Thickness, Carriageway Average Elevation of the Road
Type Material Type Material Type Material Type
mm Width, m above MSL (using GPS)
PC- Pipe
BC- Box Culvert SC- Slab Culvert
Culvert

Appendix 2600F
D: Condition of Culverts (As per Para 2602 )
Road Name: Section: Name of Official with Designation:
Type of Road: SH MDR ODR VR Road Number
Division: Sub- Division:
Road Starts at (Location): Starting Chainage: Date of Survey
Road Ends at (Location): Ending Chainage: Road Length (km):
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Superstructure Wearing Course
Reinforced Average
Structure Pothole Area Cracked Asphalt Edge Cracks in Depth of Average Patch
Chainage Potholes m2
number Area in m2 Exposed, Area in m2 Drops m2 Potholes, area in m2
m2 mm
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Substructure Foundation Parapet Desilting

423
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Masonry Masonry Aasonry d/s

Plastering Pointing Plastering Pointing Area Plastering Pointing u/s Desilting in
Construction, Construction, Construction, Desilting
area, m2 Area in m2 Area, m2 in m2 Area, m2 Area in m2 m3
in m3 in m3 in m3 in m3
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Deweeding Miscelleaneous
Slope
Laying of Backfilling Protection
d/s Dismantling
u/s Deweeding Dismantling Laying of Skin Painting Fixing Guard Slopes Using Turfing
Deweeding of masonry
in m3 CC in m3 CC in m2 Reinforcement in m2 Stones, nos using for high
in m3 in m3
in m2 Earth, m3 embankments,
m2

Appendix 2600G
Abstract Particulars of Estimate for Maintenance & Repairs For The Year …………… (As per Para 2602.1)

Name of Highway/ Road Name of PWD Circle

Number of Highway/ Road Name of Division
From (Place ) To Name of Subdivision
From (Chainage ) To Name of Section
BASIC ALLOWANCE & INCREMENT
1. Basic allowance………………………… ………(X)
2. Present demand………………………… ………(Y)
3. Increase (Y minus X)…………………... ………..(I)
4. Percentage (I x 100/X………………
Particulars Length and width by types of pavement (Total Kilometer)
Length x width (Kilometer) x (Meter) Earth Gravel W.B.M. Black top Cement Concrete
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
I RENEWALS PROGRAMME 2
Treatment proposed Width Chainages to which this treatment Total length of Rate of each treatment per 10 m Estimated cost of each treatment Remarks
(symbols as explained)* (meter) has to be applied each treatment Rs col.2xcol4xcol5 Rs
(meters) 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Total = (A)

424
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

II- ORDINARY MAINTENANCE REPAIRS

II A. ROAD II B. STRUCTURES
1. Road gangs/ Labour cost 1. Buildings
2. Materials for repairs 2. Minor bridges, Culverts and Drains
3. Heavy berm repairs 3. Major bridges
4. Arboriculture, signs and markings 4. Retaining walls, parapets, Drains etc
5. Original works treated as repairs 5.
Total = Rs. (B) Total = Rs. (C)
III. MISCELLANEOUS RECURRING CHARGES IV. SPECIAL REPAIRS OUT OF CE’S RESERVE
1. Ferry services (To be entered by CE’s office when he approves detailed estimates)
2. Payment of rents 1
3. Seasonal road construction in river beds 2
4. Pontoon bridges 3
5 4
Total = Rs (D) 5
A+B+C+D =
Add 10% overhead charges …………… =
Total of M&R Demand =
Rate per Kilometer =
* Renewal Specification Symbols
R (x)W. B. M. renewal: new layer thickness equivalent to x cm.
S1 Light surface dressing, FIRST COAT on W. B. M. Surface.
S2 Light surface dressing, SECOND COAT add also subsequent resurfacing coats
P (x)Premix Carpet, x cm thick.
G (x)Semi-grout x cm thick.
F.G. (x) Built-up spary grout x cm thick.
G.(x”) Spreading gravel x cm thick on gravelled r oads.
Notes: 1. If any specification, not included above, is proposed, it should be described in the first column under RENEWALS.
2. The most common specifications have been given appropriate symbols above. In some cases the treatment suggested would be a simple one describable by
one single symbol from the above list: some proposed treatment however might consist of two or more, specifications. These latter will be stated as under:
Example- 1. 4 cm premix carpet on 5 cm thick W. B. M. renewal course = R (5 cm) + P (4 cm)
2 . Two surface dressing coats on 7.5cm thick W.B.M. renewal course = R(7.5 cm)+S1 + S2
General Explanations
1. M. & R. Estimates: Separate estimates will be sanctioned for each section of Road (Length lying, within a P. W. D. Division). Expenditure against each
estimate will be booked under the heads I to III on reverse.
2. Basic Allowance: The basic allowance will be fixed from time to time. Until it is fixed, it shall be the actual average expenditure of the previous 5 years.

425
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

3. Present Demand: The demand of any year in the current quinquennum will consist of (i) the Basic Allowance of the previous quinquennum plus, if necessary
a percentage allowance for growth of traffic, etc. Alternatively, if the surface is upgraded, the actual demand should be less than the Basic Allowance.
4. C. E. 'S. Discretion: Funds will be allotted to the respective divisions against the demands presented under the heads I to III of this form, without any detailed
estimates being called for. Out of these funds, the portion representing the excess over the BASIC ALLOWANCE of each road will be held by the State C. E., the
rest being passed on (through S. Es. to E Es). Against his reserve, the C. E. will approve repair works, which cannot be financed from within the BASIC
ALLOWANCE, already passed on to the E. Es.
5. C. E. 'S Reserve: For extraordinary repair works arising out of flood or earthquake damage or required for extraordinary renewals and black topping
programmes, the CE will have a reserve out of which he will allot funds against detailed estimates of works submitted to him. Entries under the head “IV
SPECIAL REPAIRS out of CE 'S Reserve” will be made in the C. E. 'S office when he approves such estimates.
6. General: Estimated cost B+C) should not ordinarily exceed 50% of A. Where it does exceed, full reasons for the excess should be furnished. Otherwise the
demand is likely to be suitably cut down.

Appendix 2600H
Road Chart for ______________Division for the year ___________(As per Para 2602.4.2)
Name of Road Section
Classification Subdivision
Kilometer Renewals in previous years Renewals in Current year Proposals for Renewal (Next year) Remarks

Encroachmen
Shoulderand

Shoulderand

Shoulderand
sideFurniture
sideFurniture

sideFurniture
Carriagewa

Carriagewa
Encroachm
Carriageway

From to

CD works
CD works
CD works

Encroach
Sidedrains

Sidedrains

Sidedrains
Road
Road

Road
side

side

side
ent

ment
y

y
t
0 1
1 2

Appendix 2600I
Schedule of Maintenance of Operations (As per para2602.5)
Apr Ma Jun Jul Aug Septe Octo Nove Dece Janua Febr Ma
Item of maintenance
il y e y ust mber ber mber mber ry uary rch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1. Through repairs including clearing of jungle growth sectioning &
X X .. .. .. X .. .. .. .. .. ..
forming and clearing side drains
2. Clearing culverts and opening outlets X X .. .. X X .. .. .. .. .. ..
3. Filling erosions and removal of slips As and when such or erosions occur

426
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

4. Patchwork to metalled & graveled roads

.. .. X X X X X X X .. .. ..
Do. Black topped
5. Watering and blinding metalled roads X X .. .. .. .. .. .. X X X X
6. Planting avenue Trees .. .. .. X X .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
7. Collection of metal for patchwork (metalled roads) .. X X .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
8. Collection of metal for renewal (metalled roads) .. X X X .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
9. Collection of metal for renewal (BT Roads) .. .. .. .. .. .. X X X .. .. ..
10. Repairs to pitching, retaining walls etc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. X X X X X
11. Painting sign boards, Kilometre stones, guard stones etc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. X X X X ..
12. Painting steel bridges .. .. .. .. .. .. .. X X X X X
13. General maintenance, unforeseen works All the year round and according to necessity.

427
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 2600J
Register of avenue trees (As per Para 2604.1)
As on.
Division…………………………. S ubdivision………………………
Section…………………………...
Sl. No. Name of Proceeding in the Species Girth at 1 metre Whether Remarks
of trees road direction of above ground Revenue yielding
Kilometre Kilometerage level or not
Left Right
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Note: - 1. Numbering should be done serially in every road in each kilometer in the direction of
increasing kilometerage first on the left side and then on the right side.
2. The number should be written or stenciled in black with figures 7 ½ cm. height after painting the
background in white.

Appendix 2600K
ROAD CUTTING AND RESTORATION PROTOCOL (As per Para 2607)
1 Scope:
1.1 A road-opening permit is required for any digging, excavation or construction of any kind within a
public right of way or that has an effect on the right of way. The road excavations by any person or
authority or agency and its reinstatements there after shall strictly follow this Protocol.
1.2 A separate permit shall be required for each and every road opening. Excavation for appurtenances
such as manholes, small head walls, cutoff walls, small vaults, valve boxes, catch basins, wall
footings, etc. shall be deemed to be in the category of trench excavations.
1.3 Planting of poles for electric, telegraph, telephone, and any other cable carrying posts shall be in
compliance with this protocol.
1.4 It shall be unlawful for any person or authority or agency intending to construct, place,
maintain or carry any cable, wire, pipe, drain, sewer, channel of any kind through, across,
along, under, in or over any PWD road to make an excavation in or disturb the surface of any
PWD road without a permit in writing from the Highway Authority.
2 Definitions – In this protocol, unless the context otherwise re quires,-
2.1 Road: The stretch where cutting and restoration has to be done.
2.2 Applicant: The department or individual who applies for the permit
2.3 Permittee : The Individual/ Department in whose name the permit is issued.
2.4 Contractor: The person who executes the work for the Permittee
3 General Regulations
st th
3.1 Permits will be granted by the Highway Authority for all road openings from 1 November to 28
February every year at which time all excavation will be closed and patched, other than emergencies
such as leakage of sewer lines, water lines, gas lines, disconnection of electric and telephone cables.
The issuance of permits should be closed on 1st March every year
3.2 No road opening permit will be issued for a road that has been resurfaced within the past (three) 3
years, except in the case of an emergency. Request for exemption of this section must be made in
writing to the Highway Authority and exemptions are granted only for new utility connections for
the newly constructed buildings incase no such sources are available.
3.3 The formal application in prescribed format signed by any person or duly authorized officer of the
authority or agency intending to construct utility, should be submitted to Highway Authority
3.4 Such requisition should be accompanied by proper alignment maps drawn to scale and the section of
the trenches to be cut, the length of cuttings, the road crossings, and masonry structures such as
manholes etc. should be clearly marked therein.
3.5 The applicant shall specify on the application the approximate date, the excavation is to be made and
submit at least two months before the works intends to begin. Permits shall be issued 72 (seventy-
two) hours before the work begins. The work shall not be started without 24 hours notice to the
Assistant Engineer of the Department in charge of the Road.
3.6 In low intensity traffic areas all work is to be done between the hours of 8:00 am and 5.00 pm on
week days.

428
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

3.7 In high intensity traffic areas, wherever possible work shall be done between the hours of 6:00 am
and 3.00 pm on Saturday, Sunday or holidays.
3.8 However, openings are not permitted on Saturdays, Sundays or Holidays, that disrupts essential
services, such as a water, gas or sewer system. These may be done at night time as per the
discretion of the Highway Authority.
3.9 A permit to close the road to traffic will only be issued in the most unusual circumstances. Usually
part of the road must be kept open to traffic at all times as specified in clause 6.1.3
3.10 Applicant/PWD is responsible for notifying any other local utilities/ public, which/ who may be
affected namely Kerala Water Authority, BSNL and other communication networks, Kerala State
electricity Board (KSEB) and public services like transport and the Public media.
3.11 On all matters pertaining to the interpretation of these regulations or to the quantity or quality of
materials or workmanship called for by these regulations, the decision of the Highway Authority
shall be final and binding.
3.12 In all other matters related to disputes between departments, the provision of GO(P)No.88/99/PWD
dated 18.11.1999 will be valid.
4 Issuance of Permit
4.1 The Highway authority should verify the proposal, conduct a joint inspection if necessary, and
prepare a detailed estimate for restoration works as per the standards. The work should not include
any uprooting of trees.
4.2 The Highway Authority should direct the utilities to make use of any available ducts or channels
provided for this purpose, especially along bridges and across roads or junctions.
4.3 Validity of permit
4.3.1 Permit shall be in effect for thirty (30) days from date of issue, however any opening should not
be left unfilled for a period exceeding 48 hours. In case the work needs more than 30 days, it
shall be at the discretion of Highway Authority.
4.3.2 The maximum length of open trench shall not exceed 200 m in the aggregate at any one location.
Any excavated area shall be considered open trench until all pavement replacement has been
done and compacted to specification. There shall be no open trenches left in the public right of
way overnight. Trenches shall be backfilled or plated with steel plates and necessary warning
devices shall be placed by the contractor to alert motorists of road conditions.
4.3.3 The holder of this permit or any of his designees or other persons, shall indemnify and save
harmless against all claims for damages for injuries to persons or property, and against all costs,
suits, expenses and losses occurred by anyone or anything related to the the conditions in this
road opening permit..
4.3.4 On getting the sanction the utility organization shall execute a memorandum of understanding
with the Highway Authority and follow the guidelines stipulated in GO(Rt)No.684/09/PWD
dated 27.5.2009. (given in Appendix 2800N)
5 Contract Requirements
5.1.1 Contractor must provide evidence that he is qualified to do the work to the permitting authority.
Past experience and necessary tools and plants shall be deemed sufficient. He also has to execute
an agreement with the Highway authority to abide by the specifications for trenching ,
backfilling and temporary pavement.
5.1.2 All required traffic warning devices and signs, flagmen, lights, barricades, etc. will be furnished
by the contractor and approved by the Highway Authority and/or his designee, in compliance
with IRC SP 55, at no cost to the department.
5.1.3 All work will be performed in a professional manner that does not impede the flow of traffic. A
Police patrol will be used in high traffic areas, as designated by the Highway Authority and
Police, at no cost to the department. All emergency departments (Fire force Ambulance services,
Police) must be notified by the contractor through the permittee of any work in a public way,
which impede the smooth passage of emergency vehicles.
5.2 The contactor shall be entirely responsible for safeguarding and maintaining all conflicting utilities.
This includes overhead wires and cables and their supporting poles whether they are inside or
outside the open trench.
5.3 During trenching operations, the existing masonry structures and buildings on the roads, culverts,
bridges, retaining walls and drains should not be tampered with. The contractor shall take all
necessary precautions and shall be liable for any damage caused by the construction.
5.4 The contractor will be required to repair the permanent trench for a period of one (1) year.

429
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

5.5 The contractor will be responsible for all miscellaneous expenses. For no reason shall the
Department be responsible for any costs incurred from any of the conditions of the road opening
permit, including but not limited to, any costs related to any litigation related to this permit.

6 Procedure for Cuts

6.1 Excavations in the traveled way shall be cut in a straight line in accepted manner as approved by
the Highway Authority and/
and/or
or his designee that will cut full depth of the pavement.
6.1.1 Where trenches lie within Cement concrete section of streets, alleys driveways, sidewalks etc,
such concrete shall be saw cut to neat vertical, true lines or in a method that the adjoining
surface hall not be damaged.
6.1.2 Asphalt shall be cut in neat straight lines by means of an asphalt cutting wheel, milling machine
or cutting saw. The excavation, manually or mechanically shall be between these lines and the
sides shall be truly vertica
vertical.
6.1.3 If the excavation extends the full width of the road, only one one-half
half of the road shall be opened,
and this is to be properly backfilled before the other half is opened, so as to permit the free flow
of traffic. In some cases it may be possible to open on each side of the road and jack or drive a
pipe from one opening to the other. This should be done whenever possible.
6.1.4 Tunneling or mechanical methods of boring under the road for service installations may be
permitted only on written approval of the Highway Authority, or his representatives.
6.1.5 Excavated material suitable for backfilling shall be stockpiled in an orderly manner and unsuitable
/ excess mteral shall be disposed off suitably by the contractor. Excavated material will only be
placed
laced on the traveled way when it will not impede the flow of traffic.
7 Pipe/ cable laying:
7.1 The bottom of the trench shall be accurately graded to provide uniform bearing and support for each
section of the pipe. Foundation and bedding for these underground facilities shall be native material, or
sand or quarry dust, which conforms to the grading requirement of MoRTH for fine aggregate.
7.2 When backfill material consists of aggregate base course, crushed stone, or other material
containing stones,, only sand/ Quarry dust will be used for foundation and bedding. In case of PVC
and other plastic type pipes the bedding shall invariably be of sand. The foundation depth below the
pipe shall be 15cms and bedding depth shall be 30cms above the top of the facility.
7.3 Alternately a concrete rectangular open section of maximum width 45 cm could be used as bed and
pipes/ cables placed over it. It shall be continuous true to lines and levels so as to form a channel.
This shall then be sand filled and over it backfilling done. Semi circular concrete sections may also
be used to cover these pipes before sand filling. Each cast block shall be about 60cms length.

30 cm

45 cm
7.4 If any utilities are exposed during excavation, i.e. Sewer, Water, Electric, etc., the appropriate
department will be notified for the opportunity for an inspection prior to backfilling. In any case an
inspection by the highway authority is mandatory.
8 Procedure for Backfilling
8.1 Backfilling will be done with excavated material unless otherwise directed by the Highway
Authority. It shall be done, with flowable fill or mechanically compacted materials in 15cms lifts or
jetted with water to within 5cms of pavement grade.
8.2 When material is placed on the traveled way, suitable aarrangement
rrangement shall be in place to sweep and
keep the pavement clean and free of dust after backfilling each day.
8.3 Acceptable backfill material shall conform to clause 305 of MORTH. This does not preclude the
use of excavated material which may meet these specifications. The Department reserves the right
to test any and all backfill material prior to its use.
8.4 Backfill shall be deposited in layers not to exceed 20 cm in depth before compaction. Equipment to
be used for compaction may include vibrating tampers of the mechanical or pneumatic type, impact
type rammers or trench rollers or any other type of equipment, which will produce the required

430
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

degree of compaction. Rolling and compaction shall be done in the longitudinal direction of the
trench.
8.5 If the moisture content of the soil is outside of the limits required for achieving 95 percent of
maximum compaction the the addition of water or the use of drier soil so that the required degree of
compaction will be achieved. Water conso
consolidation
lidation by jetting of these layers shall be resorted to
without causing any flooding, when compaction methods are not possible.
8.6 Exceptional cases In case of excavation greater than 1.5m, the in situ densities shall be taken and
compaction done to achieve
ieve the same while backfilling upto 1.5 m depth. Top 1.5 m shall be done
as per above specifications.
8.7 Temporary Pavement
8.7.1 The last 10 cm shall be a temporary bituminous/ concrete patch in case of trenches across or on the
pavement. If pavement restoration is not to be made immediately, backfill shall be carried to the
finished grade of the pavement, the final 10cm to consist of shoulder stone or approved equal.
8.7.2 In case of trenches for domestic/ residential use, the top 10cm shall be of con
concrete
crete after refilling
and consolidation as specified earlier.
8.8 Driveways, sidewalks, street intersections, shoulders, lawns, shrubs, trees, signs and pavement
markings shall be restored to conditions prior to construction, at no extra cost. No tree limbs,
lim or
brush will be cut without prior approval of the Highway Authority.
8.9 Reference markers
8.9.1 Reference markers shall be placed at every kilometer along the extreme side of the road
indicating the type of utility, its horizontal distance from refe
reference
rence marker and depth from the
pavement surface. Any deviations shall also be referenced.
8.9.2 The typical specification for such markers shall be as follows

35 cm

25 cm

25 cm
(Not to scale)
8.10 At this stage the road shall be inspected by the highway authority and a certificate issued to the
effect that the backfilling has been done as per specifications. Based on this certificate, the
permittee may accord sanction for final payment.
9 Final Pavement
9.1 After completion of the work covered by this permit, there will be a surface overlay of bituminous
concrete in case of pavements and shoulder restoration in case of side trenches..
9.2 The temporary bituminous patch as specified above is to be maintained for a minimum of thirty
(30) days. Thenen the temporary patch shall be removed and a permanent patch shall be applied in
accordance with MoRTH Specification for patch working.
9.2.1 In case of trenches along the road allow sub sub-grade
grade to dry sufficiently, scarify, digout up to 30 cm
on each side of the original cut, so that the patch is placed on undisturbed material when the
permanent patch is applied. Wherever necessary, an additional base course has to be provided.
9.2.2 In case of trenches across roads, bituminous concrete laid to full width of the traveled way, and 3
meters both sides of the excavation at a minimum depth of 22-4 4 cm or at the discretion of the
Highway authority. Any surface undulation shall be rectified prior to this work.
10 Emergencies In case of emergency repairs, localized iin n a point, telephonic intimation is a must.
For this, the permit fee and application along with restoration fee has to be submitted within the
next 2 working days.
11 Quality Checking
11.1 Quality checks shall be performed at mainly four stages by the highway authority or his designee
11.1.1 The cutting process- the cut should be in straight lines and true to plumb.
11.1.2 Bed laying- the bed should be level, free from undulations. Well graded material conforming to
specifications must be used up to ththee prescribed level. In case of channel blocks, these must be
continuous and true to lines and levels.

431
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

11.1.3 Backfilling- material should conform to specified standards, and compaction should achieve
required density.
11.1.4 Pavement layer- should merge with the adjacent surface without causing bumps.

12 Shifting of Utilities
Pavement Shoulder
Length of Cut
Size of Opening
Type of (Material composition )
Bituminous layer
Metalled layer
12.1 Whenever Telephone/Electric posts/pipe lines are to be shifted to facilitate widening of roads, the
Executive Engineer concerned should forward a request to the concerned District Officer of the
department for shifting.
12.2 District Officers of the department/organisation concerned should shift the utilities within four
weeks of receipt of requisition and inform the Executive Engineer concerned about the completion
of the work. After the lapse of prescribed time, Highway Authority may initiate necessary steps for
removal of the same and the expenses incurred shall be levied from the concerned department.
12.3 Shifting of these utilities shall be done at the locations specified and directed by the highway
Authority at the cost of concerned departments.
13 Penalty
13.1 Highway Protection Act clause 26 sub section (1) specifies the necessity for a permit and sub section
(3) describes the fine to be collected for such trespassing.
13.2 Failure to obtain a permit or comply with the regulations in force shall be subject to a fine of
10(ten) times the estimated restoration charges plus the permit fee or the penalty specified under
Clause 26 Sub section (3) of Highway Protection Act, whichever is greater.

Appendix 2600L
Form I
GOVERNMENT OF KERALA
PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT
Application for Permit for Road Cutting (As per Para 2607)
Submitted to
Highway Authority , _________________________(Division)

Name of Applicant/ Utility :______________________________________

Address with Contact Number : ______________________________________
______________________________________
Name of Road and location of cut :______________________________________
Purpose of permit :______________________________________
Details of road opening (Attach Alignment/Strip plan or sketch)
:___________________________________ :___________________________________ ___________________________________

Name of Contractor
Address with Contact number
:___________________________________ :___________________________________

Estimated start date

Completion Date

Other Utilities to be intimated

KSEB
Kerala Water Authority
Police Department
BSNL/ Private Communication Networks
Others (Specify)

432
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Signature of Applicant:
Place :
Date :

Appendix 2600M
Form II
GOVERNMENT OF KERALA
PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT
Permit for Road Cutting (As per Para 2607)
Permit Number with date :____________________________
Issued by Highway Authority , _________________________(Division)
Application From _______________________________________________________
_______________________Dated________________Received on ________________ for the puropose
of _______________________________________________________ along/ across( Name of Road and
location of cut)______________________________________ has been pemitted to proceed with the
works as per the application subject to the Road Cutting and Restoration Protocol and the following
conditions.
Condition of Permit*
1. An Agreement has to be signed in the prescribed format between the Highway authority and
the Contactor within 5 working days.
2. A Performance Bond has to be executed.
3. Intimation to the affected utilities department/ public
4. The prescribed restoration fee should be remitted in favor of the Department

* applicable to all utility departments

In case of Domestic/ residential applicants, only condition 4 is applicable

This permit is valid for 30 days from the date of issue

The holder of this permit or any of his designees or other persons, shall indemnify and save harmless
against all claims for damages for injuries to persons or property, and against all costs, suits, expenses
and losses occurred by anyone or anything related to the the conditions in this road opening permit. Any
violation of the permit shall be liable for prosecution under the highway protection Act.

Signed :____________________
Place :______________________
Date :______________________

433
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 2600N
GOVERNMENT OF KERALA
Abstract

Public Works Department-Memorandum of Understanding between Public Works Department

/ Kerala Road Fund Board and Kerala Water Authority, Kerala State Urban Development
Project etc for digging and restoration of roads – Orders i ssued

PUBLIC WORKS (H) DEPARTMENT

G.O (Rt) No.684/09/PWD Dated, Thiruvananthapuram, 27/5/2009.

Read: 1. Lr.No.15/CE (R&B)/RSW/2008 dated 31.12.2008 from the Chief Engineer, Roads &
Bridges, Thiruvananthapuram
2. Note No.KSUDP/PMU/LSGD/PWD dated 5.2.2009 from the Project Director,
KSUDP.
3. Lr No.TCRIP/1014/PE/08 dated 3.3.2009 from the Chief Engineer, KRFB.

ORDER

Various utility organizations like the Kerala Water Authority, Kerala State Urban
Development Project, Kerala State Electricity Board, Bharat Sanchar Nigam Ltd. Etc often
request permission from Public Works Department to cut open the roads for laying their water
pipes, cables etc. Though the organizations remit the charges for restoration of the roads in
advance to the PWD, most of the time the restoration works are not promptly carried out.
2. In many cases, apart from the obstruction caused to traffic during the execution of
work for laying the utilities, the dug locations remain as chronic trouble spots long after the
work are completed. The digging agencies generally neglect to compact the loose earthe whicle
it is filled back into the trenches and as a result earth is left surplus in the form of mounds over
the the dug spots. This also causes various kinds of hindrances of traffic.
3. With a view to mitigate such hardships to the road users, Government have decided
that henceforth the organizations which request permission for cutting the roads themselves
shall restore the road to its original condition within a stipulated time under supervision of
PWD. A memorandum of understanding in the format appended shall be got executed by all the
organizations before digging the roads and the terms and conditions mentioned therein shall,
strictly be adhered to by all concerned.

By Order of the Governor,

TOM JOSE
Principal Secretary to Government
To
The Chief Engineer, Kerala Road Fund Board, Mayoora, Belhaven Garden,
Kowdiar, Thiruvananthapuram
The Chief Engineer, Roads & Bridges, PWD, Thiruvananthapuram
The Chief Engineer, National Highways, PWD, Thiruvananthapuram

434
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

The Chief Engineer, KSTP, PWD, Thiruvananthapuram

The Chief Engineer, Kerala Water Authority, Thiruvananthapuram
The Chief Engineer, JBIC assisted Water Supply Project, Water Works
Campus, Thiruvananthapuram
The Chief Engineer, Irrigation, Thiruvananthapuram
The Chief Engineer, KSEB, Thiruvananthapuram
The Chief General Manager, BSNL, Thiruvananthapuram
th
The Project Director, KSUDP, 5 Floor, Trans Towers,
Vazhuthacaud, Thiruvananthapuram
The Chief Engineer, Local Self Government Department
The Executive Engineer, Road Safety Cell, Office of the Chief Engineer,
PWD, Thiruvananthapuram
Copy to:
Water Resources Department
Local Selft Government
The Director, Informational and Public Relations
Department Stock File / O. C

MoU TO BE EXECUTED BETWEEN THE PWD / KRFB AND THE KERALA

WATER AUTHORITY / KSUDP FOR…………….WORKS ON PWD / KRF B
ROADS

MoU executed on this …………………day of……………………….Two

Thousand………………BETWEEN……………………………………..hereinafter
called the Requisitioning Authority on one part and the Executive Engineer, Public
Works Department / Project Engineer, KRFB hereinafter called “the PWD / KRFB” on
the other part.
Whereas the Requisitioning Authority wants the
work………………………………………to be carried out on the
“……………………………………..” road under the PWD/KRFB which in volves the
excavation of either or whole or part of the length of the said road, to the width and
depth mentioned in the schedule attached to this agreement, and the Requisitioning
Authority has requested the PWD / KRFB to accord sanction to carry out the work in
accordance with the time table given in the schedule to this agreement.
AND WHEREAS the PWD / KRFB has issued formal sanction to the Requisitioning
Authority to commence the work vide proceedings attached to this agreement. It is
mutually agreed as follows:
The Public Works Department / KRFB agrees to hand over the roaes under its
jurisdiction to the Requisitioning Authority for carrying out the works mentioned in
the schedule and the later agrees to return the road after the works restored to its
original condition as per the terms and conditions mentioned below:

Terms and Conditions

(1) The Requisitioning Authority will identify the roads to be taken up for the works
and make a formal request to the respective Executive Engineer, PWD / Project
Engineer, KRFB along with the schedule of implementation of their works and

435
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

restoration works of the road at least two months in advance of the proposed date
of starting of the works.
(2) Such requisition should be accompanied by proper alignment maps drawn to
scale, section of the trenches to be cut, length of cuttings and crossings, masonry
structure such a manholes, culverts, bridges, etc clearly marked therein.
(3) Detailed schedule specifying the date of commencement and date of completion
of trenching, laying pipe lines or cables as the case may be, testing, back filling
including dates of completion of each stage of the rectification of road works will
be forwarded to PWD/KRFB by the Requisitioning Authority.
(4) Based on the list and the schedule, the Executive Engineer, PWD / Project
Engineer, KRFB will issue the required permission for the use of the roads for the
said works or refuse permission indicating the reason thereof within 15 days of
receipt of formal request.
(5) The estimate for rectification or road will be prepared by the implementing
agency with provisions required for restoring the road to its original position as
per IRC / MORTH specification and site condition and will be forwarded to
Executive Engineer / Project Engineer for approval.
(6) All works and restoration works on the road including compacting and black
topping should be completed within 15 days from the date of sanction. Beyond 15
days, a fine of Rs.1 lakh will be imposed for each day of delay. If the
Requisitioning Authority fails to remit the penalty amount further trenching will
be stopped by PWD / KRFB. If the PWD / KRFB feel that the work is not
progressing according to schedule, the Executive Engineer, PWD / Project
Engineer, KRFB may call a meeting with the Requisitioning Authority for
reviewing /monitoring the progress of work.
(7) Pipes and other construction materials shall be stacked at site only in consultation
with the Executive Engineer concerned and will not be stacked more than 5 days
before commencement of the work. The excess cut soil, boulders, rubbles,
balance pipes / cables should be removed from the site at the cost of the
Requisitioning Authority immediately after back filling is completed, at any rate
within 48 hours o completion of works.
(8) Works should be carried out causing minimum hindrance to traffic and
inconvenience to the public. In cases where traffic is not blocked, trenching, pipe
laying, back filling and rectification are to be done simultaneously.
(9) Pipes should be laid at a minimum depth of 1.2 metres or as prescribed by the
Executive Engineer, PWD or Project Engineer, KRFB which ever is deeper.
(10) The guarantee period for the rectification work will be six months and the
Requisitioning Authority will be responsible for rectifying the damages on the
road surface during the guarantee period. If there is any failure on the part of
Requisitioning Authority, PWD will arrange the work at the cost of the
Requisitioning Authority.
(11) If any occurs to other portions of the same road due to laying of pipe or cable work
which were not anticipated during the preparation of estimate for restoration of the
road, the same shall also be rectified by the Requisitioning Authority at its cost.
(11) a. The trenches taken for laying pipes shall be filled up with sand 15 cm above the
pipes.

436
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

(12) Proper lighting, fencing, caution boards and other precautionary measures as per
‘I.R.C S.P 552001 – Guidelines on safety in road co nstruction zone’ should be
ensured by the Requisitioning Authority in order to avoid any kind of accidents
and the Requisitioning Agency will be solely responsible for any accident or
damage caused during the execution of the works or during the guarantee period.
The Requisitioning Authority shall be liable to pay a penalty of Rs.5,000/- per
day for not providing adequate safety measures on receipt of notice from the
Executive Engineer PWD / Project Engineer, KRFB.
(13) If any damage is caused to the utility services of other agencies during work, the
complete cost for rectifying the damages are to be borne by the Requisitioning
Agency.
(14) The Requisitioning Agency should re-lay / shift their utilities such as pipes,
cables etc. as and when requested by PWD / KRFB for road widening and for
other purposes at their own cost without claiming any charges form PWD / KRFB
and within the stipulated time.
If any retrenching is to be done for rectification of joints / leakages etc. restoration of the road
to its original condition should be arranged on the same day itself

437
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 2700A
A: Bridge Register (As per Para 2702)
Public Works Department, Kerala State
Road Name: Section: Name of Official with Designation:
Type of Road: SH MDR ODR VR Road Number
Division: Sub- Division:
Road Starts at (Location): Starting Chainage:
Road Ends at (Location): Ending Chainage: Date of Survey
Road Length (km):
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Structure Superstructure Substructure
Structure River Number Clear Length of Type of
Chainage Type Material Thickness Type of Pier
number Name of Spans Span in m Bridge, m Abutment

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Foundation Wingwall Railing Parapet Wearing Course
Average Elevation of the
Thickness, Carriageway
Type Material Type Material Type Material Type Material Type Bridge above MSL (using
mm Width, m
GPS)

438
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 2700B
B Condition of Bridges (As per Para 2702)
Public Works Department, Kerala State
Road Name: Section: Name of Official with Designation:
Type of Road: SH MDR ODR VR Road Number
Division: Sub- Division:
Road Starts at (Location): Starting Chainage: Date of Survey
Road Ends at (Location): Ending Chainage: Road Length (km):
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Superstructure Wearing Course
Reinforc-ed Average
Structure Pothole area Cracked Asphalt edge Cracks in depth of Average patch area
Chainage Potholes m2
number area in m2 exposed, area in m2 Drops m2 potholes, in m2
m2 mm
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Substructure Foundation Parapet Desilting
masonry masonry masonry
Plastering Pointing Plastering Pointing area Plastering Pointing d/s desilting
construction, construction, construction, u/s desilting in m3
area, m2 area in m2 area, m2 in m2 area, m2 area in m2 in m3
in m3 in m3 in m3

22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Deweeding Miscelleaneous
Laying of Backfilling Slope Protection Number of
u/s d/s Dismantling
Dismantling Laying of Skin Painting Fixing guard Slopes Using Turfing for lighting to
deweeding deweeding of masonry
CC in m3 CC in m2 Reinforcement in m2 stones, nos using high embankments, be
in m3 in m3 in m3
in m2 Earth, m3 m2 improved

439
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 2700 C

Inspection Report of Bridges (As per Para 2703.1)

Sl.No
(1) General Particulars
a. Name of Bridge, type of Bridge( High level/submersible.
b. Name of river
c. Name of highway, Bridge number, chainage
d. Locality
(2) Last inspection by -------------------- on ------------------------- date.
(3) Traffic Intensity PC U / T per
day
(4) Condition of
a. Approaches
b. Protective works (Pitching, apron, toes, floor, guide bunds)
(5) Waterway
a. Adequacy
b. Scour
c. Obstruction
d. Under growth
e. Channel revetments
f. Shifting
g. Other features and remarks if any
(6) Foundation and Substructure (Masonry, Timber, Steel or concrete)
a. Under mining/ scour
b. Settlement
c. Cracking
d. Disintegration
e. Decay
f. Corrosion
g. Filling foundation
h. Tilting
i. Cavitation
j. Growth of vegetation
k. Other defects/damages and remarks if any
(7) Bearings
a. Condition
b. Movement
c. Deformation
d. Cleanliness
e. Condition of grease
(8) Super Structure
i.Concrete (RCC and PSC)
a. Cracking
b. Scaling
c. Scour
d. Deflection/ Settlement
e. Disintegration
f. Bulging
g. Tilting
h. Water proofing
i. Leaching
j. steins
k. Spalling
l. Condition of articulation

440
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

m. Condition of inside box in case of PSC

n. Other defects/damages and remarks if any
ii.Steel Construction
a. Condition of protective system (paint/ epoxy / anodic etc.)
b. Corrosion
c. Deformation
d. Joints
e. Rivet and Weld condition
f. Buckling and Kinking
g. Waviness
h. Fracture
i. Cleanliness
j. Camber
k. End shoes
l. Other defects/damages and remarks if any
iii. Timber Span & Floor
a. Condition of paint
b. Decay/Rot
c. Wear (floor)
d. Structural defects
e. Crushing at joints
f. Splicers
g. Other defects/damages and remarks if any
iv. Masonry arches
a. Condition of Joints
b. Cracks
c. Vegetation growth
d. Bulging of spandrel walls and parapets
e. Deformation
f. Other defects/damages and remarks if any
(9) Miscellaneous
a. Wearing course(Surface condition and drainage)
b. Drainage (Spouts, vent holes, clogging and cleanliness)
c. Parapet and handrails etc.- condition and profile
d. Footpath (Condition and drainage)
e. Expansion Joints( Cleanliness, wearing out and alignment, gap width, Hump,
drainage, deformation, corrosion, cracks.
f. Utilities, (state condition)
(10)Have actions been taken on the observations and
recommendations from the last routine/ principle inspection.
(11) Proposal for Remedial Measures
a. Details
b. Approximate amount
(12) General Remarks
(13) Name designation and dated Signature
of inspecting officer

(14) Name designation and dated Signature

of Reviewing officer
(Next Higher Authority of Inspecting Officer)
Note: (i) All columns appropriate to the bridge should be filled up by the Inspecting Officer.
(ii) The condition of the particular part or parts of the structure detailed above should be generally
described as “good” ‘fair’ or ‘deteriorated’ as may be considered suitable by the Inspecting Officer
(iii) where there are special damages or dangerous developments noted these should be specially
mentioned in the column “other remarks” pertaining to the concerned part of the structure.

441
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

(iv) If the officer who is inspecting is unable to suggest proposals for remedial measures or finds it
difficult to works out the appropriate cost, the inspection report should not be delayed on the account.
The report should be sent without filling these column, but with a letter explaining why he is unable
to do so.

Appendix 2800A
Building Register (As per Para
2800.1.3)
Register of Buildings under the maintenance of ………………… Division
………………..
Brief particulars of buildings and land Nature of Construction
Sl. Name of Location Land No. of Plinth I II III Total Walls Roof Floor
No. building & Sy extent stories area Floor Floor Floor
No. GF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

No. of electrified points Water Supply

Lig Fa Plug Powe wash Closets Years Val Maintenance Remarks(here enter
hts ns Points r basin and of ue grant and reference to
Plugs other constru sanction NO. alterations and
fittings ction and Date addition
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

N.B. – Out houses may be given subsidiary numbers a nd details furnished as above.

Appendix 2800B

Rules for reservation, occupation etc of Rest Houses , Inspection Bungalows, and Camp Sheds.

1 Short Title : These rules may be called the Kerala Rest House occupation rules.
They shall apply to all Rest House, Inspection Bungalows, and Camp
2 Extent :
Sheds under the control of Public Works Departments throughout Kerala
a) Building means Rest House Inspection Bungalows or Camp sheds as
3 Definitions :
the case may be.
b) Controlling authority means the Chief Engineer (Buildings) or
any authority subordinate to him who is so authorized by him or
any authority authorized by Government by an order.
c) Day means a whole day of 24 hours calculated from the hour of
arrival for the occupation.
d) Government means of Government of Kerala
e) Officer in charge means a manager, steward, caretaker or watchman
as the case may be who is authorized to be in charge of the building
f) Reserving Authority means Executive Engineer of the Buildings
Division concerned or any authority so empowered by an order
of Government.
g) Custodian Officer - The Assistant Engineer in charge of the building
is the custodian officer.
4. Reservation of Accommodation, Period of Occupation, Procedures of allotment etc.
i. Accommodation in the building may be reserved for a period of 3 days at a time for members of
general public and 10 days for government servants on official duty on formal application affixing a
court fee stamp for a value of Rs. 5/- to the reserving authority at least 7 days in advance. The
reserving authority shall intimate the availability or otherwise of reservation to the applicant as well
as the officer in charge of the building. Employees of this State, Central and other State

442
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Governments, members of Parliament, and members of Legislative Assembly of the State are
exempted from payment of reservation fees. In the case of request for reservation from outside
the State and telegraphic requests, intimation regarding the availability of reservation shall be
given only if they are reply paid. In the case of persons applying for reservation from outside the
State Reservation fee shall be sent by M.O along with application for reservation.
ii. The full amount of occupation fees for the entire period of reservation shall be paid in advance
to the officer in charge of the building before the room is occupied. In case of extension of
reservation, the full fee for the extended period of reservation shall be paid in advance before the
commencement of the period of extension. No refund of the full or part of the fee paid shall be
made except under sub rule (v) this rule or when for any reason not due to the fault of the
occupant if they are not allowed occupation for the full period reservation. Under no
circumstances reservation fee paid shall be refunded.
iii. Reservation shall not ordinarily be made for more than 3 days at a stretch except I n the case of
Ministers and Government Servants on official duty. In exceptional cases the Reserving
authorities are empowered to sanction up to a maximum period of thirty days. Reservation of
accommodation for periods over thirty days shall be sanctioned by Government.
iv. The allotment shall be made in the order of priority of applications and the order of precedence.
The Reserving authority shall communicate the order of reservation to the applicant as well as to
the officer in charge of the building.
v. If it is not possible to reserve accommodation the advance fee shall be refunded. In any case the
advance fee to be refunded as to be sent by money order, the money order charges shall be met
from the advance fee and only the balance amount shall be sent to the party. But fee shall not be
refunded if accommodation is reserved and paid for but not utilized without prior intimation.
vi. If the party does not required the accommodation already reserved for the entire period and
given intimation to that effect to the Reserving authority or the officer in charge of the building
at least 25 hours in advance they need pay rent for the actual period of occupation.
Note: If the officer in charge of the building received such a communication he shall
immediately intimate the fact the Reserving Authority.
vii. The Reserving Authority is competent to cancel the reservation once made without giving any
reason whatsoever.
viii. If the person who reserved the rooms does turn up within six hours on the first day of
Reservation to occupy the rooms, the allotment of such rooms can be made by the Officer in
charge of the building according of priority of applications and the order of precedence.
ix. Those who do not reserve accommodation may be allowed to occupy a room in a building if it is
available on arrival and not reserved for anybody under proper authority. In such cases the
occupation in full for period of occupation shall be paid in advance before the commencement of
occupation.
5. Rate of rent, number of persons in room, concession to Government servants etc.
(1) Rates for occupation of a room in the building are given below.
Category Single Double Room(Rs) Addl.Bed(Rs) Extra for Air
Room(Rs) condition
Rest House in Corporation area 300 600 100 200

Rest House/TB in other District 250 500 100 200

Headquarters.
Rest House/TB inMunicipal 200 250 100 200
Taluk Headquarters.
Other places 150 200 100 200

Conference Hall
(a) Up to 60sqm 1500 1500 1500 1000
(b) Above 60sqm 3000 3000 3000 1000

443
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Note: (i) The number of additional bed referred above shall be limited to the maximum to three persons
per room. There will be no charge for children below the age of 12 if no separate bed is used.
(ii) Generally inspection Bungalows and camp sheds are intended for the occupation of
Government servants on official duty. The rooms in these bungalows may be let out to others
also when available at the rate of rooms mentioned above.
(2) For Government official including central and other State Government of officials on duty are
eligible for allotment of room at 1/3 rd DA on official duty. Government servants on private duty is
eligible for accommodation at 50% rate as above. For conference hall on Government purpose is
eligible at 50% rate as above. Whenever Government officers occupy Traveler’s Bungalow or Rest
House or Inspection Bungalows or Camp sheds in connection with any official duty, they shall note
their salary in the occupation register to claim the benefit of this concession.
(3)Members of general public need pay only the ordinary rate of rent for the first three days of their
occupation of the building. For occupation for period in excess of 3 days the fee shall be double the
ordinary rate.
(4) Government employees on official duty can occupy the building at the concessional rate admissible
to them for the first ten days of their continuous stay. For occupation for period in excess of ten
days, the fee shall be double the concessional rate admissible to them.
(5) If a room is occupied by more than one Government employee on official duty, such employees
shall record their name and other particulars in the Register maintained for the purpose and rent at
the prescribed rate is realigable from each employee.
(6) Concession to certain categories:- (1) Employees of the Kerala State Electricity Board who occupy
the buildings in connection with any official duty need pay only the concessional rate of rent
applicable to Government servants.
(2) Members of the Parliament and Members of the Legislative Assembly of this State, IAS/IPS
probationer undergoing Training in the state are allowed the same concessions which are allowed to first
class Government officers in the matter of occupation of the building. The accredited press
correspondents in the State shall also be entitled to this concession on production of Accreditation card.
However in the case of Accredited Press Representative of the District Head Quarters, concessions shall
be limited to the Rest House/Traveler’s Bungalow etc in the District.
(3) The employee of the Central Government and other State Governments who occupy the buildings in
connection with any official duty are also treated on a par with employees of the State.
(4) The officers mentioned under sub rule (1), (2) and (3) shall produce necessary identity card in the
form given in Appendix – I to the Reserving Authority or the officer in charge of the building in order to
get the benefit of the concession.
7. Order of precedence:- (1) Order of precedence for the use of the building shall be is appended to this
chapter:
(2) If a particular building is required for the Governor and his party subsequent to the reservation of it to
any other member of the different categories mentioned above, such reservation shall automatically
stand cancelled and the officers occupying it shall vacate if forthwith on receiving intimation of
reservation to the Governor and party. The occupation of the buildings by the Governor and
Members of his family shall be free of charge.
8. Safes of articles and installations in the building and penalty for damages caused:- (1) A list of articles
available in each room showing the value of each shall be kept in each room.
(2) Persons occupying the rooms are expected to exercise the consideration and care for the
rooms and furniture and any defacing of the walls or without damage to or spoiling of the furniture shall
render the occupant liable to expulsion from the building besides payment of damage assessed by the
controlling Authority. The officer in charge of the building shall bring to the notice of the Controlling
Authority in this behalf any damages to fixing the cost of advantage.
(3) The occupant shall bring to the notice of the officer in charge of the building any damage of
fault noticed during his occupation. Subsequent complaints shall not be entertained.
(4) The full value of the articles damaged or broken by the occupant or his servant shall be
realized in cash from the occupant before vacating the room. The amount so paid shall be entered in the
remarks column of the Register.
9. Payment of duties:- The bills of the Traveler’s Bungalow preferred and signed by the officer in charge
shall be paid in cash on presentation. Under no circumstances occupants may leave or cause their
luggage’s be moved from the Traveler’s Bungalow bef ore all accounts are finally settled.

444
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

10. Electric lights and fans – The residence shall arrange switch off lights and fans in the room when not
required or when absence from their rooms.
11. Electric Gadgets or contravenes – No electric a ppliances other than those supplied (ie, table fans
table lamps etc) may be fitted for operation in the rooms without first informing the officer-in-charge of
the building in writing and obtaining his permission in writing. Additional use of electric power shall be
charged for as extra in accordance with the estimated consumption of electric energy.
12. Radios & Musical instruments or any other musical or music instruments shall not be played after
10.0’ clock at night and even when played shall not create disturbance to the occupants in the same
building.
13. Infections Diseases – Visitors who are sufferin g from infection diseases shall not be given
accommodation or serve meals in the building. If any resident gets an attack of any infection diseases, he
shall inform the fact to other officer-in-charge of the building so that necessary steps for assistance may
be taken immediately.
Note: - In such cases the officer-in-charge of the building shall immediately render whatever help he can
in the matter.
14. Safety of Money and Valuable articles – Occupan ts shall not keep any articles of value or money
carelessly in their rooms but keep all such articles under lock and key. The Government shall not be
responsible for any losing cases theft or damage done to the occupants property in case of accident or
fire or through any other cause.
15. Maintenance of accounts, issue of receipts etc – The officer in charge of the building shall keep the
accounts of the incomes received b y them from the buildings properly. The officer-in-charge of the
building should issue proper printed receipts for each and every amount received by them. If there is any
refund, the acknowledgement of the party and the amount refunded shall be got entered in the
occupation register. Special fees pay able if any shall also be entered in the occupation register.
(8) Holding of conferences, reminders, meetings etc in the building other than designed
conference hall shall not be permitted.
(9) A list showing the names and designation of the servants posted in the building shall be
placed in a conspicuous place for the information of the occupants.
(10) The rooms of the building shall be numbered and the details regarding occupants in each
room shall be displayed in a convenient place for the information of the travelers, the details regarding
the vacant rooms, if any, shall also be so displayed.
(11) The occupation of the buildings by the Ministers of the Central Government when they visit
the state on duty and the Ministers and speaker of the state while n tour or public business shall be free
of rent.
(12) One room in all class II traveler’s Bungalow with six rooms and above and which are far
away from Inspection Bungalow shall be kept exclusively under the control of the Executive Engineer
(Buildings and Roads)concerned for the use of the PWD officers on official tour. This room shall also be
made available to the officers of other Departments or the public when not required by the PWD
officers. The power of reservation of this room shall rest with the Executive Engineer (Building and
Roads) concerned.
(13) No dealers or their representatives are allowed to peddle their way or enter any residential
or public rooms in the buildings.
(14) The rate of rent and other charges applicable to the building shall be displayed in each
building in a conspicuous place for the information of the traveler’s.
(15) A copy of these rules shall be kept in each building for the information of the occupant.
(16) Notwithstanding anything contained n these rules, the Reserving authority shall have
powers to reserve the building for any person cancel the reservation once made and also to direct the
occupant to vacate at any time without giving any reason what to ever.
17. Rest house can be allotted for film shooting under prior approval from the reserving authority on the
following charges.
Class I Rest House - Rs.25000/- per day
Class II Rest House -Rs.15000/- per day
Others - Rs.10000/- per day
18. General – (1) Servants quarters shall be provid ed if available and their accommodation shall be
charged for at Rs.1 for each person per day.
(2) Every occupier of a building on entry is required to write his full name and address in a
register kept for the purpose in the building. He shall specify the number of persons occupying the room

445
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

and their family relationship with the occupant. The date and time of arrival, time of departure, the total
amount paid by him etc, shall also be written. He shall also sign this register as an indication that he is
willing to abide by these rules.
Note: The Controlling Authority shall maintain a Register providing columns for the above and for other
items if any in each building.
(3) No articles shall be removed from the buildings except under the orders of the Controlling
Authority, not shall the building be occupied by any persons other than bona fide -traveler’s.
(4) The articles provided in a room shall not be removed to other rooms for the convenience of the
occupants.
(5) A suggestion book shall be maintained in every building for the occupants to write their
complaints if any and suggestions and recommendations etc. for the better working of the Traveler’s
Bungalow. The controlling authority shall arrange to have these suggestions examined and important
points brought to the notice of the Government for orders, at least once a year.
(6) Government Servants attached to the buildings are forbidden from asking for tips from the
occupants. Servant found asking for tips shall be liable for punishment in any conveyance to the
occupants by the act of Government servant attached to the building should be brought to the notice of
the controlling authority and remedy sought for.
(7) No registration from the occupants or visitors for the re arrangement furniture, carpets etc in
the rooms shall be entertained.
(19) Catering charges: - Charges for catering if any, provided in the building and the share of the
receipts creditable to Government shall be at the rates prescribed by Government, for the Guest House
and Tourist Bungalows under the control of the Tourist Department from time to time. Bills shall be
issued by the caretakers in the prescribed form.
(20) Inspection Bungalows and Camp Sheds:- (1) The inspection Bungalows and camp sheds in
the stare are primarily intended for the use of Government officers travelling on duty and hence they
have at all times preferential claim for their occupation. The Inspection Bungalows and camp sheds are
under the administrative control of PWD and its allotment shall be made by the Executive Engineer
concerned. Since the Inspection Bungalows and camp sheds are manly intended for the occupation of
Government servants on official duty they may occupy the buildings without limit of time and have
them, if need be reserved in advance. The Ten days rules preferred to join sub rule (1) of rule 4 in there
form not applicable in the case of Government servants occupying inspection Bungalows and camp
sheds on official duty.
The rate of rent applicable to Inspection Bungalow and camp sheds has be as shown under sub-
rule (1) of rule 5.
(21) The rules 1-18 above are applicable in the case of Inspection Bungalows and camp sheds
also subject to the preference to Government servant referred to in sub-rule (1) of this rule.
(22) Correction or modification if any, to these rules may be brought to the notice of
Government for appropriate action.
(23) A list of Traveler’s Bungalows Class II Inspection Bungalows and Camp sheds is given in
Appendix – II.
Appendix I
Identity Card

Name:
Designation:
Official Address:
Rate of Monthly Statement:

446
PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

447
PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

448
PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

449
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 2800C

RULES FOR THE ALLOTMENT AND OCCUPATION OF GOVERNMENT

SERVANTS QUARTERS IN KERALA. (As per Para 2808)
1. Short title.- These rules shall be called the rules for the allotment and occupation of Government Servant's
quarters in Kerala 1975.
2. Extent of application.- These Rules shall apply to all residential buildings under the control of the P.W.D
or the District Collector, as the case may be, and do not apply to buildings under the control of other
departments.
3. Definitions.- In these rules, unless there is anything repugnant to the subject or context.
i."quarters" means buildings constructed, leased or acquired by the Government of Kerala for being
let out to state Government Employees for their residence on payment of rent, which are under the
control of the P.W.D or the District Collector, as the case may be;
ii."Applicant" means a Government Servant who is eligible for allotment of a quarters and who
submits an application for allotment of quarters in the form prescribed by Government;
iii."Allottee” means a Government Servant to whom q uarters have been allotted by competent
authority but not occupied;
iv."Occupant" means an allottee who takes possession of the quarters duly allotted to him after
completing all formalities required as per these rules;
v."Collector" means the District Collector appointed by Government to be in charge of the District;
vi."Executive Engineer" means the Executive Engineer in charge of the P.W.D Buildings Division,
having jurisdiction over the area where the quarters are situated or his subordinate officials who have
been empowered to discharge his duties;
vii."Assistant Engineer" means the Assistant Engineer of the Buildings section under whose jurisdiction
the quarters are situated and who is directly in charge of the quarters;
viii."Rent" means the monthly rent payable by the occupant for the quarters as specified in these rules;
ix."Standard rent" means the rent fixed for a quarters by the P.W.D and got approved by Government
based on its capital cost and other aspects as laid down in the reverent rules issued in that
behalf; x."Pay" means pay as defined in Rule 12(23) part I of K.S.R.;
xi."Family" for the purpose of these rules includes officer’s wife/husband, children and step children
residing with him/her.
4. (a) Eligibility.
i.The Government quarters are intended for allotment to the officers of the state government who do
not have their own accommodation facilities in the place of duty.
ii.Quarters shall be allotted only to those officers who do not have residential buildings where their
Headquarters lies or within towns or within a radius of 15 (fifteen) Kilometers from their offices,
either in their own names or in the names of their husbands or wives as the case may be, or in the
names of their unmarried sons or daughters whether inherited or purchased or obtained otherwise,
including that under any hire purchase scheme.

iii.Non-availability of own accommodation facilities shall be clearly and specifically stated in the
relevant column in the application for allotment of quarters. In case it is subsequently detected that
the statement in the application form in this regard is not true to facts the allottee/occupant shall be
liable to pay from the date of occupation of the quarters, penal rent at three times the rate of standard
rent, fixed for the quarters and to eviction under the provisions the Kerala Public Buildings (Eviction
of Unauthorised Occupants) Act, 1968 and the rules made thereunder, from the quarters forthwith
and in addition, the allottee shall also be liable for disciplinary action under the relevant rules.
iv.In case any alottee or occupant of Government quarters subsequently acquire or obtains residential
buildings in any manner referred to in rule 4 (a) the fact shall be forthwith intimated by the
allottee/occupant to the Collector/the Executive Engineer, Buildings concerned and the
allottee/occupant shall without fail vacate the quarters within one month from the date on which the
allottee/occupant acquire or obtains such residential buildings. Occupation beyond the date of expiry
of the said one month will be treated as unauthorised occupation and the allottee or occupant shall be
liable to the penalities envisaged in these rules.
v.Failure to give timely intimation mentioned in clause (i) shall make the allottee liable to pay penal
rent from the date of acquiring or obtaining such residential buildings till the date of vacating the
Government quarters/buildings, at three times the rate of standard rent fixed for the
quarters/buildings, in addition to the other penalities including disciplinary action.

450
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

(b) Persons who are not eligible for

quarters.-i.Unmarried officers,
ii.Officers who are not being paid from the consolidated funds of the State Government, like persons
employed under local bodies, Government owned companies, corporate bodies and other quasi
Government bodies.
iii.Officers who have been evicted from the quarters due to violation of rules or other grounds. iv.Officers
will be deemed to own house if there is a house in the name of wife/husband as mentioned in
Rule 4(a) (ii).
v.Persons borne on daily wages/work charged/contingent establishment.
vi.Persons whose wife or husband has already been allotted quarters elsewhere.
Explanation: The following will be eligible to occupy the quarters.
(1) Wives/Husbands of army and police Personnel, and
(2) married persons whose wife/husband is no more or is legally separated, but having
dependent child or children
5. Type of quarters eligible for: For the purpose of allotment, the quarters are classified into various types --
--- architect input ??
6. Allotment of quarters
i. The application for allotment of quarters other than those exclusively earmarked for PWD shall be
made in the form in Appendix II to the Collector through the head of office who shall verify the
correctness of the information furnished in the application and countersign it and forward it to the
Collector as early as possible. If the applicant himself is the head of office he may forward the
application to his immediate superior officer who shall forward it to the Collector.
ii. The application for allotment of quarters exclusively earmarked for PWD shall be made in the form
in Appendix II to the Executive Engineer Buildings for allotment
iii. The Collector shall scrutinise the applications received by him, Defective applications, if any, shall
be rejected and the applicants informed accordingly forthwith. If any application is found defective
the applicant shall be given an opportunity to rectify it within seven days and if he complies with the
directions it should be considered as valid application. All the valid applications shall be registered in
a register of the applications. If more than one applications are received for a specific type of quarters
on the same day priority shall be given to the applicant who have been working at the place for longer
period and even that being equal in more than one case, the applicant who is older.
iv.Separate registers or separate folios in a file book in the form in Appendix III shall be maintained for each
type of quarters. A separate register shall be maintained for registering the applications which have priority
in allotment and such applications shall be registered in both the registers simultaneously.
v. An applicant or occupant who, due to promotion or otherwise becomes eligible for a higher type of
quarters, may submit a fresh application for that type of quarters and shall be eligible for allotment of
that quarters in the normal course according to the seniority in that group. In the case of an applicant,
he will have claim to get the original type of quarters applied for when his turn comes in the normal
course. In the case of an occupant he will be allowed to continue to occupy the quarters till the time
he is allotted a higher type of quarter.
vi. Quarters shall be allotted as soon as it falls vacant. In no case shall the allotment of a house be
delayed for more than a week of its falling vacant.
vii. The quarters shall be allotted strictly in accordance with the priority of applications in the respective
group i.e., according to the priority of applications from the respective grades of officers for the type
of quarters they are eligible for. In case a deviation from this rule for the allotment of quarters is found
absolutely indispensable to meet any extraordinary and exceptional circumstances which' might
justifiably warrant such a deviation, the District Collector shall address Government pointing out the
special circumstances of the case and obtain prior orders in the matter.
viii. The allotment order shall be issued to the applicant through the head of office concerned. The head
of office shall forward the orders of allotment to the applicant as expeditiously as possible. The
Collector and the head of office shall see that there is no delay in despatching the allotment order to
the concerned officers. The liability on the part of the allottee for payment of rent for the quarters
commences after seven days from the date of allotment orders or the date of occupation whichever is
earlier. If by any chance the allottee does not require the quarters allotted to him he shall intimate the
fact to the allotting authority within three days of the date of allotment order. If such intimation is
delayed the allottee shall be liable to pay the rent of the quarters upto the date on which such
intimation is received by the Collector subject to a minimum of one month's rent.

451
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Note.- The applicants should intimate the District Collector in writing if their applications are
to be cancelled, due to their transfer to another station, or promotion to a cadre making them
not eligible for the quarters or any other circumstances making them not in need of the
quarters. All such intimations shall be routed through their heads of offices with copy direct to
the Collector.
ix. An officer to whom the quarters is allotted should occupy the same within ten days of the date of
issue of allotment order failing which the allotment shall be cancelled and the building allotted to the
next applicant without intimation to the original allottee. The original allottee however, be liable to
pay rent for a minimum period of one month.
x. Applicants who are on leave at the time of issue of allotment orders shall be permitted to prolong the
actual occupation of the quarters till they request in writing to the Collector. The advance rent payable
shall be remitted within the time fixed and their liability to pay the rent of the quarters will commence
after one week of the issue of allotment order.
xi.In case where officers of the grade prescribed for a particular type of quarters, as laid down in rule 5 are
not available or where they do not require accommodation in quarters provided by Government, the fact
being, intimated to the allotting authority in writing, then such quarters may be allotted to other officers of
a higher or lower grade if any who apply for such allotment until an officer of the particular grade eligible
for the particular type of quarters becomes available and applies for allotment of the quarters. In the event
of receiving such application, the alloting authority shall give notice to the then occupant of the quarters to
vacate the quarters within one month of the receipt of such notice and the occupant shall vacate the
quarters within this time limit without raising any objections, and the quarters shall than be allotted to such
applicant or applicants on the basis of priority of application. If such applicant happens to be one who on
any previous occasion did not want accommodation in the quarters and intimated the fact in writing to the
allotting authority his application shall not be entertained and no re-allotment of quarters as contemplated
here shall be made in his favour. If a lower type quarters is allotted to a higher Grade officer, the rent, to be
realised shall be as per pay revision order in or the standard rent whichever is lower and if a higher type
quarters is allotted, to a lower grade officers, the rent to be realised shall be as per pay revision order in
force or standard rent, whichever is higher.
7. If an occupant due to revision, or other reasons, become ineligible for the type of quarters allotted to
him but only to any of the lower type he may submit a fresh application for the type of quarters for
which he is eligible. He shall be permitted to continue to occupy the quarter, provided he is willing to
pay the standard rent or 7.5% of the pay in the revised scale calculated at the rate of pay he was
drawing immediately before the reversion, whichever is higher, If he is not willing to this he shall
vacate the quarters and wait for his turn for allotment of the quarters to when he is eligible for in the
normal course.
8. The Executive Engineer/Assistant Engineer in charge of the building shall maintain a register of the
allottees/ Ocuupant with details of the date of occupation, the date on which the building is vacated,
rent collected, list of equipments fittings etc. The Assistant Engineer shall inform the allotting
authority, viz. the Collector concerned within three days when a building falls vacant. He shall
intimate the audit officer the occupancy of quarters from time to time.
9. Priorities for allotment of quarters will be available to the following:-
i. Government Servants, who are wives of Jawans serving in border area and who were killed in action
or reported missing (To be certified by proper military authority)
ii.Officers who are physically handicapped. (To be certified by a medical Officer not below the rank of
an Assistant Surgeon/Assistant Professor belonging to the particular speciality).
iii.Ten percent of the quarters inclusive of the special Priorities mentioned in rule 9 shall be reserved
for allotment to members belonging to the Scheduled castes and Scheduled Tribes and a ratio of 1:1
shall be maintained between applicants belonging to Scheduled Caste and Scheduled Tribes.
iv.Government Servants who have entered into inter-caste marriage. (This should be certified by a
Revenue Officer not below the rank of a Tahsildar)
Note.-Priority for clauses (1), (2), (3) and (4) shall be 1:1with other non-priority applicants.
10. The following quarters in the Cantonment House Compound Trivandrum shall be reserved
exclusively for personal staff of the ministers and Speaker.

Type II - 5Nos. (6 Families)

Type IV - 2Nos. (2 Families)
Note:-

452
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

i. Allotment of these reserved quarters shall be on the basis of priority of application from the
personal staff of the ministers and Speaker. Among the applicants preference will be given to
members of personal staff coming from areas outside Trivandrum city limits.
ii.Applications from the members of the personal staff shall be forwarded to the District Collector,
Trivandrum through the concerned Private Secretaries. Concerned shall intimate the allotting
authority the fact when any person ceases to be member of the personal staff.
iii.Anyone in the personal staff of the Ministers and Speaker who is willing to occupy lower type of
quarters than the type eligible for as per the general rules if not available among the reserved
quarters may be alloted such lower type quarters from among the above reserved quarters in the
Cantonment House Compound.
iv.If nobody from the personal staff of the Ministers and Speaker applied for or is available for
allotment of the above mentioned reserved quarters, then such quarters shall be allotted to applicants
from other Government employees according to the normal rules subject to the definite condition
that the allottee should vacate the quarters without fail when members of the personal staff of
Ministers of Speaker apply for the quarters with one months notice.
v.Members of the personal staff Ministers or Speaker who do not require allottment of these reserved
quarters shall be eligible for allotment of quarters only in accordance with the normal rules followed
in this regard.
vi.Members of the personal staff of Ministers and Speaker, who are not Government employees shall
vacate the quarters, thus allotted to them within a month positively from the date on which they
cease to be members of the personal staff of the Ministers and Speaker.
vii.Members of the personal staff of Ministers and Speaker who are Government servants and who get
allotment of these reserved quarters by virtue of the fact that they happen to be members of the
personal staff of Minister and Speaker, may continue to occupy such quarters even after they cease
to be members of the personal staff of Minister and Speaker, subject to the condition that in case
request for allotment of such quarters are received from members of the personal staff of the
Ministers and Speaker the said occupant shall vacate the quarters with one month’s notice without
fail. Such Government servants shall however be eligible for allotment of quarters in accordance
with the general rules. The allotment of these reserved quarters to such Government Servants by
virtue of their position as members of the personal staff of Minister and Speaker shall not affect their
priority in the general list of applicants, in case such Government Servants had already applied for
allotments of quarters even before the special allotment of the quarters reserved for personal staff of
Ministers and Speaker. To get priority in the general list separate application as per the general rules
will have to be made to the allotting authority.
viii.Other conditions in the general rules prescribed herein shall also apply in the allotment of these
reserved quarters.
ix. iThe following quarters at Kaudiar, Trivandrum shall be reserved exclusively for allotment
to the following categories of officers subject to the general rules prescribed herein.
1) Quarters No: 2- Police officers in the rank of Superintendent of Police.
2) Quarters No: 3- Chief Engineers P.W.D
3) Quarters No: 5- District Sessions Judge, Trivandrum.
Note: - The quarters at Kawdiar are intended for allotment to class I officers of the state
Government who do not have residential accommodation of their own in Trivandrum. For the
purpose of this rule class I Officers will be Officers whose actual basic pay is Rs. 14,900 per
mensem and above and officers be longing to all India Services.
ii The Chief Engineers’ quarters at Observatory Compound shall be exclusively allotted to PWD
Chief Engineers by the CE (Buildings).
11. i An agreement in appendix X (7)shall be executed by the allottees of the quarters before the
quarters are actually occupied by them.
ii The lease agreement to be executed shall be on plain paper, the stamp duty being payable by
the Government. The Executive Engineer, Buildings in charge of the quarters shall be competent
to accept the agreement on behalf of the Governor of Kerala and these agreements shall be
recorded in his office duly numbered and entered in a separate register of Agreement.
12. i Electricity charges and water charges where such amenities are available shall be payable by the
occupants direct to the Kerala State Electricity Board, Kerala Water Authority or other bodies
maintaining such system.

453
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

ii An amount equal to two months standard rent of the building shall be deposited by each
Government Servant as advance before occupation of the house and this amount shall be refunded to
him when he/she vacates the building after deducting the dues to Government, if any, and on
production of a non-liability certificate from the Collector concerned. Of the two months standard
rent, one month (standard rent will be collected as initial advance and the balance of one month's
standard rent will be collected as additional advance in two equal monthly installments.
Note.- The meter reading on the date of occupation will be noted, and the occupant shall be
responsible for payment towards further consumption charges. If in the first bill received, any
charges pertain to the period of occupancy of the previous occupant the Asst. Engineer
concerned shall collect the proportionate amount due from the occupant and settle the bill,
meeting the difference from Government funds. The amount so advanced shall be debited to the
suspense head 'Misc. P.W. Advance’ and promptly recovered from the previous occupant.
13. i The occupants shall provide their own furniture, or other required materials and electric bulbs.
Note:-Where any items of furniture is provided by Government, rent for the same as fixed by
Government, shall be payable by the occupant in addition to the rent of the quarters. In such
cases no option shall be available for the occupant for non-payment, of additional rent on the
plea that such furniture is not used/required by the occupant.
ii An inventory of articles available in the quarters shall be prepared in duplicate by the overseer
concerned and signed by the occupant and the Asst. Engineer as soon as the allottee occupies the house.
The original at the inventory shall be kept by the Asst. Engineer and the duplicate by the occupant. The
occupant shall be responsible for all articles included in the inventory until they are
handed over to the Asst. Engineer at the time of vacating the quarters and an acknowledgement
obtained for the same.
Note:- If any articles are lost or damaged while in the custody of the occupant, the cost thereof shall
be recovered from the occupant as if it is arrears of rent. The cost of articles shall be fixed by
the Asst. Engineer, at book value / market value plus 210 per centage whichever is higher.
After the requirements of the rules are duly fulfilled the key of the quarters shall be handed
over to the allottee by the Asst. Engineer concerned.
14. The occupant shall keep the quarters and premises neat and tidy and shall be liable to make good
any damages to the building and its installations caused during his/her occupancy other than by
normal wear and tear. Damage caused due to carelessness or in advertence of the occupant shall be
repaired departmentally and cost recovered from the occupant, as if it is arrears of rent.
15. i Rent payable by the occupant of the quarters shall be as per pay revision order in force or the
standard rent whichever is lower or the amount fixed in accordance with the rules in force from time
to time.
Explanation:- For the purpose of this rule, the definition of pay occurring in rule 12(23), K.S.R., Part I
shall be the basis for reckoning the pay for calculation of the rate of rent.
ii If the husband and wife are Government Servants and residing in the quarters, rent payable shall be
calculated on the basis of the pay of the person drawing higher rate. However, the rent shall be
payable by the person in whose name the quarters are allotted. The allottee in such cases shall
intimate the Executive Engineer, Buildings concerned the change in the rates of pay of
himself/herself as well as his wife/her husband. Both the occupants shall be held jointly and
severally responsible for payment of rent and other requirements of these rules as far as
applicable to them.
iii House rent allowance shall be denied only to the allottee of the quarters whether it is the husband
or the wife as the case may be.
iv The standard rent shall be fixed at 8% (eight per cent) of the capital costs of the building.
v Payment of rent or arrears therefore shall be made by short-drawal in the salary bills of officers to
whom quarters are allotted.
vi In the case of occupants who proceed on leave or are placed under suspension the rent payable may be
7.5% of a complete month's pay drawn by him immediately before he proceeds on leave or is placed
under suspension of standard rent, whichever is lower and the amount shall be realised from his leave
salary or subsistence allowance, as the case may be. In case no leave salary or subsistence allowance is
recoverable from the occupants, the rent payable shall be recovered from the occupant as detailed in rule
30.
16. i A Government Servant occupying the quarters when transferred from the station shall vacate the
quarters within a period of one month from the date of order of the transfer. The Allotting authority

454
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

may consider request for grant of extension of time for occupation of the quarters on merits and grant
extension for a period not exceeding six months in all or till the end of the academic year, whichever
is earlier on usual rate of rent. No further extension shall for any reason be allowed. Action shall be
taken for eviction of the occupants after the extended period.
Note:- This rule shall not apply if the quarters are occupied by husband and wife who are both Government
servants and if only one of them is transferred from the station. If the quarters is allotted in the name of
the person transferred it shall be transferred to the name of the other person and rent recovery shall be
effected based on the pay of the occupant in such cases. The formalities regarding registration of
application and allotment detailed in rule 6 shall not be applicable in such case of transfer of allotment.

ii Government servants occupying the quarters who retire from service shall vacate the quarters on the
date of retirement. If they however wish to continue occupation on account of unavoidable
circumstances they shall apply to the allotting authority sufficiently early and in any case before
fourteen days prior to the date of retirement. The allotting authority may consider the request for
grant of extension for a period not exceeding six months in all or till the end of the academic year
whichever is earlier. No further extension shall on any score be allowed. Action shall be taken for
eviction of the occupants after the extended period. If the request of the Government servant for
continued occupation is granted they shall pay the standard rent in advance before 5th of every
month and also shall give an undertaking in writing to the allotting authority to the effect that they
shall be liable to the dues to Government if any being recovered from their person, in case they fail
to pay the dues. If the occupant continues occupation of the quarters unauthorisedly after the date
of retirement action shall be taken to evict them.
iii Where occupancy terminates due to retirement or other causes, the officer’s last pay shall be
disbursed only on receipt of the certificate of the Executive Engineer concerned that no rent is due
from the officer. Receipt of this certificate shall also be a condition for the issue of nonliability
certificate or on behalf of the officer before final settlement of his retirement benefits or payment
of gratuity/pension to family.
iv In case an officer goes on long leave for more than six months, previous sanction of Government shall
be obtained for the continued occupation of the quarters. In such cases rent shall be calculated and
realised at the rate prescribed in rule 15. For the purpose of this rule, the amount of pay drawn by
the officer immediately before the commencements of the leave shall be the basis for determining
the amount of rent to be realised from the officer.
Note:- Heads of office shall ascertain from the persons working under them and occupying
quarters, whether they have left any arrears of rent or other dues or show such amount in
L.P.C. issued to Accountant General after retirement of the officer for settling their
terminal dues, if the individual concerned does not pay the dues before that.
17. i Whenever possible, the occupant shall give advance information to the Assistant Engineer
concerned about vacating of quarters. Normally this period shall be 30 days in advance of the
proposed date of vacating. In any case, a minimum period of 7 days shall be insisted. If any
occupant surrenders the key, without any advance notice, he shall be liable to pay rent, for another
7 days also. The notice of vacating the quarters shall be sent simultaneously to the District
Collector and the Executive Engineer concerned, specifying the date on which quarters are
proposed to be vacated.
ii The Assistant Engineer concerned shall arrange to verify the condition of the quarters and other
amenities provided therein jointly with the occupant, if possible, with reference to the list prepared
at the time of occupation. Proper charge papers shall be prepared in duplicate signed by the
occupant and the Assistant Engineer and one copy kept by each. If any damages or losses are
noticed the fact should be noted in the charge papers. These shall be assessed by the Assistant
Engineer within one week and details intimated to the Executive Engineer for taking action for
recovery from the occupant.
iiiThe occupant shall produce the latest bill and relative receipt in support of payment of electric current
charges and water charges to the Assistant Engineer, at the time of vacating the quarters. The metre
readings as on the date of vacating shall then be taken by the Assistant Engineer and amount yet to be
paid by the occupant worked out. The occupant shall pay such amount to the Assistant Engineer, at the
time of surrendering the key and obtain proper receipt. This shall be credited to “Deposits” in the
accounts of the Execu tive Engineer and payment of Electric current or Water charges, when the bills
are actually received, arranged by the Assistant Engineer, by drawing

455
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

from the deposit amount. Balance, if any, will be refunded to the occupant after settling all
liabilities. If the amount recovered is found inadequate, the differences shall be met from the
advance rent available in deposit and if that too is insufficient the required amount shall be met
initially by the P.W.D. and subsequently recovered from the occupant, as detailed in rule 30.
18. The demand statement for recovery of rent should normally reach the head of office by the 25th of
each month. If due to any reason, the demand statement is not received in time, the head of office
shall effect the recovery based on the previous month’s demand statement and intimate the fact to the
Collector, if the occupant continues to occupy the quarters during the month also.
i It shall be incumbent upon the head of office to recover the amount as shown in the demand
statement. If there is any real error or mistake in the demand made, it may be pointed out after
effecting the recovery and got adjusted in the subsequent demands.
ii The advance rent paid by the occupant shall not normally be adjusted towards rent due. It shall be
refunded only on the basis of the certificate from the Assistant Engineer concerned that no
liabilities are due from the occupant, after quarters are vacated and key and other articles handed
over.
19. If any occupant, contravene any of the provisions of these rules or conditions in the agreement
executed by him, it shall be lawful for the Collector concerned to cancel the allotment of quarters
made to him. A memo to this effect will be sent to the occupant, setting forth the irregularities
noticed, through his head of office and the occupant shall vacate the quarters within 30 days of the
date of such memo.
20. If the occupant fails to vacate quarters within the time allowed by rule 19, the Collector shall inform
the occupant about the irregularities committed by him and get his statement as a reply. The occupant
shall be bound to submit his reply within 7 days of the receipt of the show cause notice. If the reply is
not found to be satisfactory, the Collector shall serve the notice of eviction on the party through the
head of his office, simultaneously informing the head of office that the party has been served the
notice of eviction earlier.
i. The head of office shall serve the orders of eviction to the occupant as immediately as practicable
and direct him to vacate the quarters within a week and produce clearance certificate to that effect
from the concerned Assistant Engineer. If the occupant fails to vacate the quarters and produce the
certificate within a week the head of office shall issue orders placing the occupant under suspension
with immediate effect. If the head of office himself is not competent to place the officer under
suspension he shall immediately take action to get the orders of the officer competent to do so, and
in any case the suspension orders shall take effect from the date after a week an which the eviction
orders are served to the occupant.
ii. The employees under suspension shall be reinstated in service only on receipt of a clearance
certificate from the Assistant Engineer in charge of the quarters. He shall be deemed to have been
reinstated in service the day following the day of production of certificate.

a The period of suspension may be regularised by the authority competent, as eligible

leave, excepting casual leave.
b If the occupant fails to vacate quarters within a reasonable time even after placing him under
suspension, action shall be taken to evict the occupant under the provisions of the Kerala
Public Buildings (Eviction of Unauthorised occupants) Act, 1968 and the rules made
thereunder.
c For the period of stay in the quarters beyond the date permitted by rule 19, rent at 3 times,
the normal rate shall be recovered from the occupant.
21. An appeal shall lie against the orders of eviction to the Government in the Public Works
Department. But filing of such an appeal shall not in any way empower the occupant to continue to
occupy the quarters, if however, the State Government after examining the facts of the case, set aside
the orders of eviction appellant shall be eligible for registration and shall be allotted a quarters falling
vacant next i.e., in preference to all other registered applicant.
22. If any, occupant commits violation of any of these rules and the cancellation of allotment and
eviction from quarters, is not considered necessary, the Collector shall intimate the head of office
about the violation of rules with a request to initiate departmental disciplinary proceedings against the
occupant. The head of office there upon shall initiate disciplinary proceedings, as per the Kerala Civil
Servants (Classification, Control and appeal), Rules and award appropriate punishment if the
occupant is found guilty.

456
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Note :- (i) Warning is not treated as punishment. If the charges are proved, one of the punishment
specified in the K.C.S. (CC&A) Rules shall be awarded.
(ii) The Head of office shall intimate the Collector about the outcome of the disciplinary
proceedings and the final findings of the case in due course.
23. (1) The quarters shall not on any account be sublet, or shall not be shared with anybody without the
written permission of the Collector concerned. Even in cases where such permission is granted, the
liability for payment of rent shall rest on the person to whom the quarters is allotted.
(2) In the event of the death of either the husband or wife (allottee of the quarters) occupying the
same quarters with the family i.e. husband and wife with children, the quarters shall be allotted to
the surviving person (husband or wife) in case he/she is also a Government employee.
(3) In the event of the transfer of either the husband or wife (allottee of the quarters) occupying the
quarters with family i.e., husband and wife with children, the quarters may be reallotted to the other
persons (husband, or wife) occupying the same quarters in case he/she is also a Government
employee and continue to work in the same station even after the transfer of the allottee.
24. (1) The occupants shall not make any addition, alterations or repairs to the quarters or any of the
installations therein, even at their own cost. Repairs or replacements required shall immediately be

brought to the notice of Assistant Engineer concerned for further action. Electrical wiring, pipes laid,
etc., shall not be interfered or tampered with.
(2) Additional amenities like installation of telephones, ceiling fans etc., at the cost of the occupant,
can be provided only under written permission of the Assistant Engineer.
Note.- The occupants may put up at their cost temporary fence within the area compound if any set apart
for the quarters for protecting garden or other vegetable plantations from stray animals for which no
special sanction is required. But this may be done in consultation with the Assistant Engineer concerned.

(3) The occupant while living in quarters shall conduct himself decently, without, in any way
causing inconvenience to the neighbours. Unnecessary quarrels, state of drunkenness or other
undesirable behaviour shall be treated as misconduct, and such occupants shall be liable to be
evicted on such grounds alone, without notice.
25. (1) Without prejudice to any of the provisions contained in these rules or any other rules prescribed in this
behalf, the government shall have the right (a) to refuse to register any particular applicant or
(b) to terminate any of the allotment already made; without assigning any reasons and in the latter
case, the occupant shall forthwith vacate the quarters and surrender possession as laid down in these
Rules. No appeal shall be entertained on such orders. These rules are issued in suppression of all
previous rules issued in this behalf and the occupant, who have been allotted quarters
already, in pursuance of the rules then in force, shall be deemed to be governed by these Rules
hereafter.
(2) These rules shall be supplementary to the relevant rules in Kerala Financial Code, the Kerala Public
Works Account Code and the Kerala Public Works Department Code and subject to the general rules
regarding fixation of rent of Government quarters framed by Government in this behalf from
time to time.
26. The occupant shall keep the Collector and the Executive Engineer concerned informed of changes
in their pay, station, address and such others events like transfers, promotion etc., during the period of
their stay in the quarters.
Note.- When the occupant proceeds on 1eave, tour, for more than two weeks and leaves his
headquarters with family the fact shall be intimated to the Assistant Engineer in charge, in writing.
27. The occupant may reside in the quarters without his/her family or keep it locked up for a maximum
period of 3 months for reasons like hospitalisations and other treatments, conception , vacation etc.
This period may be extended up to six months in exceptional case, with the permission of the
Collector in writing. But if such periods exceed six months the quarters shall be vacated and the key
and other articles properly handed over as provided in these Rules. Failure to do so shall entail
eviction as well as departmental disciplinary proceedings.
28. Liabilities, if any, if left by an occupant while vacating the quarters, shall be assessed and finalised
within 7 days of the date of, vacating. If the amount of liability is more than the advance rent available
with the Executive Engineer a special demand shall be issued to the head of office immediately. The
amount as per the special demand shall be recovered in from the pay of the occupant and remitted to the
Executive Engineer, by the head office. If the occupant has 1eft on transfer, the amount due shall be
intimated to the new head of office in writing. But if such instances exceed six months the quarters

457
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

shall be vacated and the key and other article properly handed over as provided in these rules. Failure
to do so shall entail eviction as well as departmental disciplinary proceedings.
Note:- Postal Commission for remitting the amount recovered by M.O. to the Executive Engineer
concerned shall be met from the office contingencies of the head of office concerned.
29. The applicant, allottees and occupants as well as past occupants of the quarters, shall be liable to be
governed by these Rules as well as any other rules and conditions prescribed by Government in this
behalf from time to time.
30. Notwithstanding anything contained in the above said provisions any amount due to Government
from any occupant or past occupant, shall also be recovered from his/her properties movable or
immovable under the Revenue Recovery Act for the time being in force, as though they are arrears of
1and revenue, or in any other manner as the Government may deem fit.
31. Notwithstanding anything contained in these Rules, the Government shall be competent to
terminate the allotment without assigning any reason whatsoever and the occupant shall thereupon
vacate the building within one month of the receipt of notice of termination.
32. Notwithstanding anything contained in these rules, Government may, in deserving cases, dispense
with or relax the provisions of any rules to such extent or subject to such conditions as they may deem
fit.

Appendix2800D
AGREEMENT TO EXECUTED BYALLOTTEES (As per Para 2808)
THIS LEASE DEED executed on this .................................
...............……………………………………………………………………………………(her ein after
called "the lessee") on the one part and the Governor of Kerala (herein after called "the lesser") of the
other part.
WITNESS As follows:
In consideration of the rent herein reserved and the covenants on the part of the lessee hereinafter
contained in, Lesser both hereby demise unto the lessee……………………….

………………………………………..more particulars mentioned and des cribed in the schedule

hereto.
1.The Lessee hereby covenants with the Lesser as follows:
i) The Lessee shall during the continuance of the lease pay a month rent which will be standard rent or 7
½ %of the pay (including DP) whichever is lesser.
Provided when both the husband and wife occupying quarters are Gazetted officers) rent will be
calculated on the basis of the pay of the persons drawing the higher rate of pay. Payment of rent or
arrears thereof shall be made short drawals in the salary bills of the lessee.
ii) The Lessee shall not sublet the building or accommodate he is expect to maintain.
iii) The Lessee when vacating the building shall hand over charge of the Building.
iv) The Lessee whom intends to vacate the building shall, except in case of sudden transfer intimate the
fact to the Executive Engineer in charge of the Building at least one months before the date on which he
intends to vacate the building failing which he shall be liable to pay rent for the period of one months
from the date of vacating or till the date of occupation of the building by another person whichever is
earlier.
v) The Lessee when transferred or retired shall vacate the building within one month of the date of
retirement or transfer unless extended by the Government for a further period. In case the Lessee is
unable to vacate the building as aforesaid due to unavoidable circumstances he shall apply to
Government sufficiently early. The Lesser shall pay rent in the case of retirement in advance before the
fifth of every month.
vi) The Lessee shall pay all dues by way of water charges, current charges and cleaning charges except
property tax due to the local body concerned.
vii) The Lessee shall keep the building in neat condition and shall be liable for any damage caused to the
building and the installations therein.
viii) In case the Lessee commits breach of all or any of the terms and conditions herein contained, the
lessee shall cease to have any right of occupation of the quarters and the Lesser shall thereupon take
possession of the quarter.
ix) Notwithstanding anything herein contained, the Lesser shall be competent to terminate the lessee
without assigning any reason whatsoever and the Lessee shall, thereupon vacate the building within one
month, of the receipt of the notice of such termination.
x) The Lessee shall provide his own furniture, materials and electric bulbs.

458
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

(1) The Lesser herein covenants with the Lessee as follows:

(i) The Lessee regularly paying the rent hereby reserved and agreed to be paid and on performing and
observing all the covenants and conditions stipulated hereinafter contained to be observed on the Lessees
part shall peacefully and quietly held and enjoy and leasehold quarters and premises attached thereto
during the currency of the lease without any interruption by the Lesser except as otherwise provided for
heroin. The Lesser shall carry out the annual maintenance such as white washing, minor repairs etc., of
the lease hold at Lesser's cost.
(ii) The Lessee further agree that all amounts due from him on account of damage caused to the building
and installations during his stay or any other dues for which he becomes liable to the lesser under this
deed shall be recovered by the Lesser by deduction from the Lessee's pay bill.
(iii) Without prejudice to the rights of the Government under the proceeding clauses al1 sums found due
to Government under or by virtue of this agreement shall be recovered from the Lessee and his
properties movable and immovable under the provisions of the Revenue Recovery Act for the time being
in force as though they are arrears of land revenue or any other manner as the Government may deem fit.
(iv) Consistent with these rules the Lessee shall be liable to abide by the rules and conditions regarding
the allotment and occupation of the quarter now in force and also such terms in that regard.
(v) The Lesser shall bear the stamp duty with which this document is chargeable.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF ……………………………. the Lessee and
………… ………………..

for and on behalf of the Governor of Kerala have hereunto set their hands the day and year first above
written.
Signed by the Lessee
In the presence of Witnesses:

Appendix 2800E

Handing over/Talking over Statement of Residential Buildings (As per Para

2808) Reference.
Quarter No .......................................................
Building has been taken over from ...................................... on the Forenoon/Afternoon of .
................................ with the following fixtures and fittings.
Details of fixtures and fittings.

Water meter reading at the time of handing over/taking over is ----------------

Ele. meter reading at the time of handing over/taking over is ----------------

Handed over Taken over by

Signature……………………………..

Appendix 2800F

Proforma for fixation /revision of Rent.

(As per Para 2809.5)
1. Name of Office (s) by which the building is taken on rent
2. (a)Present house No. assigned by Corporation/ Municipality/ Panchayat and
address
(b) Old House No. assigned immediately after construction by the
Corporation/ Municipality/Panchayat (This information is for verifying the
age certificate issued by local bodies)
3. Revenue survey No. (a) name of village in which the building is situated.
4. Actual extent of land made available for the exclusive use of the office
(a) maintained in item (1) above.
5. Name and address of the owner of the building and land
6. No. and date of certificate issued by the
Corporation/Municipality/Panchayat in support of the age of the building
7. No. and date of certificate issued by the Tahsildar in support of the land value

459
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

8. Whether the certificates as per items 6 & 7 above have been verified by
the owner and head of the office occupying the building
9. Whether these two certificates have been attached to this proforma in original
10. Whether this is for initial fixation of rent or for revision of rent.
11. If this is or revision of rent furnish details of earlier fixation here
12. Monthly rent demanded by the owner for the present fixation
13.Whether the owner has given written consent to accept the rent fixed by
the PWD
14. Date from which the rent is to be fixed for revision
15.Date on which written application of owner for revision of rent (in case of
revision) received by the officer above.
16.Signature of the owner(s) of the building and land mentioned above in
token of having verified and satisfied with the attachments above.
17.Staff strength (Category-wise) of the office(s) accommodated in the
above building (for calculating admissible area as per norms)
18.Additional space requirements if any sanctioned by competent authorities
for the essential use of the above office (s)
19. Whether Govt. order regarding norms to be observed while taking private
building on rent for Govt. purpose have been followed and certify that no
other suitable building at lower rent is available.
20.Signature with date and designation of the Head of the Office (s)
occupying the building in token of having verified and satisfied of
the correctness of the information furnished in items 10 to 18 above
21. Date of forwarding to PWD
22. Date of receipt at PWD office
23.Whether the receiving office of the PWD verified and satisfied that
information required as per all columns above have been furnished in full
and the certificates attached in original.
24.Whether a dimensioned sketch /plan showing each floor, outhouses,
extensions etc. has been prepared by the PWD office and attached to
this proforma.
25.Whether specifications of each portion of the building(s) have been
prepared and furnished along with this proforma.
26.Whether a dimensioned sketch/ plan showing the compound wall gate
well, other structure etc, if any, has been prepared/ verified and
furnished along with proforma.
27. Whether rent calculation as laid down in the related circulars in force have
been worked out with all details and furnished along with details.
28. Monthly rent arrive as per rent calculation.
29.Whether a certificate showing the non-available of Govt. building for
accommodating the above office has been furnished along with this.
30.Whether certificates regarding the structural stability has been furnished
along with this.
31.Signature with date and designation of PWD officer in token of having
verified and satisfied on item 21 to 30 above.

460
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 2800G
Lease deed for Buildings to be hired for Government Purpose (As per Para 2809.5)
This lease deed is executed on this .......... the day of ..........……………..two thousand and .……………..
between ………………….aged ……… son of ..........residing at ......Taluk
(here in after referred to as
"the lesser”) of the one part and the Governor of K erala represented by the ................ or an officer duly
authorised by him (here in after referred to as “th e lessee”) of the other part.
WITNESSETH AS FOLLOWS
In consideration of the rent herein reserved and of the covenants on the part of the lessee herein after
contained, the lesser do hereby demise upto the lessee the building bearing No........... and situated in the
property mentioned and described in the schedule hereto together with the water supply sanitary and
Electrical installations for a period from ......... to ……….. for the purpose of accommodating Governm
ent or other public offices subject to the terms and conditions herein contained.
1. The lessee shall pay to the lessor during the period of the lease hereby created a monthly rent of........
(Rupees ..................) such rent to be paid by the lessee to the lessor regularly.
2. The lessee shall also pay in addition to the rent mentioned above the charges for electricity and water
consumed during the lease period and the meter hire charges for water and electric meters payable from
time to time during the period of lease, provided that the hire charges for the water meter and electric
meter actually paid by the lessee shall be deducted from and adjusted against the Vent payable by the
lessee and only the balance amount after deduction shall be paid by the lessee every month.
3. It is hereby agreed that the lessee paying the rent hereby reserved and performing and observing
each of the covenants herein contained may peacefully hold and enjoy the said building during the
lease period without any interruption by the lessor or any person lawfully claiming under him.
4. The lessor shall pay all existing and future taxes, rates and assessments in respect of the lease hold
including the Municipal or other tax assessed by a local authority on the value of the building or
annual letting value of the building and all other rates, taxes and assessment levied by any authority
whatsoever.
5. The lessor shall at his own expense keep the demised building in good substantial repair and also
attend to the annual maintenance of the building such as white washing, painting, etc so as to keep
the exterior and interior of the demised building and the additions, if any, thereto and the boundary
walls and fences, the sanitary and other installations in good and habitable condition.
6. In case the lessor makes default to carry out the repairs and maintenance even after one month of
receipt of notice in writing given by the lessee to do the repairs and maintenance it shall be lawful
for the lessee to execute such repairs and maintenance and deduct the expenses from the rent which
shall then be and thereafter become due and payable under or by virtue of these presents.
7. If the lessee shall desire to determine the lease at any time during the period of the tenancy and shall
give to the lessor not less than three months' previous notice in writing of such desire and shall upto
the time of such termination pay the agreed rent and perform and observe the various covenants on his
part to be performed and observed, then immediately on the expiry of such notice period the present
demise and everything herein contained shall cease and be void but without prejudice to the rights,
remedies and claims of either party against the other in respect of any antecedent claim or breach of
covenant.
8. The lessor further agrees that he shall, if so required by the lessee, do and execute any alterations or
additions to the leasehold subject to such further conditions including rate of rent as may then be
mutually agreed upon.
9. This lease may be extended beyond the expiry of the lease period by mutual consent, in which case all
the conditions in this lease deed except that relating to the rate of rent for extended period shall
continue to be valid.
10. The lessee shall on the expiry of the said term or sooner determination thereof deliver possession of
the demised promises to the lessor in as good a condition as it was when the lessee obtained
possession subject only to the changes caused by reasonable wear and tear or irresistible forces. The
lessee shall not be liable to pay any compensation to the lessor for damages caused to the building
due to reasons beyond the control of the lessee.
11. In case the lessee holds over or does not deliver possession of the building on the termination of
tenancy as provided above, the lessee shall continue to be liable for payment of the rent for the
period the lessee remains in possession or deprives or prevent the lessor from taking vacant
possession of the said premises, provided however that such period shall not exceed three months.

461
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

In witness where of ………………………….. the lessor and Sri ………………………………… (the

lessee) for and on behalf of the Governor of Kerala have here unto set their hands the day and year
first above written.
SCHEDULE ABOVE REFERRED TO
Serial No.
Registration District :
Registration Sub District :
Taluk :
Village :
Tenure :
Thandaper No. :
Corporation/Municipality/ Panchayath
Survey No. :
Extent :
Description of the Building –
BOUNDARIES
North :
East :
West :
South :
DESCRIPTION

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
Sl.No. Details Nos.
1. Light points
2. Fan points & fan (ceiling)
3. Plugs. etc.
WATER SUPPLY AND SANITARY INSTALLATION
1. Wash basin :
2. Water taps :

1) (address)
2) ”
Signed by the lesses Shri………………………………..
(for and on behalf of the Governor of Kerala)
In the presence of witnesses:-
(1) (address)
(2) ”
This document is typewritten
Total ………………..
Corrections:
(Lessor) (Lessor)-

Appendix 2800H

Lease deed For letting out Government Building/ Property (As per Para 3011)
This lease deed is executed on this the ..............day of ....................... Two thousand and ....................
between the Governor of Kerala (here in after called "the Lessor") of the one part and Shri/Smt
................ aged ..... son of/daughter of/wife of/Shri ....... .......... of ........................ house
............................ village .................. Taluk ……. …….. ..... District/ a soci
ety/Bank registered
under the ............... Act and having its registered office at .......... (hereinafter called "the
Lessee”) of the other part.
WHEREAS at the request of the Lessee the Lessor has in order No ...................... . dated ...……..

agreed to let the building owned by the lessor bearing No ………………….. and more particularly
mentioned and described in the Schedule hereunder written for a period of ........................... years from

462
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

...................... on a monthly rent of Rs ....…………………… (Rupecs .................. ..........

........
..................) subject to the terms and conditions hereinafter contained.
And whereas by way of security for the due fulfillment of the terms and conditions of the lease the
lessee has deposited a sum of Rs. ........... (Rupees ................. ................ .................. ) with the lessor.
Now these presents witness as follows:-
1. In consideration of the rent herein reserved and of the covenants on the part of the lessee hereinafter
contained the lessor both hereby demise into the lessee by way of lease the building bearing No. ...........
more particularly mentioned and described in the schedule hereto together with the water supply, sanitary
and electrical installations to hold the same for the purpose of ................. for a period of
............................. commencing from ........ on a monthly rent of ................. the first of such payment to
be made on ........................
2. The lessee covenants with the lessor as follows:-
(i) to pay the monthly rent of Rs. .................. in advance on or before ........................ day of that month.
(ii) in addition to the monthly rent to pay all charges for electricity and water consumed during the lease
period and the meter hire charges for water meter and electric meter payable from time to time during
the period of lease.
(iii) to keep the exterior and interior of the demised premises, the drains, the soil and other pipes and
sanitary and water supply installation and electric fittings and fixtures thereof in good condition.
(iv) not to make or permit to be made under any circumstances any alterations in or additions to the
demised building.
(v) to use the demised premises only for the purposes for which it is leased out, namely for the
………….. (hereenter the purpose) and for no other pur pose.
(vi) not to assign, sublet, transfer or otherwise part with possession of the leasehold or any part thereof.
(vii) at the expiry of the period of this lease or determination thereof as provided hereunder to peacefully and
quietly surrender to the lessor the leasehold in the same condition as it was handed over to the lessee,
(viii) that in case of breach by the lessee of all or any of the covenants on his part to be observed and
performed, it will be competent for the lessor to terminate the lease without reference to the period of
lease herein before reserved and to retake possession of the building without notice.
(ix) that it shall be lawful for the lessor to revise and refix the leasse rent herein reserved at the end of
every three years and the lessee is bound to pay the revised rent so fixed.
3. The lessor covenants with the lessee as follows:-
(i) to pay all existing and future taxes including property tax, ground rent and other charges, if any,
payable by the owner thereof.
(ii) that the lessee paying the rent hereby reserved, and observing and performing each of the covenants
and stipulations herein contained, may peacefully hold and enjoy the demised premises during the lease
period without any interruption by the lessor.
(iii) to keep the premises in good repair during the period of the 1ease.
(iv) to repay to the lessee on the expiry of the period of lease or sooner determination the security deposit
of Rs .......... or so much part thereof as is found due to the lessee after the settlement of accounts between
the lessor and the lessee.
4. On the expiry of the term of ............... for which the lease is granted, it shall be open to the lessor to
renew the lease or terminate the same according to the convenience and pleasure of the lessor.
5. If either party desires to determine the present demise shall give to the other party not less than three
month's notice in writing of such desires then immediately on the expiration of such period, the present
demise and every thing herein contained shall cease and be void, but without prejudice to the rights
remedies of either party against the other in respect of any antecedent claim or breach of covenant.
6. Notwithstanding anything herein contained the lessor reserves the right to terminate the lease at any
time without assigning any reason and without notice.
7. All sums found due to the lessor under or by virtue of this Deed shall be recoverable from the lessee
and his/her properties movable and immovable under the provisions of the Revenue Recovery Act for
the time being in force as though such sums are arrears of land revenue and in such other manner as the
lessor may deem fit.
In witness whereof Shri .............................. for and on behalf of the lessor and Shri ……………. ..........
the
lessee have hereunto set their hands the day, month and year first above written.
(H.E. the description of the property)
Signed by Sri ......................................... for and on behalf of the lessor.
In the presence of witnesses:-
(1)
463
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

(2)
Signed by Shri .............................. the lessee.
In the presence of witnesses:-
(1)
(2)
Appendix 2900A

8.1.1.1.1 Register of movable Assets (As per Para 2901)

Division/ Sub Division/ Section:

Group head:
Sl Description of Identification Date of receipt Price of Number Remarks
No the article No. source and reference article
to voucher
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Note:- In column 4 quote the C.B.V. No. in case of purchases paid for in the division or transfer note if
transferred from other divisions.
In column 5 note price if known. Where tools and plants are transferred for numerical accounting
without value rate “transferred without value”
Where any item is finally disposed by transfer from the division, sale, destruction or through any
other cause the fact should be noted in remarks column so that the concerned item is eliminated from
the register.
Appendix 2900B

8.1.1.1.2 Register of movements of movable Assets (As per Para 2901)

Division: Group head:
Sl Ite Descriptio Date and Destin D Movements
N m n reference to ation at From to
o No voucher No e Sub- Section Division Sub- Sec
division division tion
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Appendix 2900C

Transfer Note (As per Para 2901)

(Original)
Tools & Plant Transfer Note No ………………………… ………………Di vision
To Dated…………………
……………………
……………………
The following items of Tools & Plant are transferred to you. Please acknowledge.
Sl No Identification No Description of articles Number / quantity Remarks
issued
1 2 3 4 5

…………………Engineer
(Duplicate)
Tools & Plant Transfer Note No ………………………… ………………Di vision
To Dated…………………
……………………
……………………

464
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

The following items of Tools & Plant are transferred to you. Please acknowledge.
Sl No Identification No Description of articles Number / quantity Remarks
issued
1 2 3 4 5

…………………Engineer
(Triplicate)
Tools & Plant Transfer Note No ………………………… ………………Di vision
To Dated…………………
……………………
……………………
The following items of Tools & Plant are transferred to you. Please acknowledge.
Sl No Identification No Description of articles Number / quantity Remarks
issued
1 2 3 4 5

…………………Engineer
8.2
Appendix 2900D
History Book (As per Para 2911)
Registered number :
Date of purchase :
Model/ make and manufacturer :
Cost of equipment :
Name of Owner/ Division:
Equipment number as per register of Movable Assets:
Sl Maintenance schedules Transfer *Details and validity of Special
no. from remarks
division /
offices
Date Type Cost of Replacements Tax Insurance Pollution
of of repair Certificate
repairs repair

465
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 2900E

8.2.1 Goods Received Sheet (As per Para 2913.2)

Division …………………………………..
Subdivision ………………………………..
Section ……………………………………. Name of supplier………………………… .
Sl Date Invoice/ Purchase/Supply order Description of Stores Quantity Unit Rate Amount
No R.R.No No Date materials code No Received On check measurement
1 2 3 4 5 6 7A 7B 8 9 10

APPENDIX XII (b) …..(Concld)

Incidental Amount including Stores Ledger Reference to payment voucher or adjustment to debit Remarks including result of test
charges incidental charges Folio No No Date check by superior officers
11 12 14 15A 15B 16

Dated signature and Designation of

the Officer entering measurements
1. A separate GRS should be prepared in respect of goods purchased from one supplier.
2. The articles falling under each sub-head of stock should be grouped together or entered on separate sheets.
3. The details of measurements, check measurements, incidental charges and immediate payments will be recorded on the reverse.
4. If GR sheets are prepared for part supplies reference will be made to previous G.R.S also in column 4.
5. Column 11 – Extra items as are payable to the suppl ier or as deductible towards expenses incurred by the department on the supplier’s account on the basis
of the conditions of the supply order or contract is intended to be included in this column.

466
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 2900F

8.2.2 Register of goods received sheet (As per Para

2913.2)
Division……………………………………..Subdivision………………………………
Date of Serial No of Name and designation Signature of Date of Remarks
issue Booklet of the officer to whom the officer to receipt in the
issued whom issued Division
1 2 3 4 5 6

Appendix 2900G

8.2.3 Stores Indent (As per Para 2913.4)

No…………….Stores indent on ………………………..Division
Date…………..Name of work/job………………………………
Division………………Name of contractor from whom value r ecoverable…………………..
Subdivision……………………………….
Head of Account……………………………….
S Description Cod Quantity Quantity issued Unit Rat Valu Remar
L of article e indented e e ks
N No In In In In
o figures words figure words
s
1 2 3 4(a) 4(b) 5(a) 5(b) 6 7 8 9

Received the articles as per column 5 (b). Please deliver the articles to the person whose
specimen signature is given below.
Name and address of the person to whom the
article are to be delivered …………………. …………………………………………….
……………………………………………. Signature (with date) of the Indenter

(Specimen Signature of (Designation)……………………………..

the above person) ……………………………………………

…………………………………………….
…………………………………………….

Passed for issue (furnish details of the items and quantities not passed as per column 4)

Signature of Divisional /
Sub divisional Officer

Issued on…………………. Received the quantity as per Ledger folio No………..

and entered in column 5 (b) Sl No of item …………
Register……………………… ………………………. Initials of …………….
Gate pass No & Date Signature (with date) of the
…………………………….. authorised person 8.2.3.1 Ledger
Signature of Assistant Keeper
Executive Engineer
Store Keeper Divisional
Accountant

467
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 2900H

8.2.4 Stores Issue Receipt (As per Para 2913.4)

To
The Executive Engineer,
……………….Division
…………………………

Unstamped Receipt for Unstamped Receipt for Materials Unstamped Receipt for
Materials Issued Issued Materials Issued
Copy for Executive Engineer Copy to be returned to
Office copy ......... …………. Division original office by Executive
......... …………. Division ..................... Subdivision Engineer
..................... Subdivision Book No ...... Receipt No ...... ......... …………. Division
Book No ...... Receipt No Subdivision........ Date .............. ..................... Subdivision
....... I hereby acknowledge receipt from Book No ...... Receipt No
...................……..of the materials .......
Subdivision........ Date noted on the reverse for the work of The receipt has been posted
.............. ........................ as per agreement in ………………Contractor’s
Name of No .......... and bind myself not ledger
contractor…………… to use the same for any other Vol……….Folio………..
purposes and the same shall remain with alterations noted
Name of work ..................... the property of Government until overleaf
Agreement No ...................

Stores Indent No .... Date …. used for the said work. no alterations
on ................ Division. I shall also accept such corrections
in rates noted overleaf as are found
necessary, in accordance with that Executive Engineer
terms of the agreement.
Signature of the Contractor Divisional Accountant
Signature of Issuer (Dated)
Initials of Junior Engineer (in (to be returned to the Issuer)
charge of work) issuing the
materials.
Note: Rate to be noted should Note: Rate to be noted should be
be the recovery rate as per the recovery rate as per agreement
agreement
Obtained from Obtained from ………….Stores as Obtained from
………….Stores as per Indent per Indent No……Dated…… ………….Stores as per
No……Dated…… Sl. No… Indent No……Dated……
Sl. No… Particulars Sl. No…
Particulars Standard unit Particulars
Standard unit Quantity (In figures) Standard unit
Quantity (In figures) (In words) Quantity (In figures)
(In words) Rate (In words)
Rate Value Rate
Value Submitted to Executive Engineer, Value

Subdivisional Officer
Posted into Contractor’s ledger
Vol…….Folio……..

Executive Engineer
………..Division

468
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix 2900I

8.2.5 Stock Ledger (As per Para 2918.1)

Date nature of Identifying Opening Receipt Total Issues Closing Counted Differences condition dated dated
article Number Balances as (4+5) upto date book balance balance (Column8- of the initials of initials of
per last as on 9) article custodian the stock
Physical (Column 6- of stores Verifier
Verification 7)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13)

Appendix 2900J

Progress report (As per Para 2918.1)

Progress Report of Stock Verifier Shri…………………………….. as on ………………………..
Name of Identifying Name of Book Balance Counted balance Condition Difference Explanation of
Project Store Number Article of Article Stores Officer
date Quantity Value date quantity Value Excess Shortage
Quantity Value Quantity Value

Custodian of Stores or Store Officer

Stock Verifier
Appendix 2900K

2918.3
8.2.6 Register of dismantled materials (As per Para )
Division…………………………….
Subdivision……………………….…
Sl Date Reference to Full Opening Quanti Tota Reference to its Quantity Closing Dated Date of Remarks
N of No and page particulars of balance ty l disposal whether issued or balance initials of verification of
o receipt No of materials receiv by write off or disposed the Assistant balances and
measurement giving size ed transfer to other off Engineer by whom
book etc if any works verified
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

469
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

GOVERNMENT OF KERALA
PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT

QC/QA MANUAL FOR

MINOR AND MEDIUM WORKS

470
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

CONTENTS

1. Abbreviations

2. Introduction

3. Quality system

4. General Quality Requirements

Appendix A (Test Frequencies)

Appendix B (Summary of MORT&H Requirements)

Appendix C (Concrete Requirements)

471
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

SECTION 1

ABBREVIATIONS

AE Assistant Engineer

AEE Assistant Executive Engineer PWD

BM Bituminous Macadam

BUSG Built Up Spray Grout

CE Chief Engineer PWD

EE Executive Engineer PWD

GoK Government of Kerala

IPC Interim Payment Certificate (Certification of each bill)

IRC Indian Roads Congress

JE Junior Engineer/Overseer

MORT&H Ministry of Road Transport and Highways

OGL Original Ground Level

PCC Portland Cement Concrete

PWD Public Works Department Kerala

QA Quality Assurance

QC Quality Control

RCC Reinforced Cement Concrete

SDBC Semi Dense Bituminous Macadam

SE Superintending Engineer

WBM Water Bound Macadam

WMM Wet Mix Macadam

472
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

SECTION – 2

INTRODUCTION

This Quality Control/Quality Assurance manual is designed for projects for minor works
as a foundation for the development of QA as set out in IRC SP57.

Quality Assurance is defined as the process to ensure the product is “fit for the purpose
for which it was intended”

Quality Control is “the techniques/tests for controlling quality”

In this manual the parties to the Contract are required to ensure that documentary
evidence of conformance to the contract is demonstrated.

The general principle to be adopted is that the Contractor is to provide documentary

evidence that work conforms to the Contract and the Engineer is to check and randomly
audit the evidence supplied by the Contractor.

The Contractor is required to meet the prequalification requirements of the PWD for the
type of work specified.

Quality Control/Quality Assurance should not only lead to improved quality and
uniformity but should also lead to more economical utilization of materials and a
reduction in cost to the contractor, user costs, cost of vehicle operation, transportation
and maintenance. The basic idea is that the contractor has to perform the necessary
tests and inspection to ensure that all the works in road construction meet the
specification. The Contractor is responsible for the work from the beginning till the final
acceptance of all the works and the expiry of any defects liability period.

Quality is required at all stages of the project whether it is buildings, bridges, small
culverts, design, traffic control, safety etc.

For instance, the stages of control in a road project are

(a) Preliminaries
(b) during earthwork
(c) sub base courses
(d) base courses
(e) surface courses.

473
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

During the preliminary stage the contractor is to take such steps as are necessary to
comply with environmental, social and safety requirements of the job.

Quality materials and workmanship are required at all stages.

Similar stages of construction can be set for buildings, bridges, and other types of construction.

Bitumen carpet overlaying and construction along with sprayed bitumen chip sealing are
specialist procedures and require specialist equipment and skills.

Concrete works are considered separately under this quality manual

The Contractor is responsible to obtain test results to verify the work complies with the
specification. Test results which show material and workmanship comply with the
specification are to be submitted with each bill and will be scrutinized for conformance
before an Interim Payment Certificate is issued.

SECTION – 3

QUALITY SYSTEM

The items covered by this manual are an introduction to Quality Assurance as defined in
IRC SP57.

3.1. Quality System

The Contractor shall have in place a documentary system which verifies the works
conform to the Specification

3.2. Contract Review

The Contractor shall demonstrate understanding of the Contract requirements and

record resolution of any ambiguities or differences in a timely manner

3.3. Design Control

The Contractor shall check that the design of any temporary or permanent structures
proposed by the Contractor (formwork, concrete mixes, traffic control, detours, etc) comply
with the relevant Code of Practice and submit to the Engineer for approval. Approval by the
Engineer does not absolve the Contractor from liability for the design submitted.

474
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

3.4. Document Control

The Engineer and the Contractor shall have in place a satisfactory document control
system that records activities of the works, correspondence, all contract documentation.
All Contract documents, Drawings, variations, instructions, claims and correspondence
will be kept in an easily retrievable and secure system.

3.5. Purchasing

Purchased products shall have documentary evidence to verify conformance with the Contract.
Current complying manufacturer’s or supplier’s certificates shall be acceptable as evidence of
conformance. In the absence of manufacturers certificates sampling must be done and test
results provided. For Minor Works up to 15 lakhs no testing is required for materials purchased
from PWD approved sources or where manufacturers certificate supplied.

3.6. Control of Customer (Employer) Supplied Product

The Contractor shall have in place means to ensure that product supplied by the
Employer is handled in accordance with the specification

3.7. Traceability

Documentary evidence of where supplied products are incorporated in the works shall
be kept ( e.g. Location of materials in the job can be recorded on delivery bills).

3.8. Process Control

The Contractor shall provide documentary evidence of the work processes to be used in
carrying out the works. These shall be in the form of job instructions or manuals which
describe the procedures for completing the works.

3.9. Inspection and Testing

Test results shall be submitted with each bill to verify the works comply with the
specification. In the absence of test results, cover up work shall not proceed.
Measurement of works shall be jointly agreed between Contractor and PWD.

3.10. Control of Inspection, Measuring and Testing Equipment

The Contractor will ensure that all equipment used to construct the work is calibrated and
accurate. The Contractor will ensure that testing is carried out by laboratories PWD approved.

475
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

3.11. Inspection and Test status (Materials and Completed works)

The Contractor shall document all tests and non conformances

3.12. Control of non-conforming work

The Contractor shall document and ensure that non- conforming work is:
• Reworked to meet the specification
o (ie low compaction rectified by further rolling)
• Accepted with or without repair with concession
o (ie material accepted with a deduction in payment)
• Re-graded for alternative use
o (ie material that is unsuitable for pavement utilized in embankment where
it conforms)
• Rejected and scrapped
o (ie material that has no use anywhere is removed and taken from site)

3.13. Corrective and Preventive Actions

The Contractor shall assess non-conforming work and ensure a process of corrective
and preventive measures to eliminate the root cause of non-conformances.

3.14. Handling storage Packaging, Preservation and Delivery

The Contractor shall manage storage of goods as per the specification

3.15. Control of Quality records

The Contractor shall maintain a secure documentation system to enable Quality records
to be retrieved as necessary.

3.16. Internal Quality Audits

The Contractor shall carry out regular self-checking to ensure the documentation and
work procedures and the works comply with the Contract and Specification

3.17. Training

The Contractor shall implement training programs to ensure all employees and
subcontractors are skilled for the work which they are to perform.

476
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

3.18. Safety, Environment and Social

The Contractor shall carry out the work in a safe and environmentally responsible
manner in accordance with the Contract and Specification. Safety and Environmental
checklists and self-checking shall be conducted and documented on a regular basis.

SECTION - 4

GENERAL QUALITY REQUIREMENT

All work shall comply with the requirements of the Contract and be in accordance with
the specification and the relevant clauses of the latest edition of the MORT&H
Specifications for Roads and Bridge Works. Where there are Special Conditions these
shall take precedence over MORT&H specifications

The Contractor will carry out the works in a responsible and orderly fashion with least disruption
to the public and in accordance with the Safety, Environmental, and Social requirements of the
Contract. Adequate provision in accordance with the Contract requirements shall be provided for
the safe movement of traffic and people through the work site. Barrier boards, traffic signs, traffic
bollards and mesh etc. in accordance with IRC SP55 for temporary signs and IRC SP67 for
permanent signs shall be provided to maintain safety for the public.

The Contractor shall arrange and pay for tests carried out at the frequencies specified in
Appendix A . Test results must accompany the relevant bill to verify that work completed
complies with the requirements of the Contract. Tests shall be carried out at laboratories
approved by the Engineer which have calibrated equipment and skilled personnel
capable of carrying out the desired test in accordance with the relevant IS Codes.

4.1 Minor Works up to 15 lakhs:

Provided materials used in the works are purchased from PWD approved sources no
tests are required.

4.2 For Medium Works 15 Lakhs to 100 Laks:

For medium works the following tests are required.

1. Grading of Aggregate.
2. Atterberg’s Limits( Plasticity Index)
3. CBR for subgrade.
4. Marshall Tests on asphalt.

477
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

5. Concrete Compressive Strength – Slump.

6. Field Density of Soils.
Where available current manufacture’s or suppliers certificates are acceptable. Testing
frequencies shall be as per Appendix ‘A’

4.3. Preliminaries:

Prior to starting work on site the Contractor shall demonstrate understanding of the
scope of the work by submitting a program in a form approved by the Engineer showing
that the work will be completed within the Contract period.

4.4. Earthworks

The Contractor will submit Natural Ground Level (Initial level) of existing surface for
approval by the Engineer. Contractor shall not start the work until after the level of
existing surface is approved by the engineer . Submission of underlying levels after
commencement of subsequent layers will not be acceptable.

4.5. Sub-base, Base and Wearing course

Sub-base, base and wearing course will be constructed in accordance with the terms of
the Contract and imported material shall be obtained from sources approved by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall provide copies of test results with each relevant bill to
verify that all material used and workmanship complies with the specification

4.6. Concrete

Concrete shall conform to the requirements of the contract and the Contractor shall
supply test results with each relevant bill to verify concrete conforms to the Contract and
specification requirements.

4.7. Maintenance (Performance based Contracts)

Where maintenance is carried out by Performance Based Contracts the maintenance

shall be carried out at the specified intervention levels and the Contractor and Engineer
shall carry out joint inspections prior to each relevant bill to verify that maintenance is
within the agreed intervention level and rectification standard. (ie potholes >150mm
diameter to be repaired withinspecified time).

In other cases, ie for schedule of rates contracts, the maintenance shall be at the agreed
jointly measured quantities priced at the Contract schedule of rates

478
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix A (Testing Frequencies)

A.1. Embankment/ Subgrade

Engineer’s Audit Check

Item Method Frequency Specification
Frequency
Plasticity IS 2720 2 tests per <45% To check at least 15% of
Index Part 5 3000 m³ the tests during
execution.
Liquid Limit IS 2720 2 tests per <70% To check at least 15% of
Part 5 3000 m³ the tests during
execution.
Free - IS 2720 As required <50% To check at least 15% of
Swelling Part 5 the tests during
Index execution.
Maximum IS 2720 2 tests per 1.52gm/cc(min) To check at least15% of
Dry Density Part 8 3000 m³ for embankment the tests during
(Proctor) 1.75gm/cc(min) execution.
for subgrade
CBR Value IS 2720 1 tests per >5% for To check at least 15% of
Part 16 3000 m³ embankment the tests during
>8%for execution.
subgrade
Field Density IS 2720 2 tests per 97%for subgrade To check at least 15% of
Part 8 3000 m³ 95%for the tests during
embankment execution.

A.2. Granular Sub-Base

Engineer’s Audit Check

Item Method Frequency Specification Frequency

Liquid Limit IS 2720 1 tests per <25% To check at least 15% of the
Part 5 200 m³ tests during execution
Plasticity IS 2720 1 tests per <6% To check at least 15% of the
index Part 5 200 m³ tests during execution.
10% Fines BS 812, 1 tests per >50 KN To check at least 15% of the
Value Part III Source tests during execution.
Water IS 2727 1 tests per <2% To check at least 15% of the
Absorption Part 7 Source tests during execution.

479
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Maximum IS 2720 2 tests per - To check at least 15% of the

Dry Density Part 8 1000 m³ tests during execution.
CBR Value IS 2720 1 tests per As per Grading To check at least 15% of the
Part 16 3000 m³ tests during execution.
Sieve IS 2386 1 tests per As shown in To check at least 15% of the
Analysis Part 1 100 m³ table A.3 tests during execution.
below

A.3. Grading requirement for Granular Sub-Base

Sieve size Specification limits (percent passing)

(mm) Grading I Grading II Grading III
75 100 - -
53 80-100 100 -
25.5 55-90 70-100 100
9.5 35-65 50-80 65-95
4.75 25-65 40-65 50-80
2.36 20-40 30-50 40-65
0.425 10-25 15-25 20-35
0.075 3-10 3-10 3-10
CBR 30 25 20

A.4. Wet Mix Macadam&Non Bituminous Base Course

Item Method Frequency Specification Engineer’s Audit Check

Frequency
Los Angeles IS 2386, 1 test per 200 <40% To check at least 15% of
3
abrasion Part 4 m the tests during
execution
Combined IS 2386 1 test per 200 <30% To check at least 15% of
3
flakiness index Part 1 m the tests during
execution
Atterberg IS 2720, 1 test per 100 - To check at least 15% of
3
limits Part 5 m the tests during
execution
Plasticity index IS 2720 1 tests per <6% To check at least 15% of
Part 5 200 m³ the tests during
execution.

480
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Water IS 2727 1 tests per <2% To check at least 15% of

Absorption Part 7 Source the tests during
execution.
Maximum Dry IS 2720 2 tests per - To check at least 15% of
Density Part 8 1000 m³ the tests during
execution.
Sieve Analysis IS 2386 1 tests per As shown in To check at least 15% of
Part 1 100 m³ MORT&H table the tests during
400-11 execution.
Field Density IS 2720 1 tests per 98% of Maximun To check at least 15% of
2
Part 28 500 m Dry the tests during
Density execution.

A.5. Bituminous Macadam &Other Bituminous Base Course

Item Method Frequency Specification Engineer’sAudit Check

Frequency
Quality of Binder IS 73, 1 tests per 60/70 unless To check at least 15%
IS 217, lot otherwise of tests during
IS 8887 Specified execution
Los Angeles IS 2386, 1 test per 50 <40 To check at least 15%
3
abrasion Part 4 m of the tests during
execution
Flakiness and IS 2386 1 test per 50 <30% To check at least 15%
3
Elongation Part 1 m of the tests during
execution
Soundness IS 2386, 1 test per 50 <12 for NgSO4 To check at least 15%
3
Part 5 m <18% for MgSO4 of the tests during
execution
Stripping test IS 6241 1 test per >95% To check at least 15%
3
100 of the tests during
execution.
Absorption IS 2720 3 tests per <2% To check at least 15%
Part 8 Source of the tests during
execution.
Grading of IS 2386 1 test per 25 As per job mix To check at least 50%
3
Aggregates Part 1 m formula of the tests during
execution.
Density of ASTM- 1 test per As per MORT&H To check at least 15%
2
compacted layer D 1559 250 m Section 900 of the tests during
execution.

481
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

A.6. Concrete

Item Method Frequency Specification Engineer’s Audit Check

Frequency
Aggregate IS 2386 1 tests per <30% To check at least 15% of
Impact Value lot tests during execution
Los Angeles IS 2386, 1 test per 50 <40% To check at least 15% of
3
abrasion Part 4 m the tests during
execution
Flakiness and IS 2386 1 test per <35% To check at least 15% of
Elongation Part 1 source the tests during
execution
Specific Gravity IS 2727 1 test per - To check at least 15% of
Part 8 Source the tests during
execution
Absorption IS 2720 1 test per <2% To check at least 15% of
Part 8 Source the tests during
execution.
Soundness IS 2386, 1test per <12 for NgSO4 To check at least 15% of
Part 5 source <18% for MgSO4 the tests during
execution
Grading of IS 2386 1 test per As shown To check at least 15% of
Aggregates Part1 source In the tests during
Appendix C execution.
Compressive IS 516 As per the As per the table As per the table below
Strength table below below

Compressive strength of the concrete shall be tested in accordance with IS 516. Three test
specimens of 150mm cubes (cubes shall be prepared as per IS 1199) shall be made, cured
and tested at the age of 28 days for compressive strength in each samples. The minimum
frequency of sampling of concrete of each grade shall be as per the following table.

Quantity of Concrete No. of Samples Acceptance Criteria

3
in Work, M
1-5 1 • The mean strength determined from
any group of four consecutive samples
should exceed the specified
characteristic compressive strength.
• Strength of any sample is not less than
the specified characteristic compressive
strength minus 3 Mpa.

482
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix B (Road Works)

Specification – General requirements (Refer to relevant clauses of latest edition of

MORT&H Specifications for Roads and Bridges for full descriptions)

List of typical equipment that needs to be checked/calibrated

Item What needs to be checked Comments

Level Line of collimation
Measuring tapes Accuracy against standard
Rollers Drums are smooth and round
PTR rollers Tyre pressure is correct
Graders Blades are straight
Pavers Boards are flat segments are
aligned and angle of attack
correct hydraulics smooth
Trucks Mechanically sound, tyres at
correct pressure
Thermometers Checked against standard
Weigh-Scales Calibrated with standard
weights
Laboratory equipment Must all be checked against
standards (see IRC codes)

B.1. Requirements of Materials for Earth Work

The material used for embankment/subgrade construction can be from roadway

excavation or from borrow pits.

The essential physical requirements of embankment/subgrade materials are(a) size of

coarse material: max 75 mm for embankment and max 50mm for subgrade (b)liquid
limit: max 70% (c) free swelling index: max 50% (d) plasticity index: max 45% (e)
maximum dry density(MDD):minimum 1.52 gm/cc (f) CBR value: minimum 5% for
embankment and 8%minimum for subgrade (g) thickness of each compacted layer should
not be more than 200 mm.(h) field density: 95% of MDD for embankment layers and
97% of MDD for subgrade layers.

B.2. Requirements Of Materials For Sub-Base

The material to be used for sub-base work shall be natural sand, moorum, gravel, crushed
stone or combinations thereof depending upon the grading requirement for that refer
either Table No 400-1 or Table No 400-2 of MORT&H specifications.

483
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

The physical requirements of the materials for sub-base are (a) 10 per cent fines value
in soaked condition: min 50 KN (b) water absorption: max 2%.

B.3. Base Course

Physical Requirements of Aggregates (WBM)

The requirements for aggregates used are (a) Los Angeles abrasion value :max 40%
(b)Aggregate impact value max 30% (c) combined Flakiness and Elongation index : max
30%.

The grading requirement of the aggregate used is given below

TABLE – B.3.1

Grading Sieve Sieve size % by weight

No range (mm) passing
1 90-45 125 100
90 90-100
63 25-60
45 0-15
22.4 0-5
2 63-45 90 100
63 90-100
53 25-75
45 0-15
22.4 0-5
3 53-22.4 63 100
53 95-100
45 65-90
22.4 0-10
11.2 0-5

For WMM grading refer Table 400-11 of MORT&H specification.

Aggregates with bricks, kankar, laterite, etc. which get softened in presence of water shall
be tested for impact value under hot conditions in accordance with IS 5640. Flakiness
index and elongation index shall be enforced only in case of crushed broken stone and
crushed slag and the combined flakiness and elongation shall not exceed 30%.

The screenings used to fill the voids have to satisfy gradation given below. When gravel
is used the liquid limit should be less than 20 and the plasticity index less than 6%.
Percent passing 75-micron sieve should not be more than10%.

484
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

TABLE –B.3.2

Grade Size of Sieve size % By weight

classification screening(mm) (mm) passing
A 13.2 13.2 100
11.2 95-100
5.6 15-35
180mc 0-10
B 11.2 11.2 100
5.6 90-100
180mc 15-35

B.4. Bituminous Macadam

The physical requirement of aggregate used for bituminous macadam are (a)Los
Angeles abrasion value max 40% (b) aggregate impact value : max 30% (c) flakiness
and elongation (total):max 30% (d) water absorption : max 2% (e) soundness : max loss
of weight 12% for sodium sulphate and 18% for magnesium sulphate.

The grading requirement as follows

TABLE –B.4.1

IS sieve designation Per cent by weight passing sieve

Grading-1 Grading-2
45.0 mm 100

26.5 mm 75-100 100

22.4 mm 60-95 75-100

11.2 mm 30-55 50-85

5.6 mm 15-35 20-40

2.8 mm 5-20 5-20

90 microns 0-5 0-5

Bitumen content for pre mixing shall be 3 to 3.5 per cent by weight of total mix. The
maximum compacted layer thickness shall be 100 mm. Bituminous macadam mix shall
be prepared in a hot mix plant of adequate capacity.

485
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Temperature

For binder at the time of mixing : 150-163 Degrees

For aggregate at the time of mixing : 155-163 Degrees

For mix at the plant : 130-160 Degrees

For laying at site : 120-160 Degrees

Rolling operation shall be completed before temperature of mix falls below 100 degrees.

B.5. Bituminous Penetration Macadam

The physical requirements of aggregates shall be the same as that of bituminous macadam.

The grading requirement as follows

TABLE –B.5.1

IS Sieve Designation Per cent by weight passing sieve

For 50 mm compacted For 75mm compacted
thickness thickness
Coarse Key aggregate Coarse Key aggregate
aggregate aggregate
63 mm 100
53 mm
45 mm 100 58-82
26.5 mm 37-72 100
22.4 mm 100 5-27 50-75
13.2 mm 2-20 50-75
11.2 mm 5-25
5.6 mm 5-25
2.8 mm 0-5 0-5 0-5 0-5

Quantities of materials required for 10 sq.m area for bituminous penetration macadam
is given below.

TABLE –B.5.2

Compacted Binder Coarse Key aggregate

thickness Straight run bitumen aggregate
50 mm 50 kg 0.60 cu.m 0.15 cu.m
75 mm 68 kg 0.90 cu.m 0.18 cu.m

486
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Dry and clean coarse aggregate shall be spread uniformly and evenly at the rate specified by the
above table. After the coarse aggregate has been rolled and checked, the bituminous binder shall
be applied at specified temperature, the rate of application given in the above table.

Immediately after the first penetration of bitumen, key aggregate in a clean and dry state
shall be spread uniformly over the surface by means of an approved mechanical spreader at
the rate specified in the above table and rolled in accordance with the specification.

B.6. Seal Coat

Seal coat of two types (see MORT&H clause 513)

(a) Type-A- Chip Sealing seal coat comprising of an application of a

layer of bituminous binder followed by a cover of stone chippings.

(b) Type-B- Premixed seal coat comprising of thin application fine

aggregate premixed with bituminous binder.

Physical requirement of aggregate

Type-A- the aggregate shall satisfy all the physical requirements of aggregate

for bituminous macadam except for water absorption which shall be less than 1%. Stone
chippings shall be of 6.7 mm size defined as 100% passing through 11.2 mm sieve and
retained on 2.36 mm sieve. The quantity used for spreading shall be 0.09cum/10sq.m.

NOTE : The contractor is responsible to ensure that the surface seal coat does not strip, ravel,
flush or bleed. Spray rates for bitumen & spread rates for aggregate chips must be adjusted to
allow for the effects of traffic and size and quality of aggregate chip etc.

Type-B- The aggregate shall pass through 2.36 mm sieve and be retained on 180-
micron sieve .The quantity used for premixing shall be 0.06 cum/10sq.m.

B.7. The spray rate of bitumen for bituminous works is detailed below

a) For Tack Coat

Normal bituminous surface : 2 to 2.5 kg/10 sq.m

Dry/hungry surface : 3.5 to 4 kg/10 sq.m

Note : There is no need for tack coat on freshly laid bituminous surfaces if overlaid on same day

without opening to traffic.

487
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

b) Requirement of sprayed bituminous chip sealing for surface dressing

Spray rates for bitumen and spread rates for aggregate chips depends on
traffic, aggregate chip size, bitumen temperature, and penetration etc and shall
be checked with the Engineer before sprayed chip sealing is attempted

B. 8. Built Up Spray Grout (See IRC47)

The grading requirement is given below are percentage by weight passing the sieve.

TABLE –B-7.1
IS Sieve (mm) Coarse Aggregate Key aggregate
(mm) (mm)
53 100
26.5 40-75
22.4 100
13.2 0-20 40-75
5.6 0-20
2.8 0-5 0-5

Requirement of bitumen

First : 15 kg/10sq.m
Second : 15 kg/10sq.m

488
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Coarse aggregate is spread uniformly at the rate of 0.5-cum/10sq.m areas over a tack coat and

inder is applied at 15kg/10sq.m area. Immediately after key aggregate is spread

uniformly at 0.13 cum/10sq.m area and rolled, brooming. whenever required for
uniformity. Then the final surface has to be provided without delay .If there is delay, a
seal coat should be provided as an intermediate step.

B.9. Semi-Dense Bituminous Carpet (MORT&H Clause 508)

Aggregate water absorption 1% (max)

Binder content: Minimum 4% of mix by weight.

Gradation requirements are given below

TABLE –B.8.1
Grading 1 2
Nominal aggregate size 13mm 10mm
Layer Thickness 35 – 40mm 25 -30mm
+
IS Sieve (mm) Cumulative % by weight of total aggregate passing
19 100
13.2 90 - 100 100
9.5 70 - 90 90 - 100
4.75 35 - 51 35 - 51
2.36 24 - 39 24 - 39
1.18 15 - 30 15 - 30
0.3 9 - 19 9 - 19
0.075 3- 8 3-8
Bitumen content % by mass Min. 4.5 Min 5.0
#
of total Mix
Bitumen grade 65* 65*
Notes:

+ The combined aggregate grading shall not vary from the low limit on one sieve to the high
limit on the adjacent sieve.

# Determined by the Marshall method.

* Only in exceptional circumstances, 80/100 penetration grade may be used, as

approved by the Engineer.

Requirement of mix

Marshall stability : 8.2 KN

489
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

(samples compacted with 75 blows)

Marshall flow : 2 to 4 mm

Percent air voids in mix : 3 to 5

Percent air voids in aggregates : 13 to 15 (minimum)

(13.2 mm max size)

Percent voids in mineral aggregate

Filled with bitumen (VFB) : 65 to 78

Binder content : 4% minimum

Temperature of mix at laying : 120 to 160 degree C

490
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

o
Minimum temperature for rolling : 90 C

B.10. Field Tests for Bituminous works

No bituminous work shall be carried out when the atmospheric temperature is less than
16 degree and when the base or the construction materials are damp. The thickness of
the layer can be checked at frequent intervals after compaction by using pre decided
depth blocks. Rolling should continue till the roller marks are eliminated. Rolling
temperature should not fall below 100 degree.

It is necessary to conduct tests at frequent intervals during the work to find out whether
the prescribed bitumen quantity is being used in the work. For this a simple field
solubility test can be conducted (for field control) as follows.

About 1 kg of the mix is collected and weighted accurately. The sample is immersed and
flushed in either carbon di-sulphide or carbon tetra chloride liquids (both chemicals are
highly toxic and should only be used in a fully vented fume cupboard). Kerosene can
also be used for the purpose. Since the bitumen is completely soluble in these solvents
except for negligible quantities of impurities like carbon ,salts, etc. the weight of
aggregates without the bitumen can be obtained to arrive at the difference in weight,
which represents the weight of bitumen used in the mix.

B.11. Marshall Stability Test

The Marshall stability test shall be used to determine bituminous concrete mix
proportions and to test the product delivered to the job. Mix shall be approved by the
Engineer prior to use in the works.

B.12. Other Control Measures

The camber of the laid surface should be checked by means of camber board and spirit
level. Triangular wedges may be used for finding out depressions under a 3 metre
straight edge. Maximum allowable depression is 6mm. Templates may also be prepared
to check the cambers at different locations. The longitudinal alignment should be
checked by a straight edge and triangular wedge.

Traffic on the fresh surface should not be allowed until the mix has become cool
enough to prevent wheel-marking by traffic.

B.13. Standards of surface evenness

The surface unevenness should be controlled during construction so that both longitudinal and
cross profiles are simultaneously satisfied. The maximum number of undulations permitted in any
stretch of 300 meters length is 30 and in the cross profile ,it is 6 only. The details of the permitted
tolerance of surface regularity of pavement courses are given as under.

491
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Permitted tolerances of surface regularity for pavement courses

TABLE –B.10.1

No. Type of Max Longitudinal profile with 3m Cross Profile

construction permis straight edge
sible Max no of undulations Max permitted
undula permitted in 300m exceeding variations from
tions 18 12 10 6 mm specified profile
(mm) mm mm mm under camber
template
1 Earth subgrade 24 30 15
2 Sub base 15 30 12
3 WBM with 15 30 12
40mm 90mm
rolled
4 WBM with 20- 12 30 8
50mm of 40-
63mm size BPM
or BUSG
5 Surface dressing 12 20 8
6 Open graded 10 30 6
premix carpet
mix seal
surfacing
7 Bituminous 10 20 6
macadam
8 Semi dense 10 20 6
carpet
9 Asphalt 8 10 4
concrete

Surface level even-ness shall be in accordance with table 900-1 of MORT&H

Specification for Roads and Bridges. Surface even-ness may be measured by 3m
straight edge and wedges or by other acceptable means approved by the Engineer

B.14. Road Maintenance works

Depending on the standards of original construction, change in traffic intensity, climatic

conditions etc., maintenance of roads presents problems of different nature. A
systematic approach involving sequential operations is necessary.

492
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

The different items of maintenance works being carried out fall under three headings

• Routine maintenance: including filling up potholes, patches, repairs to side berms,

improving surface drainage, cleaning choked culverts, painting sign boards etc.
• Periodical maintenance: including surface renewals (ie re-gravelling) and
strengthening by way of providing overlays and
• Rectification/upgradation: including widening of roads, improvement of CD
works, improved drainage measures, providing new sign boards etc.

B.14.1.Routine Maintenance

B.14.1.1. Potholes

The occurrence of potholes is the most common phenomenon observed

especially after rains. These can be the result of but not limited to:

(a) ingress of water into the pavement through cracks,

(b) ingress of water by surface ponding because of insufficient surface camber or

superelevation.

(c) lack of bond between the surfacing and the base course and

(d)use of insufficient bitumen in the surfacing etc

Patching of these potholes has to be executed with care to make it successful.

The potholes should be cut as nearly as possible to the shape of a rectangle, sides
being vertical. All loose material shall be cleaned out. If there are deep pot holes
as a result of improper drainage or existence of soft pocket in the subgrade, these
should be dug out down to solid subgrade, and made good with well-graded
aggregate. In WBM roads, the potholes should be filled with aggregates and
screenings as specified for WBM and compacted with heavy hand rammers. In
asphalt roads, the bottom and sides of the potholes duly trimmed to a rectangular
shape should be coated with bitumen emulsion (using a sprayer or by brushing)
and filled with premix. The premix should be compacted in layers of 25mm at a
time, the hand rammers being dipped in water often so that the coated metal may
not stick to it. The finished surface should be compacted level with (not below,
but in any case no more than 5mm above) the surrounding road surface.

B.14.1.2. Shoulder Grading

Shoulders must be graded to slope away from the carriageway such that water can flow
across the shoulder and not run along the pavement adjacent to the carriageway.

493
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

B.14.1.3. Grass Cutting-Jungle Clearance

Grass shall be cut as per the specified interval debri removed from the site

B.14.1.4. Repairs To Headwalls Etc

Headwalls to culverts and masonry to side drains etc shall be repaired using the
same techniques as used in the original structure. Materials used shall be of
sound quality according to the specification and construction shall be in
accordance with the best practice techniques

B.14.2. Periodic Maintenance

Periodic maintenance such as BT overlays or Bitument Chip Sealing surface

dressing, or re-gravelling shall be carried out in accordance with the schedules
prepared by the RMMS system. Materials and workmanship shall be in
accordance with the Contract and Specification.

B.14.2.1. Profile Corrective Courses

Where the maximum profile corrective course thickness works out to not more
than 40 mm, it shall be done as an integral part of the average course. In other
cases, the profile corrective courses shall be provided as a separate layer.
Potholes have to be filled before profile corrective course is laid.

Profile corrective course shall be measured as volume compacted in position. The

volume shall be worked out by survey control, plotting the exact profile corrective
course as built up at site and super imposed on the existing pavement profile.

B.14.2.2. BT Carpet

BT Carpeting shall be in accordance with the specification and must be

manufactured at 150º C and laid in accordance with clauses B9 to B13.

B.15. Bituminous Testing:

The control tests to be conducted on bituminous works are listed below for ready reference.

1. SDBC: a) Quality of binder

b) Aggregate impact value

c) Flakiness and elongation index

d) Stability of mix – Marshall test for stability, flow value,

494
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Density and void content

e) Binder content

f) Temperature

2. BUSG/Bituminous penetration macadam

a) Quality of binder

b) Aggregate impact value

c) Flakiness and elongation index

d) Aggregate grading

e) Binder content

f) Temperature

3. Tack Coat/Prime Coat:

a) Quality of binder

b) Rate of spread

c) Temperature

4. Seal coat: a) Quality of binder

b) Aggregate impact value

c) Flakiness and elongation indices

d) Grading of aggregates

e)Average Least Dimension of Chips

f) Rate of spread

g) Temperature

5. Bitumimous Macadam:

a) Quality of binder

b) Aggregate impact value

c) Flakiness and elongation index

495
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

d) Stability of mix – Marshall test for stability, flow value,

Density and void content

e) Binder content

f) Temperature

g) Stripping value

h) Rate of spread of mixed material

i) Water absorption

k) Grading of aggregate

For all these following tests are also required

a) Temperature to be measured at regular intervals.

b) Depths of bituminous layers measured at regular intervals.
c) Tests to determine the bitumen content in a mix at regular intervals.
d) Check on camber and profile.

B.16. Acceptance

The Contractor is responsible for the sample collection, testing and submission of the test result
to the Engineer along with each relevant bill. After the submission of test result the Engineer may
authorise the payment of the work if it satisfies the specification requirement. If the test results do
not satisfy the specification requirement the Contractor shall propose a method of corrective
action for approval by the Engineer and provide conforming work at his own cost.

496
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Appendix C (Structural Works)

Concrete Works
C.1. Aggregate

a) Coarse aggregate

For plain and reinforced cement concrete works, coarse aggregate shall consist of clean,
hard, strong, dense. non-porous and durable pieces of crushed stone, crushed gravel or a
suitable combination thereof or other approved inert materials.

For every new source the following tests are to be conducted.

a) Aggregate impact value (max 30%)

b) Water absorption (max 2%)
c) Los Angels Abrasion Value (max 40%)
d) Grading of aggregate
e) Flakiness and Elongation index (max35%)
The grading requirement of coarse aggregate as follows

TABLE C-1.1

IS Sieve Size Per cent by weight passing the sieve

40 mm 20 mm 12.5 mm
63 mm 100
40 mm 95-100 100
20 mm 30-70 95-100 100
12.5 mm 90-100
10 mm 10-35 25-55 40-85
4.75 mm 0-5 0-10 0-10

b) Fine aggregate

The fineness modulus of fine aggregate shall neither be than 2.0 nor greater than 3.5.
The grading requirement are given below

TABLE C-1.2

IS Sieve Size Per cent by weight passing sieve

Zone-1 Zone-2 Zone-3

497
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

10 mm 100 100 100

4.75 mm 90-100 90-100 90-100

2.36 mm 60-95 75-100 85-100

1.18 mm 30-70 55-90 75-100

600 micron 15-34 35-59 60-79

300 micron 5-20 8-30 12-40

150 micron 0-10 0-10 0-10

C.2. Cement

Cement to be used in works shall be any of the following

a) Ordinary Portland cement, 33 grades confirming to IS 269
b) Ordinary Portland cement, 43 grade confirming to IS 8112
c) Ordinary Portland cement, 53 grade confirming to IS 12269

The manufacture’s test certificate can be accepted. The Contractor must produce the
manufacture’s certificate for the relevant bill. If it is not available contractor must do tests
at his own cost and submit the result to the Engineer.

C.3. Steel

The steel used for structural work shall confirm to Table 1000-3 of MORT&H
specifications.

The manufacture’s test certificate can be accepted. If it is not available contractor

must do tests at his own cost and submit the result to the Engineer.

C.4. Concrete mix design and sampling

Prior to construction, the contractor shall prepare a design mix in the case of ‘Design Mix
Concrete’ or prepare a nominal mix in the case of ‘Nominal Mix Concrete’ and obtain approval
from the Engineer before use. For PCC and small RCC works nominal mix design can be
adopted, but for major RCC works and for the concreting of load bearing structures a design mix
must be followed based on the criteria in clause 1704 of MORT&H Roads and Bridges
Specifications. For the testing and characteristic strength refer Table1700 MORT&H specification.

498
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

3
One set of sample (6nos of cube) shall be taken for every 50m or for the day’s work.

C.5. Formwork

All formwork and the reinforcement contained in it shall be cleaned and made free from
standing water, dust, snow or ice immediately before placing concrete.

C.6. Mixing, Transporting and Placing of Concrete

Concrete shall be mixed either in a concrete mixer or in batching plant as mentioned in the
contract or approved by the Engineer. Hand mixing shall not be permitted. The mixer or plant
shall be at an approved location considering the properties of the mixers and transportation
arrangement available with contractor. The mixer plant shall be approved by the Engineer.

Concrete shall not be freely dropped in to place from a height exceeding 1.5 m.
Concrete shall be deposited in horizontal layers to a compacted depth of not more than
450 mm and vibrated to eliminate honeycomb.

C.7. Curing

Exposed surfaces of concrete shall be kept continuously in a damp or wet condition or

by covering a layer of sacks, canvas, hessian or similar materials and shall be kept
constantly wet for a period not less than 14 days from the date of placing of concrete.

C.8. Finishing

Immediately after the removal of forms, exposed bars or bolts if any shall be cut inside
the concrete and resulting holes filled with cement mortar.

C.9. Acceptance

The Contractor is responsible for the sample collection, testing and submission of test
result to the Engineer with each relevant bill. After the submission of test result the
Engineer can authorize the payment for the work if it satisfies the specification
requirement. If the test results do not satisfy the specification requirement the Contractor
shall propose a method of corrective action for approval by the Engineer, rectify the non-
conformance, and provide conforming work at no extra charge.

499
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

GOVERNMENT OF KERALA
PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT

QC/QA MANUAL FOR

MAJOR WORKS

500
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

INDEX

1. ABBREVIATIONS
2.1. INTRODUCTION
2.2. POLICY STATEMENT
2.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS – LEVEL OF CROSS CHECKING
2.4. FIELD LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
2.4. 1 TESTING FREQUENCIES
2.5. CONTROL OF MATERIALS
2.6. METHODOLOGY AND CHECKLISTS – PROJECT QUALITY PLAN
2.6.1. METHODOLOGY FOR ROAD WORKS
2.6. 2 EXCAVATION
2.6. 3 BASE PREPARATION
2.6.4 EMBANKMENT FILLS
2.6.5 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
2.6.6. GRANULAR SUBBASE
2.6.7. WET MIX MACADAM
2.6.8. DENSE BITUMINOUS MACADAM
2.6.9. BITUMINOUS CONCRETE WEARING COURSE
2.6.10. BACKFILLING, COMPACTION, RUBBLE PACKING
2.6.11. FORMWORK
2.6.12. REINFORCEMENT CUTTING, BENDING, FIXING
2.6.13. CONCRETING GENERAL

501
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

SECTION 1

ABBREVIATIONS

AE Assistant Engineer
AEE Assistant Executive Engineer PWD
BM Bituminous Macadam
BUSG Built Up Spray Grout
CE Chief Engineer PWD
DBM Dense Bituminous Macadam
EE Executive Engineer PWD
GoK Government of Kerala
GSB Granular Sub Base
IPC Interim Payment Certificate (Certification of each bill)
IRC Indian Roads Congress
JE Junior Engineer/Overseer
MDD Maximum Dry Density
MORT&H Ministry of Road Transport and Highways
NGL Natural Ground Level
NMC Natural Moisture Content
OGL Original Ground Level
OMC Optimum Moisture Content
PCC Portland Cement Concrete
PWD Public Works Department Kerala
QA Quality Assurance
QC Quality Control
RCC Reinforced Cement Concrete
SDBC Semi Dense Bituminous Macadam
SE Superintending Engineer
WBM Water Bound Macadam
WMM Wet Mix Macadam

502
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

SECTION 2

INTRODUCTION

PROCEDURE 2.1

A good road network has an important bearing on the economic growth of a country.
Consistency in the quality of road and the incorporation of quality as major attribute in the
organization entrusted with the task of road construction, are of great importance. Quality of a
product or service has many aspects and quality should conform to the customer’s
requirements, and this has become a focal point in project management.

In order to achieve the aim of building safe, serviceable, durable and economic roadways, the
road structure should meet certain requirements. The characteristics that a structure should
possess to fulfil these requirements have to be specified. The code of practice and the contract
documents strive to achieve this by way of defining design criteria, practical rules, technical
specifications, testing and acceptance criteria and workmanship. All these strategies implicitly
depend upon human skills for their successful and reliable application which, eventually,
determines the quality of roads and bridges. The basic desire to produce quality work is
essential in the minds of all those connected with road construction/maintenance projects.

Quality Assurance is defined as all the planned and systematic activities implemented within the
Quality System and demonstrated as needed, to provide adequate confidence that an object will
fulfil the requirements. The Quality Management Manual provides a base document outlining
policy, procedures, responsibilities, compliance, acceptance criteria and documentation.

The Contractor shall appoint a Quality Assurance Representative with responsibilities as

outlined in Section 2.6

2.1.1 Quality System

The Contractor shall have in place a documentary system which verifies the works conform to
the Specification

2.1.2. Contract Review

The Contractor shall demonstrate understanding of the Contract requirements and record
resolution of any ambiguities or differences in a timely manner

2.1.3 Design Control

503
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

The Contractor shall check that the design of any temporary or permanent structures proposed
by the Contractor (formwork, concrete mixes, traffic control, detours, etc) comply with the
relevant Code of Practice and submit to the Engineer for approval. Approval by the Engineer
does not absolve the Contractor from liability for the design submitted.

2.1.4. Document Control

The Engineer and the Contractor shall have in place a satisfactory document control system
that records activities of the works, correspondence, all contract documentation. All variations,
instructions, claims and correspondence will be kept in an easily retrievable and secure system.

2.1.5. Purchasing

Purchased products shall have documentary evidence to verify conformance with the Contract.
Current complying manufacturer’s certificates shall be acceptable as evidence of conformance.
In the absence of manufacturers certificates sampling must be done and test results provided.

2.1.6. Control of Customer (Employer) Supplied Product

The Contractor shall have in place means to ensure that product supplied by the Employer is
handled in accordance with the specification

2.1.7. Traceability
Documentary evidence of where supplied products are incorporated in the works shall be kept

2.1.8. Process Control

The Contractor shall provide documentary evidence of the work processes to be used in
carrying out the works. These shall be in the form of job instructions or manuals which describe
the procedures for completing the works.

2.1.9. Inspection and Testing

The Contractor shall establish an on site laboratory with calibrated equipment specified in
section 2.4. Qualified people shall be employed to carry out tests at the specified frequencies.
Additional tests may be carried out at laboratories approved by the Engineer remote from the
site. Where economically feasible or logistically desirable additional test equipment such as
concrete cube testing apparatus shall be installed in the laboratory. Test results shall be
submitted with each bill to verify the works comply with the specification. In the absence of test
results, cover up work shall not proceed until conforming results are submitted.
2.1.10. Control of Inspection, Measuring and Testing Equipment

The Contractor will ensure that all equipment used to construct the work is calibrated and
accurate. The Contractor will ensure that testing is carried out by laboratories which have the
skills and calibrated testing apparatus to carry out the required tests. (see typical list of
equipment that needs to be calibrated in Section 2.4
2.1.11. Inspection and Test status (Materials and Completed works)

504
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

The Contractor shall document all tests and non conformances

2.1.12. Control of non-conforming work
The Contractor shall document and ensure that non- conforming work is:
• Reworked to meet the specification
o (ie low compaction rectified by further rolling)
• Accepted with or without repair with concession
o (ie material accepted with a deduction in payment)
• Re-graded for alternative use
o (ie material that is unsuitable for pavement utilized in embankment where it conforms)
• Rejected and scrapped
o (ie material that has no use anywhere is removed and taken from site)

2.1.13. Corrective and Preventive Actions

The Contractor shall assess non-conforming work and ensure a process of corrective and
preventive measures to eliminate the root cause of non-conformances.

2.1.14. Handling storage Packaging, Preservation and Delivery

The Contractor shall manage storage of goods as per the specification

2.1.15. Control of Quality records

The Contractor shall maintain a secure documentation system to enable Quality records to be
retrieved as necessary.

2.1.16. Internal Quality Audits

The Contractor shall carry out regular self-checking to ensure the documentation and work
procedures and the works comply with the Contract and Specification

2.1.17. Training

The Contractor shall implement training programs to ensure all employees and subcontractors
are skilled for the work which they are to perform.

2.1.18. Safety, Environment and Social

The Contractor shall carry out the work in a safe and environmentally responsible manner in
accordance with the Contract and Specification.

505
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

LEVEL OF CROSS CHECKING

PROCEDURE 2.3
The IRC Code SP 57 2000 recommends four classes of quality assurance they are:
1. NOMINAL QUALITY ASSURANCE (Q1)– for village roads
2. NORMAL QUALITY ASSURANCE (Q2)– for ODR and Major District Roads
3. HIGH QUALITY ASSURANCE (Q3)– for State and National Highways
4. EXTRA HIGH QUALITY ASSURANCE (Q4) – Motorways & Special Conditions

In this manual, Quality as per IRC SP57 (Q2 level) is proposed for works to be carried out to the
MORT&H Specification & PWD Contract Agreement. Future projects may be extended to higher
levels of QA once the principles of QA are adopted within the construction industry.

The main aspects of activities which affect the quality of a road are as follows

PROJECT INVESTIGATION
Investigation and design data collection through PWD or
Adequacy and reliability of data specialized agencies

The Project will be prepared and approved by PWD

QA systems and documentation
Mapping and drawing preparation will be completed by a
Topological survey specialized design agency

Includes electronic distance measuring equipment, total

Survey equipments station, auto levels, etc. The equipment must be suitably
calibrated.

DESIGN AND DRAWING

506
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

External organisation with approved QA systems for checking

Organisation and review

…..tba….as per project scope

Longitudinal profiles of cross-section
…..tba …..As per project scope
Cross drainage and other services
Drawings are to be prepared as per MORT&H & IRC
Road furniture Specifications.

By …tba……. Supervision Consultants or PWD.

Design review and proof checking
By …tba……… Supervision Consultants in consultation with the
Design modifications due to site variations Employer or PWD.
or substitute materials or other reasons
The Contractor will submit these on completion of the works.
As built drawing
These will be prepared by the Consultants and handed over to
Maintenance of as built drawing designs, Employer at the conclusion of services.
specifications and construction records

CONTRACTUAL ASPECTS

507
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Prequalified as per bid requirements.

Prequalification Contractor
Complete contract documents with full specifications will be
Specification and contract documents available at site.

This will be prepared by the Contractor and approved by PWD.

Quality assurance manual
1 year as per Conditions of Contract. The guarantee period for
Defect liability period manufactured items is detailed in the MORT&H Specifications.

CONSTRUCTION ORGANISATION
The Contractor’s staff is responsible for the execution and
Organisation of Contractor routine testing in accordance with the MORT&H Specifications.

This is to be approved by PWD Engineer.

Organisation of Consultants (if employed)
Construction activities are to be planned in detail. This includes
Organization of planning of construction material sourcing, sequencing work, resource planning, method
activities of quality control, use of networks, review at regular intervals
and resource levelling.

Full time supervision of the work is to be undertaken by the PWD

Supervision/ Quality Surveillance Engineer until Quality Assurance principles are demonstrated to
be working effectively on site. There will also be periodic visits by
the Designer when requested.

Random audits will be undertaken by PWD Engineer.

Audit

MATERIALS
These will be purchased either from established suppliers or
Materials from natural source from other sources. Testing by the Contractor and approval
by the PWD Engineer is necessary.

Manufacturer’s test certificate is required for initial

Factory manufactured items including acceptance. Regular testing will be undertaken at specified
cement, steel & bitumen frequencies during construction. These frequencies will be
based on QA procedures.

Records of purchase dates and retention of manufacturer’s

Records for all materials test certificates will be ensured.

There will be a testing facility at site. Random audit and

Testing facilities Special testing is to be done at an independent laboratory by
the PWD Engineer at a mutually agreed frequency according
to QA procedures. An audit on the site laboratory will also be
undertaken. Laboratory equipment will be regularly

508
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

calibrated in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations.

509
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Sampling and testing will be conducted daily at the production

Coarse aggregates grading facility. The tests will be conducted as per the Specifications.

These will be conducted at the commencement of mix design

Physical tests and before any source changes.

This is mandatory for source selection and whenever there is a

Aggregate reactivity change in source.
At the time of mix design. The frequency of testing will be in
Fine aggregate (sand) accordance with the Specifications.

As per MORT&H Specifications.

Borrow materials (grading, physical tests)
At the time of selection and as per MORT&H Specifications.
Deleterious materials
To be tested at commencement, change of source and after the
Water suitability monsoon.

As per MORT&H Specifications.

Cement test
Chemical analyses will be conducted and approved.
Add mixture and its dosage
As per MORT&H Specifications.
Reinforcing steel
Physical tests are to be conducted prior to unloading the storage
Bitumen tanks. Chemical tests are to be conducted at commencement
and whenever there is a change of source.

Manufacturer’s test certificate is required and additional testing

Road marking is to be undertaken at the Consultant’s discretion.

As per relevant IRC Code SP 67 for permanent signs and IRC SP?
Road sign for temporary signs

Accept manufacturer’s test certificates.

Road furniture

WORKMANSHIP
Skilled workers having necessary training and experience are
Working of supervision required.

Testing is to be performed at the commencement of the work.

Mix design sub base, base and pavement Subsequent Quality Control as per MORT&H Specifications will
courses also be ensured.

Site bending by skilled workers is to be conducted with regular

Fabrication and fixing of reinforcement checks by supervisors. Bar bending schedules will be made and
checked by the Engineers. Placing of reinforcement is also to be
checked and approved by the Engineers.

510
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Form work
Materials Steel formwork to be used as specified in the Contract
Documents. Any other materials conforming to codes and
capable of giving the desired finish will be used only after
written approval of Engineer.

Design check Checking and approval will be conducted by the Bridge Design
Engineer.

Tolerance, geometric This is to be checked by the Engineer.

Earth works
Test for density As per the MORT&H Specifications, each compacted layer is to
be checked by the Engineer.

Geometry check All layers are to be crosschecked by the Engineer.

Equipments Vibrating rollers are mandatory.

Granular sub bases

Materials Materials are to be premixed to suitable grading as per the mix
design requirements.

Laboratory test Each layer to be sampled and tested as per the MORT&H
Specifications.

Granular bases/binder course bases

Aggregates Crushing and screening is mandatory.

Binder quality The binder will be tested upon arrival and unloaded to a storage
tank after the results have been obtained.

WORKMANSHIP
Paving Sensor paver.

Compaction Vibratory steel drum roller equipment is mandatory in addition

to PTR for BC Wearing Course.

Geometry checks The Engineer will crosscheck all layers.

Geometry checks The Engineer will crosscheck all layers.

Wearing course – Bituminous concrete

Materials Crushing and screening of aggregate is mandatory.

Mixing Weigh batch hot mix plant.

511
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Paving Sensor paver.

FIELD LABORATORY EQUIPMENT

PROCEDURE 2.4

Laboratory Equipments procured for this project are as follows:

GENERAL

⇒ 20 kg capacity self indicating scale. 1 No.

⇒ 500 gm capacity semi self-indicating electronic scale (Accuracy 0.01 gm). 2 No.
⇒ Sieves : as per I.S. 460-1962 1 No.
1 Set
⇒ I.S. Sieve sets 450 mm internal dia as per IS of required sieve sizes
complete with lid and pan.
1 Set
⇒ Sieve shaker capable of taking 200 mm and 450 mm dia sieves-electrically
operated with time switch assembly (As per IS)
1 No.
⇒ 100 tonnes compression testing machine
⇒ Glassware comprising beakers, pipettes, dishes, measuring cylinders (100
to 1000 cc capacity) glass rods and funnels, glass thermometers range 0° C 1 Set
to 100° C and metallic thermometers range upto 300° C, spatulas, wire
gauzes, steel scales, measuring tape, casseroles, karahis, enameled trays of
assorted sizes, pestle-mortar, porcelain dishes, gunny bags, plastic bags,
chemicals, digging tools like pickaxes, shovels etc

FOR SOILS
⇒ Compaction apparatus (Proctor) as per ISI-2720 (Part 7) complete with 1 No..
collar, base plate & rammers
⇒ Modified AASHTO compaction apparatus as per IS-2720 (Part 8) 1974 or 1 No.
Heavy Compaction Apparatus as per IS complete with collar, base plate
and rammer
⇒ Sand pouring cylinder with conical funnel and tap complete as pr IS-2720 2 No.
(Part 28) 1974 including modified equipment
⇒ Sampling tins with lids 100 mm dia x 75 mm ht. ½ kg capacity and 1 Set
miscellaneous items like moisture, tins with lid (50 grams) etc.
2 No.
⇒ Speedy moisture meter complete with chemicals

FOR CEMENT, CONCRETE AND MATERIALS

Cube moulds. 150 mm and 100 mm 12 nos.
Flakiness and elongation index test apparatus 1 nos
Aggregate Impact Test apparatus as per IS-2386 (Part 4) 1963 1 nos.
Equipment for slump test slump cone 2 nos.
Equipment for determination of specific gravity for fine and coarse aggregate as 1 No.

512
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

per IS-2386 (Part 3), 1963

Needle vibrator 3 No.
0.5 cu ft, 1 cu ft cylinder for checking bulk density of aggregate with tamping rod 1 Set

FOR CONTROL OF PROFILE AND SURFACE EVENNESS

Steel measuring tape 1 set
5 m long straight edge 2 Sets
30 m long measuring tape 1 Set

TESTING FREQUENCIES

PROCEDURE 2.4.1
A.1. Embankment/ Subgrade

Item Method Frequency Specification Engineer’s Audit Check

Frequency
Plasticity IS 2720 2 tests per <45% To check at least 15% of the tests
Index 3000 m³ during execution.
Part 5

Liquid Limit IS 2720 2 tests per <70% To check at least 15% of the tests
3000 m³ during execution.
Part 5
Free Swelling IS 2720 As required <50% To check at least 15% of the tests
Index during execution.
Part 5
Maximum Dry IS 2720 2 tests per 1.52gm/cc(min) To check at least15% of the tests
Density 3000 m³ during execution.
Part 8 for embankment
(Proctor)
1.75gm/cc(min)
for subgrade
CBR Value IS 2720 1 tests per >5% for To check at least 15% of the tests
3000 m³ embankment during execution.
Part 16
>8%for sub grade
Field Density IS 2720 2 tests per 97%for subgrade To check at least 15% of the tests
3000 m³ during execution.
Part 8 95%for
embankment

A.2. Granular Sub-Base

Item Method Frequency Specification Engineer’s Audit Check Frequency

513
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Liquid Limit IS 2720 1 tests per <25% To check at least 15% of the tests
200 m³ during execution
Part 5
Plasticity index IS 2720 1 tests per <6% To check at least 15% of the tests
200 m³ during execution.
Part 5
10% Fines BS 812, 1 tests per >50 KN To check at least 15% of the tests
Value Source during execution.
Part III

Water IS 2727 1 tests per <2% To check at least 15% of the tests
Absorption Source during execution.
Part 7
Maximum Dry IS 2720 2 tests per - To check at least 15% of the tests
Density 1000 m³ during execution.
Part 8

CBR Value IS 2720 1 tests per As per Grading To check at least 15% of the tests
3000 m³ during execution.
Part 16

Sieve Analysis IS 2386 1 tests per As shown in table To check at least 15% of the tests
100 m³ A.3 below during execution.
Part 1

A.3. Grading requirement for Granular Sub-Base

Sieve size (mm) Specification limits (percent passing)

Grading I Grading II Grading III

75 100 - -

53 80-100 100 -

25.5 55-90 70-100 100

9.5 35-65 50-80 65-95

4.75 25-65 40-65 50-80

2.36 20-40 30-50 40-65

0.425 10-25 15-25 20-35

0.075 3-10 3-10 3-10

CBR 30 25 20

514
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

A.4. Wet Mix Macadam&Non Bituminous Base Course

Item Method Frequency Specification Engineer’s Audit Check

Frequency

Los Angeles IS 2386, 1 test per <40% To check at least 15% of the
3
abrasion 200 m tests during execution
Part 4

Combined flakiness IS 2386 Part 1 test per <30% To check at least 15% of the
3
index 1 200 m tests during execution

Atterberg limits IS 2720, 1 test per - To check at least 15% of the

3
100 m tests during execution
Part 5

Plasticity index IS 2720 1 tests per <6% To check at least 15% of the
200 m³ tests during execution.
Part 5

Water Absorption IS 2727 1 tests per <2% To check at least 15% of the
Source tests during execution.
Part 7

Maximum Dry IS 2720 2 tests per - To check at least 15% of the

Density 1000 m³ tests during execution.
Part 8

Sieve Analysis IS 2386 1 tests per As per MORT&H To check at least 15% of the
100 m³ table 400-11 tests during execution.
Part 1

Field Density IS 2720 1 tests per 98% of Maximun To check at least 15% of the
2
500 m Dry Density tests during execution.
Part 28

A.5. Bituminous Macadam &Other Bituminous Base Course

Item Method Frequency Specification Engineer’s Audit Check
Frequency

Quality of IS 73, 1 tests per 60/70 unless To check at least 15% of tests
Binder lot during execution
IS 217, otherwise

IS 8887 Specified

515
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Los Angeles IS 2386, 1 test per <40% To check at least 15% of the
3
abrasion 50 m tests during execution
Part 4

Flakiness and IS 2386 1 test per <30% To check at least 15% of the
3
Elongation Part 1 50 m tests during execution

Soundness IS 2386, 1 test per <12 for NgSO4 To check at least 15% of the
3
50 m tests during execution
Part 5 <18% for MgSO4

Stripping test IS 6241 1 test per >95% To check at least 15% of the
3
100 tests during execution.

Absorption IS 2720 3 tests per <2% To check at least 15% of the

Source tests during execution.
Part 8

Grading of IS 2386 1 test per As per job mix To check at least 15% of the
3
aggregates Part 1 25 m formula tests during execution.

Density of ASTM- 1 test per As per MORT&H To check at least 15% of the
2
compacted 250 m Section 900 tests during execution.
layer D 1559

A.6. Concrete

Item Method Frequency Specification Engineer’s Audit Check

Frequency

Aggregate IS 2386 1 tests per <30% To check at least 15% of tests

lot during execution
Impact Value

Los Angeles IS 2386, 1 test per 50 <40% To check at least 15% of the
3
abrasion m tests during execution
Part 4

Flakiness and IS 2386 1 test per <35% To check at least 15% of the
Elongation source tests during execution
Part 1

Specific IS 2727 1 test per - To check at least 15% of the

516
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Gravity Part 8 Source tests during execution

Absorption IS 2720 1 test per <2% To check at least 15% of the

Source tests during execution.
Part 8

Soundness IS 2386, 1test per <12 for NgSO4 To check at least 15% of the
source tests during execution
Part 5 <18% for MgSO4

Grading of IS 2386 1 test per To check at least 15% of the

source tests during execution.
Aggregates Part1

Compressive IS 516 As per the As per the table To check at least 15% of the
Strength table below below tests during execution.

Compressive strength of the concrete shall be tested in accordance with IS 516. Three test
specimens of 150mm cubes (cubes shall be prepared as per IS 1199) shall be made, cured
and tested at the age of 28 days for compressive strength in each samples. The minimum
frequency of sampling of concrete of each grade shall be as per the following table.

Quantity of Concrete in No. of Samples Acceptance Criteria

3
Work, M

1- 5 1 • The mean strength determined from any

group of four consecutive samples should
6 - 15 2
exceed the specified characteristic
16- 30 3 compressive strength.
31- 50 4 • Strength of any sample is not less than the
specified characteristic compressive strength
51 and above 4 plus one additional sample for
3 minus 3 Mpa.
each additional 50m or part
thereof

The above tests are those most likely required to provide assurance of quality in road and
bridge works. Additional to the above tests the Engineer may request tests in accordance with
testing frequencies specified in MORT&H Specification for Road and Bridge works Table 900
and those required under the Special Conditions of Contract.

517
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

FLOWCHART FOR PROCUREMENT OF MANUFACTURED ITEMS

PROCEDURE 2.5

PREQUALIFICATION OF SOURCES

INSPECTION & TESTS AT SOURCE

BITUMINOUS AND
CONCRETE MIXES
MANUFACTURED OUTSIDE Non Conformance NonConformance BATCHED ON SITE (OR
OUTSIDE)

TRIAL ORDER TRIAL MIX

REJECTION

Conformance Conformance

PURCHASE ORDER NON-CONFORMANCE

SITE TRIAL

RECEIPT OF MATERIALS TEST & INSPECTIONS

TEST & INSPECTIONS PRODUCTION

REJECTION
Conformance Conformance
NON-CONFORMANCE

ACCEPT MATERIAL ACCEPT WORK

CONTRACT REFERENCES
Trial Mix Procedure for Bituminous Work
Bituminous Macadam MORT&H Clause. 504.2.3 and 504.3.4

Dense Bituminous Macadam MORT&H Clause. 507.3

518
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Bituminous Concrete MORT&H Clause 509

Trial Mix for Concrete

MORT&H Clause 1704.2

The Contractor shall maintain separate registers for recording the mixing and delivery of all
materials. A summary of each days work will be forwarded to the Supervision Consultant.

519
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

METHODOLOGY AND CHECKLISTS

PROJECT QUALITY PLAN

PROCEDURE NUMBER 2.6

520
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

METHODOLOGY FOR ROAD WORKS

PROCEDURE 2.6.1

OBJECTIVE
The purpose of this procedure is to establish the construction procedure, equipment requirements, role
of the Contractor and Specification requirements for road works.

FIXING OF ROAD ALIGNMENT (FIXING OF CENTER LINE AND TOE

LINE). EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Total Station, Ranging Rod, Auto Level, Staff.

Execution Procedure

Procedure Responsibility Check by Remarks/Records

The center line Surveyor Consultant’s Interval of 50m c/c longitudinally and
and toe line Surveyoras per shifted beyond toe line in right of way on
fixing MOST 902.2 for both sides.
horizontal
alignment

Role of Contractor
The Contractor is responsible for maintaining the centreline pillar and for shifting it to the main
carriageway during the construction of embankment/ subgrade. The Contractor has to mark the toe line
in every layer of filling.

ROAD WAY – CLEARING & GRUBBING

Equipment Required
Dozer/Grader, Excavator, Dumpers.

Execution Procedure
After fixing the centre line and toe line, the clearing and grubbing activities are to commence. The
formation width has to be cleared of any vegetation. The dozer/excavator will remove about
150mm and free the stretch from materials such as bushes, shrubs, stumps, grass, weeds, top
organic soil etc. The dozed material will be completely cleared from the toe width. Roots and
stumps that were not removed by the dozer will be excavated and disposed of. All excavation
below the ground level arising resulting from the removal of tree stumps will be filled with a
suitable material and compacted thoroughly so as to make the surface at this point conform to
surrounding area. If the area is water logged it has to be dewatered and exposed to the sun till it
dries out. After the stretch is cleared, base preparation activity follows.

521
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Role of Contractor

The whole activity as discussed above is part of Contractor’s responsibility.

EXCAVATION

PROCEDURE 2.6.2

OBJECTIVE
The purpose of this procedure is to outline the process involved in:

⇒ excavating the roadway to the required dimensions and levels as per the Drawings,
⇒ removing excavated earth, and

⇒ Storing the material for reuse or disposal at places agreed with clients.
Remarks/
Procedure Responsibility Check by Records
Set out Excavation limits at 50 meter Contractor Field Engineer
intervals in plain terrain, and at 20 meter
intervals in all curve points true to lines,
curves, slopes, grades and sections.
Agree with Engineer regarding the disposal Contractor Field Engineer Location of
area and inform the Engineer of the disposable area
quantity. record to be
maintained

Check ground water levels and implement Contractor Field Engineer

dewatering systems if required. Keep
standby DW Systems during Monsoon.

Excavate manually or mechanically to Contractor

required lines and levels. Make sure depths
do not exceed the requirements.

Trim and Level manually at final level Contractor Field Engineer

(tolerance +20mm).

522
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

BASE PREPARATION
PROCEDURE 2.6.3

OBJECTIVE
This procedure involves the levelling and compacting of the original ground over which
embankment/subgrade will be placed. (This procedure is in accordance with the
requirements of MORT&H 305.3.4.)

EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Grader, Roller, and Water Tanker.

ROLE OF CONTRACTOR
Base preparation is to be carried out by the Contractor. The Contractor shall arrange all
tests and the Engineer shall observe and randomly audit and check test samples.

EXECUTION PROCEDURE

Procedure Responsibility Check by Remarks/

Records
The base sample is taken and given to the Lab CBR to be
checked by the
lab in charge to determine the modified Engineer.
proctor density and CBR value.

After bed preparation, field density tests should Lab Density of 95%
be carried out to determine the degree of compaction on
compaction. MDD to be
checked by the
Engineer.

Non Conformity
There will be “non conformity” when the ground does not have 95% relative compaction with
respect to the dry density.

Corrective Action
The ground will be scarified and water will be sprinkled uniformly at a controlled rate mixed in
the soil by blading, discing or harrowing. This will help to obtain a uniform moisture content
throughout the depth of the layer. The soil will then be compacted by a vibratory roller.
Control of moisture will be achieved by a rapid moisture meter after calibration.

523
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

EMBANKMENT FILLS
PROCEDURE 2.6.4
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Excavators, Dumpers, Water Tankers, Vibratory Roller, Dozer, Motor Graders.

PREREQUISITES
Selection and approval of Borrow Area as per Procedure 2.5 in this Manual: Control of Materials.

Procedure Responsibility Check by Remarks/Records

The approved borrow Contractor Lab Material is as per
area material is brought MORT&H 3.5.2.1.
to the stretch Approved test reports
for the borrow area are
necessary.

The dumped material is Contractor Field Engineer Where the layer

to be graded and spread. thickness is in excess of
The layer thickness is not that required, the excess
to exceed 200mm. material is to be moved
to a deficient zone.

The spread material Contractor Field Engineer

should be made free of
deleterious materials
such as twigs, stems and
large boulders.

The spread material is to Contractor

be graded to the
required camber.

The stretch is to be Contractor as per Lab - OMC and MDD for The amount of water to
watered properly so as MORT&H 305.3.5 compaction – 2 test for be added to the soil will
3
to achieve required every 3000 m of soil. be calculated as OMC
OMC. minus NMC.

Checked by the Engineer

Proof rolling should be
carried out to check the
Contractor
number of passes to

524
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Procedure Responsibility Check by Remarks/Records

attain the MDD.

When moisture content Contractor as per

of stretch has reached MORT&H 305.3.6
requisite OMC, the
stretch is to be rolled to
achieve the desired
compaction.
After rolling, testing will Contractor Lab. Compaction 95% as
be carried out to check per table 300.2, CL:900
the required compaction MORT&H
has been achieved.
Cross-checked by the
Consultant’s Field
Engineers.
The Contractor will take Contractor Engineer Level check sheet
levels for alternate
layers.

Camber preparation Contractor Field Engineer

string method is to be
used.

Formation layer nos. Contractor Field Engineer

shall be marked by paint.

Non Conformity
This will occur when the mean dry density is less than specified dry density.

The Standard Deviation of at least 5 test results should be below 0.08g/cc.

Corrective Action
⇒ Increase the number of passes, scarify, control the moisture and re-compact.

⇒ When the Standard Deviation is more than 0.08g/ccm, increase the number of tests and
identify the stretch showing the wide variation from mean field dry density. Solve the
problem by conducting confirmatory tests for samples collected from areas along the
stretch.

525
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

SUBGRADE PREPARATION
PROCEDURE 2.6.5

EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Grader, Dozer, Water Tanker and Vibratory Roller.

ROLE OF CONTRACTOR
The above activity is to be carried out by the Contractor. The Consultant will conduct all
necessary testing.

PREPARATION
MATERIAL
Remarks/
Procedure Responsibility Check by Records
When the subgrade is prepared, the Contractor’s The Engineer Record file
soil will be checked for a compaction Laboratory. One
of 97%. test per 250m
length of road.

The subgrade material will be spread in Contractor Field Engineer Test report
layers of uniform thickness and
compacted. The layer thickness is not to
exceed 200mm.

WATER APPLICATION
Optimum Moisture Content (OMC) and Contractor’s The Engineer Test reports
Maximum Dry density (MDD) will be Laboratory.
determined for the light compaction at a
3
frequency of 2 tests for every 3000 m of
soil.

The amount of water to be added to

the soil will be calculated as OMC
minus NMC. The water will be
sprinkled from a water tanker
uniformly with a controlled flow rate.

526
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

MIXING OF SOIL
After adding the required amount of Contractor
water as per MORT&H 5.3.6.3, the soil
will be mixed by graders, harrows, or
rotary mixers (rotators) until the layer is
uniformly wet. Hard lumps of earth will
be broken to a maximum size of 75mm.

Proof Rolling Contractor Checked by the

Engineer

COMPACTION
Each layer of the material will be Contractor The Engineer Layer thickness <
thoroughly compacted to the specified 200
densities by a vibratory roller that has a
static weight of 16 tons.

Field density tests will be conducted at a Contractor Cross checked by

frequency of one measurement for every Field Engineers
2
250m of compacted area for each layer.
The sand replacement method will be
used.

After completion of cut and fill Contractor

operations, the surface will be proof
rolled by 6-8 passes of a 10-ton roller.
Formation layer nos. shall be marked by Contractor
paint.

Non Conformity
The Mean Dry Density of 10 test results should not be less than the specified dry density.

The Standard deviation of at least 10 test results should be below 0.08g/cc.

Corrective Action
Increase number of passes, scarify, control the moisture and re-compact.

In the case where the Standard Deviation is more than 0.08g/cu cm, the number of tests should be
increased to identify the stretch showing wide variation from mean field dry density. The problem can
be addressed by doing confirmatory tests for samples collected from areas along the stretch.

527
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

GRANULAR SUBBASE
PROCEDURE 2.6.6

OBJECTIVE
This procedure relates to the laying and compacting of well-graded material onto prepared
subgrade in accordance with MORT&H 401.1.

EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Excavator, Dumpers, Dozer, Grader, Water Tanker, and Vibratory Roller.

PREREQUISITE
Before this process can commence, the selection and approval of Material Source/ Borrow
Area of Crushed Materials (as per Procedure 2.5, Control of Materials) must be completed.

Remarks/
Procedure Responsibility Check by Records
The GSB material will be brought from an
approved borrow area/crusher site.

The material brought to site will be identified Contractor Laboratory as per

and approved for laying. MORT&H 401.4.2

The sub base layer will be laid in a single layer Contractor

of thickness 150mm by grader.

The required amount of water (i.e. 1% above Contractor

to 2% below the OMC requirement), will be
added until layer is uniformly wet.

Each layer will be compacted by a vibratory Contractor Surface

roller of 16 tons capacity. Tolerance: -
20mm, +10mm
FDD:98% of MDD
FieldEngineer

Rolling will be commenced at the lower edge Contractor In areas of cross

and proceed towards the upper edge fall (camber) on
longitudinally for the areas of unidirectional both sides, rolling
crossfall (camber) and superelevation. will commence
from the edges
and progress
towards the
center.

528
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Remarks/
Procedure Responsibility Check by Records
Rolling will be done uniformly, overlapping the Contractor The speed of the
preceding pass of rolling by not less than one- roller will not
third of the track. exceed 5km per
hour.

The grade and camber will be checked during Contractor Surface Any high spots or
rolling work for high spots or depression. Tolerance:- depressions will
20mm, +10mm, be corrected by
FDD:98% of MDD removing or
adding fresh
material.

Rolling will be continued till the field density is Contractor Field Engineer Field density for
achieved. each compacted
layer will be
checked at the
rate of one test
2
per 500m .

NON CONFORMITY
The mean dry density of 10 test results should not be less than specified dry density.

Standard deviation of at least 10 test results should be below 0.08g/cc.

CORRECTIVE ACTION
Increase number of passes, scarify, control the moisture and re-compact.

When the Standard Deviation is more than 0.08g/cc, increase the number of tests and
identify the stretch showing wide variation from mean field dry density. Solve the problem by
doing confirmatory tests for samples collected from areas along the stretch.

529
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

WET MIX MACADAM

PROCEDURE 2.6.7

OBJECTIVE
This sections outlines the procedure for laying and compacting clean, crushed, graded aggregate and
granular material onto a prepared subbase (GSB) as per the requirement of MORT&H 406.0.

The material shall be laid in one or more layers in accordance with the approved drawings.

EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Wet Mix Plant (60t/Hr.), Grader, Vibratory Roller, Water Tanker, and Paver.

Before this activity commences, the following activities must be completed.

⇒ Identification of the plant locations - preferably equidistant from both start and end of the
package.

⇒ Leasing of the identified area.

⇒ Construction of foundations.

⇒ Erection of plant.

⇒ Identification of the aggregate source and confirmation of its acceptability as per

MORT&H table 400-10/11.

⇒ Transportation of aggregate and stacking near the plant.

⇒ Preparation of job mix formula.

530
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Execution Procedure
Procedure
Responsibility Check by Remarks/

Records
Wet Mix Macadam will be prepared in the plant with
controlled addition of water.
Contractor Laboratory The granular
material will be of
crushed stone
conforming to
MORT&H
406.2.1.1

The wet mix will be spread either by a paver Contractor Surface Tolerance : The required
finisher or motor grader to the full width of camber will be
+10mm, -10mm
formation (i.e. carriageway and hard given using peg
shoulders) without the segregation of larger and string.
and finer particles.
Immediately after mixing, the aggregates Contractor
will be spread uniformly with
paver/motor grader evenly upon the
prepared subbase in layers of 150mm
(compacted thickness).
Layers along forms, kerbs, walls or other Contractor
places not accessible to the roller will be
thoroughly compacted (to achieve 98%
relative compaction) with mechanical
tampers or a plate compactor.
Skin patching of surface area will be Contractor
scarified to permit the proper bonding of
added material.
After the rolling is completed the stretch Laboratory, 98% Checked by The rolling is to be
MDD (heavy done by 6-8 passes
is to be tested for degree of Field Engineer
compaction) as of roller.
compaction. per IS 2720 OR
MORT&H Cl.
903.3.1

After final compaction of WMM course, the Contractor

road will be allowed to dry for 24 hours. No
vehicular traffic of any kind will be allowed
on the finished WMM surface till it has
dried and the wearing course laid.

531
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Preventive Actions to be Taken

Before laying and spreading of material, the shoulder on both sides will be constructed. This will
laterally confine the wet mix macadam while compacting.

No depression should be filled with unmixed and ungraded, material or fines.

Non Conformity
The mean dry density of 10 test results should not be less than specified dry density.

Standard deviation of at least 10 test results should be below 0.08g/cc.

Surface irregularities should not appear.

Corrective Action
Increase the number of passes, scarify, control the moisture and re-compact.

When the Standard Deviation is more than 0.08g/ccm, increase the number of tests and
identify the stretch showing the variation from mean field dry density. Solve the problem by
conducting confirmatory tests for samples collected from areas along the stretch.

Irregularities should be within recommended tolerance. If they are not, then loosen, add or
remove, level and recompact. Minimum patch areas should be 5m long x 2m wide.

532
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

DENSE BITUMINOUS MACADAM

PROCEDURE 2.6.8

SCOPE
This procedure relates to the laying of Dense Bituminous Macadam with approved Mix
Design for the required thickness.

PREREQUISITE
Approval of materials as per procedure 2.5 in this Manual.

EQUIPMENTS REQUIRED
Batch-type Hot Mix Plant, Sensor Paver, Tandem Roller, Pneumatic Tyre Roller, Dump Trucks
(15 and 25 ton capacity).

Remarks/
Procedure Responsibility Check by Records
The WMM surface will be swept of dust and foreign Contractor Field Engineer
matter.

A priming coat over the Wet Mix Macadam for the Contractor Field Engineer The
first layer of DBM will be applied, followed by a tack bituminous
coat over the first DBM layer for the second layer primer will be
of DBM. sprayed/
distributed
uniformly over
the dry surface
at the rate of
6-9kg per
10sq.m as per
MORT&H
502.0.

PREPARATION AND TRANSPORTATION OF THE MIX

Bituminous macadam mix will be prepared in a Hot Contractor The DBM
Mix weigh batch plant to attain uniform quality mix. produced will
be transported
in dumpers. It
will be
covered with
tarpaulin to
maintain

533
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Remarks/
Procedure Responsibility Check by Records
temperature.
Temperature of binder at the time of mixing will be Contractor
in the range of 150°C to 163°C and the difference in
temperature between the binder and aggregate will
at no time exceed 14°C.

Mixing will be done thoroughly to obtain a Laboratory.

homogenous mixture in which all the particles of The mix
aggregates are uniformly coated. discharge
temperature
will be 130°C-
160°C.
The mix will be transported from the hot mix plant Contractor
to the site with suitable tipper vehicles.

SPREADING
The mix transported from the hot mix plant to the Contractor
site will be spread by means of paver finisher to the
specified grade, lines and cross section.

The mix will be laid manually in restricted locations Contractor

and in narrow widths.

The temperature of mix at the time of laying will be Contractor Cross checked
in the range of 120° - 159°C. by Field
Engineer

Longitudinal joints and edges will be constructed Contractor

true to the delineating lines, parallel to the
centerline of the road.

Longitudinal and transverse joints will be Contractor

constructed at least 250mm from those in the lower
courses. The joints on the top most layer will not be
allowed to fall within the wheel path.

All transverse joints will be cut vertically to the full Contractor

thickness of previously laid mix with asphalt cutter/
pavement breaker. The surface will be painted with
hot bitumen before placing the fresh material.

Longitudinal joints will be preferably hot joints. Cold Contractor

longitudinal joints will be properly heated with joint

534
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Remarks/
Procedure Responsibility Check by Records
heater to attain a temperature of about 80°C before
laying adjacent material.

After the spreading of mix, rolling will be done Contractor

immediately with a speed no greater than 5km per
hour. Due care will be taken to avoid unduly
roughening the pavement surface.

Initial or break down rolling will be done with 8-10 Contractor Checked by
tonne static weight smooth-wheeled roller. Field Engineer
The intermediate rolling will be done with 8-10 Contractor Checked by
tonne static weight vibratory roller/pneumatic tyre Field Engineer
roller.

The finish rolling will be done with 8 ton weight Contractor Checked by
smooth wheeled tandem roller. Field Engineer

All compaction operations of initial and Contractor

intermediate rolling will be accomplished by using
vibratory tandem roller of 8-10 ton static weight.

During the initial and finish rolling, no vibratory Contractor

compaction will be used.

The wheels of roller will be kept moist to prevent Contractor

the mix from adhering to them.

Rolling of the longitudinal joints will be done Contractor

immediately behind the paving operations. After
this, the rolling operations will commence
longitudinally from edges and proceed towards
the center, except on superelevated and
unidirectional cambered portions, where it will
progress from the lower to upper edge parallel to
the center line of the pavement.
Rolling will be continued till the density is at least Test reports
98% that of the Laboratory Marshall specimen. statistical
method of
acceptance
MORT&H
Clause 903.4.2.

Core sample taken after 24hours for density test. Contractor/ Core density
Field Engineer checked in the
jointly presence of

535
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Remarks/
Procedure Responsibility Check by Records
Field Engineer

BITUMINOUS CONCRETE WEARING COURSE

PROCEDURE 2.6.9

OBJECTIVE
The work shall consist of laying bituminous base concrete of thickness 40mm on a previously
prepared bituminous course.

EQUIPMENT REQUIRED

Batch or drum type Hot Mix Plant, Sensor Paver, Tandem Roller, Pneumatic Tyre Roller, Dump
Trucks (15 and 25 tons capacity).

Remarks/
Procedure Responsibility Check by Records
The base on which bituminous concrete is to Field Engineer
be laid will be prepared, shaped and
conditioned to the specified levels.

The surface will be thoroughly swept of dust Contractor Field Engineer

and foreign matter.

TACK COAT
A single layer of tack coat will be applied on a Contractor Field Engineer Single coat will be
bituminous layer a bituminous
emulsion in the
normal spraying
temperature of
20°C-60°C.

PREPARATION AND TRANSPORTATION OF MIX

Same as dense bituminous macadam

SPREADING

The mix transported from the Hot Mix plant Contractor Field Engineer The mix will be
to the site will be spread by means of a paver laid manually in
finished to the specified grade, lines and restricted
cross-section. locations and

536
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Remarks/
Procedure Responsibility Check by Records
narrow widths.

The temperature of the mix at the time of Contractor Field Engineer

laying will be in the range of 120°C-160°C.

Longitudinal joints and edges will be Contractor Field Engineer Longitudinal and
constructed true to the delineating lines, transverse joints
parallel to the centerline of the road. will be
constructed by at
least 250mm
offset from those
in the lower
courses.

All transverse joints will be cut vertically to Contractor Field Engineer

the full thickness of previously laid mix with
an asphalt cutter/ pavement breaker. The
surface will be painted with hot bitumen
before placing the fresh material.

Longitudinal joints will be preferably hot Contractor Field Engineer

joints. Cold longitudinal joints will be
properly heated with joint heater to attain a
temperature of about 80°C before laying
adjacent material.

compaction
After the spreading of mix, rolling will be Contractor Field Engineer Initial or break
done immediately with a speed no greater down rolling will
than 5km per hour. Rolling operations will be be done with 8-10
completed before the temperature of the tones static
mix falls below 100°C. weight smooth-
wheeled roller.

Rolling of the longitudinal joints will be done Contractor Field Engineer Rolling will be
immediately behind the paving operations. proceed on the
After this, the rolling operations will fresh material
commence longitudinally from the edges and with rear or fixed
proceed towards the center, except on wheel leading so
superelevated and unidirectional cambered as to minimize the
portions, where it will progress from the pushing of the
lower to upper edge parallel to the center mix. Each pass of
line of the pavement. the roller will
overlap the
preceding one by
half the width of

537
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

Remarks/
Procedure Responsibility Check by Records
the rear wheel.

Rolling will be continued till the density Contractor Field Engineer Test reports.
achieved at least 97% of that of lab Marshall Statistical method
specimen. for acceptance
MORT&H Clause
903.2.2.

Traffic will be allowed after completion of the Contractor

final rolling when the mix has cooled down to
the surrounding temperature.

A core is taken 24hours after compaction and Check in presence

checked for density. of Consultant’s
Materials
Engineer

538
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

BACKFILLING, COMPACTION, RUBBLE PACKING

PROCEDURE 2.6.10

OBJECTIVE
This procedure relates to backfilling and compacting areas around structures.

Procedure Responsibility Check by Remarks/Recor

ds
Bench the vertical sides of excavation so Contractor Field Engineer
that adequate space is created between the
abutment/retaining walls and Excavation as
to allow a Place Compactor inside.
Mark Layer Levels and Number (on walls). Contractor Field Engineer

Sample Backfill material, determine OMC Contractors Lab Field Engineer

and MDD.
Premix water in the fill material, maintain +2% Contractor Field Engineer
above optimum level, spread to required level
and compact using Compactor (Min.10-12
passes).

Determine in situ Density (Minimum of 3 tests Lab Field Engineer

2
per 200m ).

Proceed with compacting in layers till required Contractor

level is reached.

Manually place 600mm filter media in parallel Contractor Investigate

with backfill layer. cheaper
alternatives (no-
fines concrete?)

Check level, control undulations. Contractor Field Engineer

539
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

FORMWORK

PROCEDURE 2.6.11

OBJECTIVE
This section outlines the procedure to be adopted when constructing Formwork for Retaining
Walls, Columns, Beams, Slabs, etc. that are true to dimensional requirements, water
tightness, rigidity, etc. as per Designs/ Standard practices.

Procedure Responsibilit Check by Remarks/Records

y
Review Construction drawings, Contractor Engineer
design system formwork, and prepare with
formwork drawings/sketches. delegated
authority

Calculate the material requirements Contractor

based on drawings.

Fabricate standard Panels for Retention Contractor Field

Walls, Columns, Beam sides, etc. as per Engineer
drawings.

For in situ forms, place props over solid

bases or timber over compacted ground.

Check all cross falls and joints. Field

Engineer

Clean, apply mould release, and place Contractor

Reinforcement Concrete.

Deshutter at specified time and Contractor

strengthen without shock. Stack all
components neatly for reuse.

540
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

REINFORCEMENT CUTTING, BENDING, FIXING

PROCEDURE 2.6.12

OBJECTIVE
This section discusses the following issues:

The receipt and stacking of reinforcement

The approval of reinforcement
The cutting and bending of reinforcement as per the bar schedules
The minimisation of waste

Procedure Responsibility Check by Remarks/Recor

ds
Obtain Construction Drawings and prepare Contractor The bar
a bar schedule. Calculate the required schedule is to
quantities. be approved by
the Engineer.

Select the reinforcement suppliers either by Contractor

independent testing or reviewing the test
certificates.

Place the order. Contractor

Receive the order and stack diameter-wise. Contractor.

They should be covered with tarpaulin and
stacked in line with the cutting machine.

If the Steel has not been tested before Contractor, Field Engineer
delivery, collect samples and send for testing. Laboratory

Prepare the bar bending schedule from the Contractor Field Engineer
approved working drawings.

Cut, bend and dispatch to site.

Receive the reinforcement at the site. Contractor

Mark the spacing using chalk; place the Contractor

bars in both directions and fix.

541
 PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

CONCRETING: GENERAL

PROCEDURE 2.6.13

OBJECTIVE
To ensure the right quality of mix is manufactured, placed and vibrated such that the structure
achieves the desired finish, strength and durability.

This procedure also applies to Bituminous Works – General.

EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Concrete Batching Plant, Concrete Transit Mixer 6 cu m capacity, concrete skip and
crane, poker vibrators, concrete pump.

Procedure Responsibility Check by Remarks/

Records
Prepare Concreting Program for the Contractor’s
following week. Engineer in charge
of Structures

Ensure availability of Aggregates, Sand,

Cement Admixtures, etc. If Materials
are deficient, initiate action.

Ensure Batching Plant, Transit Mixer, Contractor

and Pump are maintained. If problems
are anticipated, provide for standby or
alternate supply.

Contemplate emergency stop-end Contractor Field Engineer Obtain advance

procedures. permission from the
Engineer

Formwork and reinforcement is to be Contractor Field Engineer

approved.

Check Pour Card has been approved. Engineer in charge Checked by Field
of Structures Engineer

Site Engineer to set up Crane or Pump Contractor

in position, check all equipment
(Vibrator, Compressor, etc) and keep
Stand-bys available.

542
PWD MANUAL REVISED EDITION 2012

543